THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY,

INCLUDING

ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, ann GEOLOGY.

Y (BEING A CONTINUATION OF THE ‘ANNALS’ COMBINED WITH LOUDON AND

. CHARLESWORTH’S ‘ MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.’ )

CONDUCTED BY

ALBERT C. L. G. GUNTHER, M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.R.S.,

WILLIAM S. DALLAS, F.LS.,

WILLIAM CARRUTHERS, F.R.S., F.L.S., F.GS.,

AND

WILLIAM FRANCIS, Ph.D., F.L.S.

ECan

VOL, XII.—FIFTH SERIES, ?

Vo 5 etic le, \

AARZI1O a)

Lotions Muse yee

LONDON:

f PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS.

7 SOLD BY LONG GREEN, READER, AND DYER; SIMPKIN, MARSHALL,

i AND CO.; KENT AND CO.; WHITTAKER AND CO.; BAILLIERE, PARIS:

| MACLACHLAN AND STEWART, EDINBURGH :

HODGES, FOSTER, AND CO., DUBLIN: AND ASHER, BERLIN.

q 1883.

“Omnes res create: sunt divine sapientia et potentix testes, divitia felicitatis

human :—ex harum usu Jonitas Creatoris; ex pulchritudine sapientia Domini;

ex cconomid in conservatione, proportione, renovatione, potentia majestatis

elucet. Earum itaque indagatio ab hominibus sibi relictis semper estimata ;

a veré eruditis et sapientibus semper exculta; malé doctis et barbaris semper

inimica fuit.”’—Linnavs.

‘Quel que soit le principe de la vie animale, il ne faut qu’ouvrir les yeux pour

voir qu’elle est le chef-d’ceuvre de la Toute-puissance, et le but auquel se rappor-

tent toutes ses opérations.”—Bruckner, Théorie du Systéme Animal, Leyden,

1767.

week we wees Ae mlbersylvanipowers

Obey our summons; from their deepest dells

The Dryads come, and throw their garlands wild

And odorous branches at our feet; the Nymphs

That press with nimble step the mountain-thyme

And purple heath-flower come not empty-handed,

But scatter round ten thousand forms minute

Of velvet moss or lichen, torn from rock

Or rifted oak or cavern deep: the Naiads too

Quit their loved native stream, from whose smooth face

They crop the lily, and each sedge and rush

That drinks the rippling tide: the frozen poles,

Where peril waits the bold adventurer’s tread,

The burning sands of Borneo and Cayenne,

All, all to us unlock their secret stores

And pay their cheerful tribute.

J. Taytor, Norwich, 1818.

RC F

CONTENTS OF VOL. XIL.

[FIFTH SERIES, ]

NUMBER LXVIL.

Page

1. Materials towards the History of Anchinia. By A. Kowa.vev-

any and J, -Bannotg, + (Plates [—1M1.).. coer et ole oe ee nae 1

Il. On the Mutual Relations of the Bunotherian Mammalia. By

pt) MCC Eg eee rah ota Mawes tarde a Kitsap Wiest ¢ ols oe a WS Suitrsaed ne Aisle ate 20

ILI. On the Microscopic Structure of thin Slices of Fossil Calci-

epunpico-e by bind. CARTER, WOR 5. SC. 3 ca ee eu csow dace mnaeans 26

IV. On the Presence of Starch-granules in the Ovum of the Marine

Sponges, and on the Ovigerous Layer of Suberites domuncula, Nardo.

Se Neral AEM Ra GcG i) a. laste a cient eal ataiay a pig shed aye) abe d slvlch 30

V. The Microscopic Sexual Characteristics of the American, Portu-

guese, and Common Edible Oyster of Europe compared. By Joun

“3. JESSIE GS ORIE WGEInIE Con Gr CIR OD Clog aeitien Sue crccmomaccies cn od

VI. Occurrence of Rhinodon typicus, Smith, on the West Coast of

Pe erry inept yay ae ATV gy basic an creas) che se) ana ok SL Ro ah » asdf suaiw st om oant 48

VII. On a Third Collection of Lepidoptera made by Mr. H. FE.

Hobson in Formosa. By Arruur G. BuruEr, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e. . 50

VIII. Note on the Detection of Polycystina within the hermeti-

cally closed Cavities of certain Nodular Flints. By Surgeon-Major

Separate rE Ue Gime ry aR, edt AN aes 5 lee oars lacahenaloises a 3 Ale woleeke 52

IX. Notes on the Structure, Postembryonic Development, and

Systematic Position of Scolopendrella. By J. Woop-Mason, Deputy

Superintendent, Indian Museum, Calcutta ........... 0... cee eee, 53

Proceedings of the Geological Society.....,.....0.+sceeeecues 63—65

New Book :—The Young Collector's Handbook of Shells. By B. B.

KO OD RE Cras OCG. aa eats is as nie s/ahs cn sn Raine aieisanaua as meee 65

1V CONTENTS.

Page

The “Crag Mollusca,” by Searles V. Wood, F.G.S. ; Mediterranean

Mollusca, by J. Gwyn Jeffreys, LL.D., F.R.S.; Further Obser-

vations on the Dimorphism of the Foraminifera, by MM. Munier-

Chalmas and Schlumberger; On Radial and Bilateral Symmetry

in Animals, by H. W. Conn; Observations on Blastogenesis and

Alternation of Generations in the Salpe and Pyrosomata, by M.

ONCE <5 a 550 ah celeron rte ret one ha pee ea ae eee 66—70

NUMBER LXVIII.

X. Further Contribution to the Knowledge of the Family Trntin-

nodea.. By Dr. Hermann Fou. (Plate TV:).........-0. + -es sem 75

XI. Descriptions of some new Genera and Species of Curculionidae, _

mostly Asiatic.—Part II. By Francis P. Pascor ..... Oe re. 88

XII. On some Lepidoptera from the Victoria Nyanza. By

ARTHUR G. BULLER, FILS. EUZiS, ccs) ae mime eee 101

XIII. Descriptions of two new Species of Milionta, a Genus of

the Lepidopterous Family Luschemide. By Artuur G. BuriEr,

104) Ges Pal On Ate Pat aa ee Mineo Pee et tion 107

XIV. On Rudimentary Wings in the Coleoptera. By Dr. H.

1056 6 A ee Sr Mae Rene MME ERAGE. oo « c 108

XV. On the Systematic Relations of the Carnivora Fissipedia.

By E. D. Cops

XVI. Notes on the Mollusca in the Great International Fisheries

Exhibition, London, 1883, with the Description of a new Species of

Pleurotoma. By J. Gwyn JEFFreys, LL.D., F.RS. ...........- 116

XVII. On two Freshwater Sponges (Spongilla nitens, Carter, and

S. Bohmit, sp. n.) collected by Dr. R. Bohm in the River Ugalla near

Lake Tanganyika, By M. EiiremnpoRr | .. 2... 2. <2... eee 120

Proceedings of the Dublin Microscopical Club .............. 123—128

Proceedings of the Geological Society

New Books :—Mémoires de ?Académie Impériale des Sciences de

St. Pétersbourg. 7° série, tome xxxi. No. 5. Miscellanea Silu-

rica IIT. I. Supplement to the Monograph of the Russian Leper-

ditia. 1. The Crustacean Fauna of the Furypterus-beds of

Rootzikill, Oesel. By Magister Fr. Scumipt, Fellow of the

Academy.—Proceedings of the Bristol Naturalist’s Society.

New Series, vol. iv. part ii—Journal of the Royal Geological

Society of Ireland. Vol. xvi. part ii.; n. s. vol. vi. part ii.

for 1881-82.— Transactions of the Geological Society of

Glasgow. Vol. vii. part i. for 1880-82 ................ 129—184

A proposed new ‘Nomenclator Paleontologicus ;’ Selenotropism in

Plants, by M. C. Musset ; Jumping Seeds and Galls, by Charles

V. Riley ; The “Crag Mollusca,” by J. Gwyn Jeffreys, LL.D.,

F.R.S.; on a new Crinoid from the Southern Seas, by P.

Herbert Carpenter, M.A., Assistant Master at’ Eton College.

CONTENTS. Vv

NUMBER LXIX.

Page

XVIII. On the Classification of the Orders of Orthoptera and

Nearoptera, by AS. PACKARD, JUns, «5.0 04s ste sees a 145

XIX. On Ure’s “ Millepore,” Tabulipora (Cellepora) Uri, Flem.

By JOHN VOUNG) EIG.S.-hceceaes sags sed scent eae meeseensen s 154

XX. Descriptions of some new Species of Lepidoptera. By ARTHUR

CEE ETT Masi ED Zit CEC. a a wie lu atch a anne cbd aid Ree aucles sage eye aime 158

XXI. Descriptions of some new Species of Reptiles and Batrachians

in the British Museum. By G. A. BouLenGER. (Plate V.) .... 161

XXII. On the ‘Classification of the Coleoptera of North America,’

by Dr. J. L. LeConte and Dr. G. H. Horn (Washington: 1883), By

MEPL Ve Ae NEAT CEI WS 1e8 sly. 25 A «dud eke Solon didn 167

XXIII. Notes on some Fossil Plants from Northern China. By

VSAM EWVRERER M7. datas Woreld yceeoa cur & aliiieartle «abe tcrth «aah 172

XXIV. On the Structure and Affinities of the Genus Tristychius,

Agass. By Tuomas Srock, Natural-History Department, Museum

of Science and Art, Edinburgh, (Plate, Vals ese wes. teens 177

New Books :—Die Bartenwale der argentinischen Kiisten. By

Dr. H. BurmetstEr, Directeur du Musée public de Buenos

Aires, &c.—Life of Sir W. E. Logan. By Bernarp J. Har-

RINGTON.—A Monograph of North-American Phyllopod Crus-

tacea. By A. S. Packarp, Jun.—A Monograph of the Insec-

tivora, Systematic and Anatomical. By G. E. Dosson, M.A.,

FEES SS ey eater rahe srael Soa: aeons tah Laut Soha Saves 190-204

Observations on Actinospherium Eichhorni, by Miss 8. G. Foulke ;

The “Crag Mollusca ”—DPurpura tetragona, by 3. V. Wood; A

Social Heliozoan, by Prof. Leidy ; On the Genus Hyliota, by G.

TGR ISR oes aie te hs RO RRP CT AM et NO 206—210

NUMBER LXX.

XXYV. Note on some Earthworms from India. By Frank E.

Bepparp, M.A. Oxon., F.R.S.E., Naturalist to the ‘ Challenger ’

TSS CISCO EEL omy Yiee.c aca aes ELE vei tie ie ae ene mie Orde 213

XXVI. Remarks on the Lizards of the Genus Lophognathus. By

ee stVUELN GICEMey Steet Slee Ae aac ayer chs are: wae) Sere aes byw w eho hays 225

XXVIII. Neuroptera of the Hawaiian Islands.—Part I. Pseudo-

Neuroptera. By Roprert McLacuuan, F.RB.S. &e.. ............ 226

XXVIIL. Contributions to a Knowledge of Malayan Entomology.

SEEM ENV IAW\ EGC LEST AND 8 cre ota alelorscete ie ee Wa cle Geen wale Vises 241

vi CONTENTS.

Page

XXIX. Notesonthe Pale oz0ic Bivalved Entomostraca.—No. XVI.

By I. Rurrerr Jonus, F.R.S., F.G.S., &c. (Plates VI. & IX.) .... 243

XXX. On Guard-Polyps and Urticating Cells. By Dr. R. von

WEEN NIE ELD: 40 tocsreis “(a4 tate tete ohareiete bere atc teae ai ete loners tote eae 250

XX XT. On a Case of Commensalism of a Caranv anda Crambessa.

By Mi AGODERROY LGN Bi ois, siege s, casc/eys e2oga:cee ieee ae te ee ee 264

New Books:—Minute Structure of the Central Nervous System of

certain Reptiles and Batrachians of America. Illustrated by

ermanent Photomicrographs by Joon J. Mason, M.D.—

Temoirs of the Geological Survey of India. Paleeontologia

Indica, being Figures and Descriptions of the Organic Remains

procured during the progress of the Geological Survey of India.

Published by order of his Excellency the Governor-General of

Indiain Council. Series x. Indian Tertiary and post-Tertiary

Vertebrata. Vol. I]. Part 1. Siwalik Rhinocerotide. Part 2.

Supplement to Siwalik and Narbada Proboscidia, with 11 plates:

1881. Part 3. Siwalik and Naybada Kquidee, y with 5 plates:

1882, Part 4. Siwalik Camelopardalidee, with 7 plates : 1883.

Part 5. Siwalik Selenodont Suina &c., with 3 plates: 1883. By

R, LypEKKER, B.A., F.Z.8., Geological Survey of India... 270—274

Note on the Intelligence of the American Turret-Spider, by Dr.

McCook ; Complete Biological Evolution of the Elm-tree Aphis

( Tetraneura ulmi, Aut.), by M. J. Lichtenstein ; Elevated Coral

Reefs of, Cuba, by “W/O: Crosby e.g. do -guce cc cdete ce 281—283

NUMBER LXXI.

XXXII. Contributions to Micro-Paleontology.—On Stenopora

Howsti, Nich., with Notes on Monticulipora? tumzda, Phill., and

Remarks on Tabulipora Urvi, Young. By H. ALLEYNE NICHOLSON,

M.D., D.Se., Regius Professor of Natural History in the University

of Aberdeen. (Plate ee) iin lohsieanecs, sateen Gyalnya alee ero ge tee tere ie as ee 285

XXXII. Neuroptera of the Hawaiian Islands.—Part IL. Plani-

pennia, with General Summary. By Ropertr McLacuuay, F.R.S.

(CdGhcia bcROCR See Rane ian merino ano oceGc.so000.000.0000 - 298

XXXIV. On the Answerable Divisions of the Brain in Vertebrates

and Invertebrates. By Prof. OwrEn, C.B., F.RS., &............:. 308

XXXV. Remarks on the Nyctisaura. By G. A. BoULENGER .. 308

XXXVI. Contributions to our Knowledge of the Spongida. By

H. J. Canter, F.R.S. &c. (Plates XI., XI., XJIT., & XIV.) .... 308

XXXVIT. Spicules of Spongilla in the Diluvium of the Altmuhl

Valley, Bavaria. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &c. (Plate XIV.) .. 829

XXXAVUI. Descriptions of two new Species of Asterotdea in the

Collection of the British Museum, By F, Jerrrey Brun, M.A, ., 333

CONTENTS. vl

Page

XXXIX. Descriptions of two new Species of the Genus Megalops

(Coleoptera, Stenini). By CHartes O, WATERHOUSE .......... 335

XL. On the Morphology of the Myriopoda. By Dr. A. S.

Hee mles ROAR DT epad LDN hang hs ahscasala sens at Siek «=. eR GY ike wil ee, ene ache 337

XLI. Contributions to a Knowledge of Malayan Entomology.—

Peeeimeleres Es yi Wir Ere A DISTANT a icas't.cln dy oaies saps One ee ces 351

Lueilia macellaria infesting Man, by Frederick Humbert, M.D.,

; F.C.S.; Fish Mortality in the Gulf of Mexico, by 8S. T. Waller ;

On the Organization of the Crinoidea, by M. E. Perrier. , 353—358

NUMBER LXXII.

XLII. Remarks on an Essay by Prof. G. Lindstrém entitled “ Con-

tributions to the Actinology of the Atlantic Ocean,” and a Reply to

some of his Criticisms. By Prof. P. Martin Duncan, F.R.S.,

PMOL Se cues ya Gieioin-aferissrs Ss Saree Ue Oe ARON AH, 361

XLIII. Notices of British Fungi. By the Rey. M. J. BerKELEy,

BES. alld... By, EXROOMH, Bis. stE WcQies). 5 60559) «33s ofa qcaneywiae iePars « 370

XLIV. Mochlonyx (Tipula) culiciformis, De Geer. By F.

MEINERT

XLV. Notice of a new Genus and Species of Lucanoid Coleo-

ptera. By Cuarvtes O, WATERHOUSE

XLVI. Descriptions of new Lepidoptera from the Viti Islands.

Bvearraun G, borumn, BUS, BiZ.S., Ges. weve. as eee ip ev ees 389

XLVI. On some new Siliceous Sponges collected by M. Pechuél-

Lésche in the Congo. By Dr. Wintiam Marsuatu. (Plate XV.) 391

XLVIII. Additions to the Australian Curculionide.—Part X. By

Francis P. Pascor

Proceedings of the Geological Society...... 0.0... .0. eee 422, 423

On the Internal Sacculina, a new Stage in the Development of Saecu-

lina Carcini, by M. Yves Delage; On the Fossil Flora of Green-

land, by Prof. O. Heer; On the Pelagic Fauna of the Swiss

Beakoss oye rr, Oc Br Hrrbtole 2, seston eta ciete tiyovre = eine nite 423—427

Wridlexs | Ficath etensrd RRP cra hn ie Hon EA ee En Oia Ley a 428

PLATES IN VOL. XII.

PuaTe I,

II. } Structure of Anchinia.

mu. |

IV. Tintinnodea.

V. Hynobius lichenatus—Spelerpes peruvianus.

VI. Fossil Entomostraca from Siberia.

VII. Structure of Tristychius.

VIII. New Earthworms.

IX. Fossil Entomostraca from Spitzbergen.

X. Stenopora Howsii.

XI.

XIII. | New Sponges.

XIV. |

Xx Vi

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY,

[FIFTH SERIES. ]

iadadacndadanddebac per litora spargite muscum,

Naiades, et circitm vitreos considite fontes:

Pollice virgineo teneros hic carpite flores:

Floribus et pictum, dive, replete canistrum.

At vos, o Nymphe Craterides, ite sub undas

[It e, recurvato variata corallia trunco

Vellite muscosis e rupibus, et mihi concha

Ferte, Dew pelagi, et pingui conchylia succo.”’

NV. Parthenit Giannettasii Ec), 1,

No, 67, JULY 1883.

1.—Waterials towards the History of Anchinia.

By A. KowALeysky and J. Barrois *,

[Plates I.-IIL. |

Awcuinra is one of the most interesting and least known

forms of the whole group of Tunicata. Hstablished by Rathke

in 1833 upon notes left by Eschscholtz, this genus has since

that time been studied by only a few observers; the only

somewhat complete description that we know is that which

Carl Vogt has left us of the Anchinia rubra, met with in very

great numbers at Villafranca, where he found it floating in

thousands at the surface of the sea during the months of

December and January.

1. The species obtained by us at the same place also

possesses a large spot of red pigment in the middle of the

body, and other spots of the same colour upon each of the two

large papillae which surmount the incurrent and excurrent

apertures. It made its appearance at Villafranca a little later

* Translated by W.5S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘Journal de l’Anatomie

et de la Physiologie,’ tome xix. January and February 1885. We are

indebted to the kindness of M. Jules Barrois and of the conductors of the

above journal for permission to have impressions of the three plates

illustrating this memoir.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xin. 1

2 MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia.

than the time indicated by Vogt; we have only found it

occasionally between the months of February and April, and

each time in very small numbers.

2. The only form of Anchinia that is known (PI. IL. fig. 1)

consists of fragments of zooid-bearing stolons of perfect trans-

parency, which are found floating, like the Salpee and Pyro-

somes, at the surface of the sea.

Our materials for investigation have been rather scanty ;

we have met with the Anchinia only three times, and the

first time in bad weather and in a state unfit for examination.

Of the two colonies afterwards captured the first alone bore,

as described by Vogt, zooids in different stages of gemmation ;

it is this that we have made use of in our investigations.

The second presented zooids all of the same grade, in the

adult state. This is a state mentioned by Rathke, but not

met with by Carl Vogt. Its existence shows that there is not

in this case continuous gemmation at the surface of the stolon,

but an unequally rapid development of a series of previously

formed germs.

We have not had the opportunity of confirming the obser-

vation of Vogt, who, in the great number of specimens

exaroined by him, constantly found one individual surpassing

the others in size and attaining as much as a centimetre in

length. Nothing of this kind existed in the two specimens

examined by us.

3. No observer has as yet given us any information as to

the form of generation represented by the zooids attached to

the surface of the stolon. Vogt did not detect in them any

distinct traces of a stolon or of genital organs; one only

of the specimens examined by him showed more or less

oviform bodies ; but he does not come to any decided conclusion

upon this point, and it is even difficult to make out exactly

what the olive-green bodies indicated by him in this indi-

vidual really represent.

In our Anchinie we have always found perfectly visible

genital organs, consisting of a testis and an ovary (PI. III.

fig. 8, ¢, 0), situated at the lower part of the intestine, be-

tween the heart and the peduncle, and opening by a common

canal into the right expansion of the cloacal sac; it is there-

fore now absolutely certain that the known Anchinia is a

sexual form.

4, The stolon upon which the zooids are fixed is, according

to Vogt, a cylindrical contractile canal, with thick walls, com- _

posed of longitudinal and transverse fibres, and lined within

with a very fine vibratile epithelium.

Unfortunately we have been unable to study the structure

MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia. 3

of the stolonin much detail ; we have not seen muscular fibres

in it; it appeared to us to be a simple hollow tube, formed of

a single series of epithelial cells, and enveloped in a very thick

tunic, containing here and there stellate cells. The most

remarkable thing to be noted in the stolon is a series of large

cells (Pl. II. fig. 1, c) superimposed upon the epithelium, and

placed upon the median line between the zooids.

The latter are arranged upon a somewhat irregular line and

[each] implanted upon a slight projection formed by the epi-

thelium of the stolon; this projection is separated from the

peduncle by a double septum composed of epithelial cells ;

these septa separate at the period when the bud becomes de-

tached from the stolon.

I. Description of Anchinia.

Anchinia (Pl. III. fig. 8), like Pyrosoma and Doliolum, is

a type of Tunicate in which the two apertures, incurrent and

excurrent, are directly opposite to each other. The two

cavities to which they give access, namely the pharyngeal sac

(Ph) and the median portion of the cloaca (cm), are not, as in

the Ascidia, attached to one another, but they face each other,

and are situated at the two extremities (fie. 8). Between the

two there is a space in which the digestive tube is lodged. In

consequence of the separation of these two large cavities, the

digestive tube, which in the Ascidia is situated below these

cavities, is included between them in Anchinia; it is more-

over surrounded to the right and left by the lateral expan-

sions of the cloaca (cl), which spread over the pharyngeal sac

to form the branchia. It is therefore included in a sort of

case, which only communicates above and below with the

rest of the general cavity. Hig. 11, which represents a trans-

verse section passing through the two apertures, will serve

better than any explanation to render this arrangement intel-

ligible.

Pyrosoma and Doliolum also present the same arrangement

but with differences which it is important to note. In Pyro-

soma the median portion of the cloaca is exceedingly small,

in fact quite rudimentary, and out of all proportion to the

pharyngeal sac, which occupies an enormous space. Its

lateral portions, on the contrary, are much developed, and

completely cover the whole of the pharyngeal sac, the entire

wall of which is converted into branchia.

In Doliolum it is quite otherwise. The lateral portions of

the cloaca are rudimentary ; they do not cover the pharyngeal

sac, of which the branchia occupies only the posterior por-

4 MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia.

tion ; on the other hand the median portion of the cloaca attains

a considerable development, and has a volume nearly equal

to that of the pharyngeal cavity.

Anchinia presents this interesting peculiarity :—As regards

the arrangement of the great cavities and of the branchia it

represents the exact intermediary between the above two great

types, Pyrosoma and Doliolum. Init the median portion ot the

cloacal cavity is already large, but its dimensions are still

very restricted as compared with those of the pharyngeal sac ;

its lateral parts are likewise better marked off from the median

portion than in Doliolum, but incomparably less developed

than in Pyrosoma, and only cover a small portion of the

pharyngeal sac. Lastly, the branchia consists, as in Doliolum,

of a single series of long clefts parallel to the endostyle; but

it is wider than in Doliolum (fig. 8), and in this respect some-

what approaches that of Pyrosoma.

Anchiniais certainly the most complete transition type that

we know between the Salpa form and the Ascidia form, re-

garded as representing the two extreme types from the stand-

point of the arrangement of the two great cavities. It is the

most instructive form to study for any one who wishes to form

a notion of these important relations.

I pass now to a more detailed description :—

1. General form.—The body is very short and thickset,

not at all elongated in the form of a little barrel, but extended

especially in the direction of its height; its general aspect

does not at all resemble that presented by the Doliola, but

nearly approaches that of the lateral buds destitute of cloaca

which are observed upon their tails.

2. Cloaca.—F ig. 8 shows the boundaries of the median and

lateral portions of the cloaca. ‘The line /m indicates the limit

of the median portion, and the line /¢ that of the left lateral

expansion. <A little above the buccal aperture (d) there is a

point () where the median portion comes almost into contact

with the pharyngeal sac, which causes the lateral expansion

to appear divided into two distinct parts—an inferior very

large one (c/) covering the digestive tube, and a superior very

small one (/s) only surrounding a vacant space belonging to

the general cavity, a space which, in the living animal seen

in profile, appears as a triangular part of dark colour, already

seen and figured by Vogt, who, however, did not attempt to

give any explanation of it.

3. General cavity The two great cavities (pharyngeal

and cloacal) so completely occupy the interior of the body that

there remains only a mere fissure to represent the general

cavity. We ebserve, however, two great -dilatations—one

MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia. 5

formed by the cavity of the peduncle (cp), the other placed

behind the upper part of the pharyngeal sac (cs) ; further,

we must reckon as forming part of the general cavity the

spaces /s,/7, bounded by the lateral expansions of the cloaca,

the former empty, the latter lodging the digestive tube and

the genital organs.

4, Pharyngeal sac.—The pharyngeal sac, which, of itself,

occupies at least two thirds of the internal space, has, like the

whole body, a much elevated and abbreviated form; its ven-

tral portion is occupied by the endostyle, which is very short

in accordance with the general form. At its posterior portion

are placed the branchiz, in the middle and towards the upper

part of which the mouth opens. Lastly, it is traversed through

nearly its whole extent by a vibratile line (/ v), which ter-

minates at the top of the dorsal surface in a spiral, which at

this point forms a special organ, sp. The nervous ganglion

and the vibratile pit are situated a little in front of this spiral

organ.

5. Special organs. a. Ciliary band.—The vibratile band as

usual surrounds the incurrent orifice; but in Anchinia it is

easy to trace it to a great distance on each side. Above it is

seen to continue beyond the vibratile (olfactory ?) pit and as

far as the upper part of the pharyngeal sac, where, becoming

recurved, it unites with the band of the opposite side, sp,

forming at this point the spiral organ already mentioned ; in

the middle of the spiral formed by the recurved extremity of

the vibratile band, the wall of the pharyngeal sac gives off a

small cecum which projects into the general cavity and con-

sists of peculiar cells, smaller than in the rest of the wall and

furnished with very strongly refractive nuclei (fig. 8, sp).

The same organ exists in Doliolum, in which it likewise

forms the extremity of the ciliary band, but does not occupy

the same situation; it is nearer the incurrent aperture, and

in front of the nervous ganglion and the olfactory pit.

Voet has already described it in Anchinia under the name

of the “ lacet recourbé en crochet.”

In the opposite direction the vibratile band reaches the

endostyle, curves in order to follow it in its whole length, and

then rises at its other extremity, to be continued in the median

line, between the two branchie, to lose itself in the mouth,

where, no doubt, it gives origin to the spiral furrow, so well

described by Vogt. (‘‘ In the anterior part of the digestive tube

there is a spiral cord which descends along the cesophagus,

* commencing from the mouth, and terminating near the stomach

by becoming confounded with the general lining of the sto-

machal cavity.’’)

6 MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia.

The vibratile band is composed of small cells of elongated

form, with a large nucleus and small cell-body ; these cells

are closely juxtaposed in the direction of their length. _

The vibratile band appears to have very intimate relations

with the endostyle; from the two extremities of that organ

we see issue a band having the same structure as the vibratile

band, with which it unites at its two points of curvature. Un-

fortunately we have not succeeded in making out to what

portion of the endostyle these two bands belong by penetrating

into the interior of the organ.

b. Nervous ganglion.—This is situated rather far from the

incurrent aperture, but not far from the upper extremity occu-

pied by the spiral organ. It consists of an epithelial portion

always united by a slender cord to the upper part of theciliary

pit, and of a mass of nerve-cells which surmounts this. The

funiculus which unites the ganglion with the olfactory pit is

always very short, never attaining a length comparable to that

which occurs in Doliolum. The nervous ganglion always

remains very near the pit.

c. Nerves.—Viewed from the side (fig. 8, left side), the

nervous ganglion is seen to give origin to five nerves.

The first pair (1) runs directly forward, passes at but a

short distance from the vibratile pit, traverses the ciliary band,

and terminates about the median line near the upper margin

of the incurrent aperture.

The second pair (2), which is longer, follows nearly the

same course, but runs lower down, and terminates at the level

of the inferior margin of the same aperture.

The third (3) forms a strong and very apparent nervous

filament. It runs directly backwards and downwards, and

divides not far from its origin, and a little before attaining the

branchiz, into two distinct branches. The first of these

branches passes above the branchia towards the tenth fissure,

and terminates at the upper part of the excurrent orifice. The

second, which is longer, likewise passes over the branchia,

about the twelfth or thirteenth fissure, and terminates behind

the intestine towards the posterior part of the point of attach-

ment of the peduncle.

The fourth (4) is only a very short filament directed to-

wards the summit of the branchia, and also divided into two

very slender branches.

The fifth (5), a little way from its origin, unites with a

nerve originating from the opposite side; then the common ,

trunk formed by their union runs backward and to the left of

the spiral organ, to reach the great dilatation (cs) of the

general cavity ; it traverses this lacuna in a curve, and reaches

MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia. 7

the space included between the two small superior ceca of the

cloaca. Lastly, after having traversed this space it terminates

at the upper part of the cesophagus, beyond which we have not

been able to trace it.

d. Muscles.—The muscles are not, like those of Doliolum,

arranged in bands like the hoops of a barrel. We have only

two circular muscles placed round each of the two apertures.

To these two muscles at each end we have to add a very

characteristic S-shaped muscle which occurs nearly in the

middle of the body. This brings the number of muscles of

the cutaneous envelope to five. All these muscles are coms

posed of long fibre-cells.

e. Apertures.—The incurrent and excurrent apertures are,

as usual, furnished with papille. Those of the incurrent

aperture are tolerably large and generally to the number of

from eleven to thirteen, arranged as follows :—on the ventral

side two pairs of large papilla; on the dorsal side two analo-

gous pairs; and lastly, at the sides, between the preceding,

sometimes one, sometimes two pairs of considerably smaller

papille ; there is also on the dorsal side, on the median line

above the aperture, a large unpaired papilla, furnished with

red pigment. At the excurrent aperture the papille consist

of small teeth regularly spaced to the number of seven on each

side; further, on the dorsal side we see rise a long filament

with red pigment, and into which the sphincter muscle of

this aperture penetrates for two thirds of its length.

This long filament occupies the same place as the dorsal

stolon of Doliolum, and is not without resemblance in aspect

to that stolon, at least in the young state before gemmation.

Transverse sections show that it is filled with large very

granular cells (fig. 9, cel/). The skin has not the same struc-

ture as on the rest of the body; the layer which constitutes

the wall is composed of a fibrous envelope (fb), having large

cells (ec), somewhat analogous to the disseminated cells which

are met with in the midst of the tunic. In the interior, in the

midst of the large granular cells, we sometimes also find some

of these cells ec. Atm, and on the side where the tunic is

thinnest (the side turned towards the aperture), we see the

section of the two muscles given off by the sphincter of the

excurrent aperture.

f. Digestive tube.—The digestive tube opens, on the one

hand, at the upper part of the pharyngeal sac, and, on the

other, in the median part of the cloaca. It is formed by a

recurved tube, composed of an cesophagus, a stomach, and an

intestine. The stomach, which is short and inflated, bears

at its lower part a ramified gland, well known in the

8 MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia.

Ascidia. Finally the whole of the digestive tube is sur-

rounded by a network of cells (7), which may be regarded as

the kidney.

eg. Generative organs.—The genital glands are situated in

the space included between the pharyngeal sac and the cloaca,

and in the lower part of this space; they are placed to the

right of the intestine, between it and the cloacal expansion of

the right side; and both open by a common aperture (oc) at

the lower part of this cloacal expansion. The mature testis

(¢) consists of a narrow deferent duct and of a voluminous

ramified gland, partly concealed by the branchia, and which

clothes the whole anterior portion of the intestine. ‘The ovary

consists of a common wall (0) which contains ova (ov) at diffe-

rent stages. The oldest ova are situated at the extremity of

the sac on the side opposite to the aperture ; then follow two

or three ova less and less developed, and finally a small

mass of indifferent cells which are placed quite close to the

aperture.

h. Endostyle-—The very short endostyle presents in trans-

verse sections the structure shown in fig. 10. It is composed

of two symmetrical halves, separated by a very deep groove

in the buds. Below this groove there is on each side a narrow

cell furnished with a very long cilium, which projects out of

the cavity of the endostyle. ‘Then comes a zone of radiating

cells, at the inner angle of which is seen a small, rounded, and

very strongly coloured cell. The radiating zone is succeeded

by asecond zone, to which carmine attaches itself preferently ;

it consists of cells with large nuclei, with no great amount of

protoplasm, which alternate more or less, and are not, like the

preceding, arranged in a single row. Lastly, this second zone

is surmounted by a large clear cell, which bears at its inner

angle a rounded and very strongly coloured cell. This last

bounds the aperture of the endostyle. The whole inner sur-

face of this organ seemed to be furnished with fine cilia.

It is at the inner angle of the coloured cell that is inserted

the wall of the pharyngeal sac, which commences with a cell

larger than the others, and the existence of which appears to

be constant (fig. 10). From this point the wall acquires its

definitive structure, formed of long flattened cells. Neverthe-

less we do not see it immediately take a direction to the right

and left to form the lateral parts of the pharyngeal sac. In

fact it begins by rising upwards, and then bends round,

forming a small loop occupied by a few thicker small cells ;

these last are nothing but the section of the vibratile line of

each side; and we see therefore that this line, in the part of

it which is horizontal and parallel to the endostyle, is not

MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia. 9

situated directly upon the wall of the pharyngeal sac, but upon

a special fold.

After forming this fold, the layer of flat cells (end) bends

regularly to the right and left to form the walls of the pharyn-

geal sac.

i. Heart and peduncle.—The heart, as usual, is situated at

the posterior extremity of the endostyle ; it is placed not far

from the genital organs, and, like the latter, occupies a place

not distant from the peduncle.

The stout peduncle which unites the Anchinia to the stolon

persists during the whole life; it is stopped at its lower part

by an epithelium thicker than on the rest of the body; and it

occupies nearly the same position as the stolon of the colonies

of Pyrosoma.

II. Gemmation.

1. The youngest stage observed by us (figs. 2,3) was

already completely separated from the stolon (fig. 1. no. 3),

but still possessed a rounded form without any trace of the

division into body and peduncle.

When detached from the stolon and examined under a

greater magnifying-power, this bud presented most of the

organs already formed—in the middle the pharyngeal sac

with the endostyle, the cesophagus, and the stomach. Around

the latter there is a mass of large cells, among which may be

observed some still more voluminous; between this last and

the endostyle the pericardium ; and lastly, above the pharyn-

geal sac and opposite to the endostyle, the ganglionic mass,

hollowed out by a cavity in its posterior portion.

It is to be remarked that, in this first stage, the endostyle

occupies nearly the anterior extremity, the pericardium and

the ganglionic mass occupy nearly the middle of the two sur-

faces of the bud; and these relations, which completely alter

afterwards, are none the less remarkable and worthy of notice.

Further, we must note the enormous development and the

peculiar almost spherical form of the endostyle.

In the early development of the endostyle and its situation

at the upper part of the bud there is nothing that need greatly

astonish us; we here find the same thing as in the Salpe.

Lastly, we have found nothing at this period that can be

referred to a cloacal sac; moreover, as yet there exists no

aperture by which the bud is placed in communication with

the outer world.

2. In the following stage (fig. 4) the bud has lost its

rounded form to acquire a clavate form, in which we already

begin to be able to distinguish a division into body and

10 MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia.

peduncle (fig. 1, nos. 4 and 5). In it the internal organs present

relations absolutely different from those which we have seen

in the preceding stage. The cloacal sac is now formed; it

occupies the space situated between the ganglionic mass and

the peduncle, and presses upwards the ganglionic mass. In

consequence the latter, which was previously placed towards

the middle of the dorsal surface of the bud, is approximated

to its upper part (figs. 1, 3, 4), while the endostyle quits that

position to be more or less completely pushed over towards

the ventral surface.

The pharyngeal sac of the preceding stage, as well as the

cloaca, 1s in communication with the exterior world; the two

apertures (incurrent and excurrent) exist, and are each of them

surrounded by two muscles; the digestive tube is completed

by the addition of an intestine which opens into the cloaca;

and, as before, there exists a rounded stomach, which consti-

tutes its most voluminous part.

The endostyle has already more restricted dimensions

relatively to those of the surrounding organs; in its middle

part it presents a deep groove which divides it into two parts.

The pharyngeal sac begins to present a thickening (/ v),

which forms the first indication of the vibratile band.

The ganglionic masses possess a much more definite struc-

ture than in the preceding stage. There may be distin-

guished in it two very distinct parts :—(1) a hollow portion

united to the pharyngeal sac by a hollow peduncle, and which

appears to be only a cecal expansion of the wall of that sac;

and (2) a solid portion surmounting the former and composed

of ganglionic cells, the latter representing the cerebrum

properly so called.

The mass of cells which surrounded the intestine appears

better circumscribed than in the previous stage; it has

become concentrated into an elongated mass placed to the

right of the intestine, and which, in its posterior part, presents

some more voluminous cells. ‘This mass represents the

common rudiment of the two genital glands, testis and ovary:

its posterior part, containing the large cells, will form the

ovary; and the large cells themselves are nothing but the

ovules.

The whole wall of the body is composed of an epithelium

of considerable thickness, except at the level of the genital

mass, where it consists of flattened cells.

3. In the succeeding stage (fig. 5, not represented in the

general figure) the nervous ganglion has definitively reached

the summit of the bud; so that the change of form already

indicated in the preceding stage is here completely effected.

MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia. 11

Taking as the longitudinal axis a line drawn from the gan-

glionic mass to the pericardium, we can already recognize a

general arrangement of the body analogous to that which

exists in the adult; but we see that the part which lodges

the genital mass is much more developed than in the adult,

which causes the peduncle to be much nearer the upper part.

Except for a slightly more advanced development, the

internal organs are in the same state as in the preceding

stage. The stomach has become narrower, and the intestine

more elongated, which causes a notable alteration in the

whole aspect of the digestive tube; further, the lateral parts

of the cloacal sac have become elongated, so that already they

surround the digestive tube and have come to communicate

with the pharyngeal sac.

The genital mass now presents a very perceptible division

into testis and ovary (fig. 5) ; it appears disaggregated at its

anterior part, thus giving origin to isolated cells, probably

the same as those which afterwards occur around the intes-

tine and which apparently represent the kidney.

At the same epoch we begin to see distinctly the ciliary

band (Zv) and the S-shaped muscle, which occupies nearly

the middle of the body; further, the heart has been formed

in the interior of the pericardium.

4A (fig. 6, and fig. 1. 6-7). Later on the assimilation to the

adult becomes easier and easier; nevertheless the posterior

part corresponding to the genital mass still for a long time

presents a very considerable development, producing a form

quite different from that of the adult; lastly, the nervous

ganglion has already ceased to occupy the summit of the

body, and begins to pass towards the anterior side.

The most remarkable change of this epoch consists in the

formation of the branchial fissures between the pharyngeal

sac and the lateral portions of the cloaca which cover its

posterior surface. The branchial fissures are formed in a single

line, and appear nearly all at the same epoch; nevertheless

those of the middle are more developed than those of the

extremities. They make their appearance at first in the

form of small slightly elongated thickenings; and it is only

subsequently and very gradually that they acquire the breadth

which they afterwards present.

The modifications previously described in the digestive

tube have become more and more strongly marked at the

epoch under consideration: the stomach has become con-

siderably contracted, and the entire digestive tube has

acquired the form of a bent cord which occupies a perfectly

vertical position ; moreover the intestine has become greatly

12 MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia.

elongated, and represents by itself the whole of the posterior

branch besides a portion of the anterior ; at this stage it also

presents an inflated portion, which afterwards disappears and

does not exist in the adult.

The ovary, the testis, and the disseminated cells (of the

kidney ?) are more distinct from each other, and begin to be

clearly recognizable.

Finally the margins of the incurrent and excurrent aper-

tures begin te thicken in order to form papillae, while over

the rest of the body, especially at the level of the endostyle

and of the nervous ganglion, the epidermis becomes consider-

ably reduced in thickness.

5. In the state represented by fig. 7 the bud has lost all its

embryonic character and acquired an aspect which absolutely

resembles that of the adult; the summit of the body is no

longer occupied by the nervous ganglion, but by the spiral

organ (as 1s shown in fig. 1. 7-8, and fig. 7); the general

aspect has completely changed; the cells which form the

external lamine as well as the pharyngeal and cloacal sacs

have acquired the flat form which they present in the adult ;

and the general transparency has become very great; the

pharyngeal sac has considerably increased; the endostyle

has lost its inflated form to acquire an aspect approaching that

of its definitive form; and, lastly, the whole region of the

genital mass has been reduced in such a manner that the

peduncle, instead of retaining its original direction, is now

directed downward, occupying a position absolutely different

from its previous one and much nearer to the heart. It is

this last alteration especially that modifies the general aspect

presented by the bud and gives it an absolutely different

form.

The internal organs have also undergone modifications of

some importance. Of the two muscles which bounded each

of the apertures (incurrent and excurrent) the posterior one is

now further from the aperture, and the anterior one alone

borders it closely. Further, the thickened margin of the

posterior aperture begins to be recurved at its upper part to

form a sort of hook, into which the muscle penetrates, and

which is the commencement of the long filament that occupies

this position in the adult.

The branchia has become elongated and recurved, as

shown in the figure; but the branchial fissures are only

slightly lengthened.

The intestine has continued to be developed in the direction

already indicated in the preceding stage; but the kind of

cecum formed previously (cw) at its lower part has disap-

MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia. 13

peared, and nothing remains of it except a dilatation of the

corresponding region, a dilatation, however, which disappears

in the adult to produce a slender and perfectly uniform tube.

Lastly, at the base of the stomach we notice the slender tube

which represents the ramified gland of the Ascidia.

The vibratile band is now very distinctly formed; and it

can easily be traced throughout its whole extent up to the

spiral organ, which is already present.

The genital masses have decidedly given place to a defini-

tively separated testis and ovary, the former composed of

rounded cells and the latter of a follicle containing several

ova; both cf them open by a common aperture into the night

lateral expansion of the cloaca.

Lastly, the disseminated cells have lost all connexion with

the genital organs ; they are now arranged in groups of four

or five around the digestive tube.

6. In the adult the branchial clefts have increased very

perceptibly ; the peduncle has attained a vertical position and

come to be placed in the immediate vicinity of the heart ; it

is much less apparent than in the preceding stage; and the

whole animal has acquired the definitive form of the figure 8.

The cells of the kidney are no longer collected into groups as

previously, but form a network around the digestive tube.

The testis presents a deferent canal; and its glandular portion

has become elongated and ramified around the stomach,

which it partly conceals. Finally, the tunic has become

much thickened; and spots of red pigment have made their

appearance in the middle of the body and above the apertures.

Ill. Affinities.

We have already put forward some considerations upon the

central position, between the two great extreme groups of

the Salpz and Ascidia, and especially between Doliolum and

Pyrosoma, that is occupied by Anchinia trom the point

of view of the arrangement of the great cavities. But these

general relations give us but little information as to the

precise affinities of this interesting type and the exact place

which ought to be assigned to it from the complete know-

ledge of its organization.

lf we endeavour to compare the preceding description with

what we know of the other Tunicata, we find that, as regards

the structure of the adult as well as the position of the buds

upon the stolon, Anchinia presents a great resemblance to

Doliolum.

As regards the organization of the adult form, we see that

14 MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia.

the disposition of all the internal organs especially approaches

that of Doliolum; the cloaca, the branchia, the endostyle, the

intestine, and the genital organs have a form and arrangement

almost the same as in the latter. Leaving out of considera-

tion the regular form of a little cask, with muscular bands

respresenting its hoops, which Doliolum possesses, the same

description might apply to both.

The conformity is still greater if, instead of comparing

Anchinia with the adult form of Doliolum, we compare it with

the buds. These are attached to the stolon which bears

them, by a peduncle, of which the point of attachment is at

the level of the endostyle, and which throws the cloacal aper-

ture towards the dorsal or neural side. The presence of this

peduncle and the dorsal position of the aperture of the cloaca

constitute of themselves a resemblance of great importance

between Anchinia and Doliolum; but its significance becomes

much greater when we consider that the Anchiniw absolutely

resemble the buds of Doliolwm in the conditions of their exis-

tence. We may suppose that the Anchinie are Doliola which

have remained stationary, and which retain throughout life up

to sexual maturity the embryonic form of the buds of Doliolum.

In Doliolum the buds, in order to attain to sexual maturity,

separate from the stolon and commence an errant life, during

which their musculature and their general form become

adapted to these new conditions of existence. In Anchinia

the buds remain attached to the stolon, attain sexual maturity

in this state, and retain throughout life the embryonic form of

the buds of Doliolum.

The more detailed comparison of the buds of Doliolum with

those of Anchinia also reveals great resemblances ;_ the pedun-

cle which attaches the Doliolum to the stolon upon which it is

implanted has its point of attachment to the animal situated

between the endostyle and the cloacal aperture; the same

thing occurs in Anchinia, as in most of the Tunicata which |

are reproduced by gemmation; but between these last and

Doliolum and Anchinia there exists a very grave and indeed

capital difference: in the Tunicata generally the union which

takes place at the level of the peduncle, between the bud and

the parent or the stolon which has given origin to it, is quite

intimate; the ectoderm of the buds is only the prolongation of

the ectoderm of the parent or of the stolon, and its endoderm

passes directly into the endoderm of the stolon (as in the

Salpe) or of the parent (as in the Ascidia, Pyrosoma &c.).

On the contrary, in Doliolum and Anchinia the peduncle of

the bud is simply adherent (attached without intimate union

of the tissues) to a small corresponding elevation of the stolon.

MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia. 15

The peduncle of the buds of Anchinia (fig. 7, ¢ p) repre-

sents a simple elevation of the ectoderm of the bud; it is

quite circumscribed ; its tissues, which consist of a cylindrical

epithelium, all belong to the embryo and have no genetic rela-

tion to the stolon ; at the point of adhesion to the stolon its

cells are merely superposed upon the cells of the corresponding

part of the stolon without there being any amalgamation or

intimate union ; further, the internal cavity of the peduncle is

completely closed and does not communicate with that of the

stolon. ‘The buds and the stolon appear to be two distinct

structures, which are only approximate and in apposition to

one another, without any direct passage between their tissues,

and without any amalgamation of the histological elements,

We might compare these relations to those which exist, in the

Mammalia, between the uterus and the embryo contained in it.

The ovum and the embryo to which it gives origin are forma-

tions independent of the uterus. The ovum is formed in the

ovary, passess into the uterus, becomes attached thereto for a

definite purpose ; and there are no genetic relations between

thetwo. ‘The same thing appears to take place in Anchinia:

the buds and the stolon have no genetic relations; the buds

are placed upon the stolon for the purpose of their ulterior

development; but nothing authorizes us to think that they are

produced by the stolon ; all our endeavours to detect any rela-

tion between the buds and the stolon have been in vain ; the

youngest buds, like the older ones, were always perfectly

independent of the wall of the stolon, whereas, on the con-

trary, nothing is easier to prove than the direct relations which

exist between the organs of the buds of Pyrosoma, the Salpe,

and the Ascidia, and the corresponding organs of the parent.

We thus come to the conclusion that the buds of the Anchi-

nic, in their genetic relations, are independent of the stolon.

It would be very difficult to explain the apposition of the

buds of Anchinia if an ingenious discovery of our colleague,

M. Oulianine, had not given us the key. Formerly M.

Oulianine discovered that the buds of Doliolum are not formed

upon the stolon of Doliolum, but that they originate, as in all

the other Tunicata, at the end of the endostyle, upon the organ

which has been called the rosette-shaped organ (rosettenfér-

mige Organ of the Germans). ‘This organ is the true prolife-

rous stolon of Doliolum; it produces buds in accordance with

the ordinary process in the Tunicata; these buds separate

from the rosette-shaped organ, pass to the posterior stolon of

the Doliolum, become attached to it, and begin to be developed.

Thus they are genetically quite independent of the stolon

16 MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia.

which bears them. It is to be supposed that an analogous

process takes place with the buds of Anchinia, and that, after

being detached from their place of origin, they become im-

planted upon the stolon, with which we have been unable to

find that they have any genetic relations. ‘This constitutes a

further important fact which approximates Anchinia to Dolio-

lum and separates it from the other Tunicata.

We may now pass to another point, namely the investi-

gation of the arrangement of the buds upon the stolon. As

we have already said, we have met with Anchinia only on

three different occasions.

The first time there were brought to us only a few muti-

lated individuals torn from the stolon: all these individuals

were well developed; all had perfectly formed ovaries and

ramified testes filled with spermatozoids, and with the central

part of an opaque white tint, indicating a state of complete

maturity.

The second specimen consisted of a chain about 10 centim.

long, and bearing buds at different stages of development.

We omitted to count the number of buds of different ages ;

but there were rather more young buds than adults (designa-

ting under the latter name the individuals possessing a com-

plete intestine filled with food) ; we found no regularity in the

arrangement of the buds, which, on the contrary, seemed to

us to be quite irregular: all along the stolon the adult Anchz-

nie were intermixed with young buds of different degrees of

development; so that at each pomt one found mixed together

adult individuals capable of feeding themselves, and young

buds, the nutrition and growth of which could only be effected

at the expense of the nutritive substance accumulated in their

cells (as in embryonic cells in general) or by endosmose, at

the cost of the nutritive substance contained in the cavity of

the stolon.

The presence of adult individuals among the young buds

reminds one, to a certain extent, of the arrangement of the

buds of Doliolum. It is well known that there exist on the

dorsal stolon of Doliolum two kinds of buds—median buds,

which will give origin to sexuai animals, and lateral buds

of very peculiar organization ; they possess neither genital

organs nor proliferous stolon, but have a well-developed

intestine and branchie which function very early. Gegen-

baur, Fol, and Grobben have expressed the opinion that

these lateral buds are more properly respiratory and nutritive

buds; and it is a fact that their organization is wonderfully

well adapted to this purpose. Grobben has discussed the

MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia. Ly

question in detail, and demonstrated that the lateral buds must

really be regarded as individuals charged with the above

functions.

Thus upon the stolon of Doliolum there exist young median

buds of which the organs of nutrition and respiration are not

yet developed, and lateral buds which possess large branchie

as well as a completely developed intestinal canal, and a part

of which, thanks to their early development, nourish the less

developed buds.

In Anchinia there is only one kind of bud; there are none

which are specially appropriated to the functions of nutrition

and respiration. But among those whose development 1s

more advanced we find a certain number whose organs of

digestion and respiration are in complete activity. ‘They can

the better perform their functions because they are scattered

among younger buds throughout the length of the stolon; and

they present a most evident analogy of function with the

lateral buds of Doliolum.

We have studied the position of the buds upon the stolon,

their relations with it, and, lastly, their reciprocal arrangement

on its surface ; and we have found that in these three points

their relations are the same as those which exist between the

buds of Doliolum and the dorsal stolon.

It is well known that in Doliolum this stolon is produced

by an asexual form, which loses all its organs of nutrition,

and becomes reduced to a mere motory organ—an individual

whose business is to carry the chain, and whose brief existence

only lasts for the time necessary for the maturation of the

buds.

In Anchinia we do not know the corresponding asexual

form. But the close resemblances that we have just indicated

between all the other points of organization and reproduction

in Doliolum and Anchinia appear to us to be so striking as to

permit us to conclude that the generation which produces the

stolon of Anchinia resembles Doliolum, or even that it is

simply a Doliolum.

It remains for us, in conclusion, to discuss a final question—

that of the ultimate fate of the buds of Anchinda.

It is a fact worthy of remark, that of the three specimens

of Anchinia which have come into our hands, two furnished us

only with imdividuals which had all arrived at complete

maturity, and were furnished with genital organs and a diges-

tive tube perfectly developed. There were no longer any

traces of fresh buds, or of parts capable of producing them ;

there existed in them only a single mode of reproduction—-

sexual generation.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 2

18 MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia.

The first time all the individuals collected had the testes

much ramified, opaque, swelled with semen; they had been

captured in the muslin net in stormy weather, and were un-

fortunately few in number, and all more or less mutilated.

Our second capture consisted of a well-preserved colony, all

the individuals of which were mature and presented volumi-

nous ova; but in them the testes were less developed than in

the specimens first brought in.

These observations lead to the supposition that the indivi-

duals of a colony of Anchinda function sometimes all as males

and sometimes all as females; it would then be here as in the

Salpe, among which the chains function successively at first

as male and then as female chains, owing to the fact that in

the same chain the male and female organs do not reach

maturity simultaneously.

Sexual reproduction is therefore, above all, the purpose of

the buds of Anchinta. . What is the form to which the ova

will give origin? This, for the moment, is impossible to

decide. It will be for ulterior researches to answer this grave

and important question, the solution of which is no doubt re-

served for the zoological station of Villafranca, the only spot

where Anchinia rubra has been observed.

The individuals which have attained sexual maturity are

very easily detached from the stolon, as may be often enough

observed in specimens kept in captivity. Is this the case

also in a state of freedom? ‘This is difficult to say with any

certainty, although the analogy with Doliolum renders it pro-

bable. In any case, whether the adult Anchinie become im-

mediately detached or remain attached for a certain time to

the stolon, it is certain that their existence cannot be of long

duration. ‘The two surfaces in contact, the extremity of the

peduncle and the corresponding projection belonging to the

stolon, are only in apposition without intimate union 3 and their

adhesion is too feeble to resist the movement of the waves

very long. Now, as the Anchinie do not present any organs

adapted for pelagic life, they must assuredly perish soon when

they are detached from the stolon which sustains them. The

life of the Anchinie must therefore be very short; they perish,

no doubt, after the deposition of the ova, as may be observed

in the case of the Salpee.

The buds of Anchinia must be regarded, like those of the

Salpe and Doliolum, as representatives of the sexual genera-

tion, and there must be an agamic generation which produces

the stolon and gives origin to the buds.

All the facts revealed in the course of this investigation

lead us to regard Anchinia as presenting affinities especially

MM. Kowalevsky and Barrois on Anchinia. 19

with Doliolum ; in this respect we agree completely with M.

Grobben * ; but we think that the change that he proposes

of the name Anchinta into Doliopsis is premature. It would

be more prudent to, wait for researches upon the form of

generation which produces the stolon, a form which is still

absolutely unknown to us; this, however, is a gap which

we hope will soon be supplied in consequence of the founda-

tion of a scientific centre at Villafranca.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES [.-IIL.

a. Anus.

b. Mouth.

br. Branchia.

e. Large cells of the upper surface

of the stolon.

ec, General cavity.

cell, Large cells of the interior of

the posterior filament (fig. 9).

ce. Czecum of the intestine (figs.

6 and 7).

el. Lateral part of the cloaca (in-

ferior wing).

em. Median part of the cloaca.

ep. Cavity of the peduncle.

cs. Superior dilatation of the gene-

ral cavity.

ec, Cellular envelope (fig. 9).

en. Endostyle.

end, Hndoderm.

est. Stomach.

ex. Hctoderm.

aw. Cisophagus.

f. Olfactory pit.

76. Fibrous envelope (fig. 9).

gc. Nervous ganglion (hollow por-

tion).

gn, Nervous ganglion (central por-

tion).

z. Intestine.

/7. Limit of the lateral portion of

the cloaca.

im. Limit of the median portion of

the cloaca.

Zs. Superior (small) expansion of

the cloaca,

iv. Vibratile line.

m. Cutaneous muscles.

o. Ovary.

os. Hxcurrent aperture (fig. 1).

ov, Ova and ovules.

p. Point of contact of the median

portion of the cloaca and the

pharyngeal sac.

ph, Pharyngeal sac.

pr. Heart and pericardium.

7, Disseminated cells (kidney ?).

sp. Spiral organ.

tun. ‘Vunie.

Fig. 1 (Pl. IL.). Fragment of stolon bearing zooids of different degrees of

development :—3, corresponding to the bud of figures 2 and 38;

4, corresponding to the bud of figure 4; 6-7, corresponding to a

stage intermediate between figs. 6 and 7, and so on,

to) co} >)

20 diameters. z

Enlarged

Fig. 2 (Pl. 1.). First stage of gemmation, seen from the ventral surface.

vg. 38, The same stage in profile.

Fig. 4. A more advanced stage.

Fig. 5. A still more advanced stage.

Fig. 6 (P1. IL.). The following stage: the branchial clefts begin to show

themselves. x 90 diam.

Fig. 7 (Pl. 1). A more advanced stage:

the tissues have lost their

embryonic character; and the creature presents a transparency

like that of the adult.

x 46 diam.

* Loe. cit. p. 73.

20 = Mr. E. D. Cope on the Bunothertan Mammalia.

Fig. 8 (P|. IIL). Adult. The letters 7s and cl represent the superior and

inferior expansions of the cloaca, expansions separated at the

level of the letter p, where the median portion (cm) of the

cloaca comes into contact with the pharyngeal sac. The line Zz

represents the boundary of the lateral portion of the cloaca, and

the line / m the boundary of its median part.

Fig. 9 (Pl. I1.). Transverse section of the filament of the posterior extre-

mity. cell, large granular cells contained in its interior; € ¢,

transparent cells which form its superficial covering ; f0, fibrous

envelope ; m, section of the muscles of the aperture, which are

produced on the ventral side nearly to the extremity of the fila-

ment. X 150 diam.

Fig. 10 (P1. I11.). Transverse section of the endostyle. Xx 250 diam.

Fig. 11. Transverse section of an Anchinia at a stage a little more ad-

vanced than fig. 7 and at the level of the stomach. x 30 diam.

TI.—On the Mutual Relations of the Bunothertan Mammalia.

By E. D. Copr*.

Tue name Bunotheria was proposed by me for a series of

Mammalia which resemble in most technical characters the

Edentata and the Rodentia. That is, they agree with these

orders in having small, nearly smooth, cerebral hemispheres,

which leave the olfactory lobes and cerebellum entirely ex-

posed, and in some instances the hemispheres do not cover

the mesencephalum also. From the two orders in question,

however, they are easily distinguished. ‘Their enamel-covered

teeth separate them from the Hdentata, while the articulation

of the lower jaw is different from that found m the Rodentia.

It isa transverse ginglymus with a postglenoid process in

the Bunotheria, as distinguished from the longitudinal groove,

permitting antero-posterior motion, of the Rodentia.

Such a group as is thus characterized will include two

existing groups recognized as orders—the Prosimiz and the

Insectivora. The latter group has always been a crux to

systematists; and when we consider the skeleton alone, as

from the standpoint of the palxontologist, the difficulty is not

diminished. Various extinct types discovered in latter years,

chiefly in the Eocene formations, have been additions to this

intermediate series of forms, giving even closer relations with

the orders already adjacent, ¢.e. the Kdentata, the Rodentia,

the Prosimiz, and the Carnivora. As is known, the groups

corresponding to these orders have been named respectively

* From the ‘Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of

Philadelphia ’ for 1883, pp. 77-88.

Mr. E. D. Cope on the Bunothertan Mammalia. 21

the Tzeniodonta, Tillodonta, Mesodonta, and Creodonta.

With great apparent diversity, these suborders show unmis-

takable gradations into each other and the two recent orders

already mentioned. As such I may mention Psittacotherium,

which relates the Tzniodonta and illodonta, Hsthonya,

which relates the Tillodonta with nearly all the other sub-

orders, Achenodon, which connects Creodonta and Meso-

donta, and Cynodontomys, which may be Mesodont or Pro-

simian. ‘Then the existing Chiromys most certainly connects

Tillodonta and Prosimiz.

My original definitions of the suborders of the Mesodonta,

given in vol. il. of the U.S. Geological Survey under Capt.

G. M. Wheeler, p. 85, omitted the Prosimiz, and embraced a

number of characters whose significance must be reexamined.

Thus it is impossible to characterize the Creodonta as lacking

a trochlear groove of the astragalus, in view of the form of

that element in Mesonyx and Mioclenus, where the groove

is more or less distinct. It is impossible to distinguish the

Insectivora from the Creodonta by the deficiency of canine

and large development of incisor teeth. In Rhynchocyon the

canines are large and the superior incisors wanting, while in

Centetes the arrangement of these teeth is precisely as in the

Creodonta. As to the large Achewnodon and other Arctocyo-

nid, I find no characters whatever to distinguish them from

the generally small Mesodonta.

In view of these inconsistencies I have reexamined the

subject, and find the following definitions to be more nearly

coincident with the natural boundaries of the divisions of this

large order. ‘The importance of the character of the tritu-

bercular superior molar has recently impressed me (see ‘ Pro-

ceedings of the Academy,’ 1883, p. 56), as it had previously

done Prof. Gill. This zoologist has already distinguished

two divisions of the Insectivora (without the Galeopithecide)

by the forms of the superior molar teeth. ‘The first possesses

quadritubercular molars above, the second tritubercular.

That these types represent important stages in the develop-

ment of the molar dentition I have no doubt. These cha-

racters far outweigh in importance those expressing the forms

of the skull, matters of proportion only, with which a few

systematists unnecessarily overload their diagnoses. Such

characters are of little more than specific value, and serve to

obseure the mind of the inquirer for a true analysis. ‘They

may be used empirically, it is true, to determine relationships

when the diagnostic parts are wanting.

I propose to transfer the Insectivora with tritubercular

superior molars to the Creodonta, in spite of the fact that some

22 Mr. E. D. Cope on the Bunotherian Mammalia.

of them (Jfythomys, Solenodon, Chrysochloris) have but

weakly developed canine teeth, and Chrysochloris has large

incisors. As an extreme form Hsthonyx will follow, standing

next the Tillodonta. It will then be necessary to transfer

the Arctocyonide and all the Mesodonta to the Insectivora,

where they will find affinity with the Tupzide. These have

well-developed canines and small incisors, as in the extinet

groups named. ‘The Chiromyide must be distinguished from

all the other suborders, on account of its rodent-like incisors

combined with its lemur-like feet.

The characters of the six suborders will then be as fol-

lows :—

I. Incisor teeth growing from persistent pulps.

Canines also growing from less persistent pulps,

agreeing with external incisors in haying mo- .

lariform crowns ...... Set Oe s Oats eee er 1. Teniodonta.

Canines rudimental or wanting; hallux not

opposable...... oF caldera ites eons op ee aeTic Jo Ne 11. Tillodonta.

Canines none; hallux opposable ............ 1. Daubentonioidea.

Il. Incisor teeth not growing from persistent

pulps.

Superior true molars quadrituberculate ; hallux

GPPOSADIE ® hieio es 5 Sracuis: era catsiots ee ene eee Iv. Prosimie.

Superior true molars quadrituberculate ; hallux

BIO LAG PPOSHDIO oS ccrs ore csesste eye Siererele mis eas reve v. Insectivora.

Superior true molars trituberculate or bituber-

culate *; hallux not opposable ............ vi. Creodonta.

While the above scheme defines the groups exactly and,

so far as can now be ascertained, naturally, I do not doubt

that future research among the extinct forms will add much

necessary information which we do not now possess. It

is possible that the group I called Mesodonta may yet be

distinguished from the Insectivora by characters yet unknown.

But I cannot admit any affinity between this group and any

form of “ Pachyderms,” as suggested by Filhol, or of Suil-

lines, as believed by Lydekker ft. Such suppositions are in

direct opposition to what we know of the phylogeny of the

Mammalia. These views are apparently suggested by the

Bunodont type of teeth found in various Mesodonta; but that

* The internal tubercle is wanting in the last two superior molars in

Hyenodon. ‘This genus, of which the osteology remains largely unknown

has been stated by Gervais to possess a brain of higher type than the

Creodonta, Prof. Scott, of Princeton, however, is of the opinion that

this determination is erroneous, and that Hy@nodon is a true Creodont

in this and other respects. If so, the genus will perhaps enter the

Amblyctonide.

+ Memoirs Geological Survey of India, ser. x. 1883, p. 145.

Mr. E. D. Cope on the Bunotherian Mammalia. 23

character gives little ground for systematic determination

among Hocene Mammalia, and has deceived paleontologists

from the days of Cuvier to the present time. The only con-

necting-point where there may be doubt as to the ungulate

or unguiculate type of a mammal is the family Periptychide,

of the suborder Condylarthra. The suborder Hyracoidea

may furnish another index of convergence.

The families included in these suborders will be the fol-

lowing :—

Tantoponra. Calamodontide, Ectoganide.

Tittoponta. Tillothervide.

DAUBENTONIOIDEA. Chiromyide.

Prosimim. Tarstide, (?) Anaptomorphide, (2) Mixo-

dectide, Lemuride.

Insectivora, Soricide, Lrinacetde, Macroscelide,

Tupaide, Adapide*, Arctocyonide.

Creoponta. Yalpide, Chrysochloridide, Esthonychide,

Centetide (= Leptictide olim), Oxyenide, Miacide,

Amblyctonide, Mesonychide.

I at one time called this order by the name Insectivora, a

course which some zoologists may prefer. But a name should

as nearly as possible adhere to a group to which it was first

applied, and whose definition has become currently associated

with it. Such an application is correct in fact, and is a

material aid to the memory. ‘There are various precedents

for the adoption of a new general term for a group composed

of subordinate divisions which have themselves already re-

ceived names.

In order to determine the number of internal tubercles in

some of the Insectivora, so as to ascertain the affinities of some

questionable genera, it 1s first necessary to examine the homo-

logies of the cusps of the molar teeth. The opossums are

characterized by the presence of three longitudinal series of

tubercles on the superior molar. The homologies of these

cusps are rendered clear by the character presented by the

fourth superior premolar, where the anterior intermediate is

wanting. ‘lhe external cusps are really such, and are not

developed from a cingulum external to the true external cusps,

* Two species of Pelycodus must be removed from this genus and

family and be placed in the Creodonta with Mvoclenus. They are the

P, pelvidens and P. angulatus, which have the posterior inner tubercle of

the superior molars a mere projection of the cingulum. I place them in

anew genus, which differs from Mcoclenus in the possession of an internal

cusp of the fourth inferior premolar, under the name of Chriacus, type C.

pelvidens,

24 = =Myr. E. D. Cope on the Bunothertan Mammalia.

as appears at first sight to be the case with such animals as

the Talpide. The intermediate cusps are really such, although

the posterior looks like the apex of a V-shaped external cusp.

In Perathertum the external cusps are smaller than in Di-

delphys, and the intermediate V’s so much better developed

that the type is much like that of the Talpide, to whose

neighbhourhood I originally referred it.

This leads to a consideration of the question of the homo-

logies of the cusps in the genera of the old order of Insectivora

proper, and of the Creodonta. Mr. St. George Mivart has

briefly discussed the question, so far as relates to the former

group*. He commences with the primitive quadrituberculate

type presented by Gymnura and Erinaceus, and believes that

the external cusps occupy a successively more and more

internal position till they come to be represented by the apices

of well-developed V’s, as in the ungulate types. The V’s are

well developed in several families; and in Chrysochloris the

two V’s are supposed to be united and to constitute almost the

entire apex of the crown, while in Centetes the same kind of

V forms a still larger part of the crown.

I believe that these conclusions must be modified, in the

light of the characters of various extinct genera and of the

genus Didelphys. In the first place, there is an inherent im-

probability im the supposition that the external V’s of the

superior molars of the Insectivora have had the same origin

as those of the Ungulata. The movements of the jaws in the

two groups are different, the one being vertical, the other

partially lateral. In the one, acute apices are demanded ; in

the other, grinding faces and edges. We have corresponding

V’s in the inferior dental series, and we regard those as pro-

duced by the connexion of alternating cusps by oblique ridges.

In homologizing the superior cusps we have as elements two

external, two intermediate, and two internal cusps. The first

are opposite the external roots, and the anterior internal is op-

posite the internal root.

First, as regards Centetes and Chrysochloris. Besides the

strained character of the hypothesis that supposes the V-shaped

summit of the crown to represent two V’s fused together,

there is good evidence obtainable in support of the belief that

the triangle in question is the usual one presented by the

Creodonta.

This clearly consists of the two external and the anterior

internal cusps united by angular ridges. ‘The form is quite

the same as in Leptictis and Ictops, and nearly that of Delta-

* Journal of Anatomy and Physiology, il. p. 138, figures.

Mr. E. D. Cope on the Bunotherian Mammalia. 25

thertum, where the external cusps are present. Centetes and

Chrysochloris only differ from these in that the internal cusps

are wanting. In addition, the latter genus presents a rudi-

ment of the posterior inner tubercle, as is seen in Deltathertum.

An explanation similar to this is admitted by Mr. Mivart to

apply to the cusps of the inferior molar of Centetes. It remains

to ascertain whether the cusp in this genus, Chrysochloris, &c.

represents an intermediate or not.

Secondly, as regards the Talpide and Soricide, where the

external V’s are well marked. If we examine the external

cusps in the genus Didelphys, we find that the posterior one

becomes gradually more anterior in its position, until on the

second true molar it stands largely above the interspace be-

tween the roots instead of over the posterior root. It will also

be seen that the anterior intermediate tubercle is distinct and

of insignificant proportions, while the posterior intermediate is

large and is related to the posterior external as is the apex of

a V to its anterior base. In this arrangement I conceive that

we have an explanation of the V’s of the Talpide and Sori-

cide. The first true molar of Scalops is a good deal like that

of Didelphys; but the anterior cusp is larger and there is no

anterior intermediate cusp, while the posterior external is of

reduced size. ‘The posterior V is better developed than in

Didelphys but is composed, in the same way, of a posterior

intermediate cusp, and a posterior external with a posterior

heel. ‘These are united by stronger ridges in Scalops, Con-

dylura, and Blarina than m Didelphys. On the second true

molar in Scalops a V represents the anterior external cusp of

the first true molar. Whether this V has a constitution like

the posterior one, 7. e. is composed of external and intermediate

cusps joined, is difficult to determine; but it is probably so

constituted. It seems to be pretty clearly the case in Blarina,

where the fourth premolar and first true molar may be com-

pared, with a resulting demonstration of the correctness of

this view. In Condylura the V’s have become more deve-

loped and the external cusps reduced, so that the analysis is

more difficult.

This interpretation applied to Urotrichus and Galeopithecus

gives them quadrituberculate molars, not trituberculate, as

determined by Mivart. Mystomys is tritubercular. The

intermediate tubercles are present, but are imperfectly connected

with the external, so that V’s are not developed (wide figures

of Mivart and Allman). This genus offers as much confirma-

tion of the homology here proposed as do the opossums; but

it differs from the latter in having the anterior intermediate

tubercle the larger, instead of the posterior, Mystomys and

Mr. H. J. Carter on the Microscopic

Solenodon also confirm my determination of the homologies in

Centetes*.

In conclusion I give the following synoptic view of the

constitution of the superior molar teeth in various genera of

the Bunotheria.

CUSPS PRESENT.

External,

intermediate,

two internal.

Adapidie.

|Tupeeidee.

\Galeopithecide.

Soricidie.

Urotrichus.

External,

no intermediate,

two internal.

Gymunura.

Erinaceus.

Macroscelidide.

External,

intermediate,

one internal. |

Mystomyidee. |

Mioclezenus.

Miacis.

Talpidee.

\(Didelphys.)

(Canis.)

\Oxyeena.

(Chriacus.

‘Deltatherium.

|Esthonyx.

External,

no interme-

diate,

one internal,

Mesonyx.

Leptictis.

Stypolophus.

(2nd internal

rudimentary ).

No external,

no inter-

mediate,

two internal.

Chrysochloris

(2nd internal

rudimentary).

Solenodon

(ditto).

No external

no interme-

diate,

one internal

Centetes.

I1l.—On the Microscopic Structure of thin Slices of Fossil

Calcispongie.

By H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &e.

In the “ P.S.” which I hastily added to my last “ Observa-

tions on the so-called ‘ Farringdon Sponges’ (Calcispongie,

Zittel),” it is stated that Dr. Harvey B. Holl had kindly sent

me four slides, testifying respectively to two facts, viz. 1st,

that the spiculation of Verticillites anastomans was that of a

Calcisponge, to me

size”? with that of Grantia compressa; and 2nd, that it was

confronted by a crust of pinlike spicules with their heads

outwards; and at the conclusion, that I had no¢ seen the latter

in my specimens of Vertdicillites anastomans from Farringdon

in Berkshire.

Wishing to confirm this, I obtained through Dr. Holl’s

kindness his entire specimen, and having made two or three

precisely like and almost identical in

* This view was first advanced by the writer in the Annual Report

U.S. Geol. Sury. Terrs. 1873-74, p. 472.

Structure of Fossil Calcispongic. 27

slides from it, found in all what I have stated; while, seeing

that the specimen was identical with one of my own from Far-

ringdon, I did the same with this with the same result; but

when thus engaged I saw that I had specimens of another

form in my collection, and that this also presented the pinlike

spicules. It was then evident that there were two, viz. Dr.

Holl’s and another, and that they chiefly differed in the form

of the siphonal cloaca which passes through the centre of each

septum, like that of an Orthoceras, only with the convexity of

the septa reversed (that is, directed upwards or outwards) in

Verticillites. In Dr. Holl’s specimen this passage is reduced

toa marginated circular hole of intercommunication in the septa

which separate the chambers; while in the other form it is

a continuous tube or cylinder communicating with the chambers

respectively by holes in its s¢des, which thus, through this

canal, establish a communication with the exterior.

On reference to Dr. Gustav Steinmann’s figures (“* Pharetro-

nen-Studien,’’ Neues Jahrbuch f. Mineral. Geol. u. Palionto-

logie, 1882, 11. Bd. Taf. vi. u. vii. figs. 5,6 u. 1 respectively)

I see that Dr. Holl’s species has been called “ helvetica”’ by

De Loriol (Urgonien infér. de Landeron, p. 65, t. v. figs. 4—

11); while the other form had long since received the name

of “ Verticillipora (Verticillites, Detr.) anastomans” from Man-

tell (‘ Wonders of Geology,’ p. 636, fig. 3, &c.).

The pinlike spicules, however, are present in doth, and ar-

ranged in the manner of a funnel, with the spout inwards or

continuous with each external aperture of the radial canals, as

may be proved by making a horizontal and vertical section of

the wall respectively, when the full length of the pinlike

spicules is seen in the former sloping inwards towards the

canal, and their truncated ends in a circle surrounded by the

triradiates in the latter, while by making one horizontally

through the septum and the wall together both may be seen

at once. ‘The pin spicules, like the triradiates, are dissolved

by diluted nitric acid, although generally preserved in form

when that of the triradiates has almost entirely disappeared.

It is very probable that Dr. Holl’s specimen came trom the

same neighbourhood as my own; but, be this as it may, it

would be desirable to ascertain if the pinlike spicules are

absent in the species from the Jura and elsewhere out of Eng-

land, as they are in Dr. Hinde’s Verticillites D’ Orbignyi,

which came from the Upper Greensand at Warminster in

Wiltshire, within twenty-four miles of Farringdon.

The next point to which I would direct attention is the

change which takes place in the spiculation of the Calcispongiz

during fossilization, to which I have also hastily alluded

28 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Microscopic

in the following “ footnote” to my above-mentioned paper in

the ‘ Annals,’ viz. :—

“Can it be possible after all, that this concentric lamina-

tion is mineral and not organic—that is, that the calcareous

layers are but a reproduction in form of the original spicules,

which, during fossilization, have become dissolvedand furnished

this solution for the new structure, as often seen in the chalce-

donization of the vitreous sponges, or as agatoid layers round

a grain of extraneous matter? ‘lhe examination of another

slice of my specimen of Sestrostomella from the Jura strongly

inclines me to this view”’ (‘ Annals,’ ser. 5, vol. xi. p. 35).

Thus influenced, I lost no time in endeavouring to confirm

the inference by grinding down slices of several species of

fossil Calcispongiz to a minimum of at least 1-500th of an

inch, or semitransparency, viz. Verticillites anastomans and

helvetica, Peronellu dumosa, Oculosponyia dilatata, Elasmo-

stoma acutimargo, and two or three others, when I came to the

following conclusions :—

1. That during fossilization, the organic matter of the

spicule disappearing, the mineral matter, thus deprived of its

cement, is set free.

2. That while this is taking place the forms of the spicules

are more or less destroyed and the mineral matter more or less

passes into solution.

3. That the forms of the spicules thus more or less destroyed

run into each other so as to assume shapes totally different

from what they were originally, while the rest of the caleare-

ous material in a state of solution becomes deposited in the

form of fibre composed of one or more concentric layers en-

closing the lines of spicules.

4, That although the slice when reduced to extreme thin-

ness may present no distinct tri- or quadriradiates, yet one

or more perfect ones may have come into view during the

latter part of the reduction, when, atter every two or three

strokes of the grinding, the slice should be transferred to the

field of the microscope, lest the spicule be rubbed off altogether.

Hence the advantage of grinding down the slice one’s self,

otherwise such important facts might pass unnoticed.

5. That if the tri- or quadriradiate of a Calcisponge cet.

par. is thus seen, this should be sutticient to prove the nature

of the fossil, although the next stroke of the grinding may

destroy it, which is often the case.

Observations.

It is, however, the running together of the lines of the

Structure of Fossil Calcispongice. 29

original tri- or quadriradiate spicules which leads, in all in-

stances that I have examined, to the branched, forked, and

other forms that resemble the spiculation of a Lithistid sponge,

especially after the slice has been reduced to the lowest degree

(that is, to semitransparency). Hence, whenever I have been

so fortunate as to see even one undoubted tri- or quadriradiate

of a Calcisponge, although, as before stated, it may have dis-

appeared in the subsequent grinding, I have felt as convinced

that the fossil was a Calcisponge as that the fantastic forms

which accompanied it were spurious ; so that now when I come

toa perfect tri- or quadriradiate of the kind mentioned, I stop

grinding and mount the specimen for preservation and more

deliberate examination.

Process of Grinding down a Slice of a Calcareous Fossil

for Microscopicol Kxamination.

Take about one part of half-dry Canada balsam, and place

it on the centre of a glass slide; heat it until melted over a

spirit-lamp with about half an inch vertical flame, moving

the slide backwards and forwards to prevent the latter from

cracking ; add two parts of shellac ; and when the whole has

bubbled up, stir it with the point of a needle so as to mix

well, and spread it altogether over a little more of the glass

than the size of the slice to be reduced.

Previous to this, cut off with a watch-spring or very fine

saw fixed in an iron bow-frame (all of which may be obtained

from an ironmonger at a very small charge) the slice to be

ground down; and if there be much siliceous matter in the

fossil, the saw (which is very cheap) may be sacrificed by the

addition of emery powder and water to the groove, as this

accelerates the cutting. (Of course where a machine with

horizontal turning-wheel is possessed, such as is used for

cutting siliceous fossils, flint, &c., this is the quickest and

most economical way to obtain the “ slice,’’)

Having thus obtained it, so far prepared, rub one side (viz.

that to be examined) down to scratchless smoothness on a

schoolboy’s slate or very fine honestone with level surface, to

effect which it is absolutely necessary that all the materials

should be entirely freed by washing from every particle of

emery or siliceous mineral that may happen to be present ;

otherwise the calcareous surface. will become almost irre-

mediably furrowed.

Next dry the slice on a tin or paper tray placed inside the

fender by the fire, where it can remain until the next part of

the process is completed.

50 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Ovigerous Layer of

Now remelt the material on the glass slide as before ; and

when sufficiently fluidified to present a uniformly level surface

(but not burnt, for this would destroy the tenacity of the

cement and thus give it a crispness which, by cracking, would

defeat all attempts at further reduction), quickly transfer the

warmed slice (which should now be close at hand) to it,

while with a little pressure the ‘ smoothed”’ surface is brought

into direct contact with that of the glass. Thus let it remain

on the table where thisis done until the glass feels cold to the

touch.

After this reduce the slice to the thinness of a wafer over a

very fine vertical rotating grinding-stone, or on a copper plate

with emery powder and water, horizontally.

Now wash it well in water, and, placing the slide on a

piece of buckskin leather spread on the table or over a level

surface (to keep it from slipping) with the slice uppermost,

continue the reduction in water with a piece of very fine

siliceous limestone, that may be obtained from a statuary, of

a convenient form (that is, one which will admit of the surface

of the slice coming into direct and continuous contact with

that of the limestone), with which it should be horizontally

rubbed until reduced to the required thinness, which must_ be

ascertained by repeatedly transterring the slice to the field of

the microscope with an inch object-glass and high ocular,

The nearer this thinness is approached the oftener this trans-

fer should be made, washing the slice by dipping the slide

into a bowl of water each time that it is examined.

When sufficiently reduced, wash the slide as before, and

stand it up to drain until the slice is perfectly dry. Then

cover with benzol, followed by balsam and thin glass, for

preservation and more deliberate examination.

I make no apology for introducing these remarks, as the

“ process,” although open to criticism and improvement no

doubt, answers the purpose; and while inexperienced I

myself should have been very glad of such aid. Dr. Holl

suggested to me the use of shellac, which is the most valuable

hint that I have received.

1V.—On the Presence of Starch-granules in the Ovum of the

Marine Sponges, and on the Ovigerous Layer of Suberites

domuncula, Nardo. By H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &e.

Ir was but a short time since that I pointed out another in-

stance of a structure like thai of the cellular tissue of plants,

Suberites domuncula, Nardo. 31

situated around the statoblast of freshwater sponges (‘ Annals,’

1882, vol. x. p. 367) ; the presence of starch-granules had been

described in 1856, although not figured until 1859; and now

I have to announce the latter also in the ovum of the marine

sponges.

As this was brought to my notice by cutting up a

fragment of the ovigerous layer of Suberites domuncula into

small pieces, when, by pressure, both oil-globules and starch-

granules made their appearance among the granular contents

of the ova, I will particularly describe this layer before com-

paring these ova with those of other sponges.

Familiar to naturalists as Suberites domuncula, Nardo, ap.

Schmidt, 1862 (Spong. Adriatisch.), = Hymeniacidon suberea,

Bowerbank, 1866 (Mon. Brit. Spong. vol. 11. p. 200), has

been for many years past, viz. from Aldrovandus, at the

beginning of the 17th century (Johnston, Brit. Spong. p. 142),

down to the present time, although not recognized as a sponge

until Col. Montagu described it as such from specimens

dredged on the coast of Devonshire circa 1812 (Werner.

Mem. Edin. 1818, vol. ii. p. 100), no one appears to have

noticed the striking manner in which its ova are deposited in

a layer on that part of the hard object (generally a dead

shell} over which it may have grown.

On the 6th January 1870, after a storm, I picked up on

this beach (Budleigh-Salterton, South Devon) two specimens,

and on ihe 4th September 1877 upwards of 150 were brought

to me from the dredgings of a ‘ trawler” about 20 miles off

this shore, all of which had grown on dead shells of a similar

kind, viz. Turritella and small Buccinwm, tenanted either by

a hermit crab (Pagurus) or annelid. All, oras many as I have

examined, present the same kind of ovigerous layer, in which

all the ova are in the same stage of development; so that we

may infer, from the dates above mentioned and what will be

stated hereafter, that throughout the year these sponges, if

containing a dead shell or any similarly hard object, will have

upon it a similar ovigerous layer.

Like most of its kind, too, Suberites domuncula not only

grows over the dead shell, but as it grows encloses a large

quantity of the fine detritus of the sea-bed in which it may

have lived; so that it is impossible to free the smallest por-

tion from this foreign material, and it is on this account equally

impossible to obtain a satisfactory view of the finer elements

of which the sarcodic substance of the sponge itself is com-

posed.

Kach specimen appears to be but a single individual

(“ person,” Hiickel), as each has only a single ragged vent

32 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Ovigerous Layer of

situated on the most pendent or prominent part, which is the

outlet of a well-developed excretory canal-system, whose

branches pervade the extremely fine and compact structure of

which the sponge is otherwise composed. The pinlike

spicules &c. and the ovigerous layer that I am about to

describe are also particularly evident; but as the sponge

generally has been heretofore repeatedly noticed with the

exception of this layer, I shall henceforth confine myself to a

description of the latter only.

If a vertical section of one of these specimens be made, so

that the incision may fall perpendicularly and longitudinally

on the shell over which the sponge may have grown, and the

two portions forcibly separated trom each other, so as to ex-

pose the shell beneath (say a Turritella about 14 inch long),

a yellowish chitinous layer composed of ova closely packed

together (not unlike the nidamental layer of a mollusk) will

be left upon the shell, corresponding in extent to the amount

of the shell covered by the sponge, whether this be a part or

the whole, and adhering so strongly that the whole of the

sponge-substance may be washed off with a brush without dis-

turbing the attachment (fig. 3). On the other hand, sup-

posing that the sponge, as is commonly the case, be attached

to the whole length of the TZurritella and the specimen

(having been preserved in a wet state) is put into dilute nitric

acid, the shell part will be entirely dissolved away, leaving

the ovigerous layer in this instance attached to the sponge,

when a similar section with a sharp thin knife may be made

to pass through both the sponge and the ovigerous layer

together ; and thus, by examining the object in water under a

microscope, the thickness and structure of the latter may be

easily ascertained.

The ovigerous layer may then be observed to be composed

of a yellowish tough chitinous stratum of ova in juxtapo-

sition, but only one ovum deep or thick (fig. 2), of which

the part that was in contact with the shell is flat, thin,

and even (fig. 2,4), but that towards the sponge thick and

granulated by the convexities of the layer of ovarian cap-

sules, which, from being compressed together, vary slightly

in height, size, and shape, so that, although generally the

stratum or ovigerous layer is only one 200th of an inch thick,

the thickness towards the sponge is so far rendered irregular

(fig. 2, a), while the horizontal diameter of the ova when

viewed in a flat position on the sponge side is found to vary

from the 180th to the 90th of an inch (fig. 8); hence the

ovum, being flat below, convex above, and rendered more or

less polygonal laterally by horizontal compression, fails to

Suberites domuncula, Nardo. 33

present that spherical form which it would do if, as in other

cases, it had been isolated in the midst of the sponge-tissue.

Taking the elements of the ovum one by one from without

inwards, it will be found to consist of a thick chitinous capsule

followed by a delicate membrane filled with the yelk. The

capsule, as before stated, is convex towards the sponge, flat

towards the shell, and polygonal laterally, presenting on its

convexity a great number of minute circular granules or

points arranged more or less hexagonally, more or less pro-

jecting beyond the surface, often possessing a punctum in the

centre, and always connected with each other by a fold

of the surface, so that it presents under high microscopic

power a reticulated appearance (figs. 3, a, and 4). This part

of the capsule is very thick when compared with the side

towards the shell, being composed of five or more chitinous

layers, amounting in all to 1-3000th inch, while the flat side

hardly amounts to more than one of these layers. Interiorly

it is smooth, where it is in contact with the delicate mem-

brane investing the yelk, and appears to be uniformly closed

on all sides; so that no aperture whatever could be detected

in it.

The yelk, on the other hand, surrounded by this “ delicate

membrane,” which is hardly demonstrable from its trans-

parency and thinness, consists of spherical refractive granules

about 1-12000th inch in diameter, among which are a great

many oil-globules and starch-granules, the latter of a greyish-

white colour, more or less oval in form, flat, and presenting a

crack-like translucency in the centre, varying in size under

1-600th inch in diameter and becoming of the usual opaque

blue colour under the influence of iodine, when they strikingly

contrast with the whiteness of the yelk-granules generally,

which do not become so coloured.

Such is the composition of this ovigerous layer, and such

the characters of the contents of the ova in every instance that

I have examined ; so that it may fairly be assumed that under

these circumstances none ever get beyond the granulation of

the yelk in this position, whatever they may do afterwards

when impregnation and the duplicative subdivision of the yelk

destroys the individuality of the yelk-granules and leads on

to the development of the embryo—a state which I have not

witnessed, nor do I know where to find; but as the ovigerous

layer is only to be seen over the surface of the hard objects

enclosed by the Suberite so long as they exist, and no trace

of such a layer or any ova can be discovered after the shell

has disappeared, even when its mowld still remains empty,

which is often the case (as proved by a specimen where the

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol, xii. 3

34 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Ovigerous Layer of

upper half of the Zurritella on which the sponge had grown

remains with the ovigerous layer still on it, while the lower part

has disappeared and left not a trace of ova or the ovigerous

layer behind, where both originally existed (fig. 1), and in

another, where the original shell has passed away and a

smaller one has been enclosed, apparently for the purpose of

receiving a new ovigerous layer), it seems not impossible that

impregnation and the further development of the ovum may

take place with the disappearance of the shell, when the embryo

at least could easily escape through that part of the capsule

which was in contact with it, and which I have stated to be so

extremely thin (fig. 2, d).

Let us now turn our attention for a few moments to the ova

of other marine sponges, to see how far they agree with those

of Suberttes domuncula ; and selecting Lsodictya simulans, Bk.,

for this purpose out of several ova-bearing ones that I have,

preserved in spirit, the ova will be found to be congregated

in the sponge towards the base or oldest part, but not attached

to the rock on which the sponge may have grown, as in

uberites domuncula. While thus isolated they present a sphe-

rical form so long as the yelk has not passed into the fully

developed embryo; but when this is completed the embryo

bursts through the delicate capsule which enclosed it, and then

assumes the form of a conical shot or elongated cone with a

little tuft at the obtuse end (the long cilia). Under the former

or spherical condition, in my specimen, the grumous or clotted

state of the contents and presence of spicules already show

that the originally granular state of the yelk has been trans-

formed through duplicate subdivision with its consequences,

into the coming embryo, and thus the presence of starch,

although evident under the use of iodine, is now very trifling,

showing that in the egg of the Suberite, as in the seed of

plants, it is abundant at the commencement and disappears

in the usual way under germination.

The same observations apply to the ova of Halisarca lobu-

laris, Aplysina corneostellata (Darwinella aurea), Esperia, and

Halichondria sanguinea, Johnst., so that we here see the

animal nature evinced in spite of the resemblance of the ova

of sponges to the seed of plants ; for while the sponge-embryo

develops a root for fixation only, and a superstructure tor

supporting organisms that take in crude material for food, that

of plants develops a root for nutrition as well as fixation

and a leafy superstructure, viz. the “ plumule,” which grows

by endosmosis through the spongioles at the ends of the

radicles.

Having already gone into the subject of impregnation in

Suberites domuncula, Nardo. 35

the Sponges (‘ Annals,’ 1882, vol. x. p. 364), Ihave only to

add here that, accompanying the ova of Aplysina corneostellata

especially, which are about 1-120th inch in diameter, there

are in my specimen many smaller spherical bodies averaging

only 1-360th inch, which in size do not appear to be a

second set of ova, although when dyed with aniline red they

all (both ova and these bodies) become equally tinged and

much more so than the other parts; but being respectively

surrounded by a capsule formed of granuliferous cells, 1t 1s

almost impossible to say what appearance their respective

contents otherwise present. I think I can see the same also

among the ova of Isodictya simulans, where the granulated

appearance of thedr contents is not obscured by a capsule of

this kind; and certainly in a thin slice of Grantia compressa,

whose spongozoa in the living state were successfully fed with

indigo, so that all the other elements (viz. larva, ova, and

these granuliferous cells) remain uncoloured, while the blue

spongozoa mark out the ampullaceous sacs with a sharpness

which prevents all confusion ; but whether these granuliferous

bodies were spermatic or not I am unable to decide. It may

not be unworthy of remark here, that while examining the

freshwater sponges of Bombay, in 1856, I noticed granulife-

rous cells which seemed to me to be spermatic, and thus de-

scribed them “ provisionally’? under the head of “ sperma-

tozoids”” (‘ Annals,’ 1856, vol. xviil. p. 227).

Lastly, another instance of the presence of spermatozoa In

sponges has lately been added by Dr. N. Poléjaeff, of the

University of Gratz, which was obtained from an examination

of Sycandra raphanus, Hickel, in the living state, by making

very thin slices and examining them under a high microscopic

power, afterwards followed by the application of osmic acid

and alum-carmine, to render the tail or cilium more evident

(“ Ueber das Sperma und die Spermatogenese bei Sycandra

raphanus, Hickel,” Separat-Abdruck aus dem lxxxvi. Bande

der Sitzb. der k. Akad. Wissensch. 1 Abth. Nov. Heft, Jahrg.

1882; read 16th Nov. 1882). But still there is no character

given to the spermatic cell, as I have before noticed, by which

it may be satisfactorily recognized by the inexperienced

student, if, indeed, there be any such ; and, so far as the granu-

lation goes, it is as conjectural to me now as it was in 1856.

Allusion is made (p. 4) to my also conjectural figures of

the spermatozoon in Grantia compressa (‘ Annals,’ vol. xiv.

p- 108, pl. x. figs. 21-23), which are so much more like the

monociliated cells of the larva at a very early period than the

spermatozoa of Sycandra raphanus represented by Dr. Polé-

jaeff, that I am now more inclined than ever to regard

them as such.

36 On Suberites domuncula, Nardo.

The ova of sponges in colour generally follow that of the

parent sponges themselves, especially towards maturity, when

this becomes more intense, and thus they contrast strongly

with the rest of the substance. The ovabearing specimens

which I possess are :—Halisarca lobularis, obtained from this

shore in July 1874; Aplysina corneostellata, from Vigo Bay,

by Saville Kent, F.L.S. &e., June 1870; Lsodictya simulans,

from this shore (here the ovum is white), July 1874 (at this

time also [found Esperta and Halichondria sanguinea nan ova-

bearing state, but did not preserve any of them); lastly,

Grantia compressa, trom this shore, May 1871, viz. those

individuals which were successfully fed with indigo. Dr.

Polgjaeff does not give the date of his observing the sperma-

tozoa in Sycandra raphanus, although, from his paper having

been read in the month of November, it may be inferred that

this took place during the preceding summer. It is desirable

to add the dates of such observations, because they may not

only be a guide to others, but finally fix the period of this

mode of reproduction in the species.

EXPLANATION OF THE WOODCUTS.

Fig. 1. Suberites domuncula, Nardo, natural size. Section of, showing :—

aaa, sponge; 6b, cavities left by the lower whorls of the en-

closed shell (Twrritella), which have disappeared ; c, remaining

portion of the shell, covered with the ovigerous layer.

Fig. 2, The same. Fragment of vertical section of ovigerous layer,

showing :—a, convexities of capsules towards the sponge; 6,

flat membrane covering the shell. Scale about 1-24th to

1-1800th inch.

Fig. 3, The same. Fragment of ovigerous layer viewed from the sponge

side, showing the juxtaposition of the ova: a, ovum, on which

the granulation of the surface is depicted. Same scale.

Fig. 4. The same. Fragment of the granulated surface, much magnified.

Scale about 1-24th to 1-GO00th inch. é

Microscopie Seaual Characteristics of Oysters. 37

V.—The Microscopic Sexual Characteristics of the Ameri-

can, Portuguese, and Common Edible Oyster of Europe

compared. By Joun A. RyDER*.

In the issue of ‘ Forest and Stream’ of November 30 just

past, in an article by the writer, page 351, middle column, it

is remarked :—‘I regard Davaine’s observations upon the

histology of the reproductive organs [of the European oyster]

as of little value, being made before the introduction of im-

proved methods of investigation. His figures of the finer

structural details have apparently been made from crushed

fragments.” In passing this judgment upon Dr. Davaine’s

work I have been severer than the state of the case demanded,

as will be seen in the sequel, though I do not yet admit that

his methods of research were what they should have been,

for until now we have had no adequate description of the

structures in question. Until recently I have maintained

with reservations that the sexes in the European oyster were

probably separate, as in the American; more recent investi-

gation with more refined methods have proved to me that in

this I was in error. In my article in ‘ Forest and Stream’ I

also took occasion to refer to a statement in Gegenbaur’s

‘ Klements of Comparative Anatomy,’ English edition, p. 380,

where he says :—“ In the oysters we find an intermediate step

toward a separation of the sexes, inasmuch as these organs are

not active at the same time in the same individual; but the

male and female organs alternately so.” The writer, in com-

menting upon the above, then wrote, “ This quotation tacitly

admits the unisexuality of the Huropean oyster, to which it

evidently refers. The last part of the remark, however, is

founded upon the slenderest kind of evidence—in fact, upon

no evidence except a surmise, as such an alternate activity of

the two parts is improbable | for obvious reasons | ; besides, it

is not possible to demonstrate such an alternation of sexual

activity in the same individual. As every one knows, the

soft parts of an oyster cannot be examined without opening

the shell, which necessarily makes the needed second obser-

vation to confirm this alleged alternation of sexual activity a

physical impossibility.” Iam now in a position to go still

further, and to assert that the first part of the quotation from

Gegenbaur is also erroneous, because we may find both eggs

and spermatozoa in the same follicle at the same time.

* From the ‘Bulletin of the United-States Fish Commission,’ March 14,

1883, pp. 205-215.

38 Mr. J. A. Ryder on the Microscopie

What, then, is the true state of the case? This query we

propose answering ; but before we set out it will be necessary

to give some account of the methods of investigation used in

order to arrive at a definite conclusion. Thin sections of

those portions of the animal in which the reproductive struc-

tures are lodged are of the first importance. After trying

various methods, which were found for the most part unsatis-

factory, the preparation of sections was finally conducted as

follows:—After the soft parts were removed from the shell

they were thrown into a chromic acid solution of from one to

two per cent., in which they were allowed to remain for several

days; and in some cases the hardening solution was even re-

newed, This was done in order that the hardening agent

might act upon the whole of the soft parts and harden them

throughout ; unless the chromic acid is allowed some time to

act upon the entire animal, it will not be uniformly hardened,

the centre of the body remaining soft. After hardening, the

animals should be thoroughly washed and soaked in water for

a couple of days, to remove all traces of the acid before they

are finally put into alcohol for permanent preservation.

Hardened material so preserved will make good sections

months afterwards.

Portions of the body-mass of different individuals should

then be cut out; it is best to cut up the body into thick slices

or blocks in a transverse direction, large enough to be conve-

niently held between the fingers. It was also found advisable

to take such thick slices of the hardened body-mass from

several individuals, since it was discovered that scarcely any

two had the reproductive glands developed to exactly the

same degree of maturity. ‘This point is important, as it bas

enabled us to follow up the development of the reproductive

organs in the connective tissue which invests them. After

considerable experiment and disappointment in the effort to

imbed these thick hardened slices so as to cut sections with

the microtome, the method of imbedding was abandoned alto-

gether. ‘he thick blocks or slices were entirely freed from

alcohol by soaking in water for a day, then removed, after

drying them off as much as possible with blotting-paper or a

soft linen cloth, to a thick solution of gum arabic, in which it

is best to allow them to remain from twenty-four to forty-eight

hours, so as to be thoroughly saturated. The superfluous

gum may then be poured off and the blocks of tissue, soaked

as they are with the gum, covered with strong alcohol. In

twenty-four hours the blocks will be found hard enough to

cut. ‘The blocks of hardened tissue are simply held between

the thumb and fore finger, and thesections made with a section-

Sexual Characteristics of Oysters. 39

knife with the free hand. When cutting sections it is neces-

sary to keep the knife well wetted with alcohol, so that the

sections may readily slide off on the upperside of the blade.

Water should not be used to wet the knife, as it would get

on the block of tissue, dissolve the gum, soften the surface

to be cut, and injure the succeeding sections. ‘The sections

are lifted from the knife as fast as cut, with a camel’s hair

pencil, and\ chrown into a dish of water, in which the gum will

dissolve out in a few minutes. The sections are then ready

to be stained; and in order to clearly differentiate the herma-

phroditic character of the reproductive glands of Ostrea edulis,

a special staining reagent must be used. The one which

gives the best results and acts most quickly will be given here.

Equal parts of dense alcoholic solutions of safranin red and

methyl green * are poured together and diluted with about

eight times their combined volumes of water, producing a dark

purplish solution of about the colour of claret wine. Into

this the sections may be thrown and allowed to remain until

completely saturated with colour, or until they are opaque:

they may remain in the staining-fluid from one hour toa day ;

but two or three hours is a sufficient length of time. When

removed from the staining-fluid they are too deeply stained to

be mounted at once, and must therefore be transterred to 95-

per-cent. or absolute alcohol, and stirred about in it until the

safranin red is no longer given off in clouds from the sections ;

but it is important to note that if the sections remain in the

strong alcohol too long the whole of the safranin will be washed

out. In order to prevent this, when it is seen that the sec-

tion has acquired a rosy red hue, combined with a bluish-green

tint in the parts stained by the methyl green, the object should

at once be removed from the alcohol, thrown into oil of

cloves and mounted in balsam or damar. The extraction of the

superfluous colour requires from five to fifteen minutes, accord-

ing to the thickness and character of thesection, and should

on no account be allowed to proceed too far; if it does, the

peculiar and important staining-effect of the safranin is lost.

As first poited out by Flemming, it has the peculiar property

of stainmg the nucleus and its contents while it may be

totally removed from other parts of the cell; in fact, as in

the oyster-egg, it may be entirely removed from the nucleus

and left only in a part of the nucleolus. The methyl green,

on the other hand, does not tend to stain the eggs, but rather

the spermatozoa and the cells from which they are derived ;

and it is one of the most astounding facts known to histological

* These are both aniline colours; the first is hard to obtain, except

from dealers in dyers’ colours.

40 Mr. J. A. Ryder on the Mieroscopic

chemistry, that although both of these dyes, to begin with,

are intimately mixed together in the staining-fluid, the diffe-

rent histological elements of the section exert some. kind of

selective power by which they absorb and hold mainly the

one colour only. This peculiar property of the two colours,

even when mixed together, enables one to distinctly map out

the relations of the sexual elements in the reproductive fol-

licles, the nuclei of the ovarian ova being stained red by the

safranin, and the heads of the spermatozoa bluish green by

the methyl green. The foregoing is mainly the method to

which I have had recourse in working out the sexual charac-

teristics of Ostrea edulis. Simpler staining-methods suffice

in the case of Ostrea virginica and Ostrea angulata. A single

colour used in staining sections of O. edulis is lable to lead

to error, in consequence of the peculiar mode in which the

spermatozoa are packed together in oblong clusters, which

are often of about the size of the ovarian ova. This egg-like

appearance of the masses of unripe spermatozoa in the fol-

licles of the reproductive organs of the common oyster of

Europe misled me when examining sections stained only

with eosin or carmine. ‘The monochromatic effect produced

by one colour only gave no hint as to the real relations of ova

and spermatozoa in the follicles until high powers were used

with special manipulation of the light.

The characteristics of the reproductive organs of Ostrea

edulis, O. virginica, and O. angulata are sufficiently marked

to be very precisely described and figured, so as to enable any

person to appreciate the differences, especially between the

first and the last two. O. edulis is essentially hermaphroditic in

the structure of its reproductive organs, while the other two

are as distinctly moncecious or unisexual. A marked diffe-

rence is also to be noted in the relative size or calibre of the

reproductive follicles in the hermaphroditic and in the uni-

sexual species. In O. edulis the calibre of the generative

tubules appears to be relatively much greater than in O. vwir-

ginica and O. angulata, nor are the tubules so densely

crowded together as in the latter species. Up to this time this

difference appears to me to be so marked that I think it would

be possible to distinguish sections of O. edulis from those of

the other two species by means of this one character. In

other respects the history of the development of the repro-

ductive tissues in both species appears to be similar. In

all, the sexual tissue arises as a linear interstitial differentia-

tion between the coarse connective-tissue cells of the animal,

only that in O. edulis the rudimentary network does not form

quite so close a meshwork as in the other two forms here

Sexual Characteristics of Oysters. 41

considered. ‘The tubules have a more extensive anastomiosis

with each other in the unisexual species than in the herma-

phroditic. In all the forms fine vessels pass off from the

dorsal and ventral somatic arteries, which tend to branch into

vessels of a capillary fineness amongst the reproductive follicles.

Thus the glandular portions of the reproductive organs are

effectively nourished by supplies of blood passing from the

great vessels given off by the heart. ‘These are the principal

characteristic features of the reproductive follicles in the her-

maphroditic and unisexual forms which are noticed upon com-

paring the two together. The most important differences

between the two forms are to be found, however, in the mode

in which the generative elements are produced in each type,

which we will now consider.

In O. edulis the reproductive glands, when well developed,

show in many cases a lining of large nearly mature ovules

or ovarian eggs at intervals ; and insinuated between them

large coarsely granular bodies may be observed, in which large

irregular nuclear bodies are often imbedded. These nuclear

bodies are further distinguished from those of the ovules by

their oval or oblong and often irregular form, and by con-

taining a dense mass of granules which absorb safranin in

such quantity as to become opaque. ‘This granular chro-

matin, as it would be designated by Flemming, is usually

ageregated at the centre of the nuclear or cellular mass, which-

ever it may be, and is furthermore apt to conform to a certain

extent to the external outline of the body which contains it.

From these bodies the rounded granular cells appear to arise

which fall into the cavity of the tubule or follicle, there to

undergo further segmentation, and finally break up into sper-

matozoa with spherical heads and filiform tails or flagella.

Even (in some cases) where no spermatozoa are as yet re-

vealed by the methyl green, these rounded spermogens or

spermatoblasts are to be seen free in the centre of the follicles.

Usually, however, the spermatoblasts have been crowded

towards the external end of the tubule, where they have

undergone differentiation into spermatozoa. ‘The sperma-

tozoa are often on this account so crowded together at the

outlet of the tubules, passing even into the superficial ducts,

that when acted on by the methyl green they are revealed as

a dense almost opaque dark bluish-green mass. The ovules,

on the other hand, which may be quite nearly mature, remain

unstained, except their spherical clear nucleus and nucleolus,

which ig double, as if formed of two conjoined spherules. If

the safranin has been washed out of the nucleus, the one

spherule ef the nucleolus only is apt to retain the colour. The

42 Mr. J. A. Ryder on the Microscopic

peculiar nucleus of the ovules at once distinguishes them from

the elements which later break up and become the sperma-

tozoa. Apparently every phase of the spermatogenetic pro-

cess is under way in the follicles, while more or less nearly

mature ovules may be adherent to the walls of the same

tubules. In some specimens I find the tubules to contain

nothing but ova, with little or no trace of spermatoblasts; in

others, again, both classes of products may be present in about

the same condition of maturity. In still others little else but

spermatozoa are to be found, but, adherent to the walls of

the follicles, cells are to be found which have the nucleus so

characteristic of the more mature ovules. These, I am in-

clined to believe, are the representatives of what will later

become ova, and not the representatives of spermatoblasts.

It is a singular fact that the spermatozoa have a tendency in

O. edulis to cling together in masses of about a uniform size.

Though the spermatic particles which compose these masses

are somewhat separated from each other, 1f compressed to-

gether they would evidently form a body about the size of the

spermatoblasts from which they were derived. Later they

tend to break up and form a more homogeneous granular mass

at the outlet of their parent tubule, where the latter joins the

outgoing efferent duct. While it is true that some sections of

O. edulis show little evidence of the presence of any thing else

but the product of one sex, it appears to me that there is suffi-

cient evidence of the hermaphrodite character of the genera-

tive glands of the species presented by a pretty large series of

sections taken from about fifty individuals from different

localities along the coasts of Wales, Scotland, England,

France, Holland, and Germany. Sometimes a portion only

of a section will be hermaphroditic, showing that different

parts of the generative glands of the same animals may be of

different sexes. The result of this arrangement is that it is

scarcely possible for the eggs to escape impregnation by the

milt generated alongside of them, and we may, I believe,

fairly assume that Ostrea edulis is a selt-fertilizing herma-

phrodite.

The condition of things in the generative tubules of Ostrea

virginica and angulata is very different, as may be gathered

from the following account. In the first place I have never

found any evidence of hermaphroditism either in the living

animal or in sections of the reproductive organs. The mode

of pressing out the spawn from the gland and ducts of O. vir-

genica, and the physical test used to determine the sex of the

products in practical work during the last season, afford the

most positive demonstrations of the unisexuality of that species.

Sexual Characteristics of Oysters. 43

Examining sections, however, we never find either in the

reproductive follicles of O. virginica or of O. angulata any

evidence of the coexistence of ovules and spermatozoa. In

fact the mode of spermatogenesis in the unisexual species is

very different from that of the hermaphroditic. As indicated

in Brooks’s figure of a part of a section of a male oyster, the

spermatozoa are peculiarly arranged in the follicle or tubule.

Upon applying a high power (500 to 800 diameters) I find

that the heads of the spermatozoa show a very marked

tendency to be arranged in rows like beads, and not in oblong

clusters as in the hermaphroditic species. Moreover the walls

of the generative tubules are lined by relatively very much

smaller spermatoblasts than those found free in the repro-

ductive follicles of the hermaphrodite form. ‘This spermato-

genetic layer is often very marked in the males of the uni-

sexual species, and even at an early stage of the functional

activity of the testicular organ presents much the same struc-

ture that it does later. ‘The rows of spermatozoa already

alluded to also have a tendency to be bent towards the outlet

ot the tubules, giving rise to a fringe-like appearance on either

side of the follicle with a clearer space between the edges of the

fringe-like masses of spermatozoa. In fact it is plainly to be

seen that the spermatozoa are being budded off from the

spermatogenetic layer, and that the appearances just described

are a result of that process. It results from this that the

structural peculiarities of the testicular tubules are very cha-

racteristic, so that once recognized they will never afterwards

be confounded with the arrangement observed in the ovary of

the female, where, as in the hermaphrodite species, the ova

may be seen in different stages of development, though, where

the majority of the ovules have attained nearly full develop-

ment, it may happen that few of the nascent ovules closely

adherent to the walls of the follicles are visible.

The distinction between Ostrea edulis and the American

and Portuguese species is therefore very marked and impor-

tant. Mdébius(‘Die Auster unddie Austernwirthschaft,’ Berlin,

1877, p. 19) says of their species: —Oysters are hermaphro-

dites. In the largest number of individuals, in the whole repro-

ductive organ | found only spermatozoa, but no eggs. In

seven oysters which carried blue brood in the beard, the sexual

gland contained only spermatozoa. Three oysters with younger

white embryos in the beard had no spermatozoa in the sexual

gland. Inthe most of the brood-bearing oysters the sexual

gland contained neither eggs nor spermatozoa. Of 309 oysters

which were taken on the 25th of May from four different

banks east of the island of Sylt, and afterward examined

44 Mr. J. A. Ryder on the Microscopic

from May 26 to June 1, 18 per cent. were hermaphroditic,

and of the remaining 82 per cent. one half were egg-bearing,

the other half sperm-bearing. In none were the sexual pro-

ducts completely mature. From these observations I con-

clude that the eggs and spermatozoa do not develop simulta-

neously but successively in the sexual gland; that sperma-

tozoa may be developed very soon after the discharge of the

ova, and that probably one half of the oysters of one locality

during a breeding-period produce only eggs and the other

half produce only spermatozoa.” To the same effect are the

statements of Lacaze-Duthiers ; but Davaine seems to have

first noticed the peculiar aggregations of spermatozoa in oval

masses in Ostrea edulis. Brooks thinks “ Gerbe’s statement,

that among the 435 European oysters one year old he found

35 with young, 127 with ripe eggs, and 189 with ripe semen,

seems to be sufficient to show the incorrectness of Lacaze-

Duthiers’s conjecture that the functionally male condition

precedes the functionally female condition.”

This is about the state of the controversy at present in re-

gard to the breeding-habits of Ostrea edulis. ‘The only

authority, as far as 1 am aware, who distinctly takes the

ground that eggs of this species are fertilized in the repro-

ductive organs is Horst, who says, “‘ Not only do the embryos

pass through their first stages of development within the

mantle-cavity of the adult, and impregnation occurs internally

instead of externally, but it may also be said that the eggs

and spermatozoa come into contact in their passage out of the

generative glands.” It is barely possible, indeed probable,

if my memory serves me rightly, that Davaine has put similar

observations upon record. Horst also distinctly asserts that the

normal development of the embryos of Ostrea edulis cannot

take place outside of the parent. M. Berthelot, according to

Mr. Brandely, has discovered that the fluids in the mantle-

cavity of O. edulis contain albumen in a notable proportion,

upon which the young are supposed to be nourished. Mr.

Brandely has found, by direct experiment, that in the case of

QO. angulata it is possible to artificially impregnate the eggs.

His attempts to fertilize the eggs of O. edulis with the milt

of O. angulata and vice versa were unsuccessfully repeated at

different tires for the last two years. I am now also uncer-

tain in regard to the identity of the species of which Lieut.

Winslow succeeded in artificially impregnating the eggs at

the mouth of the St. Mary’s River, in the Bay of Cadiz, Spain,

which he says were natives, the variety having existed and

flourished in the bay for as far back as could be remembered,

I quote his description of the specimens he used in his experi-

Sexual Characteristics of Oysters. 45

ments as follows :—“ In appearance they were quite similar to

the American species (Ostrea virginica), having long shells of

from 1 to 3 inches in length, rougher and thicker than is

usually the case with the Huropean oyster.’ This remark

raises the question whether the experimenter was not really

working with O. angulata instead of O. edulis. The locality

where he got his specimens and where he conducted his expe-

riments also makes it not improbable that he was in reality

working with the native unisexual species, O. angulata.

To return to the question of the breeding-habits of Osérea

edulis, it appears to me that we cannot very well question the

authority of Mobius, Lacaze-Duthiers, and Horst, in regard

to the bisexual state of the reproductive organs. My investiga-

tions also give some countenance to the fact of a preponderance

either of eggs or of spermatozoa in different individuals ; in fact,

in some cases the one or the other seems to be almost exclusively

the mature product. But we are not yet in a position to

arrive at a conclusion in this matter, because of the scantiness

of the observations which have hitherto been made. The

hypothesis that the spermatozoa are drawn from without into

the generative ducts by the ciliary action of the gills and

mantle may be dismissed with the remark that microscopic

investigation, to my mind, has effectually disposed of the pro-

bability of any such a state of affairs. We may see the sper-

matozoa in course of development in the same follicle with the

ova, which is conclusive proof that the milt has not been de-

rived from without, from the water into which it had been

discharged by neighbouring individuals. In truth, we find in

some cases the spermatozoa present so deep down in the

utmost ramifications of the generative follicles that it is not

conceivable that they should have been drawn in from

without.

As to the alternate activity of the organs in producing ova

and spermatozoa, there is a possibility that such is the case,

but, as stated at the outset, there is as yet no conclusive proof

of the fact. Certain it is that I have yet to see sections of

O. edulis in which both ova and spermatozoa are not present

in some condition of development at the same time. If the

one be not present in a fully developed state, developing traces

of it may be discovered; or even a very minute quantity of

developed milt or a few developed eggs may be present in

some one follicle, while in the others there are perhaps exclu-

sively eggs or exclusively milt in a developed condition. I

am aware that this view of the matter is opposed to the

current doctrine that nature provides against continuous inter-

breeding ; but when we find the eggs and milt about equally

46 Mr. J. A. Ryder on the Microscopic

advanced in development in the same follicle, what is there

to prevent self-fertilization ; in fact, what else can be the mode

of reproduction ?

In some of the sections of O. edulis examined by me, the

ovules already measured 34, of an inch in diameter, showing

them to be about twice the size of the ripe eggs of O. virginica

and O. angulata, in both of which the ova are of about the

same size when mature. Estimates which I have made, based

on the figures of the eggs of O. edulis given by M. Davaine,

show them to bez) of aninch in diameter. Estimates based

on the figures of Lacaze-Duthiers give 3}; of an inch, while

Mdbius and Horst give the size of the young fry at 74, of an

inch in diameter. ‘The spherical heads of the spermatozoa of

the three species here discussed measure about the same, or

approximately y455 of an inch in diameter. The clusters of

spermatozoa of O. edulis measure approximately 755 of an

inch in diameter. ‘he spherical unsegmented spermatoblasts

which break up into spermatozoa in QO. edulis measure jsp Of

an inch in diameter. The nucleus of the ovarian eggs of O.

edulis measures not quite 45 of an inch in diameter. The

nucleus of the ovarian egg of O. anguluta measures approxi-

mately y';; of an inch in diameter, which is about that

of the nucleus of the egg of O. virginica. The large

spherule of the nucleolus ot the egg of O. edulis measures

sisy of an inch in diameter; the small spherale, which is

stained red by the safranin, measures z3';5 of an inch; the

long diameter of the conjoined spherules is 7757 of an inch.

The long diameter of the nucleolus of the egg of O. angulata

and QO. virginica is about zol5y Of an inch. A slide in my

possession containing some of the brood of O. edulis shows

that, even after it has acquired both vaives of the shell within

the beard of the mother oyster, the brood varies greatly in

size. I find, for example, that such fry measures from >} > of

an inch down to as smallas ;4;5. This brood, like that of the

American oyster, has not yet acquired any umbonal promi-

nences at the hinge end of the valves. Before this occurs in

the American-oyster embryo considerable growth has taken

place ; but when the shell already covers the body the whoie

embryo, contrary to what is found in the European species,

measures little, if any, more in diameter than the egg, or

about s4> of an inch. Later, when the embryo has grown

considerably, and when it is on the eve of attaching itself

permanently, it measures from 345 down to yo of an inch in

diameter. The mode of fixation of the fry of both species is

probably the same ; but the mode of incubation (the one in the

mother, the other in the open water), we see, is widely diffe-

Sexual Characteristics of Oysters. 47

rent, differing as greatly in this respect as do the eggs in size

and details of construction, as shown by the measurements

which I have given. It must not be forgotten, however, that

the material from which I prepared my sections was received

from Europe in January and March, when it is to be supposed

that the reproductive organs were not yet fully developed, and

that consequently the dimensions of the ovarian ova as found

by me are rather to be considered as being below than above

their true ones when fully developed at the height of the

spawning-season.

It is a very remarkable fact that one finds individual speci-

mens of oysters in which the reproductive organs have under-

gone total atrophy or wasting-away at the completion of the

spawning-season. Hxamining sections through the body-mass

of spawn-spent oysters taken from their native waters in

August last, I find that the whole of the connective tissue

subjacent to the mantle, and between the latter and the liver,

especially over the sides of the body-mass, has disappeared,

together with all traces of the reproductive organs, including

the superticial branches of the efferent ducts. At the first

bend of the intestine there is still some of the connective tissue

remaining; but even here and in the mantle it has changed

its character entirely, and become very spongy and areolar,

instead of solid and composed of large vesicular cells such as

are met with when the animal is in a better condition of flesh.

In fact, it appears as if this mesenchymal or connective-tissue

substance had been used up and converted into reproductive

bodies (generative products) in the case of the spawn-spent

and extremely emaciated individuals. In sections of indivi-

duals in various conditions from that in which the rudimentary

netwcrk of generative tubules has just appeared in the con-

nective tissue, on up to those in which the reproductive tissues

are enormously developed in bulk and proportion to the mass

of the remaining structures, there is a perfect gradation from

their complete absence to their full development. This

would appear to be very strong evidence in support of the

theory that the reproductive follicles, or tubules, are developed

anew each season directly from the specialization of certain

strings or strands of connective-tissue cells.

Many animals manifest a periodic development of the glan-

dular portions of the reproductive organs; but I know of no

form in which there is any such presumptive evidence that

these organs are annually regenerated and finally altogether

aborted as seems to be the case with the oyster. ‘Together

with the changes here described, the most remarkable changes

in the solidity and consistence of the animal take place. The

48 Mr. A. Haly on Rhinodon typicus.

shrinkage of a spawn-spent oyster in alcohol or chro mic-acid

solution is excessive, and will, when complete, reduce the

animal to one tenth of its bulk while alive. This shrinkage

is due to abstraction of the water with which the loose spongy

tissue of the exhausted animal is distended. A so-called “ fat”

oyster, on the other hand, will suffer no such excessive dimi-

nution in bulk when placed in alcohol or other hardening fluid.

In consequence of this variable development of the reproduc-

tive organs as well as that of the connective tissue of the

body-mass, the amount of solid protoplasmic material con-

tained in the same animal at different times under different

conditions must vary between wide limits. And inasmuch

as the nutritive and reproductive functions of animals are

notoriously interdependent, it follows, in consequence of the

enormous fertility of the oyster, that a vast amount of stored

material in the shape of connective tissue must be annually

converted into germs and annually replaced by nutritive pro-

cesses. Plentitude or dearth of food are also to be considered;

but it now becomes a little easier to understand the physiolo-

gical interdependence of the reproductive function and the

so-called fattening process.

To a great extent what has been remarked in the preceding

paragraphs of the wasting-away of the reproductive organs in

Ostrea virginica seems to apply also to O. edulis and O.

angulata. The last species has an extraordinarily thick body-

mass, with the stratum of reproductive follicles of remarkable

thickness, averaging a much greater development than I have

ever seen in any other form. When the contents of this great

mass of tubules has been discharged a diminution in the bulk

of the body-mass must naturally ensue, probably accompanied

by a wasting-away of the connective tissue and tubules, such

as apparently occurs in the American species. From what I

have seen of the generative tubules of QO. edulis in sections,

they are evidently regenerated much as in O. virginica. In

a few specimens: I find them almost entirely gone, or present

only in an extremely rudimentary state.

VI.— Occurrence of Rhinodon typicus, Smith, on the West

Coast of Ceylon. By A. HAty.

On January 5th a large female shark which I identify as

Rhinodon typicus was entangled in the nets at a fishing-

village called Moratuwa, twelve miles south of Colombo. The

native population were greatly excited, and flocked in large

Mr. A. Haly on Rhinodon typicus. 49

numbers to the beach to see it, fish of this size being very

rarely caught on this coast. The following are the principal

measurements :—

Total length from point of upper jaw to tipof ft. in.

HIB PERC AMC TOME) 0). %) salle! Wy: 0's» «i $e eccreeeee 23 9

Gurihi-hebimd pectoral, fo. asa «ays; ale. aie! ss) cal Aen 13 0

Distance of first dorsal from point of upper jaw 10 0

AMeTION CASS OF ATTEO Wie see wes os nee 110

BSevORtECONe IPA k ORES 1 10

Distance between first and second dorsal .... 2 8

Pmerioredee Of GUtO asatie'ee's se a oo ieee aes 0 11

raed CEECUBLON at waar. Sata e wine wuin ase craic iss 0 11

Length of upper caudal lobe .............. 5 0

Length of lower caudal lobe ....¥......... th

Anterior edge\ofianall s./. o.i54\4 Dae cae os eh 0 9

PSO OG NGL Ole ct ayers che tbe esis wepey annie aps tefees fetete 0 9

AMLTIOL Cd26, OF VENENAD yao. yasy sss 03/05 Ey

Ere Ses GIMUUDOl nyc se scc/Sisistee +4 4610 wars se ape. c'est Let

Anterior edge of pectorals shes. ee eek 3.6

Depth of second gill-opening ............., 2017,

Diamacter, ef spiracles sii. a a64 iis a6 viel e's g'erqievern s 0 13

WD ihiO1 OF Ci Cranes 1 tal ores outer siete. « Shaye “Paid view jewels 0 12

The width of the mouth when fresh was 3 feet ; but it has

shrunk in drying to 1 ft. 1lin. The form of the mouth is lost

in the mounted specimen. When fresh the lower jaw was

quite straight and flat, nearly, if not quite, on a level with the

surface of the abdomen, and considerably in advance of the

upper, so that the band of teeth in the lower jaw was quite

uncovered. This band averages 1 inch in breadth, and con-

sists of fourteen rows of minute, sharp, recurved teeth, 2 millim.

long, all of equal size. The band in the upper jaw is ? inch

broad, and consists of eleven rows of similar teeth. I was

in hopes of finding either eggs or embryos, which are occa-

sionally to be obtained from large sharks and skates caught

at this season ; but there was no sign of her having approached

the shore on account of its being the breeding-season. The

stomach contained a quantity of finely divided red matter.

This makes the sixth species, obtained mostly near Colombo,’

not mentioned in Day’s ‘ Fishes of British India,’ and now in

the collection of the Colombo Museum. They are :—

Branchiostoma lanceolatum, Pall.

Rhinodon typicus, Smith.

Diodon maculatus, Giinth.

Chilinus undulatus, Riipp.

Xiphochilus robustus, Giinth.

Peristethus ? Near Galle, deep water, probably

about 50 fathoms.

Ann, & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 4

50 Mr. A. G. Butler on Formosan Lepidoptera.

VII.—On a Third Collection of Lepidoptera made by Mr.

H. E. Hobson in Formosa. By ArtuurG. BUTLER, F.L.S.,

F.Z.8., &e.

Towarps the end of last year I received a small box of

Lepidoptera in envelopes from Mr. Hobson accompanied by a

letter, of which the following is an extract :—

“ Tamsiu,

September 6, 1883.

“ Dear Mr. Burter,—Having just been transferred from

this to the north, I am sending you what moths &c. I have

annexed since arrival.

“T had an opportunity of visiting the south cape of the

island early in the spring, and obtained the large butterflies

down there. The moths are all from this end.”

The collection contained some well-known species pre-

viously received, and which Mr. Hobson requested me to

forward to the Derby Museum ; these species therefore are

not included in the present list.

One of the most interesting additions to the fauna in the

present consignment is Hestia clara, three examples of which

(“ihe large butterflies ’?) were obtained in the south ; an ex-

ample of Ornithoptera rhadamanthus was probably taken at

the same time.

The following is a list of the butterflies.

RHOPALOCERA.

1. Hestia clara.

Hestia clara, Butler, Trans, Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. v. p. 469. n. 6 (1867).

South Cape.

The type of this species was supposed to be from Java.

2. Parantica aglea.

Papilio aglea, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv, pl. 877. E (1782).

S. Formosa.

3. Ypthima multistriata, n. sp.

Allied to Y. nareda and Y. corticaria, intermediate in size

between the two. Wings above smoky brown, paler on the

disk of the wings, especially in the female, and with blackish

Mr. A. G. Butler on Yormosan Lepidoptera. 51

submarginal and marginal stripes: primaries of the female

with a large oval bipupillated ocellus towards the apex, the

male rarely showing a trace of a similar ocellus, but usually

entirely destitute of it: secondaries with a large circular uni-

pupillated ocellus on the first median interspace, and fre-

quently, in the male, one or even two minute subanal ocelli in

an oblique line with the large ocellus: primaries of the male

with a blackish nebula over the median area. Under surface

sordid white, the primaries and base of secondaries more or

less suffused with brown, and the entire surface of all the

wings densely covered with numerous sharply defined darker

brown strie; marginal and submarginal stripes as above:

primaries in both sexes with a well-defined bipupillated black

subapical ocellus with pale yellow iris ; a dark brown stripe from

just beyond the middle of the costa across the disk to the ter-

mination of the submarginal stripe: secondaries crossed

beyond the middle by an irregularly angulated stripe, some-

times barely traceable, but usually well defined; three well-

defined ocelli, one apical and two subanal, the last being

smaller than the others and bipupillated. Expanse of wings

37-42 millim.

Seven examples, N. Formosa.

The specimens of this species are for the most part more or

less shattered, as though they had been long on the wing.

4. Calysisme mineus.

Papilio mineus, Linneeus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 768, n. 126 (1766).

N. Formosa.

5. Cyaniris puspa.

Polyommatus puspa, Horsfield, Cat. Lep. E.1. Co. p, 67. n. 3 (1828).

A worn female, N. Formosa.

6. Nychitona niobe.

Pontia niobe, Wallace, P. Z. 8. 1866, p. 357. n. 6.

N. Formosa.

One example has the apical spot better developed than

usual, so that it looks like a pale specimen of P. xiphia.

7. Terias unduligera.

Terias unduligera, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1880, p. 668. n. 22.

N. Formosa.

The external border of the secondaries appears to vary in

width, as in the two males now received it is as wide as in

52 Dr. Wallich on Polycystina tn certain Nodular Flints.

T. hecabe; they may, however, be hybrids between the two

species.

8. Tertas hecabe.

- Papilio hecabe, Linneus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 249 (1764).

N. Formosa.

9, Ganoris glictria.

Papilio gliciria, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. pl. 171. E, F (1779).

9. N. Formosa.

10. Ornithoptera rhadamanthus.

Ornithoptera rhadamanthus, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 180. n. 8

(1836).

2. 8S. Formosa,

Owing to press of work it has been necessary to defer

giving an account of the moths in this collection.

VIIL—wNote on the Detection of Polycystina within the

hermetically closed Cavities of certain Nodular Flints.

By Surgeon-Major Wauiicn, M.D.

In continuation of my previous papers on the “ Origin and

Mode of Formation ot the Cretaceous Flints’”*, I beg to an-

nounce the discovery by me, last summer, of a number of

well-marked Polycystina amongst the loose fossilized contents

of nodular flints obtained from the Surrey gravel-pits. In

common with other observers I have often noticed minute

objects in flint sections, which are, in all probability, the re-

mains of these organisms; but in no instance were the

appearances revealed by the microscope sufliciently distinct

to place their identity beyond question. In the case of the

structures now under notice there can be no doubt of the

kind; and we are thus furnished with another interesting

link in the chain of evidence which goes to prove the general

lithological identity of the chalk with recent deep-sea calca-

reous deposits.

The genera of Polycystina met with in the nodular cavi-

ties are, for the most part, Astromma, Haliomma (both dis-

* Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. for Feb. 1880, and Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.

for Feb., March, and July 1881.

Mr. J. Wood-Mason on Scolopendrella. 53

coidal and spherical), and Podocyrt’s. A few specimens of

well-marked fossilized Dictyochide also occur. Both the

Polycystina and the Dictyochide, as well as the mass of the

loose granular material associated with them in the same flint-

cavities, are more or less metamorphosed by a slight admixture

of peroxide of iron and calcite, the former substance having

imparted to the entire structures a bright reddish hue.

Through the courtesy of Prof. T. G. Bonney, F.R.S., I

have been enabled to examine a slide of ‘ diaspro ” contain-

ing Polycystina. These, however, exhibit somewhat less of

the characteristic structure of the organisms, owing, no

doubt, to their having become fossilized under less favourable

conditions than those which existed in the hermetically closed

flint-cavities. In both cases the polariscope shows the silica

to have been partially replaced by calcite.

I have likewise found in material obtained from hermetically

closed flint-cavities, by far the most perfectly preserved Fora-

minifera I have ever seen, the shell-structure and chambers,

with every minutest detail of tubular structure, having been

converted into chaleedony—the whole mass by reflected light

presenting a beautifully whitish-blue opalescent appearance,

whilst by transmitted light it exhibits a rich transparent burnt-

sienna colour and the well-known fibrous character of chalce-

dony wherever that substance is most massive, as, for instance,

within the chambers. The Foraminifera represented belong

chiefly to the genera Rotalia, Globigerina,and Textularia. I

may add that, as regards perfection in every minutest detail of

shell-structure, these specimens greatly surpass in beauty those

metamorphosed into glauconite, beautiful as they also un-

doubtedly are.

1X.—Notes on the Structure, Postembryonic Development, and

Systematic Position of Scolopendrella. By J. Woop-

Mason, Deputy Superintendent, Indian Museum, Calcutta.

THIS interesting and remarkable type of Tracheate Arthro-

poda was first made known to science in 1839 *, in which

year the distinguished zoologist Prof. P. Gervais brought to

the notice of the Academy of Sciences at Paris some speci-

mens of a small and fragile Myriopod which had been disco-

vered in the vicinity of the French capital; and founded

* ¢ Comptes Rendus,’ tome ix, p. 582 (1839).

54 Mr. J. Wood-Mason on Scolopendrella.

upon them the genus Scolopendrella. This preliminary notice

was followed in 1844* by a description with figures of the

species under the name of S. notacantha, which description

and figures were in 1847 f repeated in the ‘Suites a Buffon.’

A second species was not long afterwards described and

figured, from specimens obtained near London, by our own

countryman Newport }, who at first thought the genus allied

to the Chilopodous Geophilus, but eventually placed it in a

family by itself between Lithobius and Scolopendra, notwith-

standing that the fourth somite and its appendages are not

developed into the basilar plate and poison-claws so charac-

teristic of Chilopoda.

In 1851 a memoir §, which is far the most complete of any

that have as yet appeared, was published by Menge on New-

port’s species S. ¢mmaculata. This author, who discovered

the silk-glands that lie in the last two somites and open at the

ends of the caudal appendages, as well as the trachee (which

he did not, however, correctly interpret), and several other

structural features of importance, regarded the genus Scolopen-

drella as “ the type of a genus or family intermediate between

the hexapod Lepismide and the Scolopendride ;” but he re-

frained from making a new name.

Lubbock ||, Huxley §, and others have briefly referred to

the genus.

I myself in 1876 ** recorded its occurrence in Bengal, and

in 1879 {} published a few observations upon it and figured

one of the legs.

In 1880 {{ Mr. J. A. Ryder recognized in it “ the last sur-

vival of the form from which insects may be supposed to have

descended,” and proposed for its reception ‘the new ordinal

group Symphyla, in reference to the singular combination of

Myriapodous, Insectean, and Thysanurous characters which

it presents ;” and in 1881 the same writer monographed the

* Ann. d. Se. nat. Zool. tom, ii. 1844, p. 70, pl. v. figs. 15-17.

+ Walckenaer et Gervais, Ins. Aptéres, t. iv. pp. 301-3803 (1847).

¢ Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. vol. xix. pp. 373, 374, pl. xl. figs. 4, 4a,

b, c; and Cat. Myr. Brit. Mus.

§ “Myriapoden d. Umgegend y. Dantzig,” in Neueste Schr. d. natur-

forsch. Gesellsch. in Danzig, iv. 4tes Heft.

|| ‘Monograph of Collembola and Thysanura.’

€ ‘Anatomy of Invertebrated Animals.’

** Proc. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, August 1876.

++ “Morphological Notes bearing on the Origin of Insects,” in Trans.

Ent. Soc. Lond. 1879, p. 158, fig. 2, B.

tt Amer. Nat. May 1880. The number of this publication for Septem-

ber of the same year contains a note on Ryder’s communication, with

some figures and suggestive remarks on S, emmaculata.

—————

Mr. J. Wood-Mason on Scolopendrella. 55

group*, describing a new species, and giving a useful sum-

mary of Menge’s important paper.

In 1881 } there appeared a paper by Dr. Jos. Muhr which

is said to contain a valuable description of the mouth-parts of a

new species closely allied to S. notacantha, but which I have

not yet seen.

Finally, in the present year Dr. 8. H. Scudder, of Cam-

bridge, Mass., U. 8S. A., described a new species under the

name of S. latipes.

I have arrived at the conclusion that Scolopendrella is a

Myriopod which, while resembling the Chilopoda in the form

of the body, is more nearly related to the Chilognatha; but

whether it should be classed as a suborder of the latter or in

an order by itself we shall be better able to say when we

shall have learnt more about its anatomy and development than

we at present know. And I regard it as the descendant of

a group of Myriopods from which the Campodee, Thysanura,

and Collembola may have sprung, looking upon the three

latter groups as the living representatives of the extinct stock

or stocks from which the various orders of insects have origi-

dnate,—the jointed (Myriopodous) mandibles and the presence

of two pairs of appendages (the one a pair of walking-legs and

the other a pair of styliform rudiments) on each of the two

hinder thoracic somites, and of two pairs of rudimentary feet

on each of two of the abdominal somites, in Machilis seeming

to me explicable only on the hypothesis that this form is de-

scended from an animal allied to the Chilognatha, and the

somites of whose body were provided with two sterna, each

furnished with a pair of appendages of the value of legs; and

the resemblances of the true insects through Blatta to the

Entomopsida (Campodez, Thysanura, and Collembola), on the

hypothesis that the two have a common ancestry.

Seeing that there occur in combination in Scolopendrella

two of the most remarkable features of Peripatus, namely two-

clawed feet and segmental openings, its ancestry may be in-

ferred to have lived and flourished before the present types

of Myriopoda were evolved ; and it may therefore throw much

light on the origin of Myriopods also: it may, for example,

atford an explanation of both the modes of addition of fresh

segments—that which “ takes place by the way of intercala-

tion at each moult in the intervals between each pair of older

segments,’ and that by their interposition between the penul-

* Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci, Phil. 1881, pp. 79-86.

T Zool. Anz, iv. 1881, pp. 59-61, figs. 1, 2, and 4.

56 Mr. J. Wood-Mason on Scolopendrella.

timate and antepenultimate somites—which obtain in Chilo-

poda, and of the nature of the double somites in Chilognatha.

The Head.—This is not so depressed as it is represented to

be in the published figures, but is anteriorly deflexed, with the

antenn articulated to the forehead, much as in the Chilogna-

thous Myriopoda. Its anterior margin is divided by a median

notch into two rounded, thickened, and highly indurated

lobes, each armed at the extremity with three sharp spiniform

processes supported by buttress-like thickenings and directed

with their fellows of the opposite side towards the middle

line, thus recalling the sharp and toothed rostrum of Chilo-

enatha.

On the upper surface of the head, behind the insertion of the

antenne, and in the same transverse line as the mandibular

articulations, lie a pair of smooth and slightly convex arez

with an exceedingly sharply defined and doubly contoured

oval outline; they appear to be cake-shaped involutions of the

integument; and their walls are covered with a minute punc-

tuation, which may possibly be the optical expression of the

ends of fine canals. If a spirit-specimen of the animal be

placed whole in a solution of hematoxylin for a few hours,

these organs become filled, or their contents deeply coloured,

by the reagent; so that they must freely communicate with

the exterior. Whether they are glands, or stigmata, or eyes,

can only be decided by means of sections; 11 would be worth

while to compare them with the paired organs externally

visible in the corresponding part of the head in Glomeris as

conspicuous horseshoe-shaped impressions. Between these

structures and the insertion of the antenne I have not yet

succeeded in making out the “ round black eyes” which have

been described by Menge; and it is possible that the two may

be the same.

Previous observers have all recognized two pairs of jaws

in addition to the mandibles, namely a pair of first maxille

and a pair of second maxille, equivalent to the so-called

labium of insects, but no other cephalic appendages ; and they

all appear to me to have misdescribed those that they have

recognized,

I, on the contrary, see in the supposed two pairs of gna-

thites that succeed the mandibles but the coalesced parts of a

single pair, resembling in all essential particulars the four-

lobed plate that follows the mandibles and functions as a

lower lip in the Chilognatha; and I have no doubt that the

first pair of legs is the third pair of postoral appendages an-

swering to the labium of insects.

First Pair of Postoral Appendages.—In specimens mounted

Mr. J. Wood-Mason on Scolopendrella. 57

in spirits, with the dorsal surface upwards the mandibles are

visible beyond the sides of the head, between the oval sacs

above described and the insertion of the antenne. They are

therefore attached very far forwards ; and their strong articu-

lation is rendered very conspicuous by the amber-like colour

of the cuticle, both of their posterior extremity and of the part

of the head into which this fits—amber-like coloration indi-

cating the great firmness of the chitinization that has taken

place. They are divided by a very distinct joint, visible just

in front of the insertion of the antenne, into two segments:

the first of these is a slightly curved prism attached to the

head by its dorsal margin, and to the outer lobe of the four-

lobed plate by its ventral margin, its inner side being conse-

quently open, so as to give passage to the flexor muscles,

which are inserted into the inner face of its outer wall; the

second, a triangular plate, is armed on its inner side with two

distinct series of teeth distinctly separated from one another

by a rounded notch, the posterior series consisting of five

small equal pale and blunt tubercular ones, and the anterior

of four dark brown and highly indurated sharp teeth, of which

the anterior and outer is slightly the largest, and lies in a

different plane from the rest; from the bottom of the notch

between the two series of teeth a faint groove encircles the

joint, subdividing it into two, corresponding respectively to the

first (which in Glomerds is developed on the inner side into

an antero-posteriorly elongated molar process) and second or

apical (which is bifureate*) free joints in Chilognatha gene-

rally. ‘The mandibles can be readily disarticulated from the

head, as also can their two principal joits from one another.

They are, in short, built exactly upon the plan of those of the

Chilognatha, being divided into three distinct joints, and

therefore not consisting, as has been stated, of a single piece

only.

Second Pair of Postoral Appendages.—These are made up

of seven or eight distinct sclerites, all united together by

membrane, namely :—four lateral, of which two are long and

* The apical joint in all Chilognatha consists of two parts attached to

a common hbase (the first free joint), but lying in different planes and

applied to each other, much as are the “galea” and “lacinia” of the first

maxillz in such an insect as the common cockroach—an arrangement

strongly suggestive of its being, like the jaws of Peripatus, a moditied

pair of claws. The objection to this is that all living Myriopods except

Scolopendrella have the legs terminated by a single claw; and it would

be fatal were it not that the legs of the Protracheata are biunguiculate.

The uniunguiculate condition of the legs in most Myriopods, in the larvee

of many insects, and in all the Collembola is probably adaptive.

58 Mr. J. Wood-Mason on Scolopendrella.

anterior or apical, and two are short and posterior or basal ;

two median ; and one or two basal. The two median sclerites

are much broader than the long laterals; and they form toge-

ther a broadly spatulate figure, which extends quite up to the

toothed and lobed anterior margin of the head in front, and

behind is divided into two divergent horns embracing the

sides of the triangular basal sclerite. The long or apical

lateral sclerites are attached not only to the medians and by the

basal moiety of their outer margins to the ventral margin of

the basal joint of the mandibles, but also by the intermedia-

tion of the short laterals to the basal part of the basal sclerite,

which may be divided transversely into two parts; and they

taper from their base to their apex, which reaches only to

the end of the first mandibular joint and carries two large

movably articulate appendages. These ordinarily le with

their apices all directed towards one another in the middle line,

concealed beneath the rounded end of the conjomed median

lobes ; but when pressure is put upon the covering-glass they

diverge and project straight forward for some distance beyond

the front of the head *. They both lie in the same plane; and

the outer (which is a highly indurated, slender, straight, and

tapering organ, hooked at the extremity and provided inter-

nally with a minute anteapical spiniform process) fits the

inner (which is a soft finger-shaped body with a brush of

apparently implanted bristles on its inner extremity) as the

““oalea” does the “lacinia” in the first maxilla of the

cockroach—with which parts of the insectean maxille they

can have nothing whatever to do, being plainly homologous

with the two short and similarly convergent appendages that

are present at the end of each outer lobe of the same pair of

jaws in all Chilognatha, and being probably, like these and

like the tips of the mandibles, modified pairs of claws inherited

from the common Protracheate ancestor.

Third Pair of Postoral Appendages.—Of the fifteen dorsal

sclerites which in adults follow the head, the first is little

more than a mere short and transverse fold of skin with

scarcely a trace of the conspicuous imbricating process given

off from the posterior margin of all its successors ; it is the

tergum of the somite that bears the first pair of legs. These

differ from those of the remaiming eleven pairs in being

conspicuously smaller and slenderer, with their last joint

elongated, and their last but one shortened and apparently

confounded with the third, in bemg more approximated at

* The fore margin of the median lobe also becomes protruded so as to

display the six conical spines with which it is furnished.

— 2.0

Mr. J. Wood-Mason on Scolopendrella. 59

their bases (where they are attached to two sinall oval sclerites

nearly touching one another in the middle line), but above

all in the important circumstance that they are never brought

to the ground, but, on the contrary, are turned forwards under

the head so as to be quite invisible from above in the living

animal ; commonly, indeed, they are folded akimbo across the

under surface of the back of the head; they without doubt

belong to the head, and they must, as they follow the four-

lobed plate, be held to correspond to the similarly pediform

and attached appendages of Chilognatha, and, as a conse-

quence, to the labium of the Insecta.

The Somites of the Body und their Appendages.—The body

of this little animal is extremely soft and fragile and exten-

sible, and tapers visibly from the fourth leg-bearing somite

towards the head, which is but little broader than the tergum

of its hindermost somite. It is little, if at all, broader than

high ; and the soft membrane intervening on its sides between

the leg-bases and the projecting lateral margins of the tergites

is complexly puckered and folded in a manner reminding one

of the Chilopoda. It is defended above by thirteen (exclusive

of the caudal somite, which would appear to be double) imbri-

cated plates or terga, whose hinder margin is divided by a

pronounced emargination into two rounded lobes. In this

series of terga no such regular alternation of longs and shorts

as obtains in many Chilopoda is to be observed, nor equality,

nor regular decrement or increment, but, on the contrary, a

marked irregularity in length—an irregularity, however, which

is identically the same in all the specimens hitherto examined.

On turning to the ventral surface, a consecutive series of

eleven precisely similar regions, to each of which two distinct

pairs of appendages are movably articulated, can readily be

made out, or two less than the number of the terga opposed

to them ; consequently two of these must be without either

appendages or sterna, or two of the somites must be considered

to be provided with double terga. In each of these sternal

regions two pairs of sclerites are discernible :—a posterior pair

of nearly circular and smaller ones, which, without doubt,

corresponds to the small and similarly shaped ones that carry

the hindermost pair of cephalic appendages, and external to

which a pair of stout five-jointed and biunguiculate legs are

attached ; and an anterior pair of elongated and larger sclerites,

near to the postero-lateral margins of which, and between

which and the legs, are articulated a pair of short setose styles.

This arrangement of the parts at once suggested the sus-

picion that each of the regions was made up of two sterna,

each marked by a pair of appendages, the anterior and inner

of which had become reduced to styliform rudiments—a sus-

60 Mr. J. Wood-Mason on Scolopendrella.

picion the correctness of which has been verified by the study

of several stages in the postembryonic development of the

animal. So that eleven pairs of rudimentary legs and eleven

pairs of functional ones, or twenty-two in all, marking as

many separate somites, are to be made out in this animal

between the head and the tail.

The presence of the two apodous terga and of the eleven

pairs of rudimentary feet seems intelligible only on the suppo-

sition that Scolopendrella has been evolved from a form with

twenty-two distinct and complete leg-bearing somites, by the

reduction to rudiments of the legs (accompanied by the abor-

tion of the metamerically arranged organs, such as stigmata

and excretory pouches of the somites), and the suppression of

all but two of the terga of alternate somites.

The terminal tergum, which is longer than broad, truncated

at both ends, and slightly arched at the sides, probably con-

sists of two connate terga. It is converted posteriorly, appa-

rently by the inbending of its sides, into a complete rmg

divided by vertical partitions into three compartments, to the

two outer of which the perforated caudal appendages are at-

tached, and into the median and dorsally emarginate one of

which it is probable that the anus opens.

Between the complete ring formed by the posterior end of

the last tergum and the last of the series of double sterna

are interposed two plates, which I take to be the sterna of the

last somite; of these the posterior, which extends beyond the

extremity of the body, is soft and deeply cleft im the middle

line; while the anterior, which is semicircular, and covers like

an operculum all but the free margin of the posterior, is firml

chitinized and has its straight hinder margin entire. The

ostero-lateral margins of the latter are each produced into a

short cylindrical process encircled with setee and hollowed out

at its extremity into a cup-like concavity, from a tubercle in

the bottom of which springs an excessively long and fine and

gradually tapering simple seta; this pair of setigerous pro-

cesses, which have much more the appearance of rudimentary

legs than of mere processes, especially in the larva, are pro-

bably sensory organs of some kind ; whilst the aperture of the

genital organs (which, according to Menge, to whom we are

indebted for all our knowledge of the internal anatomy, open

at the hinder end of the body) is probably situated in the

former rather than in the anterior part of the body, where

I have hitherto failed to make out any other openings but

those I have described below.

Organs of Respiration.—These consist of eleven tracheal

arches, opening by as many pairs of minute pores, situate on

—9

Mr. J. Wood-Mason on Scolopendrella. 61

the anterior faces of the leg-bases. If a moribund specimen

be placed on its side under the microscope, a row of minute

specks as bright as globules of quicksilver is seen, and re~

mains visible until the contractions of the tissues consequent

on drying have driven all the air from the trachee ; and in

specimens killed and discoloured by osmic acid, the stigmata,

with the trachez running from them, are to be seen with the

greatest distinctness, the latter being marked out by silvery

streaks due to the presence of air. ‘The tracheal tubes are all

devoid from their very origin of the spiral thickening of their

walls, so characteristic of the trachez of insects. Hach of

the stigmata leads into a tube which passes inwards, back-

wards, and upwards, slightly increasing in calibre as it goes,

and meets its fellow of the opposite side in the middle line so

as to form an arch; at the point where the tubes of opposite

sides meet one another there is a slight blurriness or break in

the continuity of the arch; and there is an irregularity in the

height of the arches, to a certain extent corresponding to the

irregularity in the length of the terga already noticed. No

tufts of tubes appear to be given off from the arches; and I

have not as yet made out in the body any other trachez

besides these metamerically arranged ones. In the head, how-

ever, there are certainly trachez present; but I have not yet

studied them sufficiently to be able to speak confidently about

their arrangement and distribution.

The huge “crateriform openings,’”’ considered by Ryder

to be the stigmata, have nothing whatever to do with the

respiratory apparatus, the openings of which are excessively

minute.

The respiratory apparatus of Scolopendrella consists, then,

as far as it has yet been made out, of a series of eleven back-

wardly directed arches, opening by as many pairs of minute

stigmata on the anterior faces of the leg-bases. If, in addition

to the posterior arch, each pair of stigmata gave off an anterior

arch, and every anterior were anastomosed in the middle line

to a posterior arch, we should have an arrangement precisely

similar to that which we meet with in the segmentally arranged

portion of the tracheal system in such a Chilopod as Greophilus,

in which a similar blurriness is to be seen at the points of

anastomosis of the anterior and posterior arches.

? Excretory Apparatus.—Besides the stigmata, there is on

every pedigerous somite, except certainly the first, and _pos-

sibly also the second, eleventh, and twelfth, a pair of huge

two-lipped apertures surrounded by a low circular wall, the

summit of which is defended by a circiet of movable spines.

They are in the round sclerites to which the functional legs

62 Mr. J. Wood-Mason on Scolopendrella.

appear to be attached; and they therefore are posterior to the

rudimentary legs. If a specimen be placed for a short time

whole in a solution of hematoxylin, the everted mouths or the

coagulated excreta collected upon these become deeply coloured

by the reagent, so that the ventral surface of the animal is

marked conspicuously with a double row ot large round black-

violet spots. An accident unfortunately happened to the spe-

cimen thus treated before I had had an opportunity of actually

counting and noting down the number of openings that had been

coloured; and I have been obliged to suggest that the round

sclerites of the second, eleventh, and twelfth pairs of legs may

be imperforate, though | fully believe that they are perforate

like the rest. These openings possibly lead into glands

which are homologous with the nephridia of Peripatus and

with the glandular pouches of Machilis and Campodea; their

exact morphological value is only to be determined by means

of sections, which I hope shortly to have an opportunity of

making. ‘They are no doubt the apertures mistaken by Ryder

for the stigmata, and which are stated by Scudder to be big

enough to admit the tips of the legs.

Postembryonic Development.—Menge, according to Ryder’s

synopsis of his paper, met with a young animal provided with

only eleven pairs of legs, and concluded that it was the first

pair which was wanting; I, on the contrary, have never

tailed to recognize the first pair by its characters at any stage,

and I am confident that it is one of those in possession of

which the animal leaves the egg. Newport and Ryder both

noticed ‘‘ specimens of different ages with nine, ten, eleven,

and twelve pairs of legs.” I can confirm their observations,

which prove that a pair of legs is added at each moult; and I

have succeeded in making out the position of the germinal

region.

In larve provided, in addition to the three-jointed first pair

of legs which properly belong to the head, with seven pairs of

rudimentary and seven pairs of functional legs, nine terga (ex-

clusive of those which respectively carry the pediform third

cephalic and the caudal appendages) are present, or two more

than the number of double pairs of feet. It is difficult, owing

to the manner in which the terga seem to have been thrown

out of correspondence with their double sterna, to determine

with certainty which these apparently apodous terga are; but

they appear to me to be the fourth and seventh (the fifth and

eighth it the third gnathites are reckoned in with the ambu-

latory legs) and the dorsal ares of the somites to which the

fifth and sixth pairs of rudimentary feet belong. <A certain

knowledge of this, as of many other points in the structure of

Geological Society. 63

this interesting form, is only to be reached by carefully

tracing the different stages of its development, step by step,

from the egg. In larvee of this stage the membranous interval

between the bases of the last-formed (seventh pair) legs and

the base of the setigerous penultimate sternum is found to

be divided into two segments by a transverse groove ; the

anterior of these segments is by far the longer, and the pos-

terior is very short: to the extreme outer ends of the posterior

margin of the latter are attached a pair of conical processes

constricted at their base; they are the buds of the future

eighth pair of functional legs, and they lie wedged between

the setigerous processes and the caudal appendages, below

(but in the same vertical line with) which they are attached.

From the posterior margin of the longer and anterior of

these two fresh segments, but rather nearer to the middle line,

two similar, but much shorter, conical processes arise and lie

appressed to the surface of the setigerous sternum; these are

the buds of the future eighth pair of rudimentary legs.

The addition of fresh somites therefore takes place in this

animal by the intercalation of two at each moult between the

antepenultimate and penultimate sterna, as in the Chilognatha,

and as also in some of the Chilopoda, as far as some, at all

events, of the somites are concerned, until the full number is

attained.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES,

GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

April 25, 1883.—J. W. Hulke, Esq., F.R.S.,

President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read:—

“ On the Skull of Megalosaurus.” By Prof. R. Owen, O.B.,

F.R.S., F.G.S.

The specimens described in this communication were obtained

by Edward Cleminshaw, Esq., from the freestone of the Inferior

Oolite near Sherborne (Dorset) from some blocks which had been

quarried for building-purposes. These were sent by him to the

British Museum, where the remains have been developed. One

block includes a great proportion of the right side of the facial part

of the skull, the missing parts being the fore end of the premaxillary,

the suborbital end of the maxillary, and the upper hinder pointed

64 Geological Society.

termination of the same bone. ‘Ten teeth are preserved in the

maxillary bone. Another block contains the outer side of the right

mandibular ramus, with teeth, and with some other fragments. In

a third block is the anterior part of the left mandibular ramus, with

portions of the teeth. These remains were described in detail; and

in conclusion the author discussed the bearing of these and other

Megalosaurian remains upon our knowledge of the structure of that

animal and its affinity to existing Reptilia, and criticised some of the

evidence on which the relationship of the Dinosauria to birds is

inferred—a relationship which he had suggested in 1841, but upon

grounds which appeared to him to be more satisfactory.

May 9, 1883.—J. W. Hulke, Esq., F.R.S.,

President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

’

‘Fossil Chilostomatous Bryozoa from Muddy Creek, Victoria.’

By A. W. Waters, Esq., F.G.S.

In this paper the author described a collection of fossil Bryozoa,

collected and sent over by Mr. J. Bracebridge Wilson, of Geelong.

The collection is from Muddy Creek, Bird Rock, and Waurn Ponds,

Victoria, and is of the so-called “ Miocene” age. There are 64

species, of which 28 are known living; and 18 of these are now

found fossil for the first time; but of the rest a large number have

previously been found and described from Curdies Creek, Mount

Gambier, and Bairnsdale. The author considered that 28 out of

this number being known living is a large proportion, seeing that

although our knowledge of the Australian recent fauna has been

much increased during the last few years, it yet is very imperfect.

The collection furnished 13 species of Catenicella, of which 5 at

least are known living; and the author indicated the great importance

of a thorough study of the living species of that genus. A notch

in the aperture simulating a sinus seems sometimes to be replaced

by asuboral pore; anda plate on the front of the cell requires further

investigation.

Three species are believed to be identical with fossils from the

European chalk.

June 6, 1883.—J. W. Hulke, Esq., F.R.S.,

President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

“Notes on a Collection of Fossils and Rock-specimens from

West Australia, north of the Gascoyne River.” By W. H. Hudles-

ton, Esq., M.A., F.G.S.

This collection was forwarded to England by Mr. Forrest, who has

been engaged for some time past in surveying the northern portion

of the colony, and was accompanied by a map indicating the positions

EEE

Pibliographical Notice. 60

whence the specimens were obtained. The author drew attention

to a paper by Mr. Gregory, which appeared in the Quarterly.

Journal, many years ago, giving a brief description of the country

as far as the Gascoyne river in lat. 25°8., together with some

diagrammatic sections, which show a belt of sedimentary rocks

between the sea and the crystalline plateau forming the interior of

the country. This belt of sedimentary rocks widens materially

towards the north, being about 90 miles across on the parallel of

the Gascoyne river. Amongst the rock-specimens in the Forrest

collection are crystalline schists, &c., in which white mica and

quartz are the most prominent minerals; and it is evidently from

the degradation of masses of this class that the arenaceous rocks

containing the fossils were derived. No limestone has been sent;

but where the grits are largely charged with fragments of Encrinites,

Polyzoa, &c. there is a proportionate increase of calcareous matter.

No specimens of coal or of recognizable plants were forwarded.

The fossils chiefly occur in “ Fossil range,” which runs nearly

N.N.W. for over 100 miles; they present a thoroughly Carboniferous

(marine) facies, several of the species being identical with or closely

allied to well-known Carboniferous Limestone forms. Out of more

than 20 species there is only one (a Pachypora, allied to P. cervi-

cornis) which could be regarded as Devonian. Corals, crinoidal

stems, Polyzoa, Brachiopoda, and two large species of Aviculopecten

make up the list. In the Appendix some of these were described.

The corals are chiefly represented by Amplewus and Stenopora ;

whilst amongst the Polyzoa are two species of the very curious

American genus Hvactinopora, only known hitherto from the Lower

Carboniferous rocks of Lllinois. The ubiquitous Fenestella plebera

is extremely abundant.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE.

The Young Collector’s Handbook of Shells. By B. B. Woopwarp,

F.G.S. &e. Small Svo. London: W. Swan Sonnenschein and Co.

Ir is not often that we feel called upon to notice a penny book ;

but the little treatise of which we have given the title above strikes

us as so good a work of its kind as to deserve a tew words of

welcome. Mr. Woodward, as will be seen from the title of his

little book, has set before him a very modest purpose; but he has

stuck to it in the most praiseworthy manner, and in consequence

has succeeded in producing what cannot but prove a most useful

manual for beginners in shell-collecting. He tells his readers how

to make a cheap cabinet for the reception of their collections, then

how to collect the shells to put into it, how to prepare and mount

them when obtained, and, lastly, how to classify and arrange their

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 5

66 Miscellaneous.

prizes. The classificatory portion is necessarily a mere sketch ; but

-it is clear, and illustrated with a considerable number of woodcuts,

and Mr. Woodward has appended to it a useful table of the prin-

cipal genera of shells, with indications of their respective number of

species and their geographical distribution. A list of a few works

of reference (which might have been enlarged with advantage)

occupies the last page of the pamphlet, which ought to find a wide

acceptance among young collectors.

MISCELLANEOUS.

The ‘* Crag Mollusca.”

To the Editors of the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GrnrtLemeNn,—A shell abundant in the Red Crag of Suffolk and

Essex was figured by Sowerby, in ‘ Mineral Conchology ’ for 1823

(tab. 411. fig. 2), as Murew alveolatus, and a variety of it (tab, 414.

fig. 1) as Bueccinum tetragonum. Both, together with a series of

varieties connecting them, were figured by my father in the ‘ Crag

Mollusca,’ issued by the Paleontographical Society for 1847, under

the name of Purpura tetragona, by which the shell has now been

long known. It has been generally regarded, by foreign and English

authors alike, as not living; but in the list to Prof. Prestwich’s paper

on the Red Crag (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxvii. p. 490) it is

called a variety of Purpura lapillus, on the authority, I believe, of

Dr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys.

I have found in profusion, in the recent state, on Felixstow beach,

a shell undistinguishable from the most abundant variety of P. tretra-

gona. It is certainly not any variety of P. lapillus, but appears to

be a smooth variety of the common British shell Murea erinaceus,

in which opinion, as well as in that of its identity with the Crag

Purpura tetragona, Mr. Robert Bell, who has an intimate acquaintance

with the Crag Mollusca, concurs.

This variety of Murex erinaceus was not known to my father, and

therefore was not recognized by him; but having once seen a speci-

men of the common form of that species in a collection from the

Fluvio-marine Crag of Bramerton, he introduced it, but without any

figure, at p. 39 of his original work, as a Crag species; and the

specimen having been lost, he, in the first supplement to that work

(tab. ii. fig. 11), gave the representation of a recent specimen of

this form, in order that Murew erinaceus might appear as a Crag

mollusk.

Under the guise of Purpura tetragona, however, it appears to me

to have been an abundant shell both of the oldest (2. e. Walton)

and medial (7. ¢. Sutton) parts of the Red Crag (and not particularly

rare in the Crag jaune and Crag gris of Antwerp, according to Nyst) ;

but in the Fluvio-marine part of this crag, from which it was that

Miscellaneous. 67

the solitary specimen of the common form of Murex erinaceus my

father recognized came, Purpura tetragona does not seem to have

occurred. ;

I may add that these shells, so abundant on Felixstow beach, are

not specimens fallen from the Crag-cliff there, washed clean by the

sea, but genuine recent shells.

Tam, &c.,

Martlesham, near Woodbridge, Szartes V. Woop.

June 16, 1883.

Mediterranean Mollusca.

In consequence of a suggestion made to me by the Rev. R. Boog

Watson, that Brugnonia pulchella ‘Annals,’ 1883, xi. p.399)may be an

embryonic form, I havere-examined my specimensand compared them

with the young of various Gastropods. It is possible that the species

which I described may be the fry of Cassis sulcosa, although I can-

not satisfactorily determine this for want of young and fresh speci-

mens of the latter species. If this surmise be confirmed by further

comparison, Brugnonia must be consigned to the limbo of spurious

genera, along with Sinusigera of D'Orbigny, Macgillivrayia ot

Forbes, and several genera of O. G. Costa.

J. Gwyn JEFFREYS.

18th June, 1883.

Further Observations on the Dimorphism of the Foraminifera.

By MM. Monter-Cuarmas and SCHLUMBERGER.

In a former communication on the dimorphism of the Foramini-

fera we have indicated two existing types of Biloculine ; we will

now show that the extinct species likewise participate in the two

series of modifications that we have already noted in the existing

species. ;

Triloculina trigonula, d’Orb.—The form A possesses a very large

central chamber (204 ,.) surrounded by three series of cells, the

planes of symmetry of which form with each other angles of one

third of a circumference. It will be remarked that the first serial

chamber is compressed and corresponds to the canal of the Bilocu-

line. The inrolment of the chambers from the first to the last

remains the same, and follows three directions, passing through the

planes of symmetry just mentioned. In this species the individuals

of the form A often attain large dimensions.

Triloculina trigonula, d@Orb.—The form B presents one of the

smallest centralg chambers that we have met with; it is only 18 p.

Around it are rouped five chambers, which reproduce the arrange-

ment of the Quinqueloculine. This imrolment does not continue ;

for, starting from the sixth, which becomes very embracing, the

following chambers suddenly take on the Triloculine arrangement.

Pentellina saxorum (dOrb.),—Middle Kocene, Parnes. This

68 Miscellaneous.

species must be regarded as the most perfect geometrical type of

inrolment in five directions. In the Pentelline, as in the Quinque-

loculine, it is observed that the forms A and B are less dissimilar

in appearance than in the other genera. Nevertheless these two

forms are distinguished at once by the difference of size that occurs

in their first chambers. Moreover, around the central chamber of

the form B we recognize the presence of some small chambers ; but

starting from this point the succeeding chambers acquire the Quin-

queloculine arrangement so characteristic and so constant in the

form A.

Fabularia discolithes, Defr.—The individuals of the form A are

always exceedingly small; the largest have as the maximum not

more than seven embracing chambers arranged alternately on each

side of the central chamber, which measures 270 px. The first serial

chamber, which represents the canal of the Biloculine, remains

simple, while the succeeding ones are divided by longitudinal par-

titions into narrow more or less circular chambers which communi-

cate with each other by lateral canals. The inrolment, like that of

the Biloculine, takes place in accordance with a single plane of

symmetry.

Kabularia discolithes, Defr.—A transverse section of the form B

shows that the chambers present three principal modifications in

their arrangement :—

il Around the central chamber, which measures 21 p, there are

grouped five simple chambers ; then the nine succeeding ones are

arranged more or less irregularly in accordance with their directions.

The last two are divided by a thick longitudinal partition, which

cuts them into two.

. From this point the new chambers are regularly opposite to

each other; the first six or seven of this series present numerous

longitudinal canals arranged in a single series.

3. Lastly, in the third phase the last chambers, to the number of

twenty or twenty-two, present a series of more or less irregular

supplementary canals towards their inner part.

From this very brief investigation it appears that all the species

of Miliolites that we have studied are dimorphous. One may easily

recognize this dimorphism by comparing numerous sections; the

form B will always be distinguished by a much smaller central

chamber surrounded by a greater number of chambers than in the

corresponding form A.

In the presect state of our knowledge it is difficult to pronounce

a definite opinion upon the cause of this dimorphism ; nevertheless

it seems to us that there are only two possible hypotheses.

In the first place it may be supposed that each species is repre-

sented by two forms distinct from their origin. But hitherto we

have been unable to discover in any of the numerous species that

we have studied very young individuals of the form B.

The second hypothesis consists in assuming that the dimorphism

is the result of a final evolution. Every individual would then pass

Miscellaneous. 69

through two successive phases: the first would correspond to the

form A; but, in consequence of the resorption of the large central

chamber, the animal would construct a series of new chambers corre-

sponding to the form B.

In all the species examined exact measurements have shown us

that, supposing the central chamber to be absorbed, the space set

free between the first serial chambers of the form A is large enough

to allow the modified chambers of the form B to be developed.

It now remains for us, before pronouncing in favour of one of

these two hypotheses, to trace a living species through all the phases

of its evolution.— Comptes endus, May 28, 1883, p. 1598.

On Radial and Bilateral Symmetry in Animals. By H. W. Conn.

The relation of radial to bilateral symmetry among animals is

a question in regard to which there has been considerable discussion.

It is, however, today pretty generally acknowledged that the type

of radial symmetry must have preceded that of bilateral symmetry.

Two important views are current as to the origin of a bilateral form

of symmetry, such as is presented by the group Vermes, from a radial

symmetry, such as we find in the Coelenterata. The simplest view,

of which Ray Lankester is an exponent, is as follows :—

Starting with a radially symmetrical larva, this view supposes

that the two forms of symmetry arose with reference to the stationary

or locomotive life of the animal. On the one hand, the stationary

animal retains its primitive radial symmetry and grows into a

radiate adult. On the other hand, the locomotive larva is modified

by its free life. Its growth, in order to give greater freedom of

motion, results in an elongation of the body in a direction parallel

with its axis. Such a long cylindrical body would of necessity

soon develop swimming-organs; and these swimming-organs, in

order to give greater steadiness of motion and prevent an inconve-

nient revolution of the body, would appear in such a position as to

give the animal an upper and an under surface, and consequently a

bilateral symmetry. With the continued elongation of the body,

the digestive tract, which at first ended blindly, also would elon-

gate and finally acquire a posterior opening at a position directly

opposite the mouth. This view, then, supposes the body of the

radiate animal to elongate in the direction of its long axis, and a

bilateral symmetry to arise in reference to the organs of locomotion.

A second view, advanced by Balfour, while based on the same

fundamental principle of stationary and free life, supposes the change

to take place in a different fashion. This view supposes that the

growth of the free-living radiate form resulted in an elongation, not

in the direction of the axis of the animal, but rather at right angles

to this axis. This places the mouth of the animal, from the first,

not at one extremity but upon one side, which therefore becomes

very early the ventral side. The swimming-organs afterwards arose

in reference to the already indicated bilateral symmetry.

70 Miscellaneous.

These two views are fundamentally different. Besides affecting

our belief as to the manner in which bilateral symmetry arose, the

acceptance of one or the other is the foundation of our understanding

of the homologies which are to be found in the two groups.

Evidence for the one or the other of the views is to be looked for

in embryology ; but very few animals give an opportunity for such

research, owing to secondary changes which have acted upon the ova

and the embryos. For this reason no direct evidence has been

hitherto obtained. At Beaufort, during the last summer, some work

was done upon Thalassema, a species of worm which possesses a

very primitive development, and enables a direct study of the origin

of bilateral symmetry from radial symmetry to be made. The re-

sults of the observations were satisfactory upon the point in ques-

tion, and showed that, as far as this group of animals is concerned,

the second of the above views, viz. that of Balfour, is in all essential

respects correct. The radially symmetrical gastrula elongates nearly

at right angles to its long axis, and gives rise to a bilateral larva, of

which the ventral surface has been from the first indicated by the

position of the mouth. The acquisition of a direct motion occurs

some time after the animal is truly bilateral, an indirect revolu-

tionary motion being gradually changed into a direct motion with its

anterior extremity in advance.—Johns Hopkins University Cureu-

lars, April 1888, p. 73.

Observations on Blastogenesis and Alternation of Generations in the

Salpe and Pyrosomata. By M. L. Joxrer.

In 1868 Kowalevsky traced with precision the principal features

of the blastogenetic development of the Salpe. According to him

the stolon consists, as in the Pyrosomata, of two tubes, one within

the other, prolonging the ectoderm and endoderm of the parent.

In the free space left between them run four cords—two lateral,

derived from the cloaca, two median (one inferior, the other supe-

rior), derived from two masses of mesodermic cells. According to

the same author the skin, the branchio-intestinal tube, and the

cloaca of each of the aggregated Salpe are derived from the corre-

sponding parts of the stolon, and, consequently, of the parent; the

nervous system and the genital organs, formed at the expense of the

median cords, result from the development of two groups of meso-

dermic cells.

Since this very precise exposition three chief memoirs have

appeared upon the same subject; these have again brought into

question the whole problem of gemmation and alternation of gene-

rations. .

Thus, according to Salensky, the inner tube as well as the lateral

cords have only a transitory function: the latter are derived from

the pericardium ; and the intestine is formed at the expense of the

inferior cord.

Miscellaneous. 71

Brooks attributes their real function to the genital cord and the

endodermic tube of the Salpe ; but he does not recognize a true

alternation of generations in the Salpew. Ova being visible in the

genital cord of the stolon before the different individuals of the chain

are distinct, he concludes from this that the so-called agamic form

is a female producing by gemmation not hermaphrodites, but incu-

batory males, each containing an ovum.

Todaro did not recognize the fact of the original distinctness of

the four mesodermic cords; he described a homogeneous middle

layer, which, originating from a germoblast, would form the entire

body of the bud to the exclusion of the endodermic and ectodermic

tubes. As the germoblast is, with him, the equivalent of the ovum

itself, the aggregated individuals which originate from it would be,

not the sons but the younger brothers of the solitary individual, and

there would be in the Salpe@ neither an alternation of generations

nor true gemmation.

My observations enable me to confirm and complete the state-

ments of Kowalevsky ; they also compel me to support the old

theory of gemmation and the alternation of generations.

If in a very young solitary embryo of Salpa democratica mucro-

nata we examine the germinal point, we see a thickening of the

ectoderm, against which a diverticulum of the endoderm of the

parent abuts internally. In front, towards the placenta, there is

a small transparent mass of mesodermic cells, the origin of the

neural cord; behind, towards the clceoblast, another more volumi-

nous one, the origin of the genital cord; and lastly, on each side, a

thickening is attached directly by a long peduncle to the lateral

lamella destined to form the muscles of the solitary embryo ; these

are the rudiments of the lateral cords. Their connexion with the

muscular plates is at first very distinct ; subsequently the attach-

ments break and return upon themselves, and it is no longer possible

to distinguish any thing of them. Upon this point alone my obser-

vations are in disagreement with those of M. Kowalevsky, who

makes the lateral cords originate from the cloaca of the parent ; the

lateral cords, at least in Salpa democratica, originate neither from

the cloaca nor from the pericardium, but from the muscular lamelle.

In the section of a young stolon the lateral cords appear as two

homogeneous cellular masses; later on each of them splits into a

hollow cloaca, cord and a mass of mesodermic cells. These cells

multiply greatly, and form the lateral or muscular plates of the

buds. Further, each segment of the cloacal tube gives origin directly

to the cloaca of each bud. As to the central endodermic tube, Brooks

is right in his description of the sacs which it emits at each side,

and which serve as the origin of the branchio-intestinal tube of the

buds. These sacs, enveloped and often masked by the muscular

plates, are none the less recognizable in properly made sections.

In the Salpe, as in the Pyrosomata, the endoderm, the ectoderm,

and the mesoderm of the bud are therefore derived from the corre-

sponding lamelle of the parent, and serve to form the same organs.

72 Miscellaneous.

With regard to Brooks’s opinions, I have very strong reasons for

believing that the genital or inferior cord of the stolon does not

serve to give origin solely to the ova or female elements which are

seen in the aggregated Salpa, but also to the spermatozoids ; if,

therefore, we are to see in this cord a sexual gland, it will not be a

female but an hermaphrodite gland. Hence it follows that the

solitary Salpa is not a female but an hermaphrodite form.

Moreover, Brooks is wrong in thinking that the ova with germi-

nal vesicle and spot, which are observed already sketched out in the

young buds, are true ova. In each bud of Salpa or Pyrosoma there

exists at a certain moment a single one of these bodies; it is seen

to divide several times before any fecundation. Only one of these

segments becomes the definitive ovum; the others constitute a mass

of cells already observed in the Salpe by Leuckart (who was not

aware of its origin), and destined to form the proper walls of the

oviduct and follicle. There is consequently no reason to be sur-

prised, as has often been the case with reference to the Salpe and

Pyrosomata, at seeing the ovum precede in development the indi-

vidual which has to bear it; this body, which nevertheless in its

dimensions and constitution presents all the characters of an ovum,

is not a definitive ovum, but one of those bodies which the English

call “ germinal cell” and the Germans “Ure,” and which it may be

useful to designate in our language by the name of proovwm.

To sum up. The gemmation of the Salpe is a true gemmation,

but rendered particularly complex by the fact that organs already

differentiated take part in it, each on its own behalf.

The solitary form, hitherto regarded as agamic, is not a female ;

it does not contain an ovary; nor does it contain an hermaphro-

dite gland, but at the utmost the sketch or rudiment of such a

gland; it therefore perhaps merits the denomination of an agamic

form.

To avoid all ambiguity it will be well to define the sense which

should be attached to this term.

The stock agamic form is that which, produced sexually and pos-

sessing sexual tissue, either not yet differentiated andsimply in poten-

tiality, or already differentiated and recognizable, but being incapable

of conducting it to the term of its evolution, confides it for this pur-

pose to one or more successive forms, the las. of which at least is

sexual.

This formula applies to the Salpe, to the Pyrosomata (in which

the third bud alone is capable of reproduction), to the Doliola, to the

compound Ascidia (which may present still more complex processes),

and, lastly, to several other animal forms.— Comptes Rendus, June 4,

1883, p. 1676.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES.]

No. 68. AUGUST 1883.

X.—Further Contribution to the Knowledge of the Family

Tintinnodea. By Dr. Hermann Fou *.

[Plate IV.]

A sHoRT memoir published two years agot in this Journal

gave an account of the results of my first observations upon

the anatomy and classification of this interesting family of

Infusoria. Since then another winter passed at Villafranca,

_ * Translated by W. S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘ Bibliothéque Univer-

selle: Archives des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles,’ période 3, tome ix,

p. 504 (15th June 1883).

Bibliographical Index.

X. R. E. Claparéde, Beobachtungen &c. an der Kiiste von Normandie

angestellt. Folio, Leipzig, 1863.

XI. Dr. V. Sterki, ‘‘ Tintinnus semicihatus, eine neue Infusorienart,”

Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxii. p. 460, with one plate, 1879.

XII. H. Fol, “ Contribution 4la Connaissance de la famille des Tintin-

nodea,” Arch. des Sci. phys. et nat. tome vy. p. 5, January 1881.

Translated in Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. vii. p. 237.

XIII. Saville Kent, ‘A Manual of the Infusoria,’ part v. p. 624 et segq.

XIV. C. M. Vorce, “Is it Tintinnus?,” Amer. Monthly Micr. Journ.

vol. ii. pp. 223, 224, 1881.

XV. O. Biitschli (Reporter), Zoologischer Jahresbericht, 1881, erste

Abth. p. 151.

+ See Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. vii. p. 237.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 6

74 Dr. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea.

in 1880-1881, has enabled me to resume this investigation

at the point where I had left it, and to make a step in advance

in the knowledge of the structure of these animalcula.

Some forms occurred which I had not previously met with.

Some further details of structure were able to be elucidated.

In the natural sciences method plays a principal part; but it

is nowhere of greater importance than in microscopical re-

searches: here the fitness of the investigator consists much

less in any particular perspicacity than in the art of bringing

into view the points that he wishes to know. Hence the em-

ployment of a new method has enabled me to see clearly

many things which I had previously been unable to see, or

which I had seen imperfectly and misunderstood.

I shall consequently have not only to describe new details,

but also to rectify my former data in several particulars. The

“ Bibliographical Index” contains a memoir (XI.) which had

previously escaped my notice, upon an Infusory allied to

those described by me, as well as some publications, rather of

a critical than a descriptive nature, which have appeared since

I prepared the ‘ Bibliographical Index ”’ to my previous article

[‘ Annals,’ vol. vil. p. 250].

Method.—The collection of the Tintinnodea in the sea is an

easy matter. There is no danger of damaging them at the

moment of their capture, seeing that their test, into which

they withdraw at the smallest sign of danger, sufficiently pro-

tects them. 'They are pretty robust, and swim briskly about

in the bottles several hours after their capture, and at a time

when many delicate animals are already dead or disfigured.

It is not, however, at the surface of the sea or under a bright

sun that we find them in the greatest abundance. In cloudy

weather they rise to the surface more readily than in bright

weather; and in the daytime they are found chiefly at a

depth of several fathoms.

For their capture I employed a net of fine muslin of

a conical form attached to a ring about 50 centim. in dia-

meter. ‘The bottom of the net presents a contracted opening,

like that of a weel, which opens at the middle of a much smaller

net made of silken sieve-cloth with very fine meshes. This

latter is attached to a ring equilibrated by a fragment of cork.

This net of silken gauze does not injure the animals at all;

and it captures at least twice as many as the glass bottle

which some naturalists substitute for it. It is easy to under-

stand, in fact, that the impermeable walls of the bottle compel

the water to turn in its interior, and cause eddies which carry

out a considerable proportion of the captured animals.

With creatures so active and so difficult to observe alive

Dr. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea. 75

under a high power, itis of great importance to have a process

which enables them to be fixed instantaneously in their natural

attitude before they have had time to withdraw into their

test, and which preserves faithfully the details of their

structure. i

I have tried the various reagents most in vogue without

attaining my purpose. With weak osmic acid I did not suc-

ceed in preserving the cilia of the peristome; and with a

stronger dose the body became absolutely opaque : in both cases

there was always a strong contraction. Acetic acid, chromic

acid, and picrosulphuric acid only gave me a fixation which

was too slow, so that the animal died contracted in the bottom

of its test. Finally I succeeded with a reagent which is not

employed in histology, perchloride of iron; by its means I

have obtained a considerable number of specimens of various

species fixed in a state of full expansion. These subjects,

washed with alcohol, and treated with gallic acid, present a

brown coloration which is especially localized upon the

nuclei and renders them very visible; the other parts of the

animal acquire a light brown tint, which renders them easy

to see.

The specimens thus treated may be mounted in Canada

balsam, which produces permanent preparations; but they

are much more distinct and more instructive if simply placed

in glycerine.

By treating in the manner just indicated the whole pro-

duce of a capture we can afterwards, on returning home, seek

at leisure for the Infusoria, a more or less considerable number

of which will be fixed in a state of full extension of the body

and peristome, with the cilia and the vibratile palettes pre-

served in perfection.

Anatomy.—The structure of the test is more complete in

certain forms, and presents more difference between the forms

than I previously supposed. ‘Tests slightly tinged with gallic

acid and mounted in balsam or in glycerine are especially

instructive. By compressing the test a little we obtain at the

margins perfectly distinct optical sections.

Examined under these conditions with a good homogeneous

immersion-lens, the tests of the Z%nténni prove to be composed

of two very distinct layers, as I previously indicated (XII.

p- 12 [242]); but what I did not see in fresh preparations is

that the layers are symmetrically placed, one at the inner, the

other at the outer surface, and separated by a vacant space

(Pl. IV. fig. 7). The substance of the test, browned by

gallic acid, shows very clearly these two parallel layers, appa-

rently of the same thickness throughout their whole extent.

76 Dr. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea.

In Tintinnus ampulla this thickness is O'S. The space

which separates these two lamine is a little thinner than the

laming themselves, and is divided by a number of little secon-

dary partitions which pass from one lamina to the other. The

arrangement of these lamelle varies according to the species

and produces the design which characterizes the test of each

species. At the free margin of the test the two lamine unite

by bending round and form only one.

In the genus Cyttarocylis the general arrangement is the

same, but the lamine are more separated and the partitions

less numerous and stronger, leaving more apparent alveolar

spaces (Pl. IV. fig. 10).

Dictyocysta, besides these alveoli, presents perforations of

the whole wall.

Lastly, in Condocylis, which I now think may be united

with the genus Codonella, the wall is simple, of variable and

irregular thickness, and inerusted with foreign bodies.

Hence there are no profound differences except between the

agelutinant tests with massive walls and the tests with double

walls united by little septa. The latter only differ among

themselves by the number and arrangement of the septa; the

fundamental structure remains the same. I previously (XII.

pp- 18, 22 [ 245, 248]) described the alveolate tests as formed of

a sort of trellis, closed only on one side by a continuous mem-

brane. ‘This statement must be corrected in this respect, that

the alveoli are found in all parts and enclosed between two

continuous membranes.

The animals preserved by the method indicated show clearly

various details of structure which escaped me in the animals

treated by the usaul methods. In gallic acid the nucleus

acquires a dark brown tint, which enables it to be distin-

guished at the first glance. In Tintinnus ampulla and T.

spiralis, the only two species of the genus that I have met

with this time, I have never seen more than a single nucleus,

which was of considerable size, and placed either near the

middle of the body or further back and towards the peduncle.

In my preparations I have also met with many individuals

in which | could discover no element of this kind; it isso easy

to see when it exists that I incline to believe that in certain

phases of existence it is really absent or profoundly modified.

In Zintinnus ampulla the nucleus is oval, and measures as

much as 50 w inits greatest diameter (see Pl. IV. fig. 7). It

is formed by a thick superficial layer, which remains homo-

geneous in the reagents employed (perchloride of iron, alcohol,

and gallic acid), and acquires a uniform brown tint. I have

been unable to detect any distinct membrane at its surface.

= es WTR eee

Dr. H. Fol on the Family 'Tintinnodea. 77

This layer surrounds a rounded cavity 28 yw in diameter, filled

chiefly with a granular matter; we distinguish in it compa-

ratively large granules, which acquire a very dark brown

colour and are enclosed in an irregular finely punctate mass.

I have not met with this structure in the nuclei of the other

species ; but I do not for that reason assert that it is a specific

character; I should rather incline to think that this state of

the nucleus answers to one of the phases of the existence of

our animals. I yregret much that I did not this time meet

with conjugated individuals; suitably prepared they would

have furnished valuable information as to the function of the

nuclei during that act.

The sarcode of the body appears to be simply granular,

without organization ; and, in particular, I have sought in vain

for indications of striation or of layers of myoplasm*.

The oral disk and its singular structure particularly at-

tracted my attention this time also; and by means of perfect

preparations as regards fixation and preservation I have been

able to examine the vibratile circlet at my leisure and under

the highest powers. The results obtained differ considerably

from those which were furnished by the laborious observation

of living animals.

=) . . . . .

The general arrangement of the vibratile lines is indeed as

I indicated ; they are curved lines, about twenty in number,

which start from the margin and terminate in the interior of

the circle. But these lines are only in part formed by isolated

cilia; the outer portion of each vibratile line is composed

of pretty broad vibratile lamelle. These lamelle are slashed

at the free margin and divided into filaments ; they undulate

in the living animal in such a manner as to give exactly the

same image as arow of cilia beating one after the other. This

appearance, together with the existence of isolated cilia de-

tached from the margin of the lamelle, led me into an error,

but an error the more excusable because the lamellae occupy

only the margin of the disk, and a series of gradually

shortening cilia exists upon the line of each palette.

These undulating palettes acquired such distinct contours

in perchloride of iron and gallic acid, that without the obser-

vation of the living animal one would think one had to do

with cuticular products (Pl. LV. fig. 7). The width of the

palettes, moreover, is very variable, according to the genera

* In speaking of the absence of striation in the peduncle of the body,

a striation which, on the contrary, appears in the peduncle of the Vorti-

celle, 1 have used the term ‘transverse striation.” This is a dapsus -

calami which Biitschli has justly pointed out (XV. p. 151); it wasof the

longitudinal striation that [ intended to speak.

78 Dr. H. Fol on the Family 'Tintinnodea.

and species; and I have remarked that when the palettes are

narrow, several large cilia are placed in a row following them.

It is therefore very possible that the palettes are to be re-

garded as representing a series of cilia soldered together.

They are not rigid in any of their parts, but absolutely proto-

plasmic and contractile throughout their whole extent.

Hickel (LX. p. 564, and figs. 8-11) describes his genus

Codonella as possessing similar vibratile organs; but he re-

presents them as irregular shreds arranged upon the edge of

a membrane. I have now observed a form very probably

identical with that described by the above distinguished zoolo-

gist; and I think I can assert that his interpretation is not

correct. In this animal the vibratile lamelle are narrow; but

they have the same general arrangement as in the other Tin-

tinnodea, and are placed upon lines curved into portions of a

spiral. Their lateral margins are nearly straight ; and their

outer margin is divided into cilia. A small number of inde-

pendent cilia complete the spiral line commenced by each of

the undulating palettes. There is consequently nothing in

the structure of the vibratile circlet of the Codonelle which

justifies their separation as a distinct family from the other

‘Tintinnodea. Moreover these palettes are much wider and

more apparent in Cyttarocylis cassis than in Codonella.

Hiickel represents that species as possessing in all only two

rows of cilia; if he had seen the palettes, as he saw the much

smaller ones of Codonella, he certainly would not have placed

these animals in distinct families.

I had already concluded my study of the anatomy of these

Infusoria, and in particular of their vibratile circlet, when by

chance I met with an article by Dr. V. Sterki (XI.)—an

article anterior to my first memoir, but which was completely

unknown to me. I had the pleasure of finding in it a de-

scription entirely conformable with my corrected ideas as to

the structure of the ciliary circlet. It is therefore to Sterki

that belongs the most incontestable priority upon this point ;

for Hiickel’s description cannot be regarded as_ sufficiently

exact.

Sterki’s description is also interesting in that it makes

known to us a freshwater form, of which the structure is the

same as that of the marine species, and which shows that the

family Tintinnodea is not confined to salt water. This fact

will assist us in judging of Sterki’s statements (VIII.) which

I have already criticised, and especially of certain synonyms

which have been very uselessly introducéd (XIII.).

As I have already stated, the vibratile lines include both

palettes and independent cilia. These cilia are placed in part

Dr. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea. 79

within and in part outside of the palettes; the palette being

placed on the summit of the edge of the peristome, the cilia

are implanted running downwards from it. ‘Those which are

outside the peristome are generally strong and nearly as long

as the palettes. I have never found more than a single circlet

of cilia in this position ; it is this that Hickel has represented

in his Codonella (tig. 8), but giving them an exaggerated

length. According to Sterki (XI.) the freshwater Tintinnus

semiciliatus has several circlets of cilia in this position, de-

scending pretty low down upon the sides of the body. The

cilia placed in the interior of the peristome are short and

thick, becoming shorter as they approach the middle of the

disk.

I have been unable to discover, in any of the species that I

have observed, the coating of fine cilia which, according to

Claparéde and Lachmann and Hickel, covers the outer surface

of the body in certain species. I believe I have met with the

same two species to which the latter ascribes these cilia in his

text and in his figures; and I have ascertained that these cilia

do not exist.

On the other hand, in some species I have met with a struc-

ture which I have not satisfactorily succeeded in rendering

evident. This is a membrane which proceeds from the body

of the animal, being inserted a little below the peristome, and

passing thence to the test, to which it is attached along a cir-

cular line which occupies about the upper third of the latter.

I only infer the existence of this membrane from some images

furnished by animals treated with reagents, and in which,

moreover, this structure is but rarely preserved; I possess

only a single observation made during life, namely upon Co-

donella galea. However, I must add that the images did not

appear to me sufficiently clear to be definitely established, and

it is a point that I only mention to call the attention of inves-

tigators to it. It seemed to me that this membrane is suffi-

ciently ample to permit the complete extension of the animal,

and that in the retracted state of the latter it folds in the

manner of an Indian-rubber tobacco-pouch, thus completely

closing the access to the inner part of the test (see Pl. IV.

fig. 14).

In Codonella ventricosa (PI. IV. fig. 12) the free margin

of the test is produced into a flexible membranous portion,

which opens, in the state of extension, after the fashion of a

straight neck, whilst it closes completely when the animal

withdraws itself to dhe bottom of its test, forming a diaphragm

over the orifice of the latter. The mechanism by which the

animal in retracting itself produces this occlusion can only

80 Dr. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea.

be understood if we assume the existence of a delicate mem=

brane starting from this flexible border to become attached

‘around the peristome. J have not seen this membrane; but

its existence seems to me probable for the reasons indicated,

and by analogy with the species in which the test, being

more transparent, has allowed me to see a membrane at the

spot indicated.

In Cyttarocylis céstellula the margin of the test of adult

specimens is also occupied by a prolongation which is less

flexible than that of Codonella ventricosa, and is generally in-

clined from without inwards (Pl. IV. fig. 8). It does not

appear that this border can shut up completely; and therefore

it will only act as a partial diaphragm.

Together with certain common points of structure, the Tin-

tinnodea therefore present a great variety in details, and we

must expect in course of time to find a great diversity of forms.

Thus, for a few days only, I met with a considerable number

of specimens of a species which will be described further on,

and which has the habit of attaching its agelutinant test to

floating Algee, which the animal carries about with it.

We know that certain forms which appear to be useful in

the struggle for existence are often realized by very different

animals and by very diverse means, although the final result

may be very similar from the physiological point of view.

The Ichthyosaur and the Cachalot, the Pterodactyle, the bird,

and the bat are striking examples of this convergence of

characters by adaptation. Among marine animals I have

shown* that the Doliolum of the second generation, with its

two kinds of buds, behaves like a Siphonophore, the zocecium

being formed of a locomotive individual comparable to the

bells of a Diphyes, and of feeding individuals or gasterozooids

which nourish the whole colony.

Another of these very frequent forms is that of very slender

pelagic animals moved by palettes or cilia placed in the

middle of their length. The larve of the Zoéa-form of cer-

tain Decapod Crustacea are a well-known example of this

animal form, which may very well be compared to the boats

which are used in rowing matches. The great length has no

injurious effect upon the rapidity of natation, just the con-

trary ; but it renders all displacement which does not take

place in the direction of the longitudinal axis very difficult.

« . 5 . 7

However, the animals which possess this external form have a

* Société de Physique et d'Histoire naturelle de Genéve, “Sur la

nutrition et la reproduction du genre Doliolum, communication faite en

1875 ;” and “ Ueber die Schleimdriise oder den Endostyl der Tunicaten,”

Morphol, Jahrb. Bd. i. p. 222 (1875). 2

Dr. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea. 81

faculty which makes up for their want of the power of turn-

ing; they have the faculty of swimming backwards as fast

and as readily as forwards; and, moreover, they can instan-

taneously change the direction of their course. ‘The long pro-

cesses with which they are provided, by striking against

foreign bodies, warn the animal of danger, and enable it in

good time to effect a precipitate retreat. This singular form

is realized not only by the Zoée which I have just mentioned,

but also by a new Infusorian of the family Tintinnodea. In

fact this curious species has the habit of applying its test

laterally against the cylindrical cells of an Alga furnished

with long processes, which, although foreign to the animal,

appear nevertheless to fulfil exactly the same functions as the

processes of the carapace of the Zoée. Hach of the cells of

this Alga bears a large process directed forwards, another

directed backwards, and shorter lateral processes, between

which the Infusorian attaches its test (Pl. IV. fig. 15). The

number of Algal cells that the Tinténnus transports with it

varies from one to four.

The Tinéinn? swim with the aperture of the test in front,

and have not at all the habit of moving in the opposite direc-

tion; if they do so, it is only exceptionally and for a very

short time. Our species, on the contrary, swims just as readily

in one direction as in the other; and when the anterior point

of the Alga meets with a foreign body, the animalcule takes to

flight backwards as quickly as it had advanced.

Another example of convergence of types by adaptation is

furnished by an Infusorian the description of which I have

been unable to find in any author, although the species is not

rare. ‘The aborescent colonies of this Vorticellidan float in the

sea; and if one touches them, they contract after the fashion

of a Medusa, producing a movement of propulsion of the

whole colony.

Classification.—In the still imperfect state of our know-

ledge of this group I think it most prudent to continue to take

the characters of the test as the basis of classification ; and I

consider myself the more authorized to act thus because the

differences of the anatomical characters appeared to me to

coincide with the sections that we obtain by taking into account

only the test.

Genus I. Trnrinnus, Schrank.

. e 2 ee

Diagn. emend. Vest smooth, firm, chitinous, transparent,

composed of two lamella united by septa which are not very

82 Dr. H. Fol on the Family 'Tintinnodea.

regular and are placed very close together. A single nucleus

in the posterior part of the body. Vibratile lamelle of the

peristome broad, and followed by a considerable number of

independent cilia. A circlet of cilia outside the cirelet of

undulatory lamellee.

Tintinnus ampulla, auctt. (PI. IV. fig. 7.)

The inner lamina of the test forms two circular folds at the

part where the contours change their direction. The undu-

latory lamelle are more powerful in this species than in any

of those which I have observed. ‘he vibratile cilia which

are implanted in the walls of the cesophagus are particularly

powerful and easy to see. The test measures 0°11 millim., in

Jength and 0-1 millim. in breadth. The numbers previously

given were erroneous.

Tintinnus spiralis, auctt.

The dimensions that I have indicated for the test in my

previous article were not correct, in consequence of an error in

the calculation of the magnifying-power. The length of the

test is only 0°312 millim. instead of 0-4 millim., and its width

at the aperture is 0°068 millim. instead of 0:09 millim.

The two lamelle of the test are perfectly distinct and

united to each other by somewhat irregular septa, which,

however, are in general directed from the front backwards with

a spiral twist. It is these septa that I formerly described as

simple striz. Between the septa there are longitudinal rows

of small points, which are only the optical sections of small

pillars passing from one lamina to the other. At the free

margin of the test the two lamin separate a little from one

another, thus leaving between them a wider space than else-

where. Externally the margin of the test is enlarged into a

sort of rib, while internally it is regularly cylindrical. The

hollow rib is therefore formed by the separation of the outer

lamina. The margin itself is hollowed by a furrow produced

by a folding of the wall of the test at the spot where the outer

lamina passes into the inner one ; this circular fold therefore

projects into the cavity of the rib, which it diminishes to this

extent.

The peristome bears a circlet of undulatory palettes, which

I formerly took for isolated cilia. Outside of these palettes it

appeared to me that there was only one independent cilium to

each spiral series; while within there are several cilia gradu-

ally becoming shorter. My specimens, fixed by perchloride

of iron and coloured by gallic acid, present a single oval

Dr. H. Fol on the Family 'Tintinnodea. 83

nucleus, situated laterally against the wall of the body, on the

side opposite to that where the buccal aperture is placed,

nearly in the middle of the length of the body.

GenusII. Cyrrarocy.is, auctt.

Diagn. emend. Test smooth, firm, transparent, composed

of two lamelle separated by a space at least twice as great as

the thickness of each of the lamelle. This space is divided

by very regular septa into a number of small polygonal

alveoli, which give the test a trellis-like aspect.

Peristome fringed with undulatory palettes narrower than

in Tintinnus.

Cyttarocylis cassis.

(Dictyocysta cassis, Hack.)

Several hardened specimens presented an oval nucleus,

situated about the middle of the length of the body. Fig. 10,

Pl. IV. shows the edge of the test, with its septa and its two

lamelle in optical section. The length of the test is 0°22

millim., and its greatest width 0°132 millim.

Cyttarocylis cistellula, sp.n. (PI. IV. fig. 8.)

The test is rounded, ovoid towards the bottom, while the

upper part widens in the form of a funnel. Upon the edge

of the funnel there is a membranous portion directed inwards.

This membranous portion encloses a pretty wide sinus, and

consists of a very delicate and very flexible membranous outer

wall, and of an inner wall which forms the continuation of the

inner lamina of the shell.

The cells enclosed between the two lamine of the test and

bounded by the little septa of polygonal form are of nearly

equal size, except a certain number of cells placed as a zone

around the widest part of the test, which are three or four

times as large as the other cells. The small cells (I do not

employ the word in its histological sense) are, on the average,

3 # in diameter; the largest ones are as much as 9 w wide.

The length of the test, ‘including the membranous border,

attains 0-1 millim. ; its greatest width is 0°07 millim. The

animal differs but little from that of C. cassis.

I met with this species at Villafranca, where it was rather

rare during the winter of 1880-81.

S4 Dr. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea.

Genus III. Dicryocysra, Ehrbg.

Test formed of two lamelle with septa as in Cyttarocylis,

but also presenting true apertures ; fenestree wider than the

internal cells of the test.

Dictyocysta templum, Hick. (Pl. IV. fig. 9.)

I think I can identify the species I met with at Villafranca

with that of which Hiickel has given a figure, notwithstanding

the more rounded form of the apex of the test, and notwith-

standing some differences attributable to errors of drawing.

The test in structure much resembles those of the genus

Cyttarocylis, except that the large fenestrae of the margin and

those placed around the widest part of the test are really per-

forated. I ascertained this fact by placing the test in a drop

of glycerine charged with suspended particles, and causing

the liquid to flow by means of pressure upon the covering-

glass. I then saw the particles pass through the fenestree,

while the experiment has always given me negative results

in the case of the large cells of the test of Cyttarocylis.

The animal seemed to me to differ very little from that of

the latter genus.

This species, the only one of the genus that I have found

at Villafranca, only occurred in small numbers.

Genus IV. CopoNELLA, Hiick.

( Coniocylis, mihi.)

I think I am now sure of the identity of one of the species

that I have described under the name of Conzocylis with one

ot Hickel’s Codonelle. The diagnosis of the latter, itis true,

is defective, since it is based upon a misunderstood character,

which, moreover, is common to the rest ot the Tintinnodea.

Nevertheless I prefer to retain the name proposed by the

above-named author, since that name has the advantage of

priority. The following is the new diagnosis of this genus :—

Test formed of a single lamina, uneven, embossed or striate,

agelutinant, more or less incrusted with foreign bodies. Ani-

mal furnished at the peristome with narrow undulatory

lamella, and possessing two nuclei.

Codonella campanula, (Pl. IV. fig. 11.)

( Tintinnus campanula, Ehrbg.; T. campanula, Clap. & Lachm.; Codo-

nella campanella, Hack. ; Contocylis campanula, mihi.)

I think I may identify this species with the one figured

Dr. H. Fol on the Family 'Tintinnodea. 85

and described by Hiickel, notwithstanding the few differences

that will be remarked in the form and proportions of the test,

because I have now arrived at a certainty that Hickel’s

drawings were made rather carelessly, and must not be taken

“au pied de la lettre.”

The two nuclei are placed in the hinder part of the body

and attached to the two opposite walls. One of them is gene-

rally placed a little behind the other.

I profit by this opportunity to rectify my previous state-

ments as to the dimensions of the test of this species. The

length of this test reaches 0°16, and its width at the orifice

0-1 millim.

Codonella ventricosa. (Pl. IV. fig. 12.)

(Tintinnus ventricosus, Clap. & Lachm.)

The test is much thicker than that of C. campanula, and

strongly incrusted with small granules of very unequal size.

The constricted edge is smooth; and it is upon this non-

incrusted part that the flexible membrane is implanted. The

smooth zone resembles a cravat, and the membrane a straight

collar rising above it. ‘The figure represents this membrane

slightly folded. When the animal expands, the membrane

becomes elevated in a cylindrical form; when the animal

withdraws to the bottom of its test, the membrane folds in-

wards and completely closes the entrance to the test. This

membrane is incrusted with little brilliant elongated bodies,

all directed perpendicularly to the edge of the membrane.

The test is 0°075 millim. in length to the base of the mem-

brane, which is 0-015 millim. wide. The greatest width of

the test is 0°07 millim.

The animal presents two nuclei placed at the same level

towards the middle of the body against the walls.

I found this species in very great abundance at Villafranca.

Codonella nucula, sp.n. (Pl. IV. fig. 13.)

This species much resembles the preceding, except as

regards its dimensions. ‘The incrusting bodies are a little

more scattered, and the flexible membrane is relatively wider.

The length of the test alone is 0-04 miilim., that of the mem-

brane 0:015 millim., and the greatest width of the test 0°033

millim.

One might be tempted to take this form for a young state

of the preceding species, if it were not that, notwithstanding

the great abundance in which these two species occur, inter-

mediate forms are entirely wanting. Moreover I have never,

86 Dr. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea.

in any species of Tintinnodea, met with smaller and larger

tests, which proves that the test is produced of its definitive

dimensions from the first, whatever may be the size of the

animal secreting it.

The T¢ntinnus Khrenbergit described by Claparéde (X. p. 1)

indeed appears to continue to enlarge its test after having

secreted it; but this growth is obtained by the addition of

rings, which are not in continuity of form with the first por-

tion of the test.

Codonella galea, Hiick. (Pl. IV. fig. 14.)

Although the form and the mode of incrustation of the test

do not absolutely agree with Hiickel’s figures, I think I may

identify this species with that of the author cited, and this for

reasons already indicated in connexion with Codonella cam-

panula.

The test is strongly incrusted with large flattened granules,

which nearly all touch each other at their edges. The total

length of the test is 0°08 millim., its greatest width is 0:06

millim.; its entrance at the level of the constriction may be

closed when the animal retracts itself by a folded membrane,

which I have indicated in the figure. ‘The folds meet in such

a manner that the central point forms a pointed projection.

I abstain from classing and giving a name to the Infuso-

rian which I have found attached to the alge (Pl. IV. fig. 15),

the observation of the living animal not having furnished me

with sufficient information as to the structure of the vibratile

circlet and of the test, and the specimens which I had preserved

for examination having been destroyed by an accident. It

seems probable, however, that this form is allied to the Codo-

nelle. In most of the specimens that I have met with the

apex of the test was broken, so that the test was open at both

ends ; but this injury does not seem to be the least incon-

venience to the animal.

It results from the facts that I have just cited that the

organization of the Tintinnodea is not much varied, and that

nothing can justify the separation of the genera at present

known into several families. I have previously indicated

what are my motives for retaining the above name for the

whole family. Sterki’s memoir is particularly interesting as

showing us that the freshwater forms do not differ in their

organization from the marine forms, and that there is no

Dr. H. Fol on the Family 'Tintinnodea. 87

plausible reason for reserving this family name for a hypo-

thetical type founded upon defective descriptions. This,

however, is what has been done by Saville Kent (XIII.

p. 624), who gives the name of Dictyocystide to the Tintin-

nodea, and suppresses the former name because he has not

found animals to which he could apply it. The Dictyo-

cystide of Saville Kent are simply a synonym of the Tintin-

nodea of Claparéde and Lachmann, a synonym which we may

simply set on one side, since the priority belongs incontestably

to the name that I have adopted.

This applies also to the genus Petalotricha, which Saville

Kent seeks to substitute for the name of Tintinnus. Here,

again, he seems to reserve this latter name for hypothetical

animals. It would be superfluous to combat a prejudice ; it

suffices to demonstrate it.

The families Dictyocystide and Codonellide, as Hiickel has

established them, have a better claim on our attention; for

these are not simple synonyms. ‘These families are founded

upon anatomical differences; and it remains only to learn

whether these differences are real or whether they are not

rather based upon insufficient observations. I pronounce

without any hesitation for the latter alternative. The pre-

ceding pages show that the organization of our Infusoria does

not vary much, and that even in the arrangement of the peri-

stome, upon which Hickel founded his distinctions, there

does not exist any difference sufficient to justify their separa-

tion into several families. The genus Codonella is the only

one that presents well-marked characters, not in its peristome,

but in the structure of its test and in the presence of two

nuclei at the hinder part of its body. Have these differences

more than a generic value? I do not think so, and I regard

all the Tintinnodea known at the present day as forming a

single tribe and a single family. As regards the position of

this family relatively to the peritrichous Infusoria I have

already given my opinion, an opinion which my later researches

have only confirmed and still more strongly accentuated.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IV.

Fig. 7. Tintinnus ampulla, treated with perchloride of iron and gallic acid

and mounted in Canada balsam. x 420.

Fig.8. Cyttarocylis cistellula, the test treated with perchloride of iron and

gallic acid and preserved in balsam. x 420.

Fig. 9. Dictyocysta templum, the test treated like the preceding. x 420,

Fig. 10. Upper portion of the test, seen in optical section; treated with

perchloride of iron, gallic acid, and Canada balsam. x 420.

88 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Curculionidae,

Fig. 11. Codonella campanula. The body and a part of the test; same

treatment: X 420.

Fig. 12. Codonella ventricosa. Same treatment and same enlargement.

Fig. 13. Codonella nucula, Same treatment and enlargement.

Fig. 14. Codonella galea, drawn from the living animal. xX 420,

Fig. 15, New Tintinnodean, drawn from the life and x 360. The cor-

rectness of this figure is not guaranteed as regards the ciliary

circlet of the peristome, which could only be studied upon living

animals.

X1.—Descriptions of some new Genera and Species of Curculio-

nide, mostly Astatic.—Part II]. By Francis P. Pascor.

OTIORHYNCHIN. ITHYPORINE.

Tsomerinthus interruptus. Byrsia, n. g.

Gynaria, n. g. cerata.

nasuta.

ORYPTGORHYNCHIN®.

LEPTOPIN2. Acacallis n. g.

personata.

Miocalles, n. g.

notatus.

Diphilus, n. ¢.

Stenocorynus vexatus,

ATTELABINZ.

Attelabus corallipes.

aes squamosus.

indigaceus. Dipaltosternus Fairmairei.

Apoderus macropus. Osaces, 1. &.

—-— naso.

BALANININZ.

f IsoRHYNCHIN”.

Balaninus luctuosus. :

galbula. Telephae propola.

cinereus. oy

cuneipennis. YGOPINZ:,

—— productus. Asytesta antica.

CIONINZE. BaRIDINz&,

Cionus obesus. Acythopeus luxatus.

Nanophyes finitus.

Elena CALANDRIN&:.

tarsalis. Eugnoristus niger.

Isomerinthus interruptus.

T. ovatus, rufo-fuscus ; prothorace elytrisque vittis albidis, his in

medio interruptis, ornatis ; pedibus testaceis, parce squamosis.

Long. 23 lin.

Hab, Fiji.

Ovate, reddish brown or chocolate-coloured, with stripes of

white scales; rostrum short, scaly, head behind the eyes ob-

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Curculionide. 89

liquely striated; antenne ferruginous, first two joints of the

scape a little longer than the others, all tipped with black ; pro-

thorax rather coarsely punctate, a stripe of white more or less

approximate scales on each side; elytra short, well rounded at

the sides, seriate-punctate, the interstices with concolorous

scales, the suture with four abbreviated stripes at the base and

five at the apex, composed of white scales; legs testaceous,

with scattered white scales, more dense on the upperside of

the temora and on the tibia.

In this well-marked species the scales on the interstices of

the elytra are only visible under a strong lens.

GYNARIA.

Rostrum crassum ; scrobes apicales, arcuate, ad oculum currentes.

Oculi majusculi, rotundati. Scapus antennarum ad prothoracem

haud extensus. Prothorav normalis. Scutellum distinctum.

Elytra ovata, modice convexa. Mesosternum angustum, declive.

Pedes et abdomen ut in Isomerintho.

This genus differs from Jsomerinthus in its stout rostrum

not narrower than the head, in the shorter scape not, or barely,

extending to the prothorax, and in the presence of a scu-

tellum.

Gynaria nasuta.

G. ovata, nigra, granulis nitide nigris squamulisque viridi-metallicis

induta; antennis, clava excepta, tarsisque violaceo-squamosis.

Long 47 lin. (¢), 5 lin. (2).

Hab. Aru.

Ovate, black, studded with small glossy black granules, the

intervals with greenish metallic scales; rostrum with a dull

black median ridge, the sides with a smaller ridge and rugosely

punctate; scape and funicle closely covered with minute

violet-coloured scales, the club with a brownish-black pubes-

cence; prothorax narrow, as long as broad, with a black

median line bare of scales ; scutellum small, somewhat oblong ;

elytra coarsely striate-punctate, the interstices granulate, the

sides margined with rosy silvery-white scales, which are con-

tinued onto the prothorax beneath ; femora, except the upper

part at the base, and tibize closely covered with small brilliant

green metallic scales ; tarsi covered with violet-coloured scales.

Stenocorynus vexatus.

S. obovatus, omnino griseo-squamosus, elytris ampliatis, seriatim

punctatis, apice subacutis. Long. 5-54 lin.

Hab. Timor.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol, xii. 7

90 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Curculionide.

Obovate, entirely covered with greyish scales; rostrum

broader towards the apex, the middle with a black ridge, a

short impressed vertical line between the eyes ; joints of the

funicle gradually shorter towards the club; prothorax trans-

verse, sides slightly rounded, scales concealing any punctures ;

scutellum subtransverse ; elytra not broader than the pro-

thorax at the base, but swelling out and rounded at the sides,

finely punctate in rows, the apex subacute. Other characters

are those of the genus, which is allied to and not unlike our

Tropiphorus mercurtalis and hundreds of other species not

very different except in minute structural characters. 8S.

aridus, from Lizard Island, approaches the present species in

form; but it has, énter alia, shorter and stouter antenne and

elytra more coarsely punctate, with some of the interstices

raised.

Attelabus corallipes.

A, fere omnino rufo-corallinus, nitidus; elytris striato-punctatis,

interstitiis alternis elevatis, spina laterali antica valida, apicem

versus infuscata. Long, 31 lin.

Hab. Cambodia.

Very like A. bispinosus, Gyll., from which it differs in being

unicolorous, except the dark brown tip of the elytral spine,

the absence of the transverse impressed line on the head, and

the raised alternate interstices of the elytra. It was one of

M. Mouhot’s captures.

Attelabus indigaceus.

A, ovatus, fere omnino cyaneus, subnitidus; scutello nigro; elytris

antice reticulatis, postice gradatim seriatim punctatis. Long.

4 lin.

Hab. Laos.

Ovate, almost entirely dark blue, slightly glossy ; head

prolonged behind the eyes ; rostrum short, and with the head

coarsely punctate ; antennz long, glossy black, the club dull

blackish, tomentose ; prothorax closely punctate, the sides at

the base obliquely striated and nearly impunctate ; scutellum

quadrate, black ; elytra much longer than broad, transversely

depressed before the middle, the base with coarse punctures,

as if reticulated, the punctures becoming gradually smaller

and disposed in rows towards the apex ; anterior tibie nearly

straight ; abdomen coarsely punctate.

The nearest approach to this species appears to be A. ceru-

leus, Jek., from North China ; but it is much larger and stouter

in proportion, and, ¢nter alia, the elytra are quite differently

sculptured.

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Curculionide. 91

Apoderus macropus.

A. fere omnino fusco-cupreus ; antennis ferrugineis; prothorace in

medio profunde longitudinaliter sulcato, lateribus oblique costatis ;

femoribus posticis pone abdomen extensis. Long. 34 lin.

Hab. Sarawak.

Almost entirely dark or brownish copper; antenne ferru-

ginous, glossy, except the club; head closely constricted

behind, nearly impunctate, a deep groove in front continued to

the middle of the rostrum, the latter short and much dilated

towards the tip, the neck very short; prothorax subconic,

tubular at the apex, rising anteriorly into a bilobed gibbosity,

the dividing groove continued to the base, the sides above

obliquely ribbed ; scutellum quadrate; elytra short, parallel

at the sides, the shoulders elevated, striate-punctate, inter-

stices of irregular breadth, raised at the base and round the

scutellum, the punctures gradually smaller towards the apex ;

mesosternum grooved between the intermediate coxe ; legs

robust ; posterior femora extending beyond the abdomen.

The stout femora, the posterior conspicuously extending be-

yond the abdomen, give this species a different outline from its

congeners. Thesculpture of the prothorax is very remarkable.

Balaninus luctuosus.

B. breviter ellipticus, niger, pubescens, niveo-maculatus ; antennis

ferrugincis, articulo secundo funiculi longiore quam primus ;

elytris brevibus, cordatis. Long. 24 lin.

Hab. Dorey.

Shortly elliptic, black, with a concolorous pubescence, and

snow-white scales condensed in well-defined spots ; rostrum

longer than the elytra; antenne ferruginous, second joint of

the funicle longer than the first, the rest gradually shorter ;

prothorax transverse, rounded at the sides; scutellum white,

punctiform ; elytra short, cordate, an oblong white spot on

the suture at the base, a transverse one on each side and

behind the middle, and another at the apex, as well as a

larger spot at the base of the prothorax on each side, and

the anterior margin, as well as the pectus, white; body

beneath and legs clothed, the latter more sparsely, with

hair-like greyish scales; second abdominal segment shorter

than the two next together; femora with an obtuse tooth

beneath.

In some respects like the Australian B. amenus, Fab., but

larger, the spots and the form different. In Balaninus the

rostrum varies in length, sometimes irrespective of sex, and

rks

92 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Curculionide.

the insertion of the antenne may be in the middle or nearer

the base of the rostrum. It would be misleading to state

minutely these and perhaps other characters from a limited

number of specimens. A character may be variable in one

species and rigidly persistent in another.

Balaninus galbula.

B. ellipticus, squamulis angustis aureo-fulvis maculisque flavis supra

tectus ; antennis ferrugineis, articulis funiculi a primo gradatim

brevioribus; elytris cordatis. Long. 3 lin,

Hab. Dorey.

Elliptic, above with narrow golden-fulvous scales, spotted

and striped with pale yellowish; rostrum as long as the body ;

antenne ferruginous ; joints of the funicle gradually shorter

from the first; prothorax conical, slightly rounded at the sides,

two pale yellowish stripes gradually diverging posteriorly,

and faint traces of an intermediate one, with one spot on each

side at the base; scutellum transverse; elytra cordate, with

very narrow glossy black striz, a scutellar spot, five smallcr

ones on each, and suture posteriorly pale yellowish; body

beneath with yellowish-grey scales; second, third, and fourth

abdominal segments gradually shorter; femora thinly scaled,

each strongly toothed beneath ; tibize and tarsi ferruginous.

Narrower than the last, and, dnter alia, differently coloured.

Balaninus cinereus.

B, ovatus, squamulis cinereis fere omnino tectus ; antennis fusco-

ferrugineis ; elytris magis elongatis, cordatis; femoribus infra

dente parvo instructis. Long. 23-3 lin.

Hab. Tondano, Macassar.

Ovate, closely covered with pale ashy narrow scales ;

rostrum nearly as long as the body; antenne brown; first

joint of the funicle a little shorter than the next two together,

the remainder gradually shorter; prothorax contracted an-

teriorly, well rounded at the sides, and slightly bisinuate at

the base; scutellum punctiform; elytra somewhat elongate-

cordate, flattish at the base, with narrow glossy black strie ;

second abdominal segment shorter than the next two together;

femora with a small tooth beneath.

In form like B. nucum, but at once distinguished by its

colour.

Balaninus cuneipennis.

B. subellipticus, supra silaceo-squamosus, ferrugineus ; elytris cum

pygidio cuneiformibus ; femoribus infra dente majusculo instrue-

tis. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. TYondano.

Se 4 oe

7) a ee

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Curculionidae. 93

Elliptic, covered above with light yellowish-brown approxi-

mate scales; rostrum not longer than the elytra; antenne

ferruginous ; first joint of the funicle as long as the two next

together, these two equal; prothorax subconical, slightly

rounded at the sides ; scutellum punctiform ; elytra, with the

pygidium, wedge-shaped, with narrow black strie ; body

beneath with paler scales; femora strongly toothed; second

abdominal segment much shorter than either the third or

fourth, its union with the first by a nearly obliterated suture.

This species has an unusual outline, owing to the gradual

narrowing of the elytra towards the pygidium; the short

second sexment of the abdomen is a very remarkable character;

it may be sexual.

Balaninus productus.

B. ellipticus, sparse albo-squamosus; scutello niveo ; rostro longis-

simo, bene arcuato ; Buses fusco-ferrugineis ; femoribus dente

acuto armatis. Long 23 lin.

Hab. Siam.

Elliptic, black, with white hair-like scattered scales ; scutel-

lum snowy white; rostrum much longer than the body and

strongly curved ; antenne brownish ferruginous, first joint of

the funicle much shorter than the two next together ; pro-

thorax subconic, rather broad at the apex, closely punctured,

the sides rounded; elytra cordate, striate, the interstices

slightly convex; legs and body beneath with scales nearly

similar to those above, but the side of the mesosternum and

of the two basal segments of the abdomen closely covered with

white ordinary rounded scales; femora with a sharp tooth

beneath.

In my specimen the antenne are inserted at less than a

third from the base of the rostrum, a character probably less

remarkable in the male. Of these Balanini the last four

species are not likely to be confounded with any others, though

B. luctuosus has several congeners with a somewhat similar

coloration ; but, as far as I have noticed, the second joint of

the funicle longer than the first should be distinctive.

Ctonus obesus.

©. nitide niger, parce squamosus; elytris amplissimis, interstitiis

alternis elevatioribus, maculis fulvo-squamosis notatis, striis rude

punctatis. Long. 24 lin.

Hab. Madras.

Glossy black, with a few scattered fulvous scales, more

numerous on the head and prothorax; antenne brown, club

94 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Curculionide.

as long as the last four joints together ; prothorax with some

of the scales forming small loose tufts; scutellum oblong ;

elytra very broad, striate-punctate, alternate interstices raised

and dotted at long intervals with compact fulvous tufts ; strie

coarsely punctate; first and second abdominal segments de-

pressed, their suture indistinct.

Larger than C. verbasct, with broader elytra. ‘The club is

unusually large, and is as long as the funicle without the basal

joint.

Nanophyes finitus.

N. ampliatus, fulvus, nitidus, sat parce pubescens ; elytris obsolete

striatis, pube in maculis oblongis condensatis ; clava antennarum

articuloque ultimo tarsorum apice nigris. Long. 14 lin.

Hab. Sarawak.

Glossy fulvous, sparsely pubescent, elytra obsoletely stria-

ted ; rostrum finely ribbed, mandibles brown; antenne ful-

vous, apical half of the club black ; eyes nearly contiguous ;

prothorax conical, equally pubescent ; elytra obsoletely stri-

ate, an oblong patch at the base and three or four at the sides,

of condensed pubescence; body beneath and legs pale ful-

vous; all the femora with three or four slender spines beneath.

My unique specimen, probably a male, has clearly six

joints to the funicle; the seventh may be closely united to

the club. In what I take to be N. nigritulus of Boheman

(but my example is from Macassar) I should, in any other

case, have described the funicle as seven-jointed, the two

joints in question being perfectly distinct, although much

larger than the others. In departing from the normal condi-

tion nature is often very unsteady.

Nanophyes concretus.

N. ampliatus, niger, nitidus, pube grisea laxe tectus; scapo anten-

narum rostroque ferrugineis ; elytris latis, tenuiter striatis, inter-

stitiis planatis. Long. 13 lin.

Hab. Macassar.

Broad, glossy black, with a loose greyish pubescence ; ros-

trum and scape ferruginous; femora at the base and basal

third of the tibiz pale yellowish; antenne, except the scape,

glossy black ; funicle of six joints, club apparently of four ;

rothorax short, conical ; elytra a little longer only than the

breadth, slightly convex, finely striate, the interstices broad

and flat; legs pubescent ; femora with one long spine beneath

and two or three much smaller ones.

This species has also a six-jointed funicle, the basal joint of

Mr. I. P. Pascoe on new Curculionidee. 95

the club being probably the seventh ; otherwise the latter has

four joints, the last, however, not being quite so distinct as

the three preceding. In this species the femora at about a

quarter their length from the base are so constricted as to

appear to be composed of two parts. ‘The same peculiarity

may be noticed in some European species, e. g. N. séculus,

globulus, posticus, &e.

Nanophyes tarsalis.

N. ovatus, niger, nitidus, pube grisea sparse tectus; rostro nigro ;

scapo fulvo ; elytris modice elongatis, striatis, interstitiis convexis.

Long. 13 lin.

Hab. Bourou.

A narrow species with a black rostrum, the elytra with

coarser strize and narrower and convex interstices ; the legs,

and especially the tarsi, considerably longer; there is the

same peculiarity of antenna and femora; and the restrum, as

in the two preceding, is bicanaliculate anteriorly.

These three species of Nanophyes, and some other forms

here described, were collected by Mr. Wallace some twenty-

five years ago. Recent collectors appear to care little for

“small game,” whilst this distinguished naturalist neglected

nothing, however insignificant to the ordinary collector*.

BYRSIA.

Rostrum tenuatum, arcuatum, fere denudatum; screbes maris medi-

an, femine basi propria, laterales. Ocul: rotundati. Antenne

graciles ; scapus clavatus ; funiculus longiusculus, articulo primo

longtore et crassiore ; clava distincta, breviter ovata. Prothorax

transversus, antice breviter constrictus, lateribus ampliato-rotun-

datis, basi subsinuatus. Scutellum distinctum. EHlytra subcor-

data, prothorace basi latiora. Pectus excavatum. Cow anticie

contigue. Mesosternum angustum, declive. Abdomen segmentis

duobus basalibus amphatis, sutura in medio obsoleta. Processus

interfemoralis latus, truncatus. Pedes normales; femora mutica ;

unguiculi liberi.

In Lacordaire’s arrangement this genus would stand near

Colobodes, unless he placed it as an exception elsewhere—

perhaps by Lrirhinus. ‘he excavated pectus blocked be-

hind by the contiguity of the anterior coxe is a character that

is found in some of the Ithyporine. ‘The species described

below is closely covered with waxy-looking scales.

* Mr. Wallace’s collection from the Malay:archipelago, now in my

possession, amounted to about 900 species, few of which were previously

known. Many of these are described and figured in the Journal of the

Linnean Society (Zoology, vols. x., xi., and xii.) and in these ‘ Annals,’

96 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Curculionide.

Byrsia cerata.

B. ovata, castanea, squamulis stramineis vel albidis omnino dense

vestita ; elytris in medio macula infuscata notatis ; rostro nitide

eastaneo. Long. 23 lin.

Hab. Queensland.

Ovate, chestnut-brown, everywhere, except the rostrum,

covered with straw-coloured or whitish scales; each elytron in

the middle with a (more or less) brownish spot; rostrum

glossy chestnut, with a few scales only at the base; antenne

ferruginous, the funicle with the first joint clavate and longer

than the second; prothorax convex, full and rounded at the

sides, a well-defined depression at the base; scutellum roun-

ded behind; elytra moderately convex, rather gibbous at the

shoulders ; the strize apparently nearly obsolete ; beneath and

legs densely scaled.

ACACALLIS.

Rostrum breviusculum, rectum, depressum ; scrobes mediane, late-

rales. Oculi subrotundati, infra angulati. Antenne breviuscule ;

scapus versum apicem gradatim incrassatus ; funiculus articulo

primo ampliato; clava majuscula. Prothorax transversus, antice ©

subito contractus, basi truncatus. Scutellum parvum. Elytra

modice convexa, prothorace haud latiora. ima pectoralis,

pone coxas anteriores terminata, apice aperta. Abdomen seg-

mentis duobus basalibus ampliatis; processus interfemoralis apice

acuta. Femora et tibie compresse, illa infra canaliculata, anteri-

ora majora ; tarsi? modice elongati ; wngwiculi liberi.

The straight depressed rostrum, canaliculate femora, and

the truncate base of the prothorax are, singly or together,

characters which differentiate this genus from Orochlesis,

Niconotus, Sympedius, and others belonging to the same

group. The pattern on the base has a resemblance to the

face of some animal.

Acacallis personata.

A. lata, lateribus parallela, fusca, pallide griseo-variegata ; antennis

ferrugineis ; pedibus parce squamosis, anterioribus multo majori-

bus. Long. 2 lin,

Hab. Queensland.

Broad, moderately convex, parallel at the sides ; prothorax,

except a little at the base, a triangular patch on the suture

(not extending much beyond the middle), and apical margin

pale greyish with a slight pinkish tint; rest of the elytra,

including an oblong spot on each side of the triangle at the

base, chocolate-brown ; antenne ferruginous, first and second

Mr, F. P. Pascoe on new Curculionide. 97

joints equal in length ; prothorax very transverse, the ante-

rior half almost abruptly rounded and ending in a short

tubular apex ; scutellum round; elytral strize covered by the

scales ; legs pitchy, with a few scattered scales.

MIOCALLES.

Rostro latiusculo vel depresso et prothorace apice producto, caput

oceultante ab Acalle differt.

Acalles as it now stands is a collection of genera, and defies

definition, although Lacordaire hesitated to separate it from

Tylodes. ‘The two characters given above, however, are

foreign to all the typical members of the genus. ‘lhe type is

a prettily marked little species, which is not true, as its name

implies, of any Acalles.

Miocalles notatus.

M. ovatus, griseo- et fusco-squamosus, supra pedibusque spinulis

erectis fuscis ; elytris basi maculis elongatis albis ornatis. Long.

it in.

Hab. Aru, Mysol.

Ovate, covered with grey and brown scales, the prothorax,

elytra, and legs with dark brown erect squamiform spines ;

the rostrum, antennee, middle of the prothorax, and two linear

spots at the base of the elytra white, a band behind the middle

paler ; prothorax longer than broad, rather gibbous in the

middle, and slightly grooved; elytra striate-punctate, the

second interstice elevated and carrying the white scales at the

base, and followed by dark brown scales as far as the band ;

body beneath black, with fewer scales.

In the specimen from Mysol the white is replaced by

greyish.

DIPHILUS.

Rostrum breve, latum, depressum, fere rectum ; scrobes mediane,

laterales. Oculi ovati, grosse granulati. Antenne crassiuscule,

funiculus articulis duobus basalibus equalibus; clava distincta.

Prothorax apice productus, lateribus subcarinatis. Scutellum

parvum. Hlytra convexa, prothorace haud latiora. ima pec-

toralis pone coxas anteriores terminata, apice cavernosa, Veta-

sternum breviusculum. Abdomen segmentis basalibus ampliatis,

sutura arcuata separatis. Femora et thie compress, ila mu-

tica, et infra canaliculata ; tarsi articulis duobus basalibus parvulis,

angustis, tertio fortiter bilobo; wngwiculi liberi. Corpus haud

setosum.

Among the well-known forms of Cryptorhynchine this

98 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Curculionide.

genus may perhaps be best compared in superticial resem-

blance to Euthyrhinus, to which, however, except as a member

of the same subfamily, it cannot be said to be allied. The pro-

thoracic ridge is formed by an abrupt deflection at the sides

posteriorly. The scales overlap one another as in a fish.

Diphilus squamosus.

D, ellipticus, griseo-squamosus, prothorace in medio lineis duabus

fuscis, postice divergentibus ; antennis ferrugineis. Long. 33 lin.

Hab. Siam.

Elliptic, covered with greyish overlapping scales; two dark

brown stripes, beginning at the apex of the prothorax, diver-

ging towards the base ; antenne ferruginous ; scape gradually

thicker from the base, the two basal joints of the funicle equal

in length, the remainder very transverse, club as long as the

last five joints together; prothorax transverse, narrowed and

slightly bilobed at the apex, then incurved and rounded to the

base, two dark brown stripes, nearly contiguous anteriorly, but

gradually diverging behind; scutellum black, not scaly, in-

conspicuous; elytra convex behind the base, roughly striate-

punctate, obtusely apiculate, ridged at the suture posteriorly ; -

interstices more or less tuberculate ; the two basal segments

of the abdomen with approximate scales, the posterior angu-

larly dilated on the outer edge.

Dipaltosternus Fairmairet.

D. late ovatus, crassus, squamulis griseis fuscisque dense tectus ;

elytris striatis, antice impunctatis ; tibiis intermediis dente valido

in medio extrorsum armatis. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. Fiji.

Broadly ovate, stout, closely covered with grey and brown

scales, the latter in indefinite spots and patches; rostrum

pitchy at the apex; antenna glossy ferruginous, second joint

of the funicle longer than the first, the rest transverse ; pro-

thorax feebly bilobed at the apex, the disk somewhat irregular

and with four small tufts of erect brown scales; scutellum

distinct; elytra slightly broader than the prothorax at the

base, the shoulders rather angular, striate, striae narrow, im-

punctate at the base, but with shallow punctures or impres-

sions posteriorly; body beneath glossy black, with small

scattered scales ; fore tibize longest, straight, the intermediate

with a prominent tooth at the middle externally.

If I am right in referring this species to M. Fairmaire’s

genus, it differs from his D. insidiator in the absence of

granules and tubercles on the elytra, and in their nearly im-

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Curculionide. 99

punctate strie (which, however, are almost hidden by the

scales) and other characters. M. Fairmaire compares it to

Psepholax ; but its deep pectoral canal, boanded behind by

the mesosternum, and its well-marked metasternal episterna

would, in Lacordaire’s arrangement, place it near Oreda.

OSACES.

Rostrum crassum, breve, arcuatum, apicem versus gradatim latius ;

scrobes subapicales, laterales. Oculi rotundati, grosse granulati.

Antenne crassiuscule ; funiculus articulis duobus basalibus eequali-

bus. Prothorav normalis, basi subtruncatus. Scutellwm parvum.

Elytra modice convexa, prothorace paulo latiora. Rima pec-

toralis pone coxas anteriores terminata, apice aperta. Metaster-

num perbreve. Abdomen segmento secundo modice ampliato, a

primo sutura recta separato. /emora compressa, infra canalicu-

lata; ébice breves, striate ; tarsi paulo dilatati ; wnguicule liberi.

Corpus modice convexum.

This genus is represented by a species closely resembling

the Mexican Memactes ruficornis, but which differs, dcnter

alia, in not having the femora grooved beneath nor the tibie

striated. The body is naked except a solitary scale in many

of the punctures.

Osaces naso.

O. ellipticus, niger, subnitidus ; antennis ferrugineis; rostro grosse,

capite gradatim sat vage et leviter punctatis. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Port Bowen.

Elliptic, black, and slightly glossy; antenne: ferruginous,

first two joints of the funicle equal, the remainder transverse,

club ovate, distinct ; rostrum coarsely punctate, the punctures

gradually decreasing in size and proximity on the head; pro-

thorax not longer than broad, rounded at the sides, closely

and coarsely punctate ; elytra substriate-punctate, punctures

very large, the interstices with small punctures; body beneath

and legs pitchy brown, with small approximate punctures ;

anterior femora with the groove disappearing beyond themiddle;

striz on the tibiz closely punctate.

Telephae propola.

7. anguste ovata, nigra, pilis albidis sat parce vestita; antennis

pedibusque ferrugineis; prothorace yix latiore quam longiore,

Long. 1 lin.

Hab. Sarawak.

Narrowly ovate, black, with somewhat dispersed whitish

hairs; antenne and legs ferruginous; prothorax scarcely

100 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Curculionide.

broader than long, closely punctate ; elytra striate, hairs more

numerous at the base, middle, and apex, the two interspaces

band-like ; anterior femora very large, the tooth greatly pro-

duced.

This species is much narrower than any of its congeners.

Asytesta antica.

A, ovata, fusco-niger, opaca ; prothorace antice albo; rostro in me-

dio leviter punctato ; elytris rugosis, granulatis. Long. 2? lin.

Hab. Kaioa.

Ovate, dull brownish black; rostrum slightly curved, the

lower half with small sparse punctures ; antenne rather dull

ferruginous ; prothorax finely punctured, anterior portion,

except at the apex, covered with white or greyish scales,

extending to the sides; elytra seriate-punctate, interstices

granulate, the third raised, especially at the base ; body be-

neath and legs with scatter ed white scales,

In the genus Asytesta the intermediate and, to a much

greater degree, the posterior coxe are widely apatt ; the first

abdominal segment is as large as the rest together, overlapping

and nearly hiding the second. The mesosternum is so short

that the anterior and intermediate coxe are nearly contiguous

on each side. ‘The species described above is easily recogni-

zable by the white band on the prothorax.

Acythopeus luxatus.

A, subovatus, niger, subnitidus; prothorace macula utrinque ely-

trisque vittis duabus ochraceis squamosis notatis. Long. 2 lin.

Hab. Labuan.

Subovate, black, slightly glossy ; prothorax on each side

with an oblong spot and the elytra with the third interstice,

except at the apex, covered with ochre-yellow scales ; rostr um

roughly punctate; antenne pitchy; prothorax transverse,

subquadrate, closely punctate; pectus, spots on the sternum

and sides of the abdomen ochre-yellow.

The species is differentiated by its shorter elytra as well as

by its ochreous spots and stripes.

Eugnoristus niger.

E. elongatus, glaber, niger, subnitidus ; prothorace elongato, elytris

latiore, subtiliter confertim punctulato. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. Madagascar.

Elongate, smooth, black, slightly glossy ; rostrum slender,

not longer than the prothorax i in the female ; antenne slender,

the basal joint not longer than the three next together; pro-

a sae Bt

On Lepidoptera from the Victoria Nyanza. 101

thorax much longer than broad, closely and finely punctate ;

scutellum narrowly triangular; elytra wedge-shaped, narrower

than the middle of the prothorax and about a third longer,

striate-punctate, the punctures approximate; body beneath

finely punctate, except the last three abdominal segments ;

legs glossy black.

Form, colour, and absence of scales will at once distinguish

this species from its only congener, Z. monachus, Ol.

XII.—On some Lepidoptera from the Victoria Nyanza.

By Artuur G. Butter, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.

In a small collection recently made by the Rev. James Han-

nington, I find not a few species of great interest ; amongst

those already known to science may be mentioned Salatura

dorippus, both with and without an oblique subapical series

of small white spots across the under surface of the primaries ;

a worn example of Charaxes saturnus, specimens of which

species we have from the Zambesi, the Congo, and Delagoa

Bay ; Junonia micromera, acommon Abyssinian species ; the

Southern J. cloantha and J. pelasgis ; a splendid male of Crenis

rosa, the female of which was described from Delagoa Bay ;

Acrea neobule; Acrea acara; Ypthima simplicia of Abyssinia;

Myrina pallene, described from Caffraria ; Aphneus natalen-

sis; Teracolus hetera??; T. castag, T. maimuna, agreeing

with examples from Angola; Papilio corineus; Ismene an-

chises; and a Saturnia®* very near to S. dyops of Natal.

It will therefore be seen that there is in this collection a

decidedly South-African element—a fact even more strongly

brought out by the affinity of the new species to Southern

forms.

RHOPALOCERA.,

1. Ypthima granulosa, sp. n.

Above similar to Y. sémplicia, excepting that the wings

are more rounded and the ocellus on the primaries is smaller

and narrower; smoky grey, the primaries paler towards apex

and with a well-defined arched darker submarginal stripe, a

* The specimen is in bad condition and completely disguised, the pat-

tern of one wing being printed off upon the other; the ocelli on the

under surface of primaries upon the costal border of secondaries above,

as well as part of the discal band beyond them.

102 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

small oval bipupillated black ocellus with stramineous iris and

dusky zone. Wings below quite different from Y. s¢mplicta,

the general tint being a pale granite-grey colour densely

mottled with olivaceous grey ; the primaries, however, except-

ing towards the apex, are suffused with smoky grey, the ocellus

is a little larger than above; on the secondaries there are four

widely separated minute oval ocelli (only visible with a lens,

though perfectly formed), two towards apex and two towards

anal angle. Expanse of wings 34 millim.

Victoria Nyanza.

2. Hypolimnas alcippoides, sp. n.

Nearly allied to H. mzsippus (both sexes of which we have

from Sierra Leone and Madagascar), but with the inner or

abdominal margin of the secondaries in both sexes longer ;

these wings in the female with the whole of the disk snow-

white, as in Salatura aleippus. Expanse of wings, ¢ 76

millim., 2 74 millim.

Victoria Nyanza.

A second form of female, which although differing somewhat

from H. ‘narva must, I think, be a small race of that species,

cecurs also in the same locality.

This is another instance of a Lepidopterous insect scarcely

distinguishable in the male sex from its nearest ally, whereas

the female can be separated at a glance; there is little doubt

that eventually the male will have inherited enough of the

characters acquired for the protection of the female to be more

readily distinguished, as in the case of the various local races

of Papilio merope, the males of which, though very similar,

do differ in pattern. In the present instance, where the colour-

ing of Salatura chrysippus has been exchanged for that of S.

alcippus in the female, that of the male still remains in its

normal state.

3. Telchinia nero, sp. n.

9. Pale smoky brown above, the wings with black borders

a little broader than in 7. oncea, the apex of the primaries

being especially broadly bordered; numerous black spots

arranged exactly as in J. oncea; secondaries with a sub-

marginal band, trom the radial to the submedian vein, of four

snow-white quadrate spots, only separated by the nervures.

Under surface like 7. oncea. Expanse of wings 52 millim.

Victoria Nyanza.

4, Telchinia perrupta, sp. n.

Allied to 7. manjaca of Madagascar, but the male differing

from the Victoria Nyanza. 103

(as T. Buxtoni from T. eponina) in the abbreviation of

the subapical band to a mere spot or irregular dash across

the discocellulars ; the female also differs im the same cha-

racter and also in having the subapical oblique patch white

instead of tawny. Expanse of wings 47-53 millim.

Victoria Nyanza.

The marginal tawny spots are well defined in both sexes

as in 7. manjaca, unlike those of 7. Buxtont.

5. Acrea arcticincta, sp. n.

Nearly allied to A. anemosa, from the Zambesi and Natal,

from which it differs in having the black external border of

the secondaries of only half the width, as in A. acara. Ex-

panse of wings 64 millim. -

Victoria Nyanza.

6. Alena interposita, sp. n.

Nearest to A. nyasse, but in some respects more like A.

amazoula. Primaries above smoky grey, with two spots in

the cell and an increasing angulated belt from the costa just

beyond the cell to the centre of inner margin white; veins

black ; fringe spotted with white: secondaries grey, spotted

with white towards the base, and with two series of pale spots

on the external area, the disk occupied by a broad irregular

white patch; veins on the grey areas black; body blackish.

Wings below cream-coloured, the discoidal area of primaries,

basal area of secondaries, and external areas of all the wings

reticulated with black ; the subapical area of primaries and

centre of secondaries pale sandy yellowish; legs yellowish ;

venter whitish banded with black. Expanse of wings 31

millim.

Victoria Nyanza.

7. Teracolus aurigineus, sp. n.

Nearest in colouring to 7. gaudens from Abyssinia, but

intermediate between 7. vesta and 7. Hewitsont. Wings

above brilliant golden orange (or cadmium-yellow), with the

veins and external borders black ; a marginal series of orange

dots which, towards the apex of primaries, are elongated into

narrow dashes; fringe whitish: primaries with basal fourth

creamy whitish, suffused at the base with pale bluish grey ;

costa blackish; a large black transverse spot closing the cell ;

the usual bisinuated black discal stripe from costa to inner

margin : secondaries with the discal stripe reduced to an angu-

lated series of sagittate spots, punctiform in the male, but

large and subconfluent in the temale; body blackish, thorax

104 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera

clothed with grey hairs. Under surface only differing from

T. Hewitsoni in the less diffused and brown markings across

the secondaries. Hxpanse of wings, ¢ ¢ 44 millim.

Victoria Nyanza.

This is a very beautiful and most interesting link between

the 7. vesta and 7. chrysonome groups ; as it retains the discal

stripe (although in a somewhat interrupted form) across the

secondaries 1t must be placed between 7’. catachrysops and T.

Hewitsoni, the order of the species being :—1. T. amelia; 2. T.

mutans; 3. T. argillaceus; 4. T. velleda; 5. T. vesta; 6. T.

catachrysops; 7. T. aurigineus; 8. T. Hewitsoni; 9. T.

gaudens; 10. 7. chrysonome. With the exception of the

Abyssinian 7. velleda we possess all these species in the

Museum.

The following species is still more interesting, since it

supplies a link long wanting between the 7. cyprea and 7.

vesta groups; I have great pleasure in naming it after its

discoverer.

8. Teracolus Hanningtoni, sp. n.

9g. A little smaller than 7. vesta: white, slightly tinted

with sulphur on the upper surface ; both in pattern and colo-

ration above greatly resembling the white female of the

Ceylonese J. modestus, though much larger; a careful com-

parison, however, shows that in detail the pattern corresponds

more nearly with that of 7. mutans; the spots upon the

broad black border ef primaries, however, are almost wholly

obliterated, and the arched decreasing series across the disk 1s

composed of spots as small as in the male of 7. mutans (7. e.

rather larger than in Z. amelia). The under surface is most

like 7. vesta, but very different, the wings being bright sul-

phur-yellow, the primaries with the basal two fitths suffused

with orange ; a small black spot at the end of the cell; exter-

nal border blackish brown, olivaceous at apex, interrupted by

two series of sulphur-yellow spots, the inner series interrupted

and angulated, the outer series straight, decreasing ; the usual

spot connected with the border on the interno-median area:

secondaries with the basiabdominal area sprinkled with

orange scales; veins brown, a slender irregular oblique cho-

colate-brown line across the basal third ; external half choco-

late-brown, crossed by two series ot large sulphur-yellow spots,

one discal, the other marginal: body below white. Expanse

of wings 44 millim.

Victoria Nyanza.

T. Hanningtont must be placed between 7. intermissus and

T’. amelva.

ee A ane

—

from the Victoria Nyanza. 105

9. Teracolus miles, sp. n.

3. Above almost exactly like the male of 7. dirus from

Kurrachee; but the base much less grey and the marginal

spots smaller than in the type of that species*; no spots on

the disk of secondaries above. Under surface milk-white ;

wings with black longitudinal dashes at the extremities of the

veins ; an irregularly arched discal series of black spots across

the disk of the wings, the first five spots of primaries being

placed upon a brick-red nebula and the fourth of secondaries

divided in the centre, where there is an orange dot; disco-

cellular spots black, those of secondaries with an orange centre ;

apical area of primaries cream-coloured ;' edge of costal mar-

gin of secondaries towards the base tinted with saffron-yellow :

body below white. Expanse of wings 49 millim.

Victoria Nyanza.

This species must be placed between TJ. eupompe and T.

dirus.

10. Teracolus subvenosus, sp. n.

Nearly allied to 7. gavisa of Wallengren, from South

Africa, but the male above nearly as in 7. hero, the orange-

red area of primaries broader at its lower extremity, not black-

edged internally ; the black marginal spots of secondaries

large and confluent; internal streak of primaries and base of

secondaries grey, diffused, nearly as in T. herot. Wings

below exactly as in 7. gavisa; the female above with the

subapical oblique black stripe broad, as in 7. hero 3, but the

spots between it and the border small and bright orange; the

interno-central area of secondaries paler than in either 7. gavisa

or J. hero: under surface as in 7. gavisa, but brighter in

colour. Expanse of wings, ¢ 2 48 millim.

Victoria Nyanza.

11. Teracolus cinctus, sp. n.

3. Allied to 7. interruptus. Upper surface milk-white,

external border rather broadly black with dentate-sinuate

Inner edge: primaries with the costal margin narrowly edged

with black; base and a clavate internal streak grey ; a black

dot at the end of the cell; apical two fifths bright orange,

bounded internally by an oblique narrow black stripe and

externally by the black border, and crossed by slender black

veins: secondaries with the base grey. Primaries below white ;

* See P. Z. S. 1876, pl. vii. fig. 12 ¢.

t+ P.Z. 8. 1876, pl. vi. fig. 12 (numbered incorrectly 11).

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 8

106 On Lepidoptera from the Vietoria Nyanza.

the apical area broadly sulphur-yellow, suffused internally

with orange; a black dot at the end of the cell; a conspicu-

ous interno-median black spot corresponding with the clava

to the internal streak of the upper surface: secondaries white,

tinted with sulphur, basal third of costal margin bright orange 5

a small black and orange discocellular spot ; a black-speckled

yellow costal spot and three similar spots on the disk (on the

interno-median, second median, and radial interspaces) ; veins

of all the wings terminating in black marginal dots. Kxpanse

of wings 28-42 millim.

Victoria Nyanza.

12. Papilio lurlinus, sp. n.

g. Nearly allied to P. antheus; pale emerald-green and

black above, paler green, bronze-brown, black, and grey

below, one or two carmine markings on both surfaces. It

differs from P. antheus in the greater width of all the green

markings on both surfaces, the irregular bands across the ceil

of primaries and the submarginal spots on all the wings being

of about double the width ; the greyish submarginal streaks

on the secondaries are also distinctly wider; the carmine spot

at the extremity of the abdominal fold is reduced to a mere

dash at the extremity of a longitudinal fusiform white streak ;

the borders of the primaries below are more distinctly spotted

with black; the black spots across the disk of secondaries are

decidedly smaller; the black spot above the cell is more elon-

gated transversely and has a narrower carmine border; and

the carmine spot in the cell is almost wholly replaced by a

larger black spot. Expanse of wings 101 millim.

Victoria Nyanza.

This insect is nearly as large as the female of P. antheus.

Its natural position is between P. antheus and P. nyasse.

HETEROCERA.

13. Hypercompa tigris, sp. n.

Allied to H. bellatrix and H. Thelwalli; most like the

former, but the primaries of a paler yellow colour, with all

the plumbaginous bands narrower, the second from the base

arched, and the fourth much less distinctly angulated: secon-

daries with no band across the basal area, and the other

markings narrower. Expanse of wings 69 millim.

Victoria Nyanza.

14. Copaxa Hanningtont, sp. n.

Creamy sulphur-yellow ; primaries above with a small dull

Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species of Milionia. 107

plum-coloured rounded spot with greyish pupil at the end of

the cell, followed by an irregularly sinuated slender ferrugi-

nous line across the centre of the wing; a second broader

straight line runs obliquely across the disk from the inner

margin to near the apex: secondaries with indications of a

brown line from the abdominal margin to about the centre of

the disk, where it entirely disappears: face and front of ante-

rior legs plum-coloured; antenne red-brown. Primaries

below with the ocellus smaller than above, but with a larger

and whiter pupil; the inner sinuated line obsolete ; the discal

line on the secondaries more distinct than above: body below

whiter. Expanse of wings 88 millim.

Victoria Nyanza.

Allied to C. flavinata.

XI1.—Descriptions of two new Species of Milionia, a Genus

of the Lepidopterous Family Euschemide. By ArtuuR G.

Bur er, F.L.8., F.Z.8., &e.

THE two following species were recently obtained. Although

allied forms and of opposite sexes, they differ, in my opinion,

far too much to admit of their being sexes of the same spe-

cies. Unfortunately we have no more exact locality than

“Celebes ;” and therefore the probability that they occur in

different islands of the Celebes sea, or, at any rate, come from

different parts of the large island, must remain for the present

unestablished.

Milionia Drucet, sp. n.

6. Wings above velvety black, shot with deep ultramarine

blue; a large spot of cobalt-blue close to the base of the

primaries ; these wings are also crossed in the middle by a

broad and tolerably regular deep-orange belt, which changes

to vivid scarlet below the internervular fold of the interno-

median area; secondaries crossed in the middle by a vivid

scarlet belt : body purplish ; the head, collar, tegule, and sides

of abdomen spotted with emerald-green. Wings below greyer

than above, excepting towards the base, where they are suf-

fused with brilliant ultramarine and broadly streaked with

emerald-green ; belts as above: body ash-grey varied with

blackish ; legs streaked with green; anal tuft pale strami-

neous above, blackish below. IHxpanse of wings 70 millim.

Celebes.

108 Dr. H. Dewitz on Rudimentary

I have much pleasure in dedicating this beautiful species to

my friend Mr. Herbert Druce. That gentleman kindly re-

minded me of the fact that Walker had described a species of

this group from Mr. Saunders’s collection. Upon looking up

the description of Walker’s MW. eyanedfera from Batchian and

Ceram, hitherto undetermined by me, I find that it answers

admirably to Cramer’s species M. glauca. It is extremely

probable that Walker would describe the latter species in his

Supplement, since in his Catalogue he identified M. lativitta

and M. zonea of Moore as opposite sexes of Cramer’s species,

and spoke of the typical J/. glauca as var. 8, suggesting that

it might be a distinct species.

Milionia Snellen, sp. n.

@. Less brilliant in colour than the preceding ; primaries

with the subbasal spot larger, more diffused, and bright ultra-

marine blue, the belt across the wings much further from the

base, arched, wider, cadmium-yellow, sprinkled at its inferior

extremity with vermilion scales ; secondaries with the belt

much wider, much nearer to the outer margin, its inner edge

widely waved or subsigmoidal, colour vermilion ; basal area

below narrowly streaked with bright blue. Hxpanse of wings

70 millim.

Celebes.

This is not at all likely to be the female of MZ. Drucez, since

the species of this genus are unquestionably alike in the sexes,

whereas these two differ far more than some of the known

species. M. Drucet, in the banding of the primaries, ap-

proaches MW. requina, Quoy (=. optima, Walker, = M1. flam-

mata, Vollenh.), whereas JZ. Snedlent has a band more nearly

resembling that of J. glauca, though broader and more arched.

J have named this species after Herr Snellen, the author of a

long paper on the Lepidoptera of Celebes in the ‘ Tijdschrift

voor Entomologie,’ 1878-81.

XIV.— On Rudimentary Wings in the Coleoptera.

By Dr. H. Dewitz*.

THE hind wings of the Coleoptera show us most distinctly

how an organ may gradually become aborted by disuse, and

how. a transformation of the whole habit of the animal may

* Translated by W.S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘Zoologischer Anzei-

ger, no, 141, June 18, 18838, p. 315.

Wings in the Coleoptera. 109

be connected with this. The membranous hind wings of

beetles, which serve for flight, lie, as is well known, concealed

beneath the firm horny fore wings, the so-called elytra. For

the purpose of flight the elytra are raised and the folded hind

wings extended, so as often to exceed the former in length.

But many beetles do not fly at all. In these we find the

hind wings more or less aborted or entirely deficient. This

phenomenon occurs with especial frequency among the Cara-

bide, Melasomata, and Curculionide, and also, although less

frequently, among the Ptinide.

Thus, for example, while in Melolontha vulgaris, Fab., the

length of the body without the antenne amounts to 0°03,

that of the fore wing to 0:02, and that of the hind wing to

0°03 metre, these measurements in Pterostichus vulgaris,

Linn., are as 0°017: 0°01: 0°004, and in Niptus hololeucus,

Cam., as 0-004: 0:0025:0-000. The last two species do

not fly at all, as the hind wings are either so small that they

cannot support the body or entirely wanting.

As the wings are already indicated in the larva, I was in-

clined to think that, in one or other of the species entirely

destitute of wings, traces of these organs would occur, at least

in the larval or the pupal stage. For four years my labours

were in vain, and it is only quite recently that I succeeded in

demonstrating the rudimentary hind wings in the larve and

pupe of Niptus hololeucus, Cam., in which both sexes are

apterous, 2. ¢. destitute of hind wings.

This pretty little beetle has come to us from Asia Minor,

and occurs frequently in Berlin in houses from July to Sep-

tember. It likes to conceal itself among linen and woollen

stuffs. M. Kliger, who was kind enough to furnish me with

material, found the perfect beetle every year in a linen-press

among the accumulated linen. M. Wachtler, a merchant

here, to whom I am also indebted for a great number of the

animals, found them in bales of stuffs. He thinks that they

seek these hiding-places, not to lay their eggs there, but to

protect themselves from the cold; he did not observe even the

smallest quantity of frass upon the stuffs.

After several unsuccessful attempts, I succeeded in rearing

the beetles in bran. For this purpose I placed the animals,

in the autumn, in a vessel filled with bran. Here they

deposited their eggs; and at the end of March the larva

were full-grown. They are 0:006 metre long, white with a

few scattered brown hairs, and have the form of the grub of

the cockchafer.

The rudiments of the fore wings appear in the half-grown

larva, on the two sides of the mesothorax, as crescentiform

110 Dr. H. Dewitz on Rudimentary

thickenings of the hypodermis ; in the full-grown larva the

wing appears as a crescentiform lobe standing free from the

hypodermis and between that and the chitinous membrane.

The wing-rudiments grow directly outwards, and do not le,

as in the Lepidoptera and Phryganeide, in sac-like diver-

ticula. As these wing-lobes are placed under the chitinous

membrane until the passage to the pupa state, it follows that,

after the appearance of the wing during the larval existence,

no ecdysis takes place. Of the hind wings no trace is to be

seen; the hypodermis on the sides of the third thoracic seg-

ment is just as thin as on the other parts of the body. It is

only when the animal spins up* that a semicircular thicken-

ing of the hypodermis is formed on each side of the third

thoracic segment. As always in the formation of the imaginal

disks, a fracheal and a nervous branchlet run to the spot,

and probably furnish the incitement to the multiplication and

accumulation of the hypodermal cells. Some time after the

spinning-up we find the fore wing as a long flat lobe lying

beneath the old chitinous membrane of the larva, and reaching

down nearly to the legs. It is widened in its basal part, and

pointed at the oppositeend. At this time a halfmoon-shaped

flat lobe has grown out of the thickening on the sides of the

third thoracic segment, agreeing exactly in structure and form

with the earlier formed halfmoon-shaped fore wing of the full-

grown larva.

The old chitinous skin of the larva is thrown off; and the

wings, like the other members, come freely into view after a

new chitinous membrane has been secreted over them as over

the whole body.

In the pupa the fore wing is of considerable length, while

the hind wing lies on the side of the third thoracic segment in

the form of a very minute freely projecting scale. In the

fully developed beetle I could detect no trace of the hind wing ;

and should any thing of the kind be discoverable, it will be at

the utmost a minute chitinous wart, for the production of

which an imaginal disk with trachez and nerves can never

have been necessary.

While the fore wing, therefore, already occurs in the half-

grown larva, the rudiment of the hind wing only shows itself

much later, when the animal is already on the point of termi-

nating the larval stage. ‘That these rudiments of hind wings,

occurring only in the last larval stage of all and in the pupal

* For this purpose a thread is drawn out of a gland situated in the

neighbourhood of the anus, and with this the animal fastens together

small particles of bran,

Wings in the Coleoptera. itt

stage, have no purpose to serve is perfectly clear. We have

therefore to do with an organ which either will at some time

arrive at full development and function, and is consequently

advancing, or which was at an early period well developed

and in use as an organ of flight, and has consequently re-

trograded.

That it is not an advancing organ, but one in course of dis-

appearance, is shown most decidedly by the circumstance that

this, like all retrogressive organs, does not, like those in

full function, increase with the development of the individual,

but, on the contrary, diminishes.

We are therefore justified in assuming that Niptus holo-

leucus once bore well-developed hind wings, and that these

gradually became aborted in consequence of disuse, until they

were finally thrown back into the young stages, and some day

will disappear even from these stages. In other wingless

beetles this period may have already occurred.

While in other cases the hind wings make their appearance

nearly at the same time as the fore wings, we have seen that

the aborted hind wings in Neptus originate much later than

the equivalent organs which attain development, namely the

fore wings. ‘This circumstance seems to show that rudimen-

tary organs are not only thrown back to the younger stages,

but that, in many cases also, the period of their appearance is

much later than with the equivalent well-developed organs.

They are consequently, if | may so express myself, straitened

on two sides. IL do not know whether other rudimentary

organs, such, for example, as the upper incisors of the Rumi-

nants, which never break through, make their appearance much

later than the well-developed lower ones.

This abortion of an organ brings after it other transforma-

tions of the body. Without the hind wings the beetles can-

not fly. It is therefore not necessary for them to be able to

spread out the elytra, the latter rather remain permanently

lying upon the back. What is the consequence? The two

elytra grow together to form a firm dorsal shield, such as we

find in nearly all beetles which are entirely destitute of hind

wings. At the same time the elytra become convex and

bend round at the sides, so that they embrace the abdomen.

In consequence of the disappearance of the wing-muscles, the

thorax becomes altered. ‘lhe body acquires quite a different

form ; new forms are produced which we call species.

112 Mr. E. D. Cope on the Systematic Relations

XV.—On the Systematic Relations of the Carnivora Fissi-

pedia. By HB. D. Corr *.

Tus order embraces the clawed Mammalia with transverse

glenoid cavity of the squamosal bone, confluent scaphoid and

lunar bones of the carpus, and well-developed cerebral hemi-

spheres. It is well distinguished from all others at present

known; but such definition is likely to be invalidated by

future discovery. Some of the Insectivora possess a united

scapholunar bone ; but the reduction of the cerebral hemi-

spheres of such forms distinguishes them. The presence of

the crucial fissure of the hemispheres is present under various

modifications in all Carnivora, while the parieto-occipital and

calcarine fissures are absent.

The many types of existing Carnivora fall into natural

groups which are of the grade termed family in zoology.

But the distinction of these from each other is not easily

accomplished, nor is it easy to express their relations in a

satisfactory manner. ‘The primary suborders of Pinnipedia

and Fissipedia are easily defined. Various characters have

been considered in ascertaining the taxonomy of the more

numerous Fissiped division. ‘he characters of the teeth,

especially the sectorials, are important, as is also the number

of the digits. ‘Turner has added important characters de-

rived from the foramina at the base of the skull and the otic

bulla, which Flower} has extended. Garrod§ has pointed

out the significance of the number of convolutions of the

middle and posterior part of the hemispheres. I have added

some characters derived from the foramina of the posterior

and lateral walls of the skull ||. My. Turner also defines the

families by the form and relations of the paroccipital process.

In studying the extinct Carnivora of the Tertiary period it

has become necessary to examine into the above definitions in

order to determine the affinities of the numerous genera which

have been discovered. ‘To take them up in order, I begin

with the foramina at the base of the skull. The result of my

study of these has been that their importance was not over-

rated by Mr. Turner, and that the divisions of secondary rank

indicated by them are well founded. Secondly, as to the

* From the ‘ Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society,’

vol. xx. no. 112, p. 471, having been read before the American Philo=

sophical Society on October 20, 1882.

+ Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1848, p. 65.

{ Loc. cit. 1869, p. 5. § Loc. cit, 1878, p. 377.

|| Proc. Amer. Phil. Soe. 1880.

of the Carnivora Fissipedia. 113

form and structure of the auditory bulla. Although the

degree and form of inflation are characteristic of various

groups of Carnivora, they cannot be used in a systematic

sense, beeause, like all characters of proportion merely, there

is no way of expressing them in a tangible form. For if the

forms in question pass into each other, the gradations are

insensible, and not sensible, as is the case with an organ com-

posed of distinct parts. The same objection does not apply

so much to the arrangement of the septa of the bulla. The

septum is absent in the Arctoidea of Flower (Urside of

Turner), small in the Cynoidea, Flower (Canide, Turner),

and generally large in the A‘luroidea, Flower (Felidx, Tur-

ner). But here occurs the serious discrepancy that in the

Hyeenide, otherwise so nearly allied to the Felide, the sep-

tum of the bulla is wanting. Nevertheless the serial arrange-

ment of the order indicated by Flower, viz. commencing with

the Arctoidea, following with the Cynoidea, and ending with

the A‘luroidea, is generally sustained by the structure of the

auditory bulla and by the characters of the feet and dentition,

as well as of the cranial foramina. ‘Turner’s arrangement in

the order, Urside, Felide, and Canide, is not sustained by

his own characters; and its only support is derived from

Flower’s observations on the external or sylvian convolution

of the hemisphere of the brain*. There are three simple

longitudinal convolutions in the raccoons; in the civets and

cats the inferior convolution is fissured at the extremities,

while in the dogs it is entirely divided, so that there are four

longitudinal convolutions between the sylvian and median

fissures.

An important set of characters hitherto overlooked confirms

Flower’s order. I refer to those derived from the turbinal

bones. In the ursine and canine forms generally the maxillo-

turbinal is largely developed, and excludes the two ethmotur-

binals from the anterior narial opening. In the Feline group,

as arranged by ‘Turner, the inferior ethmoturbinal is developed

at the expense of the maxilloturbinal, and occupies a part of

the anterior narial opening. These modifications are not, so

far as my experience has gone, subject to the exceptions seen

in the development of the otic septa and molar teeth, while

they coincide with their indications. The seals possess the

character of the inferior group, or Urside, in a high degree.

The characters derived from the paroccipital process are of

limited application, as the study of the extinct forms shows.

I would then divide the fisstped Carnivora into two tribes,

as follows :—

* Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1869, p. 482.

114 Mr. E. D. Cope on the Systematic Relations

External nostril occupied by the complex maxillotur-

binal bone; ethmoturbinals confined to the pos-

terior part of the nasal fossa; the inferior ethmo-

funbinalvof reducedistzeiemenie eae eee ation HypomyctTeErRI.

External nostril occupied by the inferior ethmoturbinal

and the reduced maxilloturbinal .............. EPIMycTeERI.

While no doubt transitional forms will be discovered, the

types at present known fall very distinctly into one or the

other of these divisions. The characters are readily per-

ceived on looking into the nares of well-cleaned specimens.

The Hypomycteri stand next to the Pinnipedia, since the

maxilloturbinal bone has the same anterior development in

that group.

In searching for definitions of the families it is necessary to

be precise as to the definition of terms. ‘The meaning of the

word sectorial is in this connexion important, since there are

so many transitional forms between the sectorial and tuber-

cular tooth. <A sectorial tooth then of the upper jaw is one

which has at least two external tubercles, which are the

homologues of the median and posterior lobes of the sectorial

of the cat. By the flattening and emargination of their con-

tinuous edges the sectorial blade is formed. One or two

interior and an anterior lobe may or may not exist. In the

genera of the Procyonide, except in Bassaris, the two exter-

nal tubercles do not forma blade. The inferior sectorial tooth

differs from the tubercular only in having an anterior lobe or

cusp, which belongs primitively to the interior side. The

inferior sectorial teeth with large heels, as in Viverride and

Canide, I have called tubercular sectorials. The sectorial

blade is formed by the union and emargination of the edges

of the anterior and the principal external cusp. This blade

is not well developed in the genus Cynogale, and still less in

the Procyonide and Urside. The families are then defined

as follows :—

HyPoMYCcTERI.

I. No sectorial teeth in either jaw.

PIQESIOILO Gs an oe eichvtia Siam sse deity 6 ia ASAP claea a eats Cercoleptide.

II. Sectorial teeth in both jaws.

a. Toes 5. 5,

B. No alisphenoid canal.

(Dane) NG ENG) Se Ree Aogac coo unieage con pando o- Procyonide.

ss PMS Mie a crc toie ie ayeaie sien’ d biote %,5 feet aiat ae cane Mustelide.

88. An alisphenoid canal.

Molaratquadratiesi2) iis cds is eh ste eihold chat oes othe Aluride.

Molars)lonoutudinals 22 25 des0 «sing mies ech ernie herders Urside.

aa. Toes 5.4 0r4.4

Sectorials well developed, an alisphenoid canal ...... Camde.

of the Carnivora Fissipedia. 115

EPIMyCTERI.

I. Molars haplodont.

fipes'> . 45 no alisphenoid canal ..... 602. 0s dues hoes Protelide.

II. Molars bunodont, no sectorials.

Toes 5. 6; an alisphenoid canal .......0......000 Arctictida,

II. Molars bunodont, with sectorials.

a, Otic bulla with septum.

8. Alisphenoid canal and postglenoid foramen

present.

y. True molars well developed.

SR ee Fc '8 os « shh ofA cian ae Saegi yay ct Be Gee Viverride.

es ca ats reac U aiala cigs ahtoye e's «0 ome © Cynictide.

ee ete hoe Seite Nets Ath mule soe tet Suricatide.

yy. True molars much reduced.

EE Po Bic aS RP a Cryptoproctide.

NDR AO ES PA ws Ghar cc sins, give ne dtls sina hip See 4 Salas NMimravide.

88. No alisphenoid canal; postglenoid foramen

rudimental or wanting.

Nee oho 1 Whe and hae WA tapas os « Seb argh Hh Felide.

aa. Otic bulla without septum.

No alisphenoid canal nor postglenoid foramen: toes

PRES OO Ree cices s ffazareeial ecHA CGheiale eects as Hyenide.

The genera of these families are the following :—

CERCOLEPTIDH: Cercoleptes. Neotropical.

Procyontipm: Procyon*, Bassaricyon, Bassaris. Ne-

arctic and Neotropical.

Mustevipaz: Meline (two tubercles of internal side of

superior sectorial)—Taxidea, Meles; Musteline (one

internal tubercle of superior sectorials)—EHnhydris,

Pteronura, Lutra, Aonyx, Barangia, Helictis, Zoriila,

Mephitis, Conepatus, Mellivora, Gulo, Galictis, Puto-

rius, Mustela.

fELURIDA: Atlurus, Ailuropoda, ? Hyenarctos.

Ursipa&: Helarctos, Arctothertum, Ursus, Melursus.

Canipa: Megalotis+, Amphicyon, Thous, Palcocyon,

Temnocyon, Galecynus, Canis, Vulpes, Enhydrocyon,

Hyenocyon, Brachycyon, Tomarctus, Speothus, Syna-

godus, Dysodus, Oligobunis, Icticyon, Lycaon.

PrRoTELIDZ: Proteles. Ethiopian.

ARCTICTIDA: Arctictis. Indian.

VIVERRIDA: Cynogale, Arctogale, Paguma, Paradox-

urus, Nandinia, Hemigale, Galidia, Prionodon, Ge-

netta, Viverricula, Viverra, Graledictis, Herpestes,

* Including Naswa, which is not distinct.

+ This genus cannot be made the type of a family, as is done by Dr.

Gray.

116 Dr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on the Mollusca in

Athylax, Calogale, Ichneumia, Bdeogale, Urva,

Teniogale, Onychogale, Helogale, Rhinogale, Mungos,

Crossarchus, Hupleres.

Cynictip&: Cynictis, ? Ictithervum.

SuRICATIDA: Suricata. Ethiopia.

CryPToOPROCTIDZ: Proelurus, Cryptoprocta.

Nimravip&: Archelurus, Nimravus, Atlurogale, Di-

nictis, Pogonodon, Hoplophoneus.

Feta: Macherodontine—Macherodus, Smilodon ;

Feline—Plethelurus (g. n.) *, Catolynx, Felis, Neo-

felis, Uncia T, Lynx, Cynclurus.

Hyanipm™: Hyenictis, Hyena, Crocuta.

XVI.—WNotes on the Mollusca in the Great International

Fisheries Exhibition, London, 1883, with the Description of

a new Species of Pleurotoma. By J. GwyN JEFFREYS,

DRS:

THE interest taken by the public in this great world’s show

continues unabated. But it does not seem to have attracted

the attention of conchologists; although the contrary might

have been expected, seeing that many of our rarest shells have

been procured from the stomachs of fishes and even been

caught by the bait intended for the latter.

Apart from the economic or food-supplying object of the

Exhibition, there is not much of science or natural history in

the department of Mollusca. Oysters, of course, play a con-

siderable and aristocratic part in it, and are amply displayed.

Not so with mussels, cockles, whelks, periwinkles, and other

“small deer,” which are so relished by the poorer classes in

the dog days.

The Mollusca are well known to constitute, together with

Crustacea, Annelids, and various other invertebrate animals,

the principal food of most fishes. I have myself seen between

thirty and forty specimens of the common whelk (Buccenum

undatum) taken from the stomach of a single cod. Orsted

says, in his interesting treatise ‘ De regionibus marinis,’

* Type Felis planiceps, Vig. Horsf. Char. Second (first) superior pre-

molar two-rooted ; orbit closed behind; pupil round.

+ Mr. Wortman has called my attention to a character of this genus

which confirms its separation from Felis, as I proposed in 1879. The

maxilloturbinal bone is less complex in the genus Uncia than in Felis,

consistently with a less nocturnal habit and less necessity for acute

smell.

the International Fisheries Exhibition, 117

that great numbers of B. undatum and Fusus antiquus are

collected in the Cattegat for fish-bait, by putting a dead cod

into a wicker basket and letting it down on a muddy bottom ;

it is soon taken up half filled with whelks. 'The same method

is adopted for their capture on the English and Irish coasts.

This is a good illustration of the lex talionis. The Romans

must have prized the whelk as a foreign luxury during their

occupation of this country. Shells of B. wndatum, mixed with

those of the oyster, were found among the ruins of the Roman

station at Richborough. Whelks of two kinds (“ white”

and “ almond ’”’) are in great request and sold by millions in

the lower fishmarket at Billingsgate.

The Exhibition presents some absurd incongruities. Al-

lowing every latitude to the interpretation of the word “ fish-

eries,”’ it appears rather strange to include among their products

a large assortment of copper-ore and other minerals from

Newfoundland, and cases of Lepidoptera from the Entomolo-

gical Society of Canada ; nor can we quite see the connection

between fishes and Ale or seaweeds, which are so profusely

exposed to view in the courts of the United States of America,

Italy, Norway, Russia, and other foreign countries.

However, instead of indulging in useless criticism, I will

proceed to make some remarks on the Mollusca in the Exhi-

bition, considered in a natural-history point of view; and |

will take the courts according to their order in the catalogue.

In doing this I shall be glad to express my obligation to the

Colonial and Foreign Commissioners for their extremely

courteous attention and for allowing me to examine all the

Mollusca in their departments.

GREAT BRITAIN.

Nothing worthy of notice.

BAHAMAS.

A collection of small and common shells without names.

BriTisH COLUMBIA.

A magnificent specimen (in spirit) of Cryptochiton Stelleri,

Middendorff. The only other habitats previously known for

this singular mollusk were the Siberian coast and Sitka.

CANADA.

This is not in the official Catalogue, except to give the

names of the Commissioners. ‘The court contains a well-

118 Dr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys on the Mollusca in

arranged and interesting collection of eatable Mollusca. The

word “eatable”” puts me in mind of my old friend Edward

Forbes. When he went to Shetland he dredged in Lerwick

Bay the large and now well-known Holothuroid Cucumaria

frondosa, which resembles a pudding. He called it a

“ comestible ;” and his boatman Peter, who was quite a cha-

racter, afterwards took me with my dredge to the same spot,

and was very proud of telling me the right name, which he

had improved into ‘ combustible !”

NEWFOUNDLAND.

Also omitted in the Catalogue. Mr. T. A. Verkriizen

supplied a case of marine shells, arranged with his usual care

and neatness. Buccinum undatum, grenlandicum, tenue, and

Tottent are represented by several varieties under not a few

specific names.

UNITED STATES OF AMERICA.

An extensive and admirably displayed collection of the

shells of Ostrea virginica or the American oyster. This

species may always be known by the purplish or dark violet

colour of the muscular scar. Its variability in shape and size

is not less than that of its Huropean congener, O. edulis.

In this section is to be seen an excellent model of the gigantic

squid (Architeuthis Harveyi?) of Prof. Verrill; but unfortu-

nately its extraordinary length has been somewhat curtailed

by the clumsiness of a carpenter who set it up and fastened

the arms or tentacles in such a manner that justice has not

been done to the model. Here are also shown a model of the

new exploring-ship or Fish-commissioners’ steamer ‘ Alba-

tross,’ as well as sundry apparatus, such as improved kinds of

trawl, dredge, accumulator, Sligsbee’s net for intermediate

depths, and many other ingenious contrivances.

FRANCE.

Oysters only.

HAIrTI.

Common tropical shells without names.

ITALY.

A miscellaneous lot of small unnamed shells from Naples,

mixed with exotic Nerite. Attached to the native corals, of

which there is a large assortment, may be observed valves

of Ostrea cochlear, showing how they had become altered in

the International Fisheries Exhibition. 119

shape by the conditions of their peculiar habitat. I more than

suspect that this so-called species of oyster is merely a variety

of O. edulis, which was necessarily moulded on the branching

coral, and therefore grew in the form of a bowl or cup. A

large tropical Bulimus and a specimen of Helix pomatia are

perched on a madrepore, as if in their usual association and

position.

NETHERLANDS.

A poor set-out of native shells not properly named, and a

few shells from Madagascar.

Norway.

Mollusca from Tromsé, 69° 40’ N. lat., and therefore far

within the arctic circle. This is a good collection of fine

specimens, but of a few species only, including Fusus gracilis,

var. glaber, F. islandicus, F. Sarsi, Buccinum undatum and

its varieties parvulum and fragile, B. grenlandicum (if not

also a variety of the last) and its variety finmarchianum.

SPAIN.

An unsatisfactory exhibit; some specimens are wrongly

named, e.g. “ Teredo navalis” instead of T. norvegica.

SWEDEN.

Dr. Malm’s Mollusca from the Gothenburg Museum. An

old collection, and some specimens wrongly named, e. g. Mya

Binghami, var. elongata, which is placed with Sazxicava

rugosa as the young of that species. There are also a few

shells from Bohusliin, which were contributed by Mr. Oscar

Dickson, including Sélifer Turtoni of Broderip and Sowerby,

Pleurophyllidia Loveni of Bergh, and Loligo Forbest of Steen-

strup. But the most important collection of Mollusca in the

Exhibition was furnished by Prof. Nordenskjéld, having been

dredged in the icy or Siberian Sea during his celebrated voyage

in the ‘ Vega.’ All of these are truly arctic species; and it

may be desirable to mention a few of them with the recorded

depths :—ConcHIFERA : Amusstum Hoskynsi, Forbes, 75

fathoms, very large; Astarte fabula, Reeve, = A. Warhami,

Hancock, 10 fathoms. GaAstropopa :—Trichotropis Kréyert,

Philippi, 55 fathoms; 7. crinifera, Leche, 55 fathoms ; Pur-

pura Freycineti, Middendorff, 0-1 fathom ; Buccinum Tottend,

Stimpson, var., = B. terra@-nove, Morch, 55 fathoms ; Pleuro-

toma sp. n., 55 fathoms. As Dr. Leche of Stockholm writes

me word that he intends to describe the Conchifera only from

120 M. Hilgendorf on Spongilla nitens

the ‘ Vega’ expedition, I venture to propose the name in-

signis for this grand species. I believe it is larger than any

other known Pleurotoma, recent or fossil. It is about three

inches long and an inch broad. Colour creamy under the

coating of a Hydrozoon which infests all the specimens.

Whorls 7-8, convex ; apex turreted. Sculpture consisting of

numerous spiral striz or slight ridges, besides a rather sharp

and prominent keel in the middle of each whorl. Suture

distinct. Fissure or slit broad but not very deep, placed

about halfway between the suture and the median keel. The

infrasutural or fissural space is marked (as in other species of

Pleurotoma) with flexuous lines of growth. Mouth irregularly

oblong. Many of the specimens have a short sinus in the

outer lip at the commencement of the canal, which latter is of

moderate length and nearly equally wide throughout. Inner

lip smooth, and polished by the continual attrition of the foot.

Operculum none. ‘There were ten living specimens in this

collection. CEPHALOPODA: Heteroteuthis tenera, Verrill, 15

fathoms.

After all has been said we cannot be much surprised to

find that this Exhibition is not a museum of natural history.

The masses are as yet far from being educated in such

matters, and they would simply regard a properly arranged

collection of specimens which are not useful to man in the

most cursory and incurious manner and without the slightest

scientific interest. Perhaps it may be different in the next

century.

XVII.— On two Freshwater Sponges (Spongilla nitens, Carter,

and 8. Bohmii, sp. n.) collected by Dr. R. Bohm in the

River Ugalla near Lake Tanganyika. By M. HILeEn-

DORE*.

THE fifteen dry specimens, of bright greyish-brown colour,

from 5 to 15 centim. [2 to 6 inches ] in diameter, and of broadly

conical, hemispherical, or horizontally expanded form, closely

resemble one another. Their surface is covered with short

slender prominences, each separated from the neighbouring

ones by interspaces larger than its own diameter and con-

tinued radially through the interior substance of the sponge.

In the principal portion a framework goes from one radial

cord to another; and in the meshes thus formed numerous

* Translated from a separate impression from the ‘ Sitzungsbericht

der Gesellschaft naturforschender Freunde,’ May 22, 1883, communicated

by H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &c.

~ a erg

sae

Die

and a new Species from Africa. By oy 121

gemmule [statoblasts] are imbedded, but without penetrati.

the peripheral part. The trabecul of the framework lie loose

in the centre.

The skeleton-spicules have rounded ends and are mode-

rately curved; very few of them (perhaps one among 200

ordinary spicules) are seen with pointed ends, but always

with cylindrical middle part: these are of equal length with,

but in diameter only half as large as the former. From 4 to

§ spicules combine to form the thickness of a trabecula. The

diameter of the meshes may be twice that of a gemmula.

The one-pored gemmulx possess a considerably thickened

erust, which (enumerating from the centre outwards) consists

of a layer of chitine, a stratum of tangential spicules, a mass

of parenchyma, and a second (outer) stratum of spicules.

These spicules are half as long as those of the skeleton ; and

each forms a slender double cone armed with scattered, short,

pointed spines, and is mostly pointed at its ends. They are

present only in small number, about 30 to each hemisphere of

a layer, making a total of 120 in a gemmula. The paren-

chyma consists of delicate-walled vesicles, polyhedric by com-

pression, arranged in radiating series of about ten each. In

the radial direction they are flattened, so that their height may

amount to half their breadth.

Measurements.—

millim

Diameter of the largest specimen .............. 130

Height i Ine TI araemiste weed « 50

Length of the outgrowths upon the surface .... 6

Thickness bF bf ery dep et Yel

micromillim.

Length of the skeleton-spicules .............. 336

Thickness ‘s Da a Mavs, Soh scaro aa Sessa 28

Diameter of the gemmuls....... 200. e ee ee ews 308

Whickness of the entire'crust ).... 00.0.0... 66s. 56

Tangential diameter of the parenchyma cells .... 14

Radial diameter i PM ce eno 0)

Length of the gemmula-spicules .............. 154

Thickness x Sh AU atvanncr teenies 8:4

These data accord, so far as a comparison from the descrip-

tion is possible, with the Spongilla nitens of Carter (Ann. &

Mag. Nat. Hist. 1881, vii. p. 89) ; only I do not find there any

statement about the flattening of the polyhedric cells, upon

which, however, much weight can hardly be laid. Unfortu-

nately the locality of that species is not known; but from

their unmistakable similarity to the present form, Carter’s

specimens may likewise have come from Africa, and not from

South America as he supposes.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 9

129 Jn two Freshwater Sponges from Africa.

Jntil now, the occurrence of a freshwater sponge from

Africa had never been proved, while recently North and South

America and Asia (Borneo, India, Lake Baikal, Japan) had

furnished numerous species ; so that Dr. Bohm’s find appears

zoogeographically not unimportant. (Zool. Mus. Protozoa

810.)

On looking more closely, however, my attention having

been arrested by the appearance of a strange spicule in a

prepared specimen, I found a new and hitherto quite un-

known species of Spongilla on almost every individual of S.

nitens. It coats the underside of the much more massive

S. nitens as an inconspicuous erust of only 1 millim. thick-

ness, consisting of a very fine-meshed delicate framework.

The magnificent gemmule are grouped in a single layer of

from 8 to 12 within the skeleton, but at the same time much

projecting from it; in several examples they are entirely

wanting ; and where they are present there are always very

few of them.

A delicate homogeneous lamella sharply divides the two

species.

The skeleton-spicules are of the same form as in S, nitens,

but, instead of being smooth, are studded with roundish flat-

tened tubercles which at the ends approach considerably closer

together; they are scarcely half as long as in that species.

They are often accompanied by a four-times smaller amphi-

discoid form. The shaft of these siliceous bodies is gently

curved, and bears at some distance from the centre a small

spherical elevation ; from a similar one at each end of the

shaft proceed five short, pointed, recurved prongs, exactly as

ina whorl. These double whorls lie close to the large spicules,

and form with them the network, the threads of which consist

mostly of only one spicule in thickness. The width of the

meshes may amount to 200 millimetres.

The gemmule have not the layer of parenchyma; the spi-

cules he tangentially and in only a single layer; but they

are densely crowded and at the same time minute; so that

their number is very considerable and far exceeds a thousand

in one gemmula. ‘There is perhaps a larger portion of the

surface covered by the spicules than left free from them, in

which they moreover frequently cross one another. Hach

spicule is moderately curved, cylindrical, with only the last

eighth or tenth part tapering to a point; the surface bears a

moderate number of short acute spines, of which from 8 to 10

may occupy the length, and about 50 the entire spicule.

Dublin Microscopical Club. 123

Measurements.—

Skeleton-spicules— micromillim.

JOGA ci Ge Ae ere ee MEAP E77 140

IPHICKMESS HS Had th... Skins ssisiad aeep 14

Diameter of tubercles .............. 15

Double whorls, length .............. 33°6

Length of the teeth (from thecentre).. 56

PRbielriass OF thesAXIS bas 6 a5 sferw y sieceves 3

Gemmula-spicules—

GREEN elas tian en citys wists oe Beaciile oie 5,6 56

MREICICHE GS? tats ef ccotetshauine nse ee alts 4 56

As, from the absence of amphidisks or rudimentary amphi-

disks, the genera Meyenia, Tubella, and Parmula are excluded,

and all the species of Spongilla in the restricted sense possess

pointed skeleton-spicules, excepting only S. nztens (cf. Carter’s

synopsis, /. c.), our second form must without doubt be regar-

ded as a new species, which, in honour of its discoverer, shall

be named Spongilla (s. s.) Béhmit (Zool. Museum, Protozoa

no. 811).

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.

DUBLIN MICROSCOPICAL CLUB.

May 18, 1882.

Nephrocytium Agardhianum, Nag., and Zoospores.—Mr. Archer

showed examples of the two minute Algxe, Nephrecytium Agardhia-

num, majus et minus, Nigeli, and remarked that he thought these

two forms very distinct indeed, dwelling at the same time on their

resemblances and distinctions as regards the genus Oecystis, Nig.

But he was on the present occasion more particularly anxious to

draw attention to examples of the former, which he would be dis-

posed to designate only Nephrocytium Agardhianum (and the smaller

Nephrocytium minus), inasmuch as it (NV. Agardhianum proper)

showed a zoospore condition. An example was now under the

microscope, in which the four elliptic, necessarily comparatively

large, biciliated zoospores were still contained in the parent cyst,

within which they performed a lazy side-to-side movement. On

their escape, however, into the surrounding water their movements

become greatly accelerated, and they dash about with great force

and, as it were, recklessness, hither and thither. Considerable dif-

ferences of size were apparent, some being nearly twice as large as

others. Mr. Archer would suggest that this might be due to whether

an average example became divided into four or eight subdivisions ;

124 Dublin Microscopical Club,

in the latter case evidently the individual zoospores would only be

approximately about one half the size. It is true, however, that

the still (thatis, the ordinary vegetative), characteristic examples do

not usually present any very great differences in size, but maintain

generally characteristic dimensions.

Protococcus pluvialis, to show Nucleus.—Dr. M‘Nab showed speci-

mens of the ciliated state of Protococcus (Chlamydococcus) pluviahs,

treated with osmic acid and carmine. The nucleus was most clearly

seen in each free cell, and also in others, which had divided or

were then undergoing division into four or eight new cells.

Laticiferous Cells of Euphorbia.—Dr. M‘Nab exhibited a freshly

prepared specimen of the laticiferous cells of Huphorbia procera; a

portion of the stem was boiled in dilute caustic potash solution and

then teased out with needles.

Polyedrium gigas, W ittrock, a rare Form, exhibited —_Mr. Archer

further showed Polyedrium gigas, Wittrock, the second time he had

taken this fine and very distinct form, so large, so bright, so green,

and so unlike the other rather dull-coloured forms referable to

Nigeli’s genus, These specimens were from the same county as

previously, though not the same locality in Westmeath.

June 15, 1882.

Ascidiozoids of a Pyrosoma.—Prof. A. C. Haddon exhibited a

preparation from the Naples Zoological Station, showing four asci-

diozoids budding off from a cyathozoid, thus forming the foundation

of a Pyrosoma-colony. He also presented a second preparation, being

the initial individual of a Botryllus-group in a stage between the

larva and the adult.

Stenella, a, s., exhibited.—Prof. E. Perceval Wright exhibited a

mounted specimen from the ‘ Challenger ’ collection of a new species

of Stenella, near to but abundantly distinct from S. imbricata, John-

son; this seems to have been met with very frequently during the

cruise of the ‘ Challenger.’ ;

Cosmarium melanosporum, n. 8., with Zygospore.—Mr. Archer

showed the conjugated state in very considerable quantity of the

little smooth Cosmarium, with round, very darkly tinted zygospore,

from which circumstance Mr. Roy and he had agreed to call the

form Cosmarium melanosporum. This species conjugates pretty

frequently and always freely; so that, when met with, a large gather-

ing may thus sometimes be made.

Elongate unicellular Alga scemingly related to the so-called Cosma-

rium obtusum, Bréb.—Mr. Archer drew attention to one of those

unicellular, elongate, more or less curved Alge, believed to be

generically associated with the so-called Closterium obtusum, Bréb.,

but not properly referred to Clostertwn. The present form is com-

Dublin Microscopical Club. 125

paratively stout, broad for its length, scarcely tapering, evenly

curved (‘‘ boomerang”-shaped), ends broadly rounded; contents

dense, consisting of scattered rounded granules. Perhaps the most

curious point in the present instance was that, mounted only some

forty-eight hours in acetate of potash, the green contents had to all

appearance become dissolved, and only the empty hyaline otherwise

unaltered cell-walls were now to be seen of some half dozen ex-

amples that were on the slide.

October 19, 1882.

Quasi-Fungal Growth in Shell of Limax.—Prof. Mackintosh

ealled attention to an apparently fungal growth in a shell of Zimax

cinereus, mounted last December. He had noticed the growth a

couple of days after mounting; and it had continued in the same state

since. It might be in the medium (alcoholic glycerine); but it

seemed to him to be in the periostracum. If this were so, it would

be similar to, but less easily accounted for than, the supposed

hyphal growths in the shells of branchiate Gasteropods.

Spicules of new Species of Aleyonaria from ‘ Challenger’ Collec-

tion.—Dr. EK. Perceval Wright exhibited some mounted spicules of

two new species of Alcyonaria belonging to the genus Primnoella, as

well as drawings of the polyp-colony. These formed part of the

collection made by the ‘Challenger’ expedition, of which full de-

scriptions are to appear in the forthcoming Report.

Cystidia from Gill of Gomphidius glutinosus.—Mr. Greenwood

Pim exhibited a section of the gill of Gomphidius glutinosus, which

showed the so-called cystidia developed to an extent very unusual

amongst the Agaricini. These bodies, which in Agarics in general,

except the Coprinaril, are scarcely discernible, are looked upon by

Mr. W.G. Smith as being the male organ in this group. In the

specimen shown there was nothing to confirm this view, the organ

consisting of large cells resembling hairs, filled with a granular

protoplasm and projecting a long way from the hymenial surface.

It is probable that these somewhat anomalous bodies are analogous

to the paraphyses met with in the Pezizas. Nothing resembling

the antheridia described by Mr. Smith was discernible in Mr.

Pim’s specimen, in which the basidiospores were abundant and well

developed.

Motile state of the “ 80” Organism (Club Minutes, January 1871).

—Mr. Archer showed the production he had before drawn atten-

tion to under the provisional designation of the ‘* 80” organism ;

and he would first say that quite as little as then was he able to

arrive at a conclusion as to the nature or affinity of this puzzling

and by no means attractive-looking organism. But he drew atten-

tion to it again in order to exhibit once more its puzzling and

astonishing motile condition—-that is to say, to show the broken-up

126 Dublin Microscopical Club.

contents, each fraction (zoospore?) made up of one, or two, or three

of the granules (often two larger and one of the more minute, or

one large with two or three more minute), arranged in a tolerably

straight file and enclosed in a proper envelope, and moving about in

sweeps and curves or more or less straight directions, revolving the

while on the longitudinal axis. Those who are adepts at using 3."

or ,!' objectives might possibly discern flagella similar to those of

Bacteria ; but nothing of the kind could be seen with ordinary powers.

These little moving bodies ere long come to rest, and even though

still small, not a half or a quarter of the full dimensions, become

divided and reproduce the “* 80 ” characteristies.

Section of Velum and Foot of Veliger larva of Purpura lapillus.

—Professor A. C. Haddon exhibited a transverse section through the

velum and foot of a veliger larva of Purpura lapillus, showing the

development of the nervous system in four thickenings of. the epi-

blast, this being the first time that the nervous system has been

proved to have an epiblastic origin in the Prosobranchs.

Sections of Hair-follicles stained.—Dr. J. F. Knott showed sec-

tions of hair-follicles of human scalp perpendicular to long axis of

hairs, stained with picro-carmine and aniline violet, which latter

tinges the outer (Henle’s) layer of the inner root-sheath. Huxley’s

layer staining with picro-carmine as well as the outer root-sheath,

the various layers of the complex wall of the hair-follicles are ex-

tremely well differentiated. Some of the specimens show with

plainness the processes sent by the cells of Henle’s layer into the

intercellular fenestrae of the layer of Henle. ‘This particular

arrangement, which has been lately so graphically described by

Professor Ranvier, formed the chief interest of the specimen. It

accounts for the closeness of adhesion between the layers long ago

observed, but which had previously remained unexplained.

November 17, 1882.

Section of Plumule of Germinating Seedling Opuntia.—Dr. M‘Nab

exhibited sections of a plumule of a germinating seedling Opuntia.

The punctum vegetationis was distinctly shown, with the leaves

originating in the normal manner, the older ones having contracted

axillary shoots bearing spines and hairs. The leaves were of very

simple structure and outline, and possessed a single central fibro-

vascular bundle.

Another nondescript problematic Production.—Mr. Archer showed

an example of a puzzling structure now and again met with in deep

pools and amongst débris of various sorts. This is somewhat large,

of plumply ovate figure, of brownish colour, opaque, covered by

prominent scale-like or leaf-like seemingly imbricated projecting

prominences—these, if he judged aright, running in spiral lines, the

contents coarsely granular, thus the whole resembling in figure and

Dublin Microscopical Club. 127

calling to mind the involucrum, with its projecting leaflets, of cer-

tain Composites, say such as that of Centaurea nigra. This occurs

isolated, single examples turning up now and again. The question

is, what can it be? It has never shown any sign of life or change

of condition.

A Form of Aspergillus. —Mx. Greenwood Pim showed a peculiar

black form of Aspergillus from the interior of a fig, which it had

completely metamorphosed, It was considerably smaller in all its

parts than Aspergillus glaucus ; and its intense brownish-black colour

would seem to point to its being at least a distinct variety.

December 15, 1882.

Spores of Tuber estivum.—Mr. Pim showed sections of the (so-

called) common Truffle (Tuber estivum), from Farmleigh Gardens,

Castieknock, co. Dublin, where it grows in considerable abundance

and is used for culinary purposes. The peculiar alveolate spores

distinguishing it from 7. brunale, the other species used as an escu-

lent, were well marked.

Structure of Stem of Urvillea.—Dr. M‘Nab exhibited sections of

the stem of Urvillea ferruginea, a Brazilian plant belonging to the

natural family Sapindacee. The stem was triangular, with a row

of hairs at each angle. The stem contained a ring of united fibro-

vascular bundles in the centre with a pith, the bast showing the

bast-vessels with great clearness, while the bast-fibres were wanting.

Three double bundles were developed, one at each angle of the stem ;

and a ring of sclerenchyma surrounded the stem a short distance

below the epidermis. Collenchyma existed in six patches, one at

each angle and one in the middle of each face.

Nerve-endings ta Frog’s Muscle.—Dr. Knott showed preparations

presenting examples of nerve-endings in muscle of frog.

Zygospore of Cosmarium cucurbita (most probably) shown.—Mr.

Archer exhibited what appeared to be the zygospore of the common

Cosmarium cucurbita, rotund and smooth, the parent semi-cells

attached by their oscula to the spore; he spoke of this appearing to

be the zygospore of the species mentioned, as one could not feel

absolutely certain that it was truly so, a number of unconjugated

examples occurring in the gathering; but if not so, it would be

difficult to suppose to what other species the example could apper-

tain. The doubt arose from the semi-cells appearing to be slightly

distorted, that is somewhat dilated at the ends, thus losing the

character of outline appertaining to this inornate and very common

species ; but frequent as it is, it does not appear to have hitherto

shown its zygospore.

Section of Olivine Dolerite.—Prof. Hull exhibited a thin section

of olivine dolerite from Scalot Hill, near Larne, co. Antrim.

128 Geological Society.

This rock occurs as filling an old volcanic “ neck” which pierces

through the Chalk limestone and the overlying sheets of basaltic

lava which form the crest of Scalot Hill. The rock is seen to be

rich in olivine, which forms perhaps one third of the whole mass

and polarizes vividly. The other minerals are augite, labradorite,

felspar in long plates or prisms, and a little black magnetite.

The rock itself is found to be magnetic when tested by a sensitive

needle.

In its general characters the rock agrees with those of other vol-

canic necks of co. Antrim, such as Carmony Hill and Sleamish, in

being rich in olivine, and as having undergone very little alteration

since the original consolidation.

Section of Rock from the Summit of Mount Cooke, in New Zealand,

obtained by Rev. W.S Green.—Prof. Valentine Ball showed a section

of the foregoing.

In its microscopic characters this rock appeared to consist of a

breccia of voleanic materials, angular fragments of quartz and felspar

being scattered about in a partly altered, either augitic or horn-

blendic matrix. This view of its constitution has been confirmed by

the microscopic examination of a thin section*. It is a distinctly

clastic rock, of which the constituents have been so fractured that

there are no unbroken crystalline forms in a condition suitable for

determination. The angularity of the particles is against its being

of a detrital nature. It would therefore be probably proper to de-

scribe it as a dioritic-ash breccia containing quartz.

GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

June 20, 1883.—J. W. Hulke, Esq., F.RB.S.,

President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

1. “On the Discovery of Ovibos moschatus in the Forest-bed, and

its Range in Space and Time.” By Prof. W. Boyd Dawkins, M.A.,

BRS. E.G.S.

The specimen described by the author formed part of the col-

lection of the late Rey. F. Buxton, and was obtained by a fisherman

from the forest-bed of Trimingham, four miles from Cromer. The

edges are sharp, and the red matrix adhered in places, so that the

author regards its geological position as satisfactorily established.

It is the posterior half of the upper surface of the skull of an adult

female Ovibos moschatus. The author describes the range in space

and time of this animal, mentioning the different instances in which

its remains have been found in Britain. These are, in some cases,

* Prepared by Mr. Cuttell.

Bibliographical Notices. 129

undoubtedly postglacial ; but he inclines to consider the lower brick-

earth of the Thames valley, where the musk-sheep has been found

at Crayford, as anterior to the Boulder-clay, which occupies the

district to the north. This deposit at Trimingham, however, is

certainly preglacial; and so Ovibos moschatus belongs to a fauna

which arrived in our country prior to the extreme refrigeration of

climate which characterized the glacial epoch, and afterwards re-

treated northwards to its present haunts, showing, with other

evidence, that this epoch did not form a hard-and-fast barrier

between two faunas.

2. “On some New or imperfectly known Madreporaria from the

Coral Rag and Portland Oolite of the Counties of Wilts, Oxford,

Cambridge, and York.” By R. F. Tomes, Esq., F.G.8.

The author, after pointing out the poverty of the British Corallian

rocks in genera and species of corals as compared with the strata of

equivalent age on the continent, proceeded to describe a section in

the Middle Oolite at Highworth.

The author then described species of Astrocwnia, Dimorpharea,

and Latimeandrina, genera not hitherto recognized in the British

Corallian ; and for one of the forms he has discovered he proposed a

new genus, to which he gives the name of Crateroseris. The paper

concluded with some remarks on the well-known Jsastrwa oblonga

of the Portland beds.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

Mémoires de VAcadémie Impériale des Sciences de St. Pétersbourg.

7° série, tome xxxi. No. 5. Miscellanea Silurica III. 1. Sup-

plement * to the Monograph of the Russian Leperditie. II. The

Crustacean Fauna of the Kurypterus-beds of Rootzikill, Oesel.

By Magister Fr. Scuurpr, Fellow of the Academy. With 9

plates. 4to 1883.

In 1873 M. Fr. Schmidt (‘ Miscellanea Silurica,” I.) published a

revision of the then-known Leperditie and Isochilinew, and added

several new species, with good illustrations. He figured and de-

scribed :—

. Leperditia grandis, Schrenck, pp. 9, 10, figs. 1, 3-6 a.

2. L. Barbotana, n. sp., pp. 9, 12, figs. 7-9 a.

3. L. Tyraica, n. sp., p. 9, figs. 2, 10-12.

4, L. Angelini, n. sp., pp. 9, 13, figs. 138-17. Var. ornata,

Kichw., pp. 9, 14, fig. 18.

5. L. baltica, Hisinger, pp. 9, 15.

* “Nachtrag zur Monographie der russischen silurischen Leperditien,”

&e.

130 Bibliographical Notices.

6. L. Msingert, n. sp., pp. 9, 16, figs. 22, 25.

7. L. Hichwaldi, n. sp., pp. 9, 12, figs. 19-21.

8. L. wiluiensis, n. sp., pp- 10, 17, figs. 27-28 a.

9. L. parallela, n. sp., p. 18, figs. 24-26.

10. L. marginata, Keyserling, pp. 10, 19, figs. 29-31.

Ll. ZL. Keyserlingi, n. sp., pp. 10, 20, figs. 32-34.

12. Lsochilina biensis, Grunewald, pp. 10, 21, fig. 35.

13. I. punctata, Eichwald, pp. 10, 22, figs. 36, 37.

14, I. Maakii, n. sp., pp. 10, 23, figs. 38, 39.

In the Supplement which the author now gives us he first refers

to the letter “On some Silurian Leperditie” in the Ann. & Mag.

Nat. Hist., March 1882, containing some critical remarks by him-

self on the Leperditie deseribed and figured by T. Rupert Jones in

the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. of November 1881; and he imtimates

that with the continued study of the Russian Leperditie he has

modified some of his views about the species and varieties then re-

ferred to. In this Supplement M. Schmidt first revises the Silurian

species from the East-Baltic districts, and then treats of the East-

Russian Leperditie—L. marginata, Keyserling, and L. wiluiensis,

Schmidt, both of which he more fully describes from new material.

He also notices the Uralian LZ. Barbotana, Schm., a new Uralian

variety of Z. grandis, Schrenck, and a new species and variety from

the Upper-Silurian or Hercynian stage of the South Ural; and from

probably the same horizon in the Waigatsch Island he describes

three new species and a variety, collected during Baron Norden-

skj6ld’s Jenissei Expedition.

To show the results of M. F. Schmidt’s late researches, it may be

best to extract his corrected synonymy of the species he has now

taken in hand. Thus :—

P. 8. Leperditia grandis, Schrenck, 1873, in Schmidt’s Russ, sil.

Lep. p. 10, figs. 3-6; Kolmodin, 1879, Ostrac. sil. Gotl.

p. 185; F. Schmidt and T. R. Jones, 1882, Ann. & Mag. Nat.

Hist. March, p. 169.

Baltic Provinces ; Gothland ; North-German Drift.

P. 9. Leperditia phaseolus (Hisinger).

Cytherina phaseolus, His., 1837, Leth. Suec. p. 9, pl. i. fig. 1. ;

Leperditia Angelini, F. Schmidt, 1873, Russ. sil. Lep. pp. 18-18 (with

synonyms) ; Lundgren, 1874, ‘Om den vid Ramsisa och Ofveds-

kloster i Sk&ne forekommande sandstenens Alder,” Lund Univers.

Arskvift, vol. x. p. 9. :

Leperditia tyraica, Linnarson, 1875, Anteckning fran en resa i Skanes

silurtrackter in Geolog. foreningens forh. vol. ii. p. 280.

Leperditia Angelini, Krause, 1877, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol, Ges.

vol. xxix. p. 29.

Leperditia phaseolus, Kolmodin, 1879, Ostrac. sil. Gotl. p. 134, pl. xix.

tigs. 4, 5.

Daeeradis Hisingert, var. gracilenta, Jones, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist.

November 1881, p. 339, pl. xix. fig. 6.

Bibliographical Notices. 131

Leperditia Hisingert (dwarf form), Jones, 1881, op, ett. p. 340, pl. xix.

fig. 16.

Leperditia phaseolus, var. marginata, Jones, 1881, op. cit. p. 341,

pl. xix. fig. 15; F. Schmidt and T. R, Jones, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.

March 1882, pp. 170, 171.

Gothland ; Schonen, Christianiafjord ; England ; Baltic Provinces.

Var. ornata, Kichw., is mentioned at p. 10.

P. 11. Leperditia Hichwaldi, F, Schmidt, pl. i. fig. 1; and 1878,

Russ. sil. Lep. p. 17, figs. 19-21.

Oesel and North-German Drift.

P. 11. Leperditia baltica, Hisinger, pl. i. figs. 2,3; F. Schmidt,

1873, op. cit. p. 15; Kolmodin, 1879, op. cit. p. 134; T. R. Jones,

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Nov. 1881, p. 337, pl. xix. fig. 1 (?);

Schmidt & Jones, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. March 1882, p. 168.

Gothland ; Malmé6 in Christiniafjord ; North-German Drift ; Eng-

land (?).

Pp. 11,12. Var. contracta, Jones, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Nov. 1881,

p. 337, pl. xix. figs. 2, 3.

England.

P. 13. Leperditia Keyserlingi, Schmidt, 1873, op. eit. p. 20, figs. 82-

34,

Leperditia Hisingert, Jones, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Nov, 1881, p. 339,

pl. xix. fig. 5 (?).

Leperditia Keyserlingi, Schmidt & Jones, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.

March 1882, pp. 170, 171.

Baltic Provinces ; England.

P. 14. Leperditia Hisingeri, Schmidt, pl. 1. figs. 5-7.

Leperditia Hisingert, Schmidt, 1873, Russ. sil. Lep. p. 16 (partly),

fig. 23.

eee ditia Schmidti, Kolmodin, 1879, op. cit. p. 133.

Leperditia balthica, Jones, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. Nov. 1881, p. 335,

pl. xix. figs. 10, I].

Leperditia Hisingert, Schm. & Jones, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. March

1882, p. 168.

Gothland, Malmo, Christianiafjord ; Baltic Provinces.

Pp. 15, 16. Leperditia Misingeri, var. abbreviata, Schmidt, 1883,

pl. i. figs. 8-12.

Leperditia baltica, Kichw., 1860, Leth. ross., anc. période, p. 1329

(partly).

Leperditia Hisingeri, F. Schmidt, 1878, op. cit. p. 16, fig. 22.

Leperditia balthica, var. contracta, Jones, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Nov.

1881 (partly), p. 388, pl. xix. fig. 18.

Baltic Provinces.

132 Bibliographical Notices.

We gather that M. Schmidt’s study of the Leperditie leads him to

regard Mr. T. R. Jones’s

Leperditia balthica, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Nov. 1881, p. 336,

pl. xix. fig. 1, as doubtful: Suppl. p. 11.

Leperditia balthica, var. contracta, p. 337, pl. xix. figs. 2, 3, as

good: Suppl. p. 12.

Leperditia balthica, p. 336, pl. xix. figs. 4a, 46, as doubtful :

Suppl. p. 11.

Leperditia Hisingeri(?), p. 339, pl. xix. fig. 5, as L. Keyserling: :

Suppl. p. 13.

Leperditia Hisingert, var. gracilenta, p. 339, pl. xix. fig. 6, as

L. phaseolus: Suppl. p. 9.

Leperditia balthica, pp. 335, 336, pl. xix. figs. 10, 11, as L. His-

ingert: Suppl. pp. 11 and 14.

Leperditia balthica, var. contracta, p. 338, pl. xix. fig. 138, as LZ.

Hisingert, var. abbreviata: Suppl. pp. 12 and 16.

Leperditia balthica, var. contracta, p. 338, pl. xix. fig. 14, as LZ.

tyraica, on account of its locality : Suppl. p. 12.

Leperditia phaseolus, var. marginata, p. 341, pl. xix. fig. 15, as

L. phaseolus: Suppl. p. 10.

Leperditia Hisingeri, dwarf var., pp. 340, 341, pl. xix. fig. 16, as

L. phaseolus : Suppl. p. 10.

Leperditia balthica, var. contracta, p. 338, pl. xix. fig. 17, as

doubtful: Suppl. p. 12.

At page 18 of his Supplement M. Schmidt describes a fresh Le-

perditia marginata, Keyserling, with its varieties rotundata and

subparallela, from the Waschkina basin, figuring it in pl. i. figs. 13—

19. Itis the Cypridina marginata, Keyserling, 1846, Reise in

Petschoraland, p. 288, pl. xi. figs. 16 a-d; Leperditia marginata,

Schmidt, 1873, Russ. sil. Lep. p. 19, figs. 29-31; and Schm. &

Jones, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. March 1882, p. 171.

At page 21, Leperditia Wiluiensis, Schmidt (1873, op. et. p. 17,

figs. 27, 28), is redescribed and figured, pl.i. figs. 20-22. It is from

the watershed of the Wilui and Olenek in “ East Siberia.”

Leperditia Barbotana, Schm. 1873, Russ. sil. Lep. p. 12, figs. 7-9,

is further treated of at pp. 22 and 87. It is from the banks of the

Kaga, the Belaja, and the Juresenj, on the west side of the Southern

Ural, and from the Upper-Silurian or Hercynian beds, passing up

into the Devonian.

Leperditia Melleri (and its variety levigata, p. 88), pp. 23 and

87, is a new species from the same district, and is figured in pl. 1.

figs. 23-25, and pl. v. a, figs. 23, 24.

A new variety (uralensis) of Z. grandis, Schrenck, is given at

p. 24 and p. 87, pl. i. figs. 26-28. It is from the bank of the Belaja,

below Katschukowa. Some of the limestones of this district are

almost wholly composed of Leperditie.

Specimens of a Leperditia-limestone, probably also of Upper

Silurian age, were collected at Cape Grebenny, in the Waigatsch

Island (off the Northern Ural) during Nordenskjold’s expedition to

Bibliographical Notices. 133

the Jenissei in 1875; and these yielded the new forms, Leperditia

Nordenskjoeldi, Schmidt, Suppl. p. 25, pl. 3. figs. 29-382; L. waigat-

schensis, p. 27, pl. i. figs. 33 a-c; and L. Lindstremi, p. 85, pl. v. a,

figs. 17-20, with its variety mutica, p. 86, pl. v. a, figs. 21, 22.

The second portion of this Part III. of the ‘ Miscellanea Silu-

rica” deals with the Crustacean Fauna of the Hurypterus-beds of

Rootzikill in the island of Qesel, at the mouth of the Gulf of Riga,

Baltic Provinces.

After some remarks (pp. 28-31) on the strata themselves, their

fossil contents, and the results of their careful examination by him-

self and others, M. Schmidt treats of the Hemiasprpm (pp. 31-34),

with their history and characteristics, as shown in the three genera

which he refers to this family, namely :—Pseudoniscus, Nieszkowski ;

Henuaspis, H. Woodward ; and Bunodes, Kichwald. The last genus

is described with three species :—B. lunula, Eichw., p. 35, pl. i.

figs. 34-38, and pl. vu. figs. 1-6; B. Schrencki, Nieszk. (B. lunula,

var. Schrencki, Nieszk., in the explanation of plate i. and in the

Contents), p. 38, pl. i. figs. 839-43; B. rugosus, Nieszk., p. 39, pl. i.

figs. 44-47. Pseudoniscus aculeatus, Nieszk., is figured and de-

scribed p. 40, pl. i. figs. 48,49. The organization and systematic

place of the Hemiaspids are treated at pp. 48-46,

The Evryprerm and their relationships are discussed at pp. 46—

48, and the genus Hurypterus described, with two species (EZ.

Fischert, EKichw., with its var. rectangularis, and E. laticeps), in

detail, at pp. 48-64, pls. ii., iL, ili. a, and vi. figs. 6, 7. The history

and structure of Pterygotus follow (pp. 64 &c.), with a detailed de-

scription and full illustration of Pt. osiliensis, sp. nov. (pp. 70 &e.,

pls. iv., v., v. a, figs. 1-16, pl. vi. figs. 1, 2, 3 (var. laticauda), 4, 5,

and pl. vii. figs. 7, 8, 10, 11, and five woodcuts).

A few, but characteristic, specimens of a Ceratiocaris have also

been discovered at Rootzikiill, in Oesel (p. 85); and these, carefully

figured by M. Schmidt in his pl. vi. fig. 8 (telson and two lateral

cercopods), fig. 9 (telson spine), pl. vil. fig. 12 (left valve of a cara-

pace), have been referred by him to a new species, C. Netlingi

(p. 84, with woodcut, fig. 5), which, as the author observes, is

closely related to the English C. leptodactylus, M‘Coy.

These two memoirs, so highly creditable to the Imperial Academy,

as results of the paleontological research of one of its active mem-

bers, have been written with care and exactitude, both as to the

observation and collection of facts and the recognition and critical

examination of the labours of other paleontologists. The printing

is good, the woodcuts are neat, and the numerous and large plates

are beautifully delicate, elaborate, and trustworthy.

Proceedings of the Bristol Naturalists’ Society. New Series, vol. iy.

part i. (1882-83). 8vo. 1883.

Iy Natural History this Society has interested itself in many biolo-

gical and physical subjects during the Session, as appears from the

134 Bibliographical Notices.

Reports of the Meetings, pp. 61 &c., and has printed in this volume

some very interesting notes:—on a remarkable colony of Alien

Plants on an old heap of colliery (?) rubbish at Kingswood (J. W.

White) ; on the Fungi of the Bristol district, part 6 (C. Bucknall) ;

on Ridgway’s Catalogue of North-American Birds (H. J. Charbon-

nier), treating forcibly of the necessity of restraining and limiting

the making of genera and species out of closely allied forms, and

advocating the trinomial system; on the porosity and density of

rocks with regard to Water-supply (E. Wethered); on the Iron-

turnings Cells and the supposed influence of Points in the libera-

tion of Bubbles (A. M. Worthington) ; on an apparatus for observing

Splashes (A. M. Worthington); the first Telephone (S. P. Thomp-

son); the Rainfall at Clifton (G. F. Burder); and Meteorological

Observations, as regards Temperature, at Clifton (H. B. Jupp).

Part iii. of the Flora [living] of the Bristol Coal-field, edited by J.

W. White, and enumerating the Corallifloree, forms part of this

volume.

Journal of the Royal Geological Society of Ireland. Vol. xvi. part i. ;

n. 8. vol. vi. part ii. for 1881-82. 8vo. 1882.

Transactions of the Geological Society of Glasgow. Vol. vil. part 1.

for 1880-82. 8vo. 1883.

In his Presidential Address, February 20, 1882, the Rev. Dr.

Haughton, F.R.S. &c., sketching the progress of the Royal Geo-

logical Society of Ireland, pointed out (1) that the popularity of the

“original Dublin Geological Society” was due to an unfounded

hope that geologists would find coals and minerals sufficient to en-

able Ireland to compete with the rest of the British Isles in indus-

trial pursuits and in consequent wealth ; (2) that the preponderance

of physical and stratigraphical over paleontological papers in the

‘ Transactions’ is due to the comparative absence of Secondary and

Tertiary strata in Ireland. Dr. Haughton next proceeded to the

discussion of the ‘ two speculative problems which await their solu-

tion and must occupy a foremost place in the geological discussions

of the next fifty years:—I. The absolute duration of Geological

Time. II. The physical causes of the Changes of Climate which

have, beyond question, taken place in the higher latitudes of the

Earth’s Surface.”

The first of these problems was treated by the Rev. Maxwell H.

Close in his Presidential Address in 1878 ; and arguments in favour

of the great duration of geological time have been based on :—1.

The time requisite for the cooling down of the Sun. 2. The present

figure of the Earth as compared with its present rate of rotation.

3. The estimate of Geological Time derived from the rate of increase

of terrestrial temperature with depth. Dr. Haughton intimates

that he has some further evidence in support of the last view. He

further draws attention to the important department of research

which he terms “ Empirical Cosmogony,” as elucidated by Mr,

cal

Bibliographical Notices. 135

George Darwin’s papers on “ Tidal Evolution,” and by calculations

by himself, Prof. Robert Ball, and Mr. A, R. Wallace, on the pro-

bable time taken in the deposition of the stratified rocks. Taking

these at a thickness of 177,200 feet, 3,000,000 square miles as the

area of deposition (on coast-lines for about 30 miles to sea), the

land-surface exposed to denudation as 57,000,000 square miles

(nineteen times the area of deposition), and the present rate of denu-

dation as 1 foot in 3000 years, the duration of Geological Time

equals about 28,000,000 years. Itis to be remembered that it is

highly probable, Dr. Haughton thinks, that during all geclogical

time down to the close of the Tertiary period, the temperature of

the Earth’s atmosphere was higher than at present, and the more

so the further back we go—the necessary consequences being greater

evaporation, greater rainfall, greater denudation, greater trade-

and antitrade-winds, greater ocean-currents, and greater facilities

for spreading and depositing submarine strata.

It is now thought by Prof. Robert Ball that the great tides

caused by the lesser distance of the Moon from the Earth (within

some 50,000,000 years) were pregeological. Mr. J. 8. Newberry

thinks that the Eozoic rocks in North America do not show evidence

of tides much greater than those now in action on the Atlantic

shores of that region (including, however, the 70-ft. tide of the Bay

of Fundy).

Dr. Haughton then took up the “ Supposed Causes of Changes in

Geological Climates.”

I. The Supposed former effects of Star-heat, or warm portions of

space, suggested by Poisson.

Il. The Obliquity of Heliptic. “As this speculation postulates

the change of position of the Earth’s axis in space, it must be set

aside as irrelevant.”

III. Changes in Position of Pole, that is of the Earth’s axis

within the Karth itself, causing the poles and equator to shift their

positions. Such a change of position of the axis of rotation inside

the Earth could be produced by changes of land and water, but not

to nearly so great an amount as required to account for the former

existence of tropical and subtropical animals and plants at places

now in frigid climates, but yielding fossils representing such faunas

and floras. Mr. G. Darwin, basing his calculations on the area of

the ‘‘ Pacific depression,” finds the maximum change of latitude

would be 3°, or 210 miles; and Dr. Haughton, taking Europasia

(as elevated since the commencement of Tertiary times) for his hasis,

finds the change of latitude caused by that elevation to be only 1°,

or 70 miles,

On the contrary, there is evidence of change of latitude to

the extent of 50°, or 3640 miles, with Silurian corals; 43°, or 3010

miles, with Liassic fossils ; 36°, or 2520 miles, with the fossil plants

of Grinnel Land ; 30°, or 2100 miles, with the fossil plants of Disco.

IV. Eccentricity and Perihelion-Longitude of the Earth’s Orbit,

producing a secular variation in climate. This was proposed by

Adhemar, and worked out more fully by J. Croll, J. J. Murphy, and

136 Bibliographical Notices.

A. R. Wallace. The change depending on the position of the peri-

helion is completed in about 21,000 years ; while that depending on

the eccentricity takes ae more ae for its course. The eccen-

tricity may have been ++, instead of ,1,, as at present; but astro-

nomers are unable to say when the maximum eccentricity took

place. An alternate glaciation of the northern and southern hemi-

spheres every 21,000 years has been hence deduced by Adhemar,

Croll, and Murphy, the glaciation being more or less severe as the

eccentricity in the perihelion period was greater or less. Croll

places the glaciation of a hemisphere when its winter solstice was in

aphelion, and Murphy places the glaciation of a hemisphere when

its winter solstice was in perihelion.

Dr. Haughton thus expresses this secular inequality in climate :—

“The mean annual temperature of any place varies as the eccen-

tricity of the earth’s orbit and as the range of temperature from

summer to winter jointly.” He remarks, “ Of these two factors of

climate, viz. eccentricity and range of temperature, the first is astro-

nomical, and the second terrestrial, depending on distribution of land

and water, on ocean-currents and prevailing winds ;” and he adds,

“if we suppose the terrestrial factor to be the same while the

eccentricity attains its maximum, the greatest possible change in

mean annual temperature for any place on the earth’s surface turns

out to be less than 5° F.; and, in order to produce a sensible effect

upon climate, we must suppose that the annual range (terrestrial

factor) must vary also by variation in the distribution of land and

water.” Taking several examples of the present annual range of

temperature at places where Miocene plant-beds exist, and calcu-

lating what the annual range must have been for those fossils, and

allowing for any fairly possible distribution of land and water, Dr.

Haughton shows that ‘ change of eccentricity of the earth’s orbit is

not sufficient to account for former geological climates.”

Vi Geographical Distribution of hoe ind Water. This is shown

in the foregoing discussion to be inadequate as a cause for the past

changes in geological climate; and Dr. Haughton indicates that

Mr. Wallace strongly supports the view of the relative persistence

of the continental and oceanic areas, and that the present differ-

ences of the northern and southern hemispheres have existed from

the beginning and are due to an eccentric position of the earth’s

centre of gravity. The southern hemisphere has thus been always

more under water than the northern, and always will be. It is

warmer than the northern, because it receives three tepid currents

of equatorial water instead of one ; and continental climates are and

always have been characteristic of the northern, and insular climates

of the southern hemisphere.

VI. Alterations in Sun-heat. This is accepted by Dr. Haughton

as the most probable of all causes of change in geological climate,

whether cold or hot. He thinks “ that the Glacial period or periods

were non-periodic, that they affected both hemispheres simulta-

neously, and depended altogether on physical changes in the sun

itself, and not on the physical or astronomical conditions of the

eee a hme

gernens

Miscellaneous. 137

earth.” Mathematical formulie, concerned with the foregoing dis-

cussions, are appended to the Address.

In the same volume Dr. E. Hull gives a clear statement of his

views as to the occurrence of Laurentian beds in Donegal and else-

where in Ireland, and a paper on the metamorphic rocks and

minerals of Sligo and Leitrim, with analyses by Mr. EK. T. Hardman.

Mr. G. A. Kinahan supplies very interesting papers on the gold of Ire-

land and the geological structure of Bray Head. Mr. G. H. Kinahan

explains why some palzeozoic rocks in Galway and elsewhere cannot

be regarded as Laurentian; and supplies a short but valuable illus-

trated note on some moraines on Mount Leinster, in counties Wicklow

and Carlow. Prof. V. Ball gives a catalogue of the meteorites, of

which there are specimens in the museums of Dublin, and includes

the published analyses of four meteorites known to have fallen in

Ireland.

The geologists of Glasgow, like those of Ireland, have brought

down their published work to 1882; but, beginning with 1880, they

make a thicker volume for this issue. It is richer in paleeontolo-

gical researches than the Irish Journal, on account of the great

opportunities for collecting fossils, both from the varied Carbonife-

rous deposits of Lanarkshire and neighbourhood and from the Post-

tertiary beds of the Clyde valley. Of these last, as exposed in the

dock of Garvel Park, at Greenock, Mr. D. Robertson gives a full

account, with long lists of the fossils obtained. Graptolites and

other fossils from Dumfriesshire are treated of by Mr. J. Dairon.

The paleontology of Lesmahagow, Silurian and Carboniferous, is

studied by Dr. J. R. 8. Hunter, and some fossiliferous beds in the

Beith and Daldry district by Mr. Robert Craig. Some fish-remains

from East Kilbride are noted by Mr. James Coutts; Mr. John

Young discriminates some Carboniferous Fenestelle ; and Mr. W. E.

Koch gives an interesting note on Mull and its leaf-beds.

There are several good memoirs also on local geology (Muirkirk,

Isle of Man, Renfrewshire, Shetland, &c.), and on boulders, lime-

stones, and igneous rocks ; also on the bismuth and tin deposits of

Australia. Several of these papers are illustrated with plates.

Neither last nor least in this new volume of the ‘ Transactions’ is

an excellent account of the ‘* Origin and Karly History of the Geo-

logical Society of Glasgow” by Mr. T. M. Barr, who writes care-

fully and enthusiastically, and has much real pleasure in showing

that good work has been done by the members, and that the society

may fairly claim to have made its mark on the progress of geological

science.

MISCELLANEOUS.

A proposed new ‘Nomenclator Paleontologicus.’

WE have received a printed report on the subject of a new ‘ No-

menclator Palontologicus,’ prepared by Dr. M. Neumayr, of

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 10

138 Miscellaneous.

Vienna, to be submitted to a meeting of the Nomenclature Com-

mittee of the International Geological Congress which will be held

at Zurich on the 7th of August. As Bronn’s ‘ Nomenclator’ dates

back to the year 1858, and nothing of the kind has since been

attempted, we can only hope that Dr. Neumayr’s proposal may be

carried out on the scale and with the completeness suggested in

his admirable report.

He commences by discussing the plans adopted in the only two

works which more or less occupy the ground, namely the above-

mentioned ‘ Nomenclator’ of Bronn and d’Orbigny’s ‘ Prodrome,’

both of which are of old date. The plan of the latter, as he very

justly points out, renders it far more useful to the stratigraphist

than to the paleontologist—that is to say, regarding it from the

nomenclatorical point of view; for of course, as indicated by Dr.

Neumayr, the ‘ Prodrome’ must always be consulted by the paleon-

tologist on account of the many new genera and species established

in it.

Bronn’s plan, on the contrary, was purely paleontological ; strati-

graphical considerations had no influence whatever upon the general

arrangement of his work. In the ‘ Nomenclator’ properly so called,

which occupies his first two volumes, he has given a purely alpha-

betical list of all the names existing in palzontology up to his date

(i. e. the generic names are arranged alphabetically and the specific

names also alphabetically under each genus), with indications of

synonymy and references to the works in which the different forms

are described ; while the so-called ‘‘ Enumerator,” constituting the

third volume, forms a complete classified index to the preceding

portion, and at the same time furnishes indications of the strati-

graphical distribution of the species by means of a series of vertical

columns. Of course in five-and-twenty years paleontology has

enormously outgrown this work of Bronn’s; but every one who has

had any thing to do with paleontological work must own that he

owes a deep debt of gratitude to the man who undertook and so suc-

cessfully carried out a work of such labour and research.

** Bronn’s plan of an alphabetical enumeration,” says Dr. Neu-

mayr, “ has the great advantage that no terminal index is necessary,

that doubts as to the arrangement of different forms never stand in

the way, and finally that in those cases in which formerly species

belonging to different types of the animal kingdom were thrown

together under the same generic name, no complication arises from

this confusion. But great as these advantages may be, it is impos-

sible not to see that still more important considerations are in favour

of systematic separation in accordance with the great primary groups

of the animal and vegetable kingdoms: in the first place, in pale-

ontological researches one usually has to do only with representa-

tives of one of the primary divisions at a time; and then we need

only make use of the volume relating to it, and not of the whole

book ; so that asimplification of the work is introduced. Above all,

however, we must be governed by practical considerations as to the

mode of bringing out the work. If every thing is to be brought into

Miscellaneous. 139

alphabetical sequence, the printing cannot be commenced until all

the manuscripts are ready, which will cause great delay in its

appearance ; by the arrangement under the principal types, on the

contrary, the printing of any volume can begin as soon as the

manuscript for it is in hand. In the one case the neglect of a

single contributor will delay the appearance of the whole book, in

the other case only that of a single volume. The difficulties which

may arise from genera of doubtful position may be got over by cross

references. That the addition of an ‘ Enumerator’ is very desirable

need hardly be indicated.”

While we cannot help feeling that Bronn’s plan, pure and simple,

is absolutely the best, especially in view of the second advantage

belonging to it, which Dr. Neumayr has pointed out, with relation

to genera containing species which later researches have proved to

belong to different primary divisions of the animal kingdom, and

indeed with relation to doubtful organisms of all kinds, we cannot,

on the other hand, deny the force of his arguments in favour of the

division of the ‘ Nomenclator’ in accordance with the great groups

of the animal and vegetable kingdoms, more especially when we

look at the formidable dimensions which he considers the new work

will attain. He proposes to divide it into twelve volumes, as fol-

lows :—

Vol. I. Cryptogamia. Vol. VII. Mollusca.

II. Phanerogamia. VILL. Arthropoda.

III. Protozoa. IX. Vertebrata.

IY. Coelenterata. X. & XI. Enumerator.

V. Echinodermata. XII. Index.

VI. Vermes and Molluscoida.

It seems to us that, supposing the suggested arrangement to be

carried out as above, the usefulness of the work will very much de-

pend upon the completeness of the index, which ought to furnish a

guide to every employment of a name (generic or specific) in any

part of the book, and in the case of specific names to indicate in

every case the genus under which the species has been placed in

each particular instance. With such an index as this nearly all

the advantages of Bronn’s plan will be again realized.

Dr. Neumayr further enters upon astatement of the principles on

which he proposes that the work should be carried out, which seem

to us to be exceedingly well conceived. ‘Two points are especially

deserving of approval, namely :—1. The regulation that no changes

of names shall be made in the ‘ Nomenclator; and 2, the pro-

posal to avoid as much as possible all conventional signs, and to

adopt a system of abbreviations in the citations such as will be at

once intelligible to every one “‘ who possesses some knowledge of

literature,” a course which we hope may lead to the suppression of

that most vicious system of quoting from separate copies of papers

without any reference to the periodical works in which they occur,

which now prevails to a very serious extent. Dr. Neumayr’s remark

as to people possessing “some” knowledge of literature would

140 Miscellaneous.

seem to indicate that he is alive to the inconveniences of this prac-

tice; and his selection of the Royal Society’s List of Scientific Papers

as a model points in the same direction. We can only say that we

hope his proposals may be carried out upon, or nearly upon, the

lines indicated in his report; in this case he and his collabora-

ters will richly merit the thanks of all paleontologists. Under

favourable circumstances he thinks the first volume might appear in

from two to three years, and the whole be finished in from eight to

ten years !

Selenotropism in Plants. By M. C. Musser.

Being struck with the influence exerted by light of very little in-

tensity upon the so-called heliotropic movements of plants, the

author, in order to vary the experiments, adopted the reflected light

of the moon as his sole illumination. He sowed in pots seeds of

plants well known for their phototropic sensibility, such as Lens

esculenta, Ménch, Ervuwm lens, Linn., Vicia sativa, Linn., &e.

When the young plants were a few centimetres long he placed them

in a very dark place, where they remained until the night of the

experiment. The stems became slender, long, and white; the

leaves, which were but little developed, alone had a slightly yellow

tinge. During the night of 23-24th February, with a very clear

sky, these seedlings were placed in a large window looking to the

south, so that they received the direct light of the moon from 9 p.m.

to 83a.m. After a very few minutes of exposure the stems became

bent, with the concavity and the terminal bud always presented to

the moon, and following it in its course; only about 2 a.m., owing to

the changed position of the moon, the bow became nearly straight.

The seedlings were then carried to another window looking west-

ward ; and a new influence was produced, and continued until the

moment of the disappearance of the moon behind the mountain.

After a pause of a few minutes the stems then erected themselves

more or less under the influence of internal causes and geotropism.

To these movements, which he observed for three successive nights,

the author gives the name of selenotropism.—Comptes Rendus,

March 5, 1883, p. 663.

Jumping Seeds and Galls*. By Cuartes V, Riney.

Having recently received some fresh specimens of so-called

“¢ Mexican Jumping Seeds,” or ‘‘ Devil’s Beans,” as they are popu-

larly called, I take occasion while yet they are active to exhibit them

to the society. It will be noticed that these seeds are somewhat

triangular, or of the shape of convolvulus-seeds, there being two flat

sides meeting at an obtuse angle, and a convex one, which has a

median carina. They not only roll from one side to another, but

* Read before the Biological Society of Washington, November 24,

1882

Miscellaneous. 141

actually move by jerks and jumps, and will, when very active, jump

at least a line from any object they may be resting on. The actual

jumping-power has been doubted by some writers; but I have often

witnessed it. To the uninitiated these movements of a hard seed

seem little less than miraculous. They are induced by a plump,

whitish, lepidopterous larva which occupies about one fifth of the

interior, the occupied seed being, in fact, but a hollow shell, with

an inner lining of silk which the larva has spun. The larva looks

very much like the common apple-worm (Carpocapsa pomonella),

and belongs, in fact, to the same genus. It resembles it further in

remaining for a long time in the full-grown larva state before trans-

forming, so that the seeds will keep up their motion throughout

most of the winter months. When about to transform, which is

usually in the months of January and February, it cuts a neat cir-

cular door in the convex side of its house, strengthens the same

with silk, spins a loose tube of silk within the seed, and therein

transforms to the pupa state. The moth soon afterwards pushes its

way out from the little door prepared for it.

The moth was first described in 1857 as Carpocapsa saltitans by

Prof. J. O. Westwood*, and afterward as Carpocapsa Dehaisiana by

Mons. H. Lucas.

In regard to the plant on which these seeds occur there is much

yet to learn; and I quote what Mr. G. W. Barnes, president of the

San Diego Society of Natural History, wrote me in 1874 concern-

ing it, in the hope that some of the botanists present may recog-

nize it :—

“¢ ARRowW-WEED (Yerba de flecha).—This is the name the shrub

bears that produces the triangular seeds that during six or eight

months have a continual jumping movement. The shrub is small,

from 4 to 6 feet in height, branchy, and in the month of June and

July yields the seeds, a pod containing three to five seeds. These

seeds have each a little worm inside. The leaf of the plant is very

similar to that of the garambullo, the only difference being in the

size, this being a little larger. It is half an inch in length and a

quarter of an inch in width, a little more or less. The bark of the

shrub is ash-coloured ; and the leaf is perfectly green during all the

seasons. By merely stirring coffee, or any drink, with a small

branch of it, it acts as an active cathartic. Taken in large doses it

is an active poison, speedily causing death unless counteracted by

an antidote.”

In a recent letter he states that he is informed that the region

of Mamos, in Sonora, is the only place where the plant grows ; that

the tree is about 4 feet high, and is a species of laurel, with the

* Proc. Ashmolean Soe. of Oxford, 1857, t. iii. pp. 1387, 138; see also

Trans. Lond. Ent. Soc. ser. 2, 1858, t. iv. p. 27, and Gard. Chron. 1859,

Noy. 12, p. 909.

+ “Note sur les grains d’une Euphorbiacée de Mexique sautant au

dessus du sol par les vibrations d’une larve de l’ordre des lépidoptéres

vivant en dedans,” Ann. Soc. Ent. de France, sér. 3, t. vi. Bull. pp. 10,

33, 41, 44 (1859), t. vii. pp. 561-566,

142 Miscellaneous.

leaves of a dark varnished green. ‘‘ It bears the seeds only once in

two years. The tree is called Brincador (jumper), and the seeds

are called Brincaderos. The seeds are more quiet in fair weather,

and lively on the approach of a storm.”

Prof. Westwood mentions the fact that the plant is known by

the Mexicans as “ Oolliguaja ;” and Prof. E. P. Cox, formerly State

Geologist of Indiana, now living on the Pacific coast, informs me

that the shrub has a wood something like hazel or whahoo; that

the leaf is like a broad and short willow leaf. He confirms the

statement as to its poisonous character; that a stick of the shrub,

when used by the natives to stir their ‘‘ penola” (ground corn-meal,

parched), purges, and that the shrub is used to poison arrowheads.

The plant is undoubtedly Kuphorbiaceous.

The peculiarity about this insect is that it is the only one of its

order, so far as we know, which possesses this habit; and it is not

easy to conceive of what benefit this habit can be other than the

possible protection afforded by working the seed, after it falls to the

ground, into sheltered situations.

The true explanation of the movements of the larva by which the

seed is made to jump was first given by me in the ‘ Transactions of

the Saint Louis Academy of Science’ for December 6, 1875 (vol. ii.

p. exci).

The jumping-power exhibited in this “seed,” however, is trifling

compared with that possessed by a little gall which I also exhibit.

This gall, about the size of a mustard-seed, and looking very much

like a miniature acorn, is found in large numbers on the underside

of the leaves of various oaks of the white-oak group, and has been

reported from Ohio, Indiana, Missouri, and California. It falls

from a cavity on the under side of the leaves, very much as an

acorn falls from its cup, and is sometimes so abundant that the

ground beneath an infested tree is literally covered. It is produced

by a little black Cynips, which was described as Cynips saltatorius

by Mr. Henry Edwards. The bounding motion is doubtless caused

by the larva which lies curved within the gall, and very much on

the same principle that the common cheese-skipper (Piophila caser)

is known to spring or skip. Dr. W. H. Mussey, of Cincinnati, in a

communication to the Natural History Society of that city, Decem-

ber 1875, states, in fact, that such is the case, though members of

the California Academy who have written on the subject assert

that the motion is made by the pupa, which I think very impro-

bable. At all events the bounding motion is great, as the little

gall may be thrown 2 or 3 inches from the earth; and there are

few things more curious than to witness, as I have done, a large

number of these tiny galls in constant motion under atree. They

cause a noise upon the fallen leaves that may be likened to the

pattering of rain.—Proc. United States Nat. Mus. p. 6382,

Miscellaneous. 143

The ‘* Crag Mollusca.”

In the last number of the ‘Annals’ Mr. Searles V. Wood ex-

pressed his opinion that Purpura tetragona of his late father’s

Monograph on the Crag Mollusca was a variety of Murea erinaceus,

and not of Purpura lapillus, in which Prof. Prestwich placed it on

my authority, in his papers on the Crag beds of Norfolk and Suffolk.

This question involves a difference not merely of a specific but of a

generic and even family character. In Murew the canal is of

moderate length, and is more or less covered over or closed above ; in

Purpura the canal is very short and quite open. All the specimens

which I have seen of Purpura tetragona, including the types in the

British Museum, belong (as I consider) to the latter genus, in which

Mr. Wood’s father properly placed it. Some Crag specimens of Pur-

pura lapillus are carinated, and others are more or less cancellated,

as in the variety tetragona. The sculpture of Murewv erinaceus is

different. I may observe that the specific or varietal name tetra-

gona ought not to be accentuated like the English word “ tetragonal,”

but that the penultimate syllable is long, as in the Latin word

“ tetragonus.”

J. Gwyn JEFFREYs.

On a new Crinoid from the Southern Sea. By P. Herserr

Carpenter, M.A., Assistant Master at Eton College.

Among the collections of the late Sir Wyville Thomson a small

Comatula has recently been discovered which was dredged by the

‘Challenger’ at a depth of 1800 fathoms in the Southern Sea.

Although it is unusually small, the diameter of the calyx being only

2 millim., the characters presented by this form are such as to

render it by far the most remarkable among all the types of recent

Crinoids, whether stalked or free. The name proposed for it is

Thaumatocrinus renovatus.

It has only five arms, and in this respect resembles Hudiocrinus.

But the basals, instead of becoming transformed into a rosette as in

that genus, persist on the exterior of the calyx, and form a closed

ring of relatively large plates, which rest upon the centrodorsal.

They support a ring of ten plates, five of which, alternating with

the basals, bear the arms, and are therefore the radials. These

radials, however, do not meet one another laterally ; for they alter-

nate with five plates slightly smaller than themselves, which rest

upon the basals, and, with one exception, terminate in a free edge

at the margin of the disk. The exception is the interradial of the

anal side, which bears a short and tapering arm-like appendage of

five or six joints. It has no special relation to the anal tube, the

lower part of which, like the peripheral portion of the disk, bears a

pavement of anambulacral plates. But the centre of the disk is

occupied by a relatively large and substantial oral pyramid ; so that

the disk in its general aspect resembles that of Hyocrinus.

144 Miscellaneous.

Thaumatocrinus is thus distinguished by four striking peculi-

arities :—

(1) The presence of a closed ring of basals upon the exterior of

the calyx.

(2) The persistence of the oral plates of the larva, as in Hyo-

crinus and Rhizocrinus.

(3) The separation of the primary radials by interradials which

rest on the basals.

(4) The presence of an arm-like appendage on the interradial

plate of the anal side.

Taking these in order—

(1) No adult Comatula, except the recent Atelecrinus and some

little-known fossils, has a closed ring of basals; and even in Afele-

crinus they are quite small and insignificant.

(2) In all recent Comatule, in the Pentacrinide, and in Bathy-

crinus, the oral plates of the larva become resorbed as maturity is

approached. In Thaumatocrinus, however, they are retained, as in

Hyocrinus, Rhizocrinus, and Holopus, representatives of three diffe-

rent familes of Neocrinoids.

(3) There is no Neocrinoid, either stalked or free, in which the

primary radials remain permanently separated as they are in Thau-

matocrinus and for a short time after their first appearance in the

larva of ordinary Crinoids. The only Palzeocrinoids presenting this

feature are certain of the Rhodocrinide (as understood by Wachs-

muth and Springer), e. g. Leteocrinus, Rhodocrinus, Thylacocrinus,

&c. In the two latter, and in the other genera which have been

grouped together with them into the section Rhodoerinites (W. and

S.), there is a single interradial intervening between every two

radials, and resting on a basal just as in Thaumatocrinus, But in

the Lower Silurian Feteocrinus (of Billings, emend. W. and 8.) the

interradial areas contain a large number of minute pieces of irre-

gular form and arrangement.

(4) It is only, however, in Reteocrinus and in the allied genus

Xenocrinus, Miller, which is also of Lower Silurian age*, that an

anal appendage similar to that of 7’aumatocrinus is to be met with.

Of the four distinguishing characters of T’hawmatocrinus, therefore,

one appears in one or perhaps in two genera of Comatule ; another

is not to be met with in any Comatula, though occurring in certain

stalked Crinoids; while the two remaining characters are limited to

one family of the Palocrinoids, one of them being peculiar to one,

or at most two genera which are confined tv the Lower Silurian

rocks.

Their reappearance in such a specialized type as a recent Comatula

is therefore all the more striking.—Proc. Roy. Soc. 1883, No. 225,

p. 138.

* Reteocrinus occurs in the Trenton Limestone of Ottawa and in the

Hudson-river group of Indiana and Ohio. -Xenocrinus has as yet been

found in the latter group only. I cannot help suspecting that a better

knowledge of this type will lead to its absorption into Reteocrinus,—

PAG.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES.]

No. 69. SEPTEMBER 1883.

XVIII—On the Classification of the Orders of Orthoptera

and Neuroptera. By A. 8. Packarp, Jun.*

In the forthcoming third report of the U.S. Entomological

Commission we have endeavoured to ascertain the position of

the Orthoptera in reference to allied ametabolous insects.

The following pages are extracted from the chapter, with

some omissions.

We have examined the fundamental characters of the head,

thorax, and abdomen (points neglected by most systematic

writers), not spending much time on the peripheral, ¢. e. the

superficial, adaptive characters of the mouth-parts, wings, and

legs, which have been elaborated by systematic entomologists,

believing that by this method perhaps more thorough and

better-grounded views might result. The outcome has been

to lead us to separate the Neuroptera, as defined further on,

from the Pseudoneuroptera, and to regard these two groups,

with the Orthoptera and Dermatoptera, as four orders of a

category which may be regarded as a superorder, for which

the name Phyloptera is proposed, as these four orders are pro-

bably closely allied to, if not in some cases identical with, the

stem or ancestral groups from which probably all the higher

* From a separate impression from the ‘American Naturalist’ for

P _ imp

August 1883, communicated by the Author.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. i

146 Dr. A. S. Packard, Jun., on the Classification of

orders (the Hemiptera, Coleoptera, Diptera, Lepidoptera, and

Hymenoptera) have originated.

We will first briefly summarize the characters, as we under-

stand them, of the Phyloptera as a whole; then the distin-

guishing marks of the four orders.

Superorder PHYLOPTERA®*.

The mouth-parts are free, adapted invariably for biting, the

mandibles being toothed and adapted for chewing ; the first

maxille separate, with three divisions, the outer bearing

usually five-jointed palpi; the second maxille united to form

a labium divided into a submentum, mentum, and ligula, the

latter varying much, being either cleft (Pseudoneuroptera) or

entire (Neuroptera), and bearing usually a three-jointed palpus.

This is the primitive elementary condition of the mouth-parts,

and such as obtains in Coleopterous larve. ‘The head is

notable from the great development of the epicranium. The

clypeus is often divided into two portions, a posterior (post-

clypeus) and anterior (anteclypeus) ; in the other and higher

orders the clypeus is entire.

The prothorax is usually very large and square; but in a

few families, as the Phryganeide, Panorpide, Psocide, Libel-

lulidee, and Ephemeridee, it is small and collar-lhke. There is

a marked equality in size and form of the meso- and metatho-

rax ; in most Orthoptera and some Pseudoneuroptera and Neu-

roptera the metathorax is often even larger than the meso-

thorax ; in this respect the Phyloptera differ from any of the

higher Hexapoda. In both of the two hinder segments of

the thorax the four tergal sclerites, viz. the preescutum, scutum,

scutellum, and postscutellum, are each well developed, and

more equably so than in any other order. The scutum is

deeply excavated in front to receive the often large subtrian-

gular or cordate prescutum; and in some genera the scutum

is, so to speak, cleft in two by the meeting of the prescutum

and scutellum in the median line. The flanks of the thorax

or pleurites, are often very large, and the episternum and epi-

merum are broad, oblong, or squarish ; and these sclerites are

sometimes subdivided into an upper anda lower division (supra-

and infra-epimerum or episternum). ‘The sternum is often

large, flat, and broad ; it 1s sometimes divided into a sternum

and preesternum.

The wings are usually net-veined, often with numerous

longitudinal veins, the branches of the subcostal, median, and

submedian veins being either very long and parallel with the

* From dddo», gens, nation; mrepdy, wing.

a tie Pe rennet are

Eacaiylinge en

the Orders of Orthoptera and Neuroptera. 147

longitudinal axis of the wing, or numerous and small (espe-

cially in the hind wings of Orthoptera).

The hind wings are often (Orthoptera and Odonata) broader

and larger than the anterior pair, the metathorax in such cases

being a little larger than the mesothorax.

-The abdomen has in this group, including representatives

of the Neuroptera, Orthoptera, Dermatoptera, and Pseudoneu-

roptera, besides a tenth nearly complete segment, the rudi-

ments of an eleventh uromere, represented by a tergite form-

ing the supraanal triangular plate. Well-developed jointed

cercopoda occur in the Orthoptera and Pseudoneuroptera,

while the forceps of Forficula (Dermatoptera) are undoubtedly

modified cercopoda. An ovipositor occurs in the Neuroptera

(Panorpide) and Orthoptera.

The metamorphosis is incomplete in all the orders of Phylo-

ptera except the more recent and higher order, ¢. e. the Neuro-

ptera (in Erichson’s sense), in which the transformations are

complete, the pupa being quiescent and wholly unlike the

larva.

The relative standing of the four orders of Phyloptera is

shown in the table or genealogical tree of the winged insects

on page 154.

The sequence of the orders, such as we are compelled to

adopt in writing or speaking of them, is difficult to decide upon.

Beginning with what on the whole may be regarded as the

lowest order, we might first take up the Dermatoptera, which

are, in most respects, the most generalized forms, and stand

nearest to the Thysanura (Japyz).

The following is the succession of orders, placing the lowest

uppermost :-—

Dermatoptera, Burm.

Orthoptera, Linn.

Pseudoneuroptera, Krichson.

Neuroptera, Linn., as restricted by Hrichson.

Before discussing the relative standing of these orders, we

will briefly indicate the more salient and generally applicable

differential characters, especially what we regard as the more

fundamental ones, but slightly touching upon the mouth-parts

and wings, these being peripheral and more adaptive charac-

ters and liable to greatest variation, and being of less value in

charcterizing the orders of Phyloptera.

Order 1. DERMATOPTERA.

Forficula presents so many features separating it from the

11*

148 Dr. A. 8. Packard, Jun., on the Classification of

Orthoptera, and is so composite a form, that it should be re-

garded as the type of a distinct order, in which it was origi-

nally placed by Leach, Kirby, Burmeister, and Westwood.

Its composite nature is seen both in the elytra and the hind

wings, which anticipate the Coleopterous type of wings. On

the other hand, the larves resemble Japyx, the Thysanuran,

with its anal forceps; and in most respects orficula is the

lowest, most decided stem form of the Phyloptera.

The Dermatoptera are characterized by the flatness of the

body and the large terminal forceps. The head is flat, hori-

zontal in position, while the presence of the V-shaped epicra-

nial suture is a sign of inferiority, as it is characteristic of

Thysanura and Platypteran larve as well as of Colecpterous

larve. The remarkable thoracic structure, which is described

further on, as wellas the curious overlapping of the abdominal

tergites, forbid our uniting the Dermatoptera with the Ortho-

ptera. The small short elytra and the very large, rounded,

longitudinally and once crossfolded hind wings, which remind

us rather of the Coleoptera than Orthoptera, are also important

diagnostic features. Finally the metamorphosis of the Der-

matoptera is even less complete than that of the Orthoptera.

The ligula is bifid, being divided into a pair of two-jointed

paraglosse. The labium is thus similar to that of the Or-

thoptera, though scarcely more like them than like Zermes.

Order 2. ORTHOPTERA.

The head is more or less vertical in position; the front is

very latge, broad, and long, the epicranial region very large

and often hypertrophied. ‘The clypeus is large and subdivided

as in Pseudoneuroptera. In the Orthoptera, as a rule, the

deeply-cleft ligula is indistinctly four-lobed, the outer pair of

paraglossxe very well developed, while the inner pair is minute

or undeveloped, as in the Acrydii, especially Caloptenus ; but

in the Locustarie the ligula is four-lobed, and in the Gryllide

decidedly so. In the Mantide and Blattarie the ligula is

plainly four-lobed, nearly as much so as in the Termitide.

In the Phasmide the ligula is intermediate in form between

the Mantide and Locustarie.

The prothorax is usually remarkably large, particularly the

notum. ‘The meso- and metanotum exactly repeat each other,

and the metanotum is usually (Acrydii and Locustariz) longer

and larger than the mesonotum, the hind wings being almost

uniformly much larger than the anterior pair. The pleurites

are very large and square as well as high, the episterna and

epimera being large and oblong and equally developed. The

the Orders of Orthoptera and Neuroptera. 149

sternites are very large and broad. The coxe are sometimes

(Blatta) very large; the hind legs in the Acrydii are much

larger than the anterior pairs. ‘The fore wings are narrower

than the hinder pair, and show a slight tendency to become

subelytriform; on the other hand, the hind wings are very

large and broad, distinctly net-veined, with numerous longi-

tudinal veins, and they fold up longitudinally.

The abdomen has eleven uromeres, the eleventh forming a

triangular tergite. The cercopoda are often (Blatta, Mantis,

&c.) multiarticulate and well developed, while the ovipositor

is often large and perfect. The metamorphosis is more in-

complete than in the Pseudoneuroptera.

With the exclusion of the Forficularie, the Orthoptera, as

here restricted, are a tolerably well-circumscribed group 3 and

though there are great structural differences between the fami-

lies, yet the connexion or sequence of the families from the

Blattarie through the Phasmide and Mantide and Acrydi

to the Locustariz, and finally the highest family, the Gryllidee,

is one which can be distinctly perceived. ‘There is no occa-

sion for a subdivision of the order into groups higher than

families, as the Blattariz are but a family removed from the

Mantide.

Order 3. PSEUDONEUROPTERA, Hrichson.

It is difficult, if not impossible, to satisfactorily characterize

by a sharp-cut definition this very elastic order. As regards

the thorax, there is no uniformity in the structure that we

have been able to discover, nor is there in the structure of the

wings, nor more than a general resemblance in the mouth-

parts.

The definition of the Pseudoneuroptera in Hagen’s ‘ Synop-

sis of the Neuroptera of North America,’ as given in the ana-

lytical table, which is stated in a footnote to have been prepared

at the request of the Smithsonian Institution by Baron Osten

Sacken, gives no fundamental characters based on a study of

the trunk. Those mentioned are what we have called peri-

pheral characters, 7. e. those drawn from the mouth-parts,

wings, and appendages. So far as we know, no satisfactory

definition of the Pseudoneuroptera has ever been given. In

Hagen’s ‘Synopsis,’ among the other superficial characters

given are these:—‘‘ Lower lip mostly cleft;” ‘ antenne

either subulate and thin, the tarsi three- to five-articulate, or

setiform or filiform, in which case the tarsi are two- to four-

articulate.’ ‘These characters, though superficial, are the

most important yet presented, perhaps (disregarding the

150 Dr. A. 8. Packard, Jun., on the Classification of

metamorphosis), for separating the Pseudoneuroptera from

the genuine Neuroptera. But the cleft labium is also to be

found in Orthoptera ; and among the Orthoptera, which usually

have five-jointed tarsi, the Mantide have four tarsal joints.

The Perlide, Odonata, and Hphemerina have been by Ger-

stiicker (Peters and Carus’s ‘ Zoologie’) associated with the

Orthoptera under the name Orthoptera amphibiotica; but

such an alliance does not seem to us to be entirely a natural

or convenient one ; it is simply transferring a mass of hetero-

geneous forms to what, as now limited, is a natural and well

circumscribed category ; and yet we confess that it is difficult

to give diagnostic adult characters separating the Pseudoneu-

roptera from the Orthoptera, though the general facies of the

Orthoptera is quite unlike that of the Pseudoneuroptera.

Inthe Pseudoneuroptera, beginning with the more generalized

forms, the Perlides and 'Termitide, the labium (second max-

ill) is deeply cleft, the cleft not, however, in these or any

other insects, extending to the mentum, or even clear through

the palpiger. Each lobe is also cleft, so that the ligula is

really four-lobed ; the outer lobes are called by Gerstiicker *

the ‘‘lamina externa,” and the inner the “ lamina interna.”

These finger-shaped non-articulated fleshy lobes appear to be

homologous with, or at least suggest, the outer pair of para-

glosse of the Coleoptera and Hymenoptera. In the Perlide

the four lobes of the ligula are well developed, and the lobes

of the inner pair are broader than the outer. In the Termi-

tide the lobes are well developed, but the inner pair of lobes

is either one half or not quite so wide as the outer paraglosse ;

the palpiger is cleft. In the Embidz, according to Savigny’s

figures, the ligula is four-lobed, but the inner pair are narrow

and rudimentary. é'

In the Odonata, according to Gersticker’s excellent draw-

ings, the ligula varies much. In Gomphus it is entire; in

some of the higher Libelluline only two-lobed; but in

Aischna it is four-lobed, the outer lobe slender but separate

from the palpus. In Calopteryx the ligula is widely cleft,

the two inner lobes are wide apart, while the outer pair are con-

solidated with the labial palpi. Owing to the specialized

nature of the labial palpi, the mouth-parts of the Odonata are

sufficiently sue generis and distinctive to prevent their being

placed among the Orthoptera, even if the thorax were not so

dissimilar. In the aborted labium and other mouth-parts of

the Ephemerina we also have strongly-marked characteristics

* “ Zur Morphologie der Orthoptera amphibiotica,” Aus der Festschrift

zur Gesellsch. naturforsch. Freunde, 1873,

the Orders of Orthoptera and Neuroptera. 151

forbidding their being placed in the Orthoptera; were it not

for the strong resemblance of the Termitide to the Orthoptera

(Blattariz), probably no one would have thought of carrying

the Pseudoneuroptera over into the Orthoptera.

The relative proportion of the head and sclerites varies

greatly ; no general rule can be laid down as to the relative

proportions of the epicranium and of the clypeus or of the

gular region.

On this account I had at one time decided to split the group

into two, and to restrict Erichson’s Pseudoneuroptera to the

Platyptera *, and to adopt Latreille’s term Subulicornia for

the Odonata and Ephemerina (Subulicornes of Latreille). It

may, however, be best for the sake of clearness to retain

Erichson’s order Pseudoneuroptera as he indicated it, and to

dismember it into what may be regarded, provisionally at

least, as three suborders :—

1. Platyptera (Termitidee, Embide, Psocide, and Perlidee

=Corrodentia and Orthoptera amphibiotica in part).

2. Odonata (Libellulide).

3. Lphemerina (Kphemeride).

It is comparatively easy to give well-grounded differential

characters for these three suborders. They are so distinct

that they may perhaps hereafter be regarded as entitled to the

rank of orders, or the Pseudoneuroptera may be dismembered

into the Pseudoneuroptera and Subulicornia (Odonata and

Ephemerina).

1. Platyptera.—The body is flattened; the head horizontal.

The pronotum is large, broad, and square. The meso- and

metanotum are remarkable on account of the imperfect

differentiation of the scutum and scutellum; the latter is

indefinite in outline, but very large. The flanks (pleurites)

are, when long, oblique or are short. The sternites are

usually very large and broad. There are often eleven uro-

meres.

2. Odonata.a—While the Odonata and Ephemerina are

somewhat alike as regards the form and venation of the fore

wings, in their mouth-parts and thorax they are entirely

unlike. The Odonata are remarkable for the great dorsal

(tergal) development of the mesepisterna and the enormous

development of the meso- and metapleurites in general, while

* This name (zAards, flat, wrepov, wing) is in allusion to the wings,

which the majority (the Psocids folding their wings rather roof-like) fold

flat on the back. The Isoptera of Brullé comprise the Termitide,

152. Dr. A. 8. Packard, Jun., on the Classification of

the notum of meso- and metathorax, though of the same type

as in the Orthoptera, is minute in size. The prothorax is very

small, both dorsally and on the sides forming a collar.

The wings are as markedly net-veined as in the Ortho-

ptera, though the hinder pair are not folded longitudinally as

in that order. The Odonata literally live on the wing, and

thus the shape of the sclerites of the notum of the wing-bear-

ing segments approaches that of the Orthoptera, although the

prothorax is remarkably small compared with that of the

Orthoptera, and forbids their union with this order, as was

done by Gerstiicker and other German entomologists. The

head of the Odonata is remarkable for the enormous size of

the eyes and the consequent great reduction in size of the

epicranium as compared with the large epicranium of the

Orthoptera. The mouth-parts are like those of the Ortho-

ptera, except that the second maxille form a remarkable

mask-like labium. The abdomen is very long, slender, and

cylindrical; there are eleven uromeres, the eleventh being

well represented, while the cercopoda are not jointed, but in the

form of claspers.

3. Ephemerina.—In the small epicranium and the large

male eyes the Ephemerina resemble the Odonata, though the

rudimentary mouth-parts are in plan entirely unlike theirs.

So also the prothorax is small and annular ; but the subspheri-

cal concentrated thorax is remarkable for the large meso-

thorax and the small metathorax. Hence the hind wings are

small and sometimes obsolete. The long slender abdomen

has ten uromeres, and bears, besides the two long filamental

multiarticulate cercopoda, a third median one.

The larvee of the lower Odonata and of the Ephemeride

closely approach in form those of the Perlide, showing that

the three suborders here mentioned probably had a common

ancestry, which can be theoretically traced to a form not

remote from Campodea. By reason of the general resem-

blance of the larval forms of these three suborders it would be

unadvisable to separate the Odonata and Ephemerina from

the Platyptera, although when we consider the adult forms

alone there would appear to be some grounds for such a

division.

Order 4. NEUROPTERA.

The head is horizontal and somewhat flattened, except in

the Trichoptera and Panorpide, where it is subspherical and

vertical. ‘The body shows a tendency to be round or cylin-

drical, the thorax being more or less spherical ; but there is

the Orders of Orthoptera and Neuroptera. 153

great diversity in form from the Sialide to the Trichoptera.

The mouth-parts are free, and the mandibles well developed,

except in the Trichoptera, where the mandibles are nearly

obsolete in form and functionless, thus suggesting or antici-

pating the Lepidoptera.

In the Neuroptera the ligula is entirely unlike that of any of

the foregoing and lower groups. It is entire, forming a broad,

flat, large rounded lobe; it is largest in Myrmeleon, Ascala-

phus, and Mantispa, but smaller in Corydalis, where it is also

narrower and indented on the front edge.

In Panorpa the ligula is minute, rudimentary ; in the Tri-

choptera it is also minute and rudimentary.

The prothorax is usually (Planipennia) large, broad, and

square, but is ring- or collar-like im the Trichoptera, being

short and small, much as in Lepidoptera. Except in the 'T'ri-

choptera, the meso- and metanotum are characterized by the

large cordate preescutum; and in the Hemerobina the meta-

scutum is partially or (in Ascalaphus) wholly cleft, the pre-

scutum and scutellum meeting on the median line of the

thorax.

In the Hemerobina and Sialidez the metathorax is as large

or nearly as large as the mesothorax, and the hind wings are

as large as the anterior pair. The wings are not net-veined,

the type of venation being entirely unlike that of the Ortho-

ptera and Pseudoneureptera. The costal space is wide and

well marked, and the transverse veinlets are few and far apart

compared with the two orders just mentioned.

The abdomen is cylindrical; and there are nine or ten uro-

meres. The ovipositor is only developed in Rhaphidia, while

the cercopoda are not developed. The metamorphosis is

complete, as in the Lepidoptera &c., the pupa being entirely

unlike the larva, and quiescent, often protected by a cocoon

or case. The order may be divided into two suborders :—

1. Planipennia (Sialide, Hemerobiide, Panorpide).

2. Trichoptera (Phryganeide).

The following tabular view will in a degree express our

views as to the classification of the orders of the hexapodous

or winged insects :—

154 Mr. J. Young on Ure’s “Millepore.”

Superorders. Orders. Suborders.

( Htymenoptera.

Lepidoptera.

ee aT aa Diptera (genuina).

DAD GGTA ih. cc sok sia © Aphaniptera.

Pupipaya.

7 i Coleoptera (genuina).

Elytrophora + ..| Coleoptera ........ | Steere

Homoptera.

. chiens Heteroptera.

Eurhynchotat..| Hemiptera ........ Physapoda.

Mallophaga.

Neuroptera ........ Tren On ore

Planipennia.

Odonata.

Phyloptera ..../\ Pseudoneuroptera ..| « Ephemerina.

Platyptera.

Orthoptera

Dermatoptera.

Cinura.

Synaptera§ ....| Thysanura ........ Symphyla.

Collembola.

XIX.—On Ure’s “ Millepore,” Tabulipora (Cellepora) Uri,

Flem. By Joun Youna, F.G.S.

To the Editors of the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural

History.’

GENTLEMEN,—In vol. xii. (4th series) of the ‘Annals’

(for 1874) there isa short paper by R. Etheridge, Jun., en-

titled “‘ Observations on Chetetes tumidus, Phill.,” in which,

* We propose the name Euglossata for the highest insects, comprising

those orders which, besides having the mouth-parts (either the first or

second maxille or both) modified so as to sip, suck, or lap up liquid food,

also have the body cylindrical and the thorax more or less spherical and

concentrated.

+ This term is proposed for the Coleoptera alone.

t This term is proposed for the Hemiptera, in all of which, except the

Mallophaga and Physapoda (Thrips), the mouth-parts are united to form

a sucking-beak.

§ This term is proposed for the Thysanuran apterous Hexapods, which

are perhaps nearly the morphological equivalents of either of the three

other superorders. .

Mr. J. Young on Ure’s “Millepore.”’ 155

after referring to the several paleontologists who had noticed

the structure of this organism, he describes some sections that

he had prepared, and which are figured in plate xi. figs. 1 to 3.

At page 195 he says, “ This is probably the fossil figured

by Ure in his ‘ History of Rutherglen and East Kilbride’

(pl. xx fig. 1), and described by Fleming as Cellepora Urii

(Brit. Animals, 1828, p. 533). If this is so, Ure was the first

to figure Chetetes tumidus; and it, like many of his figures,

is very faithfully drawn.”

Recently I have discovered what I believe to be an impor-

tant internal character in the structure of the organism

which Ure figured and described in 1793 as a species of

“ Millepore,” and which will, I think, be the means of

distinguishing it from Phillips’s species, with which it has

all along been confounded, from the great resemblance of the

external characters in the two organisms.

This new character consists of a series of thin, perforated

tabule that exist in the outer portion of the tubes of the

larger corallites. The perforation or central opening in these

tabule is of a roundly crescentic or reniform shape, and has

a thickened edge or rim around its margin, its diameter being

one third the width of the tubes. The concave edge of the

opening in branching specimens is invariably turned towards

the lower end of the branches; so that from this feature in the

form of the perforation one is always able, in fragments, to

say which was the lower or upper end of any branch in speci-

mens where it could not be so determined from any of the

other characters seen on the surface.

The tabule are numerous, their number varying from five

to eight in each corallite, they being only about the diameter

of the tubes apart, and are apparently confined to the outer

portion, where the tubes bend from the nearly vertical posi-

tion they occupy within the centre of the branches to open at

right angles on the surface.

{ first discovered this new character in thin incrusting speci-

mens of the organism, which seems to be its first or earliest

stage, and in which it is generally found attached to stems of

erinoids, corals, and shells, in spot-like crusts that vary in

size from one fourth of an inch to two or more inches in length,

From this first thin incrusting stage the organism afterwards

grew, in a branching manner, as described by Ure, until it

attained a height, as seen in some specimens, of more than

3 inches. ‘The branches, which are dichotomous and have

rounded extremities, seldom exceed more than from 2 to 3

lines in diameter, their section varying from round to oval; but

they are often found much crushed whenimbedded in soft shale.

156 Mr. J. Young on Ure’s “Millepore.”

The external characters of Ure’s “ Millepore”’ vary some-

what in its several stages and in different specimens. In

young examples the cells are bounded by thin walls, and the

openings are polygonal. In older specimens the outer walls

become much thickened, and the cell-openings are round or

oval. In well-preserved specimens the outer surface of the

walls is often seen to be minutely tuberculated or spinose,

these tubercles, in polished sections, appearing as small

pores in the walls; but they are not tabulated. Other, larger

pores that exist in the walls at the angles between the larger

cells, became filled with perforated tabule, like those in the

tubes of the larger corallites, as the organism increased in

diameter ; but both of these sets of smaller pores disappear in

the walls as sections of branches are ground from thei sur-

face to near the central axis, the walls there becoming thin

and the cells polygonal, as seen in the earlier stage of the

organism,

Ure’s “ Millepore”’ has macule on its external surface,

and on one incrusting specimen that I have examined, these

macule rise into distinct monticules. They are best seen on

incrusting specimens of the organism, but are also to be found

on many of the branching examples.

The macule are generally about 2 lines apart, and consist

of spots in which are grouped a few very small cells, around

which there are other cells that are somewhat larger in their

openings than those of the normal size that fill im the spaces

around the various macule.

The perforated tabula, which form the distinctive internal

character of Ure’s “‘ Millepore,” can be seen in nearly every

specimen in which the structure has not been too much de-

stroyed through mineralization of the organism. In the lime-

stone shales of the East Kilbride district, where Ure obtained

his specimens, it is abundant in several localities, but gene-

rally in fragments of branches. H any of these are rubbed

down on a fine polishing-stone a little distance below the

surface and at right angles to the mouths of the corallites,

the perforated tabule are readily seen. Having prepared

numerous specimens, both as transparent and opaque sections,

for examination under the microscope, I find that those which

show the tabule in the greatest numbers within the corallites

are the opaque sections. ‘l'his arises from the fact that the

branches are often curved, and that the tabule do not all lie

in the tubes at the same level, so that in flat sections only

those few tabula that happen to be at the surface remain after

grinding the specimens to transparency; while in opaque

sections we not only see those perforated tabule that are at

Mr. J. Young on Ure’s “Millepore.” 157

the surface, but we also see many of those that are lying

deeper in the tubes, shining up through the transparent calcite

with which many of them are filled.

When specimens of the organism are ground so as to show

the central axis of the branches in either cross or horizontal

sections, the perforated tabula then show themselves in many

of the tubes of the corallites as a series of small, thin, pro-

jecting points with a little rounded knob at their ends. This

latter character is due to the thickened edge of the tabula,

which, as formerly mentioned, forms a rim around the perfo-

ration. When the tabule in any of the tubes happen, how-

ever, to be cut in section on either side of the perforation,

they are then seen to extend across the tubes in a complete

manner; and this might deceive any one examining such a

section as to their perforated character, or the existence of

these little rounded knobs; but they are to be found in every

well-preserved specimen in which the section cuts through the

centre of the perforated tabule and not through either side.

Having stated this much regarding the peculiar internal

structure of Ure’s “ Millepore,” I shall not now enter into

any lengthened comparison of its relation to those other forms

with which it has been so long identified. In the Scottish

lists of Carboniferous fossils it will be found catalogued under

the several genera in which Phillips’s species has been placed,

viz. Calamopora, Chetetes, and Stenopora, but with Phillips’s

specitic name of twmida attached. Fleming’s name Cellepora

Urii seems in a measure to have been lost sight of by paleon-

tologists since his time, although the organism will be found

under that name in Morris’s ‘Catalogue of British Fossils,’

1844, in the list of Polyzoa, as well as in the note by Mr.

Etheridge, to which I have already referred.

The specimens examined by Mr. Etheridge as “ probably”

Cellepora Uri, Flem., and which he identifies with Chetetes

twmidus, Phill., appear to me strongly suggestive, both

from his figures and description, that it was really Ure’s

* Millepore” that he had under examination; but his sec-

tions either did not show or he had overlooked the existence

of those perforated tabule that form the distinctive internal

character of the organism.

Phillips’s coral Chetetes tumidus, with which Ure’s “ Mille-

pore”? has always been confounded from its external resem-

blance, has now been placed by Prof. A. Nicholson amongst

the Monticulipore in his subgenus “ Heterotrypa;” and in his

most recent description of this species (‘ Paleozoic Corals,’

Monticulipora, pp. 121, 122) he describes the tabule in the

corallites as “ horizontal”? and “‘complete,”’ not perforated

158 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Lepidoptera.

as in Ure’s “ Millepore.” At page 103 Prof. Nicholson, in

defining his subgenus “ Heterotrypa,” states that the corallum

“consists of two sets of corallites of different sizes,” and that

‘Cin all the corallites the tabule are complete, and the small

tubes are more closely tabulate than the large ones.” He,

however, does not mention the existence of tabule in the

small tubes in his description of the internal structure of

Heterotrypa tumida, Phill., nor in its variety H. miliaria,

Nich. Neither have I found evidence of the existence of

tabule in the smaller tubes of Ure’s coral. If we compare Ure’s

Millepore with Stenopora, Lonsd., in which genus both it and

Phillips’s species were formerly placed, we find that it differs

in several important points of structure from Stenopora. The

latter, according to Prof. Nicholson (‘Tabulate Corals,’ p. 168),

has the tabule remote and complete, with annular thickenings

in the walls of its tubes, and also has small mural pores

in its walls, these being characters not found in Ure’s coral,

which, while it has certain resemblances in its external form,

ornamentation, and the internal arrangement of its corallites to

Heterotrypa and Stenopora, yet ditters so distinctly from

either genus in possessing perforated tabule, that neither

of these genera, nor any other with which I am at present

acquainted, will admit the form under description as at present

these other genera are defined. ‘This being the case, I pro-

pose to place, provisionally, Ure’s ‘ Millepore ” in the Mon-

ticulipora group, under the new subgeneric name of Zabuli-

pora, this name being descriptive of its beautiful and inter-

esting internal structure, which, so far as at present known,

distinguishes this organism from all its near allies; and at the

same time I shall restore to it Fleming’s name of Urii, after

its original discoverer and describer, the Rev. David Ure,

the earliest pioneer of Scottish paleontology.

I am, Gentlemen,

Faithfully yours,

Hunterian Museum, JOHN YOUNG.

University of Glasgow,

August 8, 1883.

XX.— Descriptions of some new Species of Lepidoptera.

By Artuur G. Butier, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.

THE species here described have for the most part recently

been added to the collection of the British Museum.

> chia 2

Mr. A. G. Butler on new Lepidoptera. 159

. RHOPALOCERA.

Lycenide.

1. Miletus cwlisparsus, sp. n.

¢. Above bright fulvous ; primaries with moderately wide

costal and external black borders, the former bisinuated:

secondaries with a longitudinal subcostal black streak, which

does not reach the apex, but almost joins an arched submar-

ginal series of about six black spots: body brownish. Under

surface paler, more yellow in tint, ornamented with reddish-

orange markings edged with black and metallic sky-blue

spots and dashes (most nearly as in MZ, ewcletus, but of amore

simple character) as follows :—all the wings with a dis-

coidal stripe almost filling the cell, but with two deep notches

out of it, so as to render its inferior edge zigzag; an irregu-

lar discal band, arched on the secondaries, and a macular

arched submarginal band, that of the secondaries uniting

towards the costa with the discal band ; an interrupted blackish

line at the base of the fringe; the secondaries also have three

unequal subcostal spots above the cell and confluent with the

discoidal stripe, and two interno-median spots uniting the

centre of the discoidal stripe to the abdominal margin: body

below whity brown. Expanse of wings 34 millim.

Island of Nias.

2. Myrina inopinata, sp. n.

3. General aspect above of I. t2mon of Africa; primaries

above velvety black, interno-basal third, excepting at exter-

nal border, greyish olivaceous, in certain lights bright emerald-

green : secondaries with the basal half brown, greyish towards

the abdominal margin, purplish in the cell, and with white

costal border ; a black-brown elliptical patch from the end of

the cell to the centre of the radial interspaces; a large grey-

brown sericeous patch clothed with long hairs, crossed by the

subcostal nervure ; externo-discal area emerald-green, exter-

nal border narrowly black, tapering to a slender line from the

third median ; a black submarginal spot on the first median

interspace, and a second at anal angle ; a white spot between

these two ; anal angle, fringe, and tails white: body greyish

brown; head white-spotted ; thorax with greenish reflections,

Under surface orange: primaries with the external two fifths

sordid; internal third sericeous white, with a large central

silver-grey patch: secondaries with the externo-anal and

abdominal borders white ; an abbreviated zigzag black line

160 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Lepidoptera.

from the abdominal margin to the third median branch ; four

small blackish spots beyond this line, two large black spots,

one on the first median interspace and the other at anal angle,

and a slender black marginal line; fringe and tails as above:

body below white. Expanse of wings 46 millim.

Island of Nias.

HETEROCERA.

Chalcosiide.

3. Epyrgis parvula, sp. n.

Allied to E. papilionaris of Drury from China, but much

smaller ; white, with a tint of sulphur-yellow ; all the veins

much more slenderly black-bordered than in EL. papilionaris,

the white spots on the borders comparatively larger ; the outer

margins of all the wings shining cyaneous. Expanse of

wings 45-50 millim.

Darjiling and Nicobars.

4. Isbarta lactea, sp. n.

Creamy white ; primaries with the veins on the basal half

blackish shot with emerald-green, on the apical half broadly

smoky brown with green reflections ; external border rather

narrowly smoky brown; apicalarea between the veins somewhat

greyish : secondaries with the apex smoky brown; veins be-

yond the middle and external border irrorated with blue-green

scales: thorax cream-coloured, spotted with green-shot dusky

spots: abdomen cupreous brown, with whitish posterior mar-

gins to the segments. Wings below whiter, the veins less

broadly bordered ; secondaries with the abdominal half chrome-

yellow, external border of these wings rather broadly dark

brown with dentate-sinuate inner edge; body below white.

Expanse of wings 57 millim.

Java.

This species somewhat resembles J/illeria adalifa in

colouring.

5. Pintia cyanea, sp. n.

Primaries as in P. metachloros of Java, laky chocolate with

broadly emerald-green veins and an ill-defined subapical

whitish quadrifid band; secondaries brilliant glossy cobalt-

blue ; body above dark emerald-green. Under surface blackish,

shot in the cell of primaries and on the median and submedian

veins of secondaries with blue: primaries with a basicostal

On new Reptiles and Batrachians. 161

tapering white streak; a second similar streak below the

median vein ; an oblique band of five white spots beyond the

cell, and a small spot close to the external angle: secondaries

with the cell anda belt of white markings commencing on the

interno-median area with two streaks, above it with three

gradually decreasing spots, and terminating with a larger

subapical spot. Body below white, the sides of the pectus

and the legs varied with dark green. Expanse of wings

45 millim.

Sumatra.

Nyctemeride.

6. Leptosoma melaneura, sp. n.

Nearly allied to Z. coleta of Cramer (which we have from

Ceram, Malacca, and Java), but differing in the narrow black

borders to its wings, the narrower irregular band across the

primaries, and in the black colouring of the veins on all the

wings. Hxpanse of wings 50 millim.

Island of Nias.

XXI1.— Description of new Species of Reptiles and Batrachians

in the British Museum. By G. A. BOULENGER.

(Plate V.)

Lipinia anolis, sp. n.

Snout pointed, as long as the distance between the eye and

the ear-opening. Latter narrow, its anterior border with a

feeble denticulation formed by four scales. Rostral large,

truncated behind. Internasal pentagonal, about as large as

one of the prefrontals. Latter in contact mesially, the suture

measuring less than half their greatest length. Frontal

four-sided, much longer than broad, the anterior sides forming

an open angle, the posterior a very acute angle, the point

being slightly rounded off. ‘The suture between the fronto-

parietals measures at least half the length of the frontal.

Interparietal of the same shape as the frontal, but smaller.

Five supraorbitals, the anterior largest, but much shorter than

the four others together ; the space between the supraorbital

regions considerably wider than in Lipinia pulchella. Nasal

= ; = Wey Le ii "A “Aala 5

four-sided, pierced in the centre. Three loreals. Supero-

labials eight or nine, sixth or seventh entering the orbit.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 12

162 M. G. A. Boulenger on

Three or four large shields on the temple. Mental large,

truncate behind. Seven or eight lower labials, very narrow,

in contact with five or six very large chin-shields, the anterior

single, the others paired. Behind the parietals four or five

pairs of large transversely dilated cervical scales. The scales

of the body largest on the back, smallest on the sides; those

of the two median dorsal series much the largest, twice as

broad as long; sixty-five scales on the dorsal line, counted

from the parietal shields to the base of the tail; thirty-eight

series of scales round the body. ‘Two large preanal scales.

The fore limb carried forward does not reach the tip of the

snout. Basal part of the fingers and toes distinctly dilated,

with large transverse curved lamelle; sixteen to eighteen

lamelle under the dilated part of the fourth toe, ayd seven —

under the compressed distal joint of same. Fourth digit

slightly longer than fifth. The length of the tibia equals the

distance between the tip of the snout and the pupil. The

scales on the humerus and femur smaller than those on the

forearm and leg. Uniform light olive-brown above, white

beneath ; head olive above.

millim.

MG fallen pHs weak wig, +c eilsies eles s eehe eae epee 155

POTS Ui bOTWVeM tas... fucye ma ayaa iste: slates eee 57

lead i(CO lear=Openinon) stare.) srkionas aes kote meee 1

Wadithtotshead 2.52%. crc 6 isos, saree Aaistepoeie eee 85

From ear-opening’ to fore limb 9... 50... oe 8

BONG ATU NAGI ost cone masieerebale! = oie cleleke = te esate 21

15 Gui b1us0] (eee ean ee Snr nits OF oc 24

MATS Fash ares oa forse tyne ah wore eee he eee 78

Several specimens were collected in the Solomon Islands

(‘Treasury and Santa Anna) by H. B. Guppy, Esq., during

the expedition of H.M.S. ‘ Lark.’

Lthacophorus lateralis, sp. n.

Vomerine teeth in two smal] oblique series between the

choane. Snout rounded; canthus rostralis distinct; loreal

region slightly concave ; nostril nearer the tip of the snout

than the eye; interorbital space broader than the upper eye-

lid; tympanum half the diameter of the eye. The three

outer fingers nearly entirely webbed; toes nearly entirely

webbed ; disks of fingers and toes smaller than the tympanum ;

subarticular tubercles not very prominent ; a rather indistinct

inner metatarsal tubercle. ‘The hind limb being carried for-

wards along the body, the tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the

tip of the snout. Skin smooth, granular on the belly and

under the thighs ; a fold of the skin bordering the fore limb

anteriorly. Purplish above, white beneath ; head and back —

new Reptiles and Batrachians. 163

‘ -

with dark dots ; coloured parts of limbs with dark cross lines ;

a white streak on each side, from the nostril along the outer

edge of the upper eyelid to the groin; arm, the three inner

fingers, and the four inner toes not coloured. From snout to

vent 31 rmillim.

A single young specimen from Malabar, collected by Col.

Beddome*.

Rappta Burtonti, sp. n.

Snout rounded, as long as the orbital diameter; tympanum

hidden. Fingers half webbed; toes three-fourths webbed.

The hind limb being carried forwards along the body, the tibio-

tarsal articulation reaches between the eye and the tip of

_the snout. Skin smooth, granular on the belly; no fold

across the chest. Upper surfaces and throat purplish grey ;

hands and feet (the disks excepted), sides and lower surface

of hind limbs, a streak from nostril to eye, and marblings on

the side of the body and behind the eye carmine ; belly flesh-

coloured; throat and belly with blackish spots. From snout

to vent 27 millim.

Allied to &. lagoensis, Gthr.; but in that species the web

reaches the disks of all the toes except the fourth, and the

head is comparatively rather broader. In coloration the two

species are extremely different.

A single female specimen was collected on the Ancober

river, Gold Coast, and presented to the British Museum by

Major Burton and Captain Cameron.

Bufo Andersoni, sp. n.

Crown without bony ridges; snout short, blunt; inter-

orbital space flat, a little broader than the upper eyelid;

tympanum very distinct, round, two thirds the diameter

of the eye. Ifirst finger extending as far as or slightly

beyond second; toes two-thirds or half webbed, with simple.

subarticular tubercles; two moderate metatarsal tubercles ;

a tarsal fold. The hind limb being carried forwards along

the body, the tarso-metatarsal articulation reaches between

the shoulder and the eye. Upper parts with irregular flat

warts ; parotoids large, elliptic, flat; brownish or olive-grey

above, spotted or marbled with darker; beneath immaculate.

Male with a subgular vocal sac. Size of B. viridis.

* Mentioning Colonel Beddome’s important discoveries in Malabar, I

must rectify a misprint which has occurred in the diagnosis of Nanno-

batrachus Beddomi in the ‘ Catalogue of Batrachia Kcaudata,’ p. 470.

For “interorbital space narrower than the upper eyelid,” read “ upper

eyelid narrower than the interorbital space.” fag

hod

164 M. G. A. Boulenger on

This toad has been accurately characterized by Anderson,

P. Z. 8. 1871, p. 203, but erroneously referred to ‘ Bufo pan-

therinus”’ of authors. His specimens are from the Agra

district, where it is said to be common. There are three

specimens in the British Museum, all three presented by W.

. Blanford, Esq.; two half-grown from Ajmere, collected

by Major St. John, and an adult female without locality.

Other specimens, male and female, from ‘Tatta, are in the

Indian division at the Fisheries Exhibition, where they are

put down as Bufo melanostictus.

Hyla glandulosa, sp. 2. ’

Tongue circular, slightly nicked, and free behind. Vome-

rine teeth in two small oblique groups between the choane.-

Head moderate, a little broader than long; snout rounded, as

long as the diameter of the orbit; canthus rostralis distinct ; :

loreal region slightly concave; interorbital space a little

broader than the upper eyelid; tympanum small, indistinct.

Fingers large, distinctly webbed at the base; toes two-thirds

webbed; disks well developed ; subarticular tubercles mode-

rate; no tarsal fold. The hind limb being carried forwards

along the body, the tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the ante-

rior corner of the eye. Upper surfaces covered with very

small smooth warts ; lower surfaces granulate. Green above,

white beneath; a blackish streak from the nostril to the

shoulder, passing through the eye, flanks with blackish varie-

gation. from snout to vent 35 millim.

‘Two female specimens from Guatemala, presented by F. D.

Godman, Esq.

Hyla macrops, sp. n.

Tongue oval, slightly nicked, and slightly free behind.

Vomerine teeth in two groups between the choanee ;_ latter

large. Head large, depressed, as long as broad; snout rounded,

as long as the diameter of the orbit ; “canthus rostralis distinct ;

loreal region very oblique, conca We ; eye ou large ; inter-

orbital space as broad as the upper eyelid ; tympanum distinet,

half the diameter of the eye. Fingers one-fourth webbed ; no

distinct rudiment of pollex ; toes three-fourths webbed ; disks

of fingers and toes rather small, much smaller than the tym-

panum ; subarticular tubercles small; two metatarsal tubercles, —

outer very small; no tarsal fold. The hind limb being ©

carried forwards along the body, the tibio-tarsal articulation

nearly reaches the tip of the snout. Skin smooth above, granu-

late beneath. Purplish brown above, white beneath, un-—

spotted. Bones green. Male with an internal subgular

new Leptiles and Batrachians. 165

vocal sac and brown rugosities on the inner side of the first

finger. From snout to vent 38 millim.

One male specimen, from Treasury Island, Solomon group,

collected by H. B. Guppy, Esq., H.M.S. ‘ Lark.’

Hynobius lichenatus, sp.n. (Pl. V. fig. 1.)

In the shape of the series of palatine teeth intermediate be-

tween Hynobius and Onychodactylus. ‘These series form a

zigzag row, the central or posterior angle not extending pos-

teriorly beyond the extremity of the outer branches. Head

large, depressed, as broad as long; snout short, rounded; eyes

rather large, prominent; no labial lobes. Body short, a little

more than thrice the length of the head; the distance from

snout to gular fold contained a little more than twice and a half

in the distance from latter to cloaca. Limbs moderate; when

laid against the body the fingers cross the toes. Fingers and

toes moderate, depressed ; fifth toe rudimentary, as in Hynobius

peropus. ‘Tail about as long as head and body, strongly com-

pressed and keeled superiorly and inferiorly, ending in a blunt

point. Skin smooth, shining; eleven costal grooves ; a median

dorsal groove ; parotoids rather indistinct, porous ; gular fold

strongly marked; a distinct groove behind the angle of the

jaws. Brown above, lighter beneath, with lichen-like greyish

variegation ; whitish dots on the sides of the body.

millim.

Wotaldeng thy c). 5. sis eerie ME tect 74

HW TOMPSHOUb LO) ClOACH 2.6 sacs nuns ne bos 38

GAN ye ass a eye die Hea pry thin Ss mE LO ee ee)

Wwitdthtothead@' ss. ee oes AR bet eA che 85

Honeslimlbme niet tee see ohne PRR See coy Ra 13

Etsimd limb ee 2h ee oe Lee, BSS aA ee 14

TEEMIL 5. 6 Rn cca cok eh aie a Rae Rp aT se erate OO

A single specimen from Awomori, Japan, presented to the

British Museum by George Lewis, Esq.

Spelerpes peruvianus, sp.n. (Pl. V. fig. 2.)

Palatine teeth in two arched series, extending externally

beyond choanz, separated from parasphenoid teeth ; latter

forming a pyramid-shaped patch. Head moderate, longer

than broad; snout truncate, with a swelling below each

nostril; eye rather large. Body about three times as long as

the distance between the tip of the snout and the gular fold.

Limbs weak, not meeting when adpressed ; fingers and toes

entirely united ; no carpal or tarsal tubercles. Tail slightly

compressed, a little shorter than head and body. Skin smooth;

no parotoids ; gular fold strong; costal grooves twelve, very

. 5) . .

‘indistinct; light brownish above, with ill-defined brown

166 On new Reptiles and Batrachians.

longitudinal lines; a triangular dark spot, base forward, on

the crown; lower surfaces and limbs brown, with slight

lighter variegations.

millim.

Rotallengthy sy yescrr Wr cscoms lowes ste tee Gate eye 75

From snout to cloaca ...... Seen ae tersnaie eae 39

TGR dase sie aan Bee oath eee Ve sic HE ROT eGo 145)

Wadthob headin ce) ce onto ene aes Tors nie wae 6

Horeslimibse-eryocrrctetcis Mestre oa tomacia rer Meee 85

Jalal thay pao geaano su ac Phere oasce once Ore eo 9

CRC Wilies eee too ie ra reer ay aie ee dt amy eA eee le kate 36

A female specimen was collected at Moyobamba by Mr. A.

H. Roff.

This is the second species of Tailed Batrachians discovered

south of the Equator. It resembles S. rufescens, Cope, from

Central America, in most of its characters and in coloration ;

but that species has the body less elongate, and the palatine

teeth do not extend outwards beyond the choane.

CrYPTOPSOPHIS, g. n. Cacilitdarum.

Squamosals in contact with parietals. A single series of

teeth in the lower jaw. ‘Tentacle globular, situated in front

of the eye. Cycloid scales imbedded in the skin.

Cryptopsophis multiplicatus, sp. n.

Teeth rather small, subequal in each jaw, the mandibulars

larger than the maxillaries, the palatines very small; number

of teeth on one side—maxillary nineteen, mandibulars sixteen,

palatines twenty. Snout rounded, prominent, as long as the

distance between the eyes; latter very indistinct; tentacle

below and in front of the eye, three times nearer the latter

than the nostril. Body moderately elongate, rather depressed ;

220 circular folds, the 22 anterior (primary) and the 25 pos-

terior complete, the others alternately complete (primary folds)

and interrupted on the ventral side (secondary folds). Tail

indistinct, rounded, Olive-brown above, yellowish inferiorly.

Total length 310 millim., greatest diameter of body 13 millim.

A single specimen, from the Seychelles, is in the British

Museum.

This new genus agrees in every particular with Dermophis,

except in the absence of a second row of mandibular teeth, a

character which occurs in two other genera only, viz. Stpho-

nops and Scolecomorphus. ‘This being the third new genus of

Apoda discovered since the publication of the ‘ Catalogue of ©

Batrachia Caudata and Apoda,’ I add a synopsis of the genera

known at present :—

On the Classification of North-American Coleoptera. 16%

I. Cycloid scales imbedded in the skin.

A. Hyes distinct or concealed under the

skin.

1. Two series of teeth in the lower

jaw.

a. Squamosal and parietal bones in

contact.

Tentacle conical, exsertile ................ 1. Ichthyophas, Fitz.

Tentacle flap-like, below the nostril........ 4. Ceeiha, L.

Tentacle flap-like, posterior to the nostril .. 5. Hypogeophis, Ptrs.

Memeo elobular |i ity. WsieebG'se «oe AG 6. Dermophis, Ptrs.

6. Squamosals separated from parie-

tals.

Tentacle flap-like, close to the eye ........ 2, Epicrionops, Ble.

Tentacle conical, exsertile, below the nostril. 3. Ureotyphlus, Ptrs.

2. A single series of teeth in the lower

jaw. iN

PECL LO DIAL, (sii. wine » mua 5.0.0 \e)p, 2.0 20 diel. 7. Cryptopsophis, Blgv.

B. Eyes below the cranial bones.

Tentacle globular, nearer the commissure of

the jaws than the nostril ............ 8. Gymnopis, Ptrs.

Tentacle globular, nearer the nostril than the

commissure of the jaw ...0-.e0cssee> 9, Herpele, Ptrs.

II. No scales.

A. Eyes below the cranial bones.

1. Two series of teeth in the lower

jaw; squamosals in contact with

parietals ; tentacle globular .... 10. Gegenophis, Ptrs.

2. A single series of mandibular teeth ;

squamosals separated from parie-

tals; tentacle globular ....... . 11. Scolecomorphus, Bler.

B. Eyes distinct or concealed under the

skin,

1. A single series of teeth in the lower

jaw ; squamosals in contact with

parietals ; tentacle flap-like ..., 12. Siphonops, Wag].

2, Two series of teeth in the lower

jaw ; tentacle flap-like.

Parietals and squamosals in contact ...... 3. Typhlonectes, Ptrs.

Parietals separated from squamosals ...... 14, Chthonerpeton, Ptrs.

XXIW.—On the ‘Classification of the Coleoptera of North

America, by Dr. J. L. LeConte and Dr. G. H. [orn

(Washington: 1883). By the Rev. A. MATrHews.

EvRroprraNn entomologists are often impressed with the idea

that their scientific brethren on the other side of the Atlantic

are so embarrassed with the riches of their own fauna that

they are comparatively unacquainted with the productions of

the eastern hemisphere. But such a notion indicates a very

imperfect comprehension of American intellect and American

resources. No reason can be given to prove that a species

168 Rev. A. Matthews on the ‘Classification of

inhabiting any part of the Old World should not be as well

known in Philadelphia as in London, Paris, or Berlin; and

much less is there any reason to suppose that American entomo-

logists are not, at the very least, as well able to appreciate its

affinities as the most erudite of their European contemporaries.

In some respects, indeed, they possess superior advantages,

inasmuch as they have begun the science, as it were, de novo,

unfettered by time-honoured traditions, and* unbiassed by

favourite, though antiquated, systems founded upon partial

and often imperfect knowledge—systems which, although

they fultilled the conditions of their own age, are inadequate

to meet the requirements of a time like the present, when a

vastly extended field of observation, and a much more nume-

rous band of students, assisted by greatly improved means of

investigation, are continually enlarging our knowledge by the

discovery of fresh links and synthetic forms disclosing correla-

tive affinities between groups whose connexion had previously

been unsuspected. In such a State of things a revision of our

systematic classification was imperatively called for ; and this

work has been inaugurated by the recent publication of the

‘ Classification of the Coleoptera of North America,’ by Dr.

LeConte and Dr. Horn.

Although by its title this great work professes to deal with

the fauna of merely one half of the western hemisphere, the

comprehensive lines on which it has been constructed will

include (with, it may be, triflmg modifications) the Coleoptera

of both sides of the world. Indeed it is evident from the

work itself that its authors had this object in view, since every

family at present contained in the order is mentioned, and its

proper position in the system assigned to each. On this ac-

count many subtribes and subgroups are made which at first

sight seem superfluous, represented as they are often by a

single genus, and sometimes by a single species, in the North-

American fauna; but the same subdivisions occasionally com-

prise an extensive series of insects in other quarters of the

world.

The “Table of Contents” (pp. v, vi) gives a compendious

view both of the completeness of this great work and of the

labour expended on its construction. This is followed by an

elaborate ‘ Introduction” (pp. Vil—Xxxvill), which might

well be termed an Introduction to the entire science of ento-

mology. Having given a tabular view of all orders of insects,

the Authors restrict their labours to the Coleoptera alone; and

at this pointcommence their real work with a complete and lucid

definitive analysis of the whole external skeleton of a beetle,

illustrated by numerous and well-executed woodcuts of the

the Coleoptera of North America.’ 169

entire underside, and of the various modifications of the an-

tenne, tarsi, &c. which occur in the order.

The basis of operations being thus defined, they proceed

with the actual classification by dividing the whole order into

two primary divisions, wage £° Coleoptera genuina” and

“ Rhynchophora.”

The former of these divisions, for which the term ‘ Stoma-

tophora’’ would have been more consonant, and also indicative

of the normal position of the mouth, is then divided into two

subdivisions, termed respectively “ ‘Tsomera” and “ Hetero-

mera;” and the Isomera are separated into five series, viz.

*¢ Adephaga, _ Clavicornia, Serricornia, Lamellicornia, and

Phytophaga.”

It appears to me that the arrangement of the Isomera would

be much improved by placing the Lamellicornia at the com-

mencement of the subdivision, a change long ago suggested b

Dr. Burmeister and Mr. Crotch, and even alluded to in the

work before us. While the other series are more or less in-

timately connected with each other, the Lamellicornia alone

are isolated and distinct from all. The authors of this classi-

fication, in order to bring into contact the closely allied Clavi-

cornia and Serricornia, have removed the Lamellicornia from

' their ancient position “between those series, and have placed

them next in succession to the Serricornia, and immediately

preceding the Phytophaga. But I cannot perceive that any

improvement has been effected by this change. ‘he Lamelli-

cornia are as much, if not more, out of place between the

Serricornia and the Longicorn group of the Phytophaga, as

they were in their previous position. ‘To place the Lamelli-

cornia at the commencement of the order seems to be the only

way to obviate this difficulty of classification.

In support of such an arrangement many collateral argu-

ments may be adduced. As in the Mammalia man is allowed

to take the lead as the most highly organized and pertect of

the class, so in the Coleoptera, by a parity of reasoning, the

first place should be assigned to the Lamellicornia, since they

are the most highly organized and the most pertectly deve-

loped of that order. Again, among Coleoptera the Lamelli-

cornia may be regarded as the representatives of the existing

period of the universe, specially adapted to the present condi-

tions of this planet ; while, on the other hand, the Rhyncho-

phora, exhibiting the most primeval and original form, and

possessing the most rudimentar y and often defective anatomy,

are probably, according to Dr, LeConte’s theory, the most

ancient series*of the whole order.

The Lamellicornia and the Rhynchophora should therefore

170 Rev. A. Matthews on the ‘Classification of

on this ground, either in an ascending or descending seale,

occupy the two extremes of the entire order. In his ‘ Rhyn-

chophora of America,’ published at Philadelphia in 1876,

Dr. LeConte has discussed this matter at some length, and,

choosing the descending scale, has placed the Rhynchophora

at the end of the Coleoptera.

If his views on this point are correct, as I believe them to

be, it will naturally follow that the Lamellicornia should be

placed first. Such an arrangement would at once rectify the

confusion caused by the interpolation of the Lamellicornia

between series unconnected with them, but closely allied to

each other ; harmony would be effected by the elimination of

the element of discord, and the Lamellicornia would occupy

the position for which by high development and homogeneity

among themselves they are preeminently qualified.

But to return to the work before us ; the American authors

have named the last series of the Isomera “* Phytophaga,”

and have included in that series the whole of the properly

Tetramerous Coleoptera. This arrangement seems open to

objection on account of the heterogeneous assemblage of

genera thus brought together. The authors themselves

appear conscious of this, and justify the amalgamation on the

ground that no definitive characters can be assigned to war-

rant their separation. But though anatomical differences

among these families may not be sufficient or sufficiently

persistent to form an intelligible tabulation, yet the general

appearance or facies of almost every species is obvious enough

to determine its proper position without much difficulty. On

the whole it would, I think, be preferable to retain the serial

separation of Longicornia and Monilicornia, of which the

former in their larval condition as a rule feed on wood, and

the latter on foliage. These alterations would tend to im-

prove the continuity of its various series, and render the Iso-

merous complex more harmonious than it has hitherto been.

Having disposed of the Isomera, our authors place the

Heteromera next in succession. ‘This arrangement is a mani-

fest improvement upon previous systems; for it is absurd to

break the line of the Isomera by interposing a group whose

very name indicates antagonism; and besides this the Hete-

romera, by their varied and mimetic forms, seem intended for

a natural epitome of all the Isomerous series.

The Rhynchophora, as a suborder, conclude the whole

system; nor could they hold any other position without

breaking through the anatomical relations which prevail

throughout the other groups. But this question has been

argued at length by Dr. LeConte many years ago, and need

not be noticed now.

171

the Coleoptera of North America.’

The following schemes will show both the descent of the

various series as proposed by Dr. LeConte and Dr. Horn and

also the alterations which I have suggested

eroydoyoudyyy | vleutorazo yy

vioydoyoudyyy—

VIULOOT[IMO J] —VIULL0013 LOTT — VIM LODLOG —VIULOOTAVT() —BIU LOL] LJ —BIULLOI TOUT

\ | | | oad

VAPULO.LOJO FT

“BLQULOST

vtoydo}VUtozg

VuaLdOaTO—)

‘hinssiy svyy Us paysabbns SUornLay] yy ay? buamoys awayos

vaogdoyoudyy | vtovi0.12},0}F | eSuydoyAq.g—viudoorpoure] —vrusoo.tag—vrusoolanyg—eseydepy

hes es Ray ee

BAIULO.L9}9 FL | BAITUOST

vtoydoyoud yyy

Burnued voj}dos]o9

awed |

VULLIOWIOL)

“ULOTT “(PUY aquoQay “| fq pasodoud sp nuajydoajoy fo guamabunww py ayy fo amayay

a S

aes)

2 oO

@) os

> S

eors

aa)

acts

Orr

— eS

nas

ree

is point the

the various

From th

account of

172 Mr. J. S. Newberry on Fossil Plants

of which each series is composed, illustrating each separate

division with a synoptic table of its contents and copious.

remarks on its diagnostic characters. In all these matters

their views are of course open to discussion; whether a cer-

tain genus does or does not belong to a certain tribe is a

matter of opinion, and can only be decided when its anato-

mical affinities have been thoroughly investigated. But these

minutia are comparatively of small importance, and do not in

any way affect the main lines of the system.

Such are the chief features of this great work, extending

through 605 royal 8vo pages. ‘The basis on which the system

is founded, that of the entire external skeleton, is more con-—

sonant with the general scope of systematic arrangement in

the higher classes of the animal kingdom, and much less liable

to error than the tarsal or any other system which rests upon

special organs alone. It is a system which only requires

careful study. to ensure approval; it has conferred a lasting

benefit on science and much honour upon its authors. To

assert that it is perfect would be to assert more than man can

accomplish. It is at the least a long step in the right direc-

tion, and opens a path which must lead to further i important

results.

But the role of Lord Lytton’s “ Randall Leslie” and

“ John Burley ” will continue to be repeated till the end of

time, and plagiarists will doubtless reproduce the views of the

American naturalists with some trifling modifications as their

own. In the name of common honesty let those who hence-

forth build upon the lines here laid down have at least suffi-

cient candour to acknowledge their obligations—a candour

which recent events have proved to be rare.

X XIIUI.—WNotes on some Fossil Plants from Northern China.

By J. S. NEWBERRY*.

Mr. Arno“tp HaaueE recently placed in my hands a small

collection of fossil plants brought by him from China, They

proved to be interesting ; and, with his permission, I present

briefly the results of my examination of them.

The circumstances under which they were found, so far as

known, are given in the subjoined notes of Mr. Hague which

accompanied theme

“This collection of plants came from the coal-basin of the

* From the ‘ American Journal of Science,’ Aug. 1885, pp. 123-127.

from Northern China. 173

Pinhsu-hoo, in the southern peninsula of Mantchuria, on the

east side of the Gulf of Liantung, and about one hundred

miles north-east of the open port of Niu-chwang. I am told

that at times there are over 1200 Chinamen engaged in the

district in mining and transporting coal. This coal-field has

long been known to foreigners through the Chinese as a pos-

sible source of workabie coal. As long ago as 1863 Prof.

Pumpelly suggested that the Liantung coals should be ex-

amined by American or European experts before opening the

mines at Chaitang, which he had personally visited and re-

ported upon favourably.

“So tar as I know, no geologist has visited the district

except Baron v. Richthofen, who regarded the formation as

of Paleozoic age, although, I believe, he found no fossils.

“¢ From my own observations while travelling through the

provinces of Chihte and Shansi, and from various sources of

mformation, I believe by far the greater part of the coal-basins

of North China are of Paleozoic age, although the well-known

districts west and north-west of Pekin have been shown to be

of Mesozoic age. |

“The estimates of the great area and value of the coal

and iron deposits of North China, which have been made by

Prof. Pumpelly and Baron Richthofen, are, I think, by no

means unwarranted.

“There can be no question but that the coal and iron of

China will prove to be of immense value in the material deve-

lopment of the country so soon as she decides to adopt rail-

ways and foreign engineering methods.”

On unpacking the collection I discovered that the plants

were of Carboniferous age, and that most of them belonged to

species common in the rocks of Kurope and North America.

Of the ten species which can be distinguished, one is a

Pecopteris too imperfect for determination (probably P. unita,

Bret.), and two others, a Lonchopteris and an Archeopteris,

present slight differences from their closely-allied representa-

tives in Kurope and America. ‘The other seven are undistin-

guishable from what may be considered as the most charac-

teristic plants of our Coal-measures.

The complete list of species is as follows :—

Annularia longifolia, Brgt.

Sphenophyllum oblongifolium, Germar.

Calamites Suckowt, Bret.

Cordaites borassifolius, Ung.

Lepidodendron cbovatum, Sternb.

174 Mr. J. S. Newberry on Fossil Plants

Sigillaria Brardii, Bret.

Pecopteris cyathea, Bret.

Pecopteris unita ?, Bret.

Archeopteris, n. sp.?

Lonchopteris, n. sp. ?

The Archeopteris indicates that the coal with which these

plants are associated belongs near the base of the Coal-

measures, as this genus does not rise above that horizon.

The species of Lonchopteris and Archwopteris are best

represented in the collection; and the former is very well

shown. In general aspect it is not unlike the figures given

by Brongniart of his L. rugosa (Vég. Foss. p. 368, tab. 131.

figs. 1, 2, , 2); but the pinnules are smaller, and the reticulation

much more open. In the latter respect it is more like L.

Baurii, Andy., L. Eschwetlerianus, Andr., and L. conjugata,

Geepp., sp. (Neuropterts conju gata, Geepp.) ; but it has nar-

rower, more pointed and curved pinnules than either.

Should a lar ger number of specimens show that these are

constant characters, it will be necessary to regard this as a new

species, which may be fittingly named after Mr. Hague, Lon-

chopteris Hagueana. ‘The Archeopteris mentioned is a very

graceful and well-marked species of the genus, having obo-

vate or spatulate pinnules, of which the upper extremities are

often crenulate or fimbriate. It is less robust than the type

forms of A. hibernica, Forbes, sp.; and the pimnules are more

symmetrical. It is about the size of A. Jacksoni, Dwn., but

has less crowded, more elongate, and more regularly ovate or

spatulate pinnules. The nerves are fine, forked only near the

base, simple and subparallel above. Possibly this may be,

like several described species of Archwopteris, only a variety

ot A. hibernica; but the characters mentioned seem to separate

it from any known form, and I would suggest for it the name

Archeopteris spatulata.

The first fossil plants brought from China were collected by

Prof. Pumpelly, and were described by the writer in the

‘Smithsonian Contributions’ of 1866. These included two

new terns, Sphenopteris orientalis, N., and Hymenophyllites

tenellus, N., Pecopteris whitbyensis, found in the Lias and

Upper ‘Trias of Europe, Podozamites lanceolatus, a Liassic

plant of the old world, and P. Lmmonsi, which occurs in North

Carolina, all of which seem to represent the Upper Trias or

Lower Lias*. Subsequently (in 1868) M. Ad. Brongniart ex-

‘ My paper on the fossil plants collected by Prof. Pumpelly has been

reviewed by Heer (‘Juratlora Ostsibiriens,’ p. 17) and Schenk (Richt-

hofen’s ‘China,’ vol. iv. p. 264), with some suggestions in regard to

their generic and specific relations, which would hardly have been made

il be

from Northern China. 175

amined a collection of plants obtained from Southern Shansi,

and gave a list of them in the Bull. de la Soc. Géol. de

France, 3rd series, vol. ii. p. 408. They included some of

the species collected by Pumpelly, and were considered by

M. Brongniart to represent the Upper Trias and Lower Jura.

More recently Baron v. Richthofen obtained fossil plants from

various parts of China; and these have been described by A.

Schenk in vol. iv. of Richthofen’s ‘China.’ They represent

two distinct horizons—one Carboniferous, and the other Meso-

zoic. ‘Che former were found in the districts of Shansi and

Hunan. Here were obtained Pecopteris cyathea, P. unita,

Annularia longifolia, Brgt., A. maxima, Schenk, Spheno-

phyllum emarginatum, Brgt., S. Schlotheimit, Brgt., Calamites

igas, Bret., &c. Elsewhere in the provinces of Shansi and

T'shili, Richthofen obtained a group of Mesozoic plants, among

which M. Schenk recognized Pecopteris whitbyensis, Podo-

zamites lanceolatus, and other species which led him to refer

the strata containing them to the Brown Jura.

It is known to most geologists that the extensive coal-

basins of India, from which fossil plants have been described

by Oldham and Morris and Dr. Feistmantel, are all of Meso-

zoic age. The same is true of the coals of Tonking, Cochin

China, from which a considerable number of fossil plants

have been obtained by the French expeditions and described

by M. R. Zeiler in the ‘ Annales des Mines,’ October 1852.

It would seem proven, therefore, that the coal-basins of

China (in which the coal is very largely converted into anthra-

cite by local metamorphism) belong to two great geological

systems—one, as indicated by the plants collected by Baron

Richthofen and Mr. Hague, the equivalent of the Coal-mea-

had these distinguished paleontologists had access to the specimens on

which [ based my conclusions. Having reexamined these fossils, I take

occasion to offer here a few additional notes upon them.

Sphenopteris orientalis certainly belongs to the same genus with the

ferns now called Thyrsopterts Murrayana and Th. Maaikana, Heer, the

latter being specifically hardly different from it. Hymenophyllites tenellus,

N., has finely dissected pinnules, and is certainly distinct. My Podo-

zamites lancevlatus is that plant, and not a Phanicopsis, as suggested by

Heer. This is shown by its nervation, and by the fact that the pinnules

are pinnately set on a rachis, and are not fasciculate as in Phenicopsis.

Taxites spatulatus, N., is the leaf of a conifer, and not of a cycad, as in-

ferred by Heer. It has but a single nerve, the median, which is strong

and traverses its entire length, and has a wedge-shaped base terminating

in ashort twisted petiole. The publication of Heer’s important paper on

the Jura flora of Eastern Siberia has given significance to certain speci-

mens in Pumpeliy’s collection, and has enabled me to add to the list of

species Baiera angustiloba, Heer (very near to B. Munsteriana), Pheni-

copsis longifolia, Heer, and Czekanowskia rigida, Heer.

176 On Fossil Plants from Northern China.

sures (and probably the entire range of the Coal-measures

of Europe and America) ; the latter not yet capable of so defi-

nite classification, but probably referable to both the Rheetic

and Lias.

The fossil plants brought by Mr. Hague from China, repre-

senting as they do not only the characteristic genera of the

Coal-measures in Europe and America, but identical or

closely allied spectes, cannot fail to interest both geologists

and botanists :—the first, by the confirmation they afford of the

classification adopted for the stratified rocks, based on the

fossils they contain ; the latter, from the evidence they fur-

nish of the practical identity of the acrogenous flora of the

Coal period over so large a portion of the earth’s surface, and

the remarkable persistence which specific characters exhibit

in the wide range of migration and the incalculable lapse of

time through which the dispersion was effected.

Since none of the higher plants were in existence upon the

earth’s surface during the Carboniferous age, wherever a ter-

restrial flora prevailed it could only be composed of acrogens

and gymnosperms; but how it happens that within these

limits there was so little diversity 1s incomprehensible. During

the Coal-measure epoch the same genera, and to a large degree

the same species, seem to have lived in North America, Kurope,

Brazil, and China.

No one who has any acquaintance with fossil plants would

fail to recognize at once most of the species in the collection

brought by Mr. Hague; but if shown seven out of the ten he

could not say whether they came from America, Hurope, or

Asia. And yet in the interval between the deposition of the

Coal-measures and the Triassic rocks the whole flora of the

globe was revolutionized. Before the Bunter was laid down

Lepidodendron, Sigillaria, Annularia, Sphenophyllum, Cor-

daites, and indeed a the characteristic forms of the coal flora

had disappeared. ‘The Cycads in great variety, true Equiseta,

and peculiar genera of Conifers and Ferns gave new aspects

to nature, and this again over the whole world. From the

desert of Atacama, from Sonora, New Mexico, North Caro-

lina, Europe, India, and China we obtain the remains of the

unmistakable Mesozoic flora with species which are common

to all these widely separated localities.

Hence we are safe in fixing by fossil plants the geological

horizon of the Mesozoic coal-basins of China; but the identity

of species in the Mesozoic flora, though surprising, 1s not quite

so marked as in that of the Carboniferous age.

In the Middle Cretaceous came another great revolution,

and the angiosperms succeeded the gymnosperms so rapidly

pnd.

oF es SNe yy

Mr. T. Stock on the Genus Tristychius. 177

that the earth was covered with oaks, magnolias, willows, &c.

before the Tertiary began. Gradually we are gathering the

details of this wonderful history, and ultimately we shall be

able to report the facts with a good degree of fulness ; but the

causes which inspired the revolutions that have taken place

in plant life, and the processes by which these great changes

have been effected, seem to be as inscrutable as ever.

XXIV.—On the Structure and Affinities of the Genus Tris-

tychius, Agass. By THomas sSrock, Natural-History

Department, Museum of Science and Art, Hdinburgh *.

[Plate VII. |

Tristychius fimbriatus, Stock. (Pl. VIL. figs. 1 and 1 a.)

This spine I owe to the kindness of those promising young

naturalists Messrs. Kinnear and Anderson, who discovered

it in the Carboniferous Limestone series at Gilmerton, near

Edinburgh. It appears to be hitherto undeseribed.

Description.—It is distinctly sigmoidal in shape; but the

curvature presents an exaggerated appearance through trac-

ture. ‘lhe restoration (Pl. VII. fig. 1 a) gives a more correct

idea of its original shape. ‘Ihe direction ot the curve in the

distal region is peculiar, and, indeed, almost without a parallel

in Selachian acanthoid remains. Nevertheless I attach very

slight importance to it as a systemratic character. It is pos-

sibly due to disease, of which there is some evidence in certain

pustular appearances seen near the pointed extremity of the

spine (Pl. VII. fig. 1). It is 12 inch in length, and 14 line in

greatest width. Its surface is smooth; but a shallow and

wide groove occupies a nearly central position along the

middle third of the spine. It is difficult to say how tar such

grooves, which occur rather frequently in the spines of various

genera and species, are normal, or whether they arise trom the

falling-in of the walls of the spine as the soft internal part

decays. In the case of Plewracanthus, in which this middle

groove is often visible, the appearance is due to decay in all

the cases that have come under my notice. But in the example

under consideration | am inclined to think that the appear-

ance is normal, as the walls are apparently thick and the

* Communicated by the Author, having been read to the Edinburgh

Geological Society, March 15, 1883,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 13

178 Mr. T. Stock on the Genus Tristychius.

pulp-cavity small; its value as a specific character must,

however, be accepted with considerable reserve.

The seven denticles are confined to the distal fourth of the

spine, and form a rather crowded series; they slightly increase

in length proximally ; and their bases are fused into the walls

of the spine. The second row (if existent) is concealed im

the matrix. The inserted portion of the spine is not pre-

served.

Affinities —Giebel * figures a spine which may possibly

come near the one just described. In the text he refers it to

Styracodus acutus, a species and genus founded by himself

for the reception of a very Ctenoptychius-like fossil (a

resemblance he was quite aware of himself), In the plate,

however, it appears as Hyhodus, along with other forms re-

ferred to the same genus. The reference, however, is clearly

due to carelessness in naming the figures; for it is evident

from the text that Giebel had no concéption that the spine

could possibly be related to the remains that he figures on the

same plate as belonging to Hybodus. Nevertheless there is

some ground for believing (unless all faith is refused to

his figures) that the spine which he referred to Hybodus

is nothing but Plewracanthust, and therefore unconnected

with the remains in question, but that the spine named Sty-

racodus acutus may really belong to them. This spine is

unfortunately broken off just at the point where the denticles

would commence if it be, as I surmise, a species of Tristychius ;

but in other respects it conforms closely enough to the genus.

From his figures 5 and 7 it is evident that some tolerably

undisturbed Nelachian fragments had been discovered ; for we

see a number of teeth associated with cuticular appendages

upon the same slab. Separate figures of the teeth are given f,

from which it is quite possible to gather that they bear a

similarity (as I shall show hereafter) to teeth that occur not

unfrequently in our own Lower Carboniferous or Calciferous

Sandstone series, and which are associated with undoubted

Tristychius spines. Whilst this generic affinity may be asser-

ted pretty confidently, there is much doubt as to whether the

species trom the two localities are the same; and therefore

* In Germar’s ‘ Versteinerungen des Steinkohlengebirges von Wettin

ay salad p. 71, tab, xxix. fig. 40, and reproduced in Pl. VIL figs. 2

and 2a.

+ Loe, cit. fig. 8; reproduced in Pl. VIL. figs. 3 and 3a. May not his

Chilodus gracilis be a Diplodus tooth ? loe, eit. tig. 2, reproduced Plate VIL.

figs. 4 and 4a. One-pronged Dzplodus-teeth are occasionally met with,

whether due to fracture or not it is not easy to say.

{ Loc. cit. fig. 5, a, b, and figs. 6 and 6a; reproduced, Pl. VIL. figs. 5,

5a, & 6, 6a

Mr. T. Stock on the Genus Tristychius. 179

Tristychius fimbriatus, Stock, may be looked upon as distinct

from, though probably related at no great distance to, Styra-

codus acutus, Giebel.

Tristychius arcuatus, Ag.

This spine is rather common in the vicinity of Edinburgh.

I have possessed or seen in other collections nearly a hundred

examples. It appears to be commonest on the Burgh Lee

horizon (Edge Coal), probably from the fact that the beds

there have been pretty carefully examined ; but it also extends

down to some of the lowest beds of the Calciterous-Sandstone

series of the district. I am acquainted with it from Abden,

near Kinghorn, Fife (Hdge Coal ?), South Queensferry (Bur-

diehouse), Grange Quarry, Burntisland, Fife (Burdiehouse) ;

Juniper Green (Wardie, collected by Mr. Henderson, and

presented by him to the Museum of Science and Art) ; Hailes

Quarry (Wardie); and from Carolina Park (Granton). A

consideration of this ample material has elicited a few facts

worthy of being put on record.

I have figured (Pl. VII. figs. 7 & 7a) the specimen col-

lected by Mr. Henderson, and now in our collection, partly as

being a good typical example of the larger form of the species,

and also to show that the denticles near the point merge into

a ridge with a ragged (scarcely denticulated) edge. The

general shape has been preserved; but the proximal half has

been much injured. On the side, at the point, there is

a very small smooth area; and immediately below it the

ridges and furrows are pretty strongly marked. Three

distinct but not very prominent parallel ridges extend back

from the anterior margin for a short distance; and the rest of

the area is in this specimen finely and interruptedly striated.

There is, however, a great range of variation in various

specimens as to the strength of the sulcation and ridging.

Some are nearly smooth, and those the largest; others,

usually smaller specimens, are often strongiy ridged and sul-

eated. ‘These differences are so apparent in different examples

that for a long time I thought a stable specific distinction

might be made out between them; but wider experience has

convinced me that a clear gradation can be easily traced be-

_ tween them.

Having now discussed the fragmentary evidence upon

which the genus 77istychiws has been hitherto chiefly known,

we are able profitably to advance to the consideration of certain

specimens in which that evidence is combined with other

facts of a much higher order of importance. Amongst these

the first to call for notice is a considerable fragment of the

13*

180 Mr. T. Stock on the Genus Tristychius.

vertebral column found in connexion with the remains of two

spines (Pl. VII. fig. 8), the whole undoubtedly belonging

to the same fish. This fragment has been preserved on a

thin piece of weathered ironstone shale, and was picked up

by myself at Carolina Park, near Edinburgh *.

Description.—There are the remains of two spines; the

shape of the larger is well seen, chiefly as an impression, how-

ever, on the slab. It is 24 inches in length, a fairly large

specimen. The cast shows that it was distantly and regularly

striated. I can detect traces of one or two denticular impres-

sions only. It conforms to typical examples of the species.

This I interpret as the right pectoral spine. Slightly poste-

rior in position and directed towards the opposite side of the

axis are the much-broken remains of the base of a second

spine (PI. VII. fig. 8, s). This is proved conclusively by the

pulp-cavity, which is seen in section at the edge of the slab.

I interpret this as the remains of the left pectoral. They were

probably paired spines at any rate; and their position with

regard to the axial column is in favour of their being pectoral.

There is much difticulty, however, in disentangling the con-

fused appearances presented on that part of the slab immedi-

ately behind the spmes ; and at the anterior inferior angle of

the slab some plant-remains + complicate matters, so that

another reading could I dare say be defended. ‘The position

of the bases of the spines (almost overlapping) with regard to

each other shows that there has been some disturbance during

fossilization; and the disturbance which has pushed in the

spine s (Pl. VII. fig. 8) has also pushed outwards the two

neural spines n (Pl. VII. fig. 8), which occupy a peculiar

and rather misleading position with regard to the spine s’.

On the lower front angle of the slab there are some ap-

pearances dubiously referable to the pectoral fin (Pl. VIL.

fig. 8,7)

The remains of the axial-column (23 inches long) are in a

tolerably good state of preservation. The apophysial ele-

ments are represented by a double series of closely approxi-

mated spines (neural and heemal), consisting of granular carti-

lage, numbering between twenty and thirty in each row.

They are rather better preserved on the neural than on the

* T have found this locality, situated at the extreme western end of

the Wardie and Granton sandstones and shales, extremely prolific in fish

fossils. Unfortunately they are not usually in good preservation. It is

noticeable that nearly all of the specimens collected are referable to forms

already and commonly known from the eastern and more frequently

worked shales.

+ Left out in the drawing.

Mr. T. Stock on the Genus Tristychius. 181

hemal aspect*. The spines of the neural row where best

preserved are about 4 lines in height, triangular, and acutely

pointed, the points being directed backwards. The hemal

spines (not well preserved) appear to alternate with the

neural, are apparently of the same size and shape, and are

directed forwards. Some allowance must be made, however,

in this description, for post mortem disturbance and alteration.

The axis evidently consisted of a persistent notochord.

In this (so far as I am aware) the earliest known shark in

which readable traces of the axial skeleton have been pre-

served, it is important to observe that these conform in rather

a significant way to those types of vertebral organization which

are regarded as the most ancient and the simplest. The dis-

covery of this single specimen, however, is not sufficient to

justify any certain conclusions as to the presence or absence

of a more highly organized skeleton in other sharks of the

same age. Prof. Newberry has indeed drawn attention { to

an interesting specimen found in the Carboniferous rocks of

Ohio (Waverly group), which he considers to represent a grade

of organization in some respects higher than in most of the

sharksof the present day. His remarks are of great interest, and

need no excuse for being quoted. He says :—‘ I should also

mention in this connexion a remarkable shark’s tail found at

Vanesburg, Kentucky. . . . This specimen, which is nearly

a foot and a half long, shows the outline of the heterocercal

tail of a shark which must have been 8 or 10 feet in length.

The vertebral column is seen to reach far into the upper lobe

of the tail, The vertebre have certainly disappeared, leaving

a smooth band to mark the space they occupied. This is

bordered on either side by the impression of linear pointed

apophysial bones, which were evidently much better ossified

than the centra of the vertebra. The lower lobe of the tail is

formed by a number of strong ossified rays! ‘This shows that

this Carboniferous shark. ... . had a skeleton in some re-

spects more fully ossified than most of the sharks of the

present day.” This brief notice, which he promised to

supplement by a full description {, possibly may not represent

his riper views as to the reading of the specimen; but it

appears to me that, taking the description as it stands, there

are several assumptions which are scarcely warranted by the

facts; and chief of these is the implication that the axis was

* I consider the upper row as figured to be neural, though there is not

much to show which is neural and which is hemal.

+ Geol. Surv. Ohio, vol. i. part 2 (Paleontology), p. 279.

{ I am quite ignorant whether his promise has been fulfilled or not.

182 Mr. T. Stock on the Genus Tristychius.

segmented, and, moreover, that the segmentation had proceeded

so far as to be represented by distinct centra. So far as I am

aware, there is no very convincing evidence at present avail-

able that any Carboniferous shark possessed centra. Nume-

rous biconcave vertebree have indeed been discovered, espe-

cially in the English coal-measures ; but further observations

are wanting before any of these can be referred with certainty

to the skeleton of a Selachian fish.

Thenext specimen to be describedis preserved in anodule, and

is valuable as affording information more particularly with re-

gard to the exoskeleton of the fish. The nodule measured about

83 X7x3 inches before it was broken up for examination.

I found it at Hailes Quarry, near Edinburgh, in the Caleci-

ferous-Sandstone series. The part protruding from the bank

of shale had become a good deal weathered, and a consider-

able fragment must have at some time dropped off and become

lost. The weathering has extended inwards for an inch or

two, which is so far a fortunate circumstance, as a better view

is got of the teeth than would have been possible otherwise.

The rest of the nodule is hard and unweathered ; and though

T succeeded in developing the spines and several more teeth,

something has no doubt escaped detection *.

Description.—The teeth are seen to be numerous; but it is

impossible accurately to estimate their number, as they lie in

much disorder, and many of them are very imperfectly seen.

One of the largest (Pl. VII. fig. 9, nat. size) is 34 lines

wide and 1} line high. The middle cusp is well developed,

and is flanked by lateral cusps, three on each side (one of

them is broken away in the example figured). These decrease

in height, first suddenly as compared with the middle cusp,

then more gradually with regard to each other. The cusps

are strongly grooved. ‘The grooves are flexed, and diminish

in width as they converge towards the apex. The wide spaces

that separate the cusps are also deeply grooved. This deep

sulcation gives the tooth a strikingly ornamental and character-

istic appearance. The inserted portion is short, and covered

with equally spaced narrow ridges (Pl. VII. fig. 10). These

ridges are apparently prolonged beyond the base into root-like

attachments, and in some specimens they appear to bound

cavities in the bases of the teeth. It is also worthy of note that

the free portion of the tooth is very oblique to the base, a nar-

row groove marking the division between them. The other

teeth differ from the one described chiefly in the varying depth

of the sulcation and in the distances the cusps are set apart

* Shark nodules are particularly refractory under development.

eo fe len

Mr. T. Stock on the Genus Tristychius. 183

from each other. In a few cases the base of one cusp rises

from the base of its neighbour without any distinct space in-

tervening. The middle cusp of one large tooth shows at its

base small depressed elliptical areas enclosed by folds of the

ridges.

It is rather singular that this elegant tooth should for so

long have escaped detection ; nevertheless, so far as I have

been able to discover, it has not been previously described.

Tt bears a general resemblance, however, to the teeth figured

by Giebel * as Hybodus carbonarius and Hybodus vicinalis ;

and the evidence is in favour of their being allied.

A very pretty little tooth found by Mr. M‘Leish in the

Calciferous-Sandstone series near Bathgate, and given to me

by Mr. Henderson for examination, shows (Pl. VII. fig. 11)

some deviation from the teeth in the Hailes specimen. In it

the middle cusp is nearly of the same width from the base to

the apex, and the ridging and sulcation are rather more regu-

lar; but these are differences which may be expected to occur

in different individuals of the same species and in different

positions in the mouth.. I do not think it is specifically

distinct.

I have figured (Pl. VII. fig. 12), from another specimen, a

few teeth that lie almost undisturbed. The information de-

rivable from the Hailes specimen is rather meagre as to those

points connected with the buccal cavity upon which light might

be expected to be thrown by the discovery of a tolerably good

specimen. After a prolonged scrutiny of the material, I think

the following statements may be considered as at any rate

not widely removed from the truth. The greatest width of the

aperture was from 2 to 3 inches, probably more. The man-

dibular and palatal cartilages were curved, the curves being

broadly elliptical or circular. The teeth were set in nume-

rous compact rows, one row behind another, in regular (not, I

think, alternate) order, which (in a second specimen) are seen

to occupy a space of about an inch, measured in the direction

of the axis.

The Spines.—In this and the following specimens I have

found the spines associated with the teeth in an identifiable

condition. In this they number four ; and though all are frag-

mentary, the shape and sculpture of the fragments are well pre-

served. ‘I'here is not the slightest doubt that they perfectly

resemble each other in size and contour, and that the ornamen-

tation is identical in every respect. ‘There is also no doubt

that they are easily identifiable with Tristychius arcuatus,

* Loe. cit. Reproduced on Pl. VII. figs. 5, 5a, & 6,64,

184 Mr. T. Stock on the Genus Tristychius.

Ag. This is a matter of evident importance; for upon the

correctness of the reference depends a great part of the value

of this communication. I have therefore given figures (Pl. VII.

fies. 13 & 13 a) of the best-preserved fragment, and placed

them beside the typical form (Pl. VII. fig. 7) for comparison.

The number of spines found with this specimen is quite

conclusive to my mind as to the fact that some of them (per-

haps all) belonged to the horizontal fins. If any were dorsal

(prepinnate or not), they did not differ from the paired

spines. Yet a real distinction has apparently been established

by Messrs. Hancock and Atthey* between the paired and

dorsal spines of Gyracanthus ; and, from analogy, we should

be prepared to expect that that distinction would hold good

for other genera that possessed both.

There is no evidence of the presence of sphenonchi, the

cephalic spines found associated with Hybodus.

Cuticular appendages.—There are a number of minute

bodies scattered all over the stone, which are the remains of

the dermal skeleton. They are so small, however, so much

fractured, and simulate by their sculpture (where obscurely

seen) the grooved cusps or bases of the teeth so closely, that

it is exceedingly difficult to get a view of a specimen suffici-

ently isolated to be able to say with certainty what was its

shape. In front of the largest fragmentary spine is a cluster

of them, where they are rather better seen than elsewhere.

They bear a pretty strong resemblance to clusters of caraway

seeds. Sometimes two and sometimes three appear to be placed

together, with distinct interspaces, however, and each traversed

by one or two rather coarse stria. The difficulties of ob-

servation, however, are so great that better material may correct

this description. On holding the slab obliquely to the light

and looking carefully with the lens, I think any one would,

at any rate, be convinced of the existence of these tubercles,

though opinions might differ as to their configuration. One

that I thought I had isolated proved on more careful observa-

tion to be the base of a broken tooth, the strize only distinctly

appearing above the matrix! Sometimes I have thought

that they approach the body figured by Giebelt as belonging

to Hybodus carbonarius, and which there is good reason

for believing was an appendage of the dermis. I have tried

to figure a specimen, Pl. VII. figs. 15 & 15 a, which figures

present my view of its shape; but I must leave to the future

* Northumb. & Durham Nat. Hist. Trans. vol. iii. p. 109.

+ Loc, cit, (reproduced Pl. VII. figs. 14, 14a), His figure is probably

incorrect,

Mr. T. Stock on the Genus Tristychius. 185

the corroboration or disproof of the accuracy of the repre-

sentation. If my reading is correct, they bear a rather stri-

king general resemblance to those found associated with the

spines of Ctenacanthus hybodoides, Ag., for the knowledge

of which association we are indebted to the painstaking re-

searches of Messrs. Hancock and Atthey. I owe a large

fragment of this spine to the kindness of my friend Mr. J. M.

Campbell, of the Kelvin Grove Museum, Glasgow, who ob-

tained it from the Coal-measures of his district. On splitting

the shale on its posterior side I found, as I was led to expect

I should probably find from my experience with Gyracanthus*,

several well-preserved tubercles, of one of which I give a

figure (Pl. VII. fig. 16). It has never, so far as I remember,

been figured before ; and a comparison of it with the tubercle

of Tristychius arcuatus, Ag., will at once show that there is a

decided resemblance between the two. A strong resemblance

exists also between them and the tubercle of Gyracanthus

(Pl. VII. figs. 17 & 17a); and these are all, or nearly

all, of the Carboniferous sharks upon which dermal appen-

dages have as yet been clearly provedy to exist. Nevertheless

this resemblance may not necessarily imply close affinity.

Cranial Cartilage.—TVhe cranial cartilage preserved in this

specimen presents the usual mosaic appearance with which

the student of fossil sharks is familiar. When freshly frac-

tured, the black glossy appearance, due to the change to

bitumen, is apt to deceive the unwary by an appearance

simulating that of minute ganoid scales, such as are found on

Acanthodes.

The next and last specimen to be described occurs in a

nodule, found by myself at Trinity near Edinburgh, in the

Calciferous-Sandstone series (Wardie horizon).

The nodule is not entire ; it contains, however, the remains

of the cranium, and is valuable as throwing light upon the

dentition of this fish. The nodule measured 5x4 2 in.

(before it was broken up tor examination) and was very

pyritous and hard.

Description.—I succeeded in developing a fragment of one

spine. It conforms in sculpture so closely to those last de-

scribed that all might have belonged to the same fish. What

can be seen of its shape agrees also ; and the denticulation on

the posterior area is identical. There can be no doubt that

it belongs to the same species.

* The shale at the back of the spines should always be carefully ex-

amined for tubercles. i

Tt Many very different dermal buckles or tubercles, however, haye re-

ceived special names, having been mistaken for teeth.

186 Mr. T. Stock on the Genus Tristychius.

Outicular Appendages.—Dimly seen ; but there are traces

of them, and these do not differ (so far as can be made out)

from those described as belonging to the last specimen. They

are most visible on the extreme posterior edges of the halves

of the nodule.

Teeth.—On opening this nodule I thought I had settled the

long-standing controversy as to the true nature of the bodies

described by Agassiz as Ctenoptychius pectinatus, and believed

by him to be teeth, but by Messrs. Hancock and Atthey* to be

appendages of the dermis. A number of broad, low, suleated

teeth were seen lying in much disorder, yet compacted toge-

ther, and forming evidently no inconsiderable portion of the

armature of a Selachian mouth. An examination with the lens,

however, resolved the majority of these teeth into forms with

which I had been made very familiar by the material previ-

ously considered in this paper; and I must confess to a

moment of keen disappointment as this fact became apparent.

Nevertheless, after repeated examination of the specimens

under every optical condition, and after a consideration of

other evidence, I have gradually been led to adopt the view

that Ctenoptychius pectinatus is a part of the dentition of

Tristychius arcuatus,—that is to say, that the teeth described

in the last specimen and well seen in this (teeth with ele-

vated median cusps and well-developed lateral cusps, strongly

grooved, and with short striated and rooted bases) are accom-

panied in the same mouth, but in a different part of it, by teeth

with no specially raised median or lateral elevations (the fasci-

culations of these teeth may probably, however, be homologous

with the cusps of the other kind), with a low, nearly straight

area, with well-developed bases, fringed (in many specimens)

by root-like attachments. The gradations between the two

kinds (if we may hope that a clue has been given) is not so very

surprising. Slightly elevate the grooved and (already) fasci-

culated denticles of Ctenoptychius pectinatus, first at the middle

and then at the sides, and you have Tristychius arcuatus

teeth. Depress (and in some teeth the elevation is slight)

the cusps of the latter, and you have the former. It is a great

pity that the evidence furmished by the specimen is no clearer ;

yet I consider it suflicient to warrant the expression of these

views. In most of the teeth that are visible the distances

between the cusps are much reduced when compared with

some of those described in the preceding specimen. In one

* Northumb. & Durham Nat. Hist. Trans. vol. ili. p. 116. See also a

note by myself in the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., April 1882, p. 256.

Messrs. Hancock and Atthey acknowledged their great resemblance to

teeth,

2) =e ee

< om

Mr. T. Stock on the Genus Tristychius. 187

tooth (Pl. VII. fig. 18) the middle cusp is much lower than in

the others; and as it lies with its convex aspect uppermost,

deeply grooved and prominently ridged, the lateral cusps on

one side hardly at all differentiated from the rest of the free area,

the resemblance to Ctenoptychius pectinatus is striking. In

other places, particularly in one place (it requires close obser-

vation to detect it), the appearances are interpretable as those

of a series of fan-shaped, ridged, and denticulated bodies,

resembling the smaller forms of Ctenoptychius sectinatus.

It is just here, however, in these crucial cases, where obser-

vation is most difficult. A little confirmatory evidence may

be gleaned from the observations and figures of Giebel*, pre-

viously discussed. His Styracodus acutus | reminds one of

Ctenoptychius, and is accompanied by a spine which appears

to resemble that of Zristychius.

At Burgh Lee, where the Carboniferous beds have been

searched for fossils perhaps more thoroughly than in any

other locality in this district, Zristychius is one of the com-

monest spines, as Ctenoptychius pectinatus is one of the

commonest fossils; yet, strange to say, the teeth (of which a

good view has been obtained in the specimens that I have

described) have never, so far as I know, been detected in that

locality. I have obtained Zristychius spines and Ctenopty-

chius pectinatus associated in the fish-bed at Abden, near

Kinghorn, Fife, but not the undoubted teeth of Tristychius.

On the Wardie horizon, again, I have obtaimed the teeth and

spines of Ziristychius, but not a single detached undoubted

Ctenoptychius. In the English Coal-measures Ctenoptychius

pectinatus is common ; but neither spines of Zristychvus nor

undoubted Zizsiychius teeth have been, so far as I know, dis-

covered{. It will thus be seen that the evidence from associ-

ation or the lack of it is exceedingly conflicting and of dubious

value, whether for the affirmative side or the negative.

On the whole, whilst believing that the two forms of teeth

will be found to belong to the same fish, I do not yet

consider it placed beyond question, and some reserve must

be exercised before deducing much from it.

Summary.—TVhe preceding descriptions indicate a shark of

small size. ‘The buccal opening seems to have been of con-

siderable relative dimensions. ‘he teeth were exceedingly

numerous, and formed closely compacted regular (?) rows

reaching back for a distance of probably from a half inch to

an inch from the anterior extremity of the mouth. They ap-

* Loe. cit. + Reproduced Pl. VII. fig. 19.

t I should be glad to be corrected here if I am wrong, as I possibly am.

188 Mr. T. Stock on the Genus Tristychius.

pear to have been of two kinds :—one prehensile, with well-

developed median and lateral cusps ; the other without specially

prominent elevations, and occupying a different position in the

mouth. The skin was clothed with a dense armour of tuber-

cles, the veritable shagreen of these ancient sharks. The

horizontal fins (or some of them) were protected anteriorly by

gracefully curved, ridged, grooved, and denticulated spines*.

(The presence of dorsal spines, protecting fins or otherwise, is

not proved.) There were at least four on every fish. They

varied a good deal in different individuals, but were ddente-

cally similar in the same fish. The peculiarly curved spines

known as sphenonchi and found with Hybodus do not appear

on this fish. The endoskeleton was cartilaginous. ‘The

axis was persistently notochordal and unsegmented, but gave

off (neurally and hemally) spines that were composed of

granular cartilage, closely apposed, probably alternately ar-

ranged on opposite sides of the axis, and directed back-

wards, the whole conforming to the simplest and most

ancient types of axial structure. ‘These statements, or the

majority of them, rest upon tolerably well-ascertained facts,

and though far from sufficient to elucidate the whole structure

of the fish, form at any rate a useful contribution to its

history.

A ffinities—Certain characters of which much is properly

made in the classification of recent Selachian fishes, such as

the presence or absence of the membrana nictitans, the conflu-

ence of the nostrils with the mouth, the presence or absence of

spiracles, and the notching of the pectoral fins at their origin,

are of course practically inapplicable to most sharks in a

fossil condition, notwithstanding the surprising perfection in

which such remains (in post-Paleeozoic rocks) have been ob-

tained. Nor do I think that the important series of investi-

gations now being carried on with so much zeal by Prof.

Hasse} will be of much service to students of the Selachian

remains of the older rocksf.

There abides, however, a valuable set of characters by the

use of which a natural classification will no doubt be gradually

conquered. Important amongst these are the pinnation and

dentition. Science owes a debt of gratitude to Messrs. Han-

* T have seen one or two spines considerably larger than the largest

figured.

+ Das natiirliche Syst. d. Elasmobranchier.

{ He arrives at a singular conclusion with regard to Tristychius. He

says (op.cit. 1st part, p. 62), “ Alle diese Formen (Asteracanthus, Myria-

canthus, Priscacanthus, Tristychius) smd demnach meiner Ansicht nach

jiingeren Holocephalen zuzurechnen, welche sich mit Asteracanthus bis

in den mittleren Jura hineinerstreckten und von denen Yrestychius in

seiner Form sicham meisten an unsere jetzt lebende Chimera anschloss.”

Mr. T. Stock on the Genus Tristychius. 189

cock and Atthey for breaking down the traditionary notion

that all fossil spines were dorsal.

In a clever research* (based upon very scattered material) -

they showed that spines of G'yracanthus, till then believed to

be dorsal, were really pectoral ; and I have been able to con-

firm their conclusionsf by the finding of an interesting speci-

men containing well-preserved remains of the pectoral arch.

I consider that Messrs. Hancock and Atthey, by these obser-

vations, have opened up a very promising future for selacho-

logical inquiry ; for whilst the soft structures of the fins will

(except in the rarest cases) have left no trace of their exis-

tence, we may expect that the spines which protected them

will frequently be preserved in their proper relations.

I have thus tried to hint at the lines upon which any real

advance in our knowledge of the Paleeozoic sharks will pro-

bably be made. [am unfortunately not able to utilize them

to any great extent in the discussion of the affinities of T7isty-

chius. By the spines it is allied to Ctenacanthus through

Tristychius minor, Portlock.

The appendages of the cutis differ greatly from those found

on Hybodust. They bear, however, a strong resemblance

to those of Otenacanthus hybodoides, Ag. (= Cladodus mira-

bilis, Ag.§), and Gyracanthus tuberculatus, Ag. Their

value for purposes of classification, however, is probably slight,

judging from recent genera.

The teeth of Tristychius are even more Hybodont in facies

than the probably closely allied teeth which Giebel referred to

Hybodus |\.

The Ctenoptychius pectinatus tooth (if proved to belong to this

genus) would detract a good deal from the (probably extreme)

value which has been attributed to the amount of the lateral

cuspidal elevation of the teeth, in defining species and genera

commonly ascribed to the Hybodontide. It is extremely

unfortunate that the evidence is no clearer either for or against

this unexpected association.

After weighing the evidence now set forth, I incline to the

belief that Zristychius was Hybodont, but not Hybodus, and

should not be much surprised if the future proved that Clado-

dus (or a part of it) was a closer ally than Hybodus.

* Loc. cit.

+ Ina paper read to the Edinburgh Naturalists’ Field Club, but not

yet published.

{ I have had few opportunities of studying Hybodus. Excellent unde-

scribed Mesozoic material exists; and it 1s much to be desired that some

one who has access to it would describe it.

§ Messrs. Hancock and Atthey have brought forward an amount of

evidence which amounts to proof that the tooth of Ctenacanthus hybo-

doides, Ag., was Cladodus mirabilis, Ag. || Loe. cit,

190 Bibliographical Notices.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI.

Fig. 1. Tristychius fimbriatus, Stock, nat. size.

Fig. 1a. The same, restored.

Figs. 2 & 2a. Styracodus acutus, Giebel (= Tristychius P).

Figs. 3 & 3a. Referred by Giebel to Hybodus (= Pleuracanthus ?).

Figs. 4 & 4a. Chilodus gracilis, Giebel (= Diplodus ?).

Figs. 5 & 5a, Hybodus vicinalis, Giebel (= Tristychius ?).

Figs.6 & 6a. Hybodus carbonarius, Giebel (= Tristychius ?).

Figs. 7 & 7 a. Tristychius arcuatus, Ag., nat. size, and point enlarged.

Fig. 8. Tristychius arcuatus, Ag., nat. size. s, fragment of pectoral

spine; 7, displaced neural spines; 7, doubtful traces of the rays

of the pectoral fin.

Fig. 9. Tooth of Tristychius arcuatus, Ag., nat. size.

Fig. 10. The same, showing base, nat. size.

Fig. 11. The same, nat. size.

Fig. 12. Four teeth of Tristychius arcuatus, Ag., im natural position, nat.

size.

Figs. 13 & 13a. Spine of Tristychius arcuatus, Ag.: fig. 13 nat. size; fig.

15a enlarged, to show the nature of the sculpture.

Figs. 14 & 14a. Dermal tubercle of Hybodus carbonarius, Giebel ; fig. 14

enlarged.

Fig. 15. Dermal tubercle of Tristychius arcuatus, Ag., much enlarged.

Fug. 15a, The same, one of the prongs much enlarged, to show the

sculpture.

Fig. 16. Dermal tubercle of Ctenacanthus hybodoides, Ag., slightly en-

larged.

Fig. 17. Dermal tubercle of Gyracanthus tuberculatus, Ag., much enlarged.

Fig. 17 a, The same, one of the prongs much enlarged to show the dia-

gonal sculpture.

Fig. 18. Tooth of Tristychius arcuatus, Ag., enlarged, showing the slight

elevation of the lateral cusps.

Fig. 19. Styracodus acutus, Giebel.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

Atlas de la description physique de la République Argentine conte-

nant des vues pittoresques et des figures d’ Histoire naturelle com-

posées par le Dr. H. Burmeisrer, Directeur du Musée public de

Buenos Aires, &c. Le texte traduit en francais avec le concours

de E. Darreaux. Deuxicme section. Mammiferes. Premiere

Livraison. Die Bartenwale der argentinischen Kusten.

’ Erléuterungen zur Fauna Argentina, enthaltend ausfuhrliche Dar-

stellungen neuer oder ungeniigend bekannter Stiugethiere von H. —

Burmerster, &c. Erste Lieferung. Die Bartenwale der argenti-—

nischen Kiisten. Buenos Aires: Paul-Emile Coni. Paris: F.

Savy. Halle: Ed. Anton. 1881. i

Dr. Burmutster’s ‘ Natural History of the Argentine Republic’ was —

interrupted on the completion of the first section by a change of

government. ‘The author, however, had from time to time trans-_

Bibliographical Notices. 191

mitted his materials to lithographers in Berlin, and was preparing to

continue the work at his own cost, when the governor of the pro-

- yince placed some funds at his disposal on condition that copies of

the work should be distributed in the Republic, leaving the author

free to issue his work in German and to dispose of it in Europe.

Hence the progress of the book will depend largely upon the recep-

tion it may meet with among naturalists in Europe and North

America; and we can only trust that every encouragement may be

extended to the author in his endeavour to carry out the great

undertaking on which he is engaged. The part before us, which is

complete in itself, comprises a description of the whalebone whales

which visit the Argentine coast. This memoir consists of seven folio

plates, which illustrate the external appearance of the Balenoptera

mtermedia, and the osteology of this species, as well as that of the

Balenoptera bonaérensis and the Balenoptera patachonica. These

plates are beautifully drawn; some were prepared as far back as 1870.

They form an important contribution to our knowledge of the species

which they illustrate. There is a brief folio description of the

plates in French, and a synoptical table of the length of the indi-

vidual vertebrze and the number of vertebre in the several regions

of the body in the three species figured. The text is in German,

and consists of thirty-six pages quarto, which, between the intro-

duction and conclusion, describes in detail the three species figured,

and gives some notice of the Megaptera Burmeistert and of the Ba-

lena australis.

The introduction is a lively account of the author’s first studies in

1825 of a fin-whale stranded on the island of Riigen ; and this leads

up to a recital of the difficulties which surrounded him in South

America in haying to make his studies on the sea-shore without the

- aid of trained assistants, and to measure these animals and their

organs in the presence of excited and shouting crowds ; but there is

no need for apology on the author’s part that he should confine him-

_ self on the present occasion chiefly to studies of the skeleton and of

_ the external aspect of these whales; for although the species had

been previously defined, it is only now that we are able to compare

- them in detail with the well-known fin-whales of Europe and of

the Japanese seas.

The Balenoptera bonaérensis is given the first place in the de-

scription. A male stranded in 1867 has already been described by

_ the author in the ‘ Proceedings of the Zoological Society’ for that

_ year, and, although in too advanced a stage of decomposition to

_ permit near examination, was estimated to be 52 feet long, the head

_ being 7 feet, the body and back 12 feet, and the tail 13 feet.

_ Having given details of measurement and described the grey-white

_ belly, the slaty-grey back, and the position of the genital organs

_ relatively to the dorsal fin, he passes on to describe the baleen, which

_ hadalready become detached from the head. The portion from one

_ side which was recovered included only 192 plates out of a probable

250 to 260. The smallest plate was 7 or 8 centim. long; the

longest, which was the 150th, was 32 centim. long; and behind this

_the plates again became shorter.

Se See el ee TP ee)

192 Bibliographical Notices.

The skull is compared by the author with that figured by Esch-

richt as Balenoptera rostrata, from which it differs in carrying on to

the mature condition the form which distinguishes the northern

whale in the young state. The Argentine whale has the snout rela-

tively shorter and more pointed. The expansion between the pre-

maxillary bones is posterior in position, and oval; the nasal bones

are small and narrow; and the frontal bone reaches further forward

and is narrower in the orbital region than in the northern form.

The occipital bone has the parabolic contour of the young Bale-

noptera rostrata, and covers the parietal and reaches the nasal,

so as nearly to overlap the frontal bones. The fork of the maxil-

lary is short. The palatine bone is short, and truncated rather than

rounded in front. The jugal process of the squamosal bone does not

extend so far outward as in the European species ; and the jugal bone

is slender and more curved in front. The vomer is relatively longer,

and is partly cleft in front. These differences, which are regarded

as specific, are accompanied by other differences in the vertebral

column, though the number of vertebre is the same. There are

7 cervical, 11 dorsal, 12 lumbar, and 18-20 caudal vertebrae. The

first, second, fourth, and fifth cervicals are figured separately ; and

the author points out the many small differences which he regards

as characterizing the South-Atlantic type, at the same time con-

fessing that he no longer attaches so much importance to the lateral

blending of the transverse processes into rings, as he did when the

species was first instituted. In the dorsal region the spinous process

increases in height from the first, in which it is 5 centim. long, to

38 centim. in the last dorsal. The height of the process increases

to the middle of the lumbar region, and then declines, so that the

process altogether disappears at the tenth caudal. The modifica-

tions of the vertebra in the dorsal region are represented by drawings

of the vertebral column and of the first and last dorsals, from which

it is seen that the neural canal, which is at first triangular and

has a slender arch, becomes ultimately vertically oval as the arch

increases in strength, and the transverse processes, which were at

first directed forward, come to be turned backward. The caudal re-

gion is characterized by the third to the tenth vertebra having vertical

perforations, which in the earlier vertebrae pass through the bases

of the transverse processes, and in the later vertebre through the

centrum. ‘There are twelve subvertebral bones in the caudal region.

The tail-fin probably extended over six vertebra. The ribs vary in

the position of the tubercle and in their length and curvature. The

first is 86 centim. long; the seventh is 146 centim. round the

curve, while the tenth and eleventh are 92 centim. in the same

measurement. The sternum is very remarkable in having the

anterior limb of the cross subdivided into two; it is 44 centim.

long and has the usual facets for the first rib on the middle of the

posterior process. The scapula is chiefly remarkable for the sharp-

pointed form of the acromion and coracoid processes. The fore limb

is somewhat slender, with the humerus 28 centim. long and the

ulna and radius 56 centim. long. Both these bones are curved

Bibliographical Notices. 193

backward ; and the olecranon projects conspicuously beyond both the

ulna and humerus. ‘There are five carpal bones, three forming a

large proximal row below the epiphyses of the ulna and radius, and

two small bones forming a lower row. These carpals are named

the naviculare, lunatum, triquetrum, hamatum, and capitulum.

There are four digits, which correspond to the second to fifth. The

second is slender and contains five bones, the third stout, with six

bones; the fourth has five bones, all stouter than those of the

second; while the fifth digit has four bones, which rapidly diminish

in size. ‘The hinder extremity is represented by a single bone, pro-

bably pelvic, but of somewhat unusual form, though most like the

pelvic bone of Balenoptera rostrata. The hyoid is very similar to

that of the North-Atlantic species.

The second species, Balenoptera patachonica, is described from a

perfect specimen, obtained in 1871, which was 50 feet long. Its

form was more slender than the species just described, and closely

resembles the Balenoptera nvusculus, but was unfortunately stripped

of flesh before seen by the author. He remarks on the differences

which this skeleton shows from an imperfect specimen which was in

the museum before it came under his direction, and is disposed to

‘attribute the differences to sex and age. The skull is described in some

detail, and the figures demonstrate its difference from other Argentine

species; but Dr. Burmeister has been limited to the use of figures in

comparing it with the northern form, which it most resembles. The

first found specimen, which was figured in the ‘ Proceedings of the

Zoological Society’ for 1865, and which may therefore claim to be

the type, differs, so far as can be judged from the figure there given,

to an inconvenient degree from the new type now figured. The

'vomerine bones of the second specimen extend further forward than

in the first type; but in that type the frontal bones extend further

outward, so as to cover and hide the jugal bones, the nasal bones are

narrower and longer, the notches external to the occipital condyles

are deeper, and the snout tapers forward ina manner more marked.

Other differences no less obvious are to be detected in the representa-

tions of thevertebree and scapula; so that the species must be regarded

as extremely variable ; and this circumstance is suggestive of the pro-

bability that more abundant materials would do something towards

blending it with the northern species, to which Burmeister indicates

its affinity.

In his account of the neck the author restricts himself chiefly

to establishing the differences between the vertebree of the three

species which he describes. ‘he atlas of the Balenoptera pata-

chonica has the occipital facets too close together to receive the den-

tata between them as in the other species ; and the form of the neural

arch is distinctive of the axis in all three. The form and arrange-

ment of the transverse processes differ considerably in the later

cervicals. The length of the neural spine, as usual, is very little in

the cervical region ; but in the dorsal region it soon attains a con-

siderable elevation, though relatively shorter than in the Baleno-

_ ptera bonaérensis. The height of the neural spine still increases a

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 14

194 Bibliographical Notices.

little in the lumbar region before declining again so as to disappear

in the tail. Just as the elevation of the spine is less remarkable

than in the former species, so it dwindles away more gradually, being

very small between the eighth and fourteenth caudal vertebree. The

differences from the Balenoptera intermedia are rather less striking,

but are exhibited in the relative size of the centrum, the length of

the transverse process and the form of the neutral spine in the

caudal region, which is broad at its upper termination in the Balw-

noptera patachonica, and narrow or rounded above in the Baleno-

ptera intermedia. But in the type described in 1865 this difference

is much less marked.

The ribs increase in length from 92 centim. in the first to

1:5 centim. in the fifth; they then diminish to 120 centim, in

the fifteenth, while the sixteenth is 85 centim. long. On one side

there is a seventeenth rib 42 centim.long. The differences in form

of the head of the rib are considerable when the specimen now de-

scribed is compared with that figured in Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865. The

sternum is of a broad ‘T-shaped form, having the transverse

limbs broad and strong, with a longitudinally oval perforation be-

tween them; the facets for the first pair of ribs are placed close

behind the great transverse bar. The width of the bone is 45 centim.,

and its length 38 centim. In the remainder of the skeleton the

divergences from the northern species are less marked. The diffe-

rences between the scapule of the two individuals are not very

great in size. ‘The fore limb has a length of 1-80 metre. The pro-

portions of the several elements necessarily offer but few differences ;

the radius and ulna are conspicuous for their straightness, and the

moderate elongation of the olecranon process, which scarcely extends

beyond the stout humerus. The phalanges are comparatively uniform

in character: the middle digit, as usual, is the longest; it contains

seven phalanges, while there are six in the fourth, and five in the

fifth digit. There is no trace of a hind limb, except a triangular

bone, which is probably to be referred to the pelvis.

Having described the skeleton, the author discusses the characters

on which he relies to distinguish it from Balenoptera musculus. In

the head specific characters are found in the relative width of the

parietal, frontal, and the orbital plate of the maxillary, Another

difference is in the intermaxillary being stronger posteriorly ; and it

encloses a long elliptical hole above the vomer, while in the southern

species this hole is short. The occipital bone is broader in the

southern form. There is apparently one more dorsal vertebra and

at least one more pair of ribs.

Balenoptera intermedia is known from both male and female

specimens. It is intermediate between the Balenoptera patacho-

nica and the Balenoptera Sibbaldii. The body of one specimen was

58 feet long ; where thickest, behind the pectoral fin, it was about

9 feet high. The lower jaw extended somewhat in advance of the

head. ‘he pectoral fin has a sickle-shaped form, is 8 feet long and

3 feet wide in the broadest part, and is placed 5 feet behind the eye.

The whole of the underside is marked in its anterior half with parallel

Bibliographical Notices. 195

longitudinal grooves, about an inch deep, which extend forward to

near the extremity of the lower jaw. ‘The tail-fin is 4 fect long in

the middle, and each lateral half is 8 feet long. The dorsal fin is

only 15 feet from the extremity of the tail, and is placed above the

anal region ; it is 23 feet long. The body is dark slate-grey, with

the back nearly black. The second specimen was 60 feet long, and

had about one hundred furrows on the underside. The sexual

differences are indicated; and it would seem that, notwithstanding

the larger size of this individual, the anal aperture is only 15 feet

from the extremity of the tail. The lobes of the tail are smaller,

and each is only 63 feet wide; the back fin also is smaller. The

male specimen is more slender and of a darker colour, and has rela-

tively smaller pectoral fins. The baleen extends along the mouth

for about 6 feet; the plates are triangular, and where longest have a

length of 2feet. They diminish in length to a few inches, and form

mere pencil-like tufts.

In this second specimen the entire length of the skull is only 10 feet

8 inches, and is only a little longer, but relatively wider, than that

of Balenoptera patachonica.

The outer border of the maxillary bone is remarkably convex ; the

lateral parts of the occipital bone do not diverge backward so much

as in the other species ; the nasal bones extend back to the line of

the orbit ; the premaxillary bones have a remarkable process incli-

ning inward, where the frontal branch of the maxillary diverges—a

condition somewhat similar to that seen in the Balenoptera Sibbaldii.

Thus the distinction of this species from those which it most resem-

bles is set forth. Similarly the vertebral column is somewhat

stronger than in the foregoing species. There are seven cervical,

fifteen dorsal, sixteen lumbar, twenty-six caudal vertebre. The

detailed descriptions and measurements assist the figures in illustra~

ting the characters of this part of the skeleton; and the author

follows the same general plan previously adopted in his descriptions,

The sternum was lost in maceration. The fore limb is almost en-

tirely unknown, though the author gives a beautiful drawing of its

osteology on the basis, as he states, of analogy with its northern

representative.

Megaptera Burmeisteri is still only known from the skeleton,

50 feet long, which was found overgrown with willows on an island

in the delta of the Parana, where it lay partly buried; and but few

additions have been made to the original materials, though among

these are the tympanic and petrosal bones.

Balena australis occurs off the South-American coast; but no

specimen has hitherto been captured in the Argentine waters.

Finally, in a brief conclusion, the author justifies his mode of

dealing with the material.

The descriptions are excellent throughout, and relieved by a

recital of incidents in the history of the specimens which are not

without humour. The illustrations leave nothing to be desired ; and

the work will take a place among important ‘monographs of the

Cetacea.

14%

196 Bibliographical Notices.

Life of Sir W. E. Logan.. By Bernarp J. Harrineron. 8vo.

Pp. 432. London: Sampson Low and Co., 1883.

In this interesting volume the author has done good service by

bringing together from many sources, and connecting into a con-

tinuous narrative, details of the life and work of one of the most

devoted and single-hearted of British scientific men and public

servants. We gather from the preface that the author’s task was

not self-imposed, and that he to a certain extent laboured under the

disadvantage of not having known Sir William Logan in the earlier

years of his work in Canada; but having undertaken the work, he

has endeavoured to bring together such of Sir William’s own words

as will recall him to the minds and hearts of old friends, or enable

those who were not privileged with his acquaintance to form an

estimate of his character and work; and these objects he may be

considered as having fairly accomplished,

William Edward, the third child and second of the five sons of

William and Janet Logan, was born at Montreal on the 20th April

1798, and after receiving his early schooling from Mr. Alexander

Skakel, a determined Scotchman thoroughly well acquainted with

the art of flogging, but a good classical scholar and successful

teacher, was in 1814 sent with his elder brother to the High School

of Edinburgh, then in the zenith of its reputation. In 1817 he

became a student of the University, receiving the first prize in

mathematics, ‘“‘ with the goodwill of all the competitors,” at the

end of his single session at College, when his university career was

brought to a sudden close by a resolution to enter into commercial

life. He was received into the office of his uncle, Mr. Hart Logan,

in London; and for the following thirteen years his life was that of

a city man, with occasional holidays passed in France and Scotland.

In 1831, his uncle having become interested in a process for smelting

copper furnace-slags, William Logan undertook the business manage-

ment of the works at Morriston, near Swansea; and it was during

his residence in Wales, extending over the period 1831-87, that the

true bent of his genius towards stratigraphical geology first became

apparent in the remarkable map of the South-Wales coal-field, laid

down upon the then recently completed sheets of the one-inch Ord-

nance map of the district, which was exhibited at the meeting of the

British Association at Liverpool in 1837. This, when subsequently

incorporated by Sir Henry de la Beche into the maps of the Geological

Survey, formed the standard for mapping the details of the other

coal-fields in the kingdom. Another valuable service rendered as

a volunteer by Logan to the Geological Survey was the introduction

of the large sections on the uniform scale of six inches to the mile,

which have been invariably used subsequently. In 1837 he was

elected a Fellow of the Geological Society, and in 1840 contributed

to its ‘ Transactions’ an important paper ‘‘On the Underclays of

the Coal-seams of South Wales,” which he showed, from the inyari-

able presence in them of the roots of Stigmaria, to be the soils upon

Tee ae

Bibliographical Notices. 197

which the plants forming the coal-seams originally grew. This

generalization he subsequently verified in the coal-fields of Pennsyl-

vania and Nova Scotia. In the latter locality he was the first

(in 1841) to observe the traces of reptilian footprints in the Carbo-

niferous system, a fact which has been somewhat overlooked by

subsequent observers; but Logan’s claim is vindicated by his

friend and life-long associate Principal Dawson, in his work on the

air-breathers of the coal-period, published in 1863.

After retiring from the management of the copper-works, subse-

quent to the death of his uncle in 1838, Logan returned to Canada

in 1840 and was engaged in the researches last mentioned on the

coal of the United States and maritime provinces. In the course of

his explorations he was much impressed with the great mineral

wealth of the basin of Pennsylvania, and had some thoughts of

establishing himself as a coal-viewer in the United States; but upon

the determination of the provincial government of Canada to insti-

tute a Geological Survey in 1842, he was, on the unanimous recom-

mendation of the leading English geologists, De la Beche, Murchison,

Sedgwick, and Buckland, appointed to undertake it, which he did in

the spring of 1843, having for his sole assistant Mr. Alexander

Murray, who was his constant associate during the whole time of

his work in Canada, and subsequently directed the Survey of New-

foundland. 'Thenceforward for more than a quarter of a century

Logan’s life was entirely devoted to the working-out of the geo-

logical structure of his native country. He commenced in the

eastern district of Gaspé, on the south shore of the Saint Lawrence,

among Carboniferous and Devonian strata, and proceeded along the

shores of Lakes Huron and Superior, through the valley of the

Ottawa, and along the Labrador coast, all of which, now become

familiar places to the student of American geology, were then un-

known to geologists, and scarcely, if at all, topographically delinea-

ted, at any rate for more than a short distance from the shores of

navigable waters, where hydrographic surveys had extended. This

absence of topographical maps added enormously to the labours of

the work ; and for several years the method of traverse-surveys by

counting paces and compass-bearings was added to the geological

work proper, with the result of furnishing valuable additions to the

cartography of the province ; while the courses of streams navigable

by canoes were plotted from similar surveys, in which the distances

were determined by the Rochon micrometer-telescope. The value

of the latter part of the work was specially noticed by Captain

(afterwards Admiral) Bayfield, R.N., the Admiralty surveyor of the

Saint Lawrence. ‘The privations and discomforts experienced in the

earlier years of Logan’s work in Canada are abundantly evidenced

by the numerous extracts from his journals describing incidents of

camp life and references to a somewhat sparse dietary, in which

spruce-partridges, porpoises, and porcupines figure largely, the last

being spoken of as especially acceptable additions to the larder,

while the short commons were aggravated by the persistent worries

of mosquitoes and black flies during the greater part of the working

198 Bibliographical Notices.

season. These privations and discomforts, it must be remembered,

were encountered not by a young beginner haying to make a way

in life, but by a successful business man of mature years and large

means, in the carrying-out of a self-imposed life-work, to which all

Logan’s energies were devoted without stint or reserve. Besides

personal work, large sums of money were often advanced when the

necessities of the government led to the reduction of the annual

grants for a term of years. The work thus partially outlined met

at last with a hearty recognition both in the colony and in Europe,

especially when the magnificent collections made during the progress

of the Survey were exhibited in the different international exhibi-

tions in London and Paris from 1851 to 1868. Logan received the

honour of knighthood in 1856, and was made Chevalier of the Legion

of Honour in 1855, and Officer in 1867.

The more important portions of the scientific work of Sir W. Logan

may, in the author’s words, be summed up as follows :—

1. Investigations with regard to the origin of coal, which resulted

in the establishment of the fact of the local origin of seams from

growth in place.

2. The establishment of the Laurentian system as a great group

of stratified crystalline rocks divisible into several groups, and con-

taining at certain horizons’evidences of organic life of the forami-

niferal type (Hozoon canadense), the latter having been worked out

jointly with Principal Dawson and Dr. Sterry Hunt.

3. The proof of the existence of a newer series of crystallized

stratified rocks, the Huronian, resting unconformably on the Lau-

rentian.

4. The identification of various formations younger than the

Huronian, and the establishment of the fact that the lower paleo-

zoic rocks rest unconformably upon the Laurentian and Huronian

strata.

5. The production of numerous admirable geological maps, in-

eluding not only the work of his own survey, but that of the geolo-

gists in the maritime provinces and the northern United States.

The numerous official reports made at intervals during the progress

of the survey formed the basis of the volume entitled ‘Geology of

Canada,’ published in 1863, and which was the chief literary work

of Sir W. Logan, in the preparation of which, however, he was

largely assisted by Dr. Sterry Hunt. This is so well known that it

will be unnecessary to go into detail as to its contents further than

to state that it has been everywhere regarded as a model of what

the geological handbook of a country should be, both as regards

stratigraphical details and the accessory subjects of mineral and

economic geology ; and in these respects, though now nearly twenty

years old, it remains unmatched by any similar subsequent publi-

cation.

The large geological map on the scale of 25 miles to the inch was

among the latest as well as one of the finest of Logan’s works, being

remarkable for the beauty of execution and colouring. In the latter

particular he took extreme pains; and the writer of the present

Bibliographical Notices. 199

notice well remembers the long hours of work devoted to it in the

Survey Office in Jermyn Street, the illustrious investigator, then full

of years and honours, having thought it necessary to prepare the

work in its minutest details for the publisher with his own hands—

an example that might well be followed by some of our younger

geologists, who, while bold in speculation, are not always so anxious

to illustrate their opinions graphically as they might be.

In 1869 Sir William resigned the directorship of the Survey, but

continued to occupy himself at intervals with geological investiga-

tions, in part caused by new and controversial views as to some of

the earlier work on the eastern townships, which was incomplete

when he left the colony for the last time in August 1874.

During the winter of that year, passed with his sister in South

Wales, the disease to which he had been some time subject made

rapid progress; and thenceforward, with a few brief intervals of

improvement, he became progressively weaker, and finally passed to

his rest on the 22nd of June 1875, in the 78th year of his age.

As an investigator into the intricacies of stratigraphical structure

Logan was perhaps without an equal; and in the establishment of

exact geological mapping as now practised in the British and other

national Surveys his work was second only to that of his illustrious

contemporary, Sir Henry de la Beche.

The author, though evidently without much personal knowledge

of the subject of his memoirs, has done his work well, especially in

the numerous selections made from journals and letters. Some of

the latter, otherwise properly inserted at the end of the volume, con-

tain details that might have been judiciously omitted. H. B.

A Monograph of North-American Phyllopod Crustacea. By A. 5.

Pacxarp, Jun. 8vo. Washington: 1883. Extracted from the

Twelfth Annual Report of the U.S. Geological and Geographical

Survey. F. V. Hayden, U.S. Geologist in Charge.

Tus is a very comprehensive, well worked, and useful Monograph,

based largely, but not wholly, on the consideration of North-Ame-

rican forms, 4nd comprising :—I. The classification of the living

Phyllopodous species; II. The geological succession of fossil forms ;

III. Geographical distribution of the existing species; IV. External

and internal anatomy ; V. Development and metamorphoses ; VI.

Relation to their environment; VII. Relations of the Phyllocarida

(Nebalia &c.) to the Phyllopoda; and VIII. Bibliography. The

following is the system and order of treatment in detail :—

I. Puytiopopa, Latreille (p. 296), history and characters. Family

Limnadiade, Baird (p. 297). Subfamily Limnetine, Packard, genus

Luivetis, Lovén (p. 298); species (American) Gouldw, Baird,

mucronatus, Packard ; brevifrons, Pack., gracilicornis, Pack. Sub-

family Estheriane, Pack. Genus Esrupria, Riippell (p. 303):

American species, californica, Pack., Newcombt, Baird, compleai-

manus, n. sp. meaicana, Claus, Morse, Pack., Belfragei, Pack.,

Jonesii, Baird. Genus Limnapta, Brongniart (p. $11): American

200 Bibliographical Notices.

species americana, Morse. Genus Evurmnapta, Pack. (p. 311):

American species Agassizii, Pack., tevana, Pack., and antillarum

(Baird). (Uncertain: Limnadia coriacea, Haldeman, Limnadella,

nov. gen., and L, Kitei, n. sp.) Fam. <Apodide, Burmeister.

Genus Luprpurus, Leach (p. 315): American species glaciahs,

Kroyer, Couesti, Pack., bilobatus, Pack. Genus Apus, Schaeffer

(p. 319): American species a@qualis, Pack., Newberryi, Pack.,

Lucasanus, Pack., longicaudatus, Leconte, domingensis, Baird,

Guildingii, Thompson, himalayanus, Pack. (and Dukianus, Day,

mentioned). Fam. Branchiopodide, Baird. Subfam. Branchio-

podine, Packard. Genus Arremra, Leach (p. 329): American

species gracilis, Verrill, Guildingii, Thomps. Genus Brancuinecra,

Verrill (p. 334): American species paludosa (Miller), coloradensis,

Pack., Lindahl, n. sp. Genus Brancureus, Schaeffer (p. 340):

American species vernalis, Verr., serratus (Forbes). Genus Srrep-

rocrPHALUS, Baird (p. 344): American species tewanus, P., Leali,

Ryder, floridanus, P., similis, Baird. Genus Cutrocerpnatus, Pré-

vost (p. 351): American species Holmani, Ryder. Subfam. Tham-

nocephaline, Pack. Genus THamnocepnatus, P. (p. 352): Ameri-

can species platyurus, P.

II. Geological Succession (p. 555). The North-American fossil

Estheric, namely E. pulew, Clarke, ovata, Jones, and Dawsont, Packard

(not Dawsoni, Jones), and Leaia Leidyi (Lea), are here enume-

rated, with their descriptions ; and a general Table of Rupert Jones's

species (1862) is given, with Branchipus from the Isle of Wight

added. This might have been augmented with other Hstheri@ and

Leaiw from many sources of later date, as, for instance, the follow-

ing (all Carboniferous) :—

Estheria Adamsii, Jones, 1870.

Dawsoni, Jones, 1870.

—— Freysteni, Geinitz, 1879.

limbata, Goldenberg, 1877.

Peachii, Jones, 1870.

—— punctatella, Jones, 1865,

—— rimosa, Goldenb., 1877.

rugosa, Giimbel, 1864. ”

Leaia Jonesii, R. Etheridge, Jun., 1879.

Kliveriana, Goldenb., 1873.

—— Leidyi, var. Baenschiana, Geinitz & Beyrich, 1864.

—— tricarinata, Meek & Worthen, 1869.

The general succession of the Crustacea is also illustrated by a

tabular diagram (p. 361).

At page 361 Mr. Packard offers the following observations on the

geological appearance and succession of the lower forms of Crusta-

cea. “ Simultaneously with the appearance of the larva-lhke Agnostus

and the more highly organized Paradoaides &c., we find in the

Lingula-flags the remains of a species of Phyllocarida, the Hymeno-

caris vermicauda. Mr. J. W. Salter, who was the first author to

draw attention to the close relations of the fossil genera Hymenocar's,

Bibliographical Notices. . 201

Ceratiocaris, Peltocaris, Dictyocaris, &e. to Nebalia, has given us a

series of sketches showing graphically the geological succession of

this group and the Estheriade. MHymenocaris, which Salter regards

as the more generalized type, lived during the primordial period ;

Peitocaris and Discinocaris (Woodward) characterize the Lower

Silurian period; Ceratiocaris the Upper ; Dictyocaris the Upper

Silurian and lowest Devonian ; Dithyrocaris and Argas the Carbo-

niferous. No Mesozoic member of the family has yet been dis-

covered; but as there are several species of Nebalia now living in

our seas, it is reasonable to suppose that the type has existed in an

unbroken succession from primordial times until now. The Palzxo-

zoic species were giguntic 1n size, some being a foot or more in length

(the carapace of Dithyrocaris pholadomya, Salter, was seven inches

long), while our recent Nebalia is less than an inch in length.

‘The Potsdam Sandstone also contains the remains of a third

grand division of the Entomostraca, the Ostracoda, remains of

Leperditia having been found in Canada as well as in the Lower

Silurian of Europe.

“‘ No fossil Copepoda have yet been discovered; but we should

scarcely wonder at this, owing to their soft bodies. Gerstiicker (in

Bronn’s ‘ Klassen und Ordnungen des Thierreichs’) suggests that

the Lerneans might have infested Paleozoic fish; and on general

grounds we should think that they probably extended as far back

as the primordial zone, inasmuch as highly developed Trilobites and

Ostracodes appear there. Another argument is the interesting

discovery, made in 1865 by Dr. H. Woodward, of the Cirripede

Turrilepas Wrightiana, from the Wenlock Limestone and Dudley

Shale of the Upper Silurian formation. Previous to this, according

to Woodward, the oldest known Cirripede was the Pollicipes rheti-

cus from the Rheetic beds of Somerset, while the type is not uncom-

mon in the Cretaceous, and has flourished from that period to the

present.

“ Of the Merostomata the oldest group is the Eurypterida, the

Xiphosura not dating beyond the Lower Carboniferous. The Euryp-

terids have not been found below the Upper Silurian (Lower Hel-

derberg in America); and the aberrant forms Hemiaspis, Bunoddes,

Pseudoniscus, and Exapinurus are Upper-Silurian forms. Among

the Xiphosura, Cyclus, the lowest form, is found in the Carbonife-

rous, and ranges, according to Woodward, as far up as the Permian.

In the same period occur Bellinurus, Prestwichia, and Euprodps,

being in this country [North America] found in the lower part of

the true Coal-measures, and associated in the same beds with Cera-

tiocaris, Eurypterus (Anthraconectes), and certain Isopoda and

Macrourous Decapoda (Anthrapalemon). The genus Limulus first

appears in the Jurassic ; and the species differ but slightly from those

now living.

“The more typical Phyllopoda made their appearance during the

Triassic period. The lowest group, however, the Estheriads, ap-

peared during the Devonian, a species referred to Estheria being found

in that formation in Europe. The Cladocera are not known to have

existed previous to the Tertiary period ; and it was not until recently

202 Bibliographical Notices.

(1862) that Von Heyden discovered the ephippium of a Daphnia in

the Rhenish Brown Coal (Gersticker, in Bronn’s Klass. u. Ordn.),

said by Lyell to be of Eocene age. It should be noticed, however,

that the fossil belongs to Sida, the most highly organized genus of

the group; and as it is not unlikely that such pelagic forms as

Evadne may have existed in the Mesozoic seas, if not earlier, I have

ventured to run the point of the wedge into the Carboniferous

period * [in the diagrammatic table of the vertical range of the

Crustacea, p. 361 ].

“The Apodide date back to the early part of the Mesomall a

Triassic species of Apus having been found in Europe, according to

Mr. Salter.”

With reference to the fossil Phyllopods, Mr, Packard adds, at

p. 446 :—

‘“¢ While the posterior edges of the abdominal segments in Hyme-

nocaris appear to be spined, as in Nebalia, there are some character-

istics of importance in the fossil forms which deserve mention.

These are the sculptured carapace, especially of Dictyocaris, in

which the surface is reticulated. [A reticulate structure is obsery-

able in the parenchyma or soft part of the shell of Nebalia, although

the exterior is smooth (note at p. 446). |

“ Moreover the size of these genera was enormous; but if we, as

we seem to be warranted in doing, regard Nebalia as a survivor and

decrepit or old-age type of the order, which has lost the ornamen-

tation of the integument, the size, and the telson even, being

dwarfed, smooth-skinned, and in general very simple compared with

the forms which existed at the time when the type culminated and

before it began to die out, we may have an explanation of the greater

simplicity of the carapace and abdomen of Nebalia, as compared

with its Paleozoic ancestors.”

III. The Geographical Distribution of the Phyllopoda (pp. 362-

370), illustrated with a coloured map, deals with

a. American Arctic Province.

6. Atlantic or Eastern Province.

, : | ¢. Central Province.

1. The American Region. . < d. Californian or Pacific Province.

| e. Antillean Province.

\ f. South America.

( a. European Province.

| 1. Western Europe.

2. The Europxo-Asiatic z 2. Eastern Europe.

Region: . 5.02... << | 6. Mediterranean Province.

| ¢. Siberian Province.

| d, Manchurian Province.

3. The Indo-African Realm: a. African, and 6, Indian Region.

4. The Australian Realm.

* Possible Daphnioid remains are referred to in the Geol. Mag. vol. vii.

p. 219 (1870), as having been found in the Coal-measures cn South

Wales; and notice is there taken also of somewhat similar organisms,

shown by woodcuts (figs. 10 and 11) in Kmmons’s ‘ American Geology,

part 6, pp. 39 and 40 (1859), and referred by him to Entomostraca.

Bibliographical Notices. 203

IV. At pp. 370-415, the Morphology and Anatomy of the Phyl-

lopoda are elaborately described, treating especially of the general

and segmental structure ; the appendages, eyes, and other organs ;

the internal anatomy (p. 397 &c.); and the homologies of the

crustacean limbs and eyes.

V. The Development, Metamorphosis, and Genealogy of the Phyl-

lopods (pp. 415-419) form another very interesting chapter.

VI. The Reproductive Habits and Development of the Branchio-

podidee are described at pp. 420-431.

VII. This part (pp. 432-452) treats of Mr. Packard’s family

Puytrocaria, mostly of Paleozoic age, and its systematic posi-

tion. At p. 433 the anatomy and development of their recen type,

the Nebalia, are first dealt with ; and its relationship to the Deca-

pods is thus indicated :—

oS os 3

S .

Sie eee

) oS >) go} a

Oo | o GE! ro -

43 SR oO Qy Oo

= [o) fas]

TR ~ = & [= 3

o | ‘o as) o 3S

HH Bs rs) Q : 3 3S

| felt teal ONS ios ==

oe as sale = a pe 0

4 ° rb) iS) ~~

} faa) S S, =; a

j oh I 2

wee ee

| ir 7

Neocarida. Paleocarida.

Crustacea.

The Nebaliads and the Paleozoic allies of Nebalia are thus enu-

merated (pp. 446-452) :—

PuytiocarrDA, Packard, 1879.

Fam. Nesparrapm, Baird, 1850.

Genus Nebalia, Leach, 1814. With four known living species.

Fam. CERATIOCARIDA, Salter, 1860.

Genus Hymenocaris, Salter, 1852. One species.

Peltocaris, Salter, 1863. Two species.

Ceratiocaris, M‘Coy, 1850. Thirty-one species, with some

varieties.

Echinocaris, Whitfield, 1880. Five species.

Discinocaris, Woodward, 1866. One species.

Spathiocaris, Clarke, 1882. One species.

204 Bibliographical Notices.

Genus Lisgocaris, Clarke, 1882. One species.

Aptuchopsis, Barrande, 1872. One species.

Dictyocaris, Salter, 1860. Two species.

Dithyrocaris, Scouler (Argas), 1835. Five species.

Rachura, Scudder, 1878. One species.

This list would be much augmented on revision up to present

date. Several of M. Barrande’s Bohemian forms, such as -Aristozoe

and its allies, evidently will have to be grouped with Mr. Whit-

field’s Echinocaris.

Part VIII. (pp. 453-458) is a long and useful bibliography, but

not quite perfect as to fossil Phyllopods. An Appendix follows

with—C. Th. von Siebold, On the parthenogenesis and artificial

rearing of the Brine-shrimp (p. 463); C. F. Gissler, On partheno-

genesis in Artemia (p. 466); and W. J. Schmankewitsch, On the

transformation of Artemia salina to A. Muchlhausenii and to Bran-

chipus (p. 466).

Thirty-seven carefully drawn lithographic plates and numerous

good woodcuts, illustrating this valuable Monograph, show the

details of the external and internal structure of the numerous

genera and species described.

A Monograph of the Insectivora, Systematic and Anatomical. By

G. E. Dozson, M.A., F.R.S. Part i. 1882. Part 11. 1883.

London. to.

Dr. Doxson is laying up for himself a store of heavy gratitude from

all well-minded zoologists ; but, however excellent their dispositions,

there are some who will envy him. The author of the admirable

‘Catalogue of the Chiroptera in the Collection of the British Mu-

seum’ is now, with the assistance of the Government-Grant Com-

mittee of the Royal Society, writing a monograph on the very group

of mammals that above all deserve it; for it is among the Insec-

tivora that we find the most generalized forms of the group, and

suggestions as to higher structural characters which are nowhere

repeated.

He will not be envied for having undertaken a difficult task, but

for the wisdom with which he devotes his leisure and his opportu-

nities to the production of a monograph worthy of thename. From

one circumstance or another most students of zoology find themselves

the writers of scattered though in some cases very valuable essays.

But these are, with rare exceptions, not the works that have a per-

manent value for science; it is only when they are focussed that

their proper proportions are seen.

If we take a survey of the past we find this amply illustrated by

the works of Cuvier, of Meckel, and of Owen in the great depart-

ment of anatomical inquiry, in the impetus given to systematic

zoology by the publications of the British Museum and of the Mu-

seum of Comparative Zoology at Cambridge, U.S. A., and in the

promising field of geographical distribution by the great work of

Wallace. These are examples of comprehensive works which, with

others that will be easily recalled, have had as much influence for

Bibliographical Notices. 205

good as have the patient investigations of various naturalists into

the structure and life-history of a given type.

Those who write works like these are, whether they think of it

or not, raising for themselves monuments of intelligent and well-

directed industry which will last long after the contents of many

Transactions and Journals have been digested, and have become

themselves neglected.

So much is said against and so little is said for the opportunities

which are given to zoologists in this country, that we cannot re-

frain from pointing out that Mr. Dobson returns his especial thanks

to Sir W. Muir, who, at the time of the writing of his preface, was

the enlightened head of the Army Medical Department.

The two parts of the Monograph now before us deal with six

families :—the Erinaceide, Centetide, and Solenodontide ; the Pota-

mogalidz, Chrysochloride, and Talpide. In addition to a detailed

anatomical examination of a number of typical forms, all the species

are dealt with in the fashion of a systematic zoologist ; twenty-two

plates, with a number of woodcuts, illustrate the text, and speak for

the care that has been given to the supervision of their production.

One would require more than the usual calm superiority of a

reviewer to closely criticise the work in these two parts; we pro-

pose rather to direct the attention of the reader to one or two points

which seem to have been treated in a novel manner.

No one has ever studied the Mammalia without being attracted to

their dentition; yet few seem to have studied it with profit; and

even those who have made important discoveries are still in doubt as

to some considerable questions of homology. We are glad to see

that Dr. Dobson recognizes the value of formule in the manipulation

of such questions ; and, indeed, he does not recognize it merely, he

demonstrates it. In four lines he shows us by an ingenious method

his views as to the homologies of the teeth in Gymnura with the

typical dentition of a diphyodont heterodont mammal, and those

of the hedgehog :—

GYMNURA.

* 6=(2a+26 +2c) c 2=(d+d) 8=(2e+2f+29+2h) 6=(i+2j7+2k) .

* 6=(2a'+20'+2c!)? ~* 2=(d'+d')’ [aes 8= (Qe! +2f'+29/+2h')? ~ * 6=(2i+2j'+2k')

ERINACEUS.

- 6=(2a+2b+2c) 2=(d+d) 6=(2f+29+2h) 6=(2i4+2j+2k) |

: 4=(2a'+20') ’ * 2=(d'4 da’)? ‘ 4=(2f'+2h') p) U 6= (2 +2)’ +2k')°

If we are to retain the term ‘“‘ canine” at all, we shall perhaps

do well to follow Dr. Dobson and keep to the old definition that the

“canine” in the lower jaw is the tooth that comes in front of the

upper canine when the jaws are closed ; on the other hand we have

to remember that the connotation of canine is almost as much phy-

siological as homological, and in the mole the “ caniniform” tooth

shuts behind, and notin front of, the upper canine. Mr. Dobsonis,

at any rate, bolder than Mr. ©. 8. Tomes, who some years ago

refused to write out the dental formula of the mole.

The writers of zoological text-books must bear in mind Microgale

206 Miscellaneous.

longicaudata ; for now is there known to science a mammal with

more caudal vertebre than the familiar Manis.

The object of this notice has not been to review, so much as to

give anote on, Mr. Dobson’s work, and, if it may be, to increase the

interest which is felt in its publication. ‘To the author himself we

have only to say that, as this work will before long be completed, we

trust he is beginning to accumulate material for a monograph on

some other order of that great group of animals in which, after all,

men must always have the most lively interest.

MISCELLANEOUS.

Observations on Actinospheerium Eichhornii.

By Miss 8. G. Fourks.

Ir was stated that, while observing Actinospheria, four individuals

were seen to become fused, as it were, into one mass.

At the end of an hour this mass had separated into three Actino-

spheria, two of the original four remaining fused into one.

This double one then became constricted, a little to one side of

the middle, apparently being about to separate. In a few minutes

the Actinospherium began to eject, at the point of constriction,

a thin protoplasmic substance containing transparent granulated

globules and free granules. By a waving motion of the rays, the

masses of ejected matter were broken up and the globules set free

in the water.

These globules developed from one side an extremely long ray of

finely granular protoplasm, slightly elongating at the same time,

thus taking an oval shape. No trace of the axial threads peculiar

to the rays of adult Actinospheria could be discovered. The average

length of these globules, including the ray, was +1422 millim.,

without the ray -0127 millim.

The next act of the globules was the sending out another ray

from a point opposite to the first. Minute vacuoles appeared and

ranged themselves close to the surface of the globule. Other rays

were developed at various intervals of time. The appearance of the

young Actinospheria gradually became more perfect in resemblance

to the parent. The growth was very slow, the perfect form not

being attained for a period varying from one to two weeks, and the

size was even then small,

The external layer of vacuoles of the Actinospherium from which

the globules had been ejected contained numbers of granules in

active motion. In the different vacuoles the number varied from

ten to about one hundred, as nearly as could be counted. They

were usually congregated at one point, and seemed to be trying to

force a way out.

Sometimes a globular mass of protoplasm was seen to run out

upon a ray, and then, instead’ of returning to the body as usual,

drop off into the water, and develop into a “perfect Actinospheerium,

in the same manner as those ejected in a mass from the body.

Miscellaneous. 207

Several free cells, having rays, were observed, upon touching a

ray of the Actinospherium, to glide down it in the manner usual to

captured prey, and be reabsorbed into the body.

One globule of protoplasm, running out towards the point of a

ray, stopped, and while motionless sent out a long ray at right

angles to that supporting the globule. Another smaller globule ran

out on this secondary ray, and, in its turn, sent out a third ray at

right angles to the secondary ray, but parallel to the primary ray.

It has been stated that the rays of the Actinospherium never

branch; but the observer thought that the above phenomenon

could be truly called branching, as all the protoplasm returned to

the main ray, and thence to the body.

To ascertain whether any globules of protoplasm artificially freed

from the body of the Actinospherium would develop in the same

manner as those above described, an Actinospheriwm was crushed in

the live-box so violently as to completely disintegrate it. The vacu-

oles were broken up, and the internal mass of protoplasm mixed

with the water, only two or three small masses of the external vacuoles

remaining intact. Onremoving the pressure all the fluid protoplasm

was seen to gather itself up into globules, of sizes varying from

*0507 millim. to °253 millim.

These globules contained vacuoles, the size and number of the

vacuoles varying with the size of the globules. The water became

free from protoplasm, though a large number of the granules, which

had been contained in the external vacuoles previous to the crushing

of the Actinospherium, remained swimming actively about in every

direction.

The globules remained quiet for some minutes, and then began to

extend pseudopodial rays. The vacuoles increased in number, and

arranged themselves close to the exterior of the globules, those of

the largest size pushing out the thin protoplasmic covering, so as to

produce a strong resemblance to the perfect Actinospherium. The

resemblance of each globule to the original Actinospheriwm became

more and more perfect. The few masses of the’ original vacuoles

also protruded rays, thus conclusively showing that the rays of

Actinospheria are not necessarily dependent upon the central mass

of protoplasm. The vacuole masses developed into perfect Actino-

spheria much more quickly than the globules formed of the central

protoplasm, an hour or two being sufficient to perfect the develop-

ment. The rays of all the immature Actinospheria were irregular

and flattened, and in many cases lacked the axial thread.

The Actinospheria moved their pseudopodial rays freely in all

directions, the rays being bent close to the peripheral layer of

vacuoles.

From an original colony of eight individuals a small bottleful was

manufactured in the manner above described, the time needed for

development being in proportion to the size of the fragments into

which the Actinospheria were divided. The above experiments

were tried on many individuals, the only difference of result, in the

various instances, being in the degree of completeness with which

the protoplasm separated itself from the water. It was argued from

208 Miscellaneous.

the above facts that the power of any part of an Actinospherium

to develop into a perfect individual was inherent, and not depen-

dent upon any peculiar condition of the animalcule.

Fig. 8, pl. xli. of Leidy’s Rhizopods of North America, which he

doubtfully refers to the Actinospheria, exactly resembles a medium

stage in the development of the globules ejected from the body of

the Actinospheria.

The observer stated that the rays of <Actinospheriwm, when

irritated by being compressed, would be retracted completely on all

sides, and would again appear on the cessation of the disturbance.

The length of time needed for the development of the <Actino-

spheria, in the reproduction by natural means, was from seven to

fourteen days ; that needed for the development in the reproduction

by artificial means was from one to two days.

In the latter case this length of time was needed only in cases

when the crushing was carried to extremes, as when the Actino-

spherium was simply divided into small pieces, a few hours were all

that was needed to complete the development of the fragments.—

Proc. Acad. Nat. Sct. Philad., June 5, 1883, p. 125.

The * Crag Mollusca ”—Purpura tetragona.

To the Editors of the * Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

GentLemMEN,—In reference to the letter of Dr. Jeffreys, in your

last number, wherein he says, “‘ in JJurew the canal is of moderate

length, and is more or less covered over or closed above ; in Purpura

the canal is very short and quite open,” I would mention that out

of 113 specimens of the recent shell picked up on Felixstow beach,

which I identify with Purpura tetragona and Murex erinaceus,

61 have the canal wholly open, and 52 have it more or less covered

over or closed above. These, though varying very much in size,

appear from the number of whorls to be all adult shells, all sizes

oceurring in either yroup. In the forms most approaching to the

ordinary one of JZ. erinaceus (4. ¢. those most rugose and least

elongate) the closing of the canal prevails; and the specimens with

closed canal have usually the lip and varices most thickened. The

specimens of Purpura tetragona which I have from the Felixstow

Crag are all more or less mutilated, so that the length of the canal

cannot be depended on; but in those I have from Walton Naze,

and which are all in fine preservation, the canal is no shorter in

proportion either to the length of the mouth or to the length of the

shell than it is in Murea erinaceus. In its more elongated form,

relative shortness of mouth, greater number of ribs or varices, and

sharpness of shoulder, the variety alveolatus (fig. 76 of tab. iv. of

the ‘Crag Mollusca’), which is almost the only one found in

the oldest portion of the Red Crag (that of Walton), differs from the

varieties found most abundantly in the rest of the Red Crag; and

in these respects it departs more from the recent shell im question

than do the latter. The varieties vulgaris, intermedia, and tenera

Miscellaneous. 209

(figs. 7 a,c, d of same tabula) are the forms which most resemble

the recent shell in question, and are those which chiefly occur in the

Red Crag other than that of Walton, though specimens of aluveolatus

sometimes occur with them, which may have been lingering indivi-

duals of the disappearing Walton form, or merely derivatives from

destroyed sand banks of Walton age, mixed up with the increasing

and prevailing forms, in consequence of that destruction and reac-

cumulation of these banks which was proceeding throughout the

formation of the oblique-bedded part of the Red Crag.

I should not have troubled you with the subject had I not thought

it likely that some one might point out the identity in question as

an oversight of my father’s ; and having assisted him in all his sup-

plements, and knowing his views about Murex erinaceus in the

Crag, I wished to anticipate such criticism by explanation. If there

were any conflict between his view and mine, I should entirely defer

to his; but there is not, as he was not acquainted with the variety

in question.

In tab. iv. fig. 9, of the ‘Crag Mollusca,’ is represented a full-

grown shell with long open canal under the name of Murev tortuosus.

This shell Dr. Jeffreys, in the list to Prof. Prestwich’s paper, by ex-

press reference to the page of my father’s work describing it, assigns

as “ Murex erinaccus, var.,” notwithstanding his statement in the

4th vol. of the ‘ British Conchology’ (published four years previ-

ously) that the genus Murea has the canal closed (“ covered over ”’),

and his present assertion, that the closure of the canal distinguishes

it from Purpura, and that the question of it “ involves a difference

not merely of a specific but of a generic and even family character.”

J. Sowerby’s original figure of M. tortwosus (Min. Conch. tab, 434)

shows the canal wholly open, as does my father’s (and, I may add,

as does every specimen of it that I have seen or can hear of); and

my father’s description of it (Crag Moll. vol. 1. p. 40) is, “ canal

contracted but open.” lan, &c.,

Szartes V. Woop.

Aug. 17, 1883.

A Social Heliozoan.

Prof. Leidy exhibited drawings and made some remarks on a

singular Heliozoan recently observed by him. His attention had

been directed to it by Mr. Edward Potts, who discovered it, con-

tained in considerable numbers in water, with vegetable débris, from

Lake Hopatcong, N.J., where it had been obtained last autumn.

The animal occurred mostly in groups composed of numerous indivi-

duals. Oneof these groups, of irregular cylindroid shape, 0°84 millim.

long by 0°36 millim. broad, was estimated to contain upwards of a

hundred individuals. They reminded one of amass of tangled burs.

' They remained nearly stationary even for twenty-four hours, and

exhibited so little activity, that without careful scrutiny they might

readily be taken for some inanimate structure. The individuals

composing the groups appear to be connected together only by

mutual attachment of their innumerable rays; and none were ob-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 15

210 Miscellaneous.

served to be associated by cords of protoplasm extending between

the bodies of the animals, as seen in Fthaphidiophrys elegans. The

individuals associated together were of two kinds, those which were

active, and a smaller proportion which were in an encysted quiescent

condition.

The active individuals resembled the common sun-animalcule.

The body was usually spherical or oval, but variable from contrac-

tion, colourless, granular, and vesicular, with a large central nucleus

more or less obscurely visible and variably granular, with three or

four or more peripheral contractile vesicles. The body had a thick

envelope of delicate protoplasm, with innumerable and immeasurably

fine straight spicules. The envelope with the spicules extended in

numerous conical rays, from which proceeded numerous immeasu-

rably fine granular rays. The encysted individuals presented the

same essential constitution, except that the body was regularly

spherical, enclosed by a structureless envelope or membrane, con-

tained no contractile vesicles, and the enveloping protoplasm was

devoid of granular rays. The body of the active individuals measured

from 0°024 to 0-036 millim. in diameter; in the encysted indivi-

duals usually about 0°02 millim. An active individual, with the

body 0-033 millim. in diameter, with its envelope was 0-055 millim.

in diameter. An encysted individual, with the body 0:02, with its

envelope was 0°:036 millim.

The active individuals were observed to feed on two species of

minute monads, which were swallowed in the same manner as in

Actinophrys. After some hours a few individuals appear to have

separated from the surface of one of the groups; but they were as

stationary and sluggish as when in association with others.

The species is apparently distinct from others which have been

previously noticed, and may be named Rhaphidiophrys socialis —

Proc, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., April 1883, p. 95.

On the Genus Hyliota. By Graczanna Lewis.

By a letter of inquiry from Prof. G. Hartlaub, M.D., of Bremen,

Germany, concerning some rare African birds of the genus Hyliota,

attention has been drawn to the specimens now in this Academy, of

which there are three, all of them being male birds.

The question at issue is whether there are two distinct species or

only one; and as distinguished authorities differ on this point, it

seems proper to offer to ornithologists the testimony which these

specimens afford.

The genus was first characterized by Swainson, who described

the species H. flavigastra. ‘The bird was at first supposed to belong

to India, but was subsequently found to inhabit N.E. Africa and —

Senegambia, and was for a long time the only known species of the _

genus. Our specimen agrees moderately well with Swainson’s de-

scription, but is, no doubt, an immature male; the wings are brown-

ish and are not edged with glossy purple, but instead with a dull

greyish white. The two external pairs of tail-feathers are edged

more or less with white, as in the female. The band of white on

Miscellaneous. pall

the wing is formed largely by the middle and greater coverts, and,

beginning nearly at the outer edge of the wing, continues obliquely

across the roots of the primaries, secondaries, and tertials, meeting

on the back with the white of the rump, so as to form a deep curve

over the folded wings and back. The white on the wing is even

more extensive than is apparent. On lifting the overlying dark

plumage, this colour is seen to involve nearly all the upper portion

of the wing, the internal surface of which, as well as the axillaries,

are white. The outer greater coverts are white at the base, but

are black glossed with green on their margins; on the external

feather the black is so reduced as to leave only a border on a

white ground. The whole upper plumage of the head and back

as far as the rump is of deep blue-black with glossy steel-blue

reflections.

In 1851, J. and E. Verreaux described in the Rey. et Mag. de

Zool., p. 808, a second species, Muscicapa(?) violacea. In the same

year, H. E. Strickland brought home from the river Gaboon a

specimen which he described in Jardine’s ‘ Contributions to Orni-

thology,’ 1851, p. 182, under the name of Hyliota violacea, after

having had the opportunity of consulting the manuscript of Ver-

reaux, to which he refers. He remarks as follows :—‘‘ This bird is

interesting as affording a second species of a genus of which one

specimen only, the H. flavigastra, Swains., of Senegal, was hitherto

known. It much resembles H. flavigastra, but differs in its

broader beak and the less extent of white on the wing. Whole

upper parts black with a steel-blue gloss, of a rather more purple

hue than in flavigastra. Three or four of the greater wing-coverts

next the body are white (in flavigastra the whole of the middle, and

the basal half of the greater coverts are white). Lower parts pale

cream-colour,

“Total length 5 inches; beak to front ‘5, to gape °7, broad °23 ;

wing ‘3; medial rectrices ‘1 and -9, external ‘2; tarsus °7.”

Of Hyliota violacea, as above described, the Academy possesses

two specimens. One is the identical bird on which the species was

founded by Verreaux ; and its characters agree with the description

of that author, as well as with that of Strickland, and also with

that to be found in Hartlaub’s ‘ Ornithologie Westafricas,’ Bremen,

1857, p. 98.

The second specimen in possession of the Academy belongs to the

Du Chaillu 1st Coll., and is also from the river Gaboon. ‘This bird

is mentioned in Cassin’s ‘ Catalogue,’ Proc. Acad. of Nat. Sciences,

1869, p.51; but no description is given. Essentially its characters

are the same as those of the type specimen of Verreaux.

In this species the only white to be seen on the whole wing is

on one single feather belonging to the inner portion of the greater

coyerts. There are really about five feathers belonging to the series

of ornamental coverts; but they overlie each other, and are so dis-

posed that in the closed wing only one of them is visible.

The rump in both species is covered with long, loose, silky fea-

thers, of a white or greyish-white colour from the base to near the

tip, when the feather suddenly becomes dark and at the same time

219 Miscellaneous.

pennaceous in structure. The only difference between the two

species appears to be in the depth of the dark margin, or its entire

absence in mature specimens of H. flavigastra. In Swainson’s descrip-

tion of the type the rump is given as pure white; but it is not so in

our specimen. ‘The pennaceous dark border is nearly as deep as in

H. violacea; so that this character cannot be relied upon asa distine-

tion between the two species.

In his ‘ Ornithology of Angola,’ p. 190, Prof. Barboza du Bocage

acknowledges the receipt from M. Anchieta of one specimen of H.

violacea. The description is that of a bird with a large amount of

white on the wing. The description does not resemble the type

specimen of Verreaux, but is much more nearly like H. flavigastra,

Swains.

Depending on this description, R. Bowdler Sharpe gives it in his

‘Catalogue of the Birdsin the Collection of the British Museum,’ in-

stead of that of Verreaux, and, in consequence, considers H. violacea

a doubtful species.

With the privilege of examination of the type, and of comparing

this with the Du Chaillu specimen and the descriptions of Verreaux,

Strickland, and Hartlaub, it seems impossible to suppose that the

specimen sent by M. Anchieta to Prof. Bocage was that of a true

violacea, but was either H. flavigastra or a form intcrmediate be-

tween the two.

The striking differences between the two species are :—the blue-

black plumage in the upper parts in flavigastra, and the violet-black

of violacea ; the broad bands of white on the wing of the former,

and the concentrated spot on that of the latter; the darker shade of

the underparts in flavigastra ; and the white thighs of the one and

the black of the other, together with the larger size of violacea.

They also inhabit different regions—flavigastra belonging to the N.E.,

of Africa and Senegambia, while violacea is found southward from

the Gaboon to Benguela in West Africa.

Swainson points out the general resembance of Hyliota to the

African todies of the genus Platystira, and to the Old-world fly-

eatchers of Muscicapa, with a bill so much lengthened and compressed

on the sides that at first sight it might be mistaken for a Sylvia.

It also agrees with Muscicapa and Cryptolopha in having the

base of the bill broad and depressed as far as the nostrils and then

compressed to the extremity, the bill being so much lengthened in

Hyliota that it becomes the tenuirostral form of the group to which

it belongs.

The glossy blue-black plumage, white wings, and buff throat are

in unison with related flycatchers. By the rump-feathers Swainson

detects an analogy with the caterpillar-catchers of the Ceblepyrine.

In Hyliota the sexes differ remarkably in colour, as they do also

in Platystira, such difference not being the rule in the family of the

Muscicapide. Hyliota agrees with the flycatchers in general by its

small and weak feet and its syndactyle toes, the outer being con-

nected with the middle as far as the first joint. The wings and

tail are those of Muscicapa, in which group Hyliota is placed by

ornithologists.—Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad.,. June 12, 1883,

p. 129.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES. ]

No. 70. OCTOBER 1883.

XXV.—WNote on some Earthworms from India. By FRANK

E. Bepparp, M.A. Oxon., F.R.S.E., Naturalist to the

‘ Challenger’ Commission.

[Plate VIII.)

I am indebted to the kindness of Professor M‘Intosh for the

opportunity of studying a number of earthworms, collected

chiefly in the neighbourhood of Calcutta, which had been sent

to him from the Indian Museum at Calcutta for identification.

He requested me to report upon them; and the following

description relates to these specimens.

The collection contained four recognizable species—Mega-

scolex affinis, Pericheta armata, Perionyx M‘Intoshii, and Ty-

pheus orientalis, of which the ‘last three are apparently new

to science. ‘There was also a bottle filled with a number of

earthworms which were not sufficiently well preserved to

enable me to determine the species; they were, however,

evidently members of the genus Megascolex or Pericheta.

I received also a quantity of “ castings,” precisely similar

to those figured and described by Mr. Darwin in his work on

Earthworms, from beneath which all the specimens in the

collection, with the exception of Pertonyx M‘Intoshit, had been

gathered.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 16

214 Mr. F. E. Beddard on

Megascolex affinis, K. P.

Pericheta affinis, E. Perrier, Arch. du Muséum, t. viii. p. 106. 7

I venture to alter Perrier’s name into Megascolex affinis,

since Dr. Horst * has recently called attention to the identity

of Templeton’s genus Megascolex + with that subsequently

termed Pertcheta by Schmarda {. The name Pericheta was

apparently introduced by Schmarda owing to a misunder-

standing of empleton’s definition of the genus Megascolex,

for which he is indeed hardly to be blamed. The defini-

tion given by Templeton is very imperfect, and seems

also to be inaccurate, since Baird §, who examined the type

specimen of Megascolex cwruleus, was unable to find any dif-

ference between it and Schmarda’s genus Pericheta. Judg-

ing from T'empleton’s description, Megascolex is very different

indeed from Pericheta; he states, for example, that the gene-

rative organs are developed in segments 16, 17, and 18.

Schmarda evidently considers that this description refers to

the clitellum; but in any case the description is entirely

unlike Pericheta, in which genus the testes are nearly always

in segments 11 and 12; and the 18th segment, upon which

the vasa deferentia open, never forms part of the clitellum.

However, since Baird has stated that Megascolex and Pert-

chetu are identical, Horst is clearly right in wishing to retain

the name J%egascolex, which has a priority of fifteen years.

It might perhaps be advisable to limit the name Megascolea

to those worms which are characterized by (1) the presence of

a continuous ring of setee upon the segments of the body, (2)

the possession of a clitellum occupying segments 14-16 in-

clusive, (3) the position of the two male generative apertures

behind the clitellum upon the 18th segment and of the single

female aperture upon the 14th segment within the clitellum ;

while the name Lericheta might be applied to certain other

forms which present a fundamental resemblance to the above-

mentioned group, but differ in one or both ot the following

characters :—(1) in the ring of setee upon each segment being

discontinuous at one or more points; (2) in the clitellum occu-

pying more or fewer segments of the body than three.

In this way several species recently described by Perrier ||

from the Philippine Islands, such as, for example, Pertcheta

* Horst, Notes from the Leyden Museum, vol. y. p. 183,

+ Templeton, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1844.

{ Schmarda, Neue wirbellose Thiere, 1861, Bd. 1. ii. p. 13.

§ Baird, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1869, p. 40.

|| Perrier, Comptes Rendus, t. [xxxi. p. 1043.

}

some Earthworms from India. 215

luzonica (which has a clitellum of four segments and a ventral

and two lateral areas deprived of seta), together with some

other forms described by Grube * and Horstt+ and a new

species (Perichata armata) may be conveniently included in

the genus Pericheta. .

Hutton ¢ has recently applied the generic name Mega-

scolex to certain New-Zealand earthworms described by him ;

these species also, with the exception of Megascolex antarctica,

Baird, ought, on the view advocated here, to be referred to the

genus Pericheta§.

It is very possible, however, that when more is known

about this group of earthworms it will be necessary again to

subdivide into several other genera the species which I pro-

pose for the present to call Pericheta. It is true that the

name Pericheta applied, for instance, to such a form as P. lu-

zonica, which is distinguished by not. possessing a continuous

circle of sete, is (etymologically considered) a misnomer ; but

this is no objection whatever to its use. ‘The practice of chang-

ing names because they are ‘ inapt,” so largely imdulged in

by many naturalists, ought not to be encouraged, as it throws

zoological nomenclature, already sufficiently complicated, into

the most utter confusion.

There were several specimens in the collection apparently

belonging to this species; in structure they agreed exactly

with the description given by Perrier ||, with the exception

of the arrangement of the sete upon the clitellum. On

page 107 of his memoir is the followmg sentence :—“ trois

anneaux . .°. . forment la ceinture. . .. . sur lesquels on

distingue parfois nettement le cercle de soles caractéris-

tique des Pertcheta.” In all the specimens that I exa-

mined sete were invariably present upon the clitellum, but

confined to the ventral portion of each of the three segments

of which it is composed, and noé continuous all round the

body, as the above quotation, if I understand it rightly,

seems to imply. ‘This small difference, however, hardly

warrants the introduction of a new specific name; and since

the specimens which M. Perrier described came from Cochin

* Grube, Phil. Trans. vol. clxviii., and MB, Akad. Berlin, 1877,

pp. 509-554.

+ Horst, loc. ci.

t Hutton, Journ. of New-Zealand Inst. vols. ix. and xi.

§ One of the species described by Hutton (Megascolex sylvestris) ought

perhaps to be removed altogether from the genus Pericheta (or Mega-

scolex), since it differs by the presence of the male apertures upon the

19th segment instead of the 18th as is universally the casein both Per7-

cheta and Megascolex.

|| Perrier, Nouy. Arch. du Muséum, t. vill. (1872).

216 Mr. F. E. Beddard on

China, it may be regarded as merely a local variation. The

stout mesenteries, the existence of which Perrier has men-

tioned in this species, are developed between segments 4-5,

5-6, 6-7, 7-8; they are connected with each other by tendi-

nous cords, and thus form a very compact whole, which is no

doubt of assistance to the animal in helping it to force its way

through the earth.

Hab. Neighbourhood of Calcutta.

Pericheta armata, n. sp. (Pl. VIII. figs. 5-7.)

This new species I include within the genus Pericheta for

the reasons just stated.

It is characterized by the sete being absent from a narrow

area upon the ventral median line and by the possession of a

clitellum consisting of four segments, commencing with the

14th, but extending as far as the 17th segment; the male

generative apertures are upon the first segment after the cli-

tellum (18th segment of body).

The anterior portion of the body is slightly swollen, some-

what in the shape of an olive. ‘There are about forty seta to

each segment, at any rate in those anterior to the clitellum; the

posterior segments seem to have fewer sete, twenty to thirty.

Setz are found upon the clitellum, and are distributed upon its

segments just as they are over the rest of the body. One of

the sete is shown in fig. 5; the proximal end is rounded and

somewhat swollen, the distal end sharply curved.

The alimentary canal entirely resembles that of other Pert-

chete. There are found in this species the glandular tufts

which Perrier* was the first to describe in P. Houlleti and other

varieties as salivary glands; but subsequently + considered to

be representative of the segmental organs of other earth-

worms {. In one specimen of P. armata which I dissected there

were no less than nine pairs of these organs occupying seg-

ments 5-13.

There are eight pairs of contractile hearts occupying seg-

ments 6-13, of which the four posterior are the largest.

The three pairs of spermathece are situated in segments

7, 8, and 9, but open on to the boundary-line between each

of these segments and the one in front. ‘The spermathece

are unusually large; each is provided (fig. 7) with two

* Perrier, Nouv. Arch. du Muséum, t. vii.

+ Perrier, ‘ Comptes Rendus,’ t. Ixxvii. (1874) p. 814.

{ Horst (Niederland. Archiv f. Zool. Bd. viii, 1879, and ‘ Notes from

the Leyden Museum,’ vol. vy.) subsequently, but independently, arrived at

a similar conclusion.

some Earthworms from India. 217

minute supplementary sacs, one on either side close to its

external opening.

The prostate glands are large and very much lobulated ;

they are placed in segment 18 ; each is composed of two large

lobes, which are again divided up into a number of lobules ;

the duct of the prostate gland unites with the vas deferens

before its external opening on to the 18th segment.

In the furrow between each of the two large lobes of which

the gland is formed is a thin-walled sac containing a number

of specially modified sets (fig. 6) ; the presence of this penial

sac, found in the intraclitellian genus Hudrilus and the post-

clitellian genus Acanthodrilus, has never before been described

in any Pericheta or Megascolex.

The testes are brownish in colour and not unlike the seg-

mental tufts, and for this reason are somewhat difficult to make

out; there appear to be only one pair, situated in the 12th

segment.

In the 9th segment, upon the mesentery bounding it behind,

are a pair of glands which closely resemble the testes in exter-

nal appearance. The specimens were not sufficiently well pre-

served to admit of a proper microscopical examination ; so far

as could be made out, the minute structure was not unlike that

of the testes; and it is probable, from their position, that they

are an anterior pair of testes, since the ovaries are in all other

earthworms without exception placed behind the testes.

flab. Neighbourhood ot Calcutta.

Perionyx M‘Intoshii, n. sp. (Pl. VIII. figs. 3, 8.)

The genus Perionyx was instituted by Perrier* for the

reception of an earthworm which, although very closely

allied to Megascolex, differs from it in at least three im-

portant characters :—(1) in the position of the clitellum and

the number of segments of which it is composed ; (2) the pre-

sence of segmental organs like those found in other Oligo-

cheta; and (3) in the arrangement of the male generative

apertures. Only one species, Periony.c excavatus, 1s described

by Perrier.

Perionyx M'Intoshit measures 15 inches in length and about

one third of an inch in breadth, and consists of some 200 seg-

ments; its colour is violet, inclining to a reddish tint on

segments 12-23; the clitellum was not developed.

The sete are arranged in a continuous ring round each

seoment, as in Megascolex, upon a somewhat darker-coloured

line.

* Perrier, Nouy. Arch. ete. doe cit.

218 Mr. F. E. Beddard on

The male generative apertures are upon the 18th segment,

and closely approximated to each other; they are situated

upon a yellow-coloured area which extends a short way into

the 17th and 19th segments respectively ; the anterior and

posterior margins of the 18th segment are slightly bulged at the

place oceupied by the generative area (fig. 3). The position

of the generative apertures is somewhat intermediate between

the condition found in Pertonyax excavatus and in the genus

Pericheta. Perrier describes and figures the apertures in the

former species as being very closely approximated to each

other, indeed actually contiguous, and occupying a depressed

area distinct from the rest of the segment. In Pertonyx

M‘Intoshii they appear to be more widely separated from

each other, and also show a transition towards the arrange-

ment found in Pertcheta in that the area upon which they

are situated is not depressed below the rest of the segment and

so distinctly marked off from it as in Pertonyx excavatus.

The single female orifice is situated on the 14th segment.

The situation of the male and female orifices with respect to

the sete is different. ‘The female orifice is situated ¢n front of,

while the male orifices are behind the circle of sete, which

in this part of the segment is somewhat bulged out in front,

following its anterior margin.

The two pairs of spermathecee are situated in the 8th and

9th seements and open between the 7th and 8th and the 8th

and 9th, as in Perionyx excavatus; they also agree in form

with the spermathece of P. excavatus, and consist each (fig. 8)

of a simple sac without any development of supplementary

pouches, which are always present, and in such great variety,

in Pericheta and Megascolex.

The segmental organs exist in all the segments of the body,

and seem to be of a larger size in the first ten or eleven seg-

ments. They are of the ordinary form, resembling those of

the common earthworm ; their apertures are evidently in the

anterior part of each segment close to the median ventral line,

but I did not succeed in seeing them. The presence of these

seemental organs at once distinguishes the genus Pertonyx

from Meyascolex; in the latter genus, as Perrier and Horst

have shown, the segmental organs when present are invari-

ably represented by tufts of glandular tubes, differing entirely

from the typical segmental organs of the other Oligocheeta*.

* A possible exception to this is Perzchetaleucocycla, Schm. Schmarda

(loc, cit.) gives some account of the segmental tubes (Schleimdriisen) of this

species ; and it seems likely from his description that they are similar

to the segmental tubes of Perionyx and other Oligocheta. Schmarda’s

ficure of P. leucocycla, moreover, is not at all unlike my Perionyx M‘In-

tushit; and though his description is rather different, it is not impossible

that the two species will eventually prove to be identical.

some Earthworms from India. 219

The body-cavity is also in communication with the exterior

by a series of dorsal pores.

Some of the anterior mesenteries, those forming the anterior

boundaries of segments 6-9, form a continuous covering for the

pharynx, each mesentery being prolonged backwards from its

point of origin on the body-wall in a cup-like fashion, and

fitting into the inside of the succeeding mesentery; each of

these mesenteries is also closely fastened to the one in front

by a series of tendinous cords which arise from its anterior

margin, and are attached to about the middle of the mesentery

in front. This arrangement is very like that described by

Perrier in Anteus, but nothing of the kind is mentioned by

him as existing in Perionyx.

The alimentary canal is of the ordinary form. A rectum is

developed at the terminal part of the intestine, from which it is

marked off by a strong fold ; its length is about 2 inch. Like

Perrier, I was unable to find any lateral caeca to the intestine.

The vascular system consists of the usual dorsal and ven-

tral trunks connected by eight transverse arches occupying

segments 6-13; of these the four posterior were considerably

stouter than the others, and no doubt serve the purpose of

contractile hearts. In the segments following, the dorsal

vessel gives off two small trunks on either side.

The testes are two pairs of lobulate glands occupying the

11th and 12th segments; each testis is united with its fellow.

Asin Perionyx excavatus, the anterior pair is rather smaller

than the posterior.

The prostate glands are large and well developed; each is

composed of a number of small lobules, and differs therefore

from the prostate of Pertonyx excavatus, in which species the

prostates are of circular form and exhibit hardly any traces of

division into lobules. In this respect therefore Pertonyx M‘In-

toshiv approaches rather more nearly to the typical Megascolex.

Hab, Akhyab, Burmah.

Typheus orientalis, nov. gen. et sp.

(Pl. VILL. figs. 1, 2, 4, 9-12.)

The anatomical characters of this earthworm appear to be

quite different from those of any other genus as yet described ;

it belongs to the “ Intraclitellian”’ group of Perrier.

External characters —TVhe largest of the three specimens

which the collection contained measured 10 inches in length

and about 1 inch in breadth; the form of the body is

eylindrical, and the anterior portion is not at all dilated.

The sete are arranged in four pairs, and are ventral in

position; upon the segments which form the clitellum only

220 Mr. F. E. Beddard on

two pairs were visible, the outermost pair of each side

being absent. The clitellum occupies four segments (14—

17), but does not commence abruptly with the 14th seg-

ment. On the hinder part of segment 13 there is already

a slight development of glandular matter.

Upon the 17th segment are the two male external gene-

rative apertures, which are situated upon a flattened area

marked off from the rest of the body by a continuous raised

margin ; upon this area, and for a short distance in front of it,

there is no development of glands; in front of the generative

apertures, and corresponding to the lines of division between

the segments, are three pairs of papilla, and in the segment

immediately following the generative apertures there 1s

another pair; behind these again is a single papilla corre-

sponding to the right-hand one of the other segments ; and,

finally, on the line of division between segments 12 and 13

there is a single papilla on the left side, which differs from

the others in being of a rather smaller size and in having a

central perforation. ‘These papille were only present in a

specimen which had a fully-developed clitellum. The papillee

(fig. 4) are oval in form, with the long diameter transverse

to the axis of the body; in the centre of each, with the excep-

tion of the most anterior one, is an irregularly shaped de-

pressed area. The position of the papille, situated as they

are on the boundary-line of the segments, is unusual; in

Megascolex affinis the two pairs of papille are situated in

the middle of segments 17 and 19 respectively, and this

position appears to be the same in other species of Mega-

scolex which are provided with papille ; but in Pontodrilus *

the two large papille are situated on the boundary-line of

segments 19-20, 20-21.

The enclosure of the generative orifices within an area di-

stinct from the rest of the clitellum is not peculiar to the genus

Typhous ; a similar condition has been described by Perriert

in two other Intraclitellian genera, Anteus and Titanus, and

more recently by myself ina new genus, Pleurochetaf. I may

here remark that the pair of orifices on either side of the

apertures of the prostate glands in this latter genus in all

probability correspond to the genital papilla just described,

which in other species are frequently perforated and conti-

nuous with the ducts of small glands§.

In the anterior region of the body, between the 7th and

* Perrier, Arch. de Zool. Exp t.ix. 1881, pl. xiii. fig. 1, vv.

+ Perrier, oc. cit. pp. 51, 58.

{ F. E. Beddard, ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. Hdinb. vol. xxx. pt. 2, p. 481.

§ Perrier, loc. ct. p. 107.

some Earthworms from India. 221

8th segments, are the slit-like orifices of the spermathece.

Dorsal pores exist in the segments behind the clitellum; they

are, as in other earthworms, situated near the anterior margin

of each segment.

Alimentary canal.—The mouth, which is precisely terminal

in position and not ventral, leads into a small buccal cavity

separated from the pharynx by a slight constriction. The

latter is somewhat square in outline and broader behind than

in front ; it extends back as far as the 4th or 5th segment,

and is attached to the body-wall by a number of muscles and

tendinous bands, which collectively represent the mesenteries

of this portion of the body. The upper surface of the pharynx

is covered by a rich vascular network.

The cesophagus is long, and occupies segments 5-8 ; it is

supported (fig. 2) by two large and thick mesenteries

which form the boundary-line between the 5th and 6th and

the 6th and 7th segments. Behind the cesophagus is the

gizzard, divided into two portions—an anterior small thin-

walled compartment, and a large thick-walled portion, the

gizzard proper; this last has a nacreous appearance on the

outside, and is lined by a very thick chitinous layer. The

gizzard occupies two segments which, as usual, are not sepa-

rated from each other by a distinct mesentery, though two ten-

dinous bands, by which the lower surface of the gizzard is

attached to the body-wall, are probably the representatives of

a mesentery ; at the hinder extremity of the gizzard, from the

upper surface, a pair of stronger tendinous bands are given off,

which traverse the mesentery lying immediately behind it,

and are fixed to the ventral wall of the body. ‘The cesophagus

(fig. 2) is in like manner fixed in its place by similar tendi-

nous bands.

Behind the gizzard follows the rest of the cesophagus, which

at about the 17th segment passes into the intestine; the latter

is distinguished by its greater calibre and somewhat thinner

walls.

On the dorsal surface of the intestine, rather before the

end of the middle third of the body, is developed a glandular

mass (fig. 2). ‘This consists of five separate glandular bodies

occupying as many segments and increasing slightly in size

from before backwards. In one specimen (apparently a

young one) the posterior two glands were bilobed; in the

other specimen that | examined, which had a fully developed

clitellum, and was therefore adult, all were bilobed. ‘The

whole glandular mass is yellowish white in colour, and from

one fourth to one third of an inch in length. It is situated

above the dorsal vessel, which here appears to be considerably

222 Mr. F. E. Beddard on

dilated, and indeed in the region behind the glands dwindles

so much in size as to be almost invisible.

These glands I regard as homologous with the “ kidney-

shaped” glands recently described by me in Pleurocheta*,

These are the only two genera, so far as I am aware, in which

any thing of the kind exists. They probably represent a

specialized condition of the intestinal ceca of the Leech and

certain Polycheta such as Aphrodite. In the latter genusf,

moreover, the ceca are branched, and thus present a nearer

approximation to the complex glands of Pleurocheta and

Typheus. The two cxea of Megascolex, first noticed by

Vaillant t in Megascolex cingulata, and subsequently described

in several other species of the same genus by Perrier§, belong,

no doubt, to the same category, and represent in a very rudi-

mentary way these same glands.

The genus Megascolex itself, however, contains individuals

which in this respect are more specialized ; two species, Mega-

scolex Steboldii and M. musicus, possess no fewer than six

pairs of these ceca ||.

The ctrculatory system consists of a dorsal and a ventral

vessel united by six transverse trunks or “ hearts” in seg-

ments 9-14; of these the two posterior are slightly larger

than the others.

The nervous system closely resembles that of other earth-

worms; the cerebral ganglia, hardly separated from each other,

are placed on the line of division between the buccal cavity

and the pharynx in the 2nd segment of the body. The

ventral chain commences in the 3rd segment; the two or

three anterior ganglia are considerably larger than the follow-

ing ones and closer together; the ganglion occupying the 17th

segment, and lying between the male generative apertures, is

also, as usual, of larger size than the rest. From each —

ganglion two pairs of nerves appeared to take their origm—

one at the anterior, and the other at the posterior extremity.

Segmental organs.—Instead of the ordinary simple tubes

opening into the body-cavity bya ciliated funnel which arefound

in the common earthworm and the majority of the Oligocheta,

there are in Typheus a series of tufted glandular masses

somewhat similar in appearance to the tufted glands which

are almost universally found in the genus Megascolex, and re-

figs. 1, 11, 12, pl. xxvi. fig. 19.

+ Gegenbaur, Man. d’Anat. compar. (trad. frang. par C. Vogt), p. 206,

figs. 43, 44.

{ Vaillant, Ann. des Sc. Nat. 5 sér. t. x. p. 233, pl. x. fig. 4g.

§ Perrier, Nouv. Arch. du Muséum, p. 10], &c.

|| Horst, Notes from the Leyden Museum, vol. v. pp. 192, 194.

some EHarthworms from India. 223

garded by Perrier and Horst as the homologues of the seg-

mental organs. In Typheus, however, they are somewhat

different in appearance and far less conspicuous ; instead of

being developed in close relation to the mesenteries, they are

situated near the anterior margin of each segment on the

ventral wall of the body. Their microscopic structure was

hardly distinguishable, owing to the bad state of preservation

of the specimens; but it evidently differed from the structure

of the tuited glands in Megascolex affinis and Pericheta armata.

Judging from the position of the organs, it seemed very likely

that the external aperture was situated anteriorly to the inner

pair of sete. ‘These glands appeared to be present only in

the anterior segments of the body; behind the clitellum I was

unable to detect any.

In the most anterior part of the body, and occupying seg-

ments 3 and 4, is a large gland on either side composed of a

number of these glandular tufts aggregated together (fig. 2).

Kisig has recently shown in the Capitellide that there

may be more than a single segmental tube to each segment ;

and, assuming that the glandular tufts of Typheus are

really the homologues of the segmental organs of other

worms, which seems very probable, this genus presents another

example of the same phenomenon. It is possible that this

structure corresponds to the “ glande A mucosité”’ described

by Perrier as coexisting in Urocheta with segmental tubes of

the normal type.

Generative system.—I was unable to find the ovaries or any

trace of an oviduct or its external opening, which is so con-

spicuous in Megascolex.

The male organs consist of a large pair of testes, which ex-

tend through the 13th, 14th, and 15th segments. The vasa

deferentia are two extremely fine tubes which open upon the

17th segment; each unites with the duct of the prostate gland

of its own side shortly before its external opening. The

“ prostates ” are two large coiled glandular tubes situated, one

on either side of the body, in the 18th segment. In the speci-

men with a fully-developed clitellum the prostate was divisible

into two parts—(1) the gland itself, a thick coiled bright-

orange-coloured tube; (2) the duct, which differed in being

of a smaller diameter and white colour. A thin muscular sac

containing a number of specially modified penial sete (fig. 11)

is present, and is rendered extremely conspicuous by its nacre-

ous glitter.

A single pair of spermatheces occupy the 8th, and open be-

tween the 7th and 8th segments; each is provided with a

short muscular efferent duct, at the junction of which with

224 On some Earthworms from India.

the body of the spermatheca is,a small appendage on either

side; this appendage is formed of three short sacs uniting

before their opening into the duct of the spermatheca; in

colour they are very different from the spermatheca itself,

being of a chalk-white, owing apparently to the thin-

ness of the walls and to the presence of spermatozoa within ;

the main part of the spermatheca is reniform in shape,

the efferent duct arising from the “ hilus,” and of a yellowish

colour. ‘The whole of this portion of the organ is covered by

abundant blood-capillaries. Fig. 9 shows one of the sperma-

thecee, viewed laterally, with its trifid appendage and the

‘segmental tufts” of the segments on either side of it.

The only other Intraclitellian genera in which prostate glands

(so commonly found in the Postclitellian forms) exist are

apparently Hudrilus and Pleurocheta; in the former genus

Perrier* has described and figured two long sacs, which appear

to represent prostates, and in Plewrochewtat they are well

developed. In having the form of a simple coiled tube the

prostate glands of 7ypheus are of a more primitive character

than those of Perichwta, which are complex lobulated glands ;

in Pontodrilus t, however, the prostate has the same rudimen-

tary structure.

Hab, Neighbourhood of Calcutta.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIII.

Fig.1. Typheus orientalis, from beneath. cl, clitellum; a, male gene-

rative apertures ; b, genital papille ; sp, apertures of spermathece.

Natural size.

Fig. 2. Typheus orientalis, dissected. a, aggregate of segmental tufts ;

b, specially thickened mesenteries; ¢, pharynx, between which

and the buccal cavity lie the cerebral ganglia; d, esophagus ;

e, gizzard; f, intestine; g, testis; 4, prostate gland; 2, penial

sac: sp, spermathece; v, dorsal vessel, giving off six lateral

hearts. ‘T'wice the natural size.

Fig. 3. Perionyr M‘Intosli. m, male aperture; f, female aperture ; sp,

orifice of spermatheca. Natural size.

Fig. 4. Genital papilla of T'ypheus. xX 4.

Fig. 5. Seta of Pericheta armata, X 800.

Fig. 6. Penial seta of the same, terminal portion. x 300,

Fig. 7. Spermatheca of the same. X 2.

Fig. 8. Spermatheca of Perionyx M‘Intoshit. Natural size.

Fig. 9. Spermatheca and neighbouring segmental tufts of Typheus.

Fig. 10. Seta of the same. xX 3800.

Figs. 11aand b. Penial sete of the same, terminal portion. x 300.

Fg. 12. Intestinal glands of the same. x 4.

* Perrier, Nouv. Arch. du Muséum, t. vill. p. 74, pl. ii. fig. 26 vs.

+ Beddard, loc. cit. p. 501.

t Perrier, Arch. de Zool. Exp. t. ix. 1881, pl. xiv. fig. 17.

On Lizards of the Genus Lophognathus. 225

XXVI.—Remarks on the Lizards of the Genus Lophognathus.

By G. A. BOULENGER.

I Am acquainted with four forms of Lophognathus which I

think well entitled to specific distinction. ‘Two species only

have hitherto been described, viz. LZ. Gilbert’, Gray, and L.

lateralis, Macleay (Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 11. 1878,

p- 103). Under the former name Gray (Cat. Liz. 1845) con-

founded two forms ; but his description is chiefly penned from

the one which has been excellently figured in the Zoology of

the ‘ Krebus’ and ‘ Terror,’ and tor which I will retain the

name. It is difficult to say, from Macleay’s description, what

L. lateralis is. The principal characters of the four forms in

the British Museum are as follows :

1. Lophognathus Gilbertt.

Lophognathus Gilberti, Gray, Zool. Misc. p. 53, and Cat. Liz. p. 250

(part.), and Zool. ‘ Erebus’ and ‘Terror,’ pl. xix. fig. 2.

Redtenbacheria fasciata, Steindachn. Novara, Rept. p. 31.

Snout not longer than the distance between the orbit and

the posterior border of the ear. Nostril a little nearer the

orbit than the tip of the snout. Keels of the upper dorsal

seales horizontal, forming parallel lines with the vertebral

erest. Parotoid region with a few erect pointed scales. Gular

scales very feebly keeled. A broad light band along upper

and lower lip; a light band along each side of the back.

One specimen from Port Essington and three from the

Swan river.

2. Lophognathus longirostris, sp. n.

Snout longer than the distance between the orbit and the

posterior border of the ear. Nostril a little nearer the orbit

than the tip of the snout. Dorsal scales all obliquely directed

upwards. Gular scales very feebly keeled. A light band

bordering the lower lip; a light band along each side of the

back.

Three specimens from Champion Bay, N.W. Australia.

3. Lophognathus labialis, sp. n.

Lophognathus Giiberti (part.), Gray, Cat. Liz. p. 250.

Snout not longer than the distance between the orbit and

the posterior border of the ear. Nostril a little nearer the tip

of the snout than the orbit. Dorsal scales all obliquely

226 Mr. R. MeLachlan on the

directed upwards. Gular scales very feebly keeled. A light

band bordering the upper lip; a light band along each side

of the back.

Two specimens from Port Essington.

4. Lophognathus maculilabris, sp. n.

Snout not longer than the distance between the orbit and

the posterior border of the ear. Nostril equally distant from

the orbit and the tip of the snout. Dorsal scales all obliquely

directed upwards. Gular scales strongly keeled. An irre-

gular light band from below the eye to the shoulder; lips and

lower surfaces maculated with blackish.

Two specimens from the Timor Laut Islands.

XXVII.—Neuroptera of the Hawatian Islands.—Part I.

Pseudo-Neuroptera. By Ropert McLAcutian, F.R.S. &e.

In this and in the paper on Neuroptera-Planipennia that will

follow it I propose*to give the results of the working-out of

two small collections formed by the Rev. Thomas Blackburn

in the islands, combined with such information as had been

previously obtained from a few species taken by Mr. G. F.

Mathew, R.N., a few existing in the British Museum from _

the results of Captain Beechey’s voyage, and some other

sources. As Mr. Blackburn has now left the islands, after a

residence in them of several years, it may be some time before

another opportunity occurs for a still further examination of

their insect productions.

A general summary will appear with Part IL. of this paper.

In Part I. seventeen species are considered, viz. two of Ter-

mitide, one of Embide, two of Psocide, and twelve of Odo-

nata (or dragonflies). The Hphemeride and Perlide are

not represented ; but I cannot believe they are totally absent.

The two ‘Termitide are probable importations from

America; so also may be the single species of Embide. Of

the Psocide one is probably endemic, the other may be an

introduction from America (but the materials are too small).

Of the dragonflies (Odonata), one is nearly cosmopolitan ;

two others are North-American species of powerful flight, and

probably endowed with migratory instincts ; one rather large

species of Libellulina is apparently endemic; the Agrionina

are no doubt strictly endemic, and form the most interesting

Neuroptera of the Hawaiian Islands. 227

(and at the same time most puzzling) feature of the Neuro-

pterous fauna.

Termitide.

Calotermes castaneus, Burm.

Calotermes castaneus, Burm.; Hag. Monogr. p. 38.

Two examples, gummed on card (Blackburn, No. 18).

A widely distributed species in America, ranging from

California to Chil. In the Hawaiian individuals the wings

expand to about 33 millim., their colour pale (almost whitish),

and in the posterior wings the median nervure originates at

about the basal fourth of the subcosta. These points are

mentioned as the species appears to be variable.

Calotermes marginipennis, Latr.

Y ye *7199777 ., ys au

Calotermes marginipennis, Latr.; Hag. Monogr. p. 47.

Two examples, gummed on card (Blackburn, No. 11).

A species recorded from Mexico and California. The

Hawaiian examples are of small size (expanse 20 and 25

millim. respectively), but they agree otherwise, especially in

the median nervure being nearly equidistant between the sub-

costa and submedian.

Embide.

Oligotoma insularis, n. sp.

Body entirely pitchy fuscous; mouth-parts inclining to

reddish ; clothed with fine whitish pubescence. Head gently

convex above, with no discal depression. Eyes large, coarsely

faceted, black. Antenne fuscous, annulated with whitish at

the sutures, more than 18-jointed (mutilated), basal joint

short and stout, second still shorter but much thinner, the

succeeding joints elongate, slender, obconical. Pronotum

more than twice as long as broad, much narrower than the

head, the sides slightly dilated in the middle, the anterior

portion slightly narrowed; a transverse impressed line ante-

riorly before the margin. Meso- and metanota nearly equal,

each much longer and broader than the pronotum. Anal

styles long and slender (asymmetric), the joints nearly equal.

Legs pitchy fuscous, clothed with whitish pubescence; tro-

chanters, knees, and tarsi pale testaceous.

Wings narrow, pale fuliginous, the coalescent subcosta and

radius dark fuscous; rest of the venation fuscescent ; sector

simply furcate from about its middle in the anterior wings

228 Mr. R. McLachlan on the

(much sooner in the posterior), the radius confluent with its

upper branch before the apex ; apparently no costal nervules ;

three nearly equidistant nervules between the upper branch

of the sector and the radius; five complete whitish vitte, one

placed in each of the principal areas.

Length of body (much extended) 7-8 millim.; expanse

114-124 millim.

Three examples, gummed on card (Blackburn, Nos. 12

and 19).

The Indian O. Saundersii, Westw., has the body testa-

ceous.

A specimen in my collection from Antigua (7. A. Mar-

shall) is so similar to O. insularis that I hesitate to separate

it therefrom; this has been erroneously recorded as a Man-

tispa (!) (cf: Proc. Ent. Soc. Lond. 1878, p. xxxiv).

Psocidee.

Psocus, sp. ?

One unexpanded specimen, on card, with the wings gummed

together, appears to me incapable of identification. It is pro-

bably very close to the European Ps. bifasciatus, Latr. (also

found in North America) ; and were it not for a difference in

the markings of the head, it might (in its present condition)

be considered identical therewith; perhaps even it is really

that species. (Blackburn, without No.)

Elipsocus vinosus, n. sp.

(Body destroyed.) Antenne (fragments) apparently

blackish, slender. Legs pinkish (or very pale claret-

coloured) ; tibia and tarsi with rows of minute black tubercles,

the bases of fine short hairs.

Wings vitreous, scarcely tinged (under the microscope the

membrane is seen to be studded with very minute closely-

placed black points); neuration apparently reddish brown ;

pterostigma elongate, gradually dilated to the oblique apex,

bright claret-coloured ; posterior marginal cellule large, sub-

triangular, the apex rounded. In the posterior wings the

neuration appears to be blacker.

Expanse about 43 millim.

One much mutilated example, gummed on card (Blackburn,

No.. 13).

N.B.—Nothing but the insular habitat, combined with the

presence of apparently striking characters, could have induced

me to bestow a name upon this mutilated specimen.

Neuroptera of the Hawaiian Islands. 229

Odonata.

LIBELLULINA.

Pantala flavescens, F.

A nearly cosmopolitan species; found universally within

the tropics (Mathew, Blackburn, &c.).

Tramea lacerata, Hagen.

A North-American species, extending to Mexico (Mathew,

Blackburn).

Lepthemis Blackburnt, n. sp.

Wings quite hyaline, very shining, both pairs yellow

(slightly olivaceous) at the base nearly or quite up to the

triangles; this colour more intense and more extended out-

wardly in the subcostal and median areas, not extending to

the anal angle in the posterior wings. Neuration entirely

black, the costal nervure black outwardly. Pterostigma long

(4 millim.), greyish yellow (brown when very adult), be-

tween thickened deep black nervules. Eleven or twelve ante-

eubital and nine postcubital nervules in the anterior wings ;

a supernumerary nervule in the anterior wings (not in the

posterior). Sectors of the arculus with a short petiole. Dis-

coidal triangle in the anterior wings rather broad, traversed by

one or, exceptionally, by two nervules ; inner triangle with

three cellules (in the posterior wings the discoidal triangle

may be either free or traversed by a nervule; inner triangle

absent or abnormally present); three rows of posttrigonal

cellules. Membranule whitish cinereous. Posterior wings

moderately dilated at the base. The network of all the wings

fine and close.’

Head: face pale yellow, clothed with erect black hairs ; an

isolated transversely oval shining black spot on the top of the

front, and a broad band of the same colour in front of the

ocelli ; labium and a broad inner margin on each of the side

lobes black ; labrum black at its base and with a narrow

black margin in the female (or with only the narrow black

margin, male) ; occiput blackish, yellow behind; back of

head shining black, with three yellow spots on either side,

fringed with a strong crest of cinereous hairs.

Prothorax black (with an indistinct median yellow spot),

its posterior lobe very large, slightly emarginate in the

middle (hence indistinctly bilobed), with a median im-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. LG

230 Mr. R. McLachlan on the

pressed line, fringed with a long and thick crest of cinereous

hairs.

Thorax deep opaque black above, clothed with cinereous

hairs ; an oval antehumeral isolated yellow spot on each side

anteriorly, scarcely touching the. anterior margin, and a trans-

verse cuneiform yellow spot on each side posteriorly, margining

the thoracic cavities, which are also yellow; interalar space

spotted with yellow. Stdes of thorax metallic green, with

seven large yellow spots arranged in two series (three and

four); posterior margin also yellow; pectus spotted with

yellow.

Legs deep black (brownish in a somewhat immature ex-

ample), long and slender ; femora with only short spines, but

with very long cinereous hairs; tibie with long and close

slender spines; inner tooth of claws rather strong, placed not

far below the apex.

Abdomen slender, greatly dilated at the base to the end of

the third segment ; second and third segments with a median

suture. Colour bronzy black ; second segment with a large

median posterior brownish-yellow spot, divided anteriorly,

third with a large median dorsal band of the same colour (in

the male these dorsal markings are continuous with the pale

sides, so that almost the entire segments are pale; in the fe-

male the dorsal markings and pale sides are separated by the

black ground-colour) ; a small anterior brownish-yellow gemi-

nate spot on the fourth to sixth ; on the seventh this spot en-

larges and occupies nearly the whole of the dorsal portion of the

seement, and on the eighth becomes small again, forming two

small anterior lines (very indistinct in the male) ; ninth with

two indistinct anterior points (obliterated in the male), and

there is a small marginal point on the tenth.

¢. Genitalia of second segment concealed, but the side-

pieces are long, obtuse, and finger-shaped, with a tuft of long

cinereous hairs. Superior appendages as long as the last two

-seements, black, cylindrical, gently curved, the apical portion

gently dilated, the apex oblique, very acute, and turned

slightly upward ; on the lower edge is a series of about eight

small teeth or tubercles, Inferior appendage elongate-trian-

gular, extending beyond the teeth of the superior, its apex

emarginate with acute angles.

@. Appendages not so long as the nimth segment, black,

straight, cylindrical, somewhat dilated towards the apex,

which is acute and prolonged; the inflated ventral tubercle

densely clothed with cinereous hairs. Vulvar scale adpressed,

flat, longer than the ninth segment, its apex semicircular and

slightly outstanding.

Neuroptera of the Hawaiian Islands. 231

Length of abdomen, ¢ 38 millim., ? 40 millim.; length

of posterior wing, ¢ 38 millim., ¢ 39 millim.; expanse, ¢

77 millim., ¢ 80-84 millim.

I have examined one male and two females (Blackburn,

No. 16).

Mr. Blackburn says, ‘‘ This dragon-fly is widely distributed,

but not common. It occurs at various elevations from near

the sea-level to at least 4500 feet. I have taken it on nearly

all the islands.” I think it must be considered a really indi-

genous species ; at any rate I know of nothing like it.

The precise position of the species is perhaps open to doubt

in the present uncertain state of the classification of Libellu-

lina. At first sight it has somewhat the aspect of a Dythemis,

but the large posterior lobe of the prothorax precludes any

such affinity. In the form of the prothorax, slender abdomen

with much inflated base, and general aspect it may be located

in Lepthemis as that elastic genus is now constituted ; it prin-

cipally differs therefrom in the broader discoidal triangle of

the anterior wing, in the longer and more slender tibial spines,

and in the form and position of the inner tooth of the claws.

There appears to be no other defined group with a similar

prothoracic formation in which it can be placed.

/AE\SCHNINA.

Anax junius, Drury.

This common North-American species (which has been

also recorded from Kamtschatka and North China) appears to

be general in the islands. In examining a series of Ame-

rican examples with regard to the anal appendages of the

males, [ find a certain amount of slight variation that may be

partly individual, partly local, in its nature. In two Ha-

waiian males before me the inferior appendage appears to me

to be distinctly shorter and more deeply excised in the middle

than in the American specimens; even if this should prove

to be constant, it is of no specitic value.

-Anaa strenuus, Hagen.

Anax strenuus, Hagen, Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. in Wien, 1867, p. 34.

The type is a female taken during the Danish ‘ Galathea’

expedition, and is in the Copenhagen Museum. It would

appear to differ from A. juniws principally in its greater size

(expanse “ 136 millim.,” as opposed to 95-112 millim.” in

junius) and in slight colour characters. Hagen considers the

Wks

Zoe Mr. R. McLachlan on the

discovery of the male necessary in order to establish the

species with certainty.

Mr. Blackburn once informed me that he had seen (but was

unable to capture) an Ana that appeared to be larger than

Junius.

AGRIONINA.

Agrion (?) xanthomelas, Selys.

Agrion(?) xanthomelas, Selys, Synop. Agrionines, légion Agrion, suite,

p. 174 (1878).

Originally described from specimens found by Mathew.

“¢ Occurs near Wailuku, Maui” (Blackburn, No. 28).

Varieties.

1. The antehumeral reddish band narrower than in the type,

strongly interrupted posteriorly into a point of exclamation,

not connected posteriorly with the sutural band, and hence

not furcate ; a small median isolated black spot on the pale

sides of the thorax. The blackish transverse band on the

ninth segment broader.

2. The postocular occipital line totally obliterated, hence the

top of the head is entirely black. Thoracic lines as in var. 1,

and there is a large median isolated black spot on the sides of

the thorax. Ninth segment with nearly its posterior half

black above.

A male of each variety taken by Mr. Blackburn with the

type form (also numbered 28), agreeing entirely therewith

save in the points mentioned. The obliteration of the post-

ocular line in var. 2 is important, considering the weight

given to this character from a classificatory point of view ;

for my part I incline to the opinion that much undue weight

is accorded to it, and that it is eminently artificial.

Agrion (?) hawatvense, n. sp.

Wings hyaline, rather acute; neuration black. Ptero-

stigma lozenge-shaped, surmounting slightly more than the

cellule below it, brownish black, shghtly paler at the edges.

Quadrilateral having the superior edge about one third the

length of the inferior in the anterior wings, one half in the

posterior. Seventeen or eighteen postcubital nervules in the

anterior wings, fourteen or fifteen in the posterior. Four

cellules between the quadrilateral and the nodus.

Dark bronzy green.

Head black above, with isolated oval orange-yellow post-

Neuroptera of the Hawatian Islands. 233

ocular spots. Labium. pale yellow. Labrum shining black,

but its anterior margin broadly yellow (so that it is half

black, half yellow) ; a broad yellow band occupies the vertical

portion of the rhinarium ; margins of the orbits in front broadly

yellow ; basal joint of antenne yellow beneath, and there is

a yellow spot below it; back of the head black.

Prothorax black, yellow at the junction with the head,

with a large yellow spot above the anterior legs. In the male

the posterior margin is gently rounded, with a minute median

notch, narrowly yellow, which expands into a spot on either

side. In the female the margin is thickened and broadly

yellow, slightly elevated in its middle, with a distinct median

notch in the centre of the elevated portion ; in this sex there

are two small round discal yellow spots (which are absent in

the male).

Thorax bronzy green above. In the male there are four

small yellow spots, two anterior and two posterior (with or

without humeral lines) ; in the female there is a distinct nar-

row yellow humeral line, connected with the spots anteriorly

but abbreviated posteriorly. Sides yellow, with a broad black

median band, which is furcate towards the anterior wings and

encloses a yellow spot. Pectus black, yellow in the centre.

Legs black, femora and anterior tibie yellow beneath ;

spines black, long and divaricated, seven or eight on posterior

tibiee.

Abdomen slender, bronzy green above, passing into yel-

lowish at the sides and ventrally. First and second segments

broadly yellow on the sides, enclosing on the first a greatly

curved black line, which is nearly circular in outline; ali the

segments from the second to ninth with a narrow anterior

yellowish sutural ring, which passes into obscure reddish on

the apical segments; tenth segment nearly wholly obscure

reddish.

6. Margin of tenth segment broadly excised in the middle.

Superior appendages slightly longer than the segment, nearly

forcipate, stout, the apices curved inward and obtuse, divari-

cate, internally much dilated in more than the basal half

beneath ; black externally, the dilated internal basal portion

reddish. Inferior appendages nearly one half shorter, elon-

gately triangular, but gradually attenuate and nearly acute,

turned upward and inward; black, but reddish at the base.

9. Appendages short, black, conical. Valvules large,

reddish, their appendages short.

Length of abdomen, ¢ 38 millim., ? 32 millim.; length

of posterior wing, g 23 millim., 9 24 millim.; expanse,

3g 474 millim., ? 51 millim.

234 Mr. R. McLachlan on the

“Oahu, at no great elevation above the sea” (Blackburn,

two males, one female, No. 16).

The two males vary somewhat in the markings of the head

and thorax. In one the postocular spots are nearly obliterated

and bluish (instead of yellow or orange), and on the thorax

the markings are also bluish, and the humeral lines are di-

stinct, as described for the female, whereas they are wanting

in the other. They are certainly specifically identical.

The precise location of this species must remain doubtful.

On the one hand it approaches Nehalennéa in its slender

form and bronzy colour, but the anal characters of the male

appear to preclude such a position; on the other hand, the

long tibial spines would seem to indicate affinity with Argia.

Agrion (?) pacificum, n. sp.

Wings hyaline, obtuse; neuration black. Pterostigma

lozenge-shaped, scarcely covering the cellule beneath it,

reddish brown. Quadrilateral having its superior edge about

one third the length of the inferior in the anterior wings, and

fully half the length in the posterior. Twelve to fourteen

postcubital nervules in the anterior wings, eleven in the pos-

terior, Three cellules between the quadrilateral and nodus.

Dull black.

Head small, totally black above (no postocular spots). La-

bium and margin cf labrum yellowish; orbits broadly yel-

lowish (or greenish) exteriorly. Back of head black.

Prothorax having its posterior margin slightly and obtusely

elevated in the middle in both sexes. In the male there are

two approximate nuchal spots, two distant discal, and two

very large, one on each side of the margin, orange or yellow.

In the female the margin is also yellow on each side of the

produced portion.

Thorax with no humeral lines, but with a yellow (or orange)

humeral spot posteriorly. Sides with two broad yellow (or

orange) bands—onesupertor and anterior, abbreviated at about

the middle, but with a corresponding minute posterior spot;

the other inferior and posterior, proceeding about haltway

from the wings and then abbreviated. Pectus black.

Legs black; femora brownish beneath; spines long and

divaricated, about six on the posterior tibie.

Abdomen slender, black ; a large reddish or yellow spot on

each side of the first and second segments; eighth and ninth

with a broad reddish anterior ring, and the posterior margin

of the tenth narrowly reddish in the male (in the female these

segments are wholly black), the ring on the ninth occupying

nearly half the segment; ventrally the segments have a nar-

Neuroptera of the Hawatian Islands. 235

row yellowish longitudinal border (more conspicuous in the

female).

3. The tenth segment has a broad triangular excision

on its border. Superior appendages black, very short, stout,

obtuse, excised below the apex internally. Inferior ap-

pendages black, long, subforcipate, turned inward, very acute ;

more than twice the length of the superior.

?. The appendages are very short, stout, conical, black.

Valvules short, reddish varied with black, and with some-

what long black appendages.

Length of abdomen, ¢ 283 millim., 9 25 millim.; length

of posterior wing, ¢ 20 millim., 9 19 millim.; expanse, ¢

41 millim., 2 38 millim.

“Lanai and Oahu, at various elevations”? (Blackburn,

two males, one female, No. 53).

Notwithstanding the entire absence of postocular spots or

lines, I think this insect is allied to A. xanthomelas, on account

of general (and especially anal) structure. Eliminating it

from Argta (with which it has affinity on acecunt of the long

tibial spines), the absence of postocular spots would place it in

Lrythromma; but the small head, slender body, and anal

characters are opposed to its location therein.

Agrion (2?) deceptor, n. sp.

Wings hyaline (or with the faintest smoky tinge in the

adult), rather acute. Pterostigma longer than broad, sur-

mounting two cellules, reddish brown. Neuration black.

Quadrilateral having its superior edge one third the length of

the lower in the anterior wings, nearly one half in the pos-

terior. ‘Twenty or twenty-one postcubital cellules in the an-

terior wings, fifteen to eighteen in the posterior. Five cellules

between the quadrilateral and the nodus.

Head and thorax black. Abdomen bright red.

Labium dingy yellowish. A broad border to the labrum,

broad anterior orbits, a broad band above the rhinarium, and

a small line on the basal joint of antennz beneath, yellowish

or reddish. Postocular spots narrow, reddish, connected by a

line. Posterior margin of prothorax having the sides broad]

dilated, but the dilated portion is interrupted before the

middle, leaving the apex of the discal portion projecting some-

what obtusely between the two portions. Neck, a large

median triangular spect, and the broad dilated portion of the

posterior margin red.

Thorax with a broad red antehumeral band, interrupted

posteriorly in a point of exclamation, red, followed by a

broader black humeral band. Sides red with two yellowish

236 Mr. R. Mcleachiant on the

lines, and two black bands connected at the intermediate legs.

Pectus black.

Legs red ; spines black, those on the tibie long and divari-

cate ; apex of tarsal joints and tips of claws black.

Abdomen bright red, marked with black as follows :—A

large quadrate spot at the base of the first segment, somewhat

emarginate posteriorly, and a small spot on either side on the

posterior suture ; a narrow ring at the apex of segments 2 to4 5

a broad ying at apex of segment 5; the whole of segments

6 to 8 (excepting a broad ring at base of 6 occupying about

one sixth of its length, a narrow ring at apex of 7 and 8, and

the sides of all three, broadly); a large irregular spot on

each side of segment 9.

g. The margin of tenth segment is very oblique on

either side, and with a sudden small triangular median

excision. Superior appendages longer than the segment,

black (red at the base internally), stout, the apices slightly

incurved ; internally the basal portion is much dilated for more

than half their length, and at the apex of the dilated portion

is a slight excision, leaving a formation as of two indistinct

blunt teeth. Inferior appendages scarcely one half shorter,

slender, slightly incurved, red, blackish at the tips.

9. Unknown.

Length of abdomen, ¢ 34 millim.; length of posterior wing

23 millim.; expanse 51 millim.

Oahu (Llackburn, one male, No. 67). Taken in company

with Megalagrion oceanicum (vide post.), and sent by Mr.

Blackburn under the same number. There is very great

general resemblance ; but the size, neural characters, &c.

readily separate the two ; the anal parts, although very similar,

also present differences.

Agrion (?) calliphya, n. sp.

Wings narrow, tinged with yellow ; petiolated nearly up to

the basal postcostal nervule in both pairs. Pterostigma lozenge-

shaped, surmounting rather more than one cellule, reddish

brown. Quadrilateral elongate, its upper edge about half the

length of the lower in both pairs. Postpterostigmatical cellules

irregular, distinctly in two rows in the posterior wings. Six-

teen or seventeen postcubital nervules in the anterior wings,

thirteen or fourteen in the posterior. Four cellules between the

quadrilateral and the nodus.

Head and thorax black. Abdomen red.

Front wholly reddish yellow, excepting a very narrow black

line before the rhimarium. Postocular spots red, small, and

nearly linear.

Neuroptera of the Hawatian Islands. 237

Prothorax having its posterior margin gently rounded and

narrowly red (otherwise black).

Thorax with the very narrow dorsal crest, and a narrow,

slightly curved, continuous antehumeral line red, the latter

followed by a broad black humeral band; sides red, with two

yellowish lines (whereof the upper exists as a vestige at the

base of the anterior wings) ; a black spot, and a narrow black

mesothoracic sutural line. Pectus red.

Legs red; spines black, those on the tibie long and divari-

cate; apex of tarsal joints and tips of claws black.

Abdomen very slender, bright red; a large quadrate spot

on the first segment, a narrow ring at the apex of the second

to sixth (broader and expanding on the sides in the fifth

and sixth), and an anterior lateral line on the seventh, black.

g. The margin of the tenth segment is shallowly ex-

cised in a semicircular manner. Superior appendages longer

than the segment, very stout, blackish, red at the base; the

apex very obtuse and curved inward; internally they are

greatly dilated at the base, with a sort of blackish basal

tubercle. Inferior appendages shorter, red with black tips,

cylindrical, curved inward, and with a basal internal ventral

dilatation.

¢. Unknown.

Length of abdomen, ¢ 37 millim.; length of posterior

wing 243 millim.; expanse 51 millim.

* Lanai, about 2000 ft.” (Blackburn, one male, No. 55).

In some respects this is the most aberrant of the red

Hawaiian species, owing to its narrow wings and their greater

amount of petiolation; the anal parts are, however, quite

homologous.

MEGALAGRION, n. g. (Légion Agrion.)

Inferior sector of the triangle originating before the basal

postcostal nervule. Arculus continuous with the second costal

nervule. Pterostigma lozenge-shaped, its lower edge shorter

than the upper, surmounting two cellules. Postcostal area

with two rows of cellules. Postocular spots present, large.

Labium excised for about a third of its length.

Form robust, especially in the female.

Spines of the tibize long and strong ; inner tooth of claws

small.

Colour red.

No vulvar spine.

I have established this division for the reception of two of

the most magnificent species of the Légion Agrion hitherto

238 Mr. R. McLachlan on the

discovered. The double row of cellules in the postcostal area

(and in M. Blackburni the neuration is still more irregular)

exists only in Hyponeura, and the long tibial spines appa-

rently show further affinity therewith ; but the coloration is

opposed, and the anal characters are in accordance with most

of the other Hawaiian Agrionina.

Megalagrion Blackburnt, n. sp.

Wines hyaline in the slightly immature male, tinged with

fuliginous in the female. Pterostigma surmounting two

cellules (or two and a half), its lower edge very distinetly

shorter than the upper, outwardly very oblique, reddish brown.

Neuration black. Quadrilateral having its upper edge about

one third the length of the lower in the anterior wings, about

one half in the posterior (only about one fourth in both pairs in

the female). A double row of postpterostigmatical cellules.

Postcostal area with two complete series of cellules, and the in-

ferior sector of the triangle is irregularly broken, so that there

is a partially double series in the area between it and the su-

perior sector. In addition to this the neuration in the apical half

of the wing is often broken up into double series of cellules, in

some places simulating interposed sectors. ‘Thirty posteubital

cellules in the anterior wing, and twenty-three in the posterior

in the male, thirty-six and twenty-seven in the female. Hight

or nine cellules between the quadrilateral and the nodus.

Head and thorax black, abdomen bright red.

Labium yellow. Labrum broadly margined with yellow,

and the orbits anteriorly are broadly yellow. Postocular spots

very large, rounded, connected by a line, reddish (yellowish

in the semiadult male).

Prothorax having its posterior margin rounded (slightly

elevated in the male), marked with reddish (or yellow) as

follows :—neck, two median spots (geminate), a discal one

either side of these, a large external one on either side, and

the posterior margin.

Thorax with a narrow reddish (or yellow) antehumeral

line connected anteriorly with an inner spot, and dilated pos-

teriorly in a triangular manner; median crest very narrowly

reddish (or yellow). Sides reddish (or yellowish), with two

oblique black bands, whereof the upper is abbreviated. Pectus

black.

Legs red (yellow in the semiadult male) with black spines ;

apex of tarsal joints and tips of claws black.

Abdomen deep red (less intense in the semiadult male),

marked with black as follows :—In the male there is a spot at

the base of the first segment, a narrow posterior ring on segments

Neuroptera of the Hawaiian Islands. 239

2 to 6, expanding on the sides of the sixth, on the seventh the

apex is broadly black, which is continued laterally for nearly

the whole length, a large spot on the sides of the eighth; in

the female the apical rings are more distinct, and there is a

subapical narrower ring on the second to fourth segments, fifth

with a broad apical ring enclosing a transverse spot of the

ground-colour, sixth with a very broad apical band which is

trifid anteriorly, seventh and eighth wholly black except at the

sutures, ninth black at its base.

3. The tenth segment has a deep triangular excision

on its margin. Superior appendages longer than the tenth

segment; the lower dilated portion divided internally into

two blunt teeth, whereof the upper is black; apical por-

tion stout, curved, obtuse, black. Interior appendages more

than half the length of the superior, cylindrical, the tips in-

curved and black.

9. The appendages are very short, stout, conical, black.

Valvules moderate, not reaching the extremity of the abdo-

men, red, their appendages (broken) black.

Length of abdomen, ¢ 47 millim., 2 42 millim.; length

of pusterior wing, ¢ 32 millim., 9 386 millim.; expanse,

6 69 millim., 2 74 millim.

“ At the head of Wailuku valley, Maui” (Blackburn, one

male, one female, No. 26).

In colour strikingly resembling Pyrrhosoma mintum.

Megalagrion oceanicum, n. sp.

Wings hyaline. Pterostigma surmounting two cellules, very

oblique on its outer edge, the lower distinctly shorter than the

upper, reddish brown. Neuration black. Quadrilateral having

its upper edge scarcely one fourth the length of the lower in

the anterior wings, one third the length in the posterior. A

single row of postpterostigmatical cellules. Postcostal area

with simple cellules up to about the level of the nodus, after-

wards a double series (neuration otherwise not complicated).

Twenty-one or twenty-two antecubital nervules in the anterior

wings, eighteen in the posterior. Five cellules between the

quadrilateral and the nodus.

Head and thorax black. Abdomen bright red.

Labium pale yellow. A broad margin to the labrum, a spot

on either side of it, the orbits anteriorly, the vertical portion

of the rhinarium, a band above it, the lower side of the first

antennal joint, all yellow. Postocular spots large, nearly

connected by a line, reddish orange.

Prothorax having its posterior margin gently elevated and

rounded; the neck, two median spots (geminate), a discal

240 On the Neuroptera of the Hawatian Islands.

spot on either side, the posterior margin, and a very large

spot on either side continued along the margin, reddish

orange.

Thorax with broad reddish-orange antehumeral lines, fol-

lowed by a broader black humeral band which has a projection

on its lower edge anteriorly. Sides reddish orange, with an

appearance as of two yellow bands and with vestiges of two

black lines. Pectus reddish, with two black spots.

Legs reddish; spines black, those on the tibie long and

divaricate ; apex of tarsal joints and tips of claws black.

Abdomen bright red; a spot at the base of first segment, a

narrow ring at end of second to fifth, a broad ring at apex of

sixth (extended into a line on the sides), the whole of the

seventh and eighth (except an apical ring and the ventral

margins), black.

3. The tenth segment is broadly and shallowly excised.

Superior appendages longer than the tenth segment, diver-

gent, black, red at the base, stout; the apices inturned

and nearly uncinate, broadly dilated at the base inferiorly,

the dilated portion inturned and furnished with two black

teeth, the lower small, the upper large. Inferior appendages one

third shorter, slender, not divergent, acute, slightly incurved,

gradually dilated to the base.

@. Unknown.

Length of abdomen, ¢ 38 millim.; length of posterior

wing 28 millim. ; expanse 58 millim.

“Oahu, at no great elevation above the sea” (Blackburn,

one male, No. 67).

The neuration in this species is much more regular than in

M, Blackburnt.

The Hawaiian Agrionina probably form a special group ;

but, excepting in the two large species, I have not considered

it prudent to separate them from “ Agron” on account of

the apparent impossibility of being able to give characters

(other than geographical). In the whole of them the wings

cease to be petiolated before the basal postcostal nervule (only

slightly before in calliphya), the postocular spots are present

(except in pacijicum), and the female has no abdominal spine

(¢. e. in those species of which that sex is known). In most

of them the tibial spines are long, but not as strikingly so as

in Argia. And in nearly all of them (I might say actually

in all) there is a striking similarity in male anal cha-

racters (reminding one, to some extent, of that which obtains

in Agrion Lindenit, but with much longer inferior appen-

dages).

Mr. W. L. Distant on Malayan Entomology. 241

XXVIII.— Contributions to a Knowledge of Malayan

Entomology.—Part I. By W. L. DIsrant.

Order LEPIDOPTERA.

RHOPALOCERA.

Melanitis abdulle, n. sp.

Wings above dark fuliginous brown, somewhat paler at outer

margins. Wings beneath ochraceous, thickly mottled with

brown; anterior wings with two broad and irregular dark

fascie crossing cell and wing, some irregular waved markings

beyond cell, and some small and indistinct ocellated spots

placed in irregular series on outer discal area, of which the

most distinct are two separated by the upper discoidal nervule,

and two separated by the second median nervule ; posterior

wings with a narrow dark fascia passing a little beyond end of

cell, beyond which the colour is uniformly darker and more

opaque, and on which is included a series of six submarginal

ocellated spots placed between the nervules, of which the se-

cond (situate above the discoidal nervule) and the sixth (placed

near the anal angle) are somewhat the smallest. Body and

legs more or less concolorous with wings.

Exp. wings 63 millim.

Hab. Malay peninsula, Province Wellesley.

This species is somewhat allied to the Ceylonese WM. tambra,

and the Javan J. suwyudana, Moore, from both of which, be-

yond colour-differences on the under surface, it differs by the

non-falcate apex of the anterior wings.

Tenaris Birchi, n. sp.

g. Anterior wings above pale fuscous. Posterior wings

greyish white, costal area to above the median nervules pale

fuscous, with a large ocellated spot, of which the centre is

blackish with a pale central eye, situate between the second

and third median nervules, and which is broadly surrounded

with ochraceous ; a second very indistinct spot 1s situate on

and above the lower subcostal nervule. Anterior wings be-

neath as above, but darker towards base. Posterior wings

beneath as above, but with the basal area obliquely and not

beyond the lower median nervule dark fuscous; the lower

ocellated spot larger and brighter, the upper spot bright and

concolorous but smaller, and situate on the subcostal nervules.

Palpi ochraceous. Body dark obscure ochraceous.

242 Mr. W. L. Distant on Malayan Entomology.

Exp. wings 70 millim.

Hab. Singapore.

This species is allied to the Javan 7. Horsfieldit, with a

male of which, contained in the British Museum, my friend

Mr. Butler has kindly compared it, and who writes me that it

differs from that species by being ‘smaller, greyer in colour;

the posterior wings have no blackish external border, and the

upper ocellus is decidedly smaller. In some respects it is

nearer to a species which we have from Borneo, but is smaller,

has much smaller and less broadly zoned ocelli, and the dusky

colouring on under surface of posterior wings confined to basal

third instead of occupying half the wing.”

This species was presented by J. K. Birch, Esq., of Pro-

vince Wellesley, who captured it in Singapore, where he

observed it flying whilst walking along a road. He writes,

“Seeing it was a strange one, I knocked it down with a

stick,” thus not only securing an undescribed species, but for

the first time proving that the genus Yenaris is found in

the Malay peninsula.

Both this and the preceding species will be subsequently

figured in my ‘ Rhopalocera Malayana.’

Order RHYNCHOTA.

HOMOPTERA.

Pyrops javanensis, n. sp.

Head, pronotum, scutellum, and tegmina pale ochraceous,

thickly but minutely spotted with black; tegmina also

sparingly covered with larger reddish ochraceous spots, apex

of scutellum unspotted. Wings creamy white. Body above

fuscous, thickly covered with a white waxy pile, margins of

seemental incisures ochraceous. Head, sternum, and tegmina

beneath as above, the last paler ; legs ochraceous, femora with

a distinct black annulation near apex and an indistinct annu-

lation between that and base ; anterior and intermediate tibie

with about four black spots placed outwardly, the one nearest

base more or less continued as an annulation beneath, posterior

tibie: with five or six black spots placed outwardly, the sides

of all the tibiz more or less finely black-spotted; tarsi with

the apices of the joints more or less fuscous. Rostrum ochra-

ceous, the apex pitchy and passing the intermediate cox.

Exp. tegm. 92 millim., long. cap. 24 millim.

Hab. Java.

This species is closely allied to P. nobilis, Westw., from

On Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 243

which it differs in the following particulars :—the prolonga-

tion of the head is not prominently and dentately spined, as

in Westwood’s species, but only obtusely spined, thus giving

the head a much more slender appearance, the spines in both

species being arranged in six longitudinal series, two above,

two beneath, and one on each side ; the black spotting is also

much more minute, and the colour of the dorsal surface of the

abdomen different.

I have received P. nobilis both from the Malay peninsula and

Sumatra, whilst Java thus produces a distinct though closely

allied species.

Pyrops mustelinus, 1. sp.

. Body and tegmina above and beneath ochraceous, the head,

pronotum, scutellum, sternum, and tegmina minutely black-

spotted; tegmina with the veins reddish ochraceous; anal

appendage black, thickly margined with white pile. Wings

pale creamy white, the veins pale ochraceous. Femora

ochraceous, annulated with black near apex, and with a few

small black spots between the annulation and base; tibize

more or less black-spotted, tarsi with the apices of the joints

more or less fuscous.

Exp. tegm. 55 millim., long. cap. 144 millim.

Hab. Java.

This species is allied to the Indian P. punctatus, Oliv.,

from which it differs by the much more prolonged head, the

apex of which is not distinctly curved upwards, and which

is also more spotted with black than in Olivier’s species; the

abdomen above is ochraceous, and not black, &c.

XXIX.—WNotes on the Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca*.—

No. XVI. By T. Rupert Jones, F.R.S., F.G.S8., &c.

[Plates VI. & IX. |

I. Some Paleozoic and other Bivalved Entomostraca from

Siberian Russia. (Pl. VL.)

In the summer of 1882 Professor A. Karpinsky, of the Mining

Institute at St. Petersburg, asked me to examine and report

* Notes No. XV. appeared in the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. for November

1882, ser. 5, vol. x. pp. 858-360.

244 Prof. T. R. Jones on the

on some specimens of fossil Entomostraca which had been

obtained from the Devonian, Carboniferous, and Rheetic (?)

formations of the Ural (eastern). Referring to the specimens

the Professor observed :—“ ‘Toutes ces especes étaient jusqu’’d

présent inconnues dans les sédiments de l’Oural ; la plupart

de ces fossiles ne pourraient étre trouvés que par les explora-

tions souterraines 4 profondeur de quelques pieds.”

1. Estheria minuta (Alberti), var. Karpinskiana.

(PIS Viv ties 1 a) 10)

These specimens of an Estheria, labelled ‘‘ No. 1. Estheria,

Oural, District Troizk, Triassic or Jurassic (Rheetic ?),” are

imbedded in a somewhat ferruginous and slightly calcareous

shale, rather hard, and breaking into irregular pieces. The

Estherie have been squeezed out of shape in one direction or

another; but the most perfect shows the outline given in

Pl. VI. fig. 1a, in size about 4 millim. long by 3 millim.

high. Some slight carbonaceous relics of the valves remain

here and there.

All the specimens in the pieces of shale appear to belong to

one species. ‘The shape most nearly approaches that of H,

minuta, Monogr. Foss. Estheriw, Pal. Soc. 1863, pl. i. fig. 5

where the dorsal joins the anterior margin with a simple

convex curve without any depression in front of the umbe.

As to size, however, these are smaller than H. minuta and

rather larger than /. minuta, var. Brodieana, Jones (ibid.

fig. 9), and much larger than some specimens of this variety

(ibid. figs. 12 and 14).

Some trace of ornament remains on portions of the black

film representing the valves, in the form of minute, irregular,

vertical, wavy corrugations between the concentric ridge-

lines (fic. 1b). A modification of such reticulation as occurs

on some specimens of . minuta might produce this appear-

ance.

This Zstheria, from the eastern side of the Ural, may be

regarded as a variety of #. minuta (var. Ka pinskiana), but

whether Triassic or Rheetic, or even Jurassic, in age remains

doubtful. The note which Prof, Karpinsky attached to the

specimens is as follows :—

“No. 1. Les Esthéres, qui peut-étre ne présentent qu'une

variété d’Estheria minuta. Ces Esthéres se trouvent sur le

versant oriental de l’Oural dans les sédiments d’eau douce

avec les restes des plantes mal conservées, qu’on peut déter-

miner comme les espéces jurassiques—A splentum whithy yense,

var. tenuis, Podozamites lanceolatus et Phyllotheca striata.”

Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 245

2. Entomis serratostriata (Sandberger) (Pl. VI. figs. 4, 5)

and E. gyrata (Richter) (PI. VI. figs. 3.a, 3 2).

Several impressions and casts of different sizes in a light

brown and somewhat schistose shale, labelled “ No. 2. Hnto-

mis, Oural, Upper Devonian,” represent Hntomis serrato-

striata (see Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. iv. 1879,

pp. 183 &e. pl. xi. figs. ith 5, 7, 18, and 14) and #. gyrate

(cbid. figs. 4, 8, 10, il, and 12) ‘of the same geological for-

mation.

Pl. VI. fig. 5 shows a small convex cast of a delicately

striated valve of 1. serratostriata (*75 millim. long), probably

shortened by pressure. Fig. 4, also 4H. serratostriata (1

millim. long), is a convex cast of a middle-sized or ordinary

ovate-oblong valve, with fine but rather coarser strie. In

some of the associated examples in the same schist the strize

are thicker than in the foregoing, are more flexuous, and show

an inosculation here and there. These features are traceable

fie. 13, pl. xi. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (loc. evé.). In

some also there are indications of the former existence of

prickles, namely rows of minute pits accompanying the strie.

In Pl. VI. fig. 3 we have a concave impression of the

largest kind of valve (1°75 millim. long), with coarser strie.

These are more definitely concentric (that is, meeting at the

ends), and are strongly marked with the little pits which indi-

cate the places of prickles on the original surface. ‘The speci-

men of H. gyrata figured in the Amn. & Mag. Nat. Hist. loc.

eit. fig. 4a G ae fig. 4 (©) nearly approximates to this

and some others of the Ural specimens,

M. Karpinsky’s note attached to these specimens is as

follows :—

“No. 2. Entomis semblable 4 Entomis serratostriata. Ces

fossiles proviennent du versant oriental de l’Oural, ot ils se

trouvent dans les couches dévoniennes supérieures avec Car-

diola retrostriata et quelques Goniatites semblables & Gonia-

tites retrorsus, mais tres mal conservés.”

2a. In a very fine-grained and drab-coloured sandstone,

labelled ‘‘ No. 2a,” there are some small hollow impressions

(external moulds) of the ordinary /. serratostriata, and these

are accompanied by two minute convex casts (or remnants of

valves) of doubtful alliance.

One of them (fig. 6), rather grey in colour and ‘90 millim.

long, is somewhat like a Leperditia in outline, and has a

rough pimply surface, and may possibly be a rugose Pramitia,

Fr. Schmidt’s Leper ditia Mellert (Mise. Silur. iii. pp. 25

Ann. & Mag, N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 18

246 Prof. T. R. Jones on the

and 88, pl. i. figs. 23-25, and pl. v.a, figs. 23 and 24) is —

rugose or pimply ; but its larger size and difference in shape

do not allow of further comparison with this minute rugose

Leperditioid Primitia (?).

Fig. 7 is also a minute convex internal cast (‘90 millim.

long), the outline of which is not well exposed; and it has

a roughly pitted or coarsely reticulated surface, as if the

matrix were still adherent between pimples or little pustules,

like those of fig. 6 ; and it is probably of the same species.

These in some degree resemble the granulate variety of

Primitia cylindrica (Beyrichia, Richter), Zeitsch. d. d. geol.

Ges. vol. xv. 1863, p. 671, pl. xix. fig. 12, from the Upper

Silurian schists of Thuringia *, but not that treated of, abid.

xvi. p. 365, pl. x. fig. 7, which seems to me to be quite

another kind of organism (see Geol. Mag. dec. 2, vol. vii.

p- 342).

A small spinose or rugose Entomostracan has been noticed

by Richter, namely his Cythere spinosa, from the Lower Car-

boniferous or “Culm” of Thuringia (Zeitsch. deutsch. geol.

Ges. vol. xvi. 1864, p. 161, pl. iii. fig. 2) ; but this differs too

much from the little Devonian fossil before us to allow of any

approach to identification.

3. Estheria striata (Minster), var. tenutpectoralis, nov.

(PL. VI. fig. 2.)

In a very fine-grained, soft, grey, sandy shale, full of

minute carbonaceous specks, and labelled “ No. 3. Hstheria,

sp., Oural, Kamensk, Lower Carboniferous,” is a delicate

impression, or flattened cast, of a subovate Hstherta, 5 millim.

long by 4 millim. high. Its straight back is not quite perfect

at the two ends; but its umbo was evidently close to the

antero-dorsal end, as in L/. str¢ata and some others. In this

feature, and in the bold oblique curve of the postero-ventral

margin, this form markedly approaches L, striata (see Monogr,

Foss. Esth., Pal. Soc. 1863, p. 23, pl. 1. figs. 13 and 15) ; but

it slopes too much, and is not full enough, on the antero-ventral —

margin, to exactly match any of the forms of that species.

It is of the same size as the small, but suboblong. variety of

fi. striata figured ibid. fig. 18. Nor does it come close

enough to KH. tenella (Jordan), dbid. fig. 26, in the relative

fulness of the front margin, nor even to 2. Peachi, Jones,

another Carboniferous species (Geol. Mag. vol. vii. 1870, -

* The Thuringian Beyrichie figured and described without a locality

in the Geol. Mag. dec. 2, vol. viii. pp. 542, 345, pl. x. figs. 1-6, are from —

the Nererte-beds at the Graftenthal and Steinach, near Saalfeld.

Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 247

p- 220, pl. ix. fig. 17), to which otherwise it has a strong

likeness.

Unfortunately even the concentric ridges are only imper-

fectly preserved, and no interstitial ornament is at all visible

on the mere film remaining where the valve was imbedded.

Being inclined to regard it as a variety of the widely dis-

tributed L. striata, I propose to distinguish it as var. tenue-

pectoralis.

Prof. Karpinsky labelled it as follows :—“ No. 3. Estheria,

sp. Exemplaire unique trouvé prés de l’usine Kamensk

(Oural, versant oriental) dans les couches carboniféres infé-

rieures contenant de la houille.”

Imperfect as these foregoing determinations of East-Uralian

fossil Hntomostraca are in some respects, still the recognition

of so many forms closely allied to species well known in

Western Europe is of considerable interest to geologists and

biologists ; and our thanks are due to our fellow-worker at

St. Petersburg, Prof. A. Karpinsky, for the opportunity of

comparing these rare Russian specimens with those which

we know so well in Germany, France, and England.

Il. Some Paleozoie Bivalved Entomostraca from Spitz-

bergen. (Pl. IX.)

In the winter of 1882-3 my friend Dr. Gustav Lindstrém

wrote to me from Stockholm, stating that Dr. Nathorst had

recently returned from Spitzbergen with a rich harvest of

fossils, and that amongst them he had brought home what

the paleontologists at Stockholm recognized as

1. Leperditae in argillaceous schist of Devonian age

from Klaas Billen Bay. Some small fragments of placoderma-

tous fish-remains are also present.

2. Hstherie in a dark-coloured, micaceous, and carbonace-

ous shale (labelled ‘‘ Mimers dal” and ‘“‘ Mimers dal mid-

ten”) ; the greater part thinly laminated, with black Estherian

films crowded on the planes of bedding; and some pieces

more solid, rather lighter in colour. In these latter, which

are chiefly marked “ Mimers dal midten,” an occasional hard

carbonaceous nodule (coprolite) appears.

3. Accompanying the above there was a specimen of reddish

limestone (waterworn), labelled “ Liebde Bay, North-polar

Expedition, 1868,” which contains numerous Leperditic,

1. The Leperditice in the soft schist, or schistose mudstone,

from Klaas Billen Bay are very numerous (see Pl, IX.

figs. 1-8). They are all casts and impressions in the schist,

lying at various angles to the original bedding, ben crumpled

248 Prof. T. R. Jones on the

up, and nearly always either shortened or lengthened, as the

case may be, by the lateral pressure to which the rock has

been subjected. In some pieces of the schist the rough and

imperfect cleavage gives faces at an angle of about 50° with

the bedding.

The casts, however modified in shape, appear to be referable

to only one species of Leperditia. The original shape seems

to have been nearly oblong, with almost equally rounded

ends, equably convex in the middle, and broadly rimmed all

along the front, ventral, and hind margins. The ocular spot

and nuchal furrow are generally recognizable. The best pre-

served of the internal casts is 15 millim. long, and 10 millim.

high ; another is 20 millim. long, by more than 10 millim.

high (broken) ; and another 21 millim. long and 13 millim.

high. The relative convexity of these carapace-valves is

difficult to determine. ‘There is no trace of radiate or other

marking on the casts of the valves.

In the single hand-specimen of limestone from Liebde Bay,

Spitzbergen, there are several imbedded Leperditia, similar in

shape to the best of the foregoing from Klaas Billen Bay,

but not distorted by pressure. ‘Though ‘they retain their shape

they are, for the most part, too much imbedded to be fully

seen. ‘The best individual is shown in Pl. IX. fig. 9a. Itis

10 millim. long by 6 millim. high; and though smaller than

those in the schist, is probably of the same species. The

ocular tubercle is higher up in the antero-dorsal region, with

the nuchal furrow just behind it. Muscular spot not especi-

ally indicated. Sections of the carapace in the water-worn

block are shown in figs. 96 and 9c.

In outline this species from Spitzbergen somewhat resem-

bles Leperditia Nordenskjeldi, Fr. Schmidt (Mém. Acad.

Impér. Sc. St.-Pétersb, sér. 7, vol. xxxi. no, 5; Mise. Sila

ill. p. 25, pl. i. figs. 29-32); but it 1s more broadly oblong,

being relatively higher, more equally rounded at the ends, and

it has a broader marginal rim. As this last is very wide, the

species seems at first sight to belong to Lsochilina; but as

there is a slight inflection of the ventral edge of one valve

under that of the other, we must refer it to Leperditia. It may

be named Leperditia tsochilinotdes.

2. The Estherie in the carbonaceous shale from Mimers dal

are all crushed flat on the bed-planes, and are radiately crum-

pled by the minute folds of the depressed (formerly convex), —

thin, toughish valves. The black film retains, however, suf-

ficient indications of the concentric ridge-lines, and frequently

some trace of the interstitial sculpturing. In shape these

valves are nearly semicircular, but the curvature hasa general

Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 249

oblique direction backwards and downwards, making the ven-

tral region full behind. The umbo, or starting-point of the

concentric ridges, is just within the anterior third of the dorsal

region, and therefore at some distance from the antero-dorsal

angle. In these characters this Hstherta approaches such a

form as the small /. Forbesti figured in the Monogr. Foss.

Esth. pl. iv. fig. 10; but it does not exactly match any that I

know of. It is too sharp anteriorly, and too long and broad

from the front angle to the hinder ventral margin, for &.

tenella (ibid. pl. i. fig. 26), to which, though larger, it other-

wise bears some resemblance.

The ornament of the interspaces between the numerous

concentric lines of growth consists of very fine dots, or punc-

tation, like that in H. striata (abid. pl. 1. fig. 24) ; and, indeed,

that of 1. tenella is not very different (bed. pl. i. fig. 27, and

pl. v. fig. 7). This interesting paleeozoic Hstheria from Spitz-

bergen may well bear the name of its discoverer and be known

as 1. Nathorstt.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES VI. & IX.

Puate VI. Fossil Entomostraca from Siberia (Eastern Ural).

Fig. 1. Estheria minuta (Alberti), var. Karpinskiana, nov. a, left valve,

SANK was oth. Se A

magnified 7 diam.; 6, portion, magn. 50 diam. The dorsal line

should have been horizontal.

Fig. 2. Estheria striata (Minster), var. tenwipectoralis, nov., magn.

7 diam.

Fig. 3. Entomis gyrata (Richter). a, hollow impression of a valve,

magn. 20 diam.; 6, portion, magn. 50 diam.

Fig. 4. Entomis serratostriata (Sandberger). a, convex cast of left valve,

magn. 20 diam.; 6, portion, magn. 50 diam.

Fig. 5. The same. Convex cast of a small valve, magn. 20 diam.

Fig. 6. Primitia? Convex valve or cast, magn. 20 diam.

Fig. 7. The same (?). Convex valve or cast, magn, 20 diam.

PuaTE IX. Fossil Entomostraca from Spitzbergen. Figs. 1-8 from

Klaas Billen Bay.

Fig. 1. Leperditia tsochilinoides, nov. sp. Left valve, nat.size. This is one

of the best preserved in shape, but has probably been somewhat

narrowed in front by oblique pressure.

Fig. 2. The same. Obliquely squeezed ; right (?) valve, nat. size.

Fig. 3. The same. Much squeezed obliquely; right valve, nat. size.

Fig. 4. The same. Small left valve, narrowed by pressure, magn.

23 diam.

Fig. 5. The same. Left (?) valve, narrowed and crushed by oblique pres-

sure, nat. size.

Fig. 6. The same. Ina block, variously squeezed, nat. size.

Fig. 7. The same. Ina block, squeezed endwise &c., nat. size,

Fig. 8. The same. Hollow cast, with remnant of a valve, nat. size.

Fig. 9. The same. a, right valve, from Liebde Bay, magn. 24 diam. ; 6,

longitudinal section of a bivalved carapace, magn. 23 diam. ; ¢,

oblique transverse section near the end of another specimen,

magn. 23 diam.

Fig. 10. Estheria Nathorsti, noy. sp., from Mimers dal. a, right valve,

flattened, magn. 5 diam. ; 6, portion, magn. 50 diam,

250 Dr. R. von Lendenfeld on Guard-Polyps

XXX.—On Guard-Polyps and Urticating Cells.

By Dr. R. von LENDENFELD *.

I. The Guard- Animals of the Plumularide.

The Plumularide are ,distinguished, above all other Hy-

droids, by the fact that a great part, up to five sixths, of all

the animals of a colony are converted into guard-polyps with-

out stomachs. Busk Tt was the first who accurately described

tlre chitinous calices in which the armed animals are seated,

and directed attention to these structures, which he called

nematophores. Subsequently Allman} published some ob-

servations upon the contents of these nematophores, in which

he sometimes found urticating capsules, sometimes not. He

states that, leaving out of consideration the urticating capsules,

the whole contents consist of structureless protoplasm, which

emits long pseudopodia and retracts them again. Hincks §

confirms Allman’s statements, and carries the analogy of the

contents of the nematophores with Rhizopoda still further,

assuming, like Reichert, for the whole ectoderm of the Hy-

droida a Bathybius-like ground-mass in which urticating |

capsules are seated.

Although F. E. Schultze|/ as long ago as 1872 demonstrated

the cellular structure of the ectoderm of the Hydroida, it is

only quite recently, by the researches of Hamann J, that we

have attained to a more exact insight into the finer structural

characters of the guard-animals. Hamann explains the con- |

tents of the nematophore as a modified polyp, for which he

proposes the designation “‘ machopolyp.” 1 adopt this view,

and consider that the expression “‘ nematophore”’ should be

reserved for the chitinous envelope of the guard-polyp. |

Hamann has demonstrated muscle-cells in the greatly protru-

sible guard-polyps ; and there is no doubt that the movements

of the guard-polyp are in part effected by these muscles. I

say in part, because the parallel fibres, which he in one

bundle, can only effect the retraction of the guard-polyp,

while its protrusion is produced by other structures.

* Translated by W. 8. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘ Zeitschrift fiir wis-

senschaftliche Zoologie, Band xxxviil. pp. 855-370, The author’s third

communication “ Ueber Coelenteraten der Siidsee.”

+ Hunterian Lectures, 1857.

t Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. xiii, (1864) p. 203.

§ British Hydroid Zoophytes, p. xvii (note).

|| Cordylophora, p. 15.

§| Jenaische Zeitschrift fiir Naturwissenschaft, Bd. xv. p. 17.

and Urticating Cells. 251

The richness of the South-Australian shore-fauna in Plu-

mularide is extraordinary. I have seen about forty different

forms, the skeletons of which are in part already described.

I have examined most of them in the living state, and would

here communicate some observations which I have made

upon their guard-polyps.

Notwithstanding the extraordinary variety which we meet

with in their number and arrangement and in their form and

size, they can all be referred to three fundamental forms,

which often occur together upon the same stock :—

1. Guard-animals with urticating capsules. .

2. Guard-animals with adhesive cells.

3. Guard-animals with urticating capsules and adhesive

cells.

1. Guard-Animals with Urticating Capsules.

The guard-animals with urticating capsules occur chiefly

upon the Plumu/aria-like Hydroids; they agree with the

figure given by Hamann *.

The solid endodermal axis consists of elements like those

of the.tentacular axis, and extends to the middle of the guard-

animal. The endoderm of the branch upon which the guard-

polyp is seated passes directly into the endoderm of the latter.

The cells which form the inner lining of the ccenosarcal tube

of the branch are turbid and completely tilled with granules.

The nearest endodermal cells of the axis of the guard-animal

are also turbid and entirely filled with plasma. It is only at

some distance from the branch that the axial cells begin to

acquire more the form of chorda-cells, such as characterizes

the cells of the tentacular axis; but the endodermal cells of

the machopolyps, even in the distal part of the axis, are much

more turbid and rich in plasma than the corresponding struc-

tures in the tentacles. In the contracted state they are quite

opaque.

The ectoderm is highly developed, and consists of two

layers, an epithelial and a subepithelial layer. The surface-

cells appear cylindrical when the machopolyp is contracted ;

on the contrary, they are depressed and flat when the guard-

animal extends itself. These surface-cells are for the most

_ part entirely filled with plasma; they occur upon the whole

basal part of the guard-animal. Between them and the thin

supporting lamella, which is closely applied to the endodermal

cells, there is a layer of smooth muscular fibres, which do

* «Der Organismus der Hydroidpolypen,’ pl, xxv.

252 Dr. R. von Lendenfeld on Guard- Polyps

not belong to the surface-cells, but are decidedly subepithelial.

In isolation-preparations it is easy to detect the muscular cor-

puscles in the isolated fibrille ; they le between the centri-

petal ends of the surface-cells, and consequently may be

called interstitial cells.

The muscular fibres form a cylindrical tube by lying in a

parallel position upon the supporting lamella. When the

guard-polyp is contracted they he in a straight line and lon-

gitudinally. At the extremity of the endodermal axis the

muscular cylinder also terminates, and there are here in the

subepithelial layer from two to four fine large multipolar

ganglion-cells. In the superficial layer of the whole terminal

portion of the machopolyp we find large elongated urticating

capsules. Each urticating capsule is enclosed by a thin

plasma-envelope; the centrifugal end alone seems to be free.

In this plasma-envelope there is a flat nucleus. The enidocil

is short and forms an angle of 60° with the surface; it is

always situated opposite to the nucleus. Sometimes it is

slightly bent, and then the concave side is always turned

towards the urticating capsule.

The centripetal end of the plasma-envelope is drawn out

into a process which lies radially and always appears to be

straight. All these processes unite at the centrifugal ex-

tremity of the endodermal axis; therefore at the same place

where the ganglion-cells are situated. Further, there are

also in the terminal knob of the guard-animal radial mus-

cular fibres, which are sometimes closely applied to the

pedicles of the enidoblasts. Supporting cells with broad

centrifugal terminal lamella also occur. Some of the super-

ficial cells are remarkable for their slenderness, and may be

interpreted as sense-cells. I have not succeeded, however,

in detecting any connexion of these cells with the subepithelial

ganglion-cells, so that [ am not sure whether or not these

elements perform a tactile function.

The guard-polyps are capable of extraordinary extension

in length, which, however, takes place slowly, like the exten-

sion of the tentacles of Hydra, and never shows that precision

and rapidity of movement which characterize the solid ten-

tacles. ‘The retraction of the guard-animal takes place much

more quickly; it may be effected in half a second. The

movements of the extended guard-animal are inconsiderable

and really amoeboid.

Both the extension and contraction and the movements

which are performed in the extended state may be easily

recognized as the effects of two antagonists. Just as in the

tentacles, we have here to do with an elastic rod on all sides

and Urticating Cells. 253

of which longitudinal muscles are applied. That the exten-

sion does not take place so rapidly as in the tentacle is easily

explained by the fact that the axial cells of the guard-polyp

have not attained the same degree of differentiation as the

chorda-cells of the tentacular axis. This is certainly to be

accounted for by the fact that the tentacles are phylogeneti-

eally much older structures than the machopolyps, and con-

sequently their axial cells had a much longer time to adapt

themselves to their new purpose than the endodermal cells

of those polyps which became transformed into guard-animals.

If we start from a Protohydra with hollow tentacles and

consider its transformation into the guard-polyp of a Plumu-

larid, we meet with a gradual suppression of the gastral

space. First of all the tentacles become solid; then the sto-

machal walls grow together. Centralization of the gastral

space first of all in the person and then in the stock.

The machopolyps are certainly employed as defensive

weapons, as they do not retract themselves when the polyp-

stock is touched; on the contrary, they protrude themselves

from their chitinous calices when the branch upon which they

are seated is separated from the stock.

How far the guard-animals with urticating capsules in the

nematophores ot many Plumularie also act offensively I could

not ascertain; but these, as well as the machopolyps with

adhesive cells, hereafter to be described, may be employed in

the capture of prey. In all species of Plumularia that I have

investigated the urticating capsules at the centrifugal ex-

tremity of the guard-polyp remained always at the apex

of the animal, and consequently accompanied it in all its

movements. I must particularly insist upon this in opposi-

tion to Allman’s statement®*. Allman concludes, from his

observations upon certain Plumularide, that ‘ the clusters of

thread-cells, when they exist, remain quite stationary, being

never carried out with the sarcode in its pseudopodial pro-

cesses.”’ I think that J can demonstrate that this observation

relates to another fact than Allman supposes; and I am sure

that in all cases that I have observed, when urticating cap-

sules and no adhesive cells occurred upon the machopolyp, the

urticating capsules were never left behind in the movements of

the animal.

2. Guard-Animals with Adhesive Cells.

The animals which belong to this category occur prin-

cipally in those nematophores of the species ot Aglaophenia

* ‘ Monograph of the Gymnoblastic Hydroids, vol. i. p. 116.

254 Dr. R. von Lendenteld on Guard-Polyps

which are placed in front of the nutritive animals. Further,

they may sometimes occur in the genus Antennularia. In

other Plumularide, which, on account of their peculiar gono-

phores, will necessitate the establishment of a new genus, I

have observed such machopolyps together with guard-animals

bearing urticating capsules. ‘They do not differ essentially in

their structure from those above described. The greatest

difference is that ¢nstead of urticating capsules they possess

adhesive granules which are exactly similarly formed to the

corresponding elements in the tentacles of the Ctenophora.

The adhesive animals, as I will briefly designate these

machopolyps, are distinguished by their extraordinary mobi-

lity. If an occasional change of form is possible to the

urticating guard-animals, the adhesive animals can entirely

draw themselves out into long fine threads, at the extremity

of which there is then a bulbous dilatation, which on its part

is capable of considerable change of form.

In these guard-animals we can detect surface-cells, sub-

epithelial muscles and ganglia, the supporting lamella, and

endodermal axis. ‘The thickened terminal part consists of

pyramidal cells radially arranged, all, or the greater part of

which, produce adhesive granules. Thus we find in each of

them a rounded drop of asirongly refractive substance ; and by

this means these cells acquire exactly the appearance of gland-

cells. The drop originates at the narrowed centripetal end as

a small vacuole, and migrates during its growth towards the

widened centrifugal end of the cell. The perfect adhesive

granule attains nearly the diameter of the free surface of its

formative cell and is globular; it projects pretty far above

the surface of the terminal enlargement of the guard-animal.

Such mature adhesive granules generally occur in considerable

number; but they do not stand so close together as on the

surface of the prehensile apparatus of the Ctenophora, and

never show that regular arrangement which Chun figures* in

Euplocamis stationis. The great similarity between our

guard-polyps and the prehensile filaments of the Ctenophora

strikes one at once. ‘I'he difference consists essentially onl

in the fact that the filaments themselves in the Plumularide

are not spirally rolled up. We shall revert further on to the

analogy of these weapons. Allman f figures an Antennularéa

the guard-animals of which are branched. In those Australian

species of that genus which contain only machopolyps with

adhesive cells, 1 have only met with ramifications when cer-

* ‘Die Ctenophoren des Golfes von Neapel,’ pl. xviii. fig. 11.

+ ‘A Monograph of the Gymnoblastic Hydroids, vol. i. p. 116,

and Urticating Cells. 255

tain adhesive granules remained adherent to any object which

could not be drawn nearer, and then, during the contraction

of the guard-animal, the thickened terminal part was much

drawn out in length. If then another part of it adhered to

some other object and the machopolyp contracted still further,

it sometimes acquired, in a certain sense, a ramified form.

These guard-polyps are exclusively offensive in their

action. If the polyp-stock be disturbed they retract them-

selves into their chitinous calices. I can completely confirm

Allman’s statement*, that the “ pseudopodium-like processes”

are visible only on pertectly fresh stocks, as regards the adhe-

sive polyps; and I believe that the statements of Allman and

Hincks relate principally to these adhesive polyps. We shall

recur to their function further on.

3. Guard-Animals with Urticating Capsules and Adhesive

Cells.

These machopolyps are found exclusively in the genus

Aglaophenia; and here they occur in those nematophores

which are placed behind the nutritive animals and project

beyond these. I call them paired superior guard-animals.

For our investigation some species of Aglaophenia with

large superior guard-animals which are abundant here (Mel-

bourne) are admirably adapted. The nematophores which

contain these machopolyps have, besides the circular orifice

at the extremity, also an oval aperture at the side; this is

placed towards the nutritive animal, at the spot where the

chitinous calice of the nutritive animal terminates, on the

concave anterior side of the nematophore which is turned

towards the nutritive polyp. In these nematophores are

seated guard-polyps which are composed of two parts. In

the distal extremity, close under the terminal orifice, there are

urticating capsules; while from the proximal aperture a fila-

ment can be extended, at the extremity of which there is

an adhesive knob. ‘The distal part resembles an animal armed

with urticating capsules, while the proximal part is to be

compared to an adhesive animal.

Of the former, however, only that part is developed which

represents the distal part of an animal armed with urticating

capsules, such as 1 have described above. ‘There is no endo-

dermal cellular axis, and therefore also no supporting lamella.

But ganglion cells occur in the subepithelial layer; and be-

tween the cnidoblasts there are radial muscles and supporting

* Loe. Cty Pp: LID.

256 Dr. R. von Lendenfeld on Guara-Polyps

cells, and perhaps also sense-cells. This part of the guard-

animal, the muscular stem being deficient, 1s not very mobile,

and it is protruded only for a short distance from the terminal

orifice of the nematophore. In the basal part of the nemato-

phore there is a second head, which exactly resembles an ad-

hesive polyp; its thickened extremity can be protruded far

out of the inferior aperture of the nematophore, and it pos-

sesses an endodermal axis.

Although at the first glance the whole rather gives us the

impression that we have to do here with two modified polyps,

the simple undivided endodermal axis indicates that the whole

is homologous with a single polyp. If we trace the develop-

ment of these guard-animals we see distinctly that both pieces

are parts of an originally simple armed polyp. ‘Thus the end

of the branch always forms a pair of guard-polyps; long

before the nutritive animals in front of hese have fecout da

veloped, the next pair of machopolyps sprouts. At the ends

of the branches of young stocks we can find all stages ; and in

this way it is easy to trace the development.

Young guard-polyps of this kind are inserted in chitinous

calices, ie hinder margin of which is somewhat higher than

the Bicnor margin ; ‘they are completely filled with urti-

cating capsules oad tolerably mobile, so that they can stretch

forth ane mitrailleuse-like heads Os a considerable distance.

While no chitine is secreted at the anterior side, the hinder

margin grows very rapidly. In this way the nematophore ac-

quires ie form of a very obliquely truncated straight circular

cylinder. ‘Then the chitine secretion ceases at ans lower part

of the elliptical margin, while the uppermost part grows in all

(o)

directions, and its eAareine finally unite again into a tube,

This tube then elongates, and in some Aglaophenice bends

outwards in a hook-like form.

In some instances the formation of two apertures is not

attained; and then the nematophores possess a wider or nar-

rower cleft, which unites the two apertures. ‘This applies

without exception (?) to those nematophores which are closely

applied to the upper surface of the nutritive animal in the

plane of symmetry of the branch, the unpaired, superior macho-

polyps.

Even when the two apertures are separ ated, when a nutri-

tive polyp is mm course of formation in fan of the nemato-

phore, and the buds of the next pair of guard-animals are

already indicated, no adhesive cells are yet to be met, with;

there is rather a urticating Meg behind each aperture.

It is only subsequently that small drops begin to appear in

the supporting cells between the oneness of the lower

and Urticating Cells. 257

battery ; and these in older guard-animals attain the form and

size of adhesive granules. At the same time the number of

enidoblasts diminishes, the urticating capsules falling out and

the plasma-envelopes degenerating. Frequently, however, a

few urticating capsules are found even later in the head of

the prehensile filament, and these are not thrown off until

very late. In the older parts of the stock they never occur.

Allman states* that in some Plumularide, and especially in

Antennularia, the nematophore is divided into two stories by

a diaphragm. I can confirm this statement for the Australian

Antennulartie ; and add that in many (perhaps all?) species of

Aglaophenia also such a diaphragm is more or less developed

in the paired superior nematophores.

The division of the body of the nutritive polyps of the

Plumularide into an oral and an aboral half, which is caused

by a considerable circular constriction in the middle of its

length, has already been described by Hamannt. His state-

ments apply also to the Australian species. ‘he division of

the large guard-polyps into a distal defensive and a proximal

offensive half seems to me to indicate that in this case the

centripetal part is homologous with the aboral and the centri-

fugal with the oral part of the nutritive animal.

I have frequently had the opportunity of tracing in the

living animal the mode of action of the armed animal, and

will here give the most important points. The Aglaophenicee

live principally upon zoée and other larve. If a zoéa comes

in contact with a tentacle it is struck by several cnidocils and

makes vehement movements in order to escape. ‘These efforts,

however, are fruitless, which I would ascribe to a numbing

action of the nettling threads. As soon as the zoéa has

touched the tentacle, all the prehensile threads (there are five

of them) belonging to the particular polyp bend and stretch

themselves towards the spot. Usually the zoéa at the same

time touches the adhesive head of one or other of the prehen-

sile threads and adheres to it firmly. While the prey-loaded

filament rapidly shortens, the zoéa, which makes very strenu-

ous movements, soon sticks to several prehensile filaments,

which shorten as soon as they are touched. The zoéa is

quickly so surrounded that it can no longer move. In this

state it gets again within reach of the tentacles. ‘The separa-

tion from the head of the prehensile filament is effected by

the casting off of the adhesive granules. Whether a poison-

ous action is to be ascribed to the adhesive granules also

* ‘Monograph of the Gymnoblastic Hydroids,’ vol. i. p. 28.

+ Jenaische Zeitschrift &c. Bd. xv. p. 57.

258 Dr. R. von Lendenfeld on Guard-Polyps

cannot be determined. I have never observed a case in which

a zoéa which had once been caught freed itself again.

(Juite another picture is presented when a larger animal,

such as an Annelid, accidentally touches a tentacle. Imme-

diately all the prehensile filaments are withdrawn; but, on

the other hand, the urticating batteries at the terminal ends of |

the large nematophores are projected far out; the tentacles

also.are concealed ; so that a comparison with the formation

of a square to resist an attack of cavalry is certainly appro-

riate.

I have indicated above that Allman’s statement that the

urticating capsules were not pushed forth with the other parts

of the armed animal relates to a particular condition. I

believe that he must have observed composite guard-animals

in which the urticating capsules cannot indeed be protruded

with the prehensile filaments, but certainly by themselves.

As a matter of course, J am far from assuming any genetic

connexion between those Ctenophora which possess prehensile

filaments and the Plumularide; but nevertheless I believe

that, by the discovery of adhesive granules in Hydroids, some

light is thrown upon the corresponding and hitherto isolated

structures among the Ctenophora. As we see in the Plumu-

laridee that in the development of the composite guard-polyps

urticating capsules jist appear, and these are then gradually

replaced “by adhesive granules, we may well assume that the

adhesive granules represent phylog enetically the younger

structures. The same causes must produce the same effects ;

and thus, in the Plumularide as in the Ctenophora, selection

may very well have converted the urticating capsules in part

into adhesive granules: we have before us analogous struc-

tures.

Chun* and, subsequently, Claust have asserted the homo-

logy of urtieating capsules and adhesive granules; and I

believe that, by the observations above described, this inter-

pretation will be completely established as correct.

If we inquire, further, to what tissue the cells in which the

adhesive granules originate are to be ascribed, their great re-

semblance to dermal glands, such as we know in various

Coelenterata, must immediately strike one. In fact I do not

hesitate to refer them to the unicellular skin-glands, and regard

the adhesive granule, which, like the urticating capsules, only

-) . .

acts once and then disappears, as their secretion.

* Zoolog. Anzeiger, Bd. i. p. 50.

+ ‘Grundziige der Zoologie,’ p. 297, note.

and Urticating Cells. 259

II. On Urticating Cells in the Gelatinous Mass of the Disk of

Crambessa mosaica.

During the histological investigation of this magnificent

Rhizostomatous Medusa, which sometimes occurs in enormous

swarms, I came upon some peculiar structures which occur in

the gelatinous mass of the disk.

This gelatinous mass is pretty tough, and, in its firm struc-

ture, resembles the jelly of Cyanea Annaskala*, which has

been fully described by me. Only here, in accordance with

the firmer consistency, the fibrillee lie much closer together

than in Cyanea. The increase in number affects chiefly the

smooth fibrille. Granular fibres occur particularly well deve-

loped beneath the olfactory pit. Here they run chiefly verti-

eally, and therefore pass through the disk-jelly transversely.

Notwithstanding the probability raised by their position that

we have here to do with nerve-fibres which unite the sense-

epithelia of the oral and aboral surfaces of the disk, I am

not inclined to regard them with any certainty as nerves, as,

in spite of all my endeavours, I have not succeeded in detect-

ing any direct connexion with them of the nerve-fibres which

spread under the sense-epithelia.

Some of the granular fibres of the jelly beneath the olfac-

tory pit become thickened at certain points, and contain large,

long, and narrow urticating capsules, slightly curved into a

sabre-like form. In the enlargement of the granular fibre, in

which the urticating capsule les, a nucleus may always be

- detected ; and consequently the whole is probably to be inter-

preted as a cnidoblast. I found some of the capsules dis-

charged ; and in these cases the nettling thread was repeatedly

bent and imbedded in the granular plasma which surrounds

the capsule.

The consistency of the jelly is such that sections may be

made through it without first hardening it. I was thus en-

abled to observe these urticating capsules in the living state.

By the addition of acetic acid they may be at once caused to

discharge, but the thread remains always in the plasma and

never issues into the jelly. This seems to indicate that

between the jelly and the cnidoblast there is a firm separating

layer, which, however, is not optically perceptible. As with

the tentacles of Cyanea Annaskala (/. c.), I have tried here

also whether the urticating capsules discharge themselves

when no direct irritation affects them, in order to ascertain

whether a nervous action has anything to do with the discharge

* Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxviil. p. 472.

260 Dr. R. von Lendenfeld on Guard-Polyps

of the capsules. In the present case this test succeeds very

easily. When a transverse section through the margin of the

umbrella under the olfactory pit is brought under the covering-

glass in such a manner that the olfactory pit shows freely,

and then its sense-epithelium is touched with acetic acid, the

urticating capsules go off one after the other, those first which

lie nearest to the irritated spot.

If it is thus rendered probable that the granular threads

with which the cnidoblasts are certainly, and the irritated

sense-epithelium perhaps, in continuity, this mode of discharge

of the urticating capsules leads us to consider how the capsule

is burst. We have here no mechanically acting cnidocil ; and

therefore cannot regard a pressure exerted from the sides upon

the cnidoblast as the cause of the rupture. It seems to me

rather to follow necessarily from the state of matters described

that the irritation is transferred through the fibre to the plasma

of the enidoblast, and causes this to contract; for it is pro-

bably a fundamental property of still undifferentiated plasma

to contract upon irritation. The plasma of the cnidoblast,

however, has the form of a closed tube; and the uniform con-

traction of such a tube will have as its consequence a pre-

ponderance of the pressure on the sides of the elongated

capsule, by which the nettling thread will then be pressed

forth.

These urticating capsules cccur exclusively in that part of

the disk which, as the so-called covering lamina, closes from

above the cavity in which the marginal corpuscle lies. At

any rate they serve as defensive weapons for the protection of

the marginal corpuscles, and are consequently analogous to that

urticating pad which runs above the nervous ring of the

Craspedota.

Ill. On Urticaiing Cells.

The valuable investigations of Hamann * have essentially

advanced our knowledge of these peculiar microscopic

weapons. Wright t, the discoverer of the palpocils of Syn-

coryne, Without further consideration ascribed to the enidocils

the function of tactile sete; but Schultze ft raised doubts as

to this interpretation, and Hamann now seeks to prove that

in the urticating cells we have not to do with sense-cells. I

believe that all zoologists will probably adopt this opinion.

Hamann endeavours to prove that the centripetal process

* Jenaische Zeitschrift, Bd. xv., “ Ueber Nesselkapselzellen.”

+ Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edinb. vol. i. p, 541.

¢ ‘Cordylophora,’ p. 22.

and Urticating Cells. 261

which Schultze (/. c.) discovered and all later observers have

also found on the cnidoblasts is nothing but a pedicle which

stands in direct connexion with the supporting lamella and

represents a product of metamorphosis of a part of the plasma

of that cell which also produced the urticating capsule in its

interior. He states that this pedicle possesses the same

optical and chemical properties as the supporting lamella.

From his careful observations, extended over all groups of

the Ccelenterata, he draws the conclusion that in a/J Cnidaria

the process has only a supporting function. ‘To this induc-

tion, as such, of course no certainty can be ascribed, and it is

in fact not correct.

Tn isolation-preparations of Cyanea Annaskala* I have

often seen cnidoblasts the centripetal processes of which were

in connexion with ganglion-cells of the subepithelial layer.

Leaving this out of consideration, these processes are not

hyaline, but granular, and not different from that part of the

plasma which surrounds the urticating capsule and lies in the

neighbourhood of the nucleus. Besides these urticating cap-

sules, I have also described smaller ones in which I could

detect no processes, and the discharge of which does not

depend, like that of the large ones, upon the will of the ani-

mal. Jyregard it as probable that these in reality possess

such pedicles as Hamann describes, but which escaped me

owing to their fineness. Thus I have found (/. ¢.) that the

surface of the jelly beneath the urticating warts shows asperi-

ties. These asperities resemble sharp-angled sea-waves ; and

it is quite possible that fine threads issue from the projecting

points and bear the small urticating capsules at their distal

ends.

With regard to the pedicles of the urticating capsules of a

Syncoryne which I have carefully investigated, and which is

characterized by its quadriradiate structure, I can completely

confirm Hamann’s statements. The pedicle is perfectly

hyaline and enlarged in a cup-like form at the distal extre-

mity.

It is otherwise with the urticating capsules of Meduse and

Actiniz ; their processes are granular, and, as regards their

substance, essentially different from the jelly and the sup-

porting lamella. ‘They are always soft, generally curved, and

exactly resemble plasma-cords. It can easily be shown that,

just as in the tentacles of Cyanea, so also in the Actinie the

discharge of the urticating capsules is dependent on the will

of the animal, so that we must assume that some mechanism

* Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. Bd, xxxvii. p. 480.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 19

262 Dr. R. von Lendenfeld on Guard-Polyps

or other exists in these animals which is in connexion with

the nervous system of the animal, and the action of which —

consists in its exerting, under certain conditions, a pressure —

upon the urticating capsule. Such a mechanism might exist —

either within the enidoblast or outside it.

T believe that the former is the case, and support my

opinion upon three facts.

In the first place we have before us in the cnidocil a struc- —

ture which is evidently connected with the mechanism of dis-

charge, just in the same way as the nervous system of the —

animal, because, under certain conditions, a touching of the —

enidocil suffices to burst the capsules, just like an impulse of

the will of the animal. But it is precisely the plasma-enve-

lope of the urticating capsule in which both the enidocil and

the pedicle open, and thus at this place alone we shall pro-

bably have to seek the mechanism which can be set in motion

from both sides. 4

It is indeed not impossible that the irritation of the enidocil —

in fact comes as sensation to the knowledge of the subepi-

thelial ganglion-cells, and that then only is some other

mechanism for the discharge of the urticating capsules set —

in motion from this point. But this appears to me extremely —

improbable.

In the second place the urticating capsules in the disk of

Crambessa mosaica discharge themselves upon nervous irri-

tation; and it can scarcely be supposed that the irritations

cause the contraction of the jelly in the vicinity of the enido- —

blasts, but rather that they superinduce a discharging action in ©

the plasma of the cnidoblasts itself.

Thirdly, we must here cite the noteworthy discovery of —

Chun *, who has detected in the plasma-envelope of the urti- —

cating capsules of Physalia a network of contractile fibres, by

the contraction of which a rupture of the capsule can be easily —

effected. Here, in an animal celebrated for its urticating

qualities, we find the plasma of the cnidoblasts of a higher —

erade; it has already secreted muscular fibres.

Considering these points, I would assume the contraction of ©

the plasma-envelope to be the cause of the discharge of the

urticating capsules, and not a contraction of the pedicle. |

I have postponed the discussion of the centripetal extre=

mities of the pedicles of the urticating capsules of the guard-—

animals described in § I. until now, because it may be of ©

more general importance. Although I am not sure, the im-_

pression has been made upon me that the pedicles, as stated

* Zoologischer Anzeiger, Bd. iv. p. 646.

and Uriicating Cells. 263

by Hamann, unite with the supporting lamella, and_ that

therefore only a supporting function is to be ascribed to them,

but that jiner threads from the multipolar ganglion-cells run

up on these pedicles and place themselves in connexion with

the plasma of the cnidoblast.

If we compare the morphological characters of the urticating

cells with the observation of living animals in the aquarium,

we shall be struck especially by one peculiarity of the areni-

colous Actiniw; although hundreds of capsules discharge

themselves when a digestible body touches the cnidocils, not

fo)

a single one is discharged when sand falls upon them. If a

freshly torn-off tentacle is placed under the microscope and

there are many small animals in the water, we can easily ob-

serve how every contact cf an animal with the surface of the

tentacle is accompanied by a salvo of nettling threads, while

not a single one can be coaxed forth if a rapid current 1s pro-

duced, and sand-grains, fragments of covering-glass, and the

like are introduced under the cover.

In the Actinie therefore it seems to be dependent on the

will of the animal whether the touching of the enidocil shall

or shall not be followed by a discharge. If this phenomenon

be considered in connexion with the fact that urticating cap-

sules are never discharged when the animal retracts its ten-

tacles, when the pressure in the vicinity of the cnidoblasts is

heightened by muscular contraction, and the enidocils touch

other bodies, [ think I am justified in regarding the following

rocess of discharge of the urticating capsules as the most

probable :—There exists a continuous connexion between the

nervous system and the plasma-mantle of the urticating capsule.

The urticating capsule is ruptured by the pressure which the

plasma-mantle exerts upon it *. In Cyanea Annaskala there

is added to this a stellule which breaks through the membrane of

the distal pole. In Physalia the plasma has already separated

muscular fibres. The contraction of the plasma-mantle is tn-

duced by an excitation proceeding either from the cnidocil or

from the nervous system. Further, however, a preventive ex-

citement may tssue from the nervous system, which paralyzes

the cnidocil—excitation which, under ordinary circumstances,

would burst the capsule. The nervous system can therefore

take on the function of a “ preventive centre,” while the dis-

charge by the cnidocil-excitement is to be compared to a “ reflex

movement.” Llere therefore we already see the commencement

of that reciprocation of reflex and preventive action to which

modern psychology ascribes such great importance.

* In this I find myself in agreement with Chun (/. c.),

264 M. G. Lunel on Commensalism of a

If we now consider the urticating cells we shall find that

they may be compared both with the epithelial muscular cells

and with the dermal gland-cells. Certainly in all cases, with

the exception of Physalia, their glandular nature comes most

prominently forward, for we have a plasma-derivative which

is thrown off outwards, and consequently may be regarded as

a secretion, while usually there is no contractile plasma-

derivative ; and we are not justified in speaking of muscles

when we describe a structure which certainly contracts on

irritation, but in which two kinds of substance are not recog-

nizable, and in which therefore no profound division of labour

has taken place in a contractile and a plasmatic part.

Independently of this, however, the double irritability of

the cnidoblasts is in favour of the view that there may be

“neuromuscular cells”? which occur together with sense-

organs and ganglion-cells, a view which has been opposed by

Claus, the brothers Hertwig, and myself. But the cnidoblasts

are such peculiar structures that we can scarcely draw any

conclusion from them as to epithelial muscular cells, so that

the neuromuscular theory can hardly be supported by them.

The glandular nature of the cnidoblasts becomes particularly

probable if we accept the homology between adhesive granules

and urticating capsules; and I would therefore regard the

cnidoblasts as unicellular dermal glands.

XXXIJI.—On a Case of Commensalism of a Caranx and a

Crambessa. By M. Goprerroy Lunet *.

THE case which has furnished me with the subject of the

present memoir relates to animals belonging to very different

classes, namely Fishes and Meduse. Numerous memoirs,

the enumeration of which would be out of place here, have

been published by the older and more recent naturalists upon

the organization and anatomy, or upon the development or the

zoclogical characters of the animals of the latter class. I shall

therefore confine myself to referring, at least in part, to what

has been said upon their mode of alimentation.

The Meduse feed upon small naked pelagic animals, and

even, according to some authors, upon small fishes, which ‘they

* Translated by W. 8. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘ Bibliothéque Univer-

selle,’ période 3, tome x., Archives des Sciences, p. 271, September 15,

1885.

Caranx and a Crambessa. 265

seize and draw towards the mouth by means of their tentacles,

their arms, and the urticating organs with which these are

armed. This is what Spallanzani* supposed, he having

seen a small fish adhering to one of the appendages of a

Medusa which he had just captured. Miiller , Otho Fabri-

cius {, Dicquemare §, and Bosc || state that they had seen

Meduse digest fishes. According to Péron and Lesueur |]

the Meduse make their regular prey of fishes from 12 to 15

centimetres long; and although their stomachs appear inca-

pable of having any kind of action upon those animals, the

latter were digested in a few moments. Gaede ** asserts

that he found small fishes in the stomachs of Meduse that he

dissected. Hysenhardt and Chamisso{} have also stated that

they several times met with the heads and remains of fishes,

which had apparently been digested, in the stomachs of

Medusz, Professor de Blainville {{ says that he had himself

sometimes found small fishes in A’quoree and even in Rhizo-

stomes ; but he questions whether these small fishes had really

been captured by the Acalephs, or whether they did not oceur

by accident where they were found. Cuvier was of the latter

opinion, at any rate with regard to the Rhizostomes, having

ascertained that those animals draw up their nourishment

by a kind of suckers. Quoy and Gaimard §§, referring to the

authors above cited, who declared that they had seen Medusze

digest fishes, think themselves able to assert that so compli-

cated a phenomenon of digestion is perfectly impossible in the

case of some species which are destitute of suitable organs for

effecting it. In support of their assertion, and as furnishing

an indisputable proof of it, these naturalists cite the capture

made by them of a new species of Dianea in the Mediter-

ranean, near the coast of Valencia and the Balearic Islands.

This Medusa, the structure of which did not differ at all

from that of the other Radiaria of the same genus, presented

no aperture which could enable it to allow the entrance of any

substance of appreciable bulk. As to the figure given by

Miller, and reproduced by other authors, of a Medusa swal-

lowing a fish, Quoy and Gaimard say that it proves nothing,

for, as Cuvier had pointed out, this fish could very easily have

* Opuscoli di fisica animale e vegetabile, 1776.

t+ Zoologia Danica, 1776-89. { Fauna Greenlandica, 1780,

§ Phil. Trans. and ‘ London Physical Journal.’

|| Histoire naturelle des Vers, 1802-15.

q Annales du Muséum, 1809, tome xiv. p. 325.

** Beitrage zur Anatomie und Physiologie der Medusen, 1816.

tt Acta Acad. Leopold. Nat. Cur. 1821, vol. x. part 2.

tt Dict. des Sci. Nat. 1825, tome xxix. pp. 389 et segq.

§§ Voyage de l’Uranie, 1824, Zoologie, pp. 559 et seq.

266 M. G. Lunel on Commensalism of a

introduced itself through an aperture which is alinost always

gaping, and which offers but little resistance. ;

According to Lesson * the prey of the Medusee consists of

small fishes &e., which they stupefy by a liquid which is

caustic as regards this prey, but which often has no action

upon man, although certain species are truly urticant when

touched. The same author says that he had often seen the

flesh of tolerably robust fishes absorbed by the parts of the

Medusa which pressed against the scales, displacing them,

and by their contact decomposing the fleshy matter mto a

sort of rosy sirupous liquid. Lastly this author adds that the

wide inferior apertures to which Péron gave the name of

cavités stomacales, while Lamarck, Cuvier, and De Blainviile

called them mouths, serve the Meduse to swallow their

prey.

In 1848, being on the beach of Maguelonne, near Mont-

pellier, at the moment when the fishermen had brought in

their net with several large Rhizostomes, I observed in the

interior of one of these Medusz a fish nearly as long as my

finger, which still showed some signs of life and was in a per-

fect state of preservation. I could not, however, recognize

the species, nor can I say in what cavity of the Medusa the

fish was lodged. I may add that the fishermen greatly dread

the corrosive action of the Medusee upon their nets.

The Meduse are not edible, and only serve as food to the

Actinie, which seize them in passing by means of their ten-

tacles. Whales are said to consume the small species in

great quantities, engulfing them in their enormous mouths

with other animals of different types which abound in the seas

frequented by these great Cetaceans.

Fishes have sometimes been observed swimming around

Meduse and apparently pursuing them, which has led to the

belief that these Vertebrata followed the Meduse in order to

feed upon them. Professor Cocco t was the first to make

known a Mediterranean fish which, towards the end of the

year 1834, appeared wheeling round a quantity of Medusa,

which in that year swarmed in the neighbourhood of Messina.

The fact was inquired into soon afterwards by the same pro-

fessor, who, from further observations, thought himself justi-

fied in giving this fish the specific name of medusophagus, or

eater of Medusc, on account of the avidity which it showed,

according to him, in feeding upon the filiform tentacles of

these Sea-Nettles, and the generic name of Schedophilus,

which signifies lover of the shade. Headds that some Sicilian

* Hist. Nat.des Zoophytes Acaléphes, 1843, p. 162.

+ Giorn. Innom. Mess. ann, iii. no. 7, p. 59.

Caranx and a Crambessa. 267

fishermen called it Pisci d’ Umbra, while others named it

Pisci Purcu, or pigfish.

_ Dr. Albert Giinther* has described and given a coloured

figure of a Schedophilus medusophagus preserved in spirit,

which he received, in May 1882, from his friend Mr. G.

Douglas Ogilby with the following notes :—

“'The fish was obtained during the second week of August

1878, in a salmon-net, at Portrush, co. Antrim, and came at

once into my hands, none of the fishermen engaged in the

fishery having previously met with any thing similar to it,

It was the most delicate adult fish [ ever handled—so much so

that, within twenty-four hours of its capture, the skin of the

belly with the intestines fell off when it was lifted, and it felt

in the hand quite soft and boneless. Its stomach contained

herring-fry. [ may mention that a few days subsequently to

the above date I got a fine specimen of a Tunny, also at Port-

rush.” Dr. Giinther says that the fish obtained by Mr.

Ogilby was a fine example of Schedophilus medusophagus, a

genus which had not previously been met with near the

British coast. He adds, “ Originally described from speci-

mens obtained in the Mediterranean, the species was after-

wards found in the open Atlantic J, and quite recently in the

South Seat near Samoa. It is evidently a pelagic form

which, at least in the adult state, descends to some depth.

The want of firmness in the tissues, well described by Mr.

Ogilby, seems clearly to indicate it as a deep-sea fish. But

we have no evidence as to the exact depth to which it ma

descend, which probably does not exceed a hundred fathoms.

‘¢ As in other deep-sea fishes, the young of this species are

more frequently found near the surface than the adult, which

are very rare. They accompany floating objects, chiefly for

real or fancied protection, or for the sake of animalcules

which congregate round every object floating on the surface of

the sea; this is what induces these little fish to follow Me-

dusee. The idea expressed by the specific name of our fish,

viz. that it follows Meduse in order to feed on them, cannot

be correct, as the fish could draw but little nourishment from

those animals.” Lastly, according to Dr. Albert Giinther,

“The specimen obtained by Mr. Ogilby probably followed

one of the shoals of fry of Clupeoids which annually travel

_ from the open sea towards our coasts, and are followed by a

number of southern fish which prey upon them and in their

* Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond. vol. xi. p. 228, pl. xlvii.

+ Giinther, Catal. of Fish. ii. p. 412; Lutken, Vid, Selsk, Skr, 1880,

. 525.

4 { Giinther, Fische d. Siidsee, p. 149.

268 M. G. Lunel on Commensalism of a

turn are pursued by larger pelagic fishes, such as Tunnies

and other Scombroids.”

Prof. H. Fol has given to the Museum of Geneva two indi-

viduals, one of them very young, of Schedophilus meduso-

phagus, which he collected in the Bay of Messina at the time

when he was devoting himself to the study of the lower animals

of the Mediterranean. This naturalist has also seen these

fishes swimming about Meduse; but he has never observed

that this was for the purpose of feeding upon them, nor did

he see the Meduse prey upon the fishes. Dr. Fol therefore

does not believe that the Medusz could eat fishes, however

small: these Acalephe, whose organization is so simple and

so feeble, do not possess digestive organs powerful enough to

digest a prey so firm. The Actinia even, in which the tissues

and the organs of digestion are better formed and developed

than in the Medusaria, often only partially digest the small

fishes and other little animals which they may capture, and

reject the parts which are somewhat hard.

The following observations may furnish, at the same time,

some interesting data as to the habits of certain species of

fishes, and an explanation, perhaps more conclusive than that

which has hitherto been given, of their manceuvres with re-

spect to the Meduse.

In a consignment of objects from the Mauritius sent to the

Museum of Geneva by M. de Robillard, in May 1882, there

were united and preserved in spirit a Carana melampygus, C.

& V.*, and a Crambessa palmipes, Hiick.t. The former of

these animals was fixed by the greater part of its body in the

apertures formed by the four columns which unite the stomach

to the umbrella in the latter, and are traversed by canals

serving to establish a communication between the stomachal

cavity and the rest of the gastrovascular system .

All the hypotheses which tend to explain the association of

fishes and Meduse by assuming that one of these animals

seeks the other as prey and for food are evidently inadmis-

sible in the case now before us; for the Medusa belongs to

the family Rhizostomez, and consequently has no buccal

aperture properly SO called, but only a series of microscopic

pores which enable it to absorb food only in a state of extreme

* Hist. Nat. des Poissons, 1833, tome ix. p. 116.

+ System der Medusen, 1880, Bd. i. 2nd part, p. 620,

¢ Iam indebted to the kindness of Dr. H. Fol for the determination of

this Medusa, at least so far as he could make it with certainty, for the

yery indifferent state of preservation of the specimen did not enable him to

count the lebules of the margin of the umbrella, which are no longer

visible. I may add that Hackel described Crambessa palmipes from

specimens coming from the northern coast of Australia.

Caranx and a Crambessa. 269

division ; and, on the other hand, the fish only lodges itself

in a natural cavity of the Medusa—a cavity which has nothing

to do with the digestive or gastrovascular system. This

cavity is widened by the prolonged use which the fish has

made of it, and nevertheless the Crambessa is perfectly unin-

jured—an evident proof that the fish regards its associate as a

place of refuge and not as a prey.

Surprised at the singularity of this fact, I wrote to M. de

Robillard to ask him for some details upon the subject. The

following is the reply that I received from him :—‘* The facts

to which I called your attention with regard to the little fish

which follows the anemone and constantly enters into it with-

out quitting it is perfectly correct ; the fisherman who brought

them to me captured them together. I can personally certify

the fact. It is some years since, being on the quay of our

port, I observed the same thing ; it was also the same species

of fish as that which I sent to you which entered into the

anemone and issued from it ; and as this took place at about

6 inches under water, it was very easy to observe what went

on. The fish was alone, there were no others. What ex-

planation is to be given of this phenomenon? {Is it that the

fish finds something to eat in the anemone which induces it

to pursue and penetrate into it? I cannot say: the anemone,

although receiving the fish, is alive, and one sees it move.

You should verify the interior of the anemone to see that nothing

has been destroyed by the fish.”

Lastly, having requested M. de Robillard to endeavour to

procure for me, if possible, some specimens of the two animals

in question, I received from him, while I was engaged in

preparing these notes, a letter, dated July 15, 1883, announ-

cing a fresh consignment of objects for the Museum, and

further a tin box containing two Medusz, each with its little

fish; he had received them in sea-water, the fishes and

Meduse all living. I do not know how it came about that,

unfortunately, all the objects announced were in the case ex-

cept the box with the Meduse ; I suppose that M. de Robil-

lard forgot to put them in.

Leaving on one side, then, all the hypotheses hitherto put

forward about Medusz eating small fishes and small fishes

eating Meduse, I arrive at the following conclusion, corrobo-

rated by the fact which I have pointed out, namely, that there

are certain species of fish of which the adults live at more or

less considerable depths, and of which the young, compelled

either by some undetermined peculiarity of their organization

or by the necessity of seeking food better suited to their age,

come up to seek certain Medusz at the surface of the sea. It

270 Bibliographical Notices.

is there that the small pelagic animals upon which they feed

swarm, as also dothe Meduse. Then comes to pass this very

strange fact, which, however, is none the less proved, namely,

that the fish, entering into certain natural anfractuosities of

the Medusa, lodges there, issues thence, returns there at plea-

sure, and thus becomes its commensal. This is the only way,

I believe, to explain this kind of association between two

animals of such different types. It is to be remarked that, in

‘order to penetrate into the Medusa without lacerating its

tissues, the fish is compelled to swim on one side, that is to say

in a perfectly abnormal position.

I take advantage of this opportunity to make known a new

case of parasitism. I refer to the discovery of two examples

of Dorychthys excisus (Kaup), male and female, found living

in a Holothuria. These two fishes were sent to me from the

Mauritius in October 1881 by M. de Robillard, with the

assurance that they were quite alive when he took them out

of the Holothuria. Unfortunately he could not tell me the

species to which the Echinoderm belonged. Under any cir-

cumstances the fact seemed to me the more interesting and

the more deserving of being noted, as it is, I believe, the only

case of parasitism hitherto observed in the case of a fish of

the order Lophobranchii.

The following are some characters of this Dorychthys which

may serve to identify the species or to determine the age :—

Total length 50 millim. Plates 18+15—16.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

Minute Structure of the Central Nervous System of certain Reptiles

and Batrachians of America. Tlustrated by permanent photo-

micrographs by Joun J. Mason, M.D. Series A. Author’s

Edition. One hundred. Newport, 1879-1882.

Tur methods of histology have reached a perfection which is

building up new departments of knowledge ; and among successful

pioneers in these labours Dr. Mason will always hold an honoured

place for the technical skill with which he brings the reader face to

face with the revelations of his microscope, and for the sumptuous-

ness with which his work is given to the world. No such mono-

graph has previously come under our notice, for the illustrations of

a difficult research leave nothing to be desired. Some nineteen

reptiles and batrachians have been studied ; and the author has

turned his attention to the structure of the spinal cord, the medulla

Bibliographical Notices. 271

oblongata, cerebellum, optic lobes, and cerebral and olfactory lobes

of the brain, making important discoveries in every direction. The

subject is treated in a comparative manner, so that each region is

studied through a number of animals and under different powers of

the microscope, the results being represented in 113 quarto plates,

which have been selected, as the author states, from over 5000

preparations, and form a comparative anatomy of the nervous sys-

tem. The text, exclusive of the literature and explanation of the

plates, only extends to twenty-four pages ; but this brevity is due

to the setting down of nothing but results. The author first

describes his method of hardening, and details some examples of the

variation in hardening and staining which the species exhibit. The

tailed Batrachians stain easily, but require a third more time to

harden than specimens of other orders. The sections were stained

after being cut, transparency produced by oil of cloves, and the

slices were mounted under thin glass in Canada balsam dissolved in

chloroform. These sections are photographed on glass and deve-

loped with sulphate of iron, the glass having previously been coated

with a solution of wax and benzole. The collodion-film is made

adherent to a thin sheet of gelatine and removed from the plate,

when it becomes available for the artotype process of printing, by

which the beautiful results here presented were obtained.

The spinal cord is exemplified in no fewer than forty-four plates,

and elucidated in seven pages of text. As among higher animals,

this organ consists of white and grey matter, and the white matter

shows the usual division into six columns; but the cord is charac-

terized by an absence of the superior or posterior fissure, so that the

union of the posterior columns is closer thanin man. ‘Two longitu-

dinal bundles of white nerve-fibres extend along the spinal cord in

Saurians, between the inferior white and grey commissures, extend-

ing forward from the lumbar region to form the central longitudinal

bundle of the medulla oblongata on each side. These columns are

especially conspicuous in the alligator, iguana, heloderma, skink,

and anolis. The author finds that reptiles which are shielded by

bony plates or by thick scales have the fibres of the superior

columns of the spinal cord relatively smaller than in naked reptiles.

The infero-lateral columns of the spinal cord are larger in the cer-

vical than in the lumbar region. Some of the plates show well the

“lateral ligament” of Dr. Mason. Other plates show the nerve-

cells and the root-filaments of the nerves, together with their modes

of exit. The contour of the grey substance in section is not unlike

its contour in man, though in Ophidians the superior horns blend,

and among Batrachians a reticular substance becomes interposed

between the two halves of the grey matter. This substantia reticu-

laris is equally large in the brachial and crural regions, and in the

latter surrounds the central canal. This canal is lined with conical

ciliated epithelium, and the processes given out from the cells in the

frog’s spinal cord are shown to be continuous with the network of

the substantia reticularis. This substance is admirably exhibited in

the plates, and, according to the author, affords “ probably the best

272 Bibliographical Notices.

example of what is almost universally regarded as connective tissue.”

Concerning the relative development of white and grey matter, it is

seen that there is more white matter in the brachial region and

more grey matter in the crural region of the frog. And since the

length of the lumbar enlargement is to the cervical enlargement as

10 to 6 in the frog, it is evident that the grey matter is much more

abundant in the lumbar region. Long-tailed Saurians like iguana

and the alligator have the white and grey substances nearly equal

at both enlargements; but those with short tails have the cervical

enlargement more developed. Chelonians usually have no large

nerve-cells in the inferior horns of the grey matter. In the gopher,

multipolar and bipolar cells occur, which are similar to those seen

in enlargements of the spinal cord in reptiles. Nerve-cells with

nuclei, though abundant, only form a distinctly defined group in

the Hora region of the frog, above the level of the central canal, on

each side of the substantia reticularis. In the frog the axis-eylin-

ders of the inferior nerve-roots can be followed into the grey matter,

and become lost in the large cells. These are the more important

conclusions which the author formulates ; but the materials which

are represented in the plates make it manifest that a reticence and

modesty have been shown, which throw a good deal of labour upon

the reader in efforts to generalize where the author would probably

have been more successful.

The spinal cord passes very gradually into the medulla oblongata,

where the central canal and inferior commissure in Saurlans occupy

a lower plane, though in the alligator it rises and opens into the

ventricle. Here the raphe appears, and extends as far forward as

the substance which corresponds to the pons Varoli. In the meshes

of the raphe are nerve-cells which extend forward, till just behind

the plane of the auditory nerves they become the largest cells of the

nervous system. Similar cells occur in skinks, anolis, heloderma,

iguana, and all Saurians which have the raphe well developed. On

each side of the raphe cells are arranged in three groups, which

have been called nucleus basilaris, nucleus centralis, and nucleus

lateralis. The nucleus centralis includes superior and inferior divi-

sions. The author observes that this centre in the crocodile may be

related to the vagus; but adds that it is perhaps more probable

that the cell-column which extends from the anterior bundles of the

spinal accessory to the anterior bundles of the vagus contains all

the cells in which both the vagus and hypoglossal nerves originate,

the reason for this doubt being that the roots of the hypoglossal

nerve have not been traced. ‘The origin, however, of the abducens

nerve is evident in all the reptiles examined ; it lies in the floor of

the ventricle, and is well seen in section.

The cells connected with the auditory nerves show many varia-

tions in the different animals. In the frog the motor bundle of the

trigeminal nerve is seen in cross sections, though it is more easily

demonstr ated in true reptiles, and is well ‘shown i in a section of the

medulla oblongata of the alligator.

The cerebellum is represented by longitudinal vertical sections.

ery

‘

;

Bibliographical Notices. Bio

In the marine turtles it completely covers the fourth ventricle, ex-

tending back twice as far as in the alligator. In the frog it is ver-

tical, while in the tailed Batrachians it is more or less blended with

the optic lobes. In heloderma the cerebellum curves forward, but

is not closely applied to the optic lobes, as in other lizards. Just in

front of the cerebellum is the valvula cerebelli, which contains the

decussating fibres of the fourth pair of nerves.

The optic lobes are admirably represented in fifteen plates, which

display the microscopic anatomy of this region of the brain in a

striking manner, demonstrating a greater diversity of structure than

would have been anticipated. This region of the brain in Ophidians

appears to be characterized by an absence of the linear arrangement

of the cells of the cortical layer, such as is seen in other reptiles and

in Batrachians. In Chelonians there is a remarkable ganglion formed

of large cells in the roof of the optic lobe over the ventricle, and on

each side of the central group are other layers of small cells. These

layers of cells are regarded as the origin of the optic nerves. Be-

neath the optic lobes, in the peduncle, are the cells and fibres in

which the oculo-motor nerve rises, though in the tailed Batrachians

the origin of this nerve is not seen. In the axolotl some doubt

appears to attach to the distinctness of the optic lobes. The optic

thalami are seen one on each side of the V-shaped third ventricle,

in front of the optic lobes. Beneath are the tuber cinereum and the

cerebral hypophysis.

The cerebral hemispheres are examined in somewhat less detail ;

but the plates show a general correspondence of the parts in the

several types. The corpus striatum is much larger in Lizards and

Ophidians than in Batrachians ; and in the alligator this organ is

relatively larger than in the heloderma. In the box-turtle the corpus

striatum has about the same development as in lizards,

Having thus treated in general terms of the chief parts of the

central nervous system, the author prints an appendix on the ayer-

age size of nuclei in the nerve-cells which are related to motor

nerves, showing that the nuclei of the motor cells of the central

nervous system have in the same individual a size which is pro-

portional to the power in the related muscles. Similar relation of

size in the nerve-cells is found in the spinal column to govern mus-

cular development in the limbs; and the later plates are devoted to

demonstrating the size of the nuclei in the cells connected with

cranial nerves.

In a second series the author promises to examine the minute

anatomy of the basal parts of the brain. The list of plates gives

their amplification and subject; while on the plates themselves,

besides description and number of the negative, the power of the

object-glass and its maker are mentioned.

No words could do justice to the beauty of the plates or the value

of the information they convey; and it is not too much to regard

this work as opening a new era in research by substituting know-

ledge of facts of microscopical structure for their interpretation by

the hand of artist or author ; but we can scarcely hope to see many

274 Bibliographical Notices.

books so beautifully ulustrated. The author’s method has the merit

of inaugurating a comparison of the minute anatomy of the nervous

system by enabling the reader to see the structures which he has —

discovered as he saw them; and hence the book will always be a

valuable work of reference; and it will certainly induce others to

hand on the torch of knowledge in a like excellent way.

Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India. Paleontologia Indica,

being Iigures and Descriptions of the Organic Remains procured

during the progress of the Geological Survey of India. Published

by order of his Excellency the Governor-General of India in

Council. Series x. Indian Tertiary and post-Tertiary Verte-

brata. Vol. U1. Part 1. Siwalik Rhinocerotide. Part 2. Sup-

plement to Siwalik and Narbada Proboscidia, with 11 plates:

1881. Part 3. Siwalik and Narbada Hquide, with 5 plates :

1882. Part 4. Siwalik Camelopardalide, with 7 plates: 1883.

Part 5. Sewalik Selenodont Suina &c., with 3 plates: 1883. By

R. Lyprxxer, B.A., F.Z.8., Geological Survey of India. Calcutta:

the Geological Survey Office. London: Triibner & Co.

Tue five parts published of the second volume of the Indian Ter-

tiary Vertebrata are all by Mr. Lydekker, and devoted to Siwalik —

fossils. The volume will apparently include other parts, but already

extends to 176 pages and 25 plates. There is no reason for the

association of the parts in the way in which they are issued, and

every part has a separate pagination as well as the pagination of

the volume; the plates take the numbering for the volume only.

On account of the wealth of material and interest of the types de-

scribed, this work will always be important in paleontology ; and we

cannot help believing that its value is enhanced by the manner of

dealing with the systematic part of the subject which the author

has adopted, for the aims of science are certainly better served by

making genera large and then showing the characters wherein the

species differ from each other, than by adopting the too common

method of subdividing genera till the evidences of their mutual —

dependence and of the evolution of species are obscured. If any one

should observe that the author has not always adhered to so excel-

lent a plan, it must be conceded that when the materials are scanty

and the types such that their true nature cannot be worked out,

then it becomes permissible to formulate whatever knowledge is avail-

able by a nomenclature which shall not prejudge affinities.

It is almost impossible to separate the fossil forms of rhinoceros —

from those which still live. Dr. Falconer detected the hornless

rhinoceros, which he named <Acerotherium perimense, and to this

species Mr. Lydekker now refers the Rhinoceros planidens and R.

iravadicus, which he has defined in the former volume: the teeth

approach those of the rhmoceroses of Sumatra and Java. ‘This is

the only occurrence of Acerothertum in the Siwalik beds, ‘The other

» eee 1

Bibliographical Notices. 275

fifteen fossil species, according to Mr. Lydekker’s table, all occur in

the Miocene rocks of Europe and North America. Some contribu-

tion is made to the knowledge of Acerotherium in the description of

a cranium, of which the author gives a restoration. As compared

with the Acerotherium incisivum, the Indian species has the nasal

bones thicker at the base and apparently shorter ; there is a greater

depth from the dental border of the orbit to the teeth ; the temporal

fossee in the Indian form are wider and shorter, and other differences

help to distinguish the species. The dentition is described in detail,

from which it appears that there are four premolar teeth and three true

molars, while in front of the premolars there is the root of an incisor.

These teeth are characterized by a well-marked cingulum, which

distinguishes this animal from the associated species of rhinoceros,

Fough the angulum is well developed in the Rhinoceros deccanensis

of Foote.

Having compared the dentition with such types as were likely to

throw light upon the species, the author passes on to the genus

Rhinoceros, recognizing thirty species living and fossil, of which

the four Siwalik species defined by Dr. Falconer still remain the

only Indian types from this horizon. The author commences with

some notice of the Rhinoceros sivalensis, affirming that the species

is not hexaprotodont, describes some molar teeth, and points

out resemblances between the molars of this species and those of

Rhinoceros javanicus, and observes that the only character by which

he can distinguish the molars of the living and fossil form is a diffe-

rence in the relative dimensions of the teeth—the greatest width

of the anterior surface being exactly equal to the greatest length of

the external surface in the molars of R. sivalensis, whereas in R.

javanicus the anterior measurement is greater than the external

-measurement ; so that, were it not for the difference in form of the

skull, the author doubts whether a specific difference could be esta-

blished on the character of the teeth. This tooth-character is of

some interest, since Acerotherium and all the Miocene species of

Rhinoceros possess teeth of the type represented at the present day

by the rhinoceros of Sumatra, which approximates towards the teeth

of Paleotherium, Anchitherium, Hyachyus, and other old Perisso-

dactyles ; and on this circumstance Mr. Lydekker relies in explain-

ing the resemblance between the milk-molars of the Sumatran and

Indian types, because ancestral characters are often retained in the

deciduous teeth long after they are lost in the permanent teeth.

Hence he refers all species which approximate to the Rhinoceros

indicus to a comparatively recent origin, the oldest form, Rhinoceros

platyrhinus, only occurring in such parts of the Siwalik beds as are

of Pliocene age. An excellent critical discussion of the mandible

results in the conclusion that the form hitherto referred to Rhino-

ceros paleindicus must be assigned to the Rhinoceros sivalensis,

partly because there is no known unicorn species without lower in-

cisors, and partly because the platyrhine type of jaw is found in

the beds which yield the molars of Rhinoceros sivalensis, but also

because in form the jaw and teeth so closely resemble “ the corre-

276 Bibliographical Notices.

sponding parts of 2. javanicus that it would be but a waste of words

to give a detailed description.” A variety of Lhinoceros sivalensis

which occurs in the Gaj beds of Miocene age, in Western Sind, is

described by Lydekker under the name of gajensis. It is known

from the hinder half of the skull, in which the supraoccipital angular

ridge is of moderate height and the molar teeth are seen.

. sivalensis is apparently a unicorn species with a cranium inter-

mediate between #. indicus and R. javanicus; and though its molars

are like the teeth in the latter species, it is distinguished by wanting

the median lower incisors. The fossil form is regarded as the an-

cestor of its living ally. The second species, 2. pale@indicus, appears

never to have eg described by Falconer, and the author now gives

some account of the skull, molars, and mandible. It is found

throughout the sub-Himalayan Siwaliks, from the Ganges to the

Indus, but is rare in the Punjab. The true molars are distinguished

from those of &. sivalensis by the greater flatness of the external

surface of each tooth, due to the absence of a buttress at the antero-

external angle. A small skullin the British Museum presents some

variation in the premolars, but the author refers it to A. pale-

undicus on account of the form of the head.

The third species of Rhinoceros (. platyrhinus) also was left

undescribed by Falconer. It is a two-horned species with very

wide and thick nasals, and with the supraoccipital region produced

into a high crest; and presents no affinities with the R. sumatrensis

or with the Miocene R. Schleiermacherit. Among the European

fossil species the nearest correspondence is seen in the R. tichorhe-

nus; but the European species is distinguished by having a nasal

septum.

Finally, in his remarks on the pedigree of the Indian species of

rhinoceros the author observes that 2. javanicus is probably the

descendant of /?. sivalensis, that the rhinoceros from the Pleistocene

deposits of the Narbada valley is practically identical with the 2.

indicus, and that no species in the Siwalik Pliocene beds can be re-

garded as the direct ancestor of &. indicus, the fossil form R.

paleindicus being exactly intermediate between the Sumatran or

Acerotherium type and &. indicus in its molars. The Lhinoceros

sumatrensis, which is well known to closely resemble the 2. Schlever-

machert, is supposed to have descended with it from a progenitor

which is still unknown. The group to which the R. platyrhinus

belongs is still uncertain, for it had not the aborted premaxilla of

the Pikermi and African species, from which it is also distinguished

by the union of the inferior squamosal processes; yet in the form

of its upper molars it closely agrees with . simus. The Pleistocene

RR. deccanensis is interred to be a bicorn species from its mandible.

The paper concludes with a list of the more important memoirs on

Acerotherium and Rhinoceros, and is illustrated with ten plates,

which are almost entirely representations of teeth.

The supplement to Siwalik and Narbada Proboscidia gives a brief

account of fragments of maxilla and mandible of the Dinotherium

mdicum from Perim Island; and the Mastodon pandionis is better

Bibliographical Notices. 277

known by the occurrence of three mandibles from Perim Island and

the Punjab. The author further quotes from Dr. Naumann the

occurrence in Japan of the Indian proboscidians Stegodon Clifti and

Stegedon insignis or bombifrons, and the Elephas namadicus and

apparently Hlephas primigenius. The two Stegodons were previ-

ously known to range into China; and the occurrence of these forms

in Japan would indicate that the Siwalik and Narbada elephants

ranged northward into a region which now belongs to the pale-

arctic province.

The Indian fossil horses comprise two species of Hippotherium and

two of Equus, all of which are known chiefly from the teeth, though

a few bones of the extremities and a more or less complete skull or

two have been found. In the early stage of wear the upper molar

teeth of Hippotherium are distinguished by complete isolation of the

anterior pillar, though in well-worn teeth this pillar becomes united

to the crescent, as in Equus. The Hippotherium antilopinum named

by Falconer may possibly, as Owen suggested and Von Meyer urged,

be identical with the H. gracile of Kurope—a resemblance which

was recognized by Prof. Gaudry, though he was ufterwards led to

think this species monodactyle. The American species of Hippo-

therium have a simpler structure of the enamel folds. The second

sp cies of this genus is the Hippotherium Theohaldi of Lydckker. It

is distinguished from the foregoing by a much greater proportionate

length of the milk-molars, and has the anterior pillar of the tooth

compressed so as to be longitudinally elongated, and the posterior

pillar extends back to the hinder border of the crown. ‘The enamel

is but slightly folded and the cement thin ; yet the author observes

that if the milk-molars had not been known, it would have been

doubtful whether the true molars would have afforded ground for

the formation of two species.

Among the limb-bones are some more or less complete feet; a

fore limb which is figured shows the lateral digits about as well

developed as in the stout variety of the Pikermi Hippothere figured

by Professor Gaudry ; and it is evident that the lateral metacarpal

bones were not blended with the median metacarpal, at least at their

distai end. The horses, as Mr. Lydekker observes, are not to be

easily distinguished in a fossil state from asses. The Indian Hjwus

sivalensis has the anterior pillar of the tooth smaller than in Hyuus

caballus ; but the remains indicate an animal at least 15 hands high.

The Lguus hemionus, or the Kiang of Thibet, has upper molars so

like those of sivalensis that the author believes it would be impossible

to distinguish them if both occurred in the same fossil state. There

is a distinct trace of a‘larmial’ cavity in the skull, which is developed

in the hippotheres and unknown in_living horses. The second horse

is the Equus namadicus of Falconer, with which is now united the

Equus paleonus. It is distinguished by the upper molars having a

ereater length of grinding-surface of the anterior pillars, and it is

distinguished from all living horses by the square crowns of the

upper milk-molars. -In the living horse the plication of the enamel

is always less than in the /. namadicus. It appears to be associ-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xi. 20

278 Bibliographical Notices.

ated with the Bubalus palwindicus and Cumelus sivalensis in the

top beds of the Siwaliks. The memoir concludes witha bibliography

of Equus and Hippotherium, and five plates representing teeth and

a foot.

Mr. Lydekker regards the giraffes and sivatheres as forming one

family, the Camelopardalide, which includes the genera Camelo-

pardalis, Orasius, Vishnutherium, Helladotherium, Hydaspitherium,

Bramatherium, and Sivatherium. The author believes that this

group is most closely allied to the deer, though the views of Ruti-

meyer are subsequently quoted as to the hor: us being intermediate

between true antlers and true horns. Riitimeyer follomes Murie in

uniting the Sivatheres with the antelopes because the parietal region

is shortened, as in the oxen and the gnu; but the author observes

that a skull now referred to Helladotherium was referred by Faleo-

ner and Murie to a female Sivatheriuwm, and the transition from the

Swatherium to the giraffe seen in the bones of the limbs and neck

aud the presence of lachrymal vacuities in the giraffe and Hydaspt-

ther:um afford evidence of close relationship between these animals.

The family is characterized by a reticular or rugose structure of the

enamel of the molar teeth. Horns are unknown in Helladotherium ; :

but the absence of a burr appears to prove that the large antlers of

Bramatherium and Sivatherium were permanent. The fossil giraffes

of Europe are of Miocene age; but the Camelopardalis sivalensis of

the Siwaliks belongs to the Pliocene period. ‘Teeth, vertebrae, and

limb-bones are described, with the conclusion that the animal was

about the size of the living species, the neck and limbs having

attained their characteristic elongation in the Pliocene age.

Vishnutherium is a ruminant of giraffe type known from molar

teeth, metatarsus, and cervical vertebre. The jaw is slender, the

molar teeth are larger than those of the giraffe, have a distinct

cingulum on the outer surface, and a relatively large tubercle in the

median valley of the first and ‘second molars. The teeth are larger

than those of the elk, but somewhat resemble them. The metatar=

sus is longer and slighter than the metatarsus of Stvatheriwm. The

sixth cervical vertebra is shorter than the corresponding vertebra

of the giraffe and longer than that of Sivatherium.

Halladotherium appears to be represented by the Pikermi species

H, Duvernoyi, It is known from the cranium, which was identified

by Professor Gaudry. Hydaspitherium is anew genus, to which

the author refers two species, H. megacephalum and H. grande.

The former is known from a nearly complete cranium wanting the

horn-cores. It has a large subquadrate compound base for the horns

immediately in front of the occipital crest, and has a large lachry-

mal cavity, which is wanting in Stvatherium. The teeth differ from

those of Sivatheriwm in being smaller, in having a finer texture of

outer surface, in the absence of plication of the enamel of the cen-

tral pit, and the less development of coste on the external surface

of the lobes. The teeth are very similar to those of Bramatherium ;

and the author remarks that if there were no evidence but the teeth,

Hydaspitherium, Helladotherium, and Bramatherium might all be

Bibliographical Notices. 279

merged in one. Mandible, molars, limb-bones, and vertebrae are

described in so far as is necessary to illustrate the differences of

the genus from Stvatheriwm; and these structures show that in length

of limb it was nearest to Halladotheriwn, in structure of horns

nearest to Sivatheriwm, and that in length of neck it is nearer to

Vishnutherium and the giraffe than to the Sivatheres. The Hydaspi-

therium grande is known from upper molars, mandible, caleaneum,

and a proximal phalange. The author considers it possible that

more abundant materials may place the species in a new genus.

Branatherivm is another genus of four-horned ruminants, dis-

tinguished by the arrangement of the horns. The only species known

is the B. perimense of ‘Falconer, and no new specimens have been

found since the type was first described by that author. The horns,

as is well known, consist of a conjoined anterior pair rising between

the orbits and a second pair of large size rising from distinct bases

at the sides of the occiput.

Swatherium giganteum is only noticed in so far as Mr. Lydekker’s

views differ from those of previous writers, and to describe some

teeth, vertebree, and metapodial bones. The author differs from

Dr. Murie, who regarded Sivatherium as most nearly allied to Anti-

locapra, because it is only in Siwatheriwn, the giraffe, the Irish elk,

the true elk, and some other deer that the lobes of the molars are

oblique to the long axis of the teeth, so as to overlap one another,

while their enamel has a rugose structure. In Antilocapra and all

cavicorn ruminants the enamel of the molars is nearly smooth

and the lobes of the teeth are always set straight, so as never to

overlap. The memoir concludes with seven plates, illustrative of

teeth, cervical vertebree, and metapodial and podial bones.

The term Selenodont Suina is used to define an extinct group of

pig-like Ungulata which have the inner pair of cusps of the upper

molars of crescentic form ; and this group in India comprises Anthra-

cotherium and Hyopotamus, which the author believes may even-

tually have to be united. Another family is represented by Mixo-

thertum, and a third by Diplopus. The second or tetracuspidate

division of the Selenodont group comprises the Merycopotamide and

the Oreodontid, and a third division includes the Anoplotheres.

The author observes that the Hyopotamids pass insensibly into the

genus Cainotherium, which is a true ruminant; but the Oreodons

are probably the progenitors of the ancestors of the camel, and

the Anoplotheres are as closely related to the ruminant Xiphodons.

Feeding for the most part on food that required fine trituration,

their snouts are shorter than in the true pigs.

The account of the Anthracotheride, which belong to a group in

which the upper molars have five cusps, commences with the typical

genus Anthracotheriwm, which is met with throughout the Pliocene .

period. The Indian forms are Anthracotherium hyopotamoides of

Lydekker and Anthracotheriwm silistrense of Pentland. This latter

species, which has numerous synonyms, is known from the upper

molars, which were first figured by the Geological Society in 1829,

and the mandible. The second species is founded on an upper

280 Bibliographical Notices.

molar tooth which has some characters approximating it to Hyo-

potamus. Hyopotamus is widely distributed in America, India, and

Europe. Both the Indian species Hyopotamus giganteus and H.

paleindicus are of older Pliocene age; they are both known from

molar teeth and fragments of the mandible, so that beyond present-

ing very characteristic shapes they do not throw much light upon

this generic type. The tetracuspidate Merycopotamus dissimilis was

a four- or five-toed pig about the size of a wild boar. The anterior

premolars are pointed, like those of Anthracotherium and Hippo-

potamus, and the cranium greatly resembles that of the latter genus,

and in 60 far as it diverges from Hippopotamus it approximates to

Anthracotherium ; yet the author is disposed, from the character of

the molars, to think it most closely related to the Anthracotheride

and Oreodontide. Cheromeryx silistrensis 1s only known from a

fragment of a jaw with three molars. Hemimeryx Blanfordi is a

new type founded upon isolated molar teeth; it is most closely

related to Cheromeryx and Merycopotamus, and has some relation

to the Anoplotheres. Stvamery« sindiensis is another type founded

on isolated teeth ; it is larger than Chawromeryx, and also resembles

Merycopotamus. The Oreodonts are represented by a species of the

American genus Agriochwrus ; and the ruminant section is indicated

by a single molar named Pro-palwomerya sivalensis, and is considered

to be most nearly related to a European species of Palwomerya, and

to form a link between the giraffe and the true deer. The memoir

concludes with the usual bibliography, and is illustrated with three

plates of teeth.

It is difficult to speak of Mr. Lydekker’s merits as an anatomist,

for he is unfortunate in having published work that was immature,

so that now the corrections are unpleasantly numerous ; but then

the scientific fidelity of which these corrections are evidence is no

small merit. We cannot so unreservedly commend the author's

method ; his critical acumen is excellent, but he does not always

seem at his ease in dealing with the writings of others. Frequently

voluminous discussions occur when the same result might have been

attained in a few sentences. And the memoirs seem written on the

supposition that the reader has the resources of the Indian Museum

before him, and that the illustrations leave nothing to be desired.

In other words, there is not that laborious description of materials

other than teeth which we think necessary ; and the result is that

we are often unable to judge critically of much of the author’s

labours or to use them fully. Ifit should be urged that they make

no pretence to be more than contributions to paleontology made for

the Geological Survey of India, we would say that the acumen dis-

played by the author leads us to believe him capable of work of a

yet higher order, and that science docs not gain by restricting the

paleontologist to the task of being a lantern-earrier for his geolo-

gical comrade. The memoirs, however, are valuable contributions

to paleontology ; and the author is to be congratulated on the pro-

eress made with a difficult subject.

Miscellaneous. 281

MISCELLANEOUS.

Note on the Intelligence of the American Turret-Spider.

Tur Rey. Dr. H. C. McCook exhibited nests of Tarentula areni-

cola, Scudder, a species of ground-spider of the family Lycoside,

popularly known as the Turret-Spider, These nests, in natural

site, are surmounted by structures which quite closely resemble

miniature old-fashioned chimneys, composed of mud and crossed

sticks, as seen in the log cabins of pioneer settlers. From half an

inch to one inch of the tube projects above ground, while it extends

straight downwards twelve or more inches into the earth. The pro-

jecting portion or turret is in the form of a pentagon, more or less

regular, and is built up of bits of grass, stalks of straw, small twigs,

&e. laid across each other at the corners. ‘The upper and projecting

parts have a thin lining of silk. Taking its position just inside the

watch-tower, the spider leaps out and captures such insects as may

come in its way. ‘The speaker has found nests of the species at the

base of the Allegheny Mountains near Altoona, and in New Jersey

on the seashore. In the latter location the animal had availed itself

of the building-material at hand, by forming the foundation of its

watch-tower of little quartz pebbles, sometimes producing a structure

of considerable beauty. In this sandy site the tube is preserved

intact by a delicate secretion of silk, to which the particles of sand

adhere. Thissecretion scarcely presents the character of a web-lining,

but has sufficient consistency to hold aloft a frail cylinder of sand

and silk, when the sand is carefully scooped away from the site of

the nest.

A nest recently obtained from Vineland, N. J., furnished an in-

teresting illustration of the power of these araneads to intelligently

adapt themselves to varying surroundings, and to take advantage of

circumstances with which they certainly could not have been previ-

ously familiar. In order to preserve the nest, with a view to study

the life-history of its occupant, the sod containing the tube had been

carefully dug up and the upper and lower openings plugged with

cotton. Upon the arrival of the nest in Philadelphia the plug

guarding the entrance had been removed, but the other had been

forgotten and allowed to remain. The spider, which still inhabited

the tube, immediately began removing the cotton at the lower por-

tion, and cast some of it out. But, guided apparently by its sense

of touch to the knowledge that the soft fibres of the cotton would

be an excellent material with which to line its tube, it speedily

began putting it to that use, and had soon spread a soft smooth layer

over the inner surface and around the opening. ‘The nest, in this

condition, was exhibited and showed the interior to be padded for

about 4 inches from the summit of the tower. Dr. McCook pointed

out the very manifest inference that the spider must for the first time

‘have come in contact with such a material as cotton, and had imme-

diately utilized its new experience by substituting the soft fibre for

the ordinary silken lining, or rather adding it thereto.— Proc. Acad.

Nat. Sci. Philad., June 19, 1883, p. 131. \

282 Miscellaneous.

Complete Biological Evolution of the Elm-tree Aphis (Tetraneura

ulmi, Aut.). By M. J. Licnrensrum.

For several years past I have communicated to the Academy some

new views concerning the biological evolution of the Aphides. These

views have been rejected by some entomologists and received with

favour by others. Amongst the latter, Prof. Kessler, of Cassel,

has done me the honour of placing “ Confirmation of the Lichten-

stein Theory’ as a subtitle to the last observations which he has

published on the Aphides of the cornel and apple-tree (Aphis

lanigera).

Another entomologist, Prof. G. Horvath, Director of the Phyl-

loxera station in Hungary, observed, in the autumn of 1882, that

the Aphides which live during the summer at the roots of the

maize became winged and repaired to the trunks of the elm trees,

upon which they deposited individuals wanting rostra and sexual.

Believing, from the nature of the plant attacked, that he had to do

with the Aphis of the maize-root (Pemphigus zee-maydis, Léon

Dufour, according to Lon), he published, in a French entomological

Review, the interesting fact which he had observed, concluding thus :

—‘“ The Pemphigus of the maize- pros migrates from its subterranean

habitat to the trunks of elm trees ; but I donot know what becomes

of it afterwards.”

On this information I had to try to obtain a counter-proof. As

the elm, here as in Hungary, only nourishes one species of Pem-

phigus (P. pallidus, Haliday, sub Eriosoma), [had no doubt that by

taking this species as it emerged from the gall, and forcing it to

deposit its eggs upon the maize, I should obtain the subterranean

phase observed by Horvath.

I met with complete failure, however; not one of the thousand

little Pemphigi which I placed upon the maize-roots attached itself.

I had, nevertheless, carried on my experiments with the greatest

care, by growing the maize in glass vessels, which permitted me to

observe with the lens the roots pressed against the transparent sides

of the vessel.

I was greatly disappointed; but as I had my arrangements

ready, I extended the experiments to the other species which live

on the elm; these are four in number—two Schizoneure, ulmi and

lanuginosa ; two Tetraneure, rubra and wlmi. The first three

species died, like the Pemphigus, without attaching themselves to the

roots of the maize ; but, to my great satisfaction, I saw the larvee of

the fourth species, Tetraneura ulmi, attach themselves and rapidly

increase in size, covering themselves with the woolly or cottony

secretion so common among this group of insects. I wrote im-

mediately to M. Horvath, ‘ The counter- -proof of your discovery did

not ‘succeed with me as regards the Pemphigus of theelm. Are you

sure that you are not mistaken? Send me the winged insect which

migrates: from the maize-roots to the elm.”

Thanks to the method of preservation which I had invented for

the transimission of Aphides in a drop of Canada-balsam, between

Miscellaneous. 283

two thin slices of mica the size of a postage-stamp, my colleague

at Budapest sent me what he believed to be Pemphigus zee-maydis.

As I thought, he was mistaken ; the insect which he discovered on

the roots of the maize is a Tetraneura, since the hind wings have

only one nervure instead of two, as the species of the genus Pem-

phigus should have. Moreover, the size, shape of the antenn, and

absence of hairs on the abdomen proved that it was Vetraneura

ulmi and not Tetraneura rubra, of which I had discovered the sub-

terranean habitat in the preceding year, and which lives at the roots

of the dog’s grass.

Here, then, we have the complete history of the biological eyo-

lution of a second Aphis of the elm, discovered, so to speak, simul-

taneously in France and Hungary, and which had already been

elucidated by Prof. Kessler, of Cassel, placed now beyond doubt.

In the train of Phyllowera quercus, Anopleura lentisct, and Tetra-

neura rubra, of which | made known the migrations from one

species of oak to another, or from the roots of grasses to the

mastic-tree and the elm, we have Tetranewra ulmi, which migrates

in June from the elm-galls to the roots of the maize, and which

returns in October in the pupiferous form, bringing forth the sexual

individuals upon the trunks of the elms.

As to Pemphigus zee-maydis, its gallicolous form (that is to say,

the foundress and emigrant phases) still remains to be discovered.—

Comptes Rendus, July 16, 1883.

Elevated Coral Reefs of Cuba. By W. O. Crossy *.

Mr. Crosby describes in this paper the elevated coral reefs of

Cuba, and draws from them the apparently well-sustained conclusion

that they indicate a slow subsidence during their formation, and

hence, further, that Darwin’s theory of the origin of coral islands is

the true theory. The lowest reef-terrace of the northern side of the

island has a height of 50 feet, and varies in width from a few rods

to a mile; it was once plainly the fringing reef of the shore. The

second reef-terrace rises abruptly from the level of the lower toa height

of from 200 to 250 feet, and bears evidence of having been of like

origin with the lower. The altitude of the third reet is about 500

feet ; and the fourth has a height east of Baracoa, near the Yumuri

River, ‘‘of probably not less than 800 feet.” These old reef-

terraces extend, ‘ with slight interruptions, around the entire coast

of Cuba; and in the western part of the island, where the erosion

is less rapid than further east, they are the predominant formation,

and they are well preserved on the summits of the highest hills.

Mr. Alexander Agassiz states that the hills about Havanna and

Matanzas, which reach a height of over 200 feet, are entirely com-

posed of reef-limestene.”

* Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.

284 Miscellaneous.

In the precipitous mountain called El Yunque (the Anvil), five

miles west of Baracoa, reef-limestone, 1000 feet thick, constitutes

the upper half of the mountain, the lower part, on which the reef

rests, consisting of eruptive rocks and slates; and originally the

upper limit of this modern limestone formation must have been

2000 feet above the sea-level. Mr. Sawkins gives 2000 feet as

the maximum thickness of the Jamaica elevated coral reefs above

the sea.

Evidence that the reefs were not formed during a progressive

rising of the land is drawn from the thickness of the reefs. Mr.

Crosby observes that the reefs reaching to a height of 500 and

1000 feet, if not also to that of 2000 feet, show, by the remains

within them, that they were made chiefly of reef-building corals,

and hence that they were not begun in deep water, as is assumed

in the theory of Mr. Agassiz, but that they were made in shallow

water during a progressive subsidence. Mr. Crosby concludes as

follows :—

“We have then apparently no course but to accept Darwin’s

theory as an adequate explanation of the elevated reefs of the

Greater Antilles, and therefore to admit that the upheaval of this

portion of the earth’s crust has been interrupted by periods of

profound subsidence during which the reefs were formed. The

subsidence of 2000 feet, of which El Yunque is a monument,

must have reduced the Greater Antilles to a few lines of small

but high and rugged islands; but, as Mr. Bland has shown, this

fully accounts for the absence in these immense tracts of all large

animals, although they were abundant here in Phocene and earlier

times.” :

The writer adds here the following objections to the theory of

the formation of coral atolls in deep waters out of the calcareous

secretions of deep-water life :—(1) It is very improbable that sub-

marine eruptions ever make the large and well-defined craters,

like those of subaerial action, which are appealed to in order to

explain the lagoon feature of atolls; (2) Many coral atolls are

twenty miles or more in diameter, which is vastly larger than

the largest of craters; (3) The atolls are never circular, and the

larger have the irregularities of outline or diversities of form cha-

racterizing other large islands of the ocean ; (4) In the actual reefs

and islands of the Feejee group (see the map of the islands in the

writer’s ‘Corals and Coral Islands’) all the conditions, from the

first stage to that of the almost completed atoll, are well illustrated,

one island having only a single peak of rock within the lagoon, not

thy of the whole area, which a little more of subsidence would put

beneath the waters and leave the lagoon wholly free.—J. D. Dana,

in Silliman’s American Journal for August 1883.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

(FIFTH SERIES.]

No. 71. NOVEMBER 1883.

XX XII.— Contributions to Micro-Paleontology.—On Steno-

pora Howsii, Nich., with Notes on Monticulipora? tumida,

Phill., and Remarks on Tabulipora Urii, Young. By H.

ALLEYNE Nicuorson, M.D., D.Sc., Regius Professor of

Natural History in the University of Aberdeen.

[Plate X.]

1. Stenopora Howsii, Nich.

In a recent visit to Northumberland I was fortunate enough

to obtain a considerable number of specimens of the singular

_ Stenopora Howsit, Nich., of which I had previously published

_ ashort provisional description and figures, based upon a mag-

_ nificent example in the cabinet of Mr. Richard Howse, F.G.S.

(see ‘The Genus Monticulipora,’ p. 83, fig. 12, 1881).

_ Having, therefore, now had the opportunity of examining a

_ large series of specimens in all stages of growth, and also of

_ preparing a number of thin sections, I purpose giving on the

present occasion a fuller description of the characters of this

_ remarkable type.

___ As regards its essential specific characters the corallum of

Stenopora Howsti is ramose, with subcylindrical or flattened

branches, which are mostly from } to 4 inch in diameter.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 21

286 Dr. H. A. Nicholson’s Contributions

The walls of the corallites are completely amalgamated, and

the calices are polygonal, comparatively thin-walled, and

(including the wall) mostly about 75 inch in diameter, clusters

of slightly larger tubes, intermixed with small tubuli, occurring

here and there. Minute interstitial tubes are present at the

angles of junction of many of the large corallites, or are col-

lected into stellate groups or ‘‘ macule.” The walls of the

corallites are marked with conspicuous periodic enlargements

or annulations, and the tabulee are usually perforated by a

central aperture. Mural pores have not been detected.

As regards external characters, British examples are always

ramose, the branches being usually compressed or flattened,

though sometimes quite cylindrical, and often exhibiting slight

tumid enlargements at intervals. The stems vary in diameter

from 2 to 7 lines; andthe Arctic specimens, which I shall sub-

sequently describe as forming a distinct variety, are still more

massive, or even become sublobate. ‘The calices are poly-

gonal and decidedly thin-walled (especially as compared with

the calices of the associated Monticulipora? tumida, Phill.).

In size they are mostly from %5 to 5 inch in diameter; but

not uncommonly groups of corallites slightly larger than the

average may be present here and there, and there is always a

variable number of small interstitial tubuli. These latter are

not only disseminated among the larger tubes, but are com-

monly aggregated into star-shaped ‘‘ maculee”’ (Pl. X. fig. 2),

which may be a line or more across, but are not, so far as I

have seen, elevated above the general surface. At other

times the tubuli occupy irregular and narrow linear tracts.

The surface is not markedly roughened or spinulose, though

all well-preserved examples exhibit under the microscope

many small blunt tubercles on the lips of the calices. Lastly,

many of the calices show the marked feature that their floor is

formed by a tabula which is perforated by a central aperture

(Pl. X. figs. 2 and 3).

As regards tnternal structure, the corallites exhibit marked

differences according as they are examined in the axial region

or in the periphery of the branches. Thus, in the axial region

the corallites are at first vertical, but soon bend gradually

outwards, and they are here always polygonal and mostly

thin-walled (Pl. X. fig. 9). The lines of demarcation between

contiguous tubes have not yet been obliterated, and when the

tubes are thickened (as they sometimes are) the thickening is

uniform and not intermittent. Moreover the tabule of the

axial region are always very sparsely developed, and, when

present, are always imperforate and complete. |

On the other hand, in the final or peripheral portion of —

to Micro-Palceontology. 287

their course the corallites assume their mature characters, and

now exhibit the features peculiar to Stenopora. As regards

their direction, they are now bent outwards approximately at

right angles to the axis of the branch, and their walls are now

thickened periodically by annular enlargements, which are

placed at corresponding levels in contiguous tubes. Hence,

in the broken ends of the branches, the corallites show a

highly characteristic beaded appearance ; and in thin sections

(fig. 1, C) the walls are seen to have a marked moniliform

structure, narrow unthickened segments alternating with

annular thickenings or nodes.

nian ©

Ayre

raantlD IST)

E =m g

—

SDs :

LD SVD

DSS SDI

Qy) Z\ =)

i; 4 4

y >

Stenopora Howsw, Nich., from the Carboniferous rocks of Redes-

dale. A. Tangential section traversing in part the unthickened

segments of the tubes. B. Tangential section traversing the thickened

segments of the tubes. C. Portion of the peripheral region of a transverse

section, showing the thickenings of the walls and the perforated tabule,

All the figures are enlarged about eighteen times,

As regards the minute structure of the walls of the corallites,

the thickened nodes are formed (as in the species of Stenopora

generally) by the growth of successively superimposed thin

layers of sclerenchyma, each layer forming a kind of conical

cap, as seen in section (Pl. X. fig. 10). The walls of adja-

cent corallites are apparently so amalgamated and fused

together that no traces can, as a rule, be detected of the

original boundary-lines of the separate tubes. In some cases,

however, in tangential sections it is possible, by means of a

careful management of the light, to recognize the original

288 Dr. H. A. Nicholson’s Contributions

polygonal lines of demarcation of the different corallites ; but

even in this case such lines only appear as clear spaces (Pl.

X. fig. 6). In the structure of the wall, therefore, S. Hows?

agrees with such forms as Stenopora tasmaniensis, Lonsd.,

and differs from such as 8, ovata, Lonsd., and S. crinita,

Lonsd., the boundary-lines in these latter species remaining

permanently recognizable as distinct dark lines marking off

the originally polygonal corallites *.

The tabule of the peripheral region of the corallum are

exceedingly characteristic, the great majority (possibly all)

being perforated by a central oval, or subcircular, or reniform

aperture, the structure, however, being wholly unlike that

which characterizes the genus Prasopora, Nich. & Eth. As

seen in tangential sections (Pl. X. figs. 4, 7, and 8) the

tabulee appear as circular ledges, surrounding the visceral cham-

bers, and each perforated by a central aperture, the immediate

margin of which is somewhat thickened. As seen, on the other

hand, in longitudinal or transverse sections (PI. X. figs. 9 & 10),

the tabule present themselves as so many pairs of short, nearly

horizontal, or somewhat deflexed processes, the free ends of

which, where they abut upon the central aperture, are slightly

thickened or bulbous. Some of the tabule: appear to be com-

plete and to pass completely across the visceral chambers of

the corallites. It is probable, however, that all the tabule: in

the peripheral region are really perforated, and that the

apparent completeness of some of them is merely due to the

fact that the line of section at that particular pomt traversed

the visceral chambers excentrically, and therefore did not pass

through the central perforations of the tabule. In any case,

the tabula mostly spring from the unthickened segments of

the corallites, and are mostly about 4, inch apart. It is

also the last-formed tabula which appears as the perforated

diaphragm at the bottom of so many of the calices.

Finally, in tangential sections the appearances presented

vary according as the section passes through the tubes at the

level of their thickened nodes, or at that of the unthickened

internodes, the resulting differences being usually observable

in different portions of the same slice. Thus, if the section

should traverse the unthickened segments of the corallites (as

seen in the lower part of fig. 1, A, and in Pl. X. figs. 4 and

5), the tubes appear to be comparatively thin-walled and ap-

proximately polygonal, and there are comparatively few and

“ The occurrence of such a well-marked difference of structure as that

above noted, in species otherwise so closely allied, would lead us to sup-

pose that it is, perhaps, hazardous to lay great stress upon the amalga-

mation “or non-amalgamation of the walls of the corallites as a point of

generic distinction,

to Micro-Paleontology. 289

small dark spots marking the presence of spiniform processes

or small tubuli. Very commonly, however, there are seen at

the angles of junction of the corallites large, round, very thick-

walled tubes, each with a central dark spot or a minute

median opening. It is difficult to be certain what these

eircular thick-walled tubes may be; but they are very cha-

racteristic of most tangential sections of S. Howsi, and they

perhaps represent a special series of corallites. On the other

hand, if the section traverse the thickened nodes of the coral-

lites (as in fig. 1, B, and in Pl. X. figs. 7 and 8), the tubes

appear to be thick-walled, and we observe in general the

following objects :—(1) the oval or circular apertures of the

ordinary corallites, some of these being occupied by the ring-

like perforated tabule ; (2) the apertures of small interstitial

tubuli, either scattered here and there (Pl. X. fig. 8) or

ageregated into “macule” (Pl. X. fig. 7); (8) numerous

irregularly distributed dark spots in the walls of the corallites,

which often exhibit a minute clear spot in the centre, and

which are doubtless the sections of hollow spines; and (4)

large circular thick-walled tubes, such as have been previously

alluded to, which present a central dark spot or clear space,

and usually a well-marked dark margin (PI. X. fig. 6).

As regards the affinities of Stenopora Howsti, it is most

nearly allied to S. tasmandensis, Lonsd.; but the latter is

easily distinguished by the smaller number and much larger

size of its spiniform tubes, and by the fact that the tabulee of

the peripheral region are few in number, and, so far as my

observations have gone, imperforate. ‘The form, however,

which it is most difficult to separate from S. Howsti is that

which has been generally recognized as Monticulipora (?)

tumida of Phillips; but before discussing this point I may

briefly describe a remarkable form of S. Howsi from the

Arctic regions.

2. Stenopora Howsii, var. arctica, Nich.

There exist in the magnificent collection of the British Mu-

seum several specimens of a large Stenopora from the Car-

boniferous rocks of Feilden Isthmus, which were collected in

the Nares expedition. By the kindness of my friend Dr.

Henry Woodward, F.R.S., [ have been permitted to examine

these specimens, and at once satisfied myself as to their sub-

stantial identity with the Stenopora Howsdi of the Carbonite-

rous rocks of Northumberland. They exhibit, however,

certain subordinate points of distinction from the British types,

and I think it best therefore to mark the existence of these by

the addition of a varietal name.

290 Dr. H. A. Nicholson’s Contributions

S. Howsii, var. arctica, is a larger and more massive form

than the normal examples of the species, but its general mode

of growth is the same, and there is no essential difference as

regards their general structure. Tabule are, however, less

abundantly developed in the peripheral region of the corallum

(Pl. X. fig. 11), and are therefore separated by wider inter-

vals. On the other hand, there is a specially extensive

development of the curious thick-walled tubes which I have

described as occurring in the normal form of 8. Hows?z.

These remarkable structures are best observed in tangential

sections, whether these traverse the corallum at the level of

the unthickened segments of the corallites (fig. 2, A) or at

that of the thickened nodes (fig. 2, B). In longitudinal

A. Part of a tangential section of Stenopora Howsti, var. arctica,

taken at the level of the unthickened segments of the tubes, enlarged

twenty-four times. B. Another part of the same section, taken at the

level of the thickened parts of the tubes, similarly enlarged.

sections (Pl. X. fig. 11) the same structures appear as tubes

running in the thickness of the walls of the ordinary corallites.

While these singular tubes are remarkably abundant, the

interstitial tubuli which are such astriking feature in thenormal

form are here somewhat diminished in number. The chief

point, however, by which 8. Hows?’, var. arctica, is distin-

guished from the type of the species is that the walls of the

corallites are decidedly thicker and the visceral chambers

more contracted than in the latter, while each visceral chamber

is surrounded by a ring-like investment of fibrous sclerenchyma

(fig. 2, B).

formation and Locality. 'The type of the species occurs in

to Micro-Paleontology. 291

the Carboniferous rocks of Redesdale, in Northumberland

(coll. Richard Howse and H. A. Nicholson). The Arctic

specimens (var. arctica) are from the Carboniferous rocks of

Feilden Isthmus (lat. 82° 43! N.), and were collected by Capt.

Feilden, as naturalist to the Nares expedition (coll. Brit. Mus.).

3. Notes on Monticulipora ? tumida, Phill.

The general characters and minute structure of the form

which I regard as being the Calamopora tumida of Phillips

have been previously described by me (‘The Genus Monticu-

lipora,’ p. 120). After an examination of an enormous

number of additional specimens, I have only little of structural

importance to add to the description formerly given; but I

should wish to make some remarks as to the affinities and

synonymy of the species.

Monticulipora? tumida, Phill., is an essentially dendroid

species, but, like other ramose forms, it often begins its

existence in the shape of a thin crust growing upon the stem

of a Crinoid or some similar object. The stems are mostly

between 1 and 2 lines in diameter, but may reach at least

3 lines in diameter. The calices are rounded, oval, or sub-

polygonal, with very thick walls, their actual apertures being

round or oval and mostly between 9\5 and <5 inch in diameter.

The lips of the calices are raised into prominent rims, which

slope down by a deeply concave edge to the margin of the

actual visceral chamber, thus giving rise in some cases to the

appearance of perforated diaphragms at the bottom of the

ealices; but I am satisfied that this is the true explanation of

the appearances in question. ‘The prominent intercalicine

ridges always support, in unrubbed examples, a row of promi-

nent blunt spines, which can sometimes be observed to open by

distinct circular apertures, and which give to the surface a

characteristic rough or spinulose aspect and feel. Lastly,

minute corallites or interstitial tubes are commonly developed

at the angles of junction of the larger corallites, or are agere-

gated to form distinct macule.

With regard to the ¢nternal structure of the corallum , tan-

gential sections (fig. 3, A) show that the walls of the coral-

lites are completely amalgamated in the peripheral region, the

conjoint walls being usually about 73, inch across, while the

visceral chambers average about ;5 inch in diameter. The

visceral chamber of each corallite is surrounded by a thickened

fibrous layer, and the interspaces between the corallites are

filled with clear sclerenchyma, traversed by rows of dark-

coloured hollow spines. Minute corallites or tubuli are also

292 Dr. H. A. Nicholson’s Contributions

developed in variable amount, and often appear in clusters.

Tangential sections taken a little below the surface show, fur-

ther, that the corallites gradually become lessand less thickened,

and more and more polygonal in outline, while traces of the

original lines of demarcation between adjacent tubes can be

made out, and the spiniform tubules gradually disappear. In

the axial region of the corallum, as shown in longitudinal or

transverse sections (fig. 3, B), the corallites, finally, become

completely separate, having now thin walls and a polygonal

outline.

i B

Monticulipora? tumida, Phill., from the Carboniferous rocks of

Redesdale, Northumberland. A. Part of a tangential section, enlarged

twenty-four times, showing the large and small corallites, and the rows

of interstitial spiniform tubules. B.- Part of a transverse section, enlarged

twenty-four times, showing the polygonal and thin-walled axial tubes

and the thickened walls and complete tabulz of the peripheral portions

of the corallites.

The only two remaining structural points to notice concern

the nature of the tabule and the thickening of the walls of the

mature corallites. As to the first of these two points, it is

quite certain that the tabule are essentially and habitually

complete and imperforate (fig. 3, B). In no single longitudinal —

or transverse section have I ever detected an incomplete

tabula, and out of a large number of tangential sections I have —

only once met with an instance of a perforated tabula, and

then only in one or two corallites.

As to the second point, the walls of the corallites in the

peripheral region of the corallum are invariably greatly thick-

to Micro-Palwontology. 293

ened (fig. 3, B) ; and they sometimes exhibit a sort of periodic

variation in the amount of this thickening, causing the walls

to be thicker in some parts than in others. In no case, how-

ever, does the wall come to consist of a series of unthickened

segments separated by thickened annular nodes; so that

neither in rough fractures nor in longitudinal sections do we

find the walls of the corallites exhibiting a moniliform or

beaded aspect.

This last point brings us to consider for a moment the

generic position of this species. ‘There can be no doubt that

in its general characters, Monticulipora? tumida, Phill., makes

a very close approach to such species of Stenopora as S. tas-

maniensis, Lonsd., and, still more, S. Hows, Nich. This

was formerly pointed out by myself; and, after a renewed

investigation, I can only repeat that “so far as our present

knowledge goes, the only points which would definitely sepa-

rate M. tumida, Phill., from Stenopora are, that it certainly

shows no traces of the peculiar moniliform and periodic thick-

ening of the walls of the corallites which is characteristic of

the latter genus, and that there is no evidence as to the pre-

sence of mural pores” (‘The Genus Monticulipora,’ p. 124).

The existence or non-existence of mural pores may be left out

of account, however, as these structures are so difficult of de-

tection; so that the structure of the wall alone remains to

separate MW. tumida from Stenopora. It must be added, how-

ever, that this last point is one so essentially characteristic of

the genus Stenopora, Lonsd., that it would seem impossible

to include under this name any type which did not exhibit

this peculiar feature as regards the mature corallites.

The species from which it is most difficult to separate M. ?

tumida is Stenopora Howsii, and I may briefly summarize

the chief points which distinguish them.

(a) Dimensions of corallum.—The corallum of M.? tumida

is in general markedly smaller than that of S. Howsz/, branches

of the former being most commonly about a line and a half or

two lines in diameter, whereas the stems of the latter average

about four lines in diameter. Still, large stems of .? tumida

cannot by this character alone be separated from small stems

of S. Howsit.

(6) The calices of M.? tumida are markedly thickened and

usually circular or oval, whereas those of S, Howsii are com-

paratively thin-walled and are generally polygonal.

blunt spines, which in well-preserved specimens terminate in

minute circular apertures, and which give to the surface a

markedly rough and spinulose aspect. In S. Howsii, though

294 Dr. H. A. Nicholson’s Contributions

similar spines exist, they are comparatively small and short,

the surface wanting, therefore, the rough appearance which

exists in M/. ? tumida.

‘(d) The tabule in the peripheral region of the corallum are

few in number in JZ. ? tumdda, and are almost invariably com-

plete and imperforate. On the other hand, the tabulee of the

same region in S. Howsii are numerous, and are, mostly or

wholly, perforated by central apertures. Hence many of the

calices in this latter type have their floors formed by one of

these perforated tabulee.

(e) The walls of the corallites in the peripheral region of

the corallum are in M/.? tumida greatly thickened, but the

thickening is approximately uniform and shows no regular

intermissions. In S. Hows?7, on the other hand, the walls of

the corallites in the same region are intermittently thickened,

and thus assume a moniliform or beaded structure.

(f) 10? tumida does not appear to possess the singular

thick-walled circular tubes which are so commonly developed

in S. Howsii at the angles of junction of the normal cor-

allites.

As to the synonymy and nomenclature of MM. ? tumida, a

good deal of confusion has been caused by the fact (which I

have only recently come to appreciate fully) that M7. ? tumida

and §. Howsii have hitherto been imperfectly or not at all

separated from one another—this being not unnatural when it

is remembered that the two commonly occur together and are

externally very similar. Hence some observers have either

included both types under the name of JV. twmida, or have

founded their descriptions of JZ. tumida upon specimens which

really belong to S. Howsit.

It is quite clear that Phillips himself included at least two

different forms under the name of Calamopora tumida. One

form (‘ Geol. of Yorkshire,’ pl. 1. figs. 49-51) is almost cer-

tainly the form which I have, here and elsewhere, regarded

as Monticulipora tumida. Another form (cid. pl. 1. figs. 52,

56, 57) may be taken, with an equal approach to certainty,

to be the type which I have here called Stenopora Howsi.

Under these circumstances, considering the very brief nature

of the description given by Phillips, it would perhaps have

been best to have suppressed the name of “ tuwmida” alto-

gether; but the wide currency which it has acquired renders

this impossible. I shall therefore retain it for the species

here so named; and in giving a synonymy of the species I

should omit all the figures given by Phillips in plate 1. of his

‘ Geology of Yorkshire,’ except figs. 49, 50, and 51.

to Micro-Paleontology. 295

Again, it is difficult to avoid the conclusion that M‘Coy, in

his great work (Brit. Pal. Foss. p. 82), applied Phillips’s

name of “twmida” to the form which I understand to be

Stenopora Howsti. ‘This is shown partly by the fact that

M‘Coy only refers to one of Phillips’s figures, that being

fig. 52 (by obvious misprint given as fig. 25), which I regard

as a figure of S. Howsi; and partly by the fact that his

description applies admirably to S. Howszi, but not at all to the

form which | take as MW. ? twmida, Phill. Hence, if this view

be accepted, the name of Stenopora tumida, M‘Coy, must be

omitted from the synonymy of J/.? tumida, Phill., sp., and

must be given as a synonym of Stenopora Howsit, Nich., as

the retention of the specific name of ¢wmida for the latter

would lead to hopeless confusion.

It would, further, seem probable that under the name of

Cheetetes tumidus, Milne-Kdwards and Haime included more

than one form. The figure which they give in the ‘ British

Fossil Corals’ (pl. xlv. fig. 3) is apparently referable to

Stenopora Howsiw; but they probably had also examined the

true M.? tumida; and they certainly included under the same

title the wholly distinct type described by De Koninck as

Calamopora inflata, and by M‘Coy as Stenopora inflata. It

is therefore only in part that Chetetes tumidus, EK. & H., can

be quoted as a synonym of Monticulipora? tumida.

Finally, [may just add that I am inclined to think that

the form described by Prof. De Koninck as Monticulipora

twmida is really quite distinct from either of the British forms.

M. De Koninck was good enough to furnish me with authentic

specimens of the Belgian type ; and though they are unfortu-

nately in a state of preservation which has prevented my

making thin sections of them, I have been led to the above

conclusion from their general appearance, and especially from

the fact that the corallites of the peripheral region are inclined

to the surface at a much more acute angle than is the case in

M. ? tumida or in S. Howsit, while that region of the corallum

is itself much more contracted in proportion to the size of the

stems.

4, Remarks upon 'Tabulipora Urii, Young.

Since the foregoing was written, I have had the opportu-

nity of reading the interesting paper which Mr. John Young

has just published (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. Sept. 1883,

p- 154) upon a Monticuliporoid from the Carboniferous rocks

of Scotland, which he identifies with Cellepora Uri, Flem.,

and places in a new genus under the title of Tabulipora.

296 Dr. H. A. Nicholson’s Contributions

According to Mr. Young, this form is a dendroid coral of the

usual type of the Monticuliporoids, but especially distinguished

by the nature of its tabule. In the axial region the corallites

are stated to be without tabule, while in the peripheral region

the tabule are numerous and are perforated by ‘roundly

crescentic ’ or “ reniform”’ openings, which are so directed

that ‘the concave edges of the opening in branching speci-

mens is invariably turned towards the lower end of the

branches.” In longitudinal sections of the corallites the

perforated tabule are stated to appear as “a series of small

thin projecting points with a little rounded knob at their ends.”

It would further appear from Mr. Young’s description that

the walls of the corallites are not annulated in the peripheral

region, and that mural pores are not present.

The perforated tabule render it clear that this form is dis-

tinct from that which I regard as M.? tumdda, Phill., and it

only remains therefore to say a few words as to its relations

to Stenopora Howstt. In so doing, the question of mural

pores can be left out of account (as not detected in either

form), and the only two features of importance which need be

discussed are the tabule and the walls of the corallites. As

regards 8. Hows?i, it is not uncommon for the central perfora-

tions of the tabule to have one margin slightly protuberant,

and thus to become rudely reniform ; but the curved edges of

different perforations certainly do not point in any particular

direction in any particular specimen, but, on the contrary,

point in different directions. Apart from this, however, I can-

not regard the mere presence of perforated tabule as sufficient

to preclude the reference of Zabulipora Uri to the genus

Stenopora, Lonsd., since these structures exist in S. Howsti,

and probably in other species of Stenoporaas well. If, on the

other hand, I rightly understand Mr. Young to state that the

corallites in the peripheral region in Yabulipora Urit have

walls destitute of annular thickenings, then, certainly, this

form cannot be referred to the genus Stenopora, since the

moniliform or annulated wall is the most essential character of

the latter genus.

Apart from the character just mentioned, Tabulipora Urii,

Young, would appear to be extremely similar to Stenopora

Howsii, Nich., and if they had agreed in the structure of the

wall, I should have been disposed to regard them as undoubt-

edly identical. Should this ultimately prove to be the case, I

must frankly admit, however, that I shall not feel inclined to

abandon my specific name in favour of that of “ Uri,” Fle-

ming. Nor, indeed, should I, under any circumstances, regard

it as advisable to resuscitate Fleming’s species, even if such

soe

Bil et cy 5 Oy SR NMRA ge

to Micro- Paleontology. 297

a resuscitation could be effected with the certainty that we

had to deal with Fleming’s original specimen or specimens.

In this repugnance to the revival of a title so defined origi-

nally as to be absolutely undeterminable, [ think I should

not find myself singular, especially when it is recollected that

Fleming’s entire description (‘ Brit. Animals,’ p. 533) was

as follows:—“ Cellepora Urii. Branched, round, about a

quarter of an inch in diameter, form round.—Muillepore, Ure,

Ruth. 228, t. xx. f. 1.” If, therefore, it should be proved

that Tabulipora Urii (as described by Mr. Young) is a

good species, it should, in my opinion, stand as 7. Uri,

Young, and not as T. Urii, Flem. It may just be added that

even admitting that Ure gave, to begin with, a good figure of

his “ Millepore,” this is not one of the cases in which a figure

can be used as a basis for specific identification, since all

modern paleontologists would, I think, admit the total inade-

quacy of a mere figure of the external appearance of a speci-

men of one of the dendroid Monticuliporoids or Stenoporoids

as a guide for specific, or even generic, determination.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE X.,

1. A fragment of Stenopora Howsti, Nich., of the natural size. From

the Carboniferous shales of Redesdale, Northumberland.

2. Portion of the surface of the same, enlarged twelve times.

3. A ange calice, enlarged twenty-four times, showing a perforated

tabula.

Fig. 4. Portion of a tangential section, taken across the unthickened seg-

ments of the tubes, enlarged twelve times.

5. Part of the same section, enlarged twenty-four times, showing

interstitial spiniform tubes.

6. Part of another tangential section, enlarged forty-five times,

showing the original bounding-lines of the corallites.

Fig. 7. Part of a tangential section, taken across the thickened portions

of the corallites, at a point where a “macula” is present, en-

larged twelve times.

Fig. 8. Another tangential section, where no “ macula” is shown, simi-

larly enlarged.

Fig. 9. Part of the centre of a transverse section, showing the thin-walled

polygonal axial corallites, enlarged twelve times.

Fig. 10. Part of the periphery of a transverse section, enlarged twenty-

four times, showing the beaded structure of the walls and the

perforated tabulee.

Fig. 11. Part of the periphery of a transverse section of S. Howsii, var.

arctica, enlarged twenty-four times.

298 Mr. R. McLachlan on the

XX XI1.—Neuroptera of the Hawaiian Islands—Part II.

Planipennia, with General Summary. By Roperr

McLacuuan, F.R.S. &ce.

THE materials for this group are very limited, consisting

only of one species of Hemerobiide, four of Chrysopide, and

one of Myrmeleontide.

The only interesting feature consists in the existence of

aberrant and probably strictly endemic forms of Chrysopide.

Hemerobiide.

Megalomus, sp.

One ?, gummed on card (Blackburn, No. 25).

I do not feel justified in naming and describing this insect in

the absence of the other sex or of more materials, especially

as there are no striking colour-characters. It is of the size

and form of the European WM. hirtus, L., and also resembles

it in colour to some extent; but the transverse markings on

the anterior wings are less pronounced, and the apical spots

on the posterior wings are wanting. It would not be safe to

hazard an opinion as to the species being endemic or other-

wise. Small Hemerobiide are liable to be carried on plants

and shrubs when in the pupa state.

Chrysopide.

* ANOMALOCHRYSA, n. g.

Tn form and facies similar to Chrysopa, but the wings have

three or more series of gradate nervules (at any rate in the

anterior pair), which are sometimes irregular; dividing ner-

vule of the third cubital cellule angular beneath (thickened on

its inner side), so that the cellule it forms is triangular ; sub-

costa confluent with the costa before the apex of the wing.

Antenne scarcely longer than the wings.

Labrum truncate (this character a little doubtful owing to

the condition).

Tarsal claws dilated internally at the base.

Abdomen of male ending in a dilated flattened superior

plate, beneath which is an elongate triangular infertor appen-

dage, the whole structure causing the apex to appear dilated.

The characters emphasized in the foregoing description

indicate structures aberrant for the family as a whole; but

nevertheless the two species have the aspect of Chrysopa in

all respects, and should be placed near Hypochrysa.

Neuroptera of the Hawavian Islands. 299

Anomalochrysa hepatica, n. sp.

Body liver-coloured, with a purplish tint (probably varied

with paler on the pectus &c. in the living insect). Head

polished, paler posteriorly ; face yellowish (at any rate in

the male); palpi brownish ; antenne brownish (paler in the

male and darker in the female in the pair before me), the

basal joint strongly bulbose.

Pronotum scarcely longer than broad, hardly narrowed an-

teriorly ; a very deep transverse impression before the pos-

terior margin.

Legs pale yellow, the tarsi (especially the apical joint and

claws) darker; posterior tibies with a fuscescent line above

(more distinct in the female).

Abdomen of the male clothed above with rather long and

dense hairs directed toward the base (in the female there are

only a few scattered short hairs directed in a contrary manner).

In the male the terminal segment forms a large nearly cir-

cular plate, shallowly concave above, but with an incrassate

rim; beneath this plate is the large broadly triangular inferior

appendage, which nearly equals the superior plate in length,

and is obtuse and inturned at its apex; between these parts is

seen a styliform process (penis ?), curved downward, its apex

resting in the inturned apex of the inferior appendage (the

lateral edges of this appendage are thickened and concave at

the base).

Wings vitreous, shining, and iridescent, moderately elon-

gate, the apex obtuse (the posterior considerably narrower) ;

neuration olivaceous (probably greenish in life), but appearing

darker in certain lights ; the base of the radius and the com-

mencement of the sector (which is thickened at that part)

blackish ; all the neuration furnished with rather long black

hairs, each of which proceeds from a black point or minute

tubercle ; pterostigmatic region olivaceous, rather long, the

subcosta ending with it; five series of gradate nervules in the

anterior wings, of which the inner consists of about twelve

nervules, the second of about seven or eight, the third of six

or seven, the fourth and fifth of about seven each (but the

intermediate series are more or less irregular) ; about twenty-

five antepterostigmatic costal nervules; in the posterior

wings there are only four series of gradate nervules.

Length of body 8 millim.; expanse, ¢ 27 millim., ¢ 30

millim.

“Occurs at an elevation of about 4000 feet on Haleakala,

Maui” (Blackburn, one g, one 3, No. 30).

300 : Mr. R. McLachlan on the

Anomalochrysa rufescens, ni. sp.

Body pale reddish. Head polished ; antennx, palpi, and

legs concolorous with the body ; the basal joint of the antennz

strongly bulbose ; claws darker.

Pronotum longer than broad, slightly narrowed anteriorly,

with a deep transverse impressed line before the posterior

margin.

Abdomen apparently varied with darker (blackish ?), and

with pale margins to the segments ; hairy clothing slight and

ordinary. In the male the apex has an analogous formation

to that seen in A. hepatica; but the superior plate is more

oval and less conspicuous (inferior appendage probably nar-

rower, but uncertain, owing to the method of preparation of

the specimen).

Wings vitreous, iridescent, those of the male distinctly

shorter and broader than in the female ; in the male there 7s a

peculiar formation of the costal margin of the anterior pair ;

this is shallowly excised soon after the base, and before the

pterostigmatic region it is rather suddenly elevated and in-

crassated, after which the costal area is very narrow (in the

posterior wings the only peculiarity is a thickening and slight

elevation of the costa at the corresponding point; in the

female there is a slight thickening of the costa in both pairs

of wings, but with no sudden elevation) ; neuration strong,

olivaceous (probably decidedly greenish in life), set with

short black hairs ; pterostigmatic region dingy yellowish (the

texture at this region is altered and is subcoriaceous) ; three

series of gradate nervules in the anterior wings, of which the

inner consists of eight nervules in the male and eleven in the

female, the second of seven in the male and nine in the female,

and the third (or outer) is continuous with the superior cubi-

tus (in the male the sector and the inner series of gradate ner-

vules are thickened) ; posterior wings with only two series of

gradate nervules.

Length of body, ¢ 9 millim., 9 10 millim.; expanse, g

21 millim., 2? 25 millim. (Blackburn, one 3, No. 20, one

?, No. 21).

This is less complex in its neuration than A. hepatica, but

the diversity in the form in the two sexes and the very singular

condition of the costal margin in the male render it in some

respects the more peculiar.

Chrysopa microphya, i. sp.

Body yellowish testaceous (“ bright green”’ in life). Head

polished ; palpi, antennz, and legs concolorous with the body ;

Neuroptera of the Hawatian Islands. 301

basal joint of antenne: strongly bulbose; claws dilated inter-

nally at the base.

Abdomen apparently having a blackish band on either side,

in which are yellow (or greenish) spots ; clothed with rather

long, but not dense, hairs. In the male it is terminated by a

broad oval superior plate, concave beneath, and ventrally by

a much shorter nearly semicircular plate.

Wings vitreous, slightly iridescent, ovate, subobtuse ; neu-

ration strong, open ; longitudinal nervures greenish, transverse

and gradate nervules mostly blackish, the costal nervules pale

at either end, the whole set with rather long black hairs;

pterostigmatic region elongate (very long and somewhat dilated

in posterior wings of male), greenish; subcosta becoming

confluent with the costa before the apex; partition nervule of

the third cubital cell extending beyond the nervule above it

(the cellule oval) ; six and eight nervules in the two gradate

series in the anterior wings of male, and four and five (or six)

in those of the female (in the pair before me); fifteen to

seventeen antepterostigmatic nervules.

Length of body 6 millim.; expanse, g 20 millim., 9

22 millim.

One of the smallest species and, in some respects, aberrant,

the condition of the subcosta showing analogy with Hypo-

chrysa, and the formation of the apex of the abdomen with

Anomalochrysa; but as there are only two series of gradate

nervules it cannot be located in the latter genus.

“Not uncommon near Honolulu” (blackburn, one 6,

one §, No. 22).

Chrysopa oceanica, Walker.

Chrysopa oceanica, Walker, Brit. Mus. Neuropt. p. 238.

In the British Museum, from Capt. Beechey; not sent

home by Mr. Blackburn (cf McLachl. Journ. Linn. Soc.,

Zoology, vol. ix. p. 268).

Myrmeleontide.

Formicaleo perjurus, Walker.

Myrmeleon perjurus, Walker, Brit. Mus, Neuropt. p. 340.

Myrmeleon violentus, Walker, l. c, p. 348, var.

Jn the British Museum, from Captain Beechey. ‘‘ Occurs

sparingly in a ravine rising very abruptly from the sea-coast

near Uoluolu, Maui” (Blackburn, No. 27).

Violentus is the form in which the dark streak in the

apex of the posterior wings is absent. One of Mr. Black-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 22

302 On the Neuroptera of the Hawatian Islands.

burn’s examples shows no trace of this streak ; in the other it

is faintly indicated, but incomplete.

In the Journ. Linn. Soc., Zoology, vol. ix. p. 277, I united

this with #. striola (Leach), Walker, a species occurring in

Australia and also in several of the Pacific islands (and which

in all probability is F. béstgnatus, Rambur). Perhaps this

connexion is just, but it is well to have further information.

Summary of Hawatian Neuroptera.

Psrupo-NEUROPTERA.

Termitide.

Calotermes castaneus, Burm. Calotermes marginipennis, Latr’.

Embide.

Oligotoma insularis, n. sp.

Psocide.

Psocus, sp. Elipsocus vinosus, n. sp.

Odonata.

Pantala flavescens, F. Acrion (?) hawaiiense, n. sp.

Tramea lacerata, Hag. pacificum, n. sp.

Lepthemis Blackburni, n. sp. deceptor, n. sp.

Anax junius, Drury. ealliphya, n. sp.

strenuus, Hag. Megalagrion Blackburni, n. sp.

Agrion (?) xanthomelas, Se/ys. oceanicum, Nn. sp.

PLANIPENNIA.

Hemerobiide.

Megalomus, sp.

Chrysopide.

Anomalochrysa hepatica, n, sp. Chrysopa microphya, n. sp.

——— rufescens, n. sp. oceanica, Walk.

Myrmeleontide.

Formicaleo perjurus, Walk.

Twenty-three species in all. No Trichoptera have been

discovered, but it seems to me impossible to believe that none

exist; nevertheless their number is probably limited ; they

should be sought for on the mountains where there is constant

fresh water.

Meagre as the Neuropterous fauna of the islands appa-

rently is, the materials are nevertheless instructive. ‘Three

——

On the Brain in Vertebrates and Invertebrates. 303

distinct faunistic factors seem to have played a part. The

North-American element is represented by two, no doubt

artificially introduced, species of white ants, and certain large

dragon-flies, which having flown over at some time continue

to breed. The Australian element is very small, and proba-

bly consists solely of thesingle ant-lion, which may be regarded

as Polynesian. The strictly endemic element is the largest,

and is represented by (dnter alia) the Agrionide and the

peculiar forms of Chrysopide, two groups of very different

habits—the former necessitating a constant supply of fresh

water with aquatic animal life for food, the latter a supply of

small soft-bodied plant-frequenting insects on which their

larvee feed.

Such, then, is my opinion on the materials for the order of

insects of which I have made a special study ; but any broad

generalization on the Insect-fauna must be left until the

reports of other specialists on the results of Mr. Blackburn’s

investigations can be collated and correlated.

XXXIV.—On the Answerable Divisions of the Brain in Ver-

tebrates and Invertebrates. By Prof. Owen, C.B., F.R.S.,

&e.

THE principles or generalizations of homology and analogy

force themselves on the attention of naturalists in many

relations, and suggest questions on divers subjects. ‘Take the

heart of a Cephalopod, for example. Is it the homologue or

the analogue of that of a fish? Is its relation thereto

only that of identity of function, sometimes expressed by the

term “ homodynamous,” which is synonymous with “ ana-

logous ” in questions of this nature ?

No naturalist, it may be presumed, doubts the homology as

well as analogy or homodynamy of the heart of the cuttle-fish

with the heart of the snail. If the latter were propounded as

the subject of the inquiry, a biologist of eminence might pro-

nounce that it was merely homodynamous with the heart of a

fish, conceiving relations of position to be essential in deter-

mining the question of homology. Accepting the current

views of such topical relations he might, probably would,

reply, “‘ The heart of the snail is on the back or ‘ dorsal’ aspect

of the body, while that of the fish is on the opposite or ‘ ven-

tral’ aspect.”

22*

304 Prof. Owen on the Answerable Divisions of the

Generalizing such particular questions and accepting the

current replies, he would be justified in affirming that there

was no homology between the vascular centres or systems of

Vertebrates and Invertebrates.

Thesameconclusion, on the above assumption of their respec-

tive backs and bellies, affects another and, in this relation, more

important organic system. Homology would be repudiated

as between the myelencephalon of Vertebrates and the centres

of the nervous system in Articulates. In the former the

“brain,” and, as in Amphiorus, a more constant part, viz.

the ‘* spinal marrow,” are held to be on the ‘ dorsal ”’ aspect

of the body; in Articulates the ganglionic chord, functioning

as “ spinal marrow,” is held to be on the “ ventral” aspect of

the body. They may be, accordingly, “ analogous” or

‘homodynamous,” but are not answerable parts in the

“homologous ”’ sense.

An exception is indeed made by some zootomists in favour

of one portion of the neural axis :—“ The central nervous

system of the Vertebrata is to be regarded as representing the

superior or cerebral ganglia cf Invertebrata” *,—that 1s, as

being homologous with such ganglia and with their coalesced

and developed condition in the Cephalopod; although, im

fact, the part described as “brain” in such Invertebrate

represents no more than the part of the brain in Vertebrates

which is in connexion with the senses of sight and smell.

The ground, in short, on which such conclusions are based

is simply that of the relative position to a part or aspect of

the body as this may be carried by the animal during loco-

motion.

But before testing the value of such support of the conclu-

sion, as it affects the question of homology, I may refer to

the degree in which it checks or paralyzes another and higher

biological line of thought. Gegenbaur, for example, finds

it ‘‘ quite impossible to derive the spinal chord from it” f,

that is, to derive phylogenetically the continuous or more

or less uniform myelon of Vertebrates from the ganglionic

myelon of Arthropods and Annulates. I by no means think

that a study of their developmental relations is to be aban-

doned in despair, the answerable aspects being rightly deter-

mined. But, before moving further on this line, I may remark

that enlargements at the points where nerves communicate with

* Gegenbaur, ‘ Elements of Comparative Anatomy,’ Ray Lankester’s

edition, 8vo, 1878, p. 501. Prof. Packard, more consistently, repudiates

even this degree of homology (see his ‘Second Report of the U.S, Ento-

mological Commission,’ 1880, p. 224).

+ Op, cit. 2b.

Brain in Vertebrates and Invertebrates. 305

or pass from the Vertebrate myelon are many in some fishes

(e.g. Zrigla), and they are present, though in smaller number,

in the short myelon of Orthagoriscus*; and, further, that

the researches ot the microscopist and the experiments of the

physiologist have led to the conclusion that the seemingly

continuous and uninterrupted tracts of the spinal chord of

Vertebrates are due to a coalescence through superadded or

interposed neurine of as many ganglionic centres receptive

of neural impressions, sensory or motory, which essentially

are as distinct, or in as special topical relations to the nerves

proceeding from or returning to such centres, as are the

physically seemingly separate centres in the so-called “ ventral

ganglionic chords” of Invertebrates T.

To what indeed are the grounds of such above-cited judg-

ments on the important homological questions at issue reduced

when subjected to anatomical analysis ?

One of the several ganglionic enlargements of the knotted

chord and centre of the nervous system in Invertebrates is

propounded as the homologue of the brain in Vertebrates ;

and [ accept such homology, but only in the restricted sense or

degree above noted. Jor [ hold that the neural centres in rela-

tion to the sensations and motions of the tongue, jaws, and other

parts of the mouth in Invertebrates, which centres are in direct

communication through continuous “crura”’ or chords with

the so-called “brain,” are physiologically answerable to the

parts of the brain with like nerves and functions in Verte-

brates.

That there are parts of the Vertebrate myelencephalon which

correspond with, are certainly analogous to, and, I believe,

homologous with, such parts in Invertebrates, I have elsewhere

endeavoured to demonstrate |. The sole ground for rejecting

such homology, or for its restriction to a part only of the brain

of Invertebrates, is a different relation of the gullet to the

prot- and metencephalous masses in Vertebrates and Inverte-

brates. The space dividing the fore brain (“ protencephalon ”

of Vertebrates, ‘“‘ supercesophageal ganglion” of Invertebrates)

from the hind brain (“ epencephalon ” of Vertebrates, “ sub-

esophageal ganglion” of Invertebrates) is so reduced in

Cephalopods, especially the Dibranchiates, that the recogni-

tion of their homology with the corresponding divisions of the

brain in Vertebrates becomes obvious.

The intervening space is scarcely, if at all, less in the

* ¢ Anatomy of Vertebrates,’ vol. i. 1866, p, 271,

t Newport, Phil. Trans. 1848, p. 243.

t ‘Aspects of the Body in Vertebrates and Invertebrates,’ 8yo, 1833,

306 = Prof. Owen on the Answerable Divisions of the

brains of the lower Vertebrates. It needs only to refer to the

comparative anatomy of the brains of fishes; and here I would

refer to a late contribution thereto by the accomplished

“ Docent der Anatomie zu Berlin,” the ‘ Oberstabsarzt Dr.

Rabi-Ruckard,” entitled ‘‘ Das Grosshirn der Knochenfische

und seine Anhangsgebilde.” A reference to the figures 1 and

2 of Taf. xii. of this memoir in the ‘ Archiv fiir Anatomie

und Physiologie,’ 1883, of a trout’s brain (Salmo farto) suffices

to show the homologous space under the name of “ ventriculus

tertius.”” It is one of the demonstrations of the foregoing homo-

logy. The amount of neurine in the lateral] walls of this

interspace due to the continuation of cerebral tracts homologous

with those uniting the prot- and epencephalic divisions of the

Cephalopodal brain, commonly termed “ supra-” and “ infra-

cesophageal ’”’ ganglions, is somewhat greater in the fish, and

the alimentary tract which in the Cephalopod traverses that

interval, is represented in the Vertebrate by the modified

remnant of the primitive gullet. This remnant extends

upward (dorsad) beyond the fish’s brain, penetrates the carti-

laginous basis of the frontal bone, and is there arrested; in

the opposite or “ ventral ”’ direction the “ transcerebral tract”

extends into the cartilaginous basis or floor of the cranium,

which shuts off its original communication with the pharynx ;

the so-obstructed or closed parts of the transcerebral tract are

converted into the parts called respectively the “ pineal” and

“pituitary glands,” with the intervening “ ventricle” and its

“infundibular” prolongation.

Influenced by the foregoing facts, and reasonings there-

upon, I deem the grounds for restricting the homologies of

the nerve-centres of Vertebrates and Invertebrates to one

portion only of the brain of the latter, known as the “ supra-

cesophageal ganglion,” to be inadequate; and a sense of this

inadequacy led me to institute the series of embryological and

other researches on the conditions of the course of the gullet

through the brain-centres of Invertebrates which were sub-

mitted to the Biological Section of the British Association

at the Meeting held at York in 1881*,. This communica-

tion was followed by the “ Researches on the Homologies

of the Neural Centres, their Parts and connected Nerves,”

submitted to the Linnean Society of London in 18827.

The conclusions to which I was led enabled me, or seemed

to me, to show that the position in which the body of an

animal is carried in relation to the earth’s surface is of less

* “Reports,” &c. in ‘ Transactions of the British Association,’ &e. for

1881. 8vo.

+ ‘ Journal of the Linnean Society, Zoology, vol. xvii. 1882.

Brain in Vertebrates and Invertebrates. 307

value in determining the homology of its aspects than are the

relative positions of the nervous and vascular centres to a

given surface or aspect of the body. I concluded, therefore,

that the “ neural surface”’ of an Arthropod, indicated by the

position and course of the main or central part of the nervous

system, was homologous with the surface or aspect of the body

so indicated in a Vertebrate; also that the condition which

seemed to alter that relation in respect of a small part of the

neural axis, in the Invertebrate, was inadequate to affect con-

clusions of homology based on the permanent relations to sur-

faces of the body shown by the nervous and vascular centres

respectively, especially as such condition, affecting a small part

of the Invertebrate nervous system, was discernible, though

transitory, in the brain of the Vertebrate embryo.

Consequently I proposed to apply the term “ neural” to

the surface or aspect of the body which in progressive motion

is carried upright and directed backward in man, and to

apply the term “‘hemal” to the surface or aspect of the

body which is carried upright and turned forward in man;

and I proposed to apply the same terms to signify homologous

surfaces indicated by the positions of the nervous and vascular

centres, which surfaces are horizontal and are carried respec-

tively upwards and downwards in Vertebrates below mankind,

but are carried downwards and upwards respectively in the

Invertebrates above the “ Radiaires”’ of Cuvier.

In higher members of this division (the starfish for ex-

ample) the homologue of the “ cesophageal ring ”’ is the centre

of the nervous system. As organization progresses the por-

tion of the ring opposite to the part or aspect on which the

mouth opens becomes the seat of developments in relation to

the necessity of a provision receptive of impressions or influ-

ences affecting the more exposed and upturned surface of the

body. Next follows the prolongation of the post-oral part of

the frame, which may be segmented and cuirassed in some or

be left sott and unjointed in others. But the primitive neural

ring round the gullet remains in both the Annulate and Mol-

luscous series. Such course of the gullet is finally checked at

the higher Vertebrate stage by the development of a branchial

chamber which takes in the materials for digestion as well as

for respiration.

308 My. G. A. Boulenger on the Nyctisaura.

XXX V.—Remarks on the Nyctisaura.

By G. A. BOULENGER.

AMPHICELIAN vertebree, distinct parietal bones, incomplete

orbital ring, and absence of a parietal bar are the principal

characters upon which the suborder Nyctisaura is based.

Cope *, however, makes a restriction as to the former charac-

ter, writing ‘ vertebrae usually amphiccelian ;” but in what

forms the exception exists is not stated. So far as I know,

proceelian vertebrae occur in three genera only, viz. Huble-

pharis, Psilodactylus, and Coleonyx. No exception to the

second character has been recorded; and I was not a little

surprised to find that these very genera which so strikingly

diftered in the structure of their vertebra, differed also from

all other Geckos in having the parietal single, as in most

Cionocrania proper.

Now that undoubted Nyctisaura are known to present ex-

ceptions to the two former characters, and as the absence of

the orbital ring and temporal bar cannot be considered to

distinguish them constantly from the Cionocrania (for the

Varanide have the orbit incompletely surrounded, and the

parietal bar is absent in the Helodermatide), there remains no

character of sufficient importance to justify the suborder

Nyctisaura ; therefore I believe that it has to be cancelled.

But I propose to maintain the old definition of the group as

diagnostic of the family Geckonide, and to refer the three

aberrant genera mentioned above to a distinct family, which I

name Eublepharide. In spite of their extraordimary geo-

graphical distribution (Hublepharis is Indian, Coleonyx Cen-

tral-American, and Ps¢lodactylus West-African), these three

genera are very closely allied, not only in structure, but even

in coloration. They all possess connivent movable eyelids.

XXX VI.— Contributions to our Knowledge of the Spongida.

By H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &e.

[Plates XI., XII., XIII, & XIV.]

My “Contributions” in this respect may appear incoherent,

but this will be understood by the statement that they are

compiled from notes, sketches, and specimens put aside for

* Proc. Acad. Philad. 1864, p. 226.

Contributions to our Knowledge of the Spongida. 309

more convenient opportunity of publication, from which the

following species have been advisedly selected.

Order III. PSAMMONEMATA.

Family 1. BIBULIDA.

Char. ‘ Solid fibre chiefly without core of foreign objects”

i) J

(‘ Annals,’ 1875, vol. xvi. p. 132).

Coscinoderma lanuginosum, n. gen. et sp.

Battledore-shaped, subsquare, compressed, stipitate, covered

with a white, continuous cribriform incrustation of remarkable

uniformity in its foramination. Surface for the most part even

throughout, interrupted only by a small proliferous projection

or outgrowth on one side and a line of vents situated pandean-

pipe-like along the upper border, between which the structure

is denticulated. Pores in plurality, situated in the sarcode

tympanizing the interstices of the cribriform incrustation.

Incrustation composed of microscopic foreign bodies, chiefly

quartz-grains and fragments of sponge-spicules, imbedded in

the anastomosing dermal fibre with such firmness, evenness,

and regularity as to constitute a white, compact, reticulated,

smooth, shagreen-like structure, whose interstices are uni-

formly subcircular and about the same size, viz. 1-90th inch

in diameter, underneath which again the “ subdermal cavities ”’

make their appearance in much the same form, but twice the

size and in the midst of fibre only. Fibre not less remarkable

than the incrustation, for there appears to be almost an entire

absence of the usual attenuation, the whole being almost uni-

formly alike in size and colour, viz. very small and fine, very

long, scantily branched, curled up together in little whorls

(representing so much wool under the same condition), of a

deep sponge-colour, in the midst of which are excavated the

channels of the pore and excretory systems, encircled respec-

tively by the whorls of fibre, through which, in the absence

of sarcode, their calibre is still maintained. When viewed

under the microscope very few of the filaments are found to

contain foreign bodies. Size of entire specimen 8 X 8 inches

square by 14 inch thick; stem 2 inches long, 13 broad,

and 4 thick, compressed, and terminated by a root-like ex-

pansion.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Freemantle, 8.W. Australia.

Obs. The remarkable appearance of the incrustation, inter-

nal structure, and characters of the fibre, if not the battledore-

310 Mr. H. J. Carter’s Contributions to our

shape of the specimen also, renders this species very easy of

determination. ‘There would be nothing extraordinary in the

cribriform incrustation, as it is common among the Bibulida

and Hercinida, were it not that it is so uniform in structure,

smooth, and continuous, on account of the entire absence of

any projection of the dermal fibre to render the surface poly-

gonally divided, as in these families generally ; but the wool-

like character of the fibre, owing to its being so small and

uniform in size, 7s peculiar. ‘The specimen, which is very

striking, is in the Bowerbank general collection at the British

Museum.

Order V. ECHINONEMATA.

Family 1. Ecry onIDA.

Char. “ Echinated with proper spicules on the fibre”

(‘ Annals,’ /. c. p. 133).

Ectyon mauritianus, n. sp. (Pl. XII. fig. 3, a, 6.)

Entire form not seen. General and microscopic characters

the same as those of Hctyon sparsus (‘ Annals,’ 1871, vol. vii.

p- 270), with the exception of the spicule, which is nearly

twice the size and still more beautifully ornamented, as may

be seen by the illustration (Pl. XII. fig. 3, a), which is drawn

upon the same scale as that of HZ. sparsus for comparison (op.

et loc. cit. pl. xvi. fig. 8, a, 6). It is about 52 by 4-6000ths

inch in size, not including the projections of the spines late-

rally, each of which amounts to 1-6000th inch on each side,

which gives a total diameter of 6-6000ths, for its greatest

dimensions. ‘The spines, instead of being circular and based

on the surface of the spicule, as in L. sparsus, are compressed

laterally and raised on an angular ridge or inflation, whereby

the spicule presents a moniliform appearance, that is, a series

of constrictions, which renders it so much more beautiful than

that of L. sparsus, as before stated.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Mauritius.

Obs. This specimen, with many others, was collected at the

Mauritius by Col. Pike, then U.-S8. Consul there, and for-

warded to me by the late Dr. Dickie, F.R.S., in the month

of November 1872*. It is not more than 2 inches in dia-

* IT learnt from Mr. J.S8. Tyerman in October 1881 that, when he

was living at Liverpool, the collection was sent to him first, and that he

sent it on to Dr. Dickie, the latter to Dr. Bowerbank, who, after a

Knowledge of the Spongida. 311

meter, but is sufficiently large for me to see that, in general

character, it is, as above stated, precisely like Ectyon sparsus.

I have used a masculine termination for the specific name, in

accordance with that adopted by Dr. Gray (Proc. Zool. Soc.

Lond. 1867, p. 515), otherwise the termination on” indi-

cated neutrality; but as “Hctyon”’ appears to have no other

meaning than that which Dr. Gray has assigned to it, and,

like many other names applied to his genera of sponges, also

appears to be nothing more than a “ fortuitous combination of

letters,” as he himself states (op. e¢ loc. cit. p. 500), I follow

his example. Moreover, as there can be no doubt that the

generic name was intended for Dr. Bowerbank’s “ West-

Indian sponge” (Mon. Brit. Spong. vol. i. p. 275, pl.

xvii. fig. 289), otherwise undescribed, I have used the term

“ Ketyon sparsus” (Nos. 462-3, being in halves) for that

species in the British Museum which, if not identical with,

is, at all events, most closely allied to it (‘ Annals,’ 7. c.) ; hence

am carrying on Dr. Gray’s appellative.

Ectyon flabelliformis, n. sp. (Pl. XI. fig. 1, 1a.)

Flabelliform, pedunculate, composed of a large thin frond

divided into three lobes, one central and two lateral, presenting

* concentric lines or ridges of growth on the surface; round

undulating margin and short peduncular stem. Consistence

tough, firm. Colour brown-yellow. Vents circular, large,

numerous, and alone on one side, more or less irregular in

form, and accompanied by smaller ones in groups, as in Hetyon

sparsus (see Pl. XII. fig. 2, c), on the other, where the latter

appear to be for the pores, and the most regular or circular

ones only of the former for the vents, all sphinctrally tym-

panized by the dermal sarcode. Structure compact, clathrous

throughout, the clathrous cavities extending to. the surtace,

where they are also tympanized by the dermal sarcode, whose

disappearance in the dried state causes some confusion as to

function from their resemblance to the great irregularly cir-

cumscribed vents just mentioned (see Pl. XII. fig. 2, d).

Spicule of one form only, viz. acuate, curved chiefly to-

wards the large end, pointed at the other, bearing verticils of

short spines throughout at nearly equal distances from each

other ; pomt smooth, large and spined (PI. XI. fig. 1, a) ;

average largest size of spicule about 30 by 3-6000ths inch in its

year, returned it, saying that he had not time to describe the speci-

mens, and finally from Dr. Dickie to myself in July 1872. I have

described several of them, but the rest are too fragmentary and rotten

from the presence of sea-salt to be now worth any thing.

312 Mr. H. J. Carter’s Contributions to our

greatest dimensions; spicules forming the core of the fibre

and echinating its surface in groups respectively, whereby the

free surfaces are all hispid. Size of specimen 21 x 13 inches

square in its greatest dimensions by about 3 inch thick ; stem

well defined, peduncular, short, about 14 inch in diameter

generally.

Hab, Marine.

Loc. West Indies.

Obs, This sponge has the appearance of a large piece of

tanned cow-hide, and thus it may be easily recognized. The

other characters, mutatis mutandis, are like those of Hetyon

sparsus, and the spicule in its largest size, although a little

thinner, is not inferior to that of H. sparsus in point of beauty.

The specimen is in the British Museum, and bears my running

number “ 367.”

I am indebted to my kind friend Mr. Thos. H. Higgin,

F.L.S., of Liverpool, for the illustration of this species (PI.

XI. fig. 1), which has been photographed from a much larger

although similar specimen of the same species in the Liver-

pool Free Museum. It is 83 inches broad, 21 inches high,

and averages (being irregular over both surfaces) about an

inch in thickness; hence the real size is six times that of

the illustration. It is registered “ no. 4. 8. 81. 14,” and was

obtained from Barbadoes.

The cribriform grouping of the ‘ small holes ”’ on the sur-

face over the subcavernous clathrous structure, which may be

easily seen in the illustration of this and that of Hetyon spar-

sus, var. claveformis (Pl. XII. fig. 2, c), another specimen in

the Liverpool Free Museum that will be mentioned presently,

as well as in the original species, viz. Lctyon sparsus, which L

described and illustrated in 1871 (‘ Annals,’ @. c. pl. xvii.

fig. 2), is also characteristic of the surface of the great Sub-

erite from Belize, viz. Spongia Dysoni (‘ Annals,’ 1882,

vol. ix. p. 8350). The photograph (Pl. XI.) represents the

side on which the ‘ small holes ”’ exist.

General Observations on the Ectyones.

The specimen in the British Museum for which I have

adopted the name “Actyon sparsus”’ is solid, thick, flat, and ex-

panded ; but among others still larger, especially that registered

42. 12. 21. 40, there is one which consists of a group of eight

thick erect hollow cylinders, mounted ona stand of “plaster of

Paris,” and numbered ‘ 548.” Altogether the group is about

12x 8 inches horizontally, of which the largest cylinder is

10 inches high, 384 inches thick, and 14 inch across at the

—— | 2

Exiled tai tine

Knowledge of the Spongida. 313

orifice. Here, of course, as in all hollow sponges, the vents

open on the inner surface of the cylinder, and therefore few or

none are on the outside, which thus contrasts strongly with

that of the solid forms.

On the other hand there is a solid cylindrical form in the

Liverpool Free Museum, of which Mr. T. Higgin has also

caused a photograph to be made, and from which the illustra-

tion in Pl. XIi. (fig. 2) has been lithographed. It is 164

inches high by 43 inches thick in its greatest dimensions, and

therefore upwards of three times as large as the photograph,

but clearly shows on the surface the scattered vents (fig. 2,

b) and cribriform grouping of the “smaller holes’? between

them (fig. 2, c), to which I have already alluded, but which I

have heretofore not had an opportunity of illustrating in an

entire specimen of this species; hence am here again indebted

to Mr. ‘Thos. Higgin for his kind assistance *. Being club-

shaped as well as cylindrical, I have, for distinction’s sake,

called this variety of Ectyon sparsus “ claveeformis” (Pl. XII.

fig. 2). Internally the colour is brown-yellow, but, probably

from exposure on the beach where the specimen may have

been picked up, the surface had become so bleached and

white as to simulate a vetreous sponge ; now, however, this has

changed to dirty grey after exposure to a smoky atmosphere.

It is registered 28. 3. 78. 5. As I have lately seen several

examples of this form, but less club-shaped and more regu-

larly cylindrical, I am inclined to think that it is the kind of

growth most commonly assumed by the specimens of this

species which come from the West Indies generally; while

one cannot help being impressed with the fact that the spicules

of all the forms from this district are so much alike that

they alone present no specific difference.

For such sponges Dr. Bowerbank in 1866 (Mon. B. 8S.

vol, ii. p. 14) instituted his genus “ Ophlitaspongia,” having

first illustrated them in 1862 (Phil. Trans. pl. xxx. fig. 7).

After this Duchassaing de Fonbressin and G. Michelotti de-

scribed four species from the Caribbean Sea under the generic

name ‘“‘Agelas” (‘ Spongiaires de la Mer Caraibe,’ p. 76,

1864), apparently illustrating the two above mentioned, viz.

Ketyon sparsus and E. flabelliformis (pl. xv. figs. 1 and 2,

together with their characteristic spiculation in the diagram

“G,” pl. i.) ; but, as usual, there is too much room left for

doubt in their descriptions to make them available. Subse-

* Mr. Higgin got these photographs made for illustrating a description

of the Ectyonida which had been commenced by himself; but not knowing

when he might have time to complete it, they were handed over to me

for this purpose.

314 Mr. H. J. Carter’s Contributions to our

quently Dr. Gray divided Dr. Bowerbank’s genus into the

genera ‘‘Seriatula” and “Eetyon,” allotting to the former our

British species Chalina seriata, and to the latter Dr. Bower-

bank’s ‘ West-Indian sponges,” viz. Hetyon sparsus &c.

(Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1867, p. 515). Schmidt, in 1864

(Spong. adriat. Meeres, Ist Suppl. p. 35, Taf. iv. fig. 2),

described and illustrated the European representative of Hetyon

under the name of Clathria oroides, and in 1870 changed the

name to ‘‘Chalinopsis oroides”’ for his West-Indian speci-

mens (Spongienf. atlantisch. Gebietes, p. 60, Taf. v. fig. 2).

There is yet another species that has come under my obser-

vation, of which only a fragment about 24 inches long exists

in the Bowerbank general collection at the British Museum,

but sufficient for me to compile the following description

under the name of

Ectyon cylindricus, n. sp. (Pl. XIII. fig. 4, a-e.)

Cylindrical, solid, curved (Pl. XIII. fig. 4, a, 5). Con-

sistence firm, resilient. Colour brown ochre-yellow. Surface

even, reticulate. Vents scattered, numerous, large, round,

averaging 1-8th inch in diameter (fig. 4, d). Cribriform

groups of “small holes” not present here. Pores not seen.

Internal structure firm, compact, tough, elastic, traversed

freely by the branches of the excretory canal-systems, which

open at the vents mentioned (fig. 4, 6). Spicule acuate,

curved, sharp-pointed, verticillately spined; average largest

size 30 by 2$-6000ths inch in its greatest dimensions (fig. 4, c) ;

verticils twenty-two in number, about 2-6000ths inch apart

in the centre, diminishing in this respect towards the extre-

mities, especially towards the point; spines about eight in the

central verticils, becoming less in number towards the point,

which is smooth for a short distance up; spicules forming the

axis of the fibre and congregated into groups echinatingly on

the outside, so that all the free surfaces of the cancellated

cavities of the tissue and those of the excretory canals are

thus rendered hispid. Size of fragment, which is cylindrical

and represents a short segment only, of a large curve, about

24 inches long by 1 inch in diameter, slightly compressed,

as may be seen by the section (fig. 4, 4).

Hab. Marine.

Loc. West Indies.

Obs. This not only differs in general form from all the

foregoing species, but also in structure, which is compact

throughout, and not clathrous, while the only holes on the

ee ee

Knowledge of the Spongida. 315

surface are a few scattered large vents (fig. 4,@). The spicule,

like that of E. flabelliformis, is a little thinner, but otherwise

ranks next in beauty to that of Hetyon sparsus, presenting in

like manner, from its hispid arrangement over the free sur-

faces, a beautiful object under the microscope by direct light,

particularly characteristic of the echinonematous order to

which it belongs. On the surface of this specimen also are

scattered small isolated parasitic polyps, about 1-24th inch in

diameter (fig. 4, e).

Ectyonopsis ramosa, n. gen. et sp.

(Pl. XIIL. fig. 5, a, 2.)

Form :—a thick cluster of branches rising from a hard

contracted peduncular base; branches compressed, dividing

polychotomously, when, by lateral union, they may produce

a clathrous lamina, or dividing dichotomously throughout,

ending in bifid, thin, expanded extremities, or not dividing at

all, and ending in a simple wedge-shaped or spatulous expan-

sion, in the present instance 24 inches in its greatest width and

1-6th inch in thickness. Consistence firm, resilient, becoming

hard, compact, and rigid towards the base. Colour now (in

its dried state) sponge-brown. Surface even ; fibre reticulate,

with groups of echinating spicules springing from the lines of

reticulation. No appearance of vents. Pores not seen, from

absence of the dermal sarcode. Internal structure uniformly

fibro-reticulate ; solid, presenting no appearance of excretory

canals; fibre echinated with the spicule of the species. Spi-

cules of two forms, viz. :—1, acerate, cylindrical, slightly

curved, obtusely ended, spined irregularly throughout, most

thickly over the ends, which therefore look larger than the

centre ; about 48 by 4-6000ths inch in its greatest dimensions

(fig. 5, a) ; 2, acuate, slightly curved, spined irregularly, chiefly

over the large end, smooth and pointed at the other, about 53

by 4-6000ths inch in its greatest dimensions (fig. 5,6). Thus

these two spicules are very much alike, and, on account of

one end of the former often presenting a diminution in size,

appear by gradations to run into each other; but while the

former is chiefly confined to the axis, the pointed form in

groups chiefly echinates the fibre. Size of specimen 7 inches

high, 6 inches broad at the top, and 24 inches thick; stem,

which is rather compressed, 13 inch in its greatest diameter.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. S. Australia.

Obs. This specimen, no doubt also picked off a beach, is

very much worn in the outside branches, but the central ones

316 Mr. H. J. Carter’s Contributions to our

are tolerably perfect. Its dictyocylindrous form, generally

compact solid structure, apparent want of vents and excretory

canal-systems (probably from their smallness and contracted

state in the dried specimen), are all indications of the order to

which it belongs, while the spiculation in its character and

arrangement so resembles that of Hctyon that, although gene-

rically different, as the name implies, there can be no hesita-

tion in placing it among the Kctyonida, as the spines of the

spicules are merely disposed irregularly instead of being

confined to a verticillate arrangement. It bears the number

17. 2. 73. 6, and was presented to the Free Public Museum at

Liverpool by Mr. C. P. Melly.

Family 2. AXINELLIDA.

Char. “ Echinated with proper spicules projecting from the

interior of the fibre” (‘ Annals,’ /. c. p. 133).

Such is the simple diagnosis which I have given for this

in contradistinction to that of the first family of this order,

wherein the echinating spicule (generally claviform) has its

base inserted in the surface instead of the interior of the

fibre; but in all probability it will have to be consider-

ably extended ; for the group “ Multiformia” (op. et loc. cit.

p- 145), which, like that of “ Pluriformia,” in the first family of

the Echinonemata, was only intended to include provisionally

a number of distinct genera that I then had before me, but

which I knew time and opportunity alone could, by deserip-

tion and illustration, make available for this purpose. It is

this more extended sense which I now wish to initiate.

The term “Axinellida,” which has been taken from that of

“ Axinella,” used by Schmidt for a genus which he established

in 1862 (Spong. adriat. Meeres, p. 60), was chiefly instituted

by myself for sponges whose typical structure is perhaps best

illustrated by that of Malichondria ventilabrum, Johnst.,=

Phakellia ventilabrum, Bk. (Mon. B.S. 1874, vol. 1. pl. xxi),

which is one of the “‘ key” or typical specimens of the family

“¢ Axinellida’’ mentioned in my proposed classification of the

Spongida (op. et loc. cit. p. 196); thus, if this sponge is

divided with a sharp knife perpendicularly to the surface, the

section will present the edge of a thin compact plane mesially

(Pl. XIII. fig. 6, aa), from which on both sides, but espe-

cially externally, emanate scopiform portions (fig. 6, 6066),

which, curving upwards and outwards, become subdivided as

they reach the surface, where their extremities are interunited

by the dermal sarcode, which thus, tympanizing the spaces

between them, keeps the whole together and affords a con-

Knowledge of the Spongida. 317

venient structure for the situation of the pores. The spicules

here are of two forms, viz.:—1, vermiculate, smooth, and

cylindrical, sharp-pointed at both ends (Pl. XIV. fig. 9, a) ;

and 2, acuate, smooth, curved or bent chiefly towards the

blunt end (fig. 9, 6); the former 73 to 130 by 1 to 13-1800ths

inch in its greatest dimensions, and the latter or acuate about 30

by 1-1800ths; thus the former are imperfectly represented in

Dr. Bowerbank’s illustrations (op. et loc. cit.), since the vermi-

culate spicules here, viz. “5” and “6,” should have been

sharp-pointed at each end, which would have been the case

probably had they been boiled out of the microscopic fragment

with nitric acid instead of mounted in the dried sarcode, where

the draughtsman could not see that in the perfect form their

ends were sharp-pointed *. The vermiculate spicules, which

are by far the largest, form the base or axis of the “ scopiform

portions,” and the acuates the echinating spicules, while both

forms are indiscriminately mixed in the ‘ median” plane.

Such are the characters of the structure in Phakellia venti-

labrum ; but of course they may be more or less modified in

other species of this family, since there may be only one form

of spicule, viz. acuate, bent chiefly towards the thick end like

the hilt of a pistol, which seems to be the most common situa-

tion of the curvature in the Echinonemata; or this ‘ one

form ”’ may be acerate, or the skeletal spicule may be accom-

panied by flesh-spicules, as in the new species about to be

described, viz. Phakellia ramosa ; still the way in which the

echinating character is produced is always the same as that

mentioned in the diagnosis of the family. Sometimes there

is a transitional form of the spicule in which the acerate

appears to be thickened and shortened on one side, so as to

produce a kind of subacuate form (PI. XIV. fig. 14), which

seems to explain how it is on the one hand that the spicule

* The quickest way to examine a sponge is to soak a microscopic frag-

ment of it in distilled water for from twelve to twenty-four hours; then tear

it to pieces on a slide, drain, dry, and mount with balsam as usual; but

to be certain of the exact form of its spicules requires that they should be

boiled out with nitric acid, which may also be easily and quickly effected

by placing the microscopic fragment on the centre of a glass slide and

covering it with a drop or two of nitric acid, then boiling this over a

spirit-lamp with low flame till it is nearly dry, after which the same pro-

cess must be repeated twice or thrice ; and, finally, before the last drop of

nitric acid is entirely dried up, removing the slide to the table, when,

through gradually increased inclination and sufficient but careful edulco-

ration with distilled water, the residuum may be freed from all remaining

acid, drained, dried, and mounted in balsam; or, if desired, another

microscopic fragment, prepared as first mentioned, may be added to it

previously, when the perfect form of the spicules respectively, together

with their position im s’tw, may be seen at once in the same preparation.

Ann. & Mag. N. Mist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 23

318 My. H. J. Carter’s Contributions to our

when fully acuate often has its blunt end smaller in diameter

than the shaft, and on the other that, in consequence of this

half of the spicule having become thus thickened by shortening,

the curve or bend comes to be on this side of the centre of

the entire length.

Phakellia ramosa, n. sp. (Pl. XIV. fig. 10, a-d.)

Stipitate, expanded, branched stag-horn-like ; branches

compressed, terminating, after two or more divisions, in bifid,

pointed extremities, varying in length and form in the same

bifurcation, that is, from round or cylindrical and long to com-

pressed and short. Stem hard and solid. Colour, now, in its

dried state, light grey-brown. Surface even. Pores and

vents not seen. Internally presenting in the vertical section

a dense median plane, out of which, on both sides, extend up-

wards and outwards little scopiform portions or processes,

which, in juxtaposition (like those to which I have alluded in

P. ventilabrum), end on the surface. Spicules of three forms,

viz. :—1, skeletal, acuate, smooth, sharp-pointed, curved to-

wards the large end, which is smaller in diameter than the

body of the shaft, about 50 by 2-1800ths inch in its greatest

dimensions (fig. 10, a), more or less accompanied by an acerate

about the same size or a little smaller (fig. 10,5); 2, flesh-

spicule, acerate, minute, curved, smooth, sharp-pointed, in

bundles or loose (?trichites), about 5-6000ths inch long, but

very variable in size above this (fig. 10,d); 3, bihamate

flesh-spicule, simple C- or S-shaped, 8-G000ths inch long

(fig. 10,c); both in great abundance. ‘The skeletal spicules,

with their large ends fixed in the sarcode of the scopiform

processes and their pointed ones projecting outside, give the

echinated character (see Pl. XIII. fig. 6,56), while the flesh-

spicules are plentifully scattered among them. Size of speci-

men 43 inches high, 54 inches broad, and about 1 inch thick,

being somewhat compressed ; lamina of which the branches

are formed about 3 inch thick.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Sydney, Australia.

Obs. This appears to be an intermediate form between the

usually cylindrical-branched Dictyocylindrus of Bowerbank,

and the flabellate form, viz. Phakellia ventilabrum, Bk.

Hence the branches are, for the most part, compressed stag-

horn-like, thinning out towards the extremities. The pre-

sence of the flesh-spicules also is a distinguishing character,

while the scopiform processes emanating from both sides of

a dense median or axial structure are remarkably characteristic

Knowledge of the Spongida. 319

of the Axinellida. This specimen was presented to me in its

dry state by my late friend, Dr. Dickie, F.R.S.

Phycopsis hirsuta, n. gen. et sp. (Pl. XIV. fig. 11.)

Stipitate, thickly and dichotomously branched, covered

with a brown loose shaggy coat, looking altogether like a

species of /ucus; branches round, exceedingly hard and rigid,

diminishing in size dendritically, until they end in attenuated

sharp points. Axial or condensed portion of the stem, which

gives the rigidity, predominating over the hirsute appendages,

especially towards the base, composed of colourless fibre

charged with the spicules of the species, and so hard and

tough as to resemble the dried stalk of a stipitate Laminaria

or Keratophyte ; hence preeminently illustrating this cha-

racter in the Hchinonemata. Shaggy or hirsute coat com-

posed of minute sarcodic filaments about half as long

as the diameter of the condensed or axial portion, ema-

nating in a round form from the circumference of the latter

and equally charged with spicules of the species, curving

upwards and outwards, and becoming more or less spatular as

they approach their termination, which is sometimes slightly

bifid; echinated as usual throughout by the projecting ends of

the internal spicules. Spicule of one form only, viz. acerate,

curved, smooth, sharp-pointed at each end, 29 by 2-1800ths

inch in its greatest dimensions (fig.11). Size of specimen about

4 inches broad by 4 inches high, and, being compressed, about

1 inch thick ; stem 3-12ths inch in diameter at the base.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. South Australia.

Obs. The characters of this specimen as above given are

sufficient to distinguish the species, which, at first sight, looks

so much like a specimen of hirsute sea-weed that microscopic

examination is necessary to prove that it is a sponge. It was

sent to me by the late Dr. Dickie, F.R.S.

So far as my observation goes there is not another

sponge of this order with such a dense, large, wood-like stem.

Undoubtedly it is closely allied in most respects to the British

species of ‘“Dictyocylindrus, Bk.,” but, unlike these species, it

has only one form of spicule, and that an acerate ; while all

the British species of Dictyocylindrus possess an acuate skele-

ton-spicule and a short, clavate, spined echinating one, which

places them in the first family of this order. There is a

similar specimen in the British Museum which also came from

“ Australia,” viz. No. 621, registered 72. 11.6.1. Probably

the characteristic stiffness or rigidity of all the species of

Dictyocylindrus, especially that of the stem, is owing to the

strong, glue-like, tenacious nature of the sarcode.

23%

320 Mr. H. J. Carter’s Contributions to our

In the British Museum there is yet another species of this

kind, which also came from the same neighbourhood, viz.

“Van Diemen’s Land” (No. 397), labelled in Dr. Gray’s

handwriting, 517, Radiella;” but it is not mentioned in

any of his publications, so that it appears never to have gone

beyond the MS. form mentioned; whereas Schmidt, in 1870

(Spongienf. atlantisch. Gebietes, p. 48), published a genus by

this name, under which two species are described (Taf. iv.

figs. 6 & 8), viz. Radiella sol and Rf. spinularia, the latter

identitied by Schmidt himself with Dr. Bowerbank’s Tethya

spinularia (Mon. B.S. vol. iti. pl. xv. figs. 23-30) ; while

both species appear to me to belong to Dr. Bowerbank’s genus

Polymastia,”’ established in 1866 (op. cit. vol... p. 5). As

the term “ Radiella,’ therefore, is only in MS., Schmidt’s

use of it in print must be preferred, and a new one instituted

for the specimen in the British Museum, which, being totally

different from Schmidt’s Radiella, while it is closely allied to

Phycopsis hirsuta, 1 will describe under this generic name as

follows :—

Phycopsis fruticulosa, n. sp. (Pl. XIV. fig. 12.)

Stipitate, bushy, thickly and dichotomously branched from

a common stem; clothed with bright brown filamentous pro-

cesses. Branches thick, round, dividing at short intervals so

as to form a close shrubby mass; diminishing in diameter

from the stem upwards, ending in thick round points. Axial

portion or stem not predominating, being only one sixth of

the length of the filamentous processes in diameter, composed

of colourless fibre charged with the spicules of the species.

Filamentous coat consisting of narrow strips of yellowish

sarcode, about half an inch in length, also charged with the

spicules of the species, emanating from the circumference of the

axial portion in a radiating manner (hence, probably, Dr.

Gray’s MS. name “ Radiella”) upwards and outwards, more

or less united together at first, but finally terminating by

division into two or more white or colourless threads, which

give the surface a filamentous aspect; echinated throughout

by the projection of the spicules. Filamentous coat longest

midway between the base of the stem and its branched extre-

mities; shortest about the base, where the stem is thick and

hard, as in the foregoing species. Spicule of one form onl

viz. acerate, curved, smooth, and sharp-pointed at each end,

like that of the last species, about 35 by 1$-1800ths inch in its

greatest dimensions (fig. 12). Size of specimen 34 inches high

by 22 in its greatest horizontal diameter.

Hab, Marine.

Knowledge of the Spongida. 321

Loc. Van Diemen’s Land.

Obs. Although this sponge, from its general appearance

and spiculation, is closely allied to Phycopsis hirsuta, yet the

form and greater length of the hirsute filaments, together with

the less compact and generally much smaller axis, at least

claim the separation above indicated. Like Phycopsts

hirsuta it is closely allied to the genus Dictyocylindrus, Bk.,

but, for the same reason as that above assigned, it is placed

among the Axinellida. The hirsute appendages are, of

course, equivalent to the scopiform processes in Phakellia

ventilabrum &ce. *

We next come to two species of much more modified forms,

although still fundamentally possessing the same kind of

structure, and therefore giving rise to allied development.

There are the same kind of echinated scopiform processes

emanating from the same kind of condensed axial stem as in

the other Axinellida, but the general form consists of long

narrow branches which altogether present a feather-like group ;

hence the genus will be termed “ Petlocaulis,” with the fol-

lowing species :—

Prtilocaulis gracilis, n. gen. et sp.

(Pl. XIII. fig. 8, and Pl. XIV. fig. 13.)

Long, cylindrical, plumose branches, dichotomously and

polychotomously divided, rising from a hard contracted solid

base. Branches about half an inch in transverse diameter

generally ; obtusely ended (Pl. XIII. fig. 8). Colour now,

that is in the dried state, white, transparent. Axis consisting

of slightly condensed fibre charged with the spicules of the

species, from which emanate processes of the same structure

in a floral form like the leaves of a Corinthian capital (fig. 8) ;

passing through a delicate reticular tissue at the base and be-

coming inflated, clavate, bifid, or irregularly divided at the

extremities. Spicules of one form only, viz. acuate, curved

chiefly towards the large end, smooth, sharp-pointed, about

17 by 4-1800th inch in its greatest dimensions (Pl. XIV.

fig. 13) ; more or less obscured in their echination, by being

covered with an extension of the outer layer of the transparent

fibre. Size of specimen, which consists of several branches in

a group, 18 inches long by 93 inches in its greatest horizontal

diameter.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. West Indies.

Obs. This graceful specimen, looking in its dried state like

a cluster of long, drooping, narrow, round feathers, affords

322 Mr. H. J. Carter’s Contributions to our

another instance of the characteristic features of the Axinellida,

in the condensed structure of the axis growing outwards into

spatuliform or clavate processes (equivalent to the scopiform

ones of Phakellia ventilabrum), and the acute spicule, curved

chiefly towards the large end, the echination being somewhat

concealed, as above stated, by an extension of the outer lamina

of the transparent horny fibre over their points, which thus

encloses them. It is in the British Museum, No. 483, regis-

tered 45. 12. 30. 1, and has very much the appearance, under

a different form, of “ Spongia Marquezti,’ De Fonbressin

et Michelotti (Spong. de la Mer Caraibe, p. 40, pl. xx. fig. 1,

Harlem, 1864), which, together with the diagram of its spicu-

lation, given in pl. i$ 4“ A,” seems to confirm this view,

although de F. et M.’s descriptions in other respects defy all

attempts at further identification.

Ptilocaulis rigidus, n. sp.

(Pl. XIII. fig. 7, and Pl. XIV. fig. 14.)

Stipitate, composed of long, rough, cylindrical branches

dichotomously divided, rising from a short hard stem;

branches narrow, round, about an inch in transverse diameter,

obtusely ended (Pl. XIII. fig. 7,a,b2). Colour now, in its

dried state, brown. Axis consisting of condensed fibre

charged with the spicules of the species, from which emanate

in equally condensed structure thick short processes that give it

its rough appearance, viz. spatuliform and expanded, bifid or

irregularly divided towards the circumference, more or less

regular in form generally, lobate, sometimes interuniting

clathrously and situated at variable distances from each other ;

pubescent generally, from the well-marked projection of echi-

nating spicules, that is the echinonematous character (fig.7, 50).

Spicule of one form only, viz. acerate, smooth, curved or

rather bent on one side of the centre, sharp-pointed especially

at one end, which is more attenuated than the other, therefore

partaking of the form of an acuate or subacuate form ; 33 b

13-1800ths inch in its greatest dimensions (Pl. XIV. fig. 14).

Size of specimen 2 feet long by 11 x2 inches in its greatest -

horizontal dimensions, presenting a compressed cluster of long

cylindrical branches.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. ? Australia.

Obs. ‘This specimen is very much like the last in general

appearance, but probably came from the coast of South Aus-

tralia, judging from its more robust form and greater rigidity.

Like the other specimens from Australia before described,

viz. Phycopsis, it has but one form of spicule, and that acerate;

Knowledge of the Spongida. 323

also like these, it has all the characters, except in spiculation,

of Dr. Bowerbank’s British species of ‘‘ Dictyocylindrus,”

modified. Sharp-pointed as the spicule is at both ends, the

preponderance being on one side of the centre causes it to

tend towards the acuate form, which is characteristic of the

last species. There are two specimens of this sponge in the

British Museum, which are both numbered ‘ 402,” but with-

out register-number.

Different again as the foregoing specimens may be from

those with which we commenced this family, the following

are so much more so in appearance that, until minutely ex-

amined also, the fundamental composition and structure which

determine their position cannot be satisfactorily observed. At

first they look so much like specimens of Halichondria panicea

that it is difficult to conceive that they do not belong to the

same group or genus (which is the first in my order Holorha-

phidota) on account of the massiveness of their structure, the

characteristic whiteness of the dermal layer and the sponge-

colour of the interior also being so similar ; but the delusion

disappears as the structure and spiculation of the elementary

portions of a typical species like the following are microscopi-

cally examined, when the “ scopiform”’ filaments emanating

from the condensed axial structure recall to mind those of

Phycopsis fruticulosa, and there is also an echinating spicule,

which here (although not in all the species belonging to this

group) is acuate and not acerate ; still, as this is chiefly seen

in the circumferential growths before they pass into the axial

or general mass, it is necessary especially here to look for it

at the commencing rather than in the subsequent development,

wherein all such distinctions become merged in the general

mass.

Leucophleus massalis, n. gen. et sp.

(Pl. XIV. fig. 15, a, 6.)

Globo-conical, massive, surrounded towards the base with

proliferous, erect, conical columns of variable size and length,

entering as they grow into the increase of the central part.

Consistence compact. Colour snow-white. Surface smooth,

but irregular, being more or less rugose and furrowed verti-

cally, pierced with minute puncta which now (in the dry

state) indicate the position of the pores. Vents not seen.

Internal structure concealed by a thick white crust, composed

of the spicules of the species supported on a dense sponge-

brown fibrous mass, partaking in compactness of the axial

structure of the circumferential columns, which in their turn

324 My. H. J. Carter’s Contributions to our

consist respectively of a small solid axis, around which

radiate in all directions, upwards and outwards, filamentous

scopiform portions echinated by the projection of the internal

spicules which, finally dividing, end in a lash of branches,

and these, united together by the dermal sarcode, support the

white incrustation of proper spicules on the surface. Spicule

of one form only, viz. acuate, smooth, curved chiefly towards

the blunt end, sharp-pointed, less in diameter at the obtuse

end than in the centre of the shaft, 35 by 1-1800th inch in

its greatest dimensions (Pl. XIV. fig. 15, a) ; abundant in the

general mass and axial parts of the scopiform, filamentous

processes, from which the points more or less project in an

echinating manner. Size of specimen 6 by 34 inches at the

base and 4 inches high.

Hab. Marine.

Loc, Freemantle, 8.W. coast of Australia.

Obs. The thickness of the white dermal layer and the com-

pact solid structure of the interior, together with the mode of

growth in each, combined with an acuate spicule chiefly

curved towards the large end, distinguish this sponge from

Halichondria panicea, which otherwise it so resembles, that to

all appearance at first sight, as above stated, the two are the

same. ‘The specimen may be found in the Bowerbank general

collection at the British Museum.

My attention was originally called to this species by the

still greater likeness to LHalichondria panicea of a similar

specimen in the general collection of the British Museum,

wherein the structure is not so evident as in the specimen

above described, owing to the proliferous columnar processes

of the circumference being less distinct and more involved in

the general mass, which is globular and large, 7. e. 6 X 6 inches

in its greatest horizontal diameter and 34 inches high; the

form otf the spicule is the same, but it is much larger, viz. 50 by

12-1800ths inch in its greatest dimensions (Pl. XIV. fig. 15, 0).

It came from New Zealand, was presented by Dr. Sinclair,

and bears my running no. “473,” with the registration “ 57.

1, 29."

Leucophleus compressus, n. sp. (Pl. XIV. fig. 16, a.)

Stipitate, hard, massive, compressed, lobate, proliferous ;

lobes flabellate, more or less denticulate at the margin, some-

times united clathrously ; stem thick, short, hard, expanded

at the base of attachment. Colour snow-white. Surface

uniformly even, consisting of a white crust composed of the

spicules of the species; granulate, continuous, or reticulate

according to the amount of incrusting material ; sometimes

Knowledge of the Spongida. 325

raised in vertical ridges over the stem, which extend radia-

tingly more or less to the circumference. Vents scattered over

the surface as simple holes, which may be marginated or stelli-

form. Whiteness of the incrustation, which extends suffici-

ently deep to include the marginal cavities, followed by a

light brown colour of the fibre which, charged with the spicules

of the species, increases in density of structure towards the axis

or centre. Spicule of one form only, viz. acerate, curved,

fusiform, smooth, sharp-pointed, varying in size from 11-30

by 1-+-1800ths inch in its greatest dimensions (Pl. XIV.

fig. 16, a), the smaller, mixed with the longer ones, echinating

the surface. Size of specimen 10 inches high, 11 inches

broad, and 28 inches round its greatest horizontal diameter.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Swan River, W. Australia.

Obs. There are at least four specimens of this species in the

general collection of the British Museum, viz. :—no. 592,regis-

tered 72. 5. 21. 41, which is that above described; no. 534,

registered 59. 10. 7. 24, both from Australia; and nos. 197

and 506, bearing the nos. of the dealer only, viz. “42a” and

“426” respectively. No. 20, registered 71. 5. 12.1, from

Port Elizabeth, S. Africa, appears to be of the same kind;

but this possesses an acuate spicule together with a small

acerate. Nos. 534 and 20 present the radiating lmes men-

tioned with the same kind of acerate spicule (Pl. XIV.

fig. 16,6), but no conspicuous vents; while nos. 592 and 506

do present vents; still, as I have above stated, all appear to

belong to the same category.

To this group I think we may relegate Dr. Bowerbank’s

genus ‘‘ Ciocalypta,” established in 1866 (Mon. B. 8. vol. ii.

p- 5), of which he has described and illustrated three species,

viz. Ciocalypta penicillus, C. Leet, and C. Tyler’; the first

two are British, and the last species, of which there is also a

specimen in the British Museum (no. 24, reg. no. 71. 5. 12.

1), comes from Algoa Bay, at the Cape of Good Hope. They

are all composed of what Dr. Bowerbank has called the “peni-

cillate organ,” that is our “ proliferous, erect, conical column,”’

grouped together in greater or less plurality. (See represen-

tation of C. penicillus, Mon. B.S. vol. iii. pl. xii. fig. 2; and

of C. Tylert, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1873, pl. iv. fig. 9.) C.

Leet, however, of which a single “ penicillate organ” only is

represented in Dr. Bowerbank’s illustrations of this species

(op. cit. vol. iii. pl. Ixxxvi. fig. 1), exists in great plurality on

one specimen in the Kent collection, from the coast of Por-

tugal, in the British Museum (no. 7), if Iam right in iden-

tifying the two, which I see no reason to doubt, although the

326 Mr. H. J. Carter’s Contributions to our

latter presents a granulated surface, which the former in the

illustrations does not. Fig. 2 (Bk. /. c.) also, which is intended

to represent the dermal expansion (in short, the ‘ incrusta-

tion”) of one of the bundles of spicules (that is, the ‘ scopi-

form process” emanating from the axial structure) after

having passed through the subdermal cavities, hardly, in its

circumscribed umbrella-like form, realizes the interunion of

such expansions to form the dermal crust, as might be antici-

pated, nor is it indicated by Dr. Bowerbank’s description

(op. et l. c. p. 297). In Saville Kent’s specimen, the “ peni-

cillate organ’ is much larger and longer, while the granu-

lated surface, when viewed from the interior, may be observed

to be formed by the apex of the “ umbrella’’-like expansions

as they interunite at the circumference to form the white

crust. The illustration of C. penicillus (op. et l. c.) closely

resembles in figure that of Leucophleus massalis, only the

latter is more compact towards the centre, but the form of

the spicule is the same, viz. acuate. while the two other

species of Ciocalypta present acerate spicules ; still, in each,

there is only one form of spicule, faced by an intermingling of

asmall one of the same form, which thus thickens and in-

creases the whiteness of the dermal layer.

Order VI. HOLORHAPHIDOTA.

Family 1. RENIERIDA.

Char. “ Spicules more or less arranged in a fibrous form.

Structure yielding to pressure like crumb of bread” (‘ Annals,’

igesnalss).

New group. Phleodictyina.

(See char. ‘ Annals,’ 1882, vol. x. p. 117.)

Phlaodictyon singaporense, n. sp.

(PI. XIII. fig. 17, a, 0.)

This specimen, now incomplete, seems when entire to have

been globular, but having been cut off horizontally from the

base, presents a convex or subhemispherical form, from the

surface of which several blind, hollow, tubular appendages

are prolonged. Consistence fragile. Colour said to be

“bright yellow” when fresh, but now, in its dried state,

brown. Surface uniformly even, except where interrupted by

the tubular prolongations. Pores and vents not seen. ‘Tubu-

lar appendages hollow, ten in number, of which five only

remain entire, two of which are bifureated ; one appendage, of

which the aperture alone remains, was much larger than the

Knowledge of the Spongida. 327

rest, 2. ¢. 1-3rd inch in diameter, while the five entire ones, about.

an inch long respectively, of which two, as before stated, are

bifurcate, are all closed and round at the extremities. In-

ternal structure consisting of an open reticulated, coarse, white

spicule-fibre (that 1s, composed of spicules only held together

by a minimum of sarcode, or holorhaphidotic), which fills the

cavity of the body and in the horizontal section at the base

presents a subconcentric growth, covered on the surface by a

thin, soft, dermal layer of small spicules. Body-structure per-

meated vertically by tubular channels, which respectively com-

municate with the tubular appendages of the surface, which on

their part are formed by hollow extensions of the coarse reti-

culated structure of the body covered by that of the soft brown

dermal layer before mentioned, which also extends more or

less into the ¢nterior of the reticulated structure generally.

Spicules of two forms, viz.:—1, large, skeletal, acerate, fusi-

form, curved, smooth, more or less abruptly sharp-pointed and

often blunt, about 72 by 4-6000ths inch in its greatest dimen-

sions (P]. XIII. fig. 17, a) ; 2, smaller spicule, cylindrical,

smooth, much curved, obtuse and rounded at each end,

sausage-like, varying in size from 10 to 20 by 1-6000th

inch (fig. 17,5). Skeleton-spicules chiefly confined to the

now white body-fibre, and the smaller ones to the now brown

dermal layer. Size of specimen, in its present hemispherical

truncated form, about 1 inch high by 2 and 11 inch re-

spectively in diameter across the truncated surface or pre-

sent base, thus irregularly oval.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Singapore.

Qbs. The bright colour when fresh and the spiculation are

the distinguishing characters of this species. Although the

excretory canals in the body-structure can be seen to be in

continuation, as above stated, with the tubular appendages,

yet there is, as in other species of the group, no appearance

upon the latter or the body generally of vents; but their being

in continuation with the tubular appendages indicates that the

whole belong to the excretory canal-system, and the open

structure observed at the extremity of the appendages them-

selves in Oceanapia (‘ Annals,’ 1882, vol. x. p. 119) seems

to confirm this view, by supplying the place of a distinct vent

or vents of the usual form.

There is a similar specimen in the Johnstonian collection

in the British Museum, now bearing my running no. “54,”

but no register no. and no locality. That belonging to the

Liverpool Free Museum is numbered 24. 5. 83. 21, and was,

together with another specimen of about the same size, but

still more incomplete, presented by Dr. Archer.

328 Contributions to our Knowledge of the Spongida.

Observations on Classification.

Now although the terms of my classification (‘ Annals,’

1875, vol. xvi. p. 126 et seg.) may be very plain to myself, who

have carefully examined each of the specimens in the British

Museum, including those lately purchased from Dr. Bower-

bank’s executors, in all amounting in cubic measurement to

three or four yards, or sufficient to fill a small room of this

size—consisting of thousands of specimens from various parts

of the world, most of which are still undescribed,—yet these

terms may not be so plain to those whose observation in this

respect has been confined to their own cabinets, which can

hardly be expected to afford so much general knowledge;

therefore, before any determined opposition is made to my

classification I trust it may be based on a similar amount of

practical experience, when such criticism ought to be very

valuable ; for I do not wish to insist on my views any further

than as the best wnder the circumstances that I could offer,

therefore still open to great improvement. When the Spon-

gida shall have been worked upon as much as the Plants, then

their classification may be expected to be as satisfactory.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

N.B.—The spiculation of the Ectyones, together with that of Eetyo-

nopsis, is all on the same scale, viz. 1-12th to 1-6000th inch, chiefly to

show their sizes relatively. That in Pl. XIV. is all on one scale also,

viz. 1-12th to 1-1800th inch, for the same purpose ; with the exception,

however, of the flesh-spicules ¢ and d, fig. 10, which are on the scale of

1-12th to 1-6000th, and the spicules &c. of the Diluvium from the

valley of the Altmihl river, in Bavaria, whose scales respectively are

stated in loco.

Puate XI.

Fig.1. Ectyon flabelliformis, n. sp. One sixth of the natural size.

From a photograph. Specimen in the Liverpool Free Public

Museum. a, spicule. West Indies.

IPTADE XG:

Fig. 2. Ectyon sparsus, var. claveformis, n. var. Less than one third of

the natural size. From a photograph. Specimen in the Liver-

pool Free Public Museum. a, spicule; 6, vents; c, small

congregated foramina; d, clathrous openings. West Indies.

Fig. 3. Ectyon mauritianus, n. sp. a, spicule, lateral view ; 6, transverse

section. Mauritius.

PuaTeE XIII.

Fig. 4. Ectyon cylindricus, n. sp. (fragment), nat. size. a, lateral view ;

6, transverse section; c, spicule; d, vents; e, parasitic polyp.

West Indies.

Mr. H. J. Carter on Spicules of Spongilla. 329

Fig. 5. Ectyonopsis ramosa, u. sp., spiculation of: a, axial form; 8,

echinating form. W. coast of Australia.

Fig. 6. Phakellia ventilabrum, Bk., diagram of skeletal or spicular struc-

ture: aa, mesial plane; 6566, scopiform processes. Shet-

land.

Fig. 7. Ptilocaulis rigidus, n. sp., fragment magnified two diameters, to

show scopiform processes: a, stem; 66066, processes. ?S. Aus-

tralia,

Fig. 8. Ptilocaulis gracilis, n. sp., terminal end of a branch, nat. size.

West Indies.

Fig. 17. Phileodictyon singaporense, n. sp., spiculation of: a, skeletal

spicule of fibre ; 6, smaller spicule of dermal layer. Singapore.

PLATE XLV.

Fig. 9. Phakellia ventilabrum, Bk., spiculation of: a, vermicular form;

b, acuate.

Fig. 10. Phakellia ramosa, n. sp., spiculation of: a, acuate; b, acerate ;

c, bihamate ; d, trichites.

Fig. 11. Phycopsis hirsuta, n. sp., spiculation of. One form only, viz.

acerate,

Fig. 12. Phycopsis fruticulosa, n. sp., spiculation of. One form only,

viz. acerate,

Fig. 13, Prilocaulis gracilis, n. sp., spiculation of. One form only, viz.

acuate.

Fig. 14. Ptilocaulis rigidus, n. sp., spiculation of. One form only, viz.

acerate or subacuate.

Fig. 15, Leucophleus massalis, nn. gen. et sp., spiculation of two speci-

mens, Viz. :—a, acuate of Dr. Bowerbank’s specimen ; 6, acuate of

specimen in the British-Museum general collection.

Fig. 16, Leucophleus compressus, n. sp., spiculation of two specimens,

viz. :—a, acerate of specimen described; 6, acerate of no. 534.

XXXVII.—Spicules of Spongilla in the Diluvium of the

Altmiihl Valley, Bavaria. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &e.

[Plate XIV.]

So far back as the 3rd March, 1881, Professor Zittel, of

Munich, kindly sent me some pieces of dark brown argilla-

ceous diluvium from the valley of the Altmiihl, in which he

had recognized spicules of a Spongilla (Pl. XIV. fig. 18, a,

6); but, partly from want of opportunity and partly from

want of the necessary knowledge, I have not been able to

record publicly the results of my examination of it until the

resent time.

This freshwater deposit, besides the skeletal spicules men-

tioned (fig. 18, a, 6), which, from their spiniterous character,

appear to me to be most nearly allied to those of Spongilla

(Meyenia, Crtr.) ertnaceus, Ehr., contains another kind which

are quite new to me (fig. 18, c—f), together with the detritus of

330 Mr. H. J. Carter on Spicules of Spongilla in the

Diatomacez in great abundance, the pollen-grains of a Conifer

(fig. 18, k), the (?) spore-cases of ferns, and the tetraspores of

an acotyledonous plant (fig. 18, 2), all of which are so recent

as to be unfossilized.

When a fragment of this diluvium is broken to pieces in

water, it soon falls into powder, and then the whole of these

contents may be examined under the microscope in their

present state; or it may be boiled in nitric acid, when the

carbonaceous elements for the most part disappear, and the

siliceous ones alone remain.

In the latter state the spicules of the Spongilla, from their

larger size and great abundance, become the most prominent

objects, while from their intensely spinous character (fig. 18,

g) they appear, as before stated,-to be most nearly allied to the

skeletal ones of Spongilla (Me yenta) ertnaceus, which was

first found in the river Spree, and described by Ehrenberg

under this name in 1846 (Monatsberichte der Berliner Akad.

d. Wissensch. pp. 96-101, ap. Vejdovski). Here, 7. e. in this

diluvium, they vary in length between 17 and 59-6000ths

inch, while the spines are “proportionally much longer and

larger in the short than in the long forms; all these ‘spicules

are acerate, fusiform, and gradually acuminated at the ends ;

but the longest only present the usual curve, with a breadth

in the centre of 3-G000ths inch, exclusive of the spines (fig.

18, a, b, g). With them there are also a few others that are

quite smooth, fusiform, and also curved, but abruptly pointed

at the extremities, therefore probably belonging to another

species. Again, in two instances I have met with a slender

birotulate presenting a smooth and slightly curved shaft,

altogether about 7-6000ths inch long (fig. 18, 4, 7); but in

no instance have I observed any other form of statoblast-

spicule, although one might have expected, trom the minute-

ness of this delicate specimen, to have at least found some of

the birotulates of Spongilla erinaceus, if the skeletal spicules

just described had belonged to this species. With the ex-

ception of some pyxidial frustules among the immense

quantity of detritus of Diatomacce present, which, if not

carefully examined, might be mistaken for such statoblast-

spicules, | have not found the least trace of any thing like

a birotulate of S. erinaceus, while the slender birotulate to

which I have alluded only finds its like in the much stouter

statoblast-spicule of Jeyenia Badley?, Bk., and other species

of the kind in North America, viz. in the State of Penn-

sylvania, whence my _ kind ‘friend Mr. Ed. Potts, of

Philadelphia, has sent me specimens of species which he

has discovered there, and is now embodying in a Monograph

Diluvium of the Altmiht Valley, Bavaria. 331

of the Spongillide of North America; unless it came from a

statoblast like that represented by Dr. W. Dybowski (‘‘ Die

Siisswasserschwiimme des russischen Reiches,’”’ Mém. Acad.

St. Pétersbourg, tome xxx. no. 10, 1882, pl. i. fig. 4, a).

With reference to the supposed identity of the spiniferous

spicules in the diluvium of the valley of the Altmiihl river

with those of S. ertnaceus, I would observe that having,

through the kindness of Dr. Franz Vejdovski, of Prague,

received on the 21st June last a copy of his valuable paper

on the freshwater sponges of Bohemia (“ Die Siisswasser-

schwimme Béhmens,” 1883), in which he has described and

illustrated Spongilla erinaceus, Khr., under the ‘ subgeneric”

name “Trochospongilla”’ (op. cit. p. 81, Separat-Abdruck),

from specimens found at Celakowic and Podiebrad, on the

Elbe, respectively about 13 and 26 miles H.N.E. of Prague,

I wrote to him for a microscopic portion to examine, which

he very kindly sent me on the 17th July following.

I then saw in reality what I had previously only seen in

print, viz. that strongly developed spiniferous character of the

skeletal spicules which seems to have led to the specific term

““erinaceus,” first used by Khrenberg as above stated; but

still the spiniferous character generally, even here, was not

nearly so much developed as in the smaller spicules of the Alt-

mith! diluvium, although the dimensions and spznation too of

the largest spicules were much the same. What, however,

most struck me was the identity in form of the birotulates of

Spongilla erinaceus with those of the American species 8.

(Meyenia) Leidyi, Bk., so that I began to think that

they must be the same species; however, I find that the

skeletal spicules of Meyenia Lecdyi in the specimen described

by Dr. Bowerbank and those lately sent me by Mr. Potts are

smooth, almost cylindrical, and abruptly pointed, averaging

in their largest size not more than half the length of those of

S. ertnaceus from the Elbe, which, on the other hand, are

fusiform and gradually pointed; thus a difference in this

respect seemed to me to be evident ; but on going further and

comparing the skeletal spicules of S. er?naceus with those in

the jirst tragment sent me by Mr. Potts, viz. that mounted on

a slide from the Schuylkill river, I find the two almost iden-

tical. Now as the original specimen named by Dr. Bower-

bank, which Prof. Leidy sent to him in 1863, came from the

same river, it follows that the difference in the skeletal

spicules to which I have just alluded goes for nothing, and

therefore that the Kuropean and American species must be

considered identical ; while the stelliform branched excretory

canal-systems on the surface of the entire specimens latterly

332 Mr. II. J. Carter on Spicules of Spongilla.

sent me by Mr. Potts, to which I have alluded, also charac-

terize the entre specimens from the Elbe (see Dr. Vejdovski’s

representations of the latter, op. cdt. pl. i. fig. 14, A, B, &e.),

which seems to confirm this view still further.

It is remarkable that, in addition to the well-known species

of the Old World, viz. Spongilla lacustris and Meyenia fluvia-

tilis, two other distinct ones should have been found in Cen-

tral Europe, viz. Spongilla Cartert (previously only known to

me in India, the Mauritius, and latterly in the island of

Madura, on the E.N.E. coast of Java) by Dr. Thomas Margo,

of Budapest, in Lake Balatan (‘ Annals,’ 1882, vol. x.

p- 369), and Meyenia ertnaceus, which is the same as Mey-

enia Leidyi, in the Spree and Elbe, by Leidy, and by Potts

in the State of Pennsylvania, in North America.

From what has been above stated then it would appear that

Ehrenberg gave the name of Spongilla erinaceus to this species

in 1846, and Dr. Bowerbank the name of Spongilla Leidyi to

it in 1868.

Returning to the Altmiihl-valley diluvium and that spicule

above stated to be unknown to me, we are struck with the

abundance of this szliceous refractive vermicular form,

which is cylindrical and round at the extremities, but

may be curved, inflated, sigmoid, contorted, branched, and

indeed varied in an infinite number of such-like ways,

below 10-6000ths inch in length and a little less in breadth

than 1-6000th inch, which are the dimensions of the largest

and straightest (although always somewhat curved) specimens

that have come under my observation (fig. 18, e). Moreover

it frequently presents itself in small groups or massive aggre-

gations in the diluvium, wherein all the sizes and shapes

appear together as if it grew from small to large in this way,

and naturally existed in this condition (fig. 18, d). On

account of its refractive character the central canal is seldom

seen, but in one instance a central cavity was observed which

was extended on both sides fora little distance in a linear

form (fig. 18, £); otherwise I have not been able to detect

any indication of its existence. ‘To what this sz/iceous spi-

cule could have belonged I am totally ignorant, since it is

so entirely unlike any thing of the kind connected with the

Spongillide that I have ever seen ; yet it may be asked what

it could come from but a Spongilla or a treshwater sponge.

Herein lies the question; and therefore I describe and delineate

so much of it as I know simply to call attention to the facet

and to assist others in supplying an answer.

‘

;

Mr. F. J. Bell on two new Species of Asteroidea. 333

EXPLANATION OF THE ILLUSTRATIONS.

PrarE X1V.

Fg. 18. Contents of the Altmiihl-valley diluvium. a, spiniferous spi-

cule, characteristic average largest size; 6, the same, smallest

size ; ¢, vermicular spicule ; 4, birotulate spicule; all drawn to

the same scale, viz. 1-48th to 1-G000th inch, to show their sizes

relatively. d, group or aggregated mass of vermicular spicules ;

e, various forms of the vermicular spicule; scale 1-24th to 1-

6000th inch. f, vermicular spicule, more magnified, to show

trace of a central canal. g, the smaller size of spiniferous spi-

cule (“6”), more magnified, to show the form and recurvature of

the spines in the smaller spicules generally; 7, the birotulate “ h,”

more magnified, to show the form of the shaft and arms; k,

pollen-grain of Conifer; J, tetraspore of acotyledonous plant.

The two latter on the scale of 1-24th to 1-GQ00th inch,

XXX VII.—Deseriptions of two new Species of Asteroidea tn

the Collection of the British Museum. By F. Jerrrey

BELL, M.A.

THE Asterias now to be described was not satisfactorily re-

cognized as an undescribed form at the time when I gave to

the Zoological Society some account of the genus to which it

belongs*. The Culcita has been long known to me as a new

form, but I have refrained from publishing any account of it,

in the hope that it might soon be possible to make a revision

of the group to which it belongs. As it is now, however, ex-

hibited in the new galleries of the Zoological Department at

South Kensington, the student will probably tind it con-

venient to have an account of it.

Asterias nautarum.

General formula, 2 aa’.

Arms five, do not begin to taper till the last third of their

length, broadest at a short distance from their base; two

rows of adambulacral spines; madreporic plate anechino-

placid, obscure, not far from the margin of the disk. Spines

autacanthid, very blunt on abactinal surface. ‘The abactinal

surface presents an appearance of very close packing, as there

are on it three rows of autacanthid spines ; those of the outer-

most are very fairly developed. ‘This last-mentioned row

bounds the lower, while a row as well marked bounds the

* P.Z.S. 1881, p. 492.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 24

334 Mr. F. J. Bell on two new Species of Asteroidea.

upper edge of the side of the arm ; a few small spines are de-

veloped in the intermediate space. In addition to a not irre-

gular row of spines which extends along the middle line of the

abactinal surface, there are two irregular rows or lines of

shorter spines on either side; all these spines are fairly strong,

and all quite blunt at their tips. The disk is pretty thickly

covered with spines.

Colour (after thirty years in spirit) creamy white, the

suckers a little darker.

Y=49:7=10, or R is nearly equal to 57.

Breadth of arms at base 9 millim., greatest breadth 11.

Hab, Kcuador.

The description has been drawn up from a single specimen;

others, not so well preserved, give the definite locality, and

all were obtained from the collection of Haslar Hospital.

Standing nearer, perhaps, to _A. Brandti than to any other

species, d. nautarum is distinguished not only by its much

shorter arms and stouter habit, its better developed though less

numerous spines, but also by the fact that the skin-plates on

which the spines stand are not so sharply separated from one

another, so regularly set, or so well provided with granules,

as in the more southern species from the Straits of Magellan.

From A. ¢rermis, which, like it, comes trom the coasts of

Kcuador, the new species is at once distinguished by its

smaller disk, its longer arms, and its stronger stouter spines.

Culcita acutispinosa.

Resembling C. coriacea, and distinguished from all other

species of the genus by the fact that the apices of the upturned

ambulacra are below the level of the dorsal or abactinal sur-

face. ‘The body is almost completely discoidal in shape, the

angles of the rays being very nearly altogether rounded off ;

the sides of the disk are very deep ; in the dry specimens, at

any rate, the actinal surface gradually slopes downwards, so

that the animal is very much deeper along a line drawn dorgo-

ventrally through the actinostome than it is at the margin of

the disk (62-40 millim.).

The adambulacral spines are in two rows; in the inner

there are ordinarily four on each plate, and they are not so

weil developed as in some allied species ; about five plates out

from the actinostome they measure about 5 millim. in length.

In the outer row there are generally two spines, one of which

is very strong and blunt, while the other is much smaller,

The spines on the intermediate plates sometimes lie quite

close to the outer interambulacral series, and occasionally

appear to invade it.

coal

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Species of Megalops. 335

The actinal surface isnot marked out into areole, and is richly

invested by a number of short, blunt, stout processes, hardly

to be called spines, amidst which a coarse granular covering

is to be observed. The poriferous region begins quite sud-

denly, at about the second fourth of the length of the side of

the disk (counting from the actinal margin); while this is

the point at which the pores begin at the middle of each side

of the disk, the line of demarcation gradually curves upwards,

so that along the radial axes the pores begin just above the

apex of the ambulacral groove. ‘The greater part of the sides

and the whole of the abactinal surface of the disk are covered

with short sharp spines, which are scattered over them with con-

siderable profusion, though in no definite order; dotted among

the spines are pores of moderate size, which are very indis-

tinctly grouped into pore-areas ; surrounding and separating

the pores are fine granules, and these are, at apparently irre-

gularly disposed points, closely aggregated into distinct

patches; such a patch is found outside the spines which fringe

the anus. On the abactinal surface the pedicellariz are small

and scarce; on the actinal they are, though small, much more

numerous. ‘The madreporic plate is large: and raised above the

surface. (It has unfortunately been injured in the specimen

under description.)

The single dried specimen has the upper surface of a pinkish

and the lower of a yellowish-white hue.

Hab. Aneiteum, New Hebrides

As already stated, the greatest height is 62 millim. ; its

diameter is 120 millim,

XXXIX.—Descriptions of two new Species of the Genus

Megalops (Coleoptera, Stenint). By CHARLES O. WATER-

HOUSE.

Megalops ornatus, sp. n.

Niger, nitidus; thorace subcylindrico, ad latera sulcis quatuor fundo

fortiter punctatis; elytris flavis nigro ornatis, in disco anteriore

punctis nonnullis sat profundis biseriatim impressis, pedibus pal-

lide piceis.

Long. (mandib. incl.) 2? lin.

Mandibles pitchy. Head with a few strong punctures ; on

each side there is a slight longitudinal impression. Thorax

in front about the same width as the head between the eyes,

24*

336 Mr. C, O. Waterhouse on new Species of Megalops.

a little broader before the middle, and then gradually (but

not much) narrowed to the base. Close to the front margin

there is a well-marked transverse impression scarcely inter-

rupted in the middle; immediately behind this on the side

there is a short sinuous impression, which does not reach the

lateral margin; behind this is a third rather wider impression,

which reaches the margin, and at the base a short but wide

impression. Hach of these impressions has a line of large

punctures; those in the third one less distinct. The central

portion of the surface is smooth, except for three or four deep

punctures close to the base. The elytra are ample, nearly

twice as broad as the thorax, a little broader than the head

across the eyes, arcuate at the sides; yellow, with the

shoulders, the outer apical angle, the suture, and a spot across

the middle of the suture black. On the disk immediately

below the shoulder are two approximate lines, each consisting of

three or four large punctures ; these punctures are in a shallow

impression, and there is another impression occupied by the

black spot across the suture. Antenne pitchy, with the club

fuscous.

fab. Peru. Brit. Mus.

Megalops acutangulus, sp. n.

Niger, nitidus; capite thoraceque sat crebre fortissime punctatis ;

elytris piceo-flavo ornatis, sat crebre punctatis, punctis in disco

biseriatim dispositis ; abdominis marginibus reflexis piceis, pedi-

bus sordide testaceis.

Long. 2 lin.

Head very broad, with large punctures irregularly scattered

over the surface. Antenne testaceous, with the apical two

joits fuscous. Thorax with deep punctures rather closely

placed over the surface, leaving the anterior margin smooth ;

in front of the same width as the head between the eyes, then

suddenly wider, so as to make a somewhat acute projection,

from which to the base it is gradually narrowed ; the sides

between the angular projection and the base rather straight.

Above there are on each side two oblique smooth ridges,

which unite near the anterior angle and diverge towards the

middle of the thorax; and at a little distance from the poste-

rior angle there is a small round swelling, in the centre of

which there is asingle large puncture. LElytra short, scarcely

as broad as the head including the eyes, arcuate at the sides,

with strong punctures rather closely placed in the sutural

region (leaving the apex smooth) and at the sides; on the

disk there are two lines of strong punctures (with a smooth

ridge between them), the outer line extending to the apex.

On the Morphology of the Myriopoda. 337

Each elytron with a pitchy yellow line commencing in the

middle of the base, and betore it reaches the middle emitting

a branch to the side and another to the sutural angle. Ab-

domen shining; the first to fourth segments with a few punc-

tures at the base, and on each side two shallow somewhat

cuneiform impressions ; the fifth segment sparingly punctured,

smooth at the apex, and with the wswal white membranous

border.

Hab. Java (J. C. Bowring, Esq.). Brit. Mus.

This species is interesting on account of the locality from

which it comes. With the exception of two from Australia

and one from Africa all the species are American.

British Museum,

Cromwell Road, London, S.W.

October 17, 1883.

XL.—On the Morphology of the Myriopoda.

By A. 8. Packarp, Jun. *

THE following notes have reference to the hard parts

especially of the diplopod Myriopods.

The Head.—In the Chilognaths, which are the more primi-

tive and in some respects the lowest group of the subclass, the

Pauropoda excepted, the structure of the head is on a much

simpler type than in the Chilopoda.

The epicranium constitutes the larger part of the head; it

may be regarded as the homologue of that of hexapodous

insects. Of the clypeus of Hexapoda there is apparently no

true homologue in Myriopods; in the Lysiopetalid Chilo-

gnaths there is, however, an interantennal clypeal region

slightly differentiated from the epicranium and forming the

front of the head. In the Chilopods there is no well-marked

clypeus, only a short, narrow, transverse preantennal clypeal

region, to which the labrum is attached. Meinert, in his

valuable and painstaking work on Myriopods, designates what

we here call the epicranium the lamina cephalica; the divi-

sion sometimes indicated in front next to the antenne he calls

lamina frontalis discreta.

The labrum in the Chilognaths is a short but broad sclerite,

very persistent in form and not affording family or generic

* From the ‘Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society,’

Sept. 1883, p. 197; read June 16, 1883,

338 Dr, A. 8. Packard, Jun., on the

characters ; it is emarginate on the sides, with a deep median

notch containing three acute teeth. The labrum may on the

whole be regarded as homologous with that of the Hexapoda,

but is very broad and is immovable. Very different is the

so-called labrum of the Chilognaths, which consists of two

parts, a central portion, which may be homologized with

the labrum of the Chilognaths, but is narrower, with a deep

broad median notch, at the bottom of which is a central stout

tooth.

In Orya barbarica, Gerv., according to Meinert, the labrum

has a median suture, dividing it into two pieces, each with

numerous fine teeth on the outer edge.

In Dignathon microcephalum, Lucas (Meinert, tab.ii. fig. 15),

and in Geophilus sodalis, Kgs. and Mein., Meinert figures and

describes the labrum as consisting of a pars media and two

partes laterales, distinctly separated by suture ; no such diffe-

rentiation as this is known to us as occurring in the labrum

of Hexapods.

This labrum is flanked on each side by a transverse sclerite,

much broader than long; these pieces may be called the epa-

labra; to the outer edge of each is attached the cardo of the

so-called mandible ( protomala}. What we have for brevity

called the epdlabra (fig. 1) are the “ laminze fulcientes labri ”

of Meinert *.

The so-called mandibles of the Myriopods are the morpho-

logical equivalents of those of insects, but structurally the

are not homologous with them, but rather resemble the lacinia

of the hexapodous maxilla. For this reason we propose the

term protomala (mala, mandible) for the mandible of a Myrio-

pod; mala would be preferable, but this has already been

applied by Schiédte to the inner lobes of the maxilla of certain

Coleopterous larve.

The protomala consists of two portions, the cardo and stipes,

while the hexapodous mandible is invariably composed of but

one piece, to which the muscles are directly attached, and

which corresponds to the stipes of the Myriopodous protomala.

The stipes, instead of being simply toothed or with a plain

cutting edge, as in Hexapoda, has, in the Chilognaths, two

outer unequal long teeth, and within a series of singular pro-

cesses like stout setee, edged with dense spines on the inner

side. ‘This double apparatus of teeth and spiose processes,

* “ Myriapoda Museei Havyniensis. Bidrag til Myriapodernes Mor-

phologi og Systematik,” ved Fr. Meinert; ‘ Naturhistorisk Tidsskvift,

3 R. 7 B. (Kjobenhavn, 1871), p. 105 (see tab. i. fig. 4). Meinert states

that the lamune fulcientes do not belong to the labrum itself, and that the

form of these pieces varies greatly according to the species.

;

=" 2

Morphology of the Myriopoda. 339

which may be cailed the pectinella, gives the stipes a decided

resemblance to that of the hexapodous maxilla. In the Chilo-

poda, according to the figures and description of Meinert,

there is a greater variation in the nature of the pectinella of

the stipes. As we have observed in the protomala of Scolo-

pendra and Lithobius, there are three or more stout teeth, with

an inner series of spinulated slender processes ; but in several

genera figured by Meinert, as Mesocanthus albus, Mein.,

Scolioplanes crassipes, Koch, Chetochelyne vesuciana, Newp.,

Geophilus sodalis, Bgs. and Mein., and Mecistocephalus punc-

tifrons, Newp., the cutting edge is provided with spinose pro-

cesses alone.

For the second pair of mouth-appendages of the Myriopoda

we propose the term deutomala, or second pair of jaws. ‘They

form the so-called labium of Savigny and later authors. In

the Chilognaths they have a superficial resemblance to the

labium of winged insects; but the corresponding pair of

appendages in Chilopoda are not only unlike the labium of

Hexapoda, but entirely different in structure from the homo-

logous parts in Chilognaths. The ‘labium” of Newport, or

first maxille of Meinert, have been described and figured by

those authors, to whose works the reader is referred.

The following remarks apply to the homologues of these

parts in the Chilognaths. While most authors designate this

pair of appendages as the “jabium,” Meinert more correctly

calls them the first maxillv, briefly, in the Latin abstract of

his ‘ Danmark’s Chilognather’ *, in his diagnosis of the order

describing them as ‘‘Stépites mavillares appendicibus instruct,

detecti;”’ but in his description of Judus referring to them as

“ Tamina labialis parva, stipites labiales modo partim se-

jungens.”’

Meinert also describes what he designates as a third pair of

mouth-parts or /abéwm, which is enclosed by the second pair,

behind which is a triangular plate (damina labialis), which he

regards as a sternal part corresponding to the mentum of

insects. He then adds, ‘ In front of the labium in the Poly-

desmidz are two short round styles (stil¢ linguales), which are

toothed at the end.” He also speaks of the curved piece

behind the lamina labialis, which he designates as the hypo-

stoma (see our fig. 2).

It should be observed that Savigny states that the labium

(lévre inférieure) is in Ju/us composed of what he designates

as the first and second maxillw, his second maxille being

Meinert’s labsum.

‘

* ¢ Naturbistorisk Tidsskrift,’ 3 R. 5 B.

®H

CLYPEAL REGioy

2 oy, \

- EPILABRUM.

MALLE MALELLAI S MALULELLA 1 MLA! MLE

STIPES.E

Fig.3,

Fig. 1. Head of Seolopendra, seen from beneath, showing the ‘“ mandible”

(protomala), with its cardo (card.) and stripes (st?.), also the

labrum and epilabrum.

Fig, 2. So-called under lip or deutomala of Scoterpes Copet : hyp., “ hypo-

stoma;” lam. lat., lamina labialis; stip. e., stipes exterior ;

with the malella eaterior (mal. e.) and malella interior (aml. t.) 5

the stipes interior (stip, t.), with its malulella; and the éabiella,

with its stilus (s¢d.).

Fig. 3. The deutomala of Juus, sp. ; the lettering as in Fig. 2.

On the Morphology of the Myriopoda. 341

It seems to us that the researches of Metschnikoff* on the

embryology of the Chilognaths (Strongylosoma, Polydesmus,

and Julus) leave no doubt that these Myriopods have but two

pairs of mouth-appendages, which Metschnikoff designates as

mandibles and labium. The latter arises as a pair of tubercles

or buds, at first of exactly the form of the mandibles, and like

the primitive embryonic mouth-appendages of any arthropod.

Hence the differentiations of parts and coalescence of the two

limbs, while closely resembling that of the labium or second

maxille of Hexapods, really occur in Myriopods in a different

pair of appendages, 2. ¢. the second instead of the third pair.

Hence the parts called labium (many authors) in Myriopods

are really homologous with the first maxille of insects; and

they should, to prevent misconception, receive a distinctive

name (deutomale). With the aid, then, of embryology we have

arrived at a clearer conception of the homologies of the second

pair of mouth-appendages in the Chilognaths. It forms a

broad flat plate, becoming the floor of the mouth, and forming

an under lip; it is differentiated into two sets of broad plates,

an outer and inner stipes; the outer stipes (stipes exterior)

bears at the free edge two movable toothed appendages, which

may be designated as the inner and outer malelle. The inner

stipes (stipes interior) are united firmly and are supported

behind by what Meinert designates as the /amina labialis,

behind which is a curved broad sclerite, called by Meinert the

hypostoma, a rather unfortunate name, as it has been used by

Meigen and Bouché for the clypeus of Diptera. Differenti-

ated from the front edge of the mner stipes is a piece usually

separated by suture, which, as we understand it, is the sécus

lingualis otf Meinert; it is our malulella. A median portion

of the deutomala has been apparently overlooked by authors ;

it is our labiella (fig. 2), and corresponds in a degree to the

lingua of Hexapods; it is a minute rounded piece situated

between the malulelle, in Ju/us minute and single, in the

Lysiopetalidee much larger, and divided into a large anterior

and a much smaller posterior crescent-shaped part ; it is sup-

ported by two long cylindrical divaricating styles.

It thus appears that the head of Chilognaths bears but

three pairs of appendages, viz. the antenne and the mouth-

appendages, the proto- and deutomale. Without doubt the

Chilognaths, as proved by their embryology and morphology

and their close relationship with the Pauropoda, the simplest

Myriopods, represent the primary form of the Myriopods,

* «“Embryologie der doppeltfiissigen Myriapoden (Chilognatha),”’ yon

Elias Metschnikoff, Zeitschrift fur wissenschaftl. Zoologie, xxiv. p, 253

(1874).

342 Dr. A. S. Packard, Jun., on the

while the Chilopods are a secondary less primitive group.

Paleontology apparently supports this view. We may now

_ turn to the structure of the head of Chilopod Myriopoda, which

has been fully described by Newport * and also by Memert f.

Having already briefly described the morphology of the

epicranium or antennal segment of Chilopods, with the labrum

and “mandibles” (protomale =“ true maxille ” of Newport),

which are close homologues of those of diplopod Myriopods,

we may next take up the second pair of mouth-appendages,

which are the morphological equivalents of the so-called

labium of Chilognaths. These, as seen in Scolopendra, are

very different from the so-called under lip of Chilognaths ;

they are not united, and are separate, cylindrical, fleshy, 5-

jointed appendages, but, as Newport states, “‘ connected trans-

versely at their base with a pair of soft appendages (e, c) that

are situated between them, and which, as | have already stated,

I regard as the proper Ungua, as they form the floor of the

entrance to the pharynx.” These 5-jointed appendages are

Mr. Newport’s “ maxillary palpi,” his true maxille being the

homologues of the “ mandibles ”’ of Chilognaths.

The portion of the head of Scolopendra and other Chilopods,

thus far considered, together with the antenne and proto- and

deutomal, we consider as homologous with the entire head

of Chilognaths ; the basilar segment of Newport and the two

pairs of head-appendages have no homologues in the head of

Chilognaths. ‘They are rather analogous to the maxillipedes

of Crustacea, and nothing like them, speaking morphologi-

cally, exists in other Tracheata. We therefore propose the

term malipedes (mala, jaw, pes, foot or jaw-feet) for the fourth

and fifth pair of cephalic appendages of Chilopoda. At the

same time it is easy to see that they are modified feet, espe-

cially when we examine the last pair in Scolopendra, which

are attached to a true sternite, and see that they are directly

homologous with the feet and sternite of the same animal.

The first pair of malipedes are the “ labium and palpi’ of

Newport, the “ first auxiliary lip” of Savigny. They, how-

ever, bear little resemblance to an insect’s labium and labial

palpi. They are separate, not coalescing in the middle, as in

the labium of Hexapods. The so-called labial palpi are 4-

jointed, with an accessory plate; they arise directly in front

* “ Monograph of the Class Myriapoda, Order Chilopoda, with Obser-

vations on the General Arrangement of the Articulata,’ by George New-

port (Trans. Linn. Soe. xix. p. 287).

t ‘ Myriapoda Muszei Havniensis. Bidrag til Myriapodernes Morpho-

logi og Systematik,” ved Fr. Meinert; ‘ Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift,’ 3 R.

7B. (isi):

Morphology of the Myriopoda. 343

of the “ basilar segment” of Newport, but appear to have in

adult life no tergite of their own *.

The second pair of malipedes or last pair of mouth-appen-

dages are the poison-fangs ; they are the “ second auxiliary

lip” of Savigny, the “ mandibles or foot-jaws” of Newport

and subsequent authors. The dorsal plate, or what may be

called the second malipedal teryite, is the “ basilar and sub-

basilar plate’ of Newport.

As to the number of segments in the head of Chilognaths,

both morphology and embryology prove that there are but

three, in the Chilopoda five. Newport’s observations on the

young recently-hatched Geophilus (his pl. xxxiii. fig. 3) show

that the subbasilar plate is the tergum or scute of the fifth

segment ; and the basilar plate is consequently the tergum of

the fourth segment or second malipedal segment. The ster-

nite of the subbasilar plate is usually a very large plate,

deeply indented in front in the middle, with teeth on each

side, and forms the “ labium” of Newport. It may, for con-

venience in descriptive zoology, be termed the ‘ pseudo-

labium.”’

As embryological proofs of our morphological views may

be taken the admirable researches of Metschnikofft on the

development of Geophilus. His Taf. xx. fig. 4 shows

plainly the four pairs of mouth-appendages behind the an-

tenne, the latter developed, as in Hexapods, from the pro-

cephalic lobes. His fig. 15 shows that the pleurum and

tergum of two posterior (or fourth and fifth) cephalic arthro-

meres, with their appendages, are the primitive scuta of the

proto- and deutomalar arthromeres, which at this period have

coalesced and are intimately united with the procephalic lobes.

His fig. 18 shows that at a later period the primitive scutum of

the fourth cephalic segment has disappeared, or at least is

merged into the fifth primitive scutum or subbasilar plate of

the adult. An examination of Metschnikoft’s paper will prove

conclusively that Newport’s views as to the subsegments of

the Chilopods are not well founded in nature, and that they

are merely for the most part simply adult superficial

markings.

The following Table will serve to indicate in a comparative

* Balfour also states, as we find after writing the above, that the basilar

plate is really the segment of the poison-claws, and may fuse more or less

completely with the segments in front of and behind it, and the latter is

sometimes without a pair of appendages (Lithobius, Scutigera). (Comp.

Embryology, i. p. 225.) i

+ “Embryologisches, tiber Geophilus,” yon Elias Metschnikoff, Zeit-

schrift fiir wissenschaftl. Zoologie, xxv. p. 3513 (1875),

344 Dr. A. 8. Packard, Jun., on the

way the number of arthromeres in the head of the three sub-

classes of ‘T'racheate Arthropods, their corresponding appen-

dages, and the more important synonyms :—

lst Arthromere

(Preoral).

2nd Arthromere

(Postoral).

ord Arthromere

Hexapoda.

Antenne.

Mandibula.

Ist Mavxille.

2nd Maxille.

eeeseene

Ayachnida.

Wanting *.

Chelicere f.

(Mandibles.)

(Pedipalpi, max-

illee.)

Ist pair of baeno-

poda,

| 2nd pair of beeno-

poda.

Myriopoda

(Chilopoda).

Antenne.

Protomalze.

(Mandibles, Sa-

vigny.)

Deutomale. (Ist

Maxille, Sa-

vigny.)

Ist Malipedes.

(1st Auxiliary lip,

Savigny.)

2nd = Malipedes.

(Auxiliary lp,

eee

Antennee. |

Myriopoda

(Chilognatha),

Protomale.

(Mandibles, §

vigny.)

Deutomale.

(Labium.) |

2nd pair of Pede|

2nd pair of Pede

Savigny ; Man-

dibles. )

Ist pair of beeno-) 3rd pair of beno-| 1st pair of Pedes. | 3rd pair of Pede|

poda.

General Morphology of the Body.—The well-known re-

searches of Newport on the development of J/u/us, and the

embryological studies of Metschnikoff already referred to, show

that the larva of Julus and other diplopod Myriopods is

hatched with but three pairs of feet. In Julus terrestris, as

stated by Newport, the third body-segment is apodous, the

first, second, and fourth segments behind the head bearing

feet. [he body-segments are at first nine in number, the

new segments appearing six at a time. In Strongylosoma,

according to Metschnikoff, the larva has eight segments be-

hind the head, the second segment footless ; in Polydesmus

there are but seven body-segments, the second apparently

being apodous, though it is difficult to determine with certainty

from the drawing which of the first three segments is apodous.

In two embryos of Julus multistriatus, Walsh ?, kindly

communicated to us by Prof. Riley, and which he assures us

* Balfour claims that the first pair of cephalic appendages are wanting ;

and the fact shown by his fig. 200, C, D, that the stomodzeum at first

lies between the procephalic lobes, and that the latter do not even bear

appendages, appears to prove his statement.

+ “On the Organs of Reproduction and the Development of the

Myriopoda,” Phil. Trans. 1841.

Morphology of the Myriopoda. 345

were freshly hatched right from the egg, the larvee are much

more advanced than in the freshly-hatched larvee referred to ;

still the second body-segment ts footless instead of the third ;

but there are seventeen segments, the first, third, and fourth

each bearing a single pair of legs; the fifth to the tenth seg-

ments each bearing two pairs of legs. In one of the three

specimens, which was apparently a little longer out of the egg

than the two others, there were five penultimate short secon-

dary segments (eleventh to fifteenth) on which there were

rudiments apparently of but a s¢ngle pair of legs to each seg-

ment, whereas Newport states that two pairs bud out from

each segment, and while in Julus terrestris the new segments

arise In sixes, in our species they arise in fives. In adult life

a single pair of limbs arises from the second segment, and the

first three segments have each but one pair of legs, the fourth

having two, as in the fifth and following segments.

It thus appears that the larval diplopod Myriopod is a six-

footed Tracheate, though neither its mouth-parts nor its pri-

mary legs are directly homologous with those of the Hexa-

podous Insects.

Looking at the embryo diplopod Myriopod from a deductive

or speculative point of view, it doubtless represents or is nearly

allied to what was the primitive myriopodous type, a Tra-

cheate, with a cylindrical body, whose head, clearly separated

from the hind body, was composed of three cephalic segments,

one pair of antenna, succeeded by two postoral arthromeres,

the protomalal and deutomalal arthromeres ; while the hind

body consisted of as few as seven arthromeres, whose scuta

nearly met beneath, with three pairs of six-jointed legs distri-

buted among the first four segments. It 1s evident that the

form represented by the adult is a secondary later product,

and arose by adaptation to its present form. The embryo

Geophilus, the only Chilopod whose embryology has been

studied, leaves the egg in the form of the adult ; it has, unlike

the Diplopods, no metamorphosis. Its embryological history

is condensed, abbreviated.

But in examining Metschnikoff’s sketches, primitive Chilo-

gnath characters assert themselves ; the body of the embryo

shortly before hatching is cylindrical; the sternal region is

much narrower than in the adult, hence the insertions of the

feet are nearer together, while the first six pairs of appendages

(the sixth apparently the first pair of feet of the adult) are

indicated before the hinder ones. ‘These features indicate

that the Chilopoda probably arose from a diplopod or diplopod-

like ancestor, with a cylindrical body, narrow sternites, and

with three pairs of legs, which represent those of the larval

346 Dr. A. S. Packard, Jun., on the

Chilognaths, the two anterior becoming the two pairs of mali-

pedes of the present Chilopoda. Thus the first six appendages

of the embryo Geophilus correspond to the antennee, two pairs

of mouth-parts and three pairs of legs of the larval Julus.

The phenomenon of two pairs of limbs to a segment, so

unique in 'T'racheata, may be explained by reference to the

Phyllopoda among the Branchiata. The parallel is quite

exact. The larve in both groups have but a single pair of

appendages to a segment; the acquisition of a second pair

in the Diplopods is clearly enough a secondary character, and

perhaps necessary in locomotion ina cylindrical body with no

sterna *.

The larval Ju/us and the ancestral Chilognaths were hexa-

pod Tracheata, but sufficiently different to indicate plainly

that the Myriopods branched off from a much more primitive

form than the Scolopendrella-like hexapod ancestor, and which

form somewhat agrees with our hypothetical leptiform ancestor

of all Tracheata,

The Myriopods also differ from Hexapoda in that the genital

armature of the male (the females have nothing corresponding

to the ovipositor of Hexapoda) is not homologous with that of

true insects; moreover, the armature is not homologous with

the limbs or jointed appendages of the myriopodous body.

On the contrary, the apparatus of hooks arises from the ster-

num of the sixth segment, between, but a little in advance of,

the origin of the eighth pair of legs. It should be observed

that the legs in Myriopods are outgrowths between the tergites

and sternites, there being no pleurites differentiated, and in

this important point also the Myriopods are quite unlike the

Hexapodous 'l'racheates.

Affinity and Systematic Position of the Pauropoda.—The

nearest living forms which approach the larval Diplopod are

Pauropus and Eurypauropus. These organisms are practi-

cally primitive Diplopods. Looking at the lowest Chilognath,

Polyxenus, and comparing Pauropus with it, it will be seen

that the latter scarcely differs from it ordinally. Pauropus

has a head with a pair of antennee and two pairs of mouth-

appendages. ‘The antenne are quite unlike those of any other

* It is plain that, as Balfour suggests (‘Comparative Embryology,’

p- 824), the double segments have not originated from a fusion of two

primitively distinct segments. There is, however, a misconception as to

the nature of the “double segments.” They are not so in fact. The

scutes are single, undivided, but the ventral region is alone imperfectly

double, bearing two pairs of appendages, just as single segments of Apo-

didee may bear from two to six appendages ; the differentiation is confined

to the ventral limb-bearing region and limbs alone; the dorsal part of the

segment does not share in the process.

NWI ©

Morphology of the Myriopoda. 347

Myriopods, being 5-joited and bifurcate, somewhat as in

certain Coleopterous larvee; the peculiar sense-filaments may

be the homologues of the flattened sense-sete at the end of

the antennee of Diplopod Myriopods.

The “ mandibles”’ are rudimentary, very simple, and are

scarcely more like Chilopod than Diplopod protomale ; there

is a second pair of appendages which, as Lubbock states, are

“ minute and conical ;” they bear a closer resemblance in

position and general appearance to the “ under lip”’ of Chilo-

gunaths, especially the under lip of Stphonophora; in fact, the

mouth-appendages of Pauropus are much nearer the normal

type of those of the true Chilognaths than the degraded

mouth-organs of the Sugentia.

The body of Pauwropus is cylindrical, the scutes are as much

like those of Polywenus as those of the Chilopods ; the number

of body-segments is seven, the same as in the larve of certain

Diplopods ; the feet are 6-jointed as in Diplopods, and there

are nine pairs, six pairs to the four penultimate segments.

The three anterior pairs are developed from two segments,

2. e, arise from the ventral and lateral sclerites corresponding

to two scutes. ‘This fact should not, we venture to suggest,

exclude them from the Chilognaths, as there is a considerable

irregularity in the position of the three pairs of anterior feet

in larval Chilognaths. ‘The terminal body-segment is much

as in Chilognaths. When we examine the larva of Pauropus

we find a strong resemblance to the larval hexapodous Chilo-

gnaths. Hence we scarcely see good grounds for placing

Pauropus ina distinct order from Chilognaths. Their dis-

tinctive characters, and they are important ones, are, we

submit, only of subordinate value, and we should therefore

place the Pauropoda as a second suborder of Chilognaths,

throwing all the genuine Chilognaths into a first suborder.

Turning to Lurypauropus we find that this singular form

is in a degree a connecting link between Pauropus and Poly-

venus; the head has much the same shape, the antenne being

inserted beneath far back from the front edge of the broad top;

the legs are of much the same shape, and more truly diplopod

than in Pauropus, and they are arranged nearly in two pairs

to a segment; there are six segments, four of them bearing

legs, there being nine pairs of legs to four scuta. ‘The scutes

are much as in Polyxenus, spreading out flat on the sides, the

animal being elliptical oblong, broad and flat. There are no

true sternites like those of Chilopods ; and though the feet are

inserted wider apart, the entire structure of the soft membra-

nous sternal region is much as in Polyxenus. We theretore

feel warranted, although originally accepting the ordinal rank

348 Dr. A. S. Packard, Jun., on the

of the Pauropoda assigned them by Sir John Lubbock, in

regarding them as Chilognaths, with aberrant features which

would throw them into a suborder of the latter group.

The Systematic Position of Scolopendrella.—This singular

form is usually regarded as a Myriopod, while Mr. Ryder re-

fers it to a distinct order, Symphyla. We have already*

given our reasons for the view that it is a ThysanuranT, with

only superficial resemblances to the Chilopod Myriopods.

Our fresh studies on the latter confirm our opinion that

Scolopendrella is a Hexapod. ‘The mandibles and maxille,

the former especially, are like those of the Thysanura rather

than the Myriopods, not being divided into two parts (stipes

and cardo). Itseemsto us that Scolopendrella with its nume-

rous postcephalic legs may fulfil the phylogenic requirements

of the early embryo of Hexapoda and Arachnida in which

there are a number of embryonic primitive abdominal appen-

dages. Thus it preceded Campodea as a stem-form.

Genealogy of the Myriopoda. — The pseudo-hexapodous

larval forms of Chilognatha, including the Pauropoda and the

early germ of the Chilopoda (Geophilus), indicate that the

many-legged adults were derived from what we have called a

Leptus-torm ancestor. Our present knowledge of the embry-

ology of the Myriopoda shows that, unlike the Arachnida and

Hexapoda, the embryo is not provided with primitive transi-

tory legs. There seems then no direct proof that the Myrio-

poda had an origin common with that of Insects and Arachnida,

from a Scolopendrella-like, and perhaps still earlier Pertpatus-

like ancestor ; but from a six-legged form, which, however,

may have been derived from some worm-like ancestor. The

Leptus-torm larve of Myriopoda, with their three pairs of

cephalic appendages and six legs, may then be the genealo-

gical equivalent of the six-legged Nauplius of Crustacea ;

which type is generally believed to have originated from the

worms.

A genealogical tree of the Myriopods would then be simply

two branches, one representing the Diplopod and the other the

single-paired type (Chilopoda), both originating from a

Leptus-like six-footed ancestor (¢. e. with three pairs of

cephalic and three pairs of postcephalic appendages).

Dr. Erich Haase, in his “ Beitrag zur Phylogenie und

Ontogenie der Chilopoden,” publishes a “ Stammbaum der

* ¢ American Naturalist, xv. p. 698 (Sept, 1881).

+ Compare the excellent figures of the mouth-parts of Scolopendrella

in Dr. I. Muhr, ‘ Die Mundtheilein Scolopendreila und Polyzonium,” 10er

Jahresbericht tiber das deutsche Staats-Gymnasium in Prag-Altstadt,

1881-82. Prag, 1882.

ils

Morphology of the Myriopoda. 349

Protochilopoden.” He proposes a hypothetical group, Proto-

symphyla, from which the Symphyla, Thysanura, and Chilo-

poda have originated. But, as we have seen, this view is

based on mistaken views as to the relations of the Chilopods

to the Diplopod Myniopods, and of the homologies of Myrio-

pods with Insects. As we have seen, the Chilopods must

have originated from a Chilognathous stock, or at least from

a branch which arose from Pawropus-like forms, and the

Thysanura, with Scolopendrella, must have arisen from a

separate main branch, which led to the Hexapodous branch

of the Arthropod genealogical tree.

For the reasons stated, also, we should disagree with the

views of Hiickel (‘ Natiirliche Schépfungsgeschichte,’ 1870,

2nd edit.) that the Diplopod Myriopods were derived from

the Chilopoda. In the English translation (1876) he re-

marks, ‘‘ But these animals also originally developed out of a

six-legged form of 'Tracheata, as is distinctly proved by the

individual development of the millipede in the egg, Their

embryos have at first only three pairs of legs, like genuine

insects, and only at a later period do the posterior pairs of

legs bud, one by one, from the growing rings of the hinder

body. Of the two orders of Centipedes .... the round

double-footed ones (Diplopoda) probably did not develop until

a later period out of the older flat s¢ngle-footed ones (Chilo-

poda), by successive pairs of rings of the body uniting toge-

ther. Fossil remains of the Chilopoda are first mentioned in

the Jura period.” The Chilognaths, however, as shown by

Dawson, Meek, and Worthen, and latterly by Scudder, were

numerous as far back as the Carboniferous period; the Chilo-

pods are the later productions, perhaps not older than the

Tertiary period, since Germax’s Geophilus proavus is a doubt-

ful form.

In this connexion reference should be made to the singular

fossil, Paleocampa, from the Carboniferous formation of Ih-

nois, originally described as a caterpillar-like form by Meek

and Worthen, and lately claimed to be a Myriopod by Mr.

Scudder*, who proposes for the hypothetical group, of which

he considers it as the type, the name Protosyngnatha. It

seems to us, after a careful reading of Mr. Scudder’s article,

that this obscure fossil presents no features really peculiar to

the Myriopods, but that there are as good or better reasons

for regarding it as the hairy larva of some Carboniferous

neuropterous insect. Mr. Scudder describes it substantially

* “The Affinities of Paleocampa, Meek and Worthen, as evidence of

the wide diversity of type in the earliest known Myriopods,” by Samuel

H. Scudder. Amer. Journ. Science, xxiv. no. 141, p. 161 (Sept. 1882),

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 25

350 On the Morphology of the Myriopoda.

thus :—“ It is a caterpillar-like segmented creature, three or

four centimeters long, composed of ten similar and equal seg-

ments, besides a small head; each of the segments, excepting

the head, bears a single pair of stout, clumsy, subfusiform,

bluntly- pointed legs, as long as the width of’ the body, and

apparently composed of several equal joints. Hach segment

also bears four cylindrical but spreading bunches of very

densely packed, stiff, slender, bluntly tipped, rod-like spines,

a little longer than’ the legs. The bunches are seated on

mammille and arranged in dorsopleural and lateral rows.’

We do not recognize in this description any characters of a

myriopodous nature ; on the contrary, in what is said about

the head, “ composed of only a single apparent segment”

(p. 165), ’and of the legs in the above description, and again

on p. 165, where it is remarked, “ The legs were different in

form {from those of modern Chilopoda], but their poor preserva-

tion in the only specimen in which they have been seen, prevents

any thing more than the mere statement of the following dif-

ference ; “while the legs of Chilopoda are invariably horny,

slender, ’ adapted to wide extension and rapid movement, those

of Paleocampa are fleshy, or at best subcoriaceous, very stout

and conical, certainly incapable of rapid movement, and

serving rather as props,” the author appears to be describing

rather a caterpillar-like form than a Myriopod. It seems

to us that the larve of the neuropterous Panorpide, with their

two-jointed abdominal prop-legs, small head, and singularly

large spinose spines, arising in groups from a tubercle or

mamilla, come nearer to Palceocampa than any Myriopod

with which science is at present acquainted. For these reasons,

and while the nature of these fossils is so problematical, we

should exclude them, as regards the Myriopods, from any

genealogical considerations.

We have also attempted to show that the Archipolypoda*

are a subdivision of Chilognaths, allied not remotely to the

Lysiopetalide ; or at least that they are true diplopod Myrio-

pods. Hence we are still reduced for our materials for a

phylogeny of the Myriopods to existing orders, Pauropus

being, perhaps, a more aberrant and stranger type than any

fossil forms yet discovered.

* “The Systematic Positions of the Archipolypoda, a Group of Fossil

Myriopods,” Amer. Naturalist, 326, March 1883.

Mr. W. L. Distant on Malayan Entomology. 351

XULI.— Contributions toa Knowledge of Malayan Entomology.

Part Il. By W. L. Distant.

Order LEPIDOPTERA.

RHOPALOCERA.

Elymnias Godfery?, n. sp.

Allied to EZ. vasudera, Moore, but differing above by the

much paler colouring of the wings, the fuscous shadings in

the Indian species being replaced by bluish; the anterior

wings are greyish white, shaded with bluish, which becomes

darker beyond the cell; a broad outer marginal dull bluish-

black fascia, widest at apex; nervures and nervules dark

bluish, the median nervules and submedian nervure more or

less margined with dark bluish ; posterior wings asin Ff. vasu-

dera, but the markings bluish and the outer margin very broad

at anal angle. Wings beneath as in #. vasudera, but the

dark mottled markings much smaller and closer; anterior

wings with two small submarginal ocellated spots (black,

with greyish centres), divided by the lower discoidal nervule ;

posterior wings with eight similar submarginal spots, the two

uppermost largest, the first between and near the bases of the

subcostal nervules, the second above the discoidal nervule,

and the remaining spots following regularly between the ner-

vules—two between the third median nervule and submedian

nervure—-(anal angle mutilated) ; the red basal colouring of

the posterior wings occupies the largest portion of the cell, and

extends to the base of the abdominal margin; the yellowish

space does not extend from the abdominal margin to the upper

median nervule, as in P. vasudera, but terminates suddenly at

the second median nervule.

Exp. wings 70 millim.

Hab. Malay peninsula, Sungei Ujong (Godfery).

Ixias Birdi, n. sp.

3. Anterior wing black; basal third (eonsisting of lower

and inner half of cell obliquely terminating at a little beyond

base of lower median nervule, and from thence continued to

inner margin at about one fourth from posterior angle) sul-

phureous; the black area is inwardly angulated beneath the

lower median nervule, and is crossed by a broad irregular

orange-coloured fascia, divided by the black nervules, com-

mencing a little above the costal nervure, and outwardly oblique

352 Mr. W. L. Distant on Malayan Entomology.

to upper discoidal nervule, then convexly suberect to upper

median nervule, after which it is outwardly elongated, and

terminates at about the lower median nervule; inwardly it

is excavated at the discocellular nervules, before which and in

the cell it possesses an extension of two irregular spots. Poste-

rior wings sulphureous, with a broad outer black margin.

Wings beneath sulphureous; anterior wings faintly showing

the orange-coloured fascia above, sparingly speckled with

fuscous in upper portion of cell and along the costal and outer

margins (most broadly so at apex), and with a fuscous spot

at posterior angle; posterior wings also sparingly speckled

with fuscous. Body and legs more or less concolorous with

wings.

Exp. wing 56 millim.

Hab. Malay peninsula, Sungei Ujong (Godfery).

This species is allied to Z. aneaxtbia, Hiibn., and L. latifas-

ctatus, Butl.; from both it differs by the narrower black

marginal border to the posterior wings, and on the anterior

wings by the greater extension of the black area across the

cell, and also from the first by the paler-coloured orange

fascia, which is also more dilated beneath the upper median

nervule.

Papilio caunus, Westw., race egialus.

&. Closely allied to P. caunus, but differing in having the

white markings with their pale bluish terminations on the

upper surface of the posterior wings smaller and more con-

fined to the basal half.

Hab. Singapore (Godfery).

Exp. of wings 94 millim.

The interest attaching to this local race of P. caunus, and

on account of which it is here described, is owing to its being

a mimic of Huplea diocletianus, which is also the local race or

form in the Malay peninsula of 1. rhadamanthus. We thus

see this mimicking Papilio modified in the same manner as

its mimicked species ; and if . diocletianus is recognized as a

distinct species, this race, if found to be constant, will have

(in an artificial and systematic sense only) to be recorded in

the same way. ‘he Bornean form of this Papilio will also

probably be found to mimic the race or species Huplea

Lower.

Discophora tullia, Cram.

Messrs. Marshall and De Nicéville, in their ‘ Butterflies of

India,’ vol. i. p. 299, have expressed their opinion that the

Miscellaneous. 353

male and female specimens that I figured in my ‘ Rhopalocera

Malayana,’ as representing Cramer’s species, must be really

taken to portray Discophora zal, Westw. I cannot subscribe

to this somewhat surprising decision, on the following

grounds :—

First :—The varietal male specimen which I figured, and

which agreed with aJl male specimens then examined from

the Malay peninsula in having the anterior wings unspotted,

cannot in any case be considered a distinct ‘ Malayan race,”

as I have since received specimens from Sungei Ujong with

two of the three series of bluish spots described as typical of

the Indian form of the species, but which are certainly not

constant. But even supposing that the unspotted form was

constant and constituted a distinct race, it could not then be

taken as representing the D. zal (the male of which was un-

known to Prof. Westwood when he described that species), as

Mr. Moore possesses in his collection a male which he tells

me agrees with the markings of the female of that species,

and may therefore be considered typical.

Secondly :—The female form which I figured does not agree

with the original figure given by Westwood, which possesses

a fourth inner row of spots, and also has the two outer series

composed of differently-shaped spots.

If, therefore, D. zal is really specifically distinct from D.

tullia, as Mr. Moore’s male specimen would denote, it cer-

tainly cannot be ascribed to my Malay specimens and figures,

as stated by Marshall and De Nicéville; and as these figures

undoubtedly show variation from the Indian form of D. tullia,

as understood and figured by them, the course pursued should

have been either to agree with me or to describe the Malay form

as a new species!!—the last being an alternative that I, at least,

am not prepared to take.

MISCELLANEOUS.

Lucilia macellaria infesting Man.

By Freperick Hompert, M.D., F.C.S.

A FARMER’s wife, thirty-five years of age, was attacked on Mon-

day, September 27, 1875, with a headache and a flushed face. She

stayed at work, expecting a malarial chill, an affection prevailing at

that time in the neighbourhood. From this time the pains in the

region of the frontal cavity at the base of the nose and below the

eye, extending to the right ear, increased. At times the pain was

354 Miscellaneous.

more severe than at others, but it never entirely left. This pain

was described as preventing hearing and breathing, and so excru-

ciating that at intervals, day and night, her cries could be heard at

a great distance from the house. Tuesday evening blood-mucus

began to run from the right nostril, which was somewhat swollen,

the swelling extending on Tuesday over the whole right side of the

face. On this day, the fifth of the complaint, four large maggots

dropped out of the right nostril. When I was first called to the

patient, Monday, October 4, only the right lip and nostril were

swollen, the acrid discharge having somewhat blistered the lips

below: After each discharge the maggots dropped from the nostril,

until the twelfth day; one hundred and forty or more maggots

haying escaped. The majority of the maggots were three fourths of

an inch in length, there being only a few which seemed a line or

two shorter; they were of a yellow hue, conical shape, and haying

attached to one end two horn-like hooks. The patient recovered

fully.

Monday, September 18, 1882, I saw a patient in the same neigh-

bourhood as the first, suffering from the same malady. At that

time two hundred and eighty maggots had been discharged, and at

the close of the illness over three hundred. There was a swelling

on each side of the nose, with a small opening to each. I lanced

these openings and more maggots came out.

In the Indian Territory the so-called screw-fly laid its eggs in the

nose of man. In 1847 [heard of several deaths of men and children

in Texas, near Dallas. The gad-fly was common in the American

Bottom forty years ago. It laid its eggs in the noses of cattle and

in the ears of horses and deer, but never in the human nose. The

fly that I send is about four times as large as the common fly.

Head a dark, glistening green; a bronze face, very lively in appear-

ance. Is it the same that they called in Texas or Indian Territory

the screw-fly ? or is it the gad-fly seeking a new field?

The patient of 1875 is now alive and well. The second case oc-

curred two years ago near Collinsville, in this county, and proved

fatal. The third patient above named is getting well. The fourth

is reported from Georgia; the patient died.

The first case which I had under my charge was the first which

ever occurred here. The eggs must have been deposited in the nose

several days before the fifth, the day the maggots dropped out.

On the eleventh day all were discharged. I secured live maggots

at that time, September 18, 1882. I put soil in an open-mouthed

vial and dropped the maggots on it; they crawled in the ground in

about five minutes. I covered the opening with white damastis and

hoped that the next year the fly would come out of the ground.

But on October 6, or the twentieth day, the vial had fourteen living

flies. So, reckoning from six days before the pain commenced for

the laying of the eggs, to the twelfth day, when the maggot dis-

charged, making eighteen days, and to this adding the twenty days

during which the grubs were in the ground, we have thirty-eight

Miscellaneous. eb us

days from the time the fly laid the eggs until a new generation of

flies is produced from them.

You may think I have dwelt too long on these cases; but if you

had to stand at the bed and had seen the suffering and despair of the

patients and found that the worms were eating them up, you would

not think so.

All these cases occurred in the month of September.

Upon this communication Dr. C. Y. Riley says that the insect here

referred to as attacking the human subject in Illinois, “ is the Lucilia

macellaria of Fabricius, the injuries of which to different animals are

well known in the south and west, where the larva is called the

‘screw-worm, I have repeatedly endeavoured to obtain the true

parent of this worm. Dr. Humbert’s communication is most interest-

ing, but the specimens yet more so, as the flies he forwards are the first

that have positively been bred from the larve known as ‘ screw-

worms, and they confirm the above determination of the species,

The larvee agree with others which I have from Texas, taken from

the root of the ear of a hog which had been bitten by a dog.”—

Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. Sept. 1883, p. 103.

Fish Mortality in the Gulf of Mecico.

By S. T. WaLker*.

Knowing your interest in every thing connected with fish &c., I

take the liberty of giving you all the facts I have been able to col-

lect in reference to the late mortality among the fishes in Tampa

Bay and adjoining coasts. Had I known before I began my cruise

of the extent of this mortality and splendid opportunities afforded

of collecting specimens of strange and perhaps unknown species, I

might have gone better prepared for collecting specimens; but I

had only heard a few vague rumours, and I was little prepared

for any thing further than a collection of facts in regard to the

matter.

On leaving Clear Water, November 20, I sailed south through

Boca Ceiga Bay, and encountered the first dead fish floating on the

water near Bird Key, a little south-east of Pass A’Trilla. These

were mullet, and as we progressed to the south and east I began to

encounter toad-fish, eels, puff-fish, and cow-fish, in immense num-

bers, and, on attempting to land on the extreme point of Point

Pinellas for the night, I was driven to my boat by the stench of

thousands of rotting fish upon the beach. The next morning I

went ashore and found the dead fish drifted ashore in countless

numbers. The eels appeared most numerous, followed by puff-fish,

cow-fish, sailor’s choice, and small fish of every shape and variety.

After these followed groupers, mangrove snappers, jew-fish, gar-

pike, spade-fish, sting-rays, and sharks. Other varieties, unknown

to me, were mixed among these, together with vast numbers of cat-

fish. I saw very few mullet here.

* Letter to Prof. S, F. Baird,

356 Miscellaneous.

At Gadsden Point about the same species appeared; whileat Tampa

I saw but few dead fish, and they were principally gars and catfish.

From Tampa I proceeded to the mouth of the Little Manatee to

obtain some information from Mrs. Hoy concerning her theory

accounting for the death of the fishes. I subsequently visited the

towns of Manatee, Palmetto, Bradentown, and proceeded thence to

Hunter’s Point, in Sarasota Pass, Longboat Inlet being the furthest

point south visited. Returning, I spent several days on Anna Maria

Key, where I collected the skulls of several kinds of fish ; thence,

passing northward by way of Passage Key, Egmont, Mullet Key,

and so on back to Clear Water. From Longboat Inlet round to

Mullet Key, the dead fish were principally mullet, catfish, eels, and

groupers, the mullet preponderating at least ten to one. Puff-fish,

toad-fish, cow-fish, and frog-fish were still extremely plentiful; in-

deed, I saw no diminution in their numbers, though the numbers of

dead mullet had increased very greatly.

I saw many fish in every stage of sickness, from the first attack

to the end. All were affected in nearly the same manner. The

fish, apparently active and healthy, would be swimming along, when

suddenly it would turn on its side and shoot up to the top of the

water, gasping as though out of the water, apparently unable to

control its motions, often lying on its side on the bottom for five or

ten minutes motionless, then suddenly shooting hither and thither

without aim or object, and finally ending the struggle on the surface

and floating off dead. Whole schools of mullet would suddenly

stand upright on their tails, spouting water, and die in five minutes.

Gars would run for a long time with their snouts above the water,

and then lie motionless, as if dead, for ten or fifteen minutes. These

generally lived an hour or more after being attacked. 1 obtained

specimens of water from various localities, which I send herewith,

marked to show whence obtained.

Before giving the statements of others in regard to the matter, I

will give you the results of my own observation in a very brief

manner :—

1. The dead fish were most numerous on the outside beaches and

on the inside beaches of the outer line of keys.

2. The dead fish were least numerous about the mouths of creeks

and rivers, decreasing gradually as one approached such places. ~

3. The poisoned water was not diffused generally, but ran in

streams of various sizes, as proven by fish dying in vast numbers

instantly upon reaching such localities.

4. The fish were killed by a specific poison, as proven by the

sickness and death of birds which ate of the dead fish.

5. The fish began dying on the outside beaches first, as Mr. Strand,

assistant light-keeper at Egmont, reports them coming up first on

the 17th of October, while Mrs. Hoy observed them first on the Ist

or 2nd of November, at Little Manatee river.

6. The examination of many hundred recently-dead fish revealed

no signs of disease. The colours were bright, the flesh firm, and the

gills rosy. The stomach and intestines appeared healthy.

Miscellaneous. 357

In my haste I have neglected to state that I saw a good many

dead birds during the trip. At Tampa ducks were dying. I saw

dead vultures at Anna Maria Key, and at Passage Key large flocks

of cormorants were sick and dying. I also saw the carcasses of

terns, gulls, and frigate-birds. The cormorants sat on the beach

with their heads under their wings, and could be approached and

handled.

It might be also proper to state that on Monday morning, Decem-

ber 14, about one hour before day, I heard a roaring south-west of

Passage Key, apparently far out at sea, resembling the “ blowing

off” of a steam-boiler. The noise continued some ten minutes and

ceased. After daylight I heard a similar roaring, which lasted about

five minutes. There was no steamer in sight in the direction of the

sound, and I observed no swell in the sea following it. After I got

under sail I heard the noise a third time. Whether this was fol-

lowed by the death of fish I am unable to say, as I did not stay to

see. I mention this incidentally as a corroboration of Mrs. Hoy’s

statement, which is hereto appended. Whether or not either of

these disturbances of the water had any connexion with the mor-

tality among the fishes, the theory of subaqueous eruptions of

poisonous gases is extremely plausible and reasonable.

Statement of Mrs. Charles Hoy, of Little Manatee.

The fish began dying here about the Ist of November. About 8

o'clock on the evening of October 28, or thereabout, I was sitting on

my front gallery, the air being perfectly still and the bay calm, when

I heard a heavy splashing of the water in the direction of Gadsden

Point. This continued for a few minutes and was immediately fol-

lowed by a roaring sound, such as might be made by the wheels of

a side-wheel steamer near at hand, though the noise seemed to be

several miles away. ‘This continued for about a quarter of an hour,

as near as I could guess, when it suddenly ceased. Some twenty-

five or thirty minutes afterwards heavy swells began to come up the

river, such as come in during a heavy blow from the north-west.

These continued for a long time, gradually becoming lighter until I

went to bed. In three days the fish began to come up the river

dead and dying. I caught several mullet that were standing up-

right in the water, sick, and each had three black spots on the back,

which gradually faded away. I opened the fish and could see

nothing the matter with them. The flesh was natural and firm and

the gills were normal.

In regard to oysters I have had a rather rough experience, and

can with certainty say that they are poisonous. A few days after

the fish began dying I had a quart of fine oysters for dinner. I had

a lady visitor on that day, but she did not like oysters, and ate

none. My daughter and I ate heartily of them, and after dinner I

took my gun and went out to a pond to shoot some ducks. I took

a coloured woman (my cook) along, and before I had gotten half

way I began to feel weak, and a mist came before my eyes. I kept

on, however, to the pond, and when I reached it was so blind I

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 26

358 Miscellaneous.

could not see the ducks, although the water was covered with

them.

’ With the assistance of the coloured woman I got home, when I

found my daughter similarly affected and unable to walk. Neither

Mrs. Simms (the visitor) nor my cook were affected, which makes

me know it was the oysters. The sickness and loss of vision gra-

dually left us after drinking a cup of strong coffee. I am confident

the death of the fish is caused by the discharge of poisonous gases

from the bottom of the sea.

Mr. Williams, of Point Pinellas, thinks the mortality is “ caused

by a black scum on the water resembling soot,” and Mr. Spencer, of

the Tampa Tribune, says that “the water where the fish are

dying looks black and slimy ;” and he ascribes this to the fall of an

unusual amount of rain, the water of which, “ becoming impreg-

nated with the poison of decaying vegetation, is poured into the bay

in unusual quantities and poisons the fish.” Both these gentlemen

allude to the unwholesomeness of the oysters ; and the latter says,

“the oyster-saloons here [Tampa] were obliged to close, as the

oysters came near killing several people.” According to MM. For-

garty and Whittaker, “the poisoned water runs in streaks,” so

that, of three smacks fishing in company, “two lost all their fish,

while one lost none, the vessels being only a few hundred yards

apart.” —Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., Sept. 1883, pp. 105, 107.

On the Organization of the Crinoidea.

By M. E. Perrier.

In the course of investigations which already date from several

years ago, I was led to results with regard to the organization of

the arms of the Comatule differing considerably from those which

were announced by William Carpenter, and which have been since

observed and variously interpreted by Herbert Carpenter, Greef,

Tauber, Ludwig, and some other observers. In consequence of the

peculiar facilities for study which they presented I had made my

investigations principally upon very young individuals, or upon

arms in process of regeneration ; it was, on the contrary, upon adult

individuals, and often in full production, that the researches of the

anatomists just cited were made. Hence it was probable that the

divergences which existed between my original results and theirs

might be due to the fact that the organization of the arms of Coma-

tule undergoes important modifications with age. On the other

hand, there are also serious divergences between the conclusions at

which the various observers have arrived; and the publications of

Ludwig have recently diffused ideas with respect to the Echino-

derms which require to be rectified upon many points, ideas which

we believe we have demonstrated to be incorrect with regard to the

circulatory apparatus of the Urchins and Starfishes, and which

would render any homology very difficult to establish in the group

Echinodermata, if we accepted them for the Crinoids. This is

Miscellaneous. 309

what has led us to resume the study of the development and organi-

zation of the Comatule from the moment when the larva attaches

itself up to the adult state. Being compelled for the present to

interrupt these investigations during my voyage on board the

‘Talisman,’ I beg the Academy’s permission to communicate to it

the principal results at which I think I have arrived.

Ludwig has described, in the Comatule, a complicated circulatory

apparatus, the centre of which is a peculiar organ, sometimes called

the heart, sometimes the dorsal organ, and which is a vascular plexus

corresponding to the supposed hearts of the Starfishes, Sea-Urchins,

and Ophiuri. M. Jourdain was one of the first to express doubts

as to the nature of the organ regarded as a heart in the Starfishes ;

I have demonstrated that in the Sea-Urchins and Starfishes this

organ had a glandular structure—a result which has been confirmed

by recent researches upon the Ophiuri and the Sea-Urchins. The

dorsal organ of the Crinoids has the same structure as the supposed

heart of the other Echinodermata; like this it must be designated

by the name of the ovoid gland. The vessels which appear to start

from it are nothing but ramifications of the gland, usually termina-

ting in dilatations having the aspect of caca. These ramifications

run in the midst of innumerable trabecule of conjunctive tissue of

the general cavity, which may themselves sometimes take on the

appearance of vessels. In the Comatule, in the Pentacrinoid and

in the Cystidean phase the ovoid gland already exists ; it is a solid

fusiform body, passing from the oral ring to the peduncle, of which

it continues the axial cord. This body emits no ramification ; there

ean therefore, at this moment, be no question of a vascular appa-

ratus. In the adult Comatula the ovoid body is implanted upon

one of the horizontal floors of the chambered organ.

The name given to this singular-looking organ shows that we

know nothing of its physiological function. Nevertheless this

function must be very important, for the chambered organ, of which

scarcely the rudiments exist during the Cystidean phases, becomes

developed in proportion as the Comatula acquires arms and cirri,

and continues in connexion with all these parts by the intermedia-

tion of fibro-cellular cords which occupy the axis of the calcareous

part of the cirri and the arms. The determination of the nature of

these cords may seem to determine the nature of the chambered

organ itself. William and Herbert Carpenter see the nervous sys-

tem in these cords; Ludwig simply designates them as fibrous cords,

and with him the nervous system is only a simple modification of

the epithelium of the ambulacral groove.

I have been able to demonstrate not only that the fibro-cellular

cords in question emit ramifications which have all the appearance

of true nerves, as seen by W. and H. Carpenter, but also that,

wherever muscles exist, these muscles are clearly in connexion with

ramifications of the fibrous cord. These ramifications divide into

a great number of threads ; their last branches terminate at stel-

late cells, each of which is produced into a muscular fibre. Rami-

fications of this kind are likewise connected with the fibres which

360 Miscellaneous.

are contained by the ambulacral tentacles, and a great number of

which exist in the sensitive papille of these tentacles, which Lud-

wig erroneously regards as hollow.

This double connexion of the axial cords of the arms and the cirri

with the organs of sense and those of movement confirms the opinion

put forward by the English authors. But it must be added that

the stellate cells which form the external covering of the cords are

themselves in connexion with the cells of connective tissue which

fill all the intervals of the calcareous trabecule of the skeleton of

the animal, cells which themselves form a continuous network, the

last meshes of which are connected with the cells of the epithelium

of the arms.

In accordance with the close relationships which exist between

all the tissues of the animal, the nervous system consequently re-

mains in a state of remarkable indifferentiation. However it may

be, if we assume that the axial cords of the cirri and arms are, as

indicated by their anatomical connexions, dependencies of the ner-

vous system, the chambered organ must be considered the central

part of that system in the Crinoids; and these are important con-

clusions, the morphological consequences of which we shall reserve

for future development.

In the parts of the arms in process of formation the tissue of the

axial cord does not differ from the three yellow cells which surround

it. It is by their free extremities that the arms increase in length.

There exists a sort of terminal bud, which soon divides into two at

first identical parts: one of these parts grows rapidly, and becomes

a pinnule; the other elongates more slowly, and becomes again

divided; the half opposite the newly-formed pinnule becomes in its

turn a pinnule, and the bud included between the two pinnules con-

tinues this mode of division until the growth comes to an end.

From this it results that the structure of the arms and that of the

pinnules are at first identical. If the pinnule continues its evolu-

tion it becomes a ramification of the arm, and in this way we

explain the mode of construction of the multistylate Comatule.

When the pinnule stops in its evolution it appears to be only a

simple appendage ; it presents an ambulacral canal, and below this

a general cavity, which is usually divided into two very unequal

chambers by a transverse partition. This structure is also that of

the very young arms, in which the inferior chamber is extremely

small. When the genital apparatus is developed this structure be-

comes more complicated. The large chamber of the general cavity

is divided afresh into three cavities by the appearance of a horizontal

floor and a vertical floor. At the point of junction of these two

floors there is a canal occupied in great part by the genital rhachis,

the ramifications of which in the pinnules become the ovaries or the

testes. I have been able to trace all these modifications, and I pro-

pose shortly to make them known in all their details.—Comptes

Rendus, July 16, 1883, p. 187.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES. ]

No. 72. DECEMBER 1883.

XLII.—Remarks on an Essay by Prof. G. Lindstrém, entitled

“Contributions to the Actinology of the Atlantic Ocean,” and

a Reply to some of his Criticisms. By Prof. P. Martin

Duncay, F.R.S., V.P.G.S., &e.

In 1876 Prof. Lindstrém communicated his essay * on the

actinology of the Atlantic Ocean to the Royal Swedish Aca-

demy. It contained descriptions of corals which had been

dredged up from off the Josephine Bank and the sea-floor

near the Azores, Virgin Islands, Salt Island, and Anguilla.

The depths varied from 109 to 980 fathoms.

After reading the essay carefully and comparing Prof.

Lindstrém’s statements with those of his predecessors in the

same kind of research, I found that he differed from every-

body in opinion, and often in matters of fact. I have hitherto

carefully avoided disputation in scientific matters, and I felt

no disposition to reply to Prof. Lindstrém, especially as I was

aware how erroneous many of his statements were. I hoped

that time would bring some remarks from him after M. de

Pourtalés and Prof. H. N. Moseley, F.R.S., had contravened

some of his assertions. But lately having been engaged in a

* Kongl. Svenska Vetenskaps-Akad. Hand]. Bd. xiy. no. 6, published

in 1877.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xu. 27

362 Prof. P. M. Duncan on Prof. G. Lindstrim’s

revision of the genera of corals, it was necessary for me to

reconsider the essay on the actinology of the Atlantic.

Much has been written upon the deep-sea corals since Prof.

Lindstrém’s essay was read. Thus my paper on the Madre-

poraria dredged up by H.M.S. ‘ Porcupine’ was read May

1876 and published in 1878 (Trans. Zool. Soe. vol. x. part 5,

1878).

Prof. H. N. Moseley’s preliminary report on the ‘ Challenger’

corals (1875) was followed in 1879 by the reception of his

full report on the ‘Challenger’ corals. This book was pub-

lished subsequently.

The late M. de Pourtalés published the Report on the

Corals and Antipatharia of the ‘ Blake’ Expedition in 1880.

These researches might have modified Prof. Lindstrém’s

views ; but as they do not appear to have done so, it is neces-

sary that I should criticize them seriatim, taking the oppor-

tunity, however, to point out the valuable parts of the Pro-

fessor’s communication.

1. Lindstrém makes the interesting discovery of the

presence of the variety borealis, nobis, of Caryophyllia clavus,

Scacchi, as far south as lat. 48° 19’, in 109 fathoms. Hitherto

it had only been known as a North-Atlantic and Mediterra-

nean form. He gave the first locality beyond its supposed

home for this variety, which now has been found by Moseley

in the Patagonian area.

2. I described Caryophyllia Pourtalesi, dredged from deep

water in the North Atlantic *. Professor Lindstrém says :—

“This coral cannot properly be classified with the genus

Caryophyllia, as there are no regular paluli, and all such are

entirely wanting in the North-Atlantic specimen (7. e. Lind-

strém’s). But my material is too scanty to decide the

question.” He places Paracyathus thulensis, Gosse, as a

synonym.

My material was not scanty, and the species was minutely

described and the small columella and the irregular pali were

noticed. In an essay on the ‘ Porcupine’ Madreporaria

(part 2), which I read before the Zoological Society a few

months after Prof. Lindstrém read his, I gave abundant

evidence of the existence of pali in the species; and Erxle-

ben’s drawings clearly indicate them}. ‘The number of pali

is small, and they are especially visible when the columella is

* “ Madreporaria dredged during the Expeditions of H.M.S. ‘ Porcu-

pine,” Trans. Zool. Soc. vol. viii. pt. 5, p. 317, pl. xli. figs. 3-10.

+ Trans. Zool. Soc. vol, x. pt. 5, p. 238, ae xhii. figs. 1-7. Read May

1876, published 1878. Jllustr. Cat. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard.—No. IV,

“ Deep-sea Corals,” 1871, p. 12, pl. ii. figs. 1, 2, 3.

“Contributions to the Actinology of the Atlantic Ocean.” 363

small. They are thin and long, and are placed before the

third cycle when the fourth and fifth orders are complete.

They follow the law, which certainly has a meaning and

classificatory value, that pali do not exist in relation to incom-

plete septal cycles. There is nothing present which can con-

found my form with Gosse’s Paracyathus ; and therefore I hold

that the species I established from a considerable number of

specimens, and which was considered doubtful by Lindstrém

after the examination of one coral (which probably was not of

the species at all), isa true member of the Caryophyllia group,

and should retain the name I gave it.

3. Leptocyathus Stimpsont, Pourtalés.—This coral, so in-

teresting from its being associated with a fossil genus, was

described by Pourtalés in 1871; he had some doubt about the

denticulate septa taking the form out of the Turbinolide, but

he was sure upon the point of the existence of pali (paluli),

although those of the higher orders were not very distinguish-

able from the columellar processes. Juindstrém states, ‘‘ There

are no paluli, and the papille which compose the columella

may sometimes be mistaken for paluli. The species, as well as

the following (Leptocyathus? halianthus, Lindst.), cannot be

classed with the Leptocyathi in the sense of Milne-Edwards

and Haime.,”

This criticism was answered by Pourtalés in the Report

on the ‘ Blake’ Corals*. He wrote, ‘‘ Mr. Lindstrém doubts

the propriety of referring these corals to the genus Lepto-

cyathus, although he adopts the genus provisionally. He did

not recognize the pali, which, however, If find quite distinct in

large specimens in front of the tertiaries; but I have had no

opportunity of direct comparison with the fossil species.”

Prof. Lindstrém is wrong, as he might have expected he

would be found to be, for Pourtalés was a most careful observer.

I have two small specimens, one of which certainly is Pour-

talés’s type, for he sent it tome named. It has pali easily

recognizable and before all the septa, except those of the last

order. The beautiful type of the genus from the London

Clay ¢ and the equally elegant form described from the

Gault { have pali before all the septa, and the principal costa

are produced so as to give an appearance like Moseley’s

discoid Stephanotrochus §.

Pourtalés’s species comes into relation with an Eocene form

* Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, no. 9, ii. p. 201.

+ Palsont. Soc. Lond., Brit. Foss. Corals, 1850, p, 21.

¢ Paleont. Soc. Lond., Brit. Foss. Corals, Supplement, pt. ii. no. 2,

p. 34 (1870). ; Aes Eure

§ Report on ‘ Challenger * Corals, pl. ini. fig. 5.

265

364 Prof. P. M. Duncan on Prof. G. Lindstrom’s

from Sind (Leptocyathus epithecata *), and with the discoid

Trochocyathi from the Cainozoic of Australia f.

Lindstrém describes ‘‘Leptocyathus? halianthus” (op. cit.

p- 9, pl. i. fig. 9), and states that “this species is only pro-

visionally to be ranged in the genus Leptocyathus, as there

seems to be a great discrepancy in the arrangement of the

secondary and tertiary septa, which do not unite in the pre-

viously known species.” The form is largely fixed, with a

broad basis; the coste are warty and spinulose. The septa

in six cycles, each containing primaries, secondaries, tertiaries,

and septa of the fourth and fifth orders. Lindstrom states

that the tertiaries are united at their “ base” with the septa

of the second order, and, again, those of the fourth and fifth

orders are united with those of the third. But in the very

clear drawing the septa of the fourth and fifth orders are

straight, and do not unite with those of the third order.

Which is correct, the drawing or the description? One must

be wrong. The tertiary septa do unite with the secondary.

Prof. Lindstrém is quite correct in remarking that union of

the tertiary and secondary septa has not been noticed in the

previously described species. In the Tertiary species of Eng-

land and Sind and in the species from the Gault there is no

such union. But it is hardly a generic character. The only

distinction between Leptocyathus, Kdw. & H., and discoid Tro-

chocyathi is the presence of pali before the higher orders in

the first-named. This can no longer be admitted to be of

generic value, and the genus must be absorbed in Zrocho-

cyathus.

What is the classificatory position of this doubtful form

described by Lindstrém ? Lither there are pali or there are

none; and the describer states that the slender styliform an-

gular papille of the columella encroaching on the basis of the

septa form, as it were, a semblance of paluli (pali). The

basis means, according to Lindstrém, the axial end of the

septum.

Admitting that there are no pali, the calice strongly re-

sembles that of Sabinotrochus apertus, nobis t; and if the

larger septa had been prolonged, the identity of the forms

could hardly be doubted so far as the calice is concerned.

Unfortunately Lindstrém does not say any thing about the

number and arrangement of the coste. If there are pali, the

species must come within the genus Z7ochocyathus.

* Paleont. Indica, ser. xiv., Foss. Corals of Sind, p. 60 (1880).

t+ Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxvi. p. 296 (1870).

t Duncan, “ Deep-sea Corals,” Trans. Zool. Soe. vol. viii. pt. 5, p. 320,

pl. xl.

“Contributions to the Actinology of the Atlantic Ocean.” 365

4. Deltocyathus Agassiz’, Pourtalés.—Lindstrém retains

the modern name for this species, which has been exhaustively

examined by Pourtalés and Moseley, and to the considera-

tion of which I have given some care. Pourtalés sent me a

specimen, and I recognized it as the well-known species

Deltocyathus italicus, Michelotii sp., of the Tortona and other

Italian Miocene deposits. Since then Pourtalés has acknow-

ledged the fact *, and Moseley gives the proper name to the

species in his ‘ Report on the ‘ Challenger’ Corals,” p. 145,

in which he quotes the final decision of the lamented natu-

ralist. It is a most variable species, and has a wide geogra-

phical distribution.

Lindstr6m considers some Hast-Atlantic specimens which

have small paluli, an attached base, and thin walls to bring

Sabinotrochus apertus, Duncan, within the species Deltocya-

thus Agassizi. Moseley spared me the trouble of answering

this most extraordinary conclusion t:—‘‘ After comparing

Prof. Martin Duncan’s specimen of Sab¢notrochus apertus

with the series of Deltocyathus, I conclude that Prof. Lind-

strém’s conjecture that it is a variety of Deltocyathus Agassizt

cannot be upheld. Sabcnotrochus differs in its general texture

and in the thickness of its septa, in its fine wavy coste, and

in the margin of the calicle being indented, also in the com-

plete absence of pali, which are certainly not broken away.”

Sabinotrochus and Deltocyathus are two perfectly distinct

genera, and do not belong to the same group, even of the

Turbinolide. Certainly Prof. Lindstrém’s critical method

is the reverse of complimentary, and we do not want’ con-

jectures.

Next Prof. Lindstrém considers that a form described by

Pourtalés (Trochocyathus Rawsont) “ may perhaps also belong

to this species (Deltocyathus Agassizi= D. italicus), being pro-

vided with septa and columella of the same shape” (p. 10).

Pourtalés photographed the type of his species in pl. vi.

figs. 7-10, of “‘ Zoological Results of ‘ Haslar’ Expedition’’f.

Certainly the coste and pali of Yrochocyathus Rawsoni re-

move it entirely from Deltocyathus. Itis a true Trochocyathus,

allied to all forms with the tertiaries uniting to the secon-

daries. After seeing Lindstrém’s criticism, Pourtalés still

retained the form in the genus Trochocyathus, and considered

that it was not without its affinities with Paracyathus.

Lindstr6m compensates, however, for his unfortunate zoolo-

* “Report on ‘ Blake’ Dredging Expedition,” Corals, by Pourtalés,

1878-79, p. 101.

+ Moseley, op. cit. p. 146.

} Tl. Cat. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, no. 8 (1874).

366 Prof. P. M. Duncan on Prof. G. Lindstriém’s

gical criticisms by giving the following interesting result of

his examination of young specimens of Deltocyathus italicus * :

—‘‘ In the smallest specimen I have seen, of only 0°7 millim.,

there are four septa of the first order, towards which two of

the second order are growing, and with these again the smaller

belonging to the third order unite. But to judge by a speci-

men which is a little bigger (1°5 millim.) and has six regular

septa of the first order, the law of substitution as expressed

by Lacaze-Duthiers (Arch. de Zool. Expér. t. i. p. 868)

comes into play; and of the six apparently primary septa

four may have been developed out of secondary ones, only

two of the original four resting in their original position as

septa of the first order, the other two being, as it were,

pushed aside and degraded into secondary ones.” Neverthe-

less it must not be imagined that this arrangement is universal

in the genus, for in the specimens in my possession the regu-

larity of the appearance of six primaries and the succession of

six secondaries is clear, and it is confirmed by the study of

the coste. The term “ phenomenon of substitution” is

much more correct than the term ‘ law.”

5. Hlabellum laciniatum, Philippi, sp.—Lindstrém recog-

nizes amongst the Josephine dredgings the common North-

Atlantic Plabellum, which Sars had called Ulocyathus arcticus.

But he confounds with it #labellum alabastrum, Moseley—

a conclusion which is refuted by that author in his ‘ Report

on the ‘ Challenger’ Corals,” with which I agree.

6. Duncania barbadensis, Pourtalés.—Lindstrém makes

some valuable remarks upon this species, and notices the

sameness of the septa, except those which are in relation

to pali. He states that the material which fills up the

calice from its base is stereoplasma, or a secretion of the

basal membrane superseding or supplementing the dissepi-

ment. He gives the only comprehensible drawing of the

calice we have, and states that he has found six septa near

the base. I found in a Gwynia a tetrameral arrangement of

septa above, but a hexameral one at the base.

Pourtalés states that Haplophyliia, which comes close to

Duncania, has the soft parts similar to this last. At present

these genera, I consider, must be associated with Gwynia,

nobis, in a group in the Turbinolide, and not with the

Rugosa.

7. Schizocyathus fissilis, Pourtalés.—Lindstrém obtained

the specimens he described from Anguilla, Salt Island, and

the Josephine Bank, in from 200 to 790 fathoms. He

describes an epitheca, which is not to be distinguished from

* Op. ct. poll.

“Contributions to the Actinology of the Atlantic Ocean.” 367

the wall, and Pourtalés distinctly denies the existence of

an epitheca. Lindstrém’s drawing of a calice does not

correspond in a very important character with the photo-

graph of Pourtalés. There are no septa in Lindstrém’s

figure (pl. u. fig. 27) in the position of the primaries of

Pourtalés, and what are marked primaries by Lindstrém are

the secondaries of Pourtalés. Lindstrim, however, states

that there are six primaries, twelve secondaries, and six

tertiaries. The coral is most carefully described by our

author, and the discrepancies are perfectly incomprehensible

and inexplicable. Nothing can be more interesting to

zoophytologists than Lindstrém’s remarks on the stereo-

plasma of this coral, on the prolongation of the ornamental

granules to form false synapticula, and on the nature of the

septum.

Lindstrém combats the teaching of Milne-Edwards and

Jules Haime that each septum consists of two lamine. He

believes that the dark irregular central line seen in sections is

the primary condition, and that the thick calcareous substance

on either side is superadded—that really three and not two

structural elements exist. He candidly admits that the two

laminz are to be seen in some fossils. They are visible

enough in many recent forms; and in some Australian fossil

forms where the costa does not correspond with the septal end,

and this is continuous with the intercostal median line, the

line which separates the septal lamine is singularly distinct.

In investigating this matter [ find that the centre of the

recent septum has more connective tissue than the laminz on

either side; and this can be well made out by treatment with

acid—the ultimate microscopical structures radiate often from

the central plane. That Lindstrém is right about the central

line being anterior to the rest is beyond a doubt, but I do

not find that it was a lamina for all that.

The splitting of the parent by an internal bud, noticed

probably in the first instance by Savile Kent in a Flabellum,

does not appear to be the phenomenon observed in Schizocya-

thus according to Lindstrom. He points out that “it is not

a gemmation, but an interrupted and then continued growth

of the same individual.” He instances similar processes of

growth in Flabellum laciniatum and Diaseris crispa. Now

Pourtalés states that the budding takes place on the secondary

septa in the calice; and it must be confessed that although

Lindstrém’s figure (pl. in. fig. 29) looks like what has re-

cently been called rejuvenescence, and has been known for

a generation as growth after arrest, the appearance of figs. 28,

30, and 31 favours the opinion of Pourtales.

368 Prof. P. M. Duncan on Prof: G. Lindstrém’s

8. Stenocyathus vermiformis, Pourt.—Lindstrém and Pour-

talés differ so much in their description of the appearance and

morphology of this coral that it is hardly conceivable that

they are treating of the same species. ‘The species was de-

scribed and delineated by Pourtalés in his ‘ Deep-sea Corals’

(1871, p. 10, pls. i. & i). Itis a very elongated and cylin-

drical form, with a shallow circular calice, septa not exsert,

rather thick, and in six systems of three cycles. Pali thick,

curled, and in front of the secondary septa. Columella of a

single twisted process. Coste indicated by lines of very flat

tubercles. The older parts of the corallum are nearly filled up

by a thickening of the septa; but the process is never carried

out to a total obliteration of the interseptal chambers, which

can be traced in the shape of slender canals to the very base.

The costal tubercles are hollow and communicate through

narrow canals with the interseptal chambers. Pourtalés con-

sidered that “ these little cavities are, no doubt, homologous

with hollow roots of Rhizotrochus, Thecocyathus, and other

genera of the family.” The height of the type was from 25

to 40 millim. and the diameter only 2 or 3 millim.

In the generic diagnosis it is stated that there is no epitheca.

The corals considered to belong to this species by Prof.

Lindstrém never assume the vermiform shape!!! and are of

a regular turbinate growth. In fact the diameter of the

calice is one half of the length of the corallum. ‘There are no

tubercles as described by Pourtalés, and the dots “can in

no way be considered as homologous to the rootlets in Rhizo-

trochus, Thecocyathus, and several other corals.” In Prof.

Lindstrém’s corals there is a dense network of dissepiments

which are developed out of the spines or tubercles on the

lateral surfaces of the septa.

In the description of the corals dredged in the ‘ Blake’

expedition Pourtalés contents himself with remarking :—

“‘] cannot find in my specimens the dissepiments mentioned

by Mr. Lindstrém.”

Pourtalés gave me a specimen of this curious species, which

tallies with his description, and not in the least with Prof.

Lindstrém’s. It is only necessary to remark that the so-

called dissepiments are not what are usually called such, and

that they certainly are not synapticula, which are structures

independent of ornamentation.

Probably Prof. Lindstrém’s very hasty criticism was

bestowed upon a totally different species from that recognized

as Stenocyathus vermiformis, Pourt.

It must be observed that there is an epitheca in every

specimen.

9. Colosmilia fecunda, Pourt—This coral gave Pourtales

“Contributions to the Actinology of the Atlantic Ocean.” 369

much trouble, and he illustrated it several times, and stated

that the edges of the septa send out trabecules, uniting together

to form a rudimentary columella, which is, however, fre-

quently absent (1871). In 1874 the same author described

a new genus Cenosmilia, and noticed it as a genus formed to

receive the Parasmilie propagating by gemmation, and thus

becoming compound. Single corals are typical Parasmilie

with a well-developed spongy columella.

Prof. Lindstrém does good service in explaining that the

gemmation in both these instances is not from within, but

that buds have attached themselves accidentally to the surface

of the old form ; and in the ‘ Blake’ corals Pourtalés (p. 109)

states that his alcoholic specimens show that the young one

is upon a dead old one. ‘These are therefore clearly not bud-

ding corals in the proper sense.

10. Paracyathus arcuatus, Lindst.—This species Pourtalés

has shown to belong to the genus Asterosmilia, nobis, and to

be the species Asterosmilia prolifera, Pourt. (‘ Blake’ Corals,

p- 109).

Conclusion.

1. Caryophyllia Pourtalest, nobis, belongs to the Caryophyl-

lice, and is a good species.

2. Leptocyathus Stimpsoni, Pourtales, was perfectly drawn

and described by Pourtalés, who noted the pali which Lind-

strém missed. But neither the species nor my Leptocyathus

endothecata of Sind can remain in the genus, which is worth-

less: they are discoid Tvrochocyatht. Prof. Lindstrém’s

Leptocyathus ? is of doubtful position.

3. Deltocyathus italicus is the correct name for D. Agasstzt

according to Pourtalés and myself. Sabinotrochus apertus,

nobis, is, according to Moseley, a correctly named species, and

is altogether different from a Deltocyathus seen by Prof.

Lindstrém. T’rochocyathus Rawsont, Pourtalés, is correctly

placed, and Prof. Lindstr6m is in error.

4. As Moseley has already pointed out, Prof. Lindstrém is

wrong in confounding Flabellum alabastrum, Moseley, with

Flabellum laciniatum.

5. Haplophyllia, Duncania, and Gwynia must be removed

from the Rugosa.

6. The descriptions of Pourtalés and Lindstrém regarding

Schizocyathus jissilis are not reconcilable.

7. Stenocyathus vermiformis, Pourtalés, has not the struc-

tures recognized by Lindstrom,

8. Lindstrém’s observations on the budding of Calosmilia

fecunda, Pourt., are very good and useful.

9. Paracyathus arcuatus, Lindst., is Asterosmilia prolifera,

Pourtaleés.

370 Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi.

XLIII.—Notices of British Fung’. By the Rev. M. J.

BERKELEY, F.R.S., and C. E. Broome, Esq., F.L.S.

[Continued from ser. 5, vol. ix. p. 183.]

1989. * Agaricus (Lepiota) Memophorus, B. & Br. Linn.

Soc. Journ. xi. p. 500.

This was before recorded as a possible variety of A. cepe-

stipes ; but as the species is published by Gillet under the name

of Lepiota flammula, we think it right to give it its proper

name.

We observe in Gillet’s book the following synonyms, of

which the indication may be useful to other fungologists :—

Amanita inaurata= Ag. strangulatus=.A, Cecilie, Berk.

Clitocybe Pelleterti= Paxillus leptopus, Fr.

Hygrophorus amenus=H. calpytreformis, Fr.

Clitocybe fetidissima=Ag. inamenus, Fr,

Volvaria pusio= Ag. temperatus, B. & Br.

Marasmius erythropus= Ag. coherens, P.

Coprinus evanidus= C. filiformis, B, & Br.

Pleuropus glandulosus= Ag. ostreatus, Jacq.

Nolanea picea= Ag. cucumis, P.

1990. A. (Lepiota) dldinitus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 39.

Penzance, J. Ralfs.

1991. A. (Tricholoma) oreinus, Fr. Syst. Myce. p. 52;

Cooke, tab. 218 6.

King’s Cliffe.

1992. A. (Tricholoma) atrocinereus, Pers. Syn. p. 348 ; |

Cooke, tab. 52 a.

Hothorpe, Norths., Miss Ruth Berkeley.

1993. A. (Clitocybe) cyanopheus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 82, var.

Pengelle’, minor, B. & Br., Cooke, tab. 264. |

Cornwall, T. W. Pengelly, Esq. It is possible that this |

form may be specifically distinct ; but though it differs so much |

from the figure given by Gonner and Rabenhorst, the charac- |

ters answer so well to those which are given in Hym. Eur.

that we do not consider it at present distinct. It occurred on |

two occasions; the abrupt white apex of the stem is very

remarkable.

1994. A. (Clitocybe) rzvulosus, Pers. Syn. p. 369.

Var. neptuneus, Batsch, f. 115.

On dry mountain-pastures near the sea, Llandulas, Miss

Ruth Berkeley.

LACCARIA, n. g.

Contextus tenax; hymenium cum stipite confluens ; la-

mella crasse sporis globosis pulverulente.

Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi. ote

This is clearly quite as distinct from the genus Agaricus

as ftussula and Lactarius, and cannot with any justice be

included in the subgenus Clitocybe. We have several very

distinct forms from Ceylon, besides our own A. laccatus, bellus,

and one or two continental species. The amethyst-coloured

form usually referred to A. laccatus is probably distinct. We

have long seen the necessity of this separation, but were un-

willing to add to the numerous genera already separated from

Agaricus, with greater or less reason.

1995. A. (Collybia) edematopus, Scheff. t. 259.

Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson. The specimens were, however,

in a very early stage, and the identification requires confir-

mation ; they, however, exhibit all the characters of the species

or subspecies as recorded by Fries, Hym. Eur. p. 112.

1996. A. (Collybia) ozes, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 125.

Hothorpe, Ngrths., Feb. 18, 1882, Miss R. Berkeley.

Scent strong, the gills cinereous, veined.

* 4, (Mycena) marginellus, Fr. Myc. Hur. p. 131.

Coed Coch, Miss R. Berkeley. Sibbertoft. A. marginellus,

Quélet, is clearly different. ‘The campanulate pileus is dis-

tinctive.

1997. A. (Mycena) metatus, Fr., Cooke, tab. 238.

On mossy ground. Penzance, J. Ralfs.

1998. A. (Mycena) pullatus, B. & Cooke, tab. 237.

With the last, Penzance.

A distinct species, of which the description will be given by

Dr. Cooke.

1999. A. (Omphalia) teldmaticus, Cooke, tab. 240.

On Sphagnum. ‘This is our A. affricatus, which appears

not to be the plant of Fries.

2000. A. (Pleurotus) acerinus, Fr. Hym. Myc. p. 175.

On ash, near Morpeth, C. H. Sp. Perceval, Esq.

2001. A. (Pleurotus) limpidus, Fr. Myc. Kur. p. 177.

On decaying wood, Penzance, J. Ralfs. Cheshire, A.

Walker, Esq.

2002. A. (Pleurotus) hypnophilus, Fr. Myc. Eur. p. 181.

On moss in wood, Coed Coch.

2003. A. (Leptonia) asprellus, Fr. Myc. Eur. p. 205.

Amongst grass, Coed Coch.

2004. A. (Kecilia) griseo-rubellus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 212.

Sibbertoft, Miss Ruth Berkeley.

* A, (Hebeloma) fastibilis, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 237.

A very perfect form of this very variable species occurred

at Coed Coch, Oct. 1883, in which there was a distinct mem-

branous ring, and above the viscid coat of the pileus there

was a circle of distinct floccose scales.

372 Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi.

2005. A. (Hebeloma) magnimamma, Fr. Hym. Eur.

p. 243.

Sibbertoft. Amongst grass under apple-trees.

* 4. tener, Scheff., var. pubescens.

Coed Coch.

According to Fries this is A. pilosellus, Pers.

2005 bis. A. (Tubaria) stagninus, Fr. l. c. p. 273.

Sibbertoft, in marshy ground. A dwarf form about the size

of A. inquilinus.

2006. A. (Crepidotus) applanatus, Pers. Obs. i. p. 8.

On decaying wood, Penzance, J. Ralfs.

2007. A. (Crepidotus) haustellaris, Fr. Hym. Eur, p. 276.

With the last. Penzance, J. Ralts.

2008. A. (Crepidotus) Ralfst’?, B. & Br. Pileo semireflexo

luteo, subtiliter furfuraceo hispidulo, margine involuto patulo,

floccis gossipinis aflixo, stipite obsoleto, lamellis ventricosis

argillaceis, margine albido.

On decaying wood. Penzance, T. W. Pengelly, Esq.

2009. A. (Psilocybe) subericeus, Fr. Icones; A. clivularum,

Let.

Near Chester, A. O. Walker, Esq. This is probably a

common species. We have found it many years since at

King’s Cliffe. A. clivularum is referred by Fries to his A.

ertceus, but it is clearly rather his A. subericeus.

2010. A. (Psathyra) conopileus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 304.

In various places amongst grass and in garden borders,

varying when fresh in the depth of the brown tint. Near

Peterborough it occurred last year with a distinct bulb.

2011. A. (Psathyra) glareosa, B. & Br. Pileo campanu-

lato obtuso 1. umbonato griseo apice pallide castaneo striato

miculato-floccoso ; stipite fistuloso fibrillis albis vestito, brun-

neo, lamellis late adnatis umbrinis.

On gravelly soil after wet weather, Sibbertoft, June 7,

1882.

Pileus half-inch across, very minutely tomentose ; stem 1-

2 inches high, 1 line thick; gills broad behind, adnate, spores

black. Flesh brown, especially close to the gills.

2012. A. (Psathyra) pellospermus, Bull. tab. 561.

We have certainly had this year the true plant of Bulliard,

which seems to us distinct from A. corrugis.

2013. A. (Psathyrella) crenatus, Fr, Hym. Eur. p. 315.

Penzance, J. Ralts.

2014. Coprinus flocculosus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 323.

King’s Cliffe.

2015. C. cothurnatus, Godey, in Gillet, Planches Supplé-

mentaires.

Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi. 373

Penzance, J. Ralfs.

2016. Cortinarius (Telamonia) scutulatus, Fr. Hym. Eur.

p- 377.

Sibbertoft. The form figured by Quélet, not that by

Fries in the ‘ Icones.’

2017. C. (Telamonia) stemmatus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 385.

Lyne, Sussex, Miss Broadwood. The ringless form men-

tioned by Fries in the text.

2018. C. (Hygrocybe) germanus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 397.

Coed Coch, A. O. Walker, Esq.

2019. Hygrophorus glutinifer, Fr. Hym. Kur. p. 408.

Penzance, J. Ralfs. Probably the same with the little-

known Ag. aromaticus, Sow.

2020. H. vitellinus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 417.

Penzance, J. Ralfs.

2021. Lactarius hysginus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 426.

Near Morpeth, C. H. Sp. Perceval, Esq.

2022. Lentinus lepideus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 481.

Tn an old hollow elm, C.J. Plowright, Esq. The veil still

adhering to the edge of the pileus. Specimens found before

in this country have been on imported pine-wood. The proper

name is “ dapideus,” “ lepideus”’ inaccurately.

2023. Polyporus (Pleuropus) petaloides, Fr. Hym. Eur.

. 536.

: Sibbertoft. A single specimen on an old stump, Rev. W.

Gregson.

A very interesting addition to our mycology, and of great

beauty.

*P, (Placodermei) fomentarius.

Var. pomaceus, Pers. Syn. p. 531. J. Ralfs.

The common form on willow, which is very hard, occurs

also in Cornwall. This, however, is referred by Fries to P.

igniarius, the true distinction of which species depends on the

difference of the colour of the spores, which are dark and fer-

ruginous, and not white, as in P. dryadeus and P. igniarius.

2024. P. (Inodermei) gossypinus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 566.

On an old stump of Ulex, Sibbertoft. Distinguished at

once by its dedaleoid pores. We hoped to get a large

supply of specimens this year; but the same stump, which was

accidentally trodden down, has produced instead P. fumosus

in great abundance.

2025. P. (Resupinati) Lestadiz, Fr. & Berk. Contextu

albo, poris leete citrinis hymenio, hic illic tuberculato.

On the underside of a deal board in a hothouse. Coed

Coch.

Colour bright persistent yellow ; very beautiful.

374 M. F. Meinert on Mochlonyx (Tipula)

We have no doubt that our plant is what is mentioned by

Fries, Hym. Eur. p. 575. It forms confluent patches many

inches in length.

2026. Stereum rubiginosum, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 641.

On decaying wood, Penzance, J. Ralfs. A very different

species from S. tabacinum.

2027. S. stratosum, B. & Br. Effusum, lete ochraceo-

album glabrum lutescens hic illic rngosum, contextu pallido

stratoso, stratis demum solutis.

Penzance, J. Ralfs.

At no. 1962 for “Marasmius” read “Hygrophorus.” We

are glad of this opportunity of correcting an unfortunate error,

as this is, in all probability, the last of a long series of notices.

XLIV.—Mochlonyx (Tipula) culiciformis, De Geer.

By F. MEINert™*.

In the year 1776 De Geer, in his ‘ Mémoires pour servir a

Vhistoire des Insectes’ (tome vi. p. 372), described the de-

velopment of a small midge or gnat, T¢pula culictformis, and

gave (on pl. xxiii. figs. 3-12) figures of the larva and pupa

and of the male imago. De Geer had found the larva in the

month of May in pools and swamps (“des étangs et des

marais ”) and successfully bred them ; but since that time no

one seems to have met with the larva, indeed the imago itself

seems not to be known, and some doubt has arisen as to the

correctness of the developmental history given by De Geer,

notwithstanding that author expressly states that he had reared

both pupa and imago. In the months of April and May of

last year (1882) I was fortunate enough to capture the larva

in various places in this neighbourhood and to rear the gnat, by

which means it appeared that De Geer’s description was ex-

actly in accordance with the truth. At present, however, I

shall confine myself to describing the imago itself and indi-

cating its place in the system, reserving the description of the

larva and pupa for a general working up of the great number

of midge and gnat larve upon which I have been at work for

a long time, and which I hope to have ready in the course of

the present year.

* Translated by W.S. Dallas, F.L.5., from the ‘ Oversigt af Konglige

Danske Videnskabernes Selskabs Forhandlinger,’ 1883, no. 1, pp. 1-17.

——

culiciformis, De Geer. 375

De Geer seems only to have known the male, as he only

describes and figures that sex; but unfortunately the descrip-

tion is very incomplete, and the figures are not much better.

Nevertheless upon this description and these figures a distinct

genus, Corethra, was afterwards established, and for this

genus De Geer’s species was thus the type. Subsequently

other small flies were also either transferred to the genus

Corethra (such as Tipula plumicornis, Fab., which, under the

name of “ Corethra plumicornis,” is one of the best-known

and most frequently examined insects) or established as new

species of Corethra (such as C. pallida); but until now no

one seems to have found De Geer’s gnat, unless the Corethra

velutina, described by Ruthe in the ‘ Isis’ for 1831, should

be identical with De Geer’s Tipula culiciformis*, which, how-

ever, is not probable. ;

De Geer’s diagnosis of the imago runs as follows :—

“Tipule brune, 4 antennes filiformes en plumes dans le male,

4 ventre et pattes grises, et dont les nervures des ailes sont

velues.” “ Tipula (culictformis) fusca, antennis filiformibus

maris plumosis, abdomine pedibusque griscis, costis alarum

hirtis.” In conclusion he gives (/.c. p. 378) a fuller descrip-

tion of the imago; but in this he adds nothing to what he

gives in the diagnosis or what can be seen in the figures

(figs. 11 and 12), except that the antenne are stated to be

black.

In the “ Versuch einer neuen Gattungs-Eintheilung der

europiischen zweifliigeligen Insekten, von Joh. Wilh. Meigen,”

which Illiger published in his ‘ Magazin fiir Insektenkunde ’

(Bd. 11. pp. 259-281, 1803), Meigen established the genus

Corethra, and cited as the single or typical species of that

genus Tipula culiciformis, De Geer (/. c. p. 260). Also in

* For synonymic purposes Walker's Mochlony.x effetus (‘Insecta Britan-

nica,’ Diptera, ii. p. 252) and Gimmerthal’s Corethra pilipes (Bull.

Moscou, ii. p. 287), as well as Van der Wulp’s Corethra obscuripes

(Tijdschr. Entom. Nederl. Vereen, ii. p. 160), should be examined ; but

this was impossible for me, and I doubt whether others will gain much

advantage by it.

[It is to be remarked that Walker, or rather Haliday, the real authority

for this part of the ‘ Insecta Britannica,’ not only describes Mochlonyx

effetus, as above cited, but also cites De Geer’s Tipua culiciformis as a

species of Corethra. He describes both sexes of the latter, and notices

the species as “not generally common, but sometimes appearing in great

profusion.’ He describes the antennee in Corethra as fourteen-jointed,

and those of Mochionyx as sixteen-jointed; but the figure of the male

antenna of M. velutinus shows only fifteen joints. On the other hand,

Meinert’s figures which accompany the present paper in the Danish

original show the male antennie of fifteen, and those of the female of

fourteen joints, although from his description the number would appear

to be the same in both sexes.—W. 38. D.]

376 M. F. Meinert on Mochlonyx (Tipula)

his classical work, ‘ Systematische Beschreibung der bekann-

ten europiiischen zweifliigeligen Insekten’ (1818, Th. i.),

Meigen left the insect in the same systematic position (J. ¢.

p- 16) ; but here he states that he had not seen the animal, for

which he reproduces De Geer’s diagnosis, which, after generic

characters were cut out, comes to run as follows in the Latin

translation :—“ Fusca, abdomine pedibusque griseis.”

Henceforward De Geer’s Tipula culiciformis bears the

generic name Corethra, and under the denomination of Core-

thra culiciformis we meet with it both in general manuals,

such as Cuvier’s ‘Régne Animal’ (ed. i. 1829, tome v.

p: 441), where this species alone is named in the genus

Corethra, and in special entomological systems and text-books,

as in Latreille’s ‘Genera Crustaceorum et Insectorum’ (tome iv.

1809, p. 247), where C. culiciformis, Meigen, is cited, with a

reference to De Geer, as the type species, while Réaumur’s

and Slabber’s Tipularva (= C. plumicornis) are referred to it

with some doubt (‘‘pertinere videntur’’). In Kirby and

Spence’s ‘Introduction to Entomology’ (vol. i. 1817,

p- 322, German translation), in Westwood’s ‘Introduction to

the Modern Classification of Insects’. (vol. 11. 1840, p. 515),

and in the regular systematic and faunistic works on the

Diptera also, Corethga culiciformis is named again and again ;

nay we even find a detailed description and figures of a species

so named. It is Lehmann * who has described and figured a

male Corethra as the C. culici/formis cited but not seen by

Meigen. It is not, however, De Geer’s Tipula culiciformis

that he describes, but probably the Corethra fusca established

by Steger.

Subsequently doubts began to arise as to the correctness of

the reference of Zipula culiciformis to Corethra, or more pro-

perly to Corethra with Tipula plumicornis, Fab., as its type.

Steger may be named as the first who expressed this doubt.

In his ‘f Systematisk Fortegnelse over de 1 Danmark hidtil

fundne Diptera” (Naturh. Tidsskr. Bd. 11. 1838-39, p. 556)

he established a new species, Corethra fusca, and referred to

it doubtfully Meigen’s and Macquart’s Corethra culict-

Jformis (=Tipula culiciformis, De Geer). He speaks as

follows :—‘ This species may perhaps be Corethra culict-

formis, Meig., Macq.; but the Tipula culiciformis, De Geer,

cited by these authors, the larva of which is figured in the

* “Tnsectorum species nonnull vel nove vel minus cognitz, in agro

Hamburgensi captee, ex ordine Dipterorum. Descripsit et illustravit

J. G. C. Lehmann,” Nova Acta Acad. Cees. Leop. Catal xii. (1825),

p. 2. 9-248, tab. xv. Reprint of ‘Zoologicarum preesertim in faunam

Jamburgensem observationum pugillus primus’ (1822), pp. 38-46,

eae

culiciformis, De Geer. 377

form of a Culex larva, may be different.” As we see here,

it is the larval form of C. culiciformis, and the great difference

that exists between this larva and the larva of another species

of the same genus, C. plumicornis, Fab., long previously de-

scribed and figured by Réaumur, Goeze, Slabber, Lehmann,

Goring, and Lyonnet, that called forth in Steger this exceed-

ingly justifiable doubt as to the correctness of the synonym.

Besides the doubt came the more home to Steger, or was the

more justified in him, as he had reared his new species,

Corethra fusca, from a larva which certainly differed in two

essential structural characters from the larva of C. plumi-

cornis, but the differences of which are confined within pro-

bable limits. But that the differences were far from being so

great as Steger believed, and especially that the larva comes

much nearer to the larve of Corethra than to those of Culex,

nay, that the newly discovered larva of Corethra fusca in its

most essential differences from the larva of Corethra plumv-

cornis, namely the cleft sete in the tail- and swimming-fins,

agrees with De Geer’s larva, Steger could not well see—in

any case he did not take it into consideration; and he had

not, any more than any one else since De Geer, himself seen

the larva of “* Tipula culiciformis.” It was the external re-

semblance in habit to Culew-larve which had already struck

De Geer, and perhaps also especially the posterior breathing-

tube that had raised doubts in Steger. The same doubts,

moreover, were expressed soon after by Westwood in his

‘Introduction’ (2. c. p. 515), who says, “I fear there must

have been some errors either in De Geer’s observation or in

Latreille’s synonym, inasmuch as Réaumur’s figures of the

transformations of a species described as Corethra plumicornis

totally differ from De Geer’s.”

Zetterstedt, in the ‘ Diptera Scandinavie’ (tom. ix. 1850,

pp. 3474 et seq.), exactly follows Steger, and also cites

Meigen’s and Macquart’s C. culictformis with doubt under

Steger’s C. fusca. Upon this he says, in note 1, “ Tipula

culiciformis, De Geer, ob larvam tamquam larve Culicis

similem ibidem descriptam, nec ‘ flavicantem, hyalinam, pel-

lucidam * (qualis larva C. fusce deprehensa), a D. Steger ut

a C. fusca diversa species habetur.”’

From a faunistic point of view it is very remarkable that

neither Steger, who was an industrious collector of Diptera,

especially in the neighbourhood of Copenhagen, nor Zetter-

stedt, who, besides his own and all the Swedish collections, also

received from collectors in this country, and especially from

Steger, all their Diptera for examination, should have met

with Tipulu culiciformis, or its exceedingly peculiar and easily

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii. 28

378 M. IF. Meinert on Mochlonyx (Tipula)

recognizable larval form; for in the few years that I have

specially studied our midge-larvee I have found this larva dis-

tributed from Ruderhegn in the north, to Boserup Skov

in the west, and Valle in the south; even in Dyrehave,

not far from Ordrupsmose, Steger’s favourite collecting-place,

I have met with it in great abundance; and it also occurs in

the collection of larva: in the University Zoological Museum.

However, it is a fact well known to collectors that many

animals have certain periods during which they nearly dis-

appear, and others in which they occur abundantly.

When we say that Zetterstedt did not know T%¢pula culici-

formis as Danish or Scandinavian, it must be borne in mind,

nevertheless, that in his first treatment of the genus Corethra

(2. c. p. 8475, note 2) he remarks that Wahlberg, perhaps,

was acquainted with it :—‘ In annotationibus mecum commu-

nicatis dixit Cel. Prof. Wahlberg, se ad Gusum Ostrogothiz

et ad Holmiam Corethram culiciformem invenisse. Si vero

eadem ut nostra C. fusca aut Degeerii C. culiciformis sit

habenda, dijudicare non possum, cum specimina Wahlber-

giana cum nostris comparare non potui.” It may also be

noticed that in the ‘ Diptera Scandinavie,’ tom. xi. seu

supplementum tertium (1855), p. 4837, he cites Corethra

velutina, Ruthe, as new for the Scandinavian fauna; for it is

possible that Z%pula culictformis is here intended, and, in any

case, it seems to me nearly certain that this species may belong

to the same genus as C. culiciformis, as will appear from what

follows.

Schiner also (‘Fauna Austriaca: Die Fliegen (Diptera),’

Bd. 1. 1864) did not know Tipula culiciformis, but simply

cites it among the European species occurring outside of

aa ae referring to De Geer’s description in his ‘ Mémoires,’

iC.

But while the species thus seems to have disappeared, or

not to have been met with since De Geer’s time, and the

genus Corethra, as that genus is now formulated with C. plu-

micornis as the type species, does not agree with 7. culici-

formis, another genus, Mochlonyx, has been established, to

which it would appear that De Geer’s species may fairly be

referred*. The establishment of this genus took place as

follows :—

* Strictly speaking, the generic name Corethra should be retained for

Tipula culicifornis, De Geer ; and when other species, such as Corethra

plumicornis and paliida, were afterwards proved to belong to a different

genus from this first-named species, a new generic name ought to have

been selected for them. But I regard it as very hazardous to introduce

changes of name for such a well-known species as C, plumicornis, which

culiciformis, De Geer. 379

As early as the year 1831, Ruthe, in “ Einige Bemerkun-

gen und Nachtriige zu Meigen’s ‘ Systematische Beschreibung

der europiiischen Zweifliigeligen Insekten,’” (‘ Isis,’ 1831,

pp. 1203-22), described a new gnat under the name of

Corethra velutina, which he stated to be very nearly allied

to C. culiciformis, Meig. (or rather De G.), but whick, besides

the colour and clothing, could be easily distinguished by the

proportions of the tarsal joints, and by the structure of the

last joint and the claws. He seems to have captured only a

single male. Among the characters of the new species the

particular statement of the very short first tarsal joint could

not but strike so distinguished a dipterologist as Loew * ; and

in his ‘ Beschreibungen einiger neuen Gattungen der euro-

piischen Dipterenfauna”’ (Hut. Zeit. Jahrg. v., 1844) he

took occasion to establish, for Ruthe’s Corethra velutina, a

new genus, Mochlonyx, which he characterized (/. c. p. 121,

note) as follows :— Mochlonyx, M., a genus coming next to

Corethra, which, among other things, is very easily distin-

guished from the latter by its first tarsal joint being very short,

namely, one fourth the length of the second, the fifth of the

same structure as in Lponewra, and the claws bifid at the

apex, and furnished at the base with a downwardly directed

process (vid. tab. 1. fig. 11).” The figure cited gives a

rather rough representation of the last tarsal joint with the

claws. ‘The character of Mochlonyx here given may cer-

tainly be regarded as stating the chief differences as compared

with the nearly allied genus Corethra ; but besides that it is

too scanty, and therefore insufficient to give a zoological image

of the new generic form, it has the further great imperfection

that it is made solely from the male, and that the character

taken from the structure of the last claw-jomt with the claws,

which alone are figured, does not apply to the female, which

has far simpler claw-joits and claws. For in this genus we

find the unusual case that the sexes differ not only in the

usual way in the structure of the antennae, head (including

the mouth parts), and the generative organs, but that also the

claw-joints and the claws differ according to the sex.

bears one of the best-known of zoological names, and the larva of which

has acquired a classical reputation as the object of histological investiga-

tions. If sucha change is eventually to be made, it had better remain over

for some future monograph of this group. [See also note p. 875.—W.S. D. |

* Zetterstedt, who also, in his third supplement, has Ruthe’s species,

Corethra velutina, from Oland, makes no remark upon this character, but

seems not to have been acquainted with Loew’s article here cited, al-

though it had appeared eleven years before.

28*

380 M. F. Meinert on Mochlonyx (‘Tipula)

Schiner, in his ‘Fauna Austriaca’ (p. 622), adopts the

genus Mochlonyx, and gives, from individuals which he ob-

tained from Loew, a description of it, drawn up with constant

references to Corethra and in his usual pattern of generic

descriptions; but we learn nothing new from it.

From all this I think that a complete description both of

the genus in its two sexes and of De Geer’s so long misunder-

stood species, Tipula culiciformis, will not be out of place.

.... From this it will appear that, although the two genera

[ Mochlonyx and Corethra| come very near together, espe-

cially in the female sex, there are nevertheless besides those

differences between the sexes which are so characteristic of the

new genus sufficient characters for the establishment of the

two genera. ‘The likeness between the imagines of the genera

is the more remarkable as the difference between the larvee

and pupx, and especially between the larve, is so great;

but, on the other hand, there are other genera among the true

Culicids, such as Culex and Anopheles, of which the ima-

gines, at any rate in one sex *, are so like as to lead to con-

fusion, while the larve are exceedingly different, inasmuch as

some of them have and others are destitute of external

breathing-tubes, therefore a difference similar to that between

the larvee of Corethra plumicornis and Mochlonyx culictformis.

Here, both with regard to the-undescribed larva of Anopheles

and the other more or less known midge-larve, I may

refer to the great memoir upon these larve, which, as already

stated, I shall soon be able to complete; and in the mean-

while the reader must content himself, as regards the larve

of Mochlonyx, with De Geer’s rather rough representation

(cempl. xxi. i198, 3—9),\ 9

As it would occupy too much time and lead me too far

should I establish an independent scheme of the genera of

Culicids, and I should, moreover, run the risk of producing

nothing better than we already possess, I shall here avail

myself of Schiner’s, as elaborated by him in his ‘ Fauna

Austriaca,’ and introduce into it various new characters.

Familia Culicide.

Genus Mocutonyx.

Mochlonyx, Loew, Ent. Zeit. Stettin, Jahrg. vy. p. 121, note.

Corethra, Ruthe, Zetterstedt.

Magnitudinis mediocris species figuram Culicés sensu

strictissumo quodammodo referunt.

* Thus with regard to Culex nemorosus see Zetterstedt (J. c. p. 3458

. . 8 ?

note) :—“ Caveas ne hune cum Anophele bifusciato confundas.

culiciformis, De Geer. 381

Caput in transversum rotundatum; proboscis producta,

labrum partem dimidiam articuli tertii (secundi autt.) attin-

gens; cultelli femine breves, dimidiam partem scalpelli fere

equantes, membranacei, lati, angustati; scalpella labrum fere

equantia ; palpi antennis maris vix duplo, aut femine sesqui

breviores, quinque-articulati, articulo ultimo quam penultimo

manifesto longiore.

Antenne protruse, quattuordecim-articulate, articulo basali

maris disciformi, femine depresse conico, articulis obscure

fusiformibus, corona setarum maris multo longiore atque

densiore, articulis binis ultimis pertenuibus, longis, ultimo

manifesto breviore.

Oculi magni, globosi, maris subluniformes; macula ocu-

laris magna, discreta.

-Ocelli desunt.

Scutum dorsale fornicatum, ante propendens, simplex.

Scutellum parvum.

Abdomen novem-annulatum, protrusum, angustum; for-

ceps copularis maris productus, stylo in formam cochlearis

producti redacto, ad apicem aculeo parvo, cultriformi instructo

(infra due lamine chitinee in uncum validiorem, liberum

extus, desinunt) ; forceps femine brevis, aduncus.

Pedes producti, tenues, dense hirsuti; articulus primus

tarsi (metatarsus) secundo pluries brevior, articulus ultimus

pedum maris ad basin tumidus setisque incurvis instructus ;

femine simplex; ungues producti, graciles, ad basin breviter

hirsuti atque processu longiore crenulato instructi; ungues

maris preterea ad apicem dente producto, tenui armati;

onychium productum, flexuosum, pertenue, processus multos,

filiformes e lateribus emittens.

Ale product, anguste, costis dense hirsutis, fimbria densa,

duplici in margine ornate; costa longitudinalis quinta ante

_costam transversalem postremam ramum superlorem, prope

ad marginem admodum curvatum, emittens; cellula basalis

utraque integra; cellula discoidalis deest; lobi basales ale

admodum protruse ; halteres liberi.

Metamorphosis M. culiciformis a De Geer descripta ; larvae

in aqua vitam degunt; victus rapax.

The species are of medium size or perhaps rather small,

like the species of Corethra; in habit, although they come

very near the last-named midges, they nevertheless in some

respects more resemble the species of Culex than the true

midges. Nearly the same may be said of the other genera

here under consideration ; the larvee of Culew and Mochlonya

in habit come nearer to each other than the larvae of Woch-

lonyx and Corethra, but the relation is reversed when we take

into consideration the essential characters.

382 M. F. Meinert on Mochlonyx (Tipula)

The head is rounded; the parts of the mouth with the

second metamere of the head are protruded, oval; the pro-

boscis is protruded and comparatively large. The labrum is

elongated, narrowed, slightly arched forwards, with a pair

of sete inserted on the lower surface a little behind the apex ;

the dorsal plate of the first metamere (scutwm dorsale metamert

primt) is but very short, and the larger part of the labrum is

therefore the posterior, and it is supported at the sides by the

long thin lateral pieces (epipharynx), which may easily be

traced back to the pharynx from which they start*. The

hypopharynx is long, compressed, strongly pointed; it forms

a deep boat-shaped channel, the anterior extremity of which

runs out into two short horns, and the sides of which, on their

outer margins, are furnished with a close fringe of long very

fine sete. Of the salivary duct I have seen no trace either in

males or females. The proboscis, as already stated, is exten-

ded, and the basal part (scutwm ventrale metamert prim? or

mentum autt.) is large and strongly beset with hairs. The

ligula is long and conical. The dadella are distinctly two-

jointed, broad, rounded off in front, with their inner angles

produced into a short point ; no inner supporting apparatus is

to be seen. The sculpella (maxille autt.) are tolerably long,

very acute, thin, nearly membranous, and reach in length

about to the middle of the labrum or halfway up the third

joint of the palpus. The pleural processes or cultelli (man-

dibule autt.) as usual occur only in the females; they are a

good deal shorter than the sculpella, and of a broader and

more obtuse form, but likewise thinand membranous Tf. ‘The

* In presence of the objection lately urged by Kreepelin (Zool. Anz.

1882, p. 576) against the opinion put forward by Menzbier and defended

by Dimmock and myself, that the labrum may be regarded as a fusion of

two different pieces or parts, I willingly admit that the labrum presents

itself as “eine einfache Ausstiilpung des Kopfes;” but nevertheless I-

think that the epipharynx cannot be called either an “ Ausstiilpung” or

a “ Hoblraum,” but only a chitinous prolongation of the upper margin of

the pharynx ; and it seems to me not improbable that similar chitin ous

processes may become amalgamated with or lodge themselves in the dor

sal part of a metamere. For me therefore there can be no question of a

fusion of two “ Ausstiilpungen ” or of two‘ ‘ Hohlraume.”

+ In a morphological point of view these pleural processes are of great

interest, for in Mochlonyxv (and likewise in Corethra) they distinctly ap-

pear as simple processes without any trace of articulations, so that it is

very difficult or impossible to assimilate them with the mandibles such as

we know them in insects with biting mouth-organs (and Hymenoptera).

But neither can it be denied that they correspond exactly with the organs

which are known under the name of mandibles in the females of Culex,

Ceratopogon, Simulinun, and Tabanus, and which I have described in most

of the genera or families here mentioned under the name of pleural pro-

cesses or culéelli (cf. Trophi, Dipterorum: Fluernes Munddele).

a poate

culiciformis, De Geer. 383

palpi are long, thin, strongly hairy and five-jointed. There

is no great difference between the absolute lengths of the palpi

in the male and female, but compared with the antenns they

are to them in the males in the proportion of 1 : 2, in the

females of 2:3. The first two joints are very short, together

about half the length of the third joint; the last joint is a

little longer than the penultimate. In opposition to Meigen,

Zetterstedt, and Schiner, [ regard the palpi as commencing

with two short clavate joints, considering the constriction that

occurs as sufficient to constitute a joint, although this con-

striction does not go round the whole circumference.

The antenne are extended, rather long, in the males with

very long and close, in the females with much shorter and

thinifer, circlets of sete. The length of the sete increases

somewhat posteriorly, and on the last antennal joint the sete

are suddenly much shorter and fewer in number. The num-

ber of antennal joints is fourteen in both sexes; but while in

the females the joints are nearly cylindrical, about equal in

length, only the last joint being recognizably longer than the

penultimate (about as 6: 5), in the males the joints are fusi-

form in inverse proportion to their length; and further, the

middle joint is distinctly shorter than the others, of which

again the penultimate joint is suddenly longer than the pre-

ceding one (over twice as long) and considerably longer than

the following one (about as 4:3). The first joint is very

short and thick, especially in the male, in which it is nearly

disciform.

The eyes are naked and occupy about half the upper surface

of the head in the female, in which they are also slightly in-

curved; in the male they are comparatively smaller, but more

strongly incurved ; on the lower surface they are narrow and

erescentiform. The facets are large, round, very convex. The

eye-spots (macule oculares) are large and well separated from

the eyes. ,

The dorsal shield (scutwm dorsale) is large, very convex,

slightly projecting above the head, without a transverse suture.

The scutellum is small.

The abdomen is long, slender, slightly narrowed posteriorly,

with numerous and long hairs, nine-jointed *; the penultimate

segment is suddenly much shorter than the preceding, and

the last segment again much shorter than the penultimate.

The external generative organs of the male are very large,

* Schiner counts eight segments in the abdomen, and this number is

also given for Corethra by Meigen and Schiner ; nay Zetterstedt even says

of Corethra (1. c. p. 5470), “ Abdomen 8-annulatum (segmenta tantum 7

numero).”

384 M. F. Meinert on Mochlonyx (Tipula)

the basal joint of the forceps especially being very stout. The

styles, on the contrary, are slender and slightly cochleariform,

and bear at the apex, besides the very small and fine tactile

sete, a small cultriform spine. Opposed to the styles are a

pair of short but strongly chitinized hooks, which are inserted

into the body as broad, somewhat dilated, posteriorly rounded

chitinous plates, with the posterior margin deeply emarginate.

The external genitalia of the female are short and stout.

The legs are long, thin, densely hairy, and the first joint of

the tarsi (metatars?) is several times shorter than the second.

The proportion between these two joints in the male is for the

first pair of legs as 1 : 6, for the second pair as 1: 5, and for

the third pair as 1:4. In the female, on the other hand, the

proportion for all three pairs of legs isas 1:5*. Thesecond

tarsal joint is always the longest of all; in the male on all the

tarsi a little more than twice as long as the third; in the

female on the first two pairs of legs not quite twice the length,

but on the third pair rather more than twice as long. ‘The

last joint, or the claw-joint, is simple in the female, but in the

male it is inflated at the base, where it bears a quantity of

large incurved sete. The claws are long and slender; in the

male they are relatively longer and thinner; from the middle

of their immer margin starts a large, thin, slightly bent tooth,

and from their basal part a short, pretty straight, crenulated

process; in the female the claws are simple, but the basal

processes are comparatively longer and more strongly denti-

culated. The onychiwm consists of a long seta, which is

somewhat thickened at its basal extremity, but produced in

front into a very long, thin, somewhat bent or twisted thread,

which bifurcates at the end, but before this emits from its

sides rows of teeth as fine as hairs.

The wings are long and narrow, and the nervures are closely

beset with short setes arranged in pairs along them; the

transverse nervures, however, are naked. The fringe of the

wings consists of a double row of sete or lance-shaped spines,

of which the upper series, or those which are attached to the

upper surface of the wing, are, at any rate on the posterior

margin, about half as long again as the sete in the series

which is attached to the lower surface of the wing. It is in

the posterior margin of the wing that these sete attain their

highest development and most strongly marked lanceolate

* Ruthe gives the proportion in Mochlonyx (Corethra) velutina for the

fore legs as barely 1: 4 :—“ das erste Glied aller Fiisse viel ktirzer als das

zweyte und dritte, an den vorderen Fiissen verhaltnissmassig noch kiirzer

und nicht den vierten Theil des zweyten erreichend,”

;

{

culiciformis, De Geer. 385

torm, with the supports of the blades from two to three times

their thickness in length ; but towards the apex of the wing

the lanceolate form disappears more and more, and on the

anterior margin of the wing they become sete of the ordinary

form. 'The second and fourth longitudinal nervures are bi-

furcated; the fifth longitudinal nervure emits, a little before

the transverse nervure, a nervure towards the margin of the

wing, which, however, does not reach the latter, but runs for

some space parallel to it. Both marginal cells are entire;

the discoidal cell is wanting.

The development, so far as Mochlony« culiciformis is con-

cerned, is described by De Geer. The larve live in water,

and travel in the same way as the larve of Corethra. They

live by rapine, and when pressed by hunger devour each

other.

With regard to the generic characters of Corethra, the

following points may be indicated in contradistinction to

Mochlonyx :—

Of the mouth-parts the cwltel/i (in the female) are smaller

and attain only a fourth part of the length of the third joint

of the palpi.

The eyes are more strongly sinuated than in Mochlonyz.

The external genitalia of the male are somewhat slighter,

and the styles are destitute of the cultriform spine at their

apex. The prehensile hooks are further much shorter, with a

short inner lamella, and do not reach beyond the posterior

margin of the last abdominal segment.

The legs present the essential generic distinction from

Mochlonyx ; but while in the latter genus they are exceed-

ingly different according to the sexes, especially as regards

the claw-joint and the claws, they are here pretty nearly alike

in both sexes. In Corethra the proportion between the lengths

of the tarsal joints is a pretty regular decrease from the first

to the last joint, and the last joint, in both sexes, is normally

constructed. The claws are rather long and slender, finely

haired from the base to beyond the middle. The lateral pro-

cesses are flat, broad, and cut at the edge into many teeth as

fine as hairs. ‘The onychium is much shorter than in Moch-

lonyx, and cleft at the apex into four long hair-like teeth.

The wings are a little broader and more acute, and the

fourth longitudinal nervure divides rather higher up; the

side-nervure emitted by the fifth longitudinal nervure is algo

much shorter and terminates a little before reaching the margin

of the wing, but without following it. In the fringes the

setee of the lower short series are comparatively shorter ; but in

386 On Mochlonyx (Tipula) culiciformis, De Geer.

this particular some specific difference prevails, the difference

mentioned not being so great in Corethra pallida.

The larve, on the contrary, are extremely different ; but it

must also be pointed out that even within the genus Corethra

there is no inconsiderable difference between the species, for

according to Steger (dc. p. 556) the swimming-fans in the

larve of his C. fusca do not consist of fringed sete (as in

C. plumicornis), but of cleft setee (as in Mochlonyz).

Mochlonyx culiciformis, De Geer.

Tula culiciformis, De Geer, Mém. pour servir & Vhistoire des Insectes,

tome vi. p. 372, pl. xxiil. figs. 3-12.

Fusco-brunnea, ferrugineo-pilosa, thorace linea media dorsali

duplici obscura notato, metanoto nigrescente, abdomine pallido,

scutis dorsalibus maximam partem dense nigro-fusco irroratis.

Palpi antenneeque nigro-fusca, antennis femine late, ant.

maris anguste dilute balteatis, apice setarum cinerascentibus.

Halteres pallidi, capitulo brunnescente. Pedes dilute flavi,

genibus apiceque articulorum priorum tarsalium articulisque

posterioribus vel posticis totis fuscescentibus. Ale maris

fumatz, al. femine ante flavescentes. Long. 23-3".

The indications of colour are drawn up from old dry speci-

mens, as required for systematic analytical purposes ; from

fresh individuals or spirit-specimens they would run as fol-

lows :—The colour of the animal is dark brownish grey, but

a broad band or spot on the anterior margins of segments two

to seven of the abdomen above is chalky white. The under

surface of the abdomen is milk-white anteriorly, but poste-

riorly it becomes more and more brownish, with a small oval

blackish-brown transverse spot on the anterior margins of

segments three and four. The legs, especially on the under-

side, are milk-white, but the upper surface of the femora and

tibiee is somewhat brownish, as also the apices of the femora

and tibiz ; the first and second tarsal joints, the greater part

of the third, and the whole of the fourth and fifth joints, are

still darker ; the last joint especially is remarkably dark. The

antenne are milk-white, but the apex of each joint is broadly

black. The palpi are blackish grey ; the halteres milk-white,

with the knob brown. The underside of the head and pro-

thorax are milk-white, as also the base of the wings, the rest

of which are greyish, immaculate. The sete on the thorax

are whitish grey or slightly yellowish; the long sete on the

lateral margins of the abdomen pale greyish ; on the legs the

setee are blackish grey or black, as also on the antenne, the

dense tufts of which, however, have a brownish tint.

_-r™

‘ ja ee

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Lucanoid Coleoptera. 387

Thave not met with the imago in the open, but from the

larvee, which occurred in the beginning of April last year, in

Boserup Skov and Jegersborg Dyrehave, a great number

both of males and females were produced between the middle

of April and the beginning of May.

XLV.—Notice of a new Genus and Species of Lucanoid

Coleoptera. By CHARLES O. WATERHOUSE.

AUXICERUS, n. gen.

General characters of Scortézus ; very depressed. The an-

terior cox only a little separated ; the prosternum not pro-

duced into a process posteriorly. Mesosternum sloping down

in front. The four posterior tibiz straight and not armed

with a spime on the outside. Hyes not divided by the

canthus.

&. Mandibles a little longer than the head, horizontal,

acuminate, and slightly curved. Head large and broader

than long, the anterior angles produced into an acute process.

Clypeal margin emarginate. Basal joint of the antenne

as long as the head (measured in the middle), flexuous; the

second to seventh joints slender, about twice as long as broad ;

the first and second joints of the club with the lamella occu-

pying only the apical half of the joint, so that the lamella are

widely separated from each other ; the lamella is only spongy

on the side which 1s towards the apex ; the apical joint is con-

pressed, reniform, and spongy, except the base, which is

shining, ‘Thorax transverse, the posterior angles obliquely

emarginate. Mentum strongly transverse, rounded at the

sides, widely emarginate at the apex.

Auxicerus platyceps, sp. n.

3. Parallelus, sat depressus, opacus, pallide squamosus; mandibulis

porrectis, apicem versus acuminatis, basi denticulatis ; capite lato,

medio planato, angulis anticis supra obtuse carinatis, longe acute

productis, divergentibus ; thorace capite vix latiori, medio con-

yexo, canaliculato, lateribus piceis, angulis anticis prominulis,

angulis posticis oblique emarginatis ; elytris thorace paulo angus-

tioribus, parallelis, ad apicem arcuatim angustatis, regione sutn-

rali depresso, crebre, eyidenter punctato, macula humerali, altera

laterali ante apicem obscure piceis, macula sub humero, fascia

pone medium undulata, plagaque apicali squamarum pallidarum

388 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Lucanotd Coleoptera.

ornatis; tibiis anticis extus quinquedenticulatis, posticis iner-

mibus ; corpore subtus sat nitido, rufo-piceo variegato.

Long. 13 mill., lat. 5, mandib. long. 3.

The mandibles are a little longer than the head, very

slightly turned up at the apex ; there is a carina which com-

mences in the middle of the base, and turning along the outer

edge terminates in an obtuse scarcely raised tooth a little way

from the apex; another carina commences at the base near

the other, and runs along the centre of the mandible to about

the middle ; the space on the inside of the mandible is thickly

punctured; there are three or four small obtuse teeth at the

base. The ocular canthus only encroaches a very little way

on the eye. There is a slight tumour behind the eyes. The

sides of the thorax are somewhat parallel, with a very gentle

sinuosity before the posterior emargination ; the commence-

ment of the emargination is marked by a distinet slightly

prominent angle. The anterior and posterior margins are

impressed ; the disk is moderately thickly and very finely

punctured. The pale sandy scales, which are generally scat-

tered over the suiface of the insect, are on the elytra crowded

together and form a patch below the shoulder, a band rather

behind the middle (somewhat in the form of a W), and a

patch at the apex. ‘The underside of the head, the base of

the femora, and the metasternum are pitchy red, the latter

shining ; the abdomen is black, rather thickly and moderately

strongly punctured.

Hab. Peru, Chanchamayo (Tham). Brit. Mus.

Scortizus cucullatus, Blanch.

This species, described originally as a Lucanus, is placed

by Solier and Burmeister in the genus Sclerostomus, and I see

no serious objection to its being so placed. The slightly pro-

duced prosternal process and concave mesosternum agree with

that genus. Scortizus, on the other hand, has the prosternal

process more prominent, and the mesosternum is also conically

produced in front.

The species appears as a Scortizus apparently first in Major

Parry’s “Catalogue of Lucanide” (Trans. Ent. Soe. 3rd ser. i. .

p- 94).

Mr. A. G. Butler on new Lepidoptera. 389

XLVI.—Descriptions of new Lepidoptera from the Viti Islands.

By Artuur G. Burter, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &c.

Tue following new species have been received from the Godef-

froy Museum :—

RHOPALOCERA.

1. Catochrysops vitiensis, sp. n.

$. Wings above dull smoky grey, changing in some lights

to dull lilacine blue; fringe blackish, grey at the tips; head

and thorax blackish ; abdomen smoky grey. Wings below

pale brownish ash-grey, traversed by numerous undulated

whitish-edged brown lines in pairs, so as to form ill-defined

‘bands ; across the primaries are three of these bands, the first

just before the basal third, oblique, slanting slightly outwards

from the costal to the submedian vein; the second abbre-

viated, closing the discoidal cell, its outer edge with a promi-

nent central process, its inferior extremity touching the third

band, the latter crosses the disk, from costal to submedian

vein, parallel to outer margin, and is followed by a sub-

marginal series of brown crescentic markings with white

edges on both sides, again followed by a nearly marginal

series of ill-defined dusky spots; a very slender blackish mar-

ginal line; fringe whitish, with a dusky central line; the

bands on the secondaries are a modification of those on the

primaries, but being necessarily more crowded together, the

second and third bands appear to form a single belt, its inner

edge nearly straight, and its outer edge arched, the centre

therefore being very wide, composed of four lines and enclo-

sing between the pairs a mere comma-shaped trace of the

ground-colour; the submarginal crescentic markings are also

modified, three towards apex remaining in their normal con-

dition, but the others uniting into a slightly undulated arched

line, so as to enclose a broad golden ochreous patch from anal

angle to third median branch, upon which are four black-

edged metallic emerald-green spots—two large, rounded, with

conspicuous black centres, on the median interspaces, and two

small towards anal angle ; margin and fringe as in primaries ;

base broadly blackish irrorated with white; body below

greyish white; the palpi black, with the base of their fringes

white. Hxpanse of wings 26 millim.

Viti Islands (December 1878)..

2. Belenois inopinata, sp. n.

9. Most nearly allied to B. charina of South Africa,

390 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Lepidoptera.

which it resembles not a little on the upper surface; much

larger; above milk-white; primaries with blackish costa;

three black spots in an oblique series about halfway between

the discoidal cell and apex, the central spot small; a fourth

spot just beyond the middle of the second median interspace ;

apex black, continuous with three partly confluent conical

spots on outer margin, the last of them at extremity of second

median branch ; base of all the wings sparsely sprinkled with

blackish scales : body blackish, the thorax clothed with white

hair, and the abdomen irrorated with white. Primaries below

milk-white ; costa suffused with sulphur-yellow ; discal black

spots as above; outer border greyish from costa to second

median branch and internally suffused with sulphur-yellow ;

secondaries and pectus sulphur-yellow ; venter white. HEx-

anse of wings 56 millim.

Viti Islands (24th August).

3. Belenois clarissa, sp. n.

?. Primaries above milk-white; costal border black, a

broad cblique black patch, with sharply-defined angles at the

end of the cell, the upper extremity of this patch confluent

with the costal border; veins beyond the cell black; apical

third of wing (forming a broad external border, decreasing in

width to external angle, and with irregularly zigzag inner

edge) black ; six subapical oval white spots, slightly tinted with

sulphur-yellow, the second and third large, the second being

largest : secondaries pearl-grey (owing to the transparency of

the wing, which shows the black colouring of the under sur-

face through it), a diffused oval patch in the cell, six in an

angular series beyond the cell, and the abdominal border milk-

white; a large black spot at the extremity of the cell; veins

beyond the middle of the wing black ; a broad irregular black

external border, on which are six oval pale sulphur-yellow

submarginal spots in a decreasing series: body above grey,

with whitish hairs on the thorax. Primaries below with the

markings nearly as above, but more sharply defined, an addi-

tional subapical spot within the subcostal furca; the whole

eround-tint of the wing, but especially the discoidal area and

submarginal spots, suffused with sulphur-yellow : secondaries

black, the base of costa, a large elongate patch on basal half

below the costal vein, a second in the cell, a dash at base of

interno-median area and the abdominal border (divided by

the black internal vein) pale sulphur-yellow; an angulated

series of seven elongated spots across the disk paler yellow,

almost white; a submarginal series of six bright sulphur-

—

ee 2

;

‘

Dr. W. Marshall on new Stliceous Sponges. 391

yellow spots, much larger than those on the upper surface ;

pectus yellowish, venter white. Expanse of wings 57 millim.

Viti Islands.

Allied to B. tewtonia, but readily distinguishable by the

absence of orange colouring from the under surface.

4, Ismene bilunata, sp. n.

Wings above dark fuliginous brown, growing considerably

paler towards the base, where there are aféw greenish opaline

hairs: primaries with two semitransparent white crescents

placed obliquely before the middle of the median interspaces ;

fringe of all the wings tipped with white : body above greyish

brown, the head and prothorax shot with opaline green ; palpi

sordid white, with a black external lateral line and black ter-

minal joint. Wings below mouse-brown, primaries with the

median area blackish, especially towards the base ; crescentic

markings as above, apical area greyish, bounded internally by

a transverse elbowed lilacine whitish streak: secondaries

crossed beyond the middle by a rather narrow and nearly

straight white stripe, which is interrupted towards its poste-

rior extremity by a large black quadrate anal patch ; aslender

white stripe at the base of the fringe, beginning at the black

patch and running a short distance upwards towards the apex,

but gradually fading away long before it reaches it: abdo-

minal area faintly glossed with pink and green tints ; pectus

greyish; the femora white above, grey at the sides; tibiz

and tarsi grey above and more or less ochreous below; venter

creamy white, barred with pale grey. LHxpanse of wings 52

millim.

Viti, ‘ Koro” (? Goro).

Allied to L. alexis 9 of S. India and Ceylon, but differing

in the smaller crescents on the primaries, the much less lila-

cine tint of the under surface, and the much more defined white

stripe across the secondaries.

XLVII.—On some new Siliceous Sponges collected by M.

Pechuél-Lésche in the Congo. By Dr. WILLIAM MaRSsHALL*.

[Plate XV.]

HXCEPTIONAL forms of animals and plants deviating in some

respect or other from the general rule have ever excited

* Translated from a separate copy of the Memoir sent by the author to

HY. J. Carter, F.R.S. The original appeared in the ‘ Zeitschrift fiir Natur-

wissenschaften,’ Neue Folge, Band ix. pp. 553-577.

392 Dr. W. Marshall on new Siliceous Sponges.

special interest among naturalists. The extraordinary is always

adapted to impress us particularly, and especially the extra-

ordinary in the organic world: to the many mysteries which

every creature hides within itself we have here added a new

one, which asks us how does this particular creature come to

differ so completely from the ordinary pattern? what were the

constraining causes of this, and how is it modified by them in

its whole organization? Parasitism and subterranean mode

of life lead to such aberrant phenomena, as also the adaptation

of terrestrial forms to an aquatic life, and vice versd; those

organisms especially which, belonging to a group otherwise

exclusively inhabiting fresh or salt water, have emancipated

themselves from this general rule of life of their relatives, and

taken up their abode in the sea or fresh water in opposition to

it, have always attracted and still attract particular attention.

Ten new marine Meduse could not have caused so much stir

as Limnocodium palustre alone !

In this way also it comes to pass that much attention has

for a long time been paid to the freshwater sponges, and that

even small contributions to the knowledge of these remarkable

organisms may expect to meet with more consideration and

amore favourable reception than, for example, the descrip-

tion of a number of new Ascones or Reniere. This convic-

tion encouraged me in the following paper to make known

some new freshwater sponges, which may perhaps also lay

claim to a special interest on the ground of their origin.

General Part.

Before passing to the special descriptions I may be permitted

to premise some remarks of a more general nature, in which

I shall confine myself to a historical introduction, as it is my

intention to revert to the subject in a memoir of wider extent

upon the freshwater sponges.

No zoologist of the present day can doubt that our freshwater

sponges are derived from marine forms, and that they are the

descendants of the latter modified by their mode of life. We

have therefore only to ascertain what are the relationships of the

freshwater sponges to one another and to the marine sponges,

and how far they are altered by residence in fresh water.

Most investigators of our objects seem tacitly to be of

opinion that all non-marine siliceous sponges are nearly allied,

at any rate more nearly than to marine sponges; and that

they form a well-characterized group, the members of which

have originated directly from each other, and these from a

common marine form. ‘This is possible, but certainly not more!

It is just as possible that im the freshwater sponges there

Dr. W. Marshall on new Siliceous Sponges. 393

are several series of forms which may be derived from differ-

ent although perhaps nearly allied marine ancestors, the peculiar

resemblances of which would then be rather apparent and

acquired by similar adaptations, and consequently resting on

analogy, but not inherited in common, and consequently homo-

logous ; in other words, that the freshwater sponges had not a

monophyletic, but a polyphyletic origin. It seems to me worth

while to dweil for a moment upon this consideration, and to

weigh the pro and contra of these two possibilities. Although

at the outset I see clearly enough that at present no definitive

settlement of the question with demonstrative force can be

arrived at, and that perhaps such a settlement never will be

attained, this shall not prevent me from placing side by side

with the current hypothesis (for the assumption of a mono-

phyletic family of ‘ Potamospongie ” is no more than this),

another one which perhaps may be no better, but is certainly

not worse.

If we ask, in the first place, in what do the different sili-

ceous sponges of the freshwater agree? the answer is, in

three points :—first, they are Monactinellids; secondly, they

inhabit the fresh water; and thirdly, most of them, besides

sexual reproduction, present an asexual reproduction by means

of special buds (gemmule, spherule, statoblasts, &c.) provided

with a more or less developed siliceous armature, which are

developed at certain seasons at the expense of the parent ani-

mal, and are usually associated with the decay of the latter.

The first two points are wholly irrelevant in judging of the

relationships of the so-called Spongille ; as a matter of course

these are certainly more nearly allied to a Véoa or similarly

aberrant Monactinellid (always supposing that these are them-

selves really of monophyletic origin, which, from my observa-

tions, I have good cause to doubt) than to a Tetractinellid or

Hexactinellid; but for the recognition of the phylogenetic

relations of the individual species to each other and to the

legions of marine Monactinellidee (which, so far as we can

see at present, form at least 75 per cent. of the living siliceous

sponges), we do not gain much from them. The second

point, the residence in fresh water, will hardly be seriously

regarded by any one as coming into the balance ; from this we

can only conclude that there are sponges, as well as numerous

other inhabitants of salt water, which are able to adapt them-

selves in this particular *. There remains therefore only the

* See the valuable memoir by E. von Martens in the ‘ Archiv fiir

Naturgeschichte, 1857, p. 149, in which, however, no consideration is

iven to the sponges, which indeed at that time were not universally

admitted to beanimals. See also Semper, ‘ Existenzbedingungen,’ pp. 180

281, 11. 125.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xi. 29

394 Dr. W. Marshall on new Siliceous Sponges.

third point, viz. the production of gemmules, that can be

regarded as a fundamental criterion of a sponge belonging to

the group of the Spongillina of Carter, as indeed is done by

Carter * when he characterizes the group thus :—“ Bearing

seed-like reproductis e organs called ‘ statoblasts.’”” According

to this the species of the genus Lubomirskia from Lake

Baikal would be at once excluded, for, according to Dybow-

ski’s ¢ positive assertion, they have no gemmules.

But are these gemmules of the other freshwater sponges

really so eminently characteristic that they alone are capable

of demonstrating the relationship of those sponges? or may

they not make their appearance as new formations sue

generis in originally different forms—that is to say, in forms

of different origin? ‘This is open to discussion.

Besides sexual reproduction an asexual process seems to be

rather widely diffused among sponges. Leaving out of con-

sideration the gemmule-formation in freshwater sponges, it

has been observed in Gumminee (/Zalisarca, F. Ei. Schulze),

Monactinellide (Rinalda?, Mereschkowsky), ‘Tetractinellidee

(Tethyade, Deszé, Selenka, Perceval Wright), and very pro-

bably in Hexactinellide ; at least the young individuals

observed by Carter { on the lateral tufts of spicules of adult

Rosselle seem to me to belong to this category of buds, as

indeed the above-mentioned naturalist himself remarks, “ It

seems probable, if these [several minute specimens] do not

originate in ova which have respectively fixed themselves

there for development, that they arise from pullulation or

budding.” Iam now even inclined to interpret as buds the

young forms discovered by me in the body-cavities of a speci-

men of LHyalonema Steboldi, and previously described as

embryos §.

According to Selenka || each bud in Zethya maza consists

of at least from five hundred to one thousand mesodermic cells,

and it is his opinion that in the T'ethyadz asexual and sexual

repro luction are mutually exclusive; in Tetilla radiata trom

Rio de Janeiro he found during the winter months, from June

to August, no ova in course of segmentation along with the

buds. I have myself repeatedly examined Yethye in the

budding state, both living (at Corfu) and very well preserved,

and especially a number trom the ‘longa archipelago were of

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. February 1881, p. 88.

+ “Studien uber d. Spong. d. russ. Reichs,” Mém. Acad. St. Pétersb,

sér. 7, tome xxvii. no. 6, p. 11.

t{ Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xv. p. 118 (1875).

§ Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. Band xxv. Supp. p. 216.

|| Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. Band xxxiii. p. 473.

Dr. W. Marshall on new Siliceous Sponges. 395

great interest tome. These were of two different sizes; some

were on the average about 3 centim. in diameter, the others

only 1 centim.; in other respects they had exactly similar

skeletal elements and exactly the same structure. In this

indeed there was nothing surprising ; one could simply regard

the smaller specimens as younger; but there was one pheno-

menon that could not easily be brought into agreemen; with

this view—the larger specimens, so far as they were investi-

gated, showed no sexual products (ova) in the mesoderm, but

were nearly all engaged in budding in different degrees ; the

smaller ones, on the contrary, without exception had ova, but

never buds. In presence of these facts one could imagine two

possibilities—the sponge in question might propagate sexually

when young, perhaps during the summer, but asexually when

older and in the winter ; or we might have to do here with an

alternation of generations, in that from the ova of a sexual

smaller form an asexual larger one was developed, from which

again the first sexual generation would bud.

With these buds of the marine sponges the gemmules of the

freshwater sponges may very well be compared ; both occur in

addition to the sexual products and separated from them in

point of time ; both are primarily parts of the mesoderm,

which, however, in the sea-sponges when separated pass

naked to the surface and immediately commence an indepen-

dent existence, apparently without any permanent injury to

the parent animal; while in the freshwater sponges they bo-

come encapsuled, and for a time pass a latent existence in the

interior of the dead parent individual. ‘These are certain

noteworthy distinctions, but still not so very difficult to under-

stand; we need only bear in mind that we have to do here

with freshwater animals, and that the conditions of existence

are essentially different for these and for marine animals.

The latter have to suffer very little or not at all under periodi-

cally recurrent persistent want of food, their existence is not

threatened for a time by the cold of winter or the drought oi

summer, their conditions of life remain trom month to month,

in one season of the year as in another, nearly the same, or

vary too little to superinduce profound changes in the economy

of these marine organisms. Matters are quite otherwise with

the creatures dwelling in fresh water, which in this respect

rather resemble inhabitants of the land than of the sea.

Some of them belonging to the faunas of warm countries

are exposed during the hot season to the drying-up of the

element in which they reside; and although this only takes

place partially on the banks and here and there elsewhere,

it suffices, especially in the case of adherent ET to pro-

29*

396 Dr. W. Marshall on new Stliceous Sponges.

cuce in them a sort of summer sleep, necessary for the main-

tenance of the species, which they pass either by the whole

organism being in a state of latent vitality, or by breaking up

into descendants (in the form of fragments of themselves).

What the desiccating heat of the sun is capable of doing in

warm regions is effected in colder ones by the severity of

winter ; in both cases the animals are deprived of a part, and,

indeed, a principal part, of their conditions of existence, food

and moisture or heat, and in the two cases a similar ‘result

originates from partly antagonistic causes—side by side with

the summer sleep of the tropical or subtropical organisms we

get, as is so frequent, a winter sleep of those inhabiting colder

zones.

The freshwater sponges, as is well known, do not fall in

their entirety during the summer or winter sleep into a latent

state of existence; this mode of persistence 1s perhaps con-

ceivable only in forms living at very great depths, which are

but little exposed to desiccation or to the action of cold. As

whole organisms they for the most part disappear, and as

they partially break up into germinal fragments, their modi-

fied seasonal sleep leads to a form of reproduction.

These germinal fragments, if they remained naked as when

they are formed, would soon succumb to the power of the

heat or cold. What had been acquired for the maintenance

and increase of the species would be but badly preserved if

from the first there had not also been acquired suitable

defensive arrangements against these climatic influences, in

the shape of shells which, i in this respect quite analogous to

the shells of eggs, could protect the germ as much as possible

from freezing or desiccation, in short from destruction. Of

such protected winter-eggs and winter-germs many occur, as

is well known; and it would be interesting to know whether,

in double-brooded insects for example, one brood of which

passes the winter in the egg (there seem not to be many of

them), these winter-eges differ from the summer- ege’s in the

thickness of the shell, the mode of sheltering on the part of

the mother, &e. 5 in other words, whether there is a seasonal

dimorphism of the eggs. Unfortunately I have been unable

to find any statements upon these points in literature; but

Werneburg * says of the shells of the eggs of Lepidoptera i in

general that they differ in relative thickness and ‘‘are strongest

in those which he uncovered, and among these are particularly

strong in those which remain undeveloped through the winter.

Thus, for example, the eggs of Bombyx neusiria, which re-

* Der Schmetterling und sein Leben:’ Berlin, 1875, p. 46.

Dr. W. Marshall on new Siliceous Sponges. 397

main uncovered through the winter, have harder shells than

those of Bomb. dispar, which are clothed with a_ hairy

covering.”

There is nothing with which the gemmules of the Spongille

can be better compared than with the statoblasts of the fresh-

water Bryozoa; and this comparison holds good and has been

earried out * in every particular. Both are acquired under

the same circumstances ; both are portions of the main organ-

ism separated for the purpose of asexual reproduction ; and

they agree so closely, even in detail, in their structure, that

Carter finds the only difference between them in their size

and form. The statoblasts of the Bryozoa indeed have no

armature of siliceous spicules, but yet their shells often possess

peculiar contrivances which practically represent these in

function. It is a fact of particular interest that, just as there

are freshwater sponges without gemmules, there are also

freshwater Bryozoa, not indeed without statoblasts, but with

very slightly developed ones. The sponges in question are

the Lubomirskiew, which undoubtedly are perennial, like the

marine sponges; some of them, indeed, attain great dimen-

sions (they occur as much as 60 centim. in height), and it is

not very probable that such a growth, not bound to an incrust-

able support, such as the twig of a plant, can take place in

the course of a single summer. I know very well that Spon-

illa-stocks of considerable size are occasionally referred to,

but the statements relating to them are not remarkable for

accuracy ; we are not informed whether these large specimens

erew freely or whether they coated a branch, which, how-

ever, makes a very important difference; whether they were

in full life throughout, or whether these giants were not per-

haps an accumulation of different years, of which only the

outermost part was still living. Moreover perennial individuals

which im consequence grow to a considerable size are by no

means inconceivable in suitable localities, and in these the

formation of gemmules might then cease, or indeed, under

certain circumstances, need never be acquired, as is the case

in the Lubomirskic, ‘These stand in the same relation to the

other freshwater sponges as Mredericella sultana to the other

Bryozoa of the fresh waters; the latter, according to W.

Houghton {, is perennial, and certainly the small develop-

ment of the statoblasts of this very species demonstrated by

Allman is due to this circumstance.

* F. J. F. Meyen in Miiller’s Archiv f. Anat. und Physiol, 1839,

p. 83; H. J. Carter, “ On the Identity of the Seed-like Body of Spongilla

with the Winter-egg of Bryozoa,’ in Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser, 3,

yol. iii. p. 339 (1859).

t+ Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. vi. p. 389.

398 Dr, W. Marshall on new Stliceous Sponyes.

This much is certain. The formation of capsuled winter-

germs is by no means an exclusive peculiarity of the fresh-

water sponges, in which it does not even universally occur 5

it occurs in exactly the same manner in such very different

animals as the Bryozoa, to say nothing of other analogous

cases. But if so close a similarity is possible between the

statoblasts of the latter and the gemmules of the former, are

these gemmules really of decisive significance in the settle-

ment of the question of the relationships of the freshwater

sponges? Hardly; any more than the development of wti-

‘ating organs can be decisive in judging of the relationships

of the lower aquatic animals. What Bryozoa and sponges

could acquire independently of each other, members of one

and the same order can acquire sud generis, ‘without any direct

relationship between them being thereby demonstrated.

If, then, the different freshwater sponges agree in the struc-

ture of the skeleton, not only among themselves, but also in

general with the majority of the marine siliceous sponges ; If,

further, as any one will admit, their common occurrence fresh

water is, according to all analogy, of no value whatever in the

elucidation of their relationships; and, finally, if structures

pertectly analogous with the vemmules can be acquired by

similar adaptation by such perfectly different animals as

Bryozoa, upon what is the tee et of a monophyletic

origin for the so-called Spongille really based? ‘This

seems to me a question that may well be raised. It will

justly be required of me that I should give the reasons that

lead me to ascribe a polyphyletic origin to the freshwater

sponges: these are their differences of form, their local dis-

tribution, and further also the conditions of derivation which

must necessarily be assumed for other freshwater animals,

notwithstanding their great similarity.

An artificial system will divide the freshwater sponges

first of all into two great groups—those without and those

with gemmules. In our consideration we shall also for the

present accept these groups, although, as I will at once point

out expressly, they cannot at all be regarded as natural and

as expressing the true aftinities.

The first group breaks up into the Lubomirskie and the Pota-

molepides, to the latter of which belong the new species here-

after to be described and probably also the genus Uruguaya,

Carter. As regards the Lubomirskie, these may be the youngest

of freshwater sponges which stillcome remarkably near to certain

marine sponges ; close to them, and especially to L. papyracea,

Dybowskyi, comes my Potamolepis Leubnitzie ; but probably

uo one will venture to assert that these sponges are directly

Dr. W. Marshall on new Siliceous Sponges. 399

related to one another—the two are just very similarly modi-

fied descendants of different nearly allied marine siliceous

sponges. One of them belongs to the comparatively modern

relict-fauna of Lake Baikal, in which it dwells together with

a whole series of inferior marine animals, and even seals ;

the other has wandered into the Congo, where it occurs

together with very remarkable still undescribed bivalves of

Chama-like habit, which adhere by one shell, and have a black

epidermis as in the Najades.

Uruguaya* seems to be very nearly allied to Potamolepis

in habit, and especially to the second species, P. Pechuélit ;

and I would have named the group after this genus, if it had

not a name so awkwardly geographical. A direct genetic

connexion between these West-African and South-American

forms may certainly be regarded as out of the question, for

the relations and similarities between the Ethiopic and Neotro-

pical faunas, multifarious as they are, are either due to analo-

gies, or date back to a time when direct communication

between the Congo and the Uruguay river by means of fresh

water will hardly have existed +.

The other, very probably older, freshwater sponges have a

common character in the gemmules—a character which I

indeed, as already indicated, regard as of subordinate im-

portance, but which, nevertheless, is serviceable for character-

ization in an artificial system. ‘This second group again con-

sists of two subgroups, the Parmuline and the true Spongille,

which are remarkably distinguished from each other in their

general habit. ‘The former are eminently rigid, and in other

respects also, especially in the gemmules themselves, present

important peculiarities; they are neotropical and distributed

especially in the Amazon and its affluents.

The second subgroup, that of the Spongille, is cireumpolar,

Palearctic, Nearctic, Indian, and Ethiopic, with forms pushed

forward, on the onehand, to the Amazon (Sp.navicella, Meyenia

gregaria, and the species of the genus Zubella, Carter) ; and,

on the other}, to the Mauritius (Sp. Carter¢), and even, which

is very remarkable, as far as Australia (Meyenia Capewelli,

Cart.), and consequently is nearly cosmopolitan. For these

forms a direct genetic connexion may be possible, but not

more probable than spontaneous formation. In the structure

* A genus established, but only as provisional, by Carter, Ann. & Mag.

Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. vii. p. 190. :

+ See A. R. Wallace, ‘Geographical Distribution of Animals,’ vol. ii.

p. 81. ron , : ES "

{ See Carter’s memoir in Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. vii.

pp. 77 et seqq.

400 Dr. W. Marshall on new Siliccous Sponges.

of their gemmules the Spongille show peculiar and very

significant differences. Some of them (Sp. lacustris &e.) are

adapted for swimming; others (Sp. Cartert, nitens, &c.) for

swimming and passive movement; others, again, areessentially

heavier (Meyenia) ; but all can easily get from one locality to

another by the well-known means of transport of the lower

aquatic organisms, namely birds*.

The occurrence of Sp. Cartert (which has hydro- and aero-

statically adapted gemmules, and was previously known only

from India, although possessing allies in Africa, namely Sp.

nitens from the White Nile in the Leipzig Museum) in the

Mauritius } is very remarkable, although that island lies in

the south-east trade-wind belt and in the southerly diverging

branch of the trade-drift flowing from east to west; but we

see that the Mauritius, besides some autochthonous forms,

ossesses a very remarkable mixed fauna, in which Ethiopic

and Oriental, and even some Australian, elements meet to-

gether.

These considerations may, in a certain sense, be compared

with those which Huxley} has put forward as to the origin

and derivations of the freshwater Crayfish. The great biolo-

gist shows that there are two families, well characterized by

certain peculiarities, of such Crustaceans, one of which, that

of the Potamobiide, inhabits the northern, and the other, the

Parastacide, the southern hemisphere. He supposes that

both families descend from a widely distributed primitive

form, living in the sea, which he names Protastacus, and which

has wandered into the fresh waters, and here become differen-

tiated into the ancestor of the Potamobiide in the northern

parts of the earth, and of the Parastacide in the southern ;

and hence that the river Crayfish, notwithstanding their differ-

ences, are of monophyletic origin §.

It is, however, in my opinion, very possible that this hypo-

thetical Protastacus, while still an inhabitant of the sea, may

have existed under two, three, or even more different forms,

local races, or whatever they may be called, and that these,

after passing into a different medium of existence, still fur-

ther adapted themselves to the latter. Hor a whole series of

other organisms of the freshwater, the geographical distribu-

tion of which would otherwise be quite unintelligible (such as

* I reserve these various modifications of the gemmules and their pro-

bable causes for treatment in a subsequent memoir.

+ According to a kind epistolary communication from Mr, Carter.

{ Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1878, p. 752.

§ See also Jhering, “ Die Thierwelt der Alpenseen und ihre Bedeutung

fiir die Frage nach der Entstehung der Arten, in Nord und Sud,” Band x.

p. 242 (1879).

Dr. W. Marshall on new Siliceous Sponges. 40 {

the crocodiles, many fishes, &c.), we must have recourse to

similar ancestors which have lived in the sea.

For the explanation of the origin of the freshwater sponges

the conditions, I believe, are much more favourable: here we

have in truth still living sea-inhabiting forms which perfect]

agree, except for a few, small, and easily intelligible differ-

ences, with the former, as shall be immediately shown; in

this case we have no occasion to reconstruct an ancestral form,

which always has something doubtful about it.

In seeking for forms of marine sponges which might be the

ancestors of the freshwater sponges, we must at once leave

out of consideration the Hexactinellide, Lithistide, and

Tetractinellidee, less perhaps on account of the form of their

skeletal elements than of their occurrence in deeper water; and

of the Monactinellidzs which remain, the Rendere press, as it

were, of themselves into the first line. There can be no

doubt that these sponges are at present engaged very actively

in adaptation. In them we have a group in which, notwith-

standing strong differentiation, the individual forms are most

multifariously bound together; the struggle for existence will

not long be fought between them in so high a degree, through

which only in course of time, under fundamentally altered

conditions of existence, it will come to pass that the surviving

members of the group, like the mountain-tops of a sunken

land protruding as islands from a flood, as sharply-defined

species will represent well-characterized genera. Renierse

are distributed in all seas, from the tropics to Greenland and

Kerguelen’s Land; they oceur (Pellina profunditatis, O.

Schm.) from a depth of 324 fathoms*, upwards, as far as

existence is still possible for truly aquatic animals. Of Re-

niera caruncula of the English coast, Norman says: “ On

rocks between tide-marks. ‘This is one of the regular tide-mark

sponges.” On the rocky coast of Knoshima, Déderlein{ found

feniere in places which at low tide were just sprinkled with

water; the Mediterranean Reniera littoralis§ also descends

only a few feet below the surface of the water, and R. luxu-

rians 1s even frequently left dry by the ebb||. At the same

time these sponges are always abundant, not only in indivi-

duals, but also in species; in the northern Adriatic over a

dozen occur, and near Naples they form more than 24 per

cent. of the existing Monactinellide (fourteen out of fitty-

* Schmidt, Spongien-Fauna des atlant. Gebietes, p. 42.

+ Bowerbank’s ‘ British Sponges,’ vol. iv. suppl., ed. by A. M. Nor-

man, p. 81.

¢ Archiv f. Naturg. 1883, p. 111.

§ U, Keller, Zeitsch. f. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxx. p. 580.

|| Schmidt, Spongien des adriat. Meeres, p. 12.

402 Dr. W. Marshall on new Stliceous Sponges.

eight*). They are the sponges which persist longest in

relict-faunas, and can adapt themselves to new forms; thus

the Caspian Sea still harbours a true Amorphina and three

other Renierid species of a local genus, Metschnikowia, and

these four are the only sponges of that great inland seaf.

The Rentere are almost the only Fibrospongiz that can

thrive in aquaria.

These polytropic organisms are able to bear with ease

diminution of the amount of salt in the water, “as, indeed,

in general the genus Lendera appears to be especially assigned

to the lagoons and brackish water’ t. Thus O. Schmidt

found the brackish bay of Argostoli, in Cephalonia, occu-

pied by incredible numbers of various Reniere ; the Monac-

tinellid fauna of Venice consists of more than 57 per cent.

(four out of seven) of Lenderw, and one of them (. duau-

rians) also occurs in canals where no other sponges grow, on

walls immediately below the surtace of the water§.

The Lubomirskie themselves, although they inhabit fresh

water, come much nearer to the true Heniere than to the

Spongille, so near, indeed, that Micluchoj|| at one time did not

hesitate to unite them with other forms of his true Renierid

genus Velupsa (polymorpha) as an eleventh variety, batca-

lensis. In them the trains of spicules are cemented together

by more strongly developed horny substance than in the

Spongille, their oscula appear stellate, and gemmules or analo-

gous structures are wanting. ‘The cause of these differences

may be, that in Lake Baikal (in which, moreover, a Spon-

gilla occurs, having probably migrated back, as in the Gulf

of Finland §]) the conditions of existence do not compel the

sponges to be annual and to form gemmules; or it may also

be that, since the Lubomirskie, as true Reniere, were sepa-

rated from their marine relatives by upheaval of the land,

time enough has not elapsed for the acquisition of new peculi-

arities.

‘There is an important distinction in the fact that these

sponges are, so to speak, passive inhabitants of the fresh water,

separated by force from their relatives, while all the other

* According to Vosmaer, “ Voorloop. Berigt omtrent het onderzoek ”

&e.. 20 Nov. 1880-20 Feb. 1881, 6 pages, separately paged (? separate

memoir, or reprint).

+ There is a memoir by W. Czerniavsky upon the sponges of the Black

and Caspian seas; but as it is written in Russian it does not exist forme.

{ Schmidt, Spongien des adriat. Meeres, p. 73.

§ Schmidt, loc. ct. p. 76.

| Mém. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Pétersb. sér. 7, tome xv. no. 3, p. 8

4} Dybowski, Mém. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Pétersb. sér. 7, tome XXvil.

no. 6, p. 66.

Dr. W. Marshall on new Siliceous Sponges. 493

freshwater sponges probably quitted the sea gradually and

vcluntarily, and have adapted themselves in the course of a

very long time; for, to say nothing of the Diluvium, sponge-

spicules have been detected even in freshwater deposits of the

Upper Jura*, the formation of which is long anterior to the

origin of Lake Baikal.

All these facts certainly prove the remarkable pliability and

adaptability which are possessed beyond all other sponges by

the Reniere, and these properties will very probably be the

same all over the world. Under such circumstances, especially

it we also bring in the structure of the freshwater sponges for

comparison with the Lenderw, there is nothing more natural

than to imagine that the former have originated from the

latter, but independently of each other in different parts of the

earth, and with the appearance of similar modifications tn

structure and vital phenomena induced everywhere by adap-

tation T.

A part of these modifications are new acquisitions (e. g.

gemimules), and therefore to a certain extent of positive

nature; others, however, are of negative nature, and relate to

the disappearance of peculiarities of the marine ender@, espe-

cially to the loss of colour. Most ofthe 2endere occurring freely

and at the surface are intensely and often even very intensely

coloured (orange, red, velvet-black, &c.) ; and I have no hesi-

tation about regarding these colours (as I have already done)

as alarming or warning agents which deter other animals,

not from eating the Reniere, tor they are not generally fit

for food, but from injuring them in their existence by fruitless

attempts to eat them. Now we know that retrogressions,

* Young, Geol. Mag. 1878, p. 220.

+ How great, indeed, the power of adaptation is in the freshwater

sponges is strikingly proved by the interesting discovery of Dr. Joseph

(59 8., B. d. schles. Ges. f. vaterl. Cultur im Jahre 1881, p. 253), who

found in the Grotto of Gurk in Carniolia, an absolutely transparent (!) form

of Spongilla (Sp. stygia, n. sp.). As I supposed that this freshwater

sponge, which will find itself all the year round under the same, or nearly

the same, conditions of existence, would form no gemmules, as these

would be superfluous, I applied by letter to Dr. Joseph, who forwarded

some preparations to me, and at the same time kindly wrote, among

other things, as follows :—“ Your supposition that no formation of gem-

mules takes place is correct, for neither in September nor in April did I

Jind any.” Some people may perhaps think that the Spongdle of the

Grotto of Gurk were not descended from ordinary Spongille, but directly

from Monactinellidze of salt water, perhaps at a time when the waves

of the Tertiary sea eroded the grottos of Carniolia and Friuli. This

would have much less probability than the supposition that in conse-

quence of uniform conditions of existence, not dependent upon the seasons,

retrogression as regards the gemmules has occurred in Spcngilla stygia.

} Zeitschy. f. wiss. Zool, Bd. xxxvii. p. 245.

404 Dr. W. Marshall on new Siliceous Sponges.

which, if we may so speak, are to be accounted for by a ten-

dency to saving in Nature, scarcely occur more strikingly than

with respect to offensive and defensive colours. These dis-

appear immediately when the pressing necessity which called

them forth is got rid of ; and it would seem that the enemies

by which Lentere in sea-water might certainly be threatened

and disturbed did not migrate after them into the fresh water,

and there the varied coloration disappears, just as in the

Renter which live concealed under stones &c. That green

Spongille occasionally occur is due, as is well known, to a

symbiotic process, and is no integral property of those

sponges.

Although the conviction of the connexion of the freshwater

sponges with the Render has never, so far as | know, been deve-

loped in detail in zoological literature, I have repeatedly sup-

ported it, especially in conversation with scientific friends, and

Claus gives expression to it in his text-book *, Other natural-

ists indeed seem to be of a different opinion, such as Keller J,

who regards the Spongille as well as the Hsperie as groups

quite distinct from the Reniere ; and Carter}, who occupies the

same standpoint in 1881 as in 1875; and although he places

his ‘ Potamospongida”’ in the same order (Holorhaphidota)

with the Renieride, separates the latter as his first from the

former as his fifth family, by the Suberitide, Pachytragide,

and Pachastrellide (¢. e. by the whole of the Tetractinellide,

including the Lithistide), or, in other words, at least if his

system is to be taken as expressing his ideas of the relation-

ships, the relations of affinity between the freshwater sponges

and the Renieridz are but slight, at any rate slighter than

those of the two groups with the Geodia for example.

Against my hypothesis of the polyphyletic origin of the

freshwater sponges evidence from facts can hardly be brought

forward; and although I cannot prove it, it seemed to me not

without interest to bring this question under discussion. I

may here, however, expressly state that it is not and cannot

be at all my design to break up the group of the freshwater

sponges ; even from considerations of convenience it is desir-

able to adopt a Renierid group of “ Potamospongie.”

* Grundziige der Zoologie, 8 Aufl, 1876, p. 194.

+ ‘Upon the latter point the less weight can be laid, as a similar

structure occurs in quite different groups (Spongilla, Esperia).” Zeitschr.

f. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxx. p. 564.

t Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. vii. p. 85.

Dee

Dr. W. Marshall on new Siliceous Sponges. 405

Special Part.

POTAMOLEPIS, n. gen.

Monactinellid siliceous sponges of the fresh water of great

brittleness, with curved, obtuse, smooth spicules, which (when

dry) are closely cemented together by a small quantity of

organic substance. No gemmules [statoblasts].

1. Potamolepis Leubnitzie, n. sp.

Forming crusts of 1-1°5 millim. thick, finely porous, of

yellowish-white colour and silky lustre, exactly of the appear-

ance of very under-baked wafers. ‘The surface presents a few

crateriform elevations of 0:25-0-40 millim. in height, standing

in not very distinct rows upon faint undulations, which divide

dichotomously in both directions, and frequently disappear, and

in which a certain parallelism is unmistakable. At the sum-

mit of each elevation there is an osculum of irregular elongate

ovate (length to breadth as 1 to 0°5 millim.) and sometimes

elongate triangular or pentagonal form, separated from each

other by from 1 to 4 millim., but usually by 2 millim. The

mouths, which are usually furnished not with smooth but with

finely-notched margins, lead into very shallow (0°5 millim.

deep) gastric spaces, which immediately break up into

several canals ; in the angular mouths the opening of a canal

of this kind is in general placed im each angle, ‘The canals

run horizontally, branch dichotomously, and communicate

frequently with the canal-systems of neighbouring oscula.

The very numerous and closely-placed incurrent apertures are

round and about O°1 millim. in diameter; between them are

situated many much finer apertures, which, in the fresh state,

are probably covered by ectoderm.

The three specimens before me formed a thin crust coating

flat fragments of stone. Many parts of the latter, especially

where other animals (apparently dipterous larve forming

adherent cases of sand) had seated themselves, were not over-

grown.

2. Potamolepis chartaria, n. sp.

Oral cone isolated, with round entire margins 0-5-1

millim. in diameter ; incurrent orifices not numerous, O°1 mil-

lim. in breadth. Surface like blotting-paper, with a dermal

skeleton composed of very delicate, felted straight acerates

attaining a length of 0°08 millim. Colour in the dry state

chocolate-brown.

This species much resembles the preceding in habit and the

406 Dr. W. Marshall on new Siliceous Sponges.

form of the proper skeleton-spicules, but is well characterized

by the round oscula, and especially by the presence of a dermal

skeleton. In consequence of the presence of this dermal

skeleton the surface of the sponge acquires a peculiar paper-

like appearance, and at first I was inclined to regard this

coating as consisting of fine dried mud. Microscopic exami-

nation, however, soon taught me better. The dermal spicules

lie irregularly (tangentially at the incurrent and excurrent

apertures) in a tolerably thick crumbly mass of dried sub-

stance which cannot be removed, but rather adheres very

firmly to the underlying skeletal parts. The colour of the

organic substance, especially of that cementing together the

proper skeletal elements, is chestnut-brown. It is possible

that this colour is to be accounted for by the great amount of

iron in the Congo (almost all Africa is exceedingly rich in

iron), which colours the surface of the stone as if with black-

lead and penetrates several millimetres into it; but in this

case it is certainly wonderful that the other sponges found

there under precisely similar conditions show no trace of it.

3. Potamolepis Pechuélit, n. sp.

Crust-like, with numerous oscular cones as much as 10

millim. in height, which are so compressed laterally that one

diameter of the base is in proportion to the other as 1 to 2.

The cones stand in the single specimen in the direction of

their longest diameter in indistinct rows, which diverge radi-

ately from one spot on the margin; only quite exceptionally

do they stand perpendicularly to ie adherent base of the

sponge, but most of them ascend with an inclination of 45° in

the direction of the greater diameter, and in all the inclined

side is turned towards the point from which the rows of cones

radiate, while the other side descends steeply. At the summit

of eel cone there is a mouth-opening (in some which are fused

together, two), which is simply round, and may attain a dia-

meter of 3 millim. These oscula lead into simple short gas-

tric spaces (4 millim. deep in the longest cones), and these

break up into a gastro-vascular system, which is not further

traceable. The spicules present a somewhat slenderer form

and somewhat smaller curvature than those of the other two

species; they are cemented together by a small quantity of

organic substance into coarse trains as much as | millim.

broad, which, crossing each other irregularly, form a very

confused network with meshes of very unequal size (0°5-2

millim.) and quite dissimilar form, in some of which, very

probably, there will during lite have been at least incurrent

apertures. ‘The network is developed in exactly the same

a. oh ee

Dr. W. Marshall on new Siliceous Sponges. 407

manner upon the mantle of the cones as in the interspaces

and in the interior of the sponge. The colour of the dry

sponge is ash-grey with a silky lustre, and this and the large

size of the meshes give it the appearance of a coarsely porous

pumice-stone.

With regard to the conditions under which the Potamo-

lepides occur, their discoverer, Dr. Pechuél-Lische, has given

me orally detailed information. The specimens come from

above Isangila, a place which is distant from the sea about

150 nautical miles by water, and is situated upon the Congo

more than 100 metres above the sea-level. ‘They were also

observed near Kalubu, about 50 nautical miles further up the

stream. Between the place where they were found and the

sea the river forms six talls and rapids—namely, near Yilala,

Manguvu, Inga, Nsongo Yilala, Ngoma, and Isangila itself. In

the actual bed of the river, on the constantly submerged rocks,

they were not observed, which, however, may have been a mat-

ter of chance; but the rocks of the inundation-region at the

sides were in places thickly covered with them, so that, as the

greater part of the sponges are white, this gave the rocks the

appearance of being covered with the excrements of the wading

birds which are so numerous there, as indeed my honoured

friend at first believed to be the case. The most remarkable

thing is that these rocks, which, during the high water of the

summer, with its rapid flow (of about one German mile per

hour), are from 2 to 8 metres under the surface of the water

le, during the months of June, July, August, and half Sep-

tember, perfectly dry under the scorching heat of an African

tropical sun. ‘I'he sponges were collected in July. These

rocks belong to one of the clay-slates striking from south-east

to north-west and dipping to the south-west, and are covered

with sponges only on their eastern side, which is towards the

stream and more or less overhangs it, and here, which is

sufficiently important, with all the three species together. Fre-

quently spaces of a square metre are overgrown, but not so

that the sponges form a connected coating ; they certainly

stand close together, but always in distinct colonies not bigger

than a plate. On the diabase-rocks which cross the bed of

the river near the rapids of Isangila, no Potamolepides were

found. ‘Their absence from these rocks need not by any means

be due to an aversion of the sponges to this rock, and a pre-

ference for the clay-slate ; at the spots where the diabase-

rocks occur, and through them, the conditions of flow of the

river will probably be so modified as to prevent any favour-

able development of the sponge.

408 Dr. W. Marshall on new Stliceous Sponges.

In habit the Potamolepides show no resemblance to the

Spongille, or indeed to any Renierid, and in their firmness

and brittleness they much rather resemble certain Hexac-

tinellide, especially £. Pechuéli’, which, in the microscopic

structure of its skeleton, in the arrangement of its fibres, &e.,

greatly reminds one of a Farrea. I believe these remarkable

peculiarities will become intelligible if we consider more

closely the conditions under which the Potamolepides live.

Here it is to be remembered above all that they live in run-

ning water, which certainly during the rainy season flows

strongly, and will break with violence against the slabs of

rock, and that they occur in opposition to the direction of the

stream. In the presence of such factors a young sponge will

not be able to grow into a branched shrub, or even into a

turf-like cushion, in the same way as Spongilla lacustris or

many Lubomirskie in still water: the pressure of the flowing

water will rather compel it to cover its base of attachment with

as thin a crust as possible, by which means a further advan-

tage is gained towards its comfortable maintenance; the water

surrounding it may indeed, as a destructive torrent, be rich in

suitable nourishment, but it is too rapid in its movements and

will leave the detritus contained in it for too short a time in

one place to allow the sponge to derive much advantage from

it, although indeed the chances may be somewhat more favour-

able on the overhanging side of a slab of rock than elsewhere

in the bed of the river. The sponges take up their nourish-

ment through apertures of the surface: when it is uniformly

abundant and easy to obtain, the sponges may be cylindrical

or conical, which, according to their ontogeny, seems to be

their original form, and they need not adapt themselves to an

increased reception of food. ‘Thus in a round sponge, if we

assume that the incurrent apertures are, under all circum-

stances, equally distributed, the proportion of the surface of

the body (square) to the contents of the body (cube) suffices

to nourish it, that is to maintain it and enable it to increase

in size and reproductive products. ‘I'he conditions are differ-

ent if the food is scanty or difficult to obtain: then the above

approximate proportion of the square to the cube will no

longer suffice; the surface must be increased in proportion to

the mass of the body, and with this the number of the food-

receiving incurrent apertures must be increased. How can

this be effected ? Sometimes by the formation of pits, folds,

intercanalicular spaces, pseudogastres, &c.; but this does not

seem to be always adinissible : residence on the underside of

stones which do not form much of a hollow will put a veto

upon it 5 but especially, as in the present case, very rough

Dr. W. Marshall on new Siliceous Sponges. 409

water will not admit of it. The sponge must then seek in

some other way to help itself, and this it can do only by

forming a thin crust in which a large surface is developed

with a small volume of body. This consideration leads to a

series of consequences, to which I will here refer only en

passant. On looking at a large, round, conical or cylindrical

sponge with a smooth surface, we can assert, @ prior, that it

is produced under favourable cir cumstances, and has had not

only abundance of food, but also the necessary quiet; another,

composed of mzandrically united plates, interwoven branches,

&c., and traversed by numerous intercanals, will have had

quiet but a more slender diet ; but a thin crust, unless it has

been mechanically confined 1 in extension by growth between

stones, will have passed its life with very little rest and with

a badly supplied table; and in the last-named case the sponges

are also usually polyzoic with small personal regions. In

connexion with this, the facts of individual development are

very instructive ; all young sponges are rounded, conical, or

cylindrical, and, as a matter of course, the only question 1S,

under what conditions they are further developed. By these

their form is governed, and many species are in consequence

exceedingly polytropic, showing an almost infinite power of

form-variation ; while others are in so high a degree mono-

tropic that they rather die than make concessions to external

circumstances in their form. ‘There are extremely variable,

but also extremely constant sponges, and these latter are

naturally the rarer ones.

It is clear that the specimen of P. Pechuélit, under some-

what different circumstances, with a less pressure of water,

may have been more freely "developed than the specimens of

the other two species ; but the influence of the moving water

is unmistakable in the position of the oral cones and their

tendency in one direction. Probably also the serial arrange-

ment of the oscula which we recognize in all the species may

be referred to the same cause; in P. Pechuélit they lie also

in the direction of the strike (direction of the greatest dia-

meter) of the oral cones. In this sponge probably the central

persons were not first developed, but those in the margin

indicated by @ in fig. 10. In very strongly moving water a

sponge will scarcely be able to bud in all directions ; the

buds will rather always be formed in one direction, one be-

hind the other, so that the younger will be somewhat pro-

tected by the older ones from the disturbing influence of the

flowing water; this may lead to a radiate arrangement, for a

current of water breaking upon an obstacle opposed to it does

not reunite immediately behind it, where there is rather a quiet

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Sev. 5. Vol. xii. 30

410 Dr. W. Marshall on new Stliceous Sponges.

spot which, if the obstacle was a ball suspended freely in the

water, would have the form of a regular cone, but otherwise

may be of various forms according to the configuration and

position of the interposed object. In our sponge growing as

acrust, the quieter space of water will have been approxi-

mately semiconical, at least for a certain distance, until the

laterally diverted masses of water united again; and here the

oral cones could become better developed than the anterior

and older ones, which are more exposed to the force of the

water, so that, under certain circumstances, the oldest oral

cones will show the poorest development.

It may be objected that the freer development of the oral

cones in P, Pechuélit might indeed indicate a somewhat weaker

pressure of water, but that the differences in the form and

arrangement of the spicules of the different species are in this

way by no means explained; for in P. Pechuélic they are

more extended and arranged in trains, whereas in the other

species they are much more considerably curved and abso-

lutely without any tendency to arrange themselves in bundles,

both of which characters appear certainly to indicate growth

in quieter water. I believe that this is only apparent ; more

strongly curved spicules will be able to interlock more closely

than less curved or straight ones; they will form more com-

pact masses, and so be able to oppose a more considerable

resistance to the force of the currents, which will operate

with effect in opposition to the efforts of the latter to arrange the

skeletal elements of the sponge, whether they be proper to

it or foreign bodies incepted to strengthen it, in trains in its

own direction. A sponge with straight spicules under the

very strong influence of a current acting in one direction

must have a difficult task to maintain itself in position

unless its spicules are remarkably spinous, or unless it

differentiates auxiliary spicules in the form of hooks &e.

In my opinion, to which I have already often given expres-

sion, the forms and arrangements of the skeletal elements of

the sponges are for the most part to be referred to influences

of purely mechanical nature, which, as they will frequently

come into conflict with the inherited tendencies which dwell

even in these structures, have led to that enormous abun-

dance of often very wonderful adaptations to conditions which

are usually, at least directly, still obscure. Besides the move-

ments of the water acting from without, the currents in the

interior of the sponge caused by the position ot the flagellate

chambers and the action of their ciliary organs will also be

important factors in the construction of the skeleton ; but ver

frequently also the position and nature of the flagellate cham-

Dr. W. Marshall on new Stliceous Sponges. 411

bers will be governed by external influences (quantity of food

and also again conditions of current). Experimental investiga-

tions in which sponges, and especially the exceedingly polytropic

fteniere, are brought under the most various conditions, must,

I am firmly convinced, lead to the most astonishing results,

and be of immense importance, not only for Spongiology, but

also for the whole great theory of transmutation.

From such considerations it seems not unjustifiable to sup-

pose that P. Pechuélii and P. Leubnitzie are forms of the same

species which have become differently developed under differ-

ent circumstances; but so long as no transitions between

them are known to us we must regard them as two species.

It only remains now to explain the reasons which have in-

duced me to deny gemmules to the Potamolepides. I will lay

no stress upon the fact that P. Leubnitzie and P. chartaria

are too thin and have the spicules too closely interwoven to

give room for such structures, as they might easily have

acquired other arrangements, such as cavities for their recep-

tion; but if we consider that, according to what has gone

before, the formation of gemmules in a tropical freshwater

sponge is only intelligible during the dry season, while the

specimens under consideration were, without exception, col-

lected during the summer months, my view that they form no

such germ- fragments receives very essential support. The

specimens are so wonderfully preserved, even to the finest

marginal parts of the oscula, that there can be no notion of

their having died the year before or still earlier, and moreover

it would be singular if the whole number of specimens exa-

mined were accidentally without gemmules. I have never

found indigenous freshwater sponges barren (¢. e. without

products of asexual reproduction) in the autumn and winter,

and a very considerable number of them have passed through

my hands in the course of fifteen years. It is indeed

possible that the non-differentiation of reproductive frag-

ments might be a consequence of the different conditions of

existence of the Potamolepides; but this seems to me not very

probable, and I am more inclined to the opinion that, just

like the Lubomirskie, and probably also Uruguaya corallordes,

they have adapted themselves to existence in fresh water at a

recent date in comparison with the Spongille and Meyenice,

and that, in case it should become necessary, the formation of

gemmules may in course of time occur in them also.

In conclusion, 1 once more beg all my tellow-labourers to

enable me to extend still further my investigations upon

freshwater sponges by sending me abundant materials from all

possible localities. Only the cooperation of many can bring

30*

412 =Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Australian Curculionide.

us nearer to the solution of certain general questions with

regard to these interesting organisms. ‘The greatest import-

ance attaches to remarks appended to the specimens sent as

to the time when the sponge was found, and the most exact

possible statements (they can hardly be exact enough) as to

the conditions of the locality, movement of the water, nature

of the ground, amount of lime and salt (if any) —~every thing is

necessary to be known, for we cannot at all foresee what fac-

tors are of real importance in arriving at a conclusion.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XV,

Potamolepis Leubnitzia, n, sp.

Fig. 1. Beautifully preserved specimen upon a slab of stone, nat. size.

At x acolony of cases of larvee (of Diptera ?).

Fig. 2, Three oral cones, X 4.

Fig. 3. Rubbed specimen, showing partially the course of the gastro-

vascular system. X $.

Fig. 4. Gastric space with ramifications, from the same specimen. X 4.

Fig. 5. Skeletal elements in their natural position. x 30,

Fig. 6. Two isolated spicules. x 100.

Potamolepis chartaria, 1. sp.

Fig, 7, Three oral cones.

Fig. 8. Skeletal elements; below are five spicules of the true skeleton,

which are covered by a felted web of very fine uniaxial spicules.

x 30.

Fig. 9. Four isolated uniaxials of the dermal skeleton. x 120.

Potamolepis Pechuélit, v. sp.

Fig. 10. Perfect specimen. a, oldest part.

Fig. 11. Two spicules.

XLVIII.—Additions to the Australian Curculionide.—

Part X. By Francis P. Pascoe.

BRACHYDERINZE. GONIPTERIN 2,

oO . o ee

Styreus, D. g. Minia, n. ¢.

—— geonomoides. — opalescens

LEPTOPINZE,

Leptops punctigera. HYPERIN@.

incompta.

—— vermicosa. Propheesia florea,

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Australian Curculionidae. 413

DIABATHRARIIN”, Rhinaria cayirostris.

Aromagis horrens. SEES 8) Op

3 i Ethemaia angusticollis.

eurtula.

E 1 PRETTY Hypheria, n. g.

Tphisaxus eethiops. assimilis,

Rhinoplethes ignavus. Myarda, n. g.

Rhinaria tessellata, ferrugata.

signifera.

STYREUS.

Rostrum breve, capite multo angustius ; scrobes semilunares, apicales,

ab oculis distinct. Antenne tenuate ; scapus brevis, articulo

ultimo funiculi elongato; clava distincta. Oculi rotundati, pro-

thorace distantes. Prothoraw transversus, basi truncatus. Scu-

tellum parvum. Elytra modice conyexa, humeris obliquis. Pedes

mediocres ; tibiw antice rect, intus denticulate, posticee cor-

bellis apertis ; tarst articulo tertio late bilobo ; wnguiculi liberi,

approximati, inequales. Mesosternum breviusculum. Abdomen

segmentis duobus basalibus ampliatis.

The exponent of this genus has completely the facées of

Geonomus flabellipes; and notwithstanding the different cha-

racter of the rostrum, the open corbels, &c., I would place

them in the same group.

Styreus geonomordes.

S. ovatus, griseo-squamosus ; capite majusculo, linea impressa inter

oculos ; rostro antice concayo, in medio linea elevata nigra mu-

nito; elytris seriatim punctatis. Long. 5 lin.

Hab. Australia (North).

Ovate, covered with greyish scales; head large, rounded in

front, with a narrow longitudinal line between the eyes; ros-

trum much narrower and shorter than the head, concave

‘anteriorly ; a black raised longitudinal line in the middle;

first and second joints of the funicle longest, third nearly as

long; club elongate, pointed; prothorax transverse, rather

roughly punctured; elytra striate- punctate, strie shallow, the

punctures large, oblong, approximate, interstices broad ; body

beneath and legs with opalescent scales; innermost claw on

all the tarsi smallest.

Leptops punctigera.

L. ovata, squamis griseis dense tecta, et setis nigris reflexis ad-

spersa ; rostro subtenuato ; prothorace tuberculato ; elytris seria-

tim grosse punctatis, interstitiis modice elevatis et late rotundatis.

Long. 34-5} lin.

Hab. Port Bowen.

414. Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Australian Curculionide.

Ovate, closely covered with pale greyish, inclining to pearly,

scales, and with scattered black, mostly recurved, sete, those

on the legs white; rostrum comparatively long and slender,

three raised lines anteriorly ; antenne slender; scape attain-

ing the eye, the latter ovate, not pointed below ; prothorax

scarcely longer than broad, rounded at the sides anteriorly,

but parallel towards the base from a little before the middle ;

above with numerous subapproximate tubercles; scutellum

small ; elytra shortly ovate, not broader at the base than the

prothorax, seriate-punctate ; interstices slightly raised ; punc-

tures large, black, moderately approximate. “

This species has the outline of LZ. subfasctatus ; itis remark-

able for its conspicuous black punctures.

Leptops incompta.

L. ovata, nigra, rude griseo-squamosa ; rostro antice fere obsolete

tricarinato; scrobe pone rostrum eyanescente; prothorace ad

latera subtuberculato ; elytris striato-punctatis. Long. 5 lin.

Hab. Queensland.

Ovate, black, roughly covered with greyish scales ; rostrum

moderately stout, with three nearly obsolete raised lines ante-

riorly ; scrobe gradually disappearing behind; eye transverse,

pointed below; scape elongate; prothorax transverse, subtuber-

culate at the sides and partially at the base; scutellum puncti-

form ; elytra striate-punctate, interstices broad, thickly set with

erect cylindrical scales, punctures oblong, shallow, indistinct ;

body beneath and legs with silvery scales and slender seta.

This species has nearly the same facies as the last, but with

a different sculpture, eyes pointed beneath, &c. It is very

like the Chilian Strangaliodes albosquamosus.

Leptops vermicosa.

L. breviter ovata, nigra, griseo-squamosa ; rostro antice sulcis tribus

munito ; prothorace brevi, punctulato, lineis flexuosis impresso ;

elytris seriatim grosse punctatis. Long, 4 lin.

Hab. Gayndah (Queensland).

Shortly ovate, covered with greyish scales ; between the eyes

a deeply impressed line ; rostrum stout, with three grooved

lines in front, the outer grooves short, the middle one extending

to the apical plate; scrobe strongly developed; eye trans-

verse, pointed below ; prothorax short, impressed with flexu-

ous or vermicular lines, the raised portions finely punctured,

each puncture bearing a recurved seta; scutellum nearly obso-

lete; elytra only twice as long as the prothorax, seriate-

punctate, punctures large, approximate, interstices slightly

My. F. P. Pascoe on Australian Curculionide. 415

raised and impinged upon by the punctures; body beneath

and legs closely scaly.

A short species with a peculiarly sculptured prothorax.

MInrIA.

Rostrum cylindricum, crassiusculum; scrobes mediane, oblique.

Scapus antennarum clavatus ; funiculus brevis, articulo primo

crasso, secundo breviori, ceeteris transversis; clava magna, a funi-

culo distincta. Oculi rotundati. Prothorax transversus, basi

bisinuatus. Scutellum punctiforme. LHlytra modice convexa,

Femora incrassata; tibie flexuose, mutice ; tarsi modice lati;

unguiculi liberi. Mesosternum declive. Processus interfemoralis

latus, truncatus. Abdomen segmentis duobus basalibus ampli-

atis.

Owing to its small size I am not quite able to satisfy myself

as to all its characters; but its affinities appear to be between

Gonipterine and Hyperine. I place it with the former on

account of its thicker rostrum, but the facies is more that of

the Hyperine.

Minia opalescens.

M. ovata, fulvo-rufa, squamis viridescenti-cpalescentibus tecta ;

rostro capite paulo longiori. Long. 1 lin.

Hab. Clarence River.

About the size and shape of Tychius junceus; derm yel-

lowish rufous, closely covered above and beneath with greenish

opalescent scales nearly concealing the derm, but where the

scales have been rubbed off the prothorax appears to be

minutely punctured and the elytra striate-punctate ; club of

the antenne as long as the preceding six joints together ; first

three joints of the tarsi nearly equal in breadth.

Prophesia florea.

P. silacea, supra et in pedibus squamis argenteis adspersa et con-

densata ; elytris striato-punctatis, interstitiis elevatis, setigeris.

Long. 2 lin.

Hab. West Australia.

Brownish ochre, with silvery white scales scattered on the

prothorax and legs, but condensed into a semilunar line behind

the scutellum and on the suture posteriorly, also formmeg an

oblique band-like patch midway on the side, ascending to

near the line on the suture; elytra striate-punctate, interstices

raised, each having a row of sete ; punctures in the striz con-

416 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Australian Curculionide

spicuous, not approximate ; body beneath covered with silvery

scales. .

This and the other species of Prophesia are about the size

and shape of Hypera variabilis; but this is the only one with

raised interstices. The mesosternum is very slightly pro-

duced.

Aromagis horrens.

A. oblonga, fusca, squamis erectis adspersa; rostro breviusculo

basi excavato, versus apicem planato, utrinque tuberculis margi-

nato. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Victoria.

Oblong, dark brown, with stout erect scales, here and there

in tufts seated on tubercles ; head with a tuft over each eye;

rostrum rather short, excavated at the base, but becoming

flattish towards the apex, each side with a row of erect

tubercles; scrobe oblique, passing under the rostrum at a

short distance from the base; antenne short, stout ; protho-

rax convex, rugose, slightly channelled in the middle, each

side with two tufts placed transversely ; elytra concave along

the suture, bordered by an elevated line, on which are three

tufts, the posterior considerably larger, slighter tufts and single

scales at the sides; legs roughly tuberculate.

Shorter than A. echinata, ditferimg in its rostrum and the

obsolete punctuation of the elytra. Under a low power of the

microscope the parts between the tubercles have a silvery

tint.

Iphisaxus cethiops.

T, sat anguste ovatus, niger, obsolete squamosus ; prothorace granu-

lis subnitidis sat sparse instructo; elytris regione suturali sub-

planatis, punctisque seriatim impressis. Long. 4—6 lin.

Hab. West Australia.

Rather narrowly oblong, dull black; scales scarcely appa-

rent ; head with five or six large granules on each side, and

numerous minute ones between them; rostrum rugosely im-

pressed in front; antenne slender, pitchy ; prothorax convex,

rounded at the sides, granules scarcely glossy, not closely

approximate ; elytra ovate, sutural region flattish, bounded

externally by a slightly raised tubercular line, the tubercles

larger posteriorly and accompanied by others at the sides,

punctures in rows, shallow, especially on the sutural region ;

body beneath with scattered greyish scales, and punctured,

each puncture bearing an elongate scale; legs with setiform

scales.

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Australian Curculionids. 417

A dull brownish-black species. It is differentiated from

I. asper by its coloration and much more coarsely granulated

prothorax. Iphisaxus, with its comparatively short metaster-

num, hardly agrees with Aterpine, yet there seems to be no

place for it among any of Lacordaire’s “ tribes” with a long

metasternum.

Rhinoplethes ignavus.

f. obovatus, piceo-fuscus; prothorace rugoso-punctato; elytris

seriatim foveatis ; antennis brevibus, funiculi articulo ultimo valde

transverso. Long. 4 lin.

Hab, Champion Bay.

Obovate, pitchy brown, above with a few narrow erect

scales ; rostrum stout, tricarinated anteriorly towards the apex ;

antenne short, stout, the last joint of the funicle nearly as

broad as the club; prothorax coarsely punctured ; elytra with

large shallow foves arranged in rows; body beneath and legs

covered with brownish scales and with black sete interspersed.

This species differs from 2. foveatus in colour, sculpture,

and shorter antennw. In that species, owing to their closeness,

the fovee assume a hexagonal form, giving the surface a

reticulated appearance.

Rhinaria tessellata.

R. oblonga, pallide griseo-squamosa ; elytris sat sparse nigro-tessel-

latis; rostro glabro, antice rotundato, scrobe transversa; tibiis

anticis rectis. Long. 7-8 lin.

Hab. West Australia.

Oblong, covered with pale greyish scales, the elytra rather

sparingly sprinkled with squarish black spots; rostrum

straight, glabrous, glossy black, the scrobe transverse, lying

almost directly beneath the eye, the divided lobe between the

eyes continued to the rostrum, where it _joms the bump be-

tween the insertions of the antenne; the latter slender, the

scape not much longer than the first joint of the funicle; club

pointed ; prothorax longer than broad, slightly produced in

front, rounded at the sides, covered with numerous small

glossy black granules, the scales between mostly brownish,

but some forming three pale diverging stripes ; scutellum small,

densely covered with pure white scales; elytra less than three

times the length of the prothorax, much broader than the

latter at the base, striate, the interstices slightly raised, each

with a line of glossy black granules; body beneath and legs

with closely set greyish scales ; fore tibie straight.

This species has the outline of £. stedlio, but differs in its

418 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Australian Curculionide.

transverse scrobe and short scape, as also in its straight fore

tibie. I find &. stellio to vary in colour from a clean to

a dirty white (as in the type), lightly spotted with ochre-

yellow, which, in one specimen, is the predominant colour.

Rhinaria signifera.

R. oblonga, supra squamis fulvis brunneisque vestita; prothorace

utrinque, elytris fascia juxta mediam, albis; lobo inter oculos

producto, bifido. Long. 6 lin.

Hab. Australia (interior).

Oblong, covered above with fulvous scales, passing into

brown atthe base of the elytra and on the prothorax, the latter

with the sides white, a broad band of the same colour just

before the middle of the elytra; front between the eyes with

a prominent bifid lobe ; rostrum brownish black, scarcely ex-

cavated anteriorly, scrobe short, transverse ; antenne rather

elongate, the scape shortish ; prothorax longer than broad,

narrowed at the apex, granules numerous, glossy black ; scu-

tellum subcordate, scaly, white; elytra broadest at the base,

seriate-punctate, interstices raised, each with a row of glossy

granules, punctures between the interstices partially masked

by the scales ; body beneath and legs covered with greyish

scales ; fore tibie nearly straight.

This species is allied to &. myrrhata ; but, besides the dif-

ferent colour, the latter has the interocular lobe cleft into three

ortions, the lower portion, however, being indistinctly divi-

sible into three, or five in all.

Rhinaria cavirostris.

R. anguste oblonga, squamis subaureis vestita ; rostro brevi, antice

valde excavato ; scrobe profunda, apice incipiente, versus oculum

valde ampliata. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Queensland.

Narrowly oblong, covered with yellowish, under a strong

lens somewhat golden, scales; lobe between the eyes promi-

nent, rounded, entire ; rostrum nearly glabrous, short, deeply

excavated in front, bounded on each side by a sharp ridge,

scrobe beginning near the apex, deeply impressed and ex-

panding towards the eye; antenne pitchy, first joint half as

short again as the scape and of the two next together; pro-

thorax longer than broad, anterior margin not narrower than

the posterior, granules irregularly seattered ; scutellum sub-

triangular, scaly white; elytra striate, interstices slightly

raised, each with a row of somewhat distant granules, the

<<“

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Australian Curculionide. 419

strie with large approximate punctures, each with a scale at

the base; body beneath and legs closely covered with greyish

scales.

A small narrow species, remarkable for the form of its

scrobes.

Rhinaria diversa.

ft. anguste oblonga, squamis sordide griseis tecta; rostro brevius-

culo, antice excavato ; scrobe profunda, angusta, apice incipiente,

postice subito inflexa. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. West Australia.

Narrowly oblong, sparingly covered with dull greyish

mixed with brown scales ; rostrum rather short, concave

anteriorly, each side of the concavity bounded by a prominent

ridge; scrobe deep, narrow, beginning at the apex and sud-

denly bent inwards at the base; antenne inserted nearly in

the middle of the scrobe; scape short, but a little longer than

the first joint of the funicle, the seventh confounded with the

club; prothorax subglobose, closely punctured, the intervals

granuliform ; scutellurm subovate, covered with white scales ;

elytra slightly broader than the prothorax, striate, the strize

indistinctly punctured, interstices moderately raised and_bear-

ing a row of flat glossy black granules; body beneath and

legs with dispersed silvery scales.

A narrow form like the preceding, but differing in the pro-

thorax, scrobe, distinct club, &c. Schénherr separated his

Pelororhinus from Kirby’s Rhinaria, but he afterwards united

them, as Lacordaire thinks, wrongly. The latter, however

was acquainted with but few species, and it is now difficult to

satisfactorily differentiate the two. In the Munich Catalogue

Pelororhinus granulosus of Fahreeus is referred to Rhinaria.

Ethemaia angusticollis.

E. oblonga, obscure fusca; capite angusto, inter oculos depresso ;

rostro elongato, antice tricarinato et tuberculato; prothorace sub-

cylindrico, rugoso. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Cape York.

Narrowly oblong, dull brown; head narrow, continuous

with the rostrum, flat between the eyes; rostrum elongate,

three raised tuberculate lines anteriorly ; antenne: somewhat

slender, and scape ferruginous at the base; prothorax narrow,

subcylindrical, rugose above ; scutellum wedge-shaped ; elytra

much broader than the prothorax, the shoulders tuberculate,

420 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Australian Curculionide.

seriate-punctate, the third interstice towards the apex raised

and bituberculate, the fifth interstice also raised and with

three tubercles or callosities; legs with appressed whitish

sete.

With a narrower prothorax this species has a longer and

more slender rostrum than any of its congeners.

Ethemaia curtula.

E. ovata, griseo-squamosa, setifera; capite inter oculos depresso ;

rostro crasso, basi bilobo; prothorace latiore; elytris striato-

punctatis. Long. 3 lin.

Hab. West Australia.

Ovate, closely covered with pale greyish scales; head de-

pressed between the eyes; rostrum stout, the base with two

raised lobes; antenne ferruginous ; prothorax not longer than

broad, roughly and unequally punctured ; scutellum slightly

oblong 5 elytra short, somewhat quadrangular, striate-punctate,

third and fifth interstices raised and tubereulate posteriorly as in

the last, punctures large, subapproximate ; body beneath and

legs scaly, the latter with numerous setz.

“The short elytra and uniform colour differentiate this species

from L. sellata, which has also a bilobed rostrum.

; HYPHARIA.

Characteres wt in Ethemaia, sed tarsi articulo tertio integro.

This genus has all the characters, including the facies, of

Ethemaca, with the exception of the third tarsal jomt, which

is entire, not bilobed. The general absence of correlation of

arts in the Coleoptera, especially in the Curculionidae, neces-

sarily leads to the multiplication of genera, of which there are

about 9000 for ten times that number of species.

LHypheria assimilis.

H, oblonga, fusca, griseo-squamosa; elytris tuberculis, squamis

suberectis nigris coronatis, instructis. Long. 23—3 lin.

Hab. Gayndah.

Oblong, brown, closely covered with greyish scales ; rostrum

continuous with the head, broadly concave anteriorly ; head

concave in front, the side slightly projecting over the eye,

which has also a similar projection beneath ; club of the an-

tenne shortly ovate; prothorax rather longer than broad,

coarsely punctured, broadly concave in the middle ; scutellum

oblong ; elytra parallel at the sides, abruptly declivous be-

hind, unequally punctured, with two rows of tubercles, four

on each row, tubercles crowned with black semierect scales ;

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on Australian Curculionide. 421

anterior tibia subflexuous, thicker towards the base, the apex

in all fringed with black conical scales.

MYARDA.

Caput angustum. Oculi grosse granulati. Rostrwm breve, cras-

sum, apice dilatatum; scrobes apicales, flexuose, infra oculos

terminantes. Antenne breviuscule, tenuate ; fumculus septem-

articulatus ; clava ovata, distincta. Prothoraw basi bisinuatus.

Scutellum distinctum, Llytra prothorace latiora, subparallela,

apice abrupte declivia. Femora in medio incrassata ; tibiee rectee ;

tarsi angusti, articulo tertio integro; unguculi Tibest diver-

gentes. “Pro- eb mesosterna prominentia. Abdomen segmentis

duobus basalibus ampliatis.

This genus agrees with the Aterpine in its abnormal ros-

trum (its peculiarities are specific) and mutic tibix, the pos-

terior with open corbels; it disagrees in its narrow tarsi,

the third joint not divided, as in Hy ypherta, and the antero-

inferior margin of the pectus entire. Aparete (Linn. Soc.

Journ. x. p. 165), although very different in general appear-

ance, 1s separated by its flexuous anterior tibie, and seventh

joint of the funicle not distinct from the club.

Myarda ferrugata.

M. sat breviter ovata, silacea, setis reflexis adspersa ; crista supra

oculum ad apicem rostri protensa ; elytris leviter striato-punctatis,

postice tuberculis sex munitis. Long. 37 lin.

Hab. Nicol Bay.

Rather shortly ovate, yellowish brown, with scattered, re-

flexed, almost procumbent sete ; head deeply concave in front,

an elevated crest above each eye, continued to the apex of

the rostrum, forming a groove between them continuous with

the concavity on the head ; scrobe beginning at the apex, and

visible from above; eyes nearly round, but in contact with

a rounded ledge below’; two basal joints of the funicle about

equal in length ; prothorax subtransverse, regularly punc-

tured, shghtly angulate at the sides; elytra much broader

than the prothorax, striate-punctate, the interstices scarcely

raised, except towards the apex, the abrupt portion with three

tubercles or callosities on each side, punctures shallow and

not approximate ; body beneath and legs yellowish brown ;

posterior coxe widely apart.

422 Geological Society.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.

GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

November 7, 1883.—J. W. Hulke, Esq., F.R.S.,

President, in the Chair.

The folowing communications were read :—

1. ‘ Notes on Brocchi’s Collection of Subapennine Shells.” By

J. Gwyn Jeffreys, Esq., LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S.

In this paper the author gave the results of an examination of

the collection of fossil shells from the Subapennine Pliocene described

by Brocchi in his ‘Conchiologia fossile Subapennina,’ and now pre-

served in the Museo Civico at Milan. He stated that the collection

appeared to have been more or less tampered with, several species

are unrepreseuted, and in other cases the specimens on the tablets

with Brocchi’s labels have evidently been subsequently and erro-

neously placed in their present situation. There are, however,

many undoubted types. The author cited 55 of Brocchi’s species,

upon most of which the collection furnished more or less interesting

information. In conclusion he remarked upon the importance of

identifying Brocchi’s species with forms still living in the neigh-

bouring seas, and also upon the difficulty of distinguishing between

the Upper, Middle, and Lower Pliocene in Italy. From his exami-

nation of Italian Pliocene shells he concluded that the deposits con-

taining them were for the most part formed in comparatively shallow

water, probably not more than 50 fathoms in depth, a remark which

also applies to the Italian Miocene; and that in the case of species

still existing no difference can be recognized between Pliocene and

recent specimens.

2. “British Cretaceous Nuculide.” By John Starkie Gardner,

Esq., F.G.S.

The author commenced by discussing the question whether the

Nuculidee should be separated as a family from the Arcide, and

stated that species of Leda and Nucula exist and sometimes abound

in the marine Cretaceous deposits, with the exception of the White

and the Red Chalk, from which, however, he thought that the

shells may have been dissolved out. He also referred to the pro-

bable derivation of the’species from preexisting forms, and discussed

the question of how far the relationships thus established could be

expressed in the nomenclature of the species, his researches upon

the Nuculidze leading him in some cases to suggest a trinomial

nomenclature. The probable lines of descent of the shells described

in the present paper were also discussed at some length.

In the genus Nucula the author distinguished certain groups

typified by particular species, his trinomial system of nomenclature

consisting in the intercalation of the names of the latter between

the generic name and the definitive specific name of the individual

Miscellaneous. 423

species. These groups, with their included species, were as

follows :— i

Group OvaTz.

OvaT& La&vieat® :—Nucula ovata, Mant., Gault; WV. obtusa,

Sow., Blackdown; WV. planata, Desh., Neocomian ; NV. cap-

seformis, Mich., Gault.

Ovarm ReEricuLATH: N. Metjert, sp. n., Blackdown; NV. arduen-

nensis, Orb., pumila, var. noy., Gault.

Group [upress®.

NV. albensis, Orb., Gault; WV. impressa, Sow., Blackdown; J.

Cornueliana, Orb., Neocomian; NV. simplex, Desh., Neo-

comian.

Group ANGULATZ.

ANGULATH PECTINATA :—NV, pectinata, Sow., Gault; N. pectinata

crete, sp. n., Grey Chalk; N. bivirgata, Sow., Gault; LN.

antiquata, Sow., Blackdown.

ANGULATA L&VIGATH :—V. gaultina, sp. n.

Of the genus Leda no formal grouping was proposed; ten

British Cretaceous species were described. In conclusion, the ~

author discussed the stratigraphical distribution of the species

of the two genera.

Dr. Gwyn Jurrreys doubted the necessity of forming a separate

family of Nuculide. He included them in the Arcide. He had

examined the Gault collection of Mr. Gardner, which appeared to

contain ten times as many species as had already been described

from that formation. He considered that the Gault Nuculide

lived at a depth of from 50 to 100 fathoms, and this view was

confirmed by the nature of the materials forming the Gault clay.

Prof. T. Rupert Jonss said that in many parts the Gault swarms

with Microzoa, and these seemed to confirm Dr. Gwyn Jeffreys’s

view that the Gault was formed at a depth of about 100 fathoms.

The Avrnor thought that the limited area covered by the true Gault

clays and the presence of coniferous wood and fruits pointed to the

conclusion that the Gault was an estuarine deposit. He believed

the evidence indicated that the Gault was deposited in a gradually

deepening sea.

MISCELLANEOUS.

Ou the Internal Sacculina, « new Stage in the Development of

Sacculina Carcini. By M. Yves Drtace.

Wen, in studyimg the embryogeny of Sacculina, one seeks on

erabs for smaller and smaller individuals, one is soon struck by the

424 Miscellaneous.

fact that no Sacculine are to be found of a less size than about

3 millim. I have examined several thousand infested crabs without

ever finding a smaller Sacculina. The embryogeny of Sacculina and

of the other Rhizocephala not being known, one could only form

hypotheses as to their development; and the hypothesis generally

accepted is that the Cypridian larva of the parasite attaches itself

by the head to the abdomen of the crab, loses its limbs, and insinu-

ates into the tissues of its victim a part of its head, from which

spring tubes which invade the whole of the crab. MM. Giard has

even gone so far as to specify the facts, asserting that the parasite

was formed during the copulation of the crabs. If this was true

the fact that I have pointed out would be truly inexplicable, for

between a Sacculina of 3 millim. and a Cypris of not more than 0°2

millim. in length there is a whole series of intermediate states which

ought to be found. Moreover the smallest Sacculine are already

like the adults, and have nothing in common with an active animal,

or even with one capable of locomotion. How, then, could the para-

site come thus completely formed from without? The answer is

easy. It does not come from without, but from within. Before

showing itself externally the Sacculina already exists in the abdo-

men of the crab, between the intestine and the wall of the body. It

exists thus complete, with its sac, its ovaries, its accessory glands,

its testes, and its nervous system, and it is only by increasing in size

that it produces by compression necrosis of the integuments of the

crab, thinning and finally rupturing them to break through to the

outside.

In the youngest state in which one can find it, the anternal Sac-

culinu consists of a membrane in the form of a flattened sac, stretched

between the intestine and the abdominal wall of the crab in the

general body-cavity, in the midst of a cellulo-adipose tissue. From

the whole of its surface, but especially from its irregularly sinuous

margins, issue tubes which, even at this period, have completely

invaded the crab. The wall of the membrane is clothed with a

thin chitinous layer and formed of large cells with voluminous

nuclei, The interior is formed of stellate cells, the processes of

which, anastomosing with each other, convert the whole into a sort

of cavernous connective tissue, the innumerable cavities of which all

communicate with one another. The large parietal cells are con-

tinued into the tubes. In its median region the membrane, instead

of remaining thin, becomes suddenly thickened, and forms a sort of

tumour upon its surface. In the midst of the abundant cavernous

tissue which fills this swelling there is a spherical aggregation of

small cells, to which I give the name of nucleus. The “coll s of the

nucleus are arranged so as to form a central mass, separated by a

narrow space from an enveloping layer. At this period the entire

Sacculina is not more than + millim. broad; the nucleus is hardly

0-05 millim. in diameter ; and yet every thing that will constitute

the adult Sacculina is represented in it. The membrane, with its

cavernous tissue, will form the basilar membrane ; the nucleus will

form the eaternal Sacculina; in this nucleus the spherical layer of

Miscellaneous. 425

cells represents the sac, and the central aggregation the future

visceral mass.

It is to be remarked, that at this moment all the cells of the

nucleus are identical. None of them has become differentiated,

either in its nature or in its position. In consequence of transfor-

mations that I have been able to follow step by step, and which

will be described in detail in a memoir of which these notes are only

a precursor, we see successively formed in the nucleus all the parts

of the adult Sacculina. In the peripheral layer the cells increase

in number, those of the margins become elongated radially, anasto-

mose, and form sheaves of connective tissue; the more central ones

become elongated and anastomose tangentially, and form muscular

fibres. In the central aggregation the peripheral layers undergo an

analogous transformation to form the wall of the visceral mass; of

the interior cells some become elongated and anastomose to form

the transverse muscular planes, while the others, arranged in two

symmetrical groups, remain rounded and furnish the ova, as well

as the testicular cells.

Before these modifications are completed we observe the forma-

tion, in the portion of the cavernous tissue which separates the

nucleus from the wall of the membrane, of two parallel and con-

tiguous planes of cells, placed transversely with regard to the axis

of the crab. These cells soon secrete between them a plate of

chitine, which splits. The cleft opens and gives access to the

nucleus outside the cavity of the tumour in which it was contained,

The nucleus gradually pushes itself outwards and comes into con-

tact with the integuments of the crab. Here it still continues to

enlarge, becoming developed and gradually acquiring the characters

of the young external Saceulina. Finally, when it has attained the

dimensions of 2:5—3 millim., it bursts the integuments of the crab

and presents itself outside. Becoming an external Saceulina it then

constitutes those young parasites, the smallest that we can see ex-

ternally under the abdomen of the crabs. The orifice of issue

soon becomes regular and all trace of rupture disappears ; but in

the interior of the crab there still remain the sucking-tubes and the

flattened pit ( fosse) from which the nucleus has issued, and which

will form the basilar membrane that we have indicated in the

adult.

Complementary males.—At the moment when the Sacculina has

just become external the orifice of its cloaca is closed, and a thin

chitinous membrane, attached to the periphery of the latter, sur-

rounds it entirely. Ina little time this pellicle ruptures and re-

mains adherent only to the periphery of the cloaca. Young Cyprids

then come, and insinuating themselves beneath it, attach themselves

by their antenne to the margins of this orifice. The fact is con-

stant. All the young Sacculinee have Cyprids thus attached to their

cloaca. They rarely have only one, usually from two to five; and I

have found as many as twelve. This fact had never before been

ascertained in Sacculina, nor, so generally, in any Rhizocephale.

The presence of numerous Cyprids around the cloaca proves clearly

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. xii.

426 Miscellaneous.

that these creatures fulfil the function of males, as Fritz Miller

very distinctly perceived. Subsequently the cloacal pellicle is cast,

carrying with it the skins of the Cyprids, and the cloaca opens.—

Comptes Ltendus, November 5, 1883, p. 1012.

On the Fossil Flora of Greenland. By Prof. O, Herr.

Through the author’s researches 617 species of fossil plants are

now known from Greenland, of which 335 belong to the Cretaceous

and 282 to the Tertiary epoch. The Cretaceous plants occur in three

distinct stages, described as the beds of Kome, Atane, and Patoot.

in the Kome beds vascular Cryptogamia (especially G'leichenie)

and Gymnosperms (namely 10 Cycadezx, forms analogous to the

Zamie, and 21 Conifers, including 5 Sequoiw) are found almost

exclusively. The Dicotyledones are represented only by a single

species, Populus primeva. The general character of the flora of these

deposits, which may be compared with the Urgonian strata, indi-

cates a subtropical climate.

In the Atane beds there occur, besides vascular Cryptog amia

(some of which are arborescent) and Gymnosperms (8 Cycade,

27 Conifers; among others Cycas Steenstrupi with well-developed

carpels), 90 species of Dicotyledones, the appearance of which was

very sudden. Here also the flora indicates a subtropical climate.

The Atane beds may be compared with the Cenomanian strata.

In the Patoot beds 20 vascular Cryptogamia, 18 Gymnosperms,

5 Monocotyledonee, and 66 Dicotyledonesee have been found.

Among the Conifers the most abundant species is Sequoia concinna,

Heer (branches and fruits), nearly related to the Tertiary Sequoia

Couttsie ; Sequoia Langsdorfii, Brgr., a Tertiary species, is also

frequently met with. The Dicotyledons consist of birches, alders,

elms, fig-trees, walnuts, oaks, and planes (the last two genera in

great numbers); then come laurels, cinnamons, aralias, magnolias,

we. &e. The Patoot beds also contain marine animals, which en-

able us to make an exact comparison with the deposits of other

countries, and approximate them to the Upper Senonian of Europe,

consequently to the Upper Chalk.

The Tertiary flora of Greenland is derived either from an Eocene

deposit or from Lower Miocene beds. It includes in all 282 species,

2 of which also appear in the Chalk; 20 others are derived from

Cretaceous plants, but the rest show no relationship to the Creta-

ceous flora. Moreover, tropical forms are entirely wanting, so that

the climate had been profoundly modified; the mean temperature

of the year in Greenland at es epoch of the Lower Miocene must

have been about 12° C. (=53°°6 F.), as evidenced by the presence

of two fan-palms, Magnolia, Saar Dalbergia, &c. The Tertiary

flora of Greenland has 114 species like those of Europe. — Bibl.

Univ., Arch. des Sct. October 15, 1883, p. 355.

On the Pelagic Fauna of the Swiss Lakes.

By Dr. O. E. Inaor,

The author gives a brief summary of the investigations hitherto

Miscellaneous. 427

made in the Swiss lakes, from which it appears that up to the

present time there have been found more Entomostraca than true

pelagic animals. He then describes the results of his own researches

upon several of the lakes. He has found nine new representatives

of the pelagic fauna, of microscopic dimensions it is true, but, like

the Crustacea, represented by a great number of individuals. Among

the Protozoa he cites the four following species, two of which belong

to new forms :-—

Mastigophora: Flagellata—Dinobryon sertularia, Ehr.

7 divergens, Imh.

Peridinium tubulatum, Ehr.

Ceratium reticulatum, Imh.

Ciliflagellata

Also two new species of Infusoria which live attached to Crustacea,

namely :—

Epistylis lacustris, Tmh.

Acineta elegans, Imh.

Among the Vermes, and especially in the class of Rotatoria, six

different forms have likewise been observed :—

Conochilus volvox, Ehr.

Asphanema helvetica, Imh.

Anurca longispina, Imh.

spmosa, Imh.,

Triarthra, sp.

Polyarthra, sp.

In all therefore twelve species, seven of which are quite new.

Dr. Imhof characterizes the true pelagic forms by means of the

following two principal remarks :—

1. The animals which are truly pelagic from their birth to their

death always swim freely in the water, never going either to the

shore or to the bottom of the lake, and never touching the surface

of the water, so as to avoid coming directly in contact with the

atmospheric air.

2. The true pelagic animals carry their ova (with the exception of

the winter-ege) either attached to the exterior of the body or in a

sort of incubatory cavity until the young individual, whether imme-

diately like its mother or subject to transformation, can quit the

envelope of the egg or the incubatory cavity, and lead at once the

mode of existence of an accomplished swimmer.

The author has studied the pelagic fauna of the following lakes :—

Zurich, Zug, des Quatre-Cantons, Egeri, Katzen, Greifen, Maggiore,

Lugano, Como, and Garda,.—Bibl. Univ., Arch, des Sci. October

15, 1883, p. 349.

INDEX To

VOL. XII.

ACACALLIS, characters of the new

genus, 96,

Acriea, new species of, 105.

Actinology of the Atlantic Ocean,

contributions to the, 361.

Actinospheerium Eichhornii,observa-

tions on, 206.

Acythopeus, new species of, 100.

Agaricus, new British species of,

372,

Arion, new species of,

Alena, new species of, 103.

Anchinia, on the anatomy and affi-

nities of, 1.

Animals, on radial and _ bilateral

symmetry in, 69,

Anomalochrysa, characters of the

new genus, 298.

Aphis, on the biological evolution of,

of the Eln-tree, 282,

Apoderus, new species of, 91.

Archer, Mr.,on Nephrocytium Agard-

hianum, 125; on a new species of

Cosmarium, 124; onthe zyg rospore

of Cosmarium cucurbita, 127.

Aromagis, new species of, "416.

Asterias, new species of, 333.

Asteroidea, on new species of, 333,

Asytesta, new species of, 100.

Attelabus, new species of, 90.

Auxicerus, characters of the

genus, 587.

Balaninus, new species of, 91.

Barrois, J.,on the genus Anchinia, 1.

Batrachians, new, 161.

Beddard, F. E., on some Earthworms

from India, 213.

Belenois, new species of, 389.

Bell, Prof. F. J., on new species of

Asteroidea, 533.

Berkeley, Rev. M, J., on British

Fungi, 570.

Books, new :—Woodward’s Young

Collector's Handbook of Shells,

65; Schmidt’s Monograph of the

Russian Leperditiz, 129; Pro-

ceedings of the Bristol Naturalists’

Society, 155; Journa of the Royal

929

aD Pa

new

Geological Society of Ireland, 154;

Transactions of the Geological So-

ciety of Glasgow, 154; Neumayr’s

Nomenclator | Paleontologi icus, 157;

Burmeister’s Bartenwale der ar-

gentinischen Kiisten, 190; Har-

rington’s Life of Sir W. E. Logan,

196; Packard’s North-American

Phyllopod Crustacea, 199; Dob-

son’s Monograph of the Insectivora,

204; Mason’s Minute Structure of

the Central Nervous System of

certain Reptiles “and Batrachians,

270; Memoirs of the Geological

Survey of India, 274.

Boulenger, (. A., on new species of

Reptiles and Batrachians, 161; on

the Lizards of the genus Lopho-

enathus, 225; on the Nyctisaura,

Brain, on the answerable divisions

of the, in Vertebrates and Inver-

tebrates, 3 303.

Broome, C. E., on British Fungi,

370.

Brugnonia pulchella, note on, 67.

Bryozoa, on fossil Chilostomatous,

64.

Bufo, new species of, 163.

Bunotheria, on the mutual relations

of the, 20.

Butler, A. G., on Lepidoptera from

Formosa, 50; on Lepidoptera from

the Victoria Nyanza, 101; on new

species of Milionia, 107; on new

Lepidoptera, 158; on new Lepido-

ptera from the Viti Islands, 389.

Byrsia, characters of the new genus,

95.

Calcispongia, on

structure of, 26.

Caranx, on a case of commensalism

of a, and a Crambessa, 264.

Carnivora Fissipedia, on the syste-

matic relations of the, 112.

Carpenter, P. H., on a new Crinoid,

143.

Carter, H. J., on the microscopic

the microscopic

INDEX. 429

structure of fossil Calcispongia,

26; on the presence of starch-

granules in the ovum of the ma-

rine Sponges, and on the ovigerous

layer of Suberites domuncula, 30;

on new genera and species of

Spongida, 308; on spicules of

Spongilla in the diluvium of the

Altmuhl valley, Bavaria, 329.

Catochrysops, new species of, 389,

Chysopa, new species of, 300,

Cionus, new species of, 93.

Codonella, new species of, 85.

Coleoptera, new, 88, 335, 387; on

rudimentary wings in the, 108; of

North America, on the classifica-

tion of the, 167.

Conn, H. W., on radial and bilateral

symmetry in animals, 69.

Cope, E. D., on the mutual relations

of the Bunotherian Mammalia, 20 ;

on the systematic relations of the

Carnivora Fissipedia, 112.

Coral-reefs of Cuba, on the elevated,

283.

Corethra, observations on the genus,

385.

Coscinoderma, description of the new

genus, 309,

Cosmarium, new species of, 124.

Crag Mollusca, notes on, 66, 143,

208.

Crambessa mosaica, on urticating

cells in the disk of, 259 ; on a case

of commensalism in, 264.

Crinoidea, on the organization of the,

358.

Crosby, W. O., on the elevated Coral-

reets of Cuba, 283.

Cryptopsophis, characters of the new

genus, 166,

Culcita, new species of, 354.

Curculionidz, new generaand species

of, 88, 412.

Cynips saltatorius, remarks on, 142.

Cyttarocylis, new species of, 83.

Dawkins, Prof. W. B., on the dis-

covery of Ovibos moschatus in the

Forest-bed, 128.

Delage, Y., on a new stage in the de-

velopment of Sacculina Carcini,

425.

Dewitz, Dr. H., on rudimentary wings

in the Coleoptera, 108.

Dipaltosternus, new species of, 98.

Diphilus, characters of the new genus,

97.

Distant, W. L., on Malayan Ento-

mology, 241, 351.

Doliolum, observations on, 1.

Dublin Microscopical Club, proceed-

ings of the, 123.

Duncan, Prof. P. M., on Lindstrém’s

contributions to the Actinology of

the Atlantic Ocean, 361. ;

Earthworms, new genera and species

of, 213.

Ectyon, new species of, 310.

Kctyonopsis, description of the new

genus, 315,

Elipsocus, new species of, 228,

Elymnias, new species of, 351.

Entomostraca, on palzeozoic

other bivalved, from

Russia, 243 ;

247.

Epyrgis, new species of, 160.

Hstheria, on some species of, 244,

Ethemaia, new species of, 419.

Eugnoristus, new species of, 100.

Fabularia, on dimorphism in, 68,

Fauna, on the pelagic, of the Swiss

lakes, 426.

Fish mortality in the Gulf of Mexico,

355,

Flints, on the detection of Polycys-

tina in certain nodular, 52.

Flora, on the fossil, of Greenland,

426.

Fol, Dr. H., on the Tintinnodea,

73.

Foraminifera, on the dimorphism of

the, 67.

Foulke, S. G., on Actinospherium

Kichhornii, 206.

Fungi, notices of British, 370,

Galls, on jumping, 140.

Gardner, J.S., on British Cretaceous

Nuculide, 422.

Geological Society, proceedings of

the, 63, 128, 422.

Guard-polyps, on, 250.

Gynaria, characters of the new genus,

89.

Haly, A., on the occurrence of Rhi-

nodon typicus on the west coast

of Ceylon, 48.

Heer, Prof. G., on the fossil flora of

Greenland, 426,

Hilgendorf, M., on two new Fresh-

water Sponges, 120.

Homoptera, new, 242.

Hudlestone, W. H., on fossils from

West Australia, 64.

and

Siberian

from Spitzbergen,

450

Humbert, Dr. F., on Lucilia macel-

laria infesting man, 353,

Hyla, new species of, 164.

Hyliota, observations onthe genus, 210.

Hynobius, new species of, 165.

Hypercompa, new species of, 106.

Hypheria, characters of the new

genus, 420.

Hypolimnas, new species of, 102.

Imhof, Dr. O. E., on the pelagic

fauna of the Swiss Lakes, 426.

Iphisaxus, new species of, 416.

Isabarta, new species of, 160,

Ismene, new species of, 391.

Tsomerinthus, new species of, 88.

Ixias, new species of, 551.

Jeffreys, Dr. J. Gwyn, on Mediter-

ranean Mollusca, 67; on the Mol-

lusca in the Fisheries Exhibition,

with description of a new species

of Pleurotoma, 116; on the ‘‘ Crag

Mollusea,” 143; on subapennine

shells, 422.

Joliet, L., on blastogenesis and alter-

nation of generations in the Salpe

and Pyrosomata, 70.

Jones, T. R., on the paleozoic bi-

valved Entomostraca, 243.

Kowalevsky, A., on the genus An-

chinia, 1.

Laccaria, characters of the new

genus, 370.

LeConte and Horn’s (Drs.) classifica-

tion of the Coleoptera of North

America, observations on, 167.

Leidy,Prof.,onasocial Heliozoan, 209.

Lendenfeld, Dr. R. von, on guard-

polyps and urticating cells, 250.

Leperditia, new species of, 248.

Lepidoptera, new, 50, 101, 107, 158,

241, 351, 389.

Lepthemis, new species of, 229.

Leptops, new species of, 415.

Leptosoma, new species of, 161.

Leucophlceus, description of the new

genus, 523.

Lewis, G., on the genus Hyliota, 210.

Lichtenstein, J., on the biological

evolution of the Elm-tree Aphis,

282.

Lindstrém’s, Prof. G., contributions

to the Actinology of the Atlantic

Ocean, remarks on, 361.

Lipinia, new species of, 161.

Lophognathus, on the species of, 225.

Lucilia macellaria, observations on

the habits of, 555.

INDEX.

Lunel, G., on a case of commensa-

lism of a Caranx and a Crambessa,

264,

McCook, Rev. Dr. H. C., on the intel-

ligdnce of the American turret-

spider, 281.

McLachlan, R., on the Neuroptera

of the Hawaiian Islands, 226, 298.

Marshall, Dr. W., on some new sili-

ceous sponges, 391.

Matthews, Rev. A., on Drs. LeConte

and Horn’s classification of the

Coleoptera of North America, 167.

Megalagrion, characters of the new

genus, 237.

Megalops, new species of, 335.

Megalosaurus, on the skull of, 63.

ane affinis, observations on,

214,

Meinert, F., on Mochlonyx culici-

formis, 374.

Melanitis, new species of, 241.

Micro-paleontology, contributions

to, 285.

Miletus, new species of, 159,

Miliolites, on dimorphism in the, 68.

Milionia, new species of, 107.

Minia, characters of the new genus,

415.

Miocalles, new species of, 97.

Mochlonyx culiciformis, observations

on, 374,

Mollusca, notes on, 67, 116,

Monticulipora tumida, notes on, 291.

Munier-Chalmas, M., on the dimor-

phism of the Foraminifera, 67.

Musset, C.,on selenotropism in plants,

140.

Myarda, characters of the new genus,

21.

Myrina, new species of, 159.

Myriopoda, on the morphology of

the, 337.

Nanophyes, new species of, 94.

Nephrocytium Agardhianum, obser-

vations on, 123.

Neuroptera, on the classification of

the, 145; of the Hawaiian Islands,

on the, 226, 298.

Newberry, J.5S., on some fossil plants

from Northern China, 172.

Nicholson’s, Prof. H. A., contribu-

tions to micro-paleontology, 235.

Nomenclator Palzontologicus, on a

proposed new, 1387.

Nuculidee, on British Cretaceous,

422.

INDEX.

Nyctisaura, remarks on the, 308,

Oligotoma, new species of, 227.

Orthoptera, on the classification of

the, 145.

Osaces, characters of the new genus,

99,

Ovibos moschatus, on the discovery

of, in the Forest-bed, 128.

Owen, Prof. R., on the skull of Me-

galosaurus, 63; on the answerable

divisions of the brain in Verte-

brates and Invertebrates, 303.

Oyster, on the microscopic sexual

characteristics of the American,

Portuguese, and common edible,

37.

Packard, Dr. A. 8., Jun., on the

classification of the Orthoptera and

Neuroptera, 145; on the morpho-

logy of the Myriopoda, 537.

Papilio, new species of, 106.

Pascoe, F. P., on new genera and

species of Curculionids, 88; on

new Australian Curculionids, 412.

Pentellina, on dimorphism in, 67,

Perichzta, new species of, 216.

Perionyx, new species of, 217.

Perrier, E., on the organization of

the Crinoidea, 358. ;

Phakellia, new species of, 318.

Phloeodictyon, new species of, 526.

Phycopsis, description of the new

genus, 319.

Pintia, new species of, 160.

Plants, on selenotropism in, 140; on

some fossil, from Northern China,

172.

Pleurotoma, new species of, 120.

Plumularide, on the guard-animals

of the, 250.

Polycystina, on the detection of, in

certain nodular flints, 52.

Polyporus, new British species of,

373.

Potamolepis, description of the new

genus, 405,

Propheesia, new species of, 415.

Ptilocaulis, description of the new

genus, 321.

Purpura tetragona, notes on, 66, 143,

208.

Pyrops, new species of, 242.

Pyrosoma, observations on, 1; on

blastogenesis and alternation of

generations in, 70.

Rappia, new species of, 163,

Reptiles, new, 161, 225, 308.

431

Rhacophorus, new species of, 162.

Rhaphidiophrys, new species of, 209,

Rhinaria, new species of, 417.

Rhinodon typicus, on the occurrence

of, on the west coast of Ceylon,

48.

Rhinoplethes, new species of, 417.

Riley, C. V., on jumping seeds and

galls, 140.

Ryder, J. A., on the microscopic

sexual characteristics of the Ame-

rican, Portuguese, and common

edible oyster of Hurope, 37.

Sacculina Carcini, on a new stage in

the development of, 423.

Salpze, on blastogenesis and alterna-

tion of generations in the, 70.

Schlumberger, M., on the dimorphism

of the Foraminifera, 67.

Scolopendrella, on the structure and

systematic position of, 53.

Scortizus cucullatus, note on, 388.

Shells, on Brocchi’s collection of sub-

apennine, 422,

Spelerpes, new species of, 165.

Spider, on the intelligence of the

American Turret-, 281.

Sponges, on the structure of some

fossil, 26; on the presence of

starch-granules in the ovum of

marine, 30; on two new fresh-

water, 120; new genera and species

of, 308, 391.

Spongilla, new species of, 120; on

spicules of, in the diluvium of the

Altmiuhl valley, Bavaria, 329.

Stenocorynus, new species of, 89.

Stenopora Howsii, on the structure

of, 285.

Stereum, new British species, 374.

Stock, T., on the structure and affi-

nities of the genus Tristychius,

17.

Styreus, characters of the new genus,

413.

Suberites domuncula, on the ovige-

rous layer of, 34.

Tabulipora Uri, remarks on, 154,

295.

Tarentula arenicola, on the intelli-

gence of, 281.

Telchinia, new species of, 102.

Telephz, new species of, 99.

Tenaris, new species of, 241.

Teracolus, new species of, 103.

Tetraneura ulmi, on the complete

biological evolution of the, 282..

432

‘Thaumatocrinus renovatus, observa-

tions on, 145.

Tintinnodea, on the, 73.

Triloculina, on dimorphism in, 67.

Tristychius, on the structure and

affinities of, 177.

Tunicata, observations on some, 1.

Typhceus, new species of, 219.

Urticating cells, observations on, 260,

Vertebrates and Invertebrates, on the

answerable divisions of the brain

in, 303.

Walker, 8. T., on fish mortality in

the Gulf of Mexico, 555.

Wallich, Dr., on the detection of

Polycystina within the hermeti-

INDEX.

* s

/ Z

he’

cally closed cavities of certain

nodular flints, 52.

Waterhouse, C. O., on new species

of Megalops, 335 ; on a new genus

of Lucanoid Coleoptera, 387.

Waters, A. W., on fossil Chilosto-

matous Bryozoa, 64.

Wood, S. V., on the “Crag Mol-

lusca,” 66, 208.

Wood-Mason, J., on the structure

and systematic position of Scolo-

pendrella, 55.

Young, J.. on Ure’s “ Millepore,”

154, 295,

Ypthima, new species of, 50.

END OF THE TWELFTH VOLUME,

PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS,

RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET,

UGE LOPLI

Pigs: |

\ bes & At io ey 2

.} wr ana eg

>) \

Lip. Buguel Lares.

| Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. S$ Vol.12. PLL.

Anna Mag. Ne. flist. S & Vol. 22, PLT

Ann & Mag Wat. Hist 851612, Pl

= Le

SAS ge 6

Mintern Bros. sc.

“a

R.Mintern, del et lith.

Anw.& Mag Nat Hist. 8.5. Vol.12.PLY.

Mintern Bros .imp.

LL EMNOBIOS LICH NALS.

2. SPELERPES PERUVIANUS.

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist 8.5 Vol.12.PL VI

G.W. del . Geo.West'&.Sons imp.

Fossil Entomostraca from Suberva.

Ann& Mag Nat. Hist. & 5 Vol. 12. PU.VIL

14:

Ws Wiz

) 15a A 1a

Mantern Bros. imp.

F.E. Beddard, ad. nat.del.

Ann.& Mag Nat Hist. 85 Vot 12, PLY

M‘Farlane & Erskine, Lith™? Edin?

5Vols2. PLIX.

Ann & Mag. Nat Hist. §

si Sons Imp

Fossul Entomostraca from Sputzbergen.

CIEL, X.

7. Nat ° Hirst Bs

Ann & Ma

Wp.

Mintern Bros

HAN. del. BR. Mintern lith

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist). §. 5, VoU.12. Pu XL

H.1C del. 8. Mintern ith. Mintern Bros imp.

Ann.& Mag. Nat Hist. §.5.Vot.i2. PC XM.

t # nat. size,

( : ' StU

ee ee 2 of

H1I.C. del. R Mintern, hth. Mintern. Bros. imp.

Annk Mag Nat. Hist. 55, Voll? PLXUL «

Mantern Bros. se.

HI C.dd.

Ann & Mag. Nat. Mist. 5.5. Vol. 12. PLXIV.

i |

Naw!

Berries 45

Een

papain BAe

+ TO eee aed Vv

Mantern Bros. sc

,hth.

-Mintern.

: 2) (Put

7 ies) ey

na a2 he sata a i RA fa ay

mAh

Di a ee Ki

Shee cy AF _ 4 in ;

Mi ne

v i i

: if a " i :

TORT ena are eee

Porras hs nur dal § ne ; f y ‘a

hy saat ith hee vl fd ys eae ii :

Boy _ ne ; i? ‘ ae Wa, Ae

baa om

7 Lien G ha ; a rhe A ama! ei

ra wan i a, aa a a i

7 a

: Wy By

me a - mi om iA "

; ate i piesa nm

Alt - :

nis

car re

a "1 Wy

area Y

i ns

iv is ad a

{ iw 1 ae Ng i

yar Oy iy al a

n mh ", t j vi We ie A: (ae oa a is

“My ; Lon Bis, a : ey ' Tee us Wi 1) iy ' \ yy.

4s Vivi ‘ a Wy ih ; oe ae co ae an en Mi We iv m i

es. ue BOS Canale irae Me a ae

‘ A ae ae vee

mi any Pe Pein! a ry. ry : : , ~

F Rel a are ya's Ri My sh Re ie ie Pe) 2 ah

et ue >) nec fy Ay : 4 ¥ hia Ff e a Ba at de (om

: a ey De Ae a Ay xv a ae Bek a.

oi ye dit “pt vn : hae ae

: SN ast), (oe

—.

yah ay a aie Oe

2 Neer 2S aM an ae nN |

id iG) eit r., . wat a ue fee en i 7 } i

Aap on its ms) 7 Eat {= AN vi

roa i 7 is be, Y ; wk mae;

jn re he ut 4

Baie 4 cas ")

i ie

oe “y

4 te An, a

i a?

h By 'ss waa .

iM "y 7 “a ioe

ar i, *

ries a

Cn on a Ete

its ny | ks wy

; Pe _ ;

, me a) rie aes en): ay, Py Cee iu CANE oe, Me Misti

eM iis a ar Bik, Var | fe a ah Ma et yy

hen ne, fun Pi, a one

1 a ; are ec ee Ph M ne tt ae

eh fat AM i“ a a ay i a iy eri a me NIV? 14

Ns) ut! ait ve

1 ee ff

F i) nn AC - fi ahs y) *) aay

re 7 ot Aah SAC fi

HT i

iv} i,

a Wd Ch a ey 7 ‘bs

a Oh Jennie

Ria ig. fi.

iSync

ann ih Then j se} iyi Wy Wi i

ey iis es Ly hee

we P) ee PRON ei iW by hae ar are a iy

We Gi oun co a a qi i a Misa Pi ae if i

7 “ve i) He hae (Wy \YiGee ‘ i. A ere 5

ings} arty bi a ' Bane. Bey : i mA a

al nay H) 4 a ae ile ae 7

; A re Re ah i ne ‘ae

5 < A 7 Ma hil aid Py 7 ‘ al

iy (Ue ean

ve) ae si ny is a

ve piece

j ri

Bele Bila hn